2553ci Service Manual Rev-4

&6 2553ci/3253ci
3553ci/4053ci/5053ci
6053ci
PF-7100/7110/7120
DP-7100/7110/7120/7130
DF-7100/7110/7120/7130
AK-7110/MT-730(B)
BF-730/BF-9100
PH-7A/C/D/PH-7100/7120/7130
FAX System 12
Printing System 15
SERVICE MANUAL
Published in September 2019
Rev.4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
CONFIDENTIAL
FOR AUTHORIZED KYOCERA ENGINEERS ONLY. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE TO NON-AUTHORIZED PARTIES.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES

ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for
details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT.

METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux
de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Notation of products in the manual

For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed at A4.
Product name Print speed 100 V 120 V 220-240 V Australia
(Mono/ Color)
TASKalfa 6053ci High-end 60/ 55 sheets/min x x x x
model
TASKalfa 5053ci 50/ 50 sheets/min x x x x
TASKalfa 3553ci 30/ 30 sheets/min - x - -
TASKalfa 3253ci Low-end 32/ 32 sheets/min x x x x

model
Revision history
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Revision history
Revision Date Pages Revised contents
1 2018/12/11 1-5Page Add: Resolution (Reading)
1-6Page Correction: Resolution
1-9Page Correction:
High capacity paper feeder > Large capacity feeder
Side Deck > Side feeder
1-10Page Correction: (5-7), (5-8)

1-11Page 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)>DF-7120
4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120)>DF-7110
1-27Page Correction: large capacity feeder> side feeder
2-55Page Correction: (1-16) Booklet unit (BF-9100) add parts
4-158Page Add: Notes when attaching

4-159Page Correction: waste toner box unit
4-172Page
4-173Page
4-293Page Correction: step 6 to 11 of procedures

4-294Page
4-323Page Add:
4-332Page (10)Punch Unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) (Optional)
4-334Page (16)Finisher (DF-7130) (Optional)
(17)Booklet Unit (BF-9100) (Optional)
6-20Page Add: (11) Toner Log

Note of Item./ Serial Number
6-22Page Correction: Detail of service status page (3)
6-27Page Add: (47) Life counter

The first line: Color life
The third line: Maintenance kit A pre-set
6-213Page Add: U246 Purpose
6-215Page Correction: Data variation

6-216Page Setting: Punch Regist/ Punch Feed/ Width Front HP / Width Tail HP/ Shift
6-217Page Front HP / Shift Tail HP/ Staple HP/ Save Drum(2nd F)/ Save Drum(3rd C)/
Save Drum(2nd C)/ Front Bind Staple/ Back Bind Staple/ Punch(T) Resist/
6-217Page
Width Up HP / Width Down HP
6-219Page
6-220Page
7-119Page to Correction: (3) Jam Codes

7-272Page
8-147Page Add: YC22 to YC26

[CONFIDENTIAL]
Revision Date Pages Revised contents

2 2019/1/31 1-11Page Correction: (5-9) Number of sheets to limit
3-76Page Correction:
20 BF side registration sensor 1> BF side registration motor 1
21 BF side registration sensor 2> BF side registration motor 2
4-82Page Add: 1. Check and adjust the LSU unit.
4-275Page Add: Notes when attaching

4-279Page
6-20Page Correction: Detail
6-21Page Correction: (h) Replacement for maintenance Item
6-43Page Correction: Full (BOX Priority), Full (HyPAS Priority) Contents
3 2019/8/20 7-464Page Addition: F60X
7-301Page Correction: Model name in Measures
3-67Page Correction: Part number
3-86Page Correction: Part number
6-205Page Correction: Support model
6-205Page Correction: Support model
6-167Page Correction: On to Off
3-20Page Correction: Contents (5, 9, 16, 17, 18, 19)
3-143Page Correction: Illustration no.
4-297Page Correction: No. of screws, name of PWB
3-81Page Correction: Part name and content (7, 21)
3-81Page Correction: Part name (33)
3-83Page Correction: Part name (33)
8-27Page Correction: Content
6-205Page Correction: Content (Item: Match Pressure, Match Coro, Eject Guide, Tray
Eject Paddle, Bundle Up)
6-205Page Correction: Content (Eject Guide(REM), (RET)
4-223Page Addition: Note when replacing PWB (Each PWB (DP/DF/BF/PF)
3-76Page Correction: Part number and discription

3-89Page
3-51Page
7-450Page Addition: F053

7-456Page
7-378Page Correction: C7490
4 2019/9/20 6-10Page Addition: Unit History Report
6-184Page Addition: U203 Method: Result
3-24Page Correction: Part number indication (47: Exit reversing sensor)

Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their
customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to
read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before
engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent
damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with
warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with
warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is shown
inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock. Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet. Always ground the copier.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet:
they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for
the rated current.
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric
shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric
shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for
telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities.
CAUTION
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury.
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock.
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This may
cause fire.
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as
possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance.
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it.
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause the copier
to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury.
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally ingested,
drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention.
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook.
2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly.
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures.
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and
protective circuits.
• Always use parts having the correct specifications.
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure when
replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident.
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part,
always use the correct scale and measure carefully.
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection.
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it is dirty,
clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock.
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may damage
eyesight.
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if
handled improperly.
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely secured
so they will not be caught in rotating sections.
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts.
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot.
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause abnormally
high temperatures.
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement.
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them;
always hold the plug itself.
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a cable cover
or other appropriate item.
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks.
• Remove toner completely from electronic components.
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged.
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were removed, have
been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and missing
screws.
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary.
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below:
• Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
• Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
• Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch on.
• Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a
furnace, etc.
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immediately.
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the specified
refiner; it may generate toxic gas.
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock might occur.
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Contents
Contents
1 Specification .................................................................................................. 1-1

1-1 Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
(1) Common function...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
(2) Copy Functions ......................................................................................................................................... 1-4
(3) Printer Functions....................................................................................................................................... 1-6
(4) Scanner Functions .................................................................................................................................... 1-7
(5) Optional items ........................................................................................................................................... 1-8
(5-1)Document Processor (DP-7100/DP-7110/DP-7120/DP-7130) ......................................................... 1-8
(5-2)500 sheetsx2 Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100) .............................................................. 1-8
(5-3)1,500 sheetx2 Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) .............................................................................. 1-9
(5-4)3000 sheetx1 Side feeder (PF-7120) ............................................................................................... 1-9
(5-5)Inner Finisher (DF-7100) .................................................................................................................. 1-9
(5-6)Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) (PF-7110) ..................................................................................... 1-10
(5-7)1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120) ...................................................................................................... 1-10
(5-8)4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ...................................................................................................... 1-11
(5-9)100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130) ............................................................................................... 1-11
(5-10)Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheets/4,000-Sheets/100-Staple Finisher) .............................................. 1-12
(5-11)Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher (DF-7110) Optional) (MT-730 (B)) ........................................ 1-12
(5-12)Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher) (BF-730) ........................................................................ 1-12
(5-13)Folding Unit (For 100-Sheet Staple finisher optional) (BF-9100) ................................................. 1-13
(5-14)Job Separator Tray (JS-7100) ...................................................................................................... 1-13
(5-15)Banner Tray (Banner Guide 10) ................................................................................................... 1-14
(5-16)FAX System (FAX System 12) ..................................................................................................... 1-15
1-2 Part Names ............................................................................................................................................. 1-17
(1) Main unit appearance ............................................................................................................................. 1-17
(2) Connectors/Interior ................................................................................................................................. 1-19
(3) Optional Equipments Attached ............................................................................................................... 1-20
(4) FAX System ............................................................................................................................................ 1-21
(5) Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................................................. 1-22
1-3 Enhance Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 1-24
(1) DP-7100 / DP-7110 / DP-7120 / DP-7130 "Document Processor
" ,PLATEN COVER TYPE E “Copy original cover”................................................................................. 1-26
(2) MT-730 (B) "Mailbox".............................................................................................................................. 1-26
(3) DF-7110 "4000-sheet Finisher"............................................................................................................... 1-26
(4) DF-7130 "100 sheet staple finisher" ....................................................................................................... 1-26
(5) DF-7120 "1000-sheet Finisher"............................................................................................................... 1-26
(6) BF-730 "Folding Unit" ............................................................................................................................. 1-26
(7) BF-9100 "Folding Unit" ........................................................................................................................... 1-26
(8) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500 sheetsx2)"................................................................................................ 1-26
(9) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheetsx2)" .............................................................................. 1-26
(10) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3000-sheet x1)"................................................................................................. 1-27
(11) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray" ............................................................................................................. 1-27
(12) DF-7100 "Inner Finisher" ....................................................................................................................... 1-27
(13) PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit" ............................................................................................ 1-27
(14) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit"....................................................................................................... 1-27
(15) JS-7100 "Job Separator" ........................................................................................................................ 1-27
(16) NK-7120 /NK-7130“Optional numeric keys” ........................................................................................... 1-27
(17) DT-730 (B) "Document Table" ................................................................................................................ 1-27
(18) Printing System 15 "Fiery Controller" (Option for 32ppm/ 35ppm/ 40ppm/ 50ppm/60ppm model)......... 1-27
(19) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder" ................................................................................................. 1-27
(20) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit" ....................................................................................................................... 1-27
(21) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit" .................................................................................................................. 1-28
(22) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit".................................................................................................... 1-28
(23) IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit".................................................................................................... 1-28
(24) HD-12 “Hard disk drive” (Optional item for low models) ......................................................................... 1-28
(25) Card Authentication Kit (B) "Card Authentication Kit" ............................................................................. 1-28
(26) Internet FAX Kit (A) "Internet FAX Kit".................................................................................................... 1-28
(27) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"........................................................................................................................ 1-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(28) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit".............................................................................................................. 1-28

(29) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" .................................................................................. 1-28
(30) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"............................................................................................................. 1-29
1-4 Module map ............................................................................................................................................ 1-30
2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Environment.............................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2-2 Installing the main unit .............................................................................................................................. 2-3
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items ................................................................................................... 2-4
(2) Notes on main unit transportation ............................................................................................................. 2-5
(3) Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame ........................................................................................... 2-6
(4) Release lift plate stopper .......................................................................................................................... 2-7
(5) Attaching the sub tray ............................................................................................................................... 2-8
(6) Connecting the Interface Cable ................................................................................................................ 2-9
(7) Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only) .................................................................................. 2-11
(8) Loading Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 2-13
(8-1)Precaution for Loading Paper ........................................................................................................ 2-13
(8-2)Select cassette ............................................................................................................................... 2-14
(8-3)Set paper to the cassette 1 ............................................................................................................ 2-15
(8-4)Set paper in the cassette 2 ............................................................................................................ 2-18
(8-5)Set postcard and envelope in the cassette .................................................................................... 2-22
(8-6)Set paper in the large capacity feeder ........................................................................................... 2-25
(8-7)Set paper in the side feeder ........................................................................................................... 2-27
(9) Connecting the Power Cord.................................................................................................................... 2-29
(10) Turn power on......................................................................................................................................... 2-29
(11) Setting up the Toner Container............................................................................................................... 2-30
(12) Default Setting ........................................................................................................................................ 2-32
(12-1)Setting Date and Time ................................................................................................................. 2-32
(12-2)Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ...................................................................................... 2-32
(12-3)Paper size and media type setting ............................................................................................... 2-34
(13) Installing Software .................................................................................................................................. 2-34
(14) Set up for high altitude locations............................................................................................................. 2-34
(15) Adjusting image ...................................................................................................................................... 2-35
(15-1)Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464) ................................................... 2-35
(15-2)Color registration adjustment (Maintenance mode U469) ............................................................ 2-35
(15-3)Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410) ................................................. 2-36
(15-4)Output Maintenance report (Maintenance mode U000) ............................................................... 2-36
(15-5)Clearing the counts (Maintenance mode U927) ........................................................................... 2-36
(15-6)Setting the delivery date (Maintenance mode U278) ................................................................... 2-36
(16) Exiting from the maintenance mode ....................................................................................................... 2-37
(17) Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off)................................................................ 2-37
(18) Motion sensor ......................................................................................................................................... 2-37
(19) Turn the power on again ......................................................................................................................... 2-38
2-3 Optional unit installation.......................................................................................................................... 2-39
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items ................................................................................................. 2-39
(1-1)Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ................................................................................................................ 2-39
(1-2)Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) ................................................................................................... 2-40
(1-3)Side Paper Feeder (PF-7120) ........................................................................................................ 2-41
(1-4)Document Processor (DP-7100) .................................................................................................... 2-42
(1-5)Document Processor (DP-7110) .................................................................................................... 2-43
(1-6)Document Processor (DP-7120): Low-end model only .................................................................. 2-44
(1-7)Inner Finisher (DF-7100) ................................................................................................................ 2-45
(1-8)Attachment Kit (AK-7110) .............................................................................................................. 2-46
(1-9)1,000-sheets Finisher (DF-7120) ................................................................................................... 2-47
(1-10)4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ................................................................................................... 2-48
(1-11)Mailbox (MT-730(B)) .................................................................................................................... 2-49
(1-12)Booklet Unit (BF-730) ................................................................................................................... 2-50
(1-13)Punch Unit (PH-7A/B/C/D) ........................................................................................................... 2-51
(1-14)Punch Unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) ....................................................................................... 2-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-15)100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130) ............................................................................................. 2-53

(1-16)Booklet unit (BF-9100) ................................................................................................................. 2-55
(2) Optional unit installation.......................................................................................................................... 2-56
2-4 Installing the optional equipment ............................................................................................................ 2-57
(1) SD/SDHC memory card.......................................................................................................................... 2-57
(2) Hard disk (HD-12): (High-end model, 25/35 ppm model (120V) standard)............................................. 2-58
(3) Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50) ..................................................................................................... 2-61
(4) Wireless LAN interface (IB-51) ............................................................................................................... 2-61
(5) Wireless LAN interface (IB-35) ............................................................................................................... 2-62
(6) Document table (DT-730(B)) .................................................................................................................. 2-65
(7) Numeric Keypad (NK-7120/NK-7130) .................................................................................................... 2-68
(8) ID card reader ......................................................................................................................................... 2-71
(9) USB keyboard (120V/230V model only) ................................................................................................. 2-75
(10) Handset (100V model only) .................................................................................................................... 2-85
(11) Cassette heater ...................................................................................................................................... 2-91
(11-1)In the case of main unit cassette (120V/230V models only) ........................................................ 2-91
(11-2)In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ............................................................................................. 2-93
(11-3)In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7110) ............................................................................................. 2-95
(12) In case of Side Paper Feeder (PF-7120) ................................................................................................ 2-97
(13) Coin Vendor (option for 100v model only) ............................................................................................ 2-101
(13-1)Low-end model ........................................................................................................................... 2-101
(13-2)High-end model .......................................................................................................................... 2-104
(14) Banner Tray .......................................................................................................................................... 2-111
2-5 About Optional Applications.................................................................................................................. 2-113
3 Machine Design ............................................................................................. 3-1

3-1 Mechanical Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 3-1
(1) Cross-section view (Low-end model)........................................................................................................ 3-1
(2) Cross-section view (High-end model) ....................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2 Extension device construction (optional) .................................................................................................. 3-3
(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100) ............................................................................................. 3-3
(2) Large capacity feeder cross-section view (PF-7110)................................................................................ 3-3
(3) Side Deck cross-section view (PF-7120) .................................................................................................. 3-4
(4) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100)................................................................................. 3-5
(6) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7120) : Low-end model only.............................................. 3-6
(8) Attachment Kit (AK-7110) ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
(9) Inner finisher cross-section view (DF-7100) ............................................................................................. 3-7
(10) 4000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7110) .................................................................................. 3-8
(11) 1000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120) .................................................................................. 3-9
(12) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-730(B)) ................................................................................................ 3-10
(13) Folding unit cross-section view (BF-730)................................................................................................ 3-11
(14) 100 sheet staple finisher cross-section view (DF-7130) ......................................................................... 3-12
(15) Job separator cross-section view (JS-7100)........................................................................................... 3-13
3-3 Electric parts ........................................................................................................................................... 3-14
(1) Electric parts layout ................................................................................................................................ 3-14
(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs ....................................................................................................... 3-15
(2-1)Main PWB ...................................................................................................................................... 3-15
(2-2)Engine PWB ................................................................................................................................... 3-15
(2-3)Main high-voltage PWB .................................................................................................................. 3-16
(2-4)Transfer high-voltage PWB ............................................................................................................ 3-16
(2-5)Power supply PWB ........................................................................................................................ 3-17
(2-6)IH PWB .......................................................................................................................................... 3-17
(2-7)Operation panel main PWB ............................................................................................................ 3-18
(2-8)Fuser high-voltage PWB ................................................................................................................ 3-18
(3) PWBs ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-19
(3-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-19
(3-2)Parts name table (PWB) ................................................................................................................ 3-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4) Sensors and Switches ............................................................................................................................ 3-24

(4-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-24
(4-2)Part name table (Sensors and Switches) ....................................................................................... 3-27
(5) Motors ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-31
(5-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-31
(5-2)Part name table (motor) ................................................................................................................. 3-34
(6) Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-37
(6-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-37
(6-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-38
3-4 Electric parts (Optional unit) ................................................................................................................... 3-41
(1) Document processor (DP-7100) ............................................................................................................. 3-41
(1-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-41
(1-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-42
(2-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-43
(2-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-44
(3-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-45
(3-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-46
(4-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-47
(4-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-48
(5) Paper Feeder (PF-7100)......................................................................................................................... 3-49
(5-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-49
(5-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-51
(6) High capacity paper feeder (PF-7110).................................................................................................... 3-52
(6-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-52
(6-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-54
(7) Side Deck (PF-7120) .............................................................................................................................. 3-55
(7-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-55
(7-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-56
(8) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) ........................................................................................................................ 3-57
(8-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-57
(8-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-59
(9) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) .................................................................................................. 3-60
(9-1)Locations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-60
(9-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-61
(10) Attachment Kit (AK-7110) ....................................................................................................................... 3-62
(10-1)Locations ...................................................................................................................................... 3-62
(10-2)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-62
(11) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)............................................................................................................... 3-63
(11-1)Locations ...................................................................................................................................... 3-63
(11-2)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-66
(12) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120)............................................................................................................... 3-68
(12-1)Locations ...................................................................................................................................... 3-68
(12-2)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-70
(13) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) ............................................................................................................................... 3-71
(13-1)Locations ...................................................................................................................................... 3-71
(13-2)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-72
(14) Punch unit (PH-7) ................................................................................................................................... 3-73
(14-1)Locations ...................................................................................................................................... 3-73
(14-2)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-74
(15) Folding unit (BF-730) .............................................................................................................................. 3-75
(15-1)Locations ...................................................................................................................................... 3-75
(15-2)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-76
(16) 100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130) ....................................................................................................... 3-77
(16-1)PWBs ........................................................................................................................................... 3-77
(16-2)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-78
(16-3)Sensors and Switches .................................................................................................................. 3-79
(16-4)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(16-5)Motors .......................................................................................................................................... 3-84

(16-6)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-86
(16-7)Solenoid, Clutch ........................................................................................................................... 3-87
(16-8)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-87
(17) Folding Unit (BF-9100) ........................................................................................................................... 3-88
(17-1)Motor, Solenoid, PWB .................................................................................................................. 3-88
(17-2)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-89
(17-3)Sensors and Switches .................................................................................................................. 3-90
(17-4)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-91
(17-5)Sensor, Fan (BF Bridge) .............................................................................................................. 3-92
(17-6)Part name table ............................................................................................................................ 3-92
3-5 Driving system ........................................................................................................................................ 3-93
(1) Drive configuration .................................................................................................................................. 3-93
(2) Drive location ........................................................................................................................................ 3-102
(3) Drive unit appearance........................................................................................................................... 3-103
(3-1)Feed drive unit ............................................................................................................................. 3-103
(3-2)Main drive unit .............................................................................................................................. 3-103
(3-3)Toner supply drive unit ................................................................................................................. 3-104
(3-4)Fuser drive unit ............................................................................................................................ 3-104
3-6 Mechanical construction ....................................................................................................................... 3-105
(1) Paper feed/Conveying section .............................................................................................................. 3-105
(1-1)Cassette paper feed section ........................................................................................................ 3-105
(1-2)MP tray paper feed section .......................................................................................................... 3-107
(1-3)Paper conveying section .............................................................................................................. 3-109
(2) Optical section ...................................................................................................................................... 3-111
(2-1)Image scanner section ................................................................................................................. 3-111
(2-2)Laser scanner unit ........................................................................................................................ 3-113
(3) Developer section ................................................................................................................................. 3-115
(3-1)Developer unit .............................................................................................................................. 3-115
(4) Drum section......................................................................................................................................... 3-119
(4-1)Charger roller unit ........................................................................................................................ 3-119
(4-2)Cleaning ....................................................................................................................................... 3-119
(5) Transfer/Separation section.................................................................................................................. 3-123
(5-1)Primary transfer unit ..................................................................................................................... 3-123
(5-2)Secondary transfer roller unit ....................................................................................................... 3-125
(6) Fuser section ........................................................................................................................................ 3-127
(6-1)Fuser unit ..................................................................................................................................... 3-127
(7) Eject and feedshift section .................................................................................................................... 3-131
(7-1)Exit unit ........................................................................................................................................ 3-131
(7-2)Exit paper jam .............................................................................................................................. 3-133
(8) Duplex conveying section ..................................................................................................................... 3-134
(8-1)Duplex conveying unit .................................................................................................................. 3-134
3-7 Mechanical configuration (Optional) ..................................................................................................... 3-136
(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100) ........................................................................................................................ 3-136
(2) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) .......................................................................................................... 3-139
(2-1)Cassette 2 .................................................................................................................................... 3-139
(3) Side Deck (PF-7120) ............................................................................................................................ 3-141
(4) Document processor (DP-7100) ........................................................................................................... 3-143
(4-1)Original paper feed section .......................................................................................................... 3-143
(4-2)Original conveying section and eject/switching section ............................................................... 3-143
(4-3)Duplex (switchback) action .......................................................................................................... 3-146
(6-3)Duplex (switchback) action .......................................................................................................... 3-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(8) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) ...................................................................................................................... 3-157
(8-1)Paper conveying section .............................................................................................................. 3-157
(8-2)Bundle eject operation ................................................................................................................. 3-159
(9) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)............................................................................................................. 3-161
(9-1)Paper entry/Feedshift/DF tray B exit section ................................................................................ 3-161
(9-2)Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section ............................................................. 3-163
(9-3)Finishing section .......................................................................................................................... 3-163
(9-4)Relief drum operation ................................................................................................................... 3-166
(9-5)Bundle eject operation ................................................................................................................. 3-167
(10-1)Finishing section ........................................................................................................................ 3-170
(10-2)Bundle eject operation ............................................................................................................... 3-172
(11) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) ............................................................................................................................. 3-175
(11-1)Ejecting to the mailbox tray ........................................................................................................ 3-177
(12) Punch unit (PH-7) ................................................................................................................................. 3-178
(13) Folding unit (BF-730) ............................................................................................................................ 3-180
(13-1)Paper folding operation (Center-folding, Tri-folding) .................................................................. 3-181
(13-2)Tri-folding position adjustment for the folding unit ...................................................................... 3-184
(14) 100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130) ..................................................................................................... 3-187
(14-1)Paper entry and feedshift and DF tray B exit section ................................................................. 3-187
(14-2)Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section ........................................................... 3-188
(14-3)Finishing section ........................................................................................................................ 3-189
(14-4)Relief drum operation ................................................................................................................. 3-194
(14-5)DF eject tray ............................................................................................................................... 3-196
(15) Booklet Unit (BF-9100) ......................................................................................................................... 3-198
4 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1 Precautions for the maintenance .............................................................................................................. 4-1
(1) Precautions ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1
(2) Storage and handling of the drum ............................................................................................................ 4-1
(3) Storage of the toner container .................................................................................................................. 4-1
4-2 Maintenance parts .................................................................................................................................... 4-2
(1) Maintenance kits ....................................................................................................................................... 4-2
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit .................................................... 4-4
(2-1)Maintenance modes that need to run after replacing the above maintenance kit. ........................... 4-4
(2-2)Items that perform after replacing the unit ....................................................................................... 4-4
4 - 3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures ............................................................................................ 4-7
(1) Cassette paper feed section ..................................................................................................................... 4-7
(1-1)Detaching and attaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller .................................................... 4-7
(1-2)Detaching and attaching the regist cleaner .................................................................................... 4-11
(2) MP paper feed section ............................................................................................................................ 4-14
(2-1)Detaching and attaching the MP paper feed roller ......................................................................... 4-14
(2-2)Detaching and attaching the MP retard roller ................................................................................. 4-16
(3) Transfer section ...................................................................................................................................... 4-17
(3-1)Detaching and attaching the primary transfer unit ......................................................................... 4-17
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the secondly transfer unit ....................................................................... 4-20
(3-3)Detaching and attaching the secondary transfer roller unit ............................................................ 4-21
(4) Drum section........................................................................................................................................... 4-22
(4-1)Detaching and attaching the drum unit .......................................................................................... 4-22
(4-2)Detaching and attaching the main charge roller unit ...................................................................... 4-25
(5) Developer section ................................................................................................................................... 4-28
(5-1)Detaching and attaching the developer unit ................................................................................... 4-28
(6) Fuser section .......................................................................................................................................... 4-33
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit ....................................................................................... 4-33
(6-2)Hight adjustment of fuser unit (Trail edge skew image adjustment) ............................................... 4-35
(7) Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7-1)Detaching and attaching filters. ...................................................................................................... 4-37

4 - 4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement) ................................................................. 4-38
(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100) .......................................................................................................................... 4-38
(1-1)Detaching and attaching PF retard roller, PF pickup pulley and paper feed roller ......................... 4-38
(2) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) ............................................................................................................ 4-42
(2-1)Detaching and attaching PF retard roller, PF pickup pulley and paper feed roller ......................... 4-42
(3) Side Deck (PF-7120) .............................................................................................................................. 4-46
(3-1)Detaching and attaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller .................................................. 4-46
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the PF retard roller ................................................................................. 4-48
(4-1)Detaching and attaching the DP pickup pulley and DP paper feed roller ...................................... 4-49
(4-2)Detaching and attaching the DP retard roller ................................................................................. 4-49
(6) Document processor (DP-7120): Low-end models only ......................................................................... 4-54
4 - 5 Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit ................................................................... 4-56
4 - 6 Disassembly and assembly procedures ................................................................................................. 4-58
(1) OUTER COVERS ................................................................................................................................... 4-58
(1-1)Detaching and attaching the front cover ........................................................................................ 4-58
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the front cover for maintenance .......................................................... 4-60
(1-3)Detaching and attaching the inner cover ........................................................................................ 4-61
(1-4)Detaching and attaching the rear bottom cover ............................................................................. 4-62
(1-5)Detaching and attaching the rear bottom cover ............................................................................. 4-62
(1-6)Detaching and attaching the DP rear cover ................................................................................... 4-63
(1-7)Detaching and attaching the LSU rear cover ................................................................................. 4-63
(1-8)Detaching and attaching the left top cover/the rear left cover. ....................................................... 4-64
(1-9)Detaching and attaching the right top cover ................................................................................... 4-66
(1-10)Detaching and attaching the rear right top cover, rear right bottom cover ................................... 4-67
(1-11)Detaching and attaching the right cover assembly ...................................................................... 4-68
(2) Optical section ........................................................................................................................................ 4-74
(2-1)Detaching and attaching the LSU .................................................................................................. 4-74
(2-2)Detaching and attaching the lens unit ............................................................................................ 4-87
(2-3)Detaching and attaching the lamp unit ........................................................................................... 4-91
(2-4)Detaching and attaching the scanner wires ................................................................................... 4-94
(3) Drive section ......................................................................................................................................... 4-102
(3-1)Detaching and attaching the PF drive unit ................................................................................... 4-102
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the main drive unit ................................................................................ 4-104
(3-3)Detaching and attaching the container motor .............................................................................. 4-114
(3-4)Detaching and attaching the toner supply drive unit .................................................................... 4-120
(3-5)Detaching and attaching the fuser drive unit ................................................................................ 4-131
(4) Others ................................................................................................................................................... 4-137
(4-1)Detaching and attaching the SSD ................................................................................................ 4-137
(4-2)Detaching and attaching the hard disk drive ................................................................................ 4-139
(4-3)Detaching and attaching the lift motor .......................................................................................... 4-141
(4-4)Detaching and attaching the fuser discharge unit ........................................................................ 4-143
(4-5)Detaching and attaching the eject unit ......................................................................................... 4-145
(4-6)Detaching and attaching waste toner box unit ............................................................................. 4-146
(4-7)Fan motor attachment direction ................................................................................................... 4-174
(5) PWBs .................................................................................................................................................... 4-175
(5-1)Detaching and attaching the engine PWB ................................................................................... 4-175
(5-2)Detaching and attaching the main PWB ...................................................................................... 4-181
(5-3)Detaching and attaching the main high voltage PWB .................................................................. 4-185
(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the transfer high voltage PWB .......................................................... 4-190
(5-5)Detaching and attaching the power supply PWB ......................................................................... 4-197
(5-6)Detaching and attaching the IH PWB ........................................................................................... 4-205
(5-7)Detaching and attaching the operation panel PWB ..................................................................... 4-211
(6) Sensor adjustment ................................................................................................................................ 4-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-1)Attach MP paper width sensor ..................................................................................................... 4-218

4 - 7 Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)......................................................................................... 4-220
(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100) ........................................................................................................................ 4-220
(1-2)Detaching and attaching the PF lift motor .................................................................................... 4-221
(1-3)Detaching and attaching the PF PWB .......................................................................................... 4-223
(2) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) .......................................................................................................... 4-224
(3) Side Deck (PF-7120) ............................................................................................................................ 4-230
(4-1)Detaching and attaching the document processor ....................................................................... 4-236
(4-2)Detaching and attaching the DP rear cover ................................................................................. 4-239
(4-3)Detaching and attaching the DP PWB ......................................................................................... 4-240
(5) Document processor (DP-7110/DP-7130) ............................................................................................ 4-243
(5-3)Detaching and attaching the DP PWB ......................................................................................... 4-247
(5-4)Detaching and attaching DPCIS .................................................................................................. 4-250
(6) Document processor (DP-7120): Low-end models only ....................................................................... 4-254
(6-3)Detaching and reattaching the DP PWB ...................................................................................... 4-259
(7) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) ...................................................................................................................... 4-262
(7-1)Detaching and attaching the DF PWB ......................................................................................... 4-262
(7-2)Detaching and attaching the staple unit ....................................................................................... 4-264
(8) Attachment Kit (AK-7110) ..................................................................................................................... 4-270
(8-1)Detaching and attaching BR convey motor .................................................................................. 4-270
(8-2)Detaching and attaching the BR PWB ......................................................................................... 4-272
(9-1)Detaching and attaching the DF staple unit ................................................................................. 4-273
(9-2)Detaching and attaching the DF PWB ......................................................................................... 4-276
(10-1)Detaching and attaching the DF staple unit ............................................................................... 4-278
(10-2)Detaching and attaching the DF PWB ....................................................................................... 4-279
(11) Booklet Unit (BF-730) ........................................................................................................................... 4-282
(11-1)Detaching and attaching the BF staple unit ............................................................................... 4-282
(11-2)Detaching and attaching the BF PWB ........................................................................................ 4-282
(12-1)Separation of enhancement units .............................................................................................. 4-284
(12-2)Detaching and attaching the front cover .................................................................................... 4-284
(12-3)Detaching and attaching the PWB ............................................................................................. 4-295
(13) PH PWB (Punch unit) ........................................................................................................................... 4-297
(14) Booklet Unit (BF-9100) ......................................................................................................................... 4-298
(14-1)Separate from DF and detach unit ............................................................................................. 4-298
(14-2)Detaching and reattaching the BF staple unit ............................................................................ 4-303
(14-3)Detaching and reattaching the BF PWB .................................................................................... 4-304
4 - 8 Scheduled maintenance procedure ...................................................................................................... 4-306
(1) Main unit ............................................................................................................................................... 4-306
(1-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 4-306
(1-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 4-309
(2) Document processor DP-7100 (Option) ............................................................................................... 4-311
(3) Document Processor DP-7110/7130 (Optional) ................................................................................... 4-313
(4) Document processor DP-7120 (Option) ............................................................................................... 4-315
(5) Paper feeder (PF-7100) (Optional) ....................................................................................................... 4-317
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(8) Attachment Kit (AK-7110) (Optional) .................................................................................................... 4-320
(9) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) (Optional)...................................................................................................... 4-321
(10) Punch Unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) (Optional) ............................................................................... 4-323
(13) Booklet Unit (BF-730) (Optional) .......................................................................................................... 4-328
(14) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) (Optional) ............................................................................................................ 4-330
(15) Punch Unit (PH-7A/B/C/D) (Optional) ................................................................................................... 4-331
(16) 100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130) (Optional)..................................................................................... 4-332
(17) Booklet Unit (BF-9100) (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 4-334
5 Firmware ........................................................................................................ 5-1

5 - 1 Firmware update ....................................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 Maintenance mode ........................................................................................ 6-1

6-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................................... 6-1
(1) Execute the maintenance mode ............................................................................................................... 6-1
(2) Maintenance modes list ............................................................................................................................ 6-2
(3) Content of the maintenance mode............................................................................................................ 6-8
7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 7-1

7 - 1 Image formation problems ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
(1) Isolate the place of image failure .............................................................................................................. 7-1
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP,
or scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP) .......................................................... 7-2
(2-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................... 7-5
(2-2)Colored background ......................................................................................................................... 7-6
(2-3)Black or color spots .......................................................................................................................... 7-8
(2-4)Blurred characters ............................................................................................................................ 7-9
(2-5)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Front side) ......... 7-10
(2-6)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Back side) ......... 7-10
(2-7)Horizontal black streaks ................................................................................................................. 7-11
(2-8)Vertical streaks, band (black or color) ............................................................................................ 7-12
(2-9)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Front side) .......... 7-14
(2-10)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Back side) ......... 7-14
(2-11)Vertical streaks, band (white) ....................................................................................................... 7-15
(2-12)moiré (front side) .......................................................................................................................... 7-16
(2-13)moiré (back side) .......................................................................................................................... 7-16
(2-14)Missing entire image (White / Black) ............................................................................................ 7-17
(2-15)Image is dark partly or light .......................................................................................................... 7-17
(2-16)Blurred image ............................................................................................................................... 7-18
(2-17)Image is missing partly ................................................................................................................. 7-19
(2-18)Color registration .......................................................................................................................... 7-20
(2-19)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-21
(2-20)Entire image is light ...................................................................................................................... 7-22
(3) Scanner Factors (Dual scan DP:When scanning the back side through DP) ......................................... 7-24
(3-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................. 7-26
(3-2)Colored background ....................................................................................................................... 7-27
(3-3)Black or color spots ........................................................................................................................ 7-28
(3-4)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image ............................ 7-29
(3-7)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image ............................. 7-31
(3-8)Vertical streaks, band (white) ......................................................................................................... 7-31
(3-9)Moiré .............................................................................................................................................. 7-32
(3-10)Missing entire image (White / Black) ............................................................................................ 7-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-12)Blurred image ............................................................................................................................... 7-34

(3-14)Color shift ..................................................................................................................................... 7-36
(3-15)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-36
(4) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass) ......................................................................... 7-38
(4-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................. 7-40
(4-3)Black or color spots ........................................................................................................................ 7-43
(4-4)Blurred characters / Color Shift ...................................................................................................... 7-43
(4-8)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image ............................. 7-46
(4-9)Vertical streaks, band (white) ......................................................................................................... 7-47
(4-10)Moiré ............................................................................................................................................ 7-48
(4-11)No image comes out (White or Black) .......................................................................................... 7-48
(4-13)Blurred image ............................................................................................................................... 7-51
(4-15)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-53
(5) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation) ........................................... 7-56
(5-2)Black spots, color spots (toner smudges) ...................................................................................... 7-60
(5-3)Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots) ........................................................................ 7-61
(5-4)Blank image ................................................................................................................................... 7-62
(5-6)Color shift in the main scanning direction ...................................................................................... 7-62
(5-7)Color shift in the sub scanning direction ........................................................................................ 7-63
(5-8)Dirty reverse side ........................................................................................................................... 7-63
(5-9)Entire image is light ........................................................................................................................ 7-64
(5-10)Horizontal streaks or band (White, black, color) .......................................................................... 7-65
(5-11)Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image
(variation of paper leading edge timing) ................................................................................................ 7-65
(5-12)Blurred characters ........................................................................................................................ 7-66
(5-13)Offset ............................................................................................................................................ 7-67
(5-14)Color reproduction is poor ............................................................................................................ 7-69
(5-15)Fusing failure ................................................................................................................................ 7-71
(5-16)Paper skew at the trailing edge .................................................................................................... 7-71
(5-17)Uneven transfer ............................................................................................................................ 7-72
(5-18)Blurred image ............................................................................................................................... 7-73
(5-19)Vertical streaks, band (white) ....................................................................................................... 7-73
(5-20)Vertical streaks, band (black or color) .......................................................................................... 7-74
(5-22)Granular image ............................................................................................................................ 7-75
(6) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)................................................................................................... 7-76
(6-7)Blank image ................................................................................................................................... 7-91
(6-8)Toner dirt (Single color) .................................................................................................................. 7-93
(6-9)Periodic toner dirt (Single color) ..................................................................................................... 7-94
(6-10)Missing entire image (Solid image by a single color) ................................................................... 7-95
(6-11)Horizontal streaks or band (White or single color) ....................................................................... 7-97
(6-12)Irregular horizontal white streaks, white spots ............................................................................. 7-99
(6-13)Horizontal uneven density .......................................................................................................... 7-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-14)Image is missing partly ............................................................................................................... 7-101

(6-15)Offset .......................................................................................................................................... 7-101
(6-16)Gradation reproducibility is low .................................................................................................. 7-102
(6-17)Blurred image ............................................................................................................................. 7-102
(6-18)Light vertical black streaks at both edge of paper which is outside of the image area ............... 7-102
(6-19)Vertical streaks, bands (single color) ......................................................................................... 7-103
(6-20)Vertical uneven density .............................................................................................................. 7-104
(6-21)Vertical streaks, band (white) ..................................................................................................... 7-105
(6-22)Uneven halftone image .............................................................................................................. 7-105
7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures ................................................................................................................. 7-106
(1) Prior standard check items ................................................................................................................... 7-106
(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection ................................................................................. 7-107
(1-2)Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper .................................. 7-107
(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl ........ 7-107
(1-4)Paper jam due to the guide .......................................................................................................... 7-108
(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette ................................................... 7-108
(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper .............................................................................................. 7-108
(1-7)Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys ....................................................................... 7-109
(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor ........................................................................................................ 7-109
(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure ............................................................................ 7-110
(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity ........................................................................................ 7-110
(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment
(Papers inside the cassette are always damp.) ................................................................................... 7-110
(2) Paper misfeed detection ....................................................................................................................... 7-111
(2-1)Paper misfeed indication .............................................................................................................. 7-111
(2-2)Paper misfeed detection condition ............................................................................................... 7-113
(3) Jam Codes............................................................................................................................................ 7-119
(4) Other Feeding/Conveying Failures ....................................................................................................... 7-273
(4-1)Paper creases (Fuser factor) ....................................................................................................... 7-274
(4-2)Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor) ........................................................................... 7-275
(4-3)(When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit with the punch unit
for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of the paper leading edge being caught
by the PH cutter receiving holes .......................................................................................................... 7-276
(4-4)Dog-ear ........................................................................................................................................ 7-276
7-3 Self Diagnostic ...................................................................................................................................... 7-277
(1) Self diagnostic error codes ................................................................................................................... 7-277
(1-1)Error codes list ............................................................................................................................. 7-277
(1-2)Content of Self diagnostic ............................................................................................................ 7-282
(2) System Error (Fxxxx) ............................................................................................................................ 7-450
(2-1)System Error code list .................................................................................................................. 7-450
(2-2)Content of System Error (Fxxxx) .................................................................................................. 7-451
(2-3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ....................................................................................................... 7-459
7-4 FAX Related Errors.............................................................................................................................. 7-468
(1) FAX Related Errors.............................................................................................................................. 7-469
(1-1)The login fails with other than the ID card .................................................................................... 7-470
(1-2)C0030: FAX PWB system error ................................................................................................... 7-470
(1-3)C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error ........................................................................... 7-470
(1-4)C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error ................................................................................ 7-471
(1-5)C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error ................................................................ 7-471
(1-6)C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error ........................................................................... 7-472
(1-7)C0920: FAX file system error ....................................................................................................... 7-472
(1-8)C0950: FAX job stay error ............................................................................................................ 7-473
(1-9)F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section ................................................................. 7-473
(1-10)The FAX cannot be sent ............................................................................................................ 7-473
(1-11)The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished ........................................................ 7-474
(1-12)When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted
as the A4 size data: ............................................................................................................................. 7-474
(2) Communication Errors .......................................................................................................................... 7-475
7-5 Send Related Errors ............................................................................................................................. 7-494
(1) Send Related Errors ............................................................................................................................. 7-494
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-1)The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or
the security software settings .............................................................................................................. 7-494
(1-2)Sending error 2203 does not disappear ....................................................................................... 7-494
(1-3)When scanning the original loaded on the contact glass to send,
the scanned data is automatically sent. .............................................................................................. 7-494
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes) ............................................................................................................... 7-495
(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes ......................................................................................................... 7-495
(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes ............................................................................................................. 7-501
(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes ............................................................................................................ 7-507
7-6 Print Errors............................................................................................................................................ 7-511
(1) The paper loading message appears ................................................................................................... 7-513
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the monochrome mode is set .................................... 7-513
(3) Color tone differs with the printed photo ............................................................................................... 7-514
(4) Orientation is different........................................................................................................................... 7-515
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray ............................................................................................................... 7-516
(6) Garbled characters ............................................................................................................................... 7-516
(7) Data is output with monochrome .......................................................................................................... 7-516
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray ......................................................................................................... 7-517
(9) The same data is repeatedly printed out .............................................................................................. 7-517
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is
indicated on the printer properties ........................................................................................................ 7-517
(11) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is indicated ........................ 7-517
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error Processing/Memory lamp is
turned on............................................................................................................................................... 7-518
(13) Print stops after printing several pages and locks up
Processing and Memory lamps on operation panel are lit .................................................................... 7-518
(14) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1)....................................................................... 7-519
(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1) ................................................................... 7-522
(28) The printed image is partly missing ...................................................................................................... 7-524
(29) 'Paper Mismatch Error' appears............................................................................................................ 7-524
7-7 Error Messages .................................................................................................................................... 7-525
(1) Check the document processor' appears ............................................................................................. 7-526
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2)
even after removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit. 7-527
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4)
even after removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit. 7-528
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover ........................................................... 7-529
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover ......... 7-530
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray........................................ 7-530
(7) The message 'Waste toner box is full.' is wrongly displayed ................................................................ 7-531
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed ................... 7-531
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed......................... 7-531
(10) The operation panel remains displaying 'Network device is starting'.................................................... 7-532
(11) The waste toner box is installed, but 'Install the waste toner box' is displayed..................................... 7-533
(12) The operation panel remains displaying 'Close the waste toner box cover'. ........................................ 7-534
(13) Memory is full' is displayed at Scan to SMB. ........................................................................................ 7-535
(14) Check the toner container' is displayed while toner is available. .......................................................... 7-535
(15) The message "The toner container is not properly installed." appears frequently................................ 7-535
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7-8 Abnormal Noise .................................................................................................................................... 7-536

(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)............................................................................................................ 7-538
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section ............................................................................ 7-538
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section ........................................................................................ 7-539
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor .................................................................................... 7-539
(5) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (squeal sounds)............................................................................ 7-539
(6) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit and exit unit (fluttering sounds).................................................. 7-540
(7) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (cracking sounds) ......................................................................... 7-540
(8) Abnormal sound from the exit section .................................................................................................. 7-540
(9) Fan rotating sounds are noisy .............................................................................................................. 7-541
(10) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section .......................................................................... 7-541
(11) Abnormal sound from the machine front side ....................................................................................... 7-542
(12) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section .......................................................... 7-542
(13) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section.............................................................. 7-542
(14) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (fluttering sounds) ...................................................................... 7-542
(15) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (cracking sounds) ...................................................................... 7-543
(16) Abnormal sound from the fuser section ................................................................................................ 7-543
(17) Abnormal sounds from the IH unit (buzzing sounds) ............................................................................ 7-544
(18) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ............................................................................................ 7-544
(19) The tooth skipping sound from the toner container drive section ......................................................... 7-544
(22) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds) ................................................................ 7-545
(23) The drive sounds are noisy during printing ........................................................................................... 7-546
(24) The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying section (Squeak sound) ................................... 7-546
(25) Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth jumping sounds).............................................. 7-546
(26) Abnormal sound from the waste toner forwarding unit ......................................................................... 7-546
(27) Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (1) ...................................................................................... 7-546
(30) Abnormal sounds from the image scanning section ............................................................................. 7-547
(31) Abnormal sounds from the bridge unit (cracking sounds when conveying the paper).......................... 7-548
(32) The high frequency sounds are generated from the low voltage PWB
when entering into the sleep mode in the main unit with the optional NIC. .......................................... 7-548
7 - 9 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................... 7-549
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed.................................................. 7-550
(2) The MP tray paper size is misdetected................................................................................................. 7-551
(3) The controller fan motor does not rotate............................................................................................... 7-551
(4) The developer fan motor does not rotate.............................................................................................. 7-552
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch .......................................................... 7-553
(6) Toner falls over the paper conveying section ....................................................................................... 7-554
(7) No display in the operation panel ......................................................................................................... 7-555
(8) The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" and does not change ...................................... 7-556
(9) No action by pressing the operation panel ........................................................................................... 7-556
(10) The login fails with other than the ID card ............................................................................................ 7-557
(11) The original size on the original glass is misdetected........................................................................... 7-557
(12) The container cover is not opened although the toner container is not installed .................................. 7-557
(13) The FAX icon is not displayed on the operation panel even if installing the FAX PWB........................ 7-558
(14) The operation panel does not display the finisher even if installing the finisher ................................... 7-558
(15) The Job separator LED continuously turns on even if removing the paper from the JS tray................ 7-559
(16) Even if the paper feeder is installed, it is not displayed on the operation panel ................................... 7-560
7 - 10 Others ................................................................................................................................................... 7-561
(1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit and the paper width guides........................................ 7-561
(1-1)Adjusting the center position for the punch unit ........................................................................... 7-561
(1-2)Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray) ................................... 7-563
(1-3)Adjusting the center line at U034 ................................................................................................. 7-564
(2) Alignment for affixing PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP (For PF-7110) ............................................... 7-564
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 PWBs .............................................................................................................. 8-1

8 - 1 Description for PWB ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1) Main PWB ................................................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1-1)PWB photograph .............................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1-2)Connector position ........................................................................................................................... 8-1
(1-3)Connector lists ................................................................................................................................. 8-2
(2) Engine PWB .......................................................................................................................................... 8-11
(2-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-11
(2-2)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-12
(2-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-13
(3) Feed image PWB.................................................................................................................................... 8-26
(3-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-26
(3-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-27
(4) Feed Drive PWB ..................................................................................................................................... 8-42
(4-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-42
(4-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-43
(5) Drum/Developer relay PWB................................................................................................................... 8-48
(5-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-48
(5-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-49
(6) Main high voltage PWB .......................................................................................................................... 8-52
(6-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-52
(6-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-53
(7) Transfer high voltage PWB .................................................................................................................... 8-55
(7-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-55
(7-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-56
(8) Power supply PWB ................................................................................................................................. 8-57
(8-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-57
(8-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-58
(9) Operation panel main PWB ................................................................................................................... 8-61
(9-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-61
(9-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-62
(10) IH PWB ................................................................................................................................................... 8-68
(10-1)PWB photograph .......................................................................................................................... 8-68
(10-2)Connector position ....................................................................................................................... 8-68
(10-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................. 8-69
(11) Fuser high voltage PWB ......................................................................................................................... 8-70
(11-1)PWB photograph .......................................................................................................................... 8-70
(11-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................. 8-71
8 - 2 Description for PWB (OPTION) .............................................................................................................. 8-72
(1) PF PWB (PF-7100) ................................................................................................................................. 8-72
(1-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-72
(1-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-73
(2) PF PWB (PF-7110) ................................................................................................................................. 8-76
(2-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-76
(2-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-77
(3) PF PWB (PF-7120) ................................................................................................................................. 8-80
(3-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-80
(3-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-81
(4) DP PWB (DP-7100) ................................................................................................................................ 8-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-83

(4-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-84
(5) DP PWB (DP-7110) ................................................................................................................................ 8-87
(5-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-87
(5-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-88
(6) DPIF PWB (for DP-7110/DP-7130) ........................................................................................................ 8-91
(6-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-91
(6-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-92
(7) DP PWB (DP-7120) ................................................................................................................................ 8-94
(7-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-94
(7-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-95
(8) DP PWB (DP-7130) ................................................................................................................................ 8-97
(8-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-97
(8-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-98
(9) DF PWB (DF-7100) .............................................................................................................................. 8-101
(9-1)PWB photograph .......................................................................................................................... 8-101
(9-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................. 8-102
(10) PH PWB (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) ................................................................................................... 8-106
(10-1)Connector position ..................................................................................................................... 8-106
(10-2)Connector lists ........................................................................................................................... 8-106
(11) BR PWB (AK-7110) .............................................................................................................................. 8-108
(11-1)PWB photograph ........................................................................................................................ 8-108
(11-3)Connector lists ........................................................................................................................... 8-109
(12) DF PWB (DF-7110) .............................................................................................................................. 8-111
(12-1)PWB photograph ........................................................................................................................ 8-111
(12-3)Connector lists ........................................................................................................................... 8-112
(13) MT PWB (MT-730(B)) ........................................................................................................................... 8-118
(13-1)PWB photograph ........................................................................................................................ 8-118
(13-3)Connector lists ........................................................................................................................... 8-119
(14) BF PWB (BF-730) ................................................................................................................................. 8-121
(14-1)PWB photograph ........................................................................................................................ 8-121
(14-3)Connector lists ........................................................................................................................... 8-122
(15) PH PWB (PH-7) .................................................................................................................................... 8-125
(15-1)PWB photograph ........................................................................................................................ 8-125
(15-3)Connector lists ........................................................................................................................... 8-126
(16) DF PWB (DF-7120) .............................................................................................................................. 8-128
(16-1)PWB photograph ........................................................................................................................ 8-128
(16-3)Connector lists ........................................................................................................................... 8-129
(17) DF PWB (DF-7130) .............................................................................................................................. 8-133
(17-1)PWB photograph ........................................................................................................................ 8-133
(17-3)Connector lists ........................................................................................................................... 8-134
(18) BF PWB (BF-9100) ............................................................................................................................... 8-144
(18-1)PWB photograph ........................................................................................................................ 8-144
(18-3)Connector lists ........................................................................................................................... 8-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Appendixes ................................................................................................ 9-148

9-1 Repetitive defects gauge ...................................................................................................................... 9-148
9-2 Firmware environment commands ....................................................................................................... 9-149
9-3 Chart of image adjustment procedures................................................................................................. 9-156
9-4 Wiring diagram...................................................................................................................................... 9-161
(1) Engine PWB / Feed Drive PWB............................................................................................................ 9-161
(1-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 9-161
(1-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 9-162
(2) Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection ............................................... 9-163
(2-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 9-163
(2-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 9-164
(3) Feed image PWB (Front side) .............................................................................................................. 9-165
(3-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 9-165
(3-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 9-166
(4) Feed image PWB (Rear side) ............................................................................................................... 9-167
(4-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 9-167
(4-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 9-168
(5) Feed Drive PWB ................................................................................................................................... 9-169
(5-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 9-169
(5-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 9-170
(6) Drum/Developer relay PWB.................................................................................................................. 9-171
(6-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 9-171
(6-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 9-172
(7) Low voltage power supply PWB / High voltage PWB ........................................................................... 9-173
(7-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 9-173
(7-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 9-174
(8) Fuser PWB ........................................................................................................................................... 9-175
(8-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 9-175
(8-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 9-176
(9) Operation panel PWB / Main PWB ....................................................................................................... 9-177
(9-1)Low-end model ............................................................................................................................. 9-177
(9-2)High-end Model ............................................................................................................................ 9-178
9-5 Wiring diagram (Options connection) ................................................................................................... 9-179
(1) Paper feeder connection....................................................................................................................... 9-179
(2) Conveying unit / Document finisher connection.................................................................................... 9-180
(3) Other Options connection ..................................................................................................................... 9-181
9-6 Wiring diagram (Options) ...................................................................................................................... 9-182
(5) Paper Feeder (PF-7100)....................................................................................................................... 9-186
(6) Large capacity paper feeder (PF-7110) ................................................................................................ 9-187
(7) Side Deck (PF-7120) ............................................................................................................................ 9-188
(8) Finisher (DF-7100)................................................................................................................................ 9-189
(9) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130): Optional item (Enhancement) for DF-7100 ........................... 9-190
(10) Finisher (DF-7110)................................................................................................................................ 9-191
(11) Mailbox (MT-730(B)): Optional item (Enhancement) for DF-7110 ........................................................ 9-192
(12) Folding unit (BF-730): DF-7110 only .................................................................................................... 9-193
(13) Punch Unit (PH-7): Optional item (Enhancement) for DF-7110/7120/7130.......................................... 9-194
(16) Booklet Unit (BF-9100): DF-7130 only.................................................................................................. 9-199
9-7 Installation Guide .................................................................................................................................. 9-200
(1) PF-7100 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-200
(2) PF-7110 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-213
(3) PF-7120 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-234
(4) DP-7100................................................................................................................................................ 9-261
(5) DP-7110/ DP-7130 ............................................................................................................................... 9-292
(6) DP-7120................................................................................................................................................ 9-327
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7) DF-7100 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-358

(8) DF-7110 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-367
(9) DF-7120 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-387
(10) AK-7110 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-404
(11) MT-730(B)............................................................................................................................................. 9-411
(12) BF-730 .................................................................................................................................................. 9-425
(13) PH-7A/B/C/D......................................................................................................................................... 9-443
(14) PH-7100/7110/7120/7130..................................................................................................................... 9-453
(15) JS-7100 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-471
(16) FAX-System 12..................................................................................................................................... 9-475
(17) Printing-System 15 ............................................................................................................................... 9-490
(18) DF-7130 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-500
(19) BF-9100 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-519
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
1 Specification
1 - 1 Specifications
(1)Common function
Items Specification
25/32/35/40/50/60 ppm model

Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette 52 to 300 g/m2
Multi Purpose 52 to 300 g/m2

Tray
Media type Cassette Plain, Vellum, Recycle, Preprint, Bond, Hagaki, Color, Punched, Letterhead,
Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Vellum, Labels, Recycle, Preprint, Bond,
Tray Hagaki, Color, Punched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality,
Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K, ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki, Kakugata 2, Yokei 4, Yokei 2, Chokei 3,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 x 148 to 297 x356 mm)
Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki, Kakugata 2, Yokei 4, Yokei 2, Chokei 3,
Custum 1 to 4 (98 x 148 to 320 x 457 mm)
Multi Purpose A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 x 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Tray Statement, Executive, 12 x 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Yonaga 3, Chokei 3. Chokei 4
Custom 1 to 4 (98 x 148 mm to 320 x 457 mm)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (10 x 488.1 to 304.8 x 1,219 mm/ 8.26" x 19.22" to 12" x
48")
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm or less
1-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Specification
25/32/35/40/50/60 ppm model

Warm-up Time Power on 25 ppm model: 18 seconds or less
(22°C, 60%) 32 ppm model: 18 seconds or less
35 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
Low Power 25 ppm model: 10 seconds or less

Sleep 25 ppm model: 16 seconds or less

Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64 g/m2)*1, 500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
Multi Purpose 165 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (64 g/m2)

Tray 150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2)
55 sheets (lager than A4/Letter) (64 g/m2)
50 sheets (lager than A4/Letter) (80 g/m2)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210x470.1 to 304.8x1,220 mm/8.26"x18.5" to 12"x48")),
(136 to 163 g/m2)
Output Tray Inner tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2)

Capacity
Job separator 100 Sheets (80 g/m2)
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Light source LED
Scanning method Flat surface scanning by the CCD image sensor
Photoconductor 25/32 ppm model: OPC drum (Diameter 30 mm)

35/40/50/60 ppm models a-Si drum (Diameter 30 mm)
Charging system Contact charger roller method
Developer 25/32 ppm model: Non-magnetic dual-component developing system

system 35/40/50/60 ppm models: Touch down developing system
Toner supply: Automatic from the toner container
Transfer system Primary: Transfer belt method

Secondary: Transfer roller method
Separation system Small diameter separation and separation needle (Input DC voltage)
Cleaning system Drum 25/32 ppm model: Counter blade

35/40/50/60 ppm models: Counter blade+Cleaning roller
Primary transfer Fur brush cleaning+Pre-brush system
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Specification
25/32/35/40/50/60 ppm model

Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Fusing system Sliding IH fuser system

Heat source: IH
Overheat protection devices: thermostat
Memory Default: 4GB
Large capacity storage 25/32 ppm model: SSD 32 GB (SSD 8 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB *4)
35/40/50/60 ppm models: SSD 8 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB
Interface Standard Super-Speed USB: 1

Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 802.3az
supported)
Hi-Speed USB: 4 (USB Flash memory slot)
Optional items eKUIO: 2 *2

Fax: 2 *3
Wireless LAN: 1 *4
Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Environment
Humidity 10 to 80 %
Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (WxDxH) 602x665x790 mm/23.71"x26.19"x31.11"
Weight (without toner container) 25/32 ppm model: Approx. 90 kg/Approx. 198.4 lbs (without toner container)
35/40/50/60 ppm models: Approx. 95 kg/Approx. 209.4 lbs (without toner
container)
Space Required (WxD) 920x665 mm/36.23"x26.19" (Using multi purpose tray)
Power source 100V Model: AC 100V, 50/60Hz, 15A

120V Model: AC 120V, 60Hz, 10.3A
230V Model: AC 200-240V, 50 Hz, 5.6A
*1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

*2: In case that two optional interfaces are installed, a fax line can not be installed.
*3: In case that IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
*4: Standard for North Americas
1-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Copy Functions
Items Specification
Black and White Full Color Copy

Copy
Copy Speed 25 ppm model A4/Letter 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
B4/Legal 15 sheets/min 15 sheets/min
B5 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
B5-R 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min
A5-R 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
32 ppm model A4/Letter 32 sheets/min 32 sheets/min
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Specification
Black and White Full Color Copy

Copy
Copy Speed 50 ppm model A3/Ledger 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
First Copy Time Black and White 25 ppm model: 6.4 seconds or less
(A4, place on the 32 ppm model: 5.3 seconds or less
platen, feed from 35 ppm model: 4.5 seconds or less
Cassette)
40 ppm model: 4.5 seconds or less
Color 25 ppm model: 8.5 seconds or less

Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Continuous Copy 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution Table Black and White 600x600 dpi

(Scanning)
Color 600x600 dpi
DP Black and White 600x600 dpi/ 600x300 dpi
Color 600x600 dpi
Resolution (Printing) 1,200x1,200 dpi (multi-bit)
Copy Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (Maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Copy Original Feed System Fixed
1-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Printer Functions
Items Specification
Black and White Color print

print
Print Speed 25 ppm model 12x18"/SRA3 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
32 ppm model 12x18"/SRA3 16 sheets/min 16 sheets/min
Other than the above size, specifications are the same as those of Copy Speed.
First Print Time (A4) 25 ppm model 7.0 seconds or less 9.2 seconds or less
32 ppm model 5.9 seconds or less 7.7 seconds or less
Resolution UI Name Resolution (data) Resolution (print)
600 dpi 600 dpi 4,800 dpi (Equivalent)x1,200 dpi
1,200 dpi 1,200 dpi 4,800 dpi (Equivalent)x1,200 dpi
Operating System Windows 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows
Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016, Mac OS X v10.9 or later
Interface Super-Speed USB: 1

Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 802.3az
supported)
Optional Interface (Optional): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Wireless LAN (Optional): 1 (For IB-35 mounting)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL-5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, Open
XPS
1-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Scanner Functions
Items Specification
Resolution 600x600 dpi, 400x400 dpi, 200x400 dpi, 300x300 dpi, 200x200 dpi, 200x100 dpi
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression/High
compressive), Text Recognition PDF (Optional), MS Office file (Optional)
Scan Speed *1 Black and White 25/32 ppm model 80 images/min, Color 80 Images/min
(A4, 300 dpi, simplex
35/40/50/60 ppm 1-sided: B/W 120 images/min, Color 120 Images/min
Image quality:
model
Text/Photo
original) Black and White 25/32 ppm model B/W 180 Images/min, Color 180 Images/min
duplex
35/40/50/60 ppm B/W 220 images/min, Color 220 Images/min
model
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, TWAIN*2, WIA*3, WSD
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Operating System: Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server
2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016
*3 Operating System Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server
2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016
1-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Optional items
(5-1)Document Processor (DP-7100/DP-7110/DP-7120/DP-7130)
Items Specification
dual reverse scan dual scan

Type DP-7100 DP-7120 DP-7110/DP-7130
Document feed method Automatic feed
Copy Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: A3/Ledger (297x432 mm) (Long-sized: 297x1,900 mm)
Minimum: A6-R/ Minimum: A5-R/ Minimum: A6-R/

Statement-R (105x148 Statement-R (140x182 Statement-R (105x148
mm) mm) mm)
Paper Weight 1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m² 1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m² 1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m²
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m² 2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m² 2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m²
Loading Capacity 140 sheets maximum 50 sheets maximum 270 sheets maximum
(50 to 80 g/m2) *1 (50 to 80 g/m2) *1 (50 to 80 g/m2) *1
Dimensions (WxDxH) 593x531x138.5 mm/ 600x502x128 mm/ 600x539x185 mm/

23.35"x20.91"x5.46" 23.35"x20.91"x5.46" 23.62"x21.22"x7.28'"
Weight Approx. 9 kg/Approx. Approx. 7.5 kg / Approx. Approx. 13.5 kg/Approx.

19.9 lbs 19.9 lbs 30.4 lbs
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.

(5-2)500 sheetsx2 Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100)
Items Specification
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 550 (64 g/m²)x2 cassettes/500(80g/m²)x2 cassettes)
Paper size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5,
Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope
DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki, Kakugata 2,
Yokei 4, Yokei 2, Chokei 3, Custum 1 to 4 (98x148 to 320x457 mm)
Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m²
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material
Dimension (WxDxH) 600x665x323.2 mm/23.63"x26.19"x12.73"
Weight Approx. 23 kg/Approx. 50.8 lbs
1-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-3)1,500 sheetx2 Large capacity feeder (PF-7110)
Items Specification
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 1,750 (64 g/m²)x2 cassettes/1,500 (80g/m²)x2 cassettes)
Paper size A4, B5, Letter

Dimension (WxDxH) 600x665x323.2 mm/23.63"x26.19"x12.73"
Weight Approx. 30 kg/Approx. 66.2 lbs
(5-4)3000 sheetx1 Side feeder (PF-7120)
Items Specification
Paper Supply Method Feed and reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 3500 (64 g/m²)x1 cassettes/3000 (80g/m²)x1 cassettes)
Paper size A4, B5, Letter

Dimension (WxDxH) 351x585x 69 mm/23.27"x20.36"x39.58"
Weight Approx. 26.5 kg/Approx. 66.2 lbs
(5-5)Inner Finisher (DF-7100)
Items Specification
Number of Trays 1 tray
Paper Size (80 g/m²) A3, B4, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
Finisher tray Envelope C4: 250 sheets
(No stapling) A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5-R, B5, B6, Letter-R, Letter, Statement, Executive,
16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4,Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki
(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 500 sheets
Stapling Number of sheets A3, B4, 216x340 mm, Ledger, Legal, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
to limit Oficio II, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m²)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m²)

40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheets only (106 to 300 g/m²)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom
Dimension (WxDxH) 694.8x533.1x220.5 mm/27.36"x20.99"x8.69" (When pulling the tray)
Weight Approx. 11.5 kg or less/Approx. 25.4 lbs. or less
1-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-6)Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) (PF-7110)
Items Specification
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
12x18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Paper Weight 52 to 300 g/m2
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High
Quality, Custom 1 to 8
(5-7)1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120)
Items Specification
Paper Size (80 g/ Finisher tray (No A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,
m²) staple) Executive, 12x8", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500 sheets
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m² or less
Stapling Number of sheets A3, B4, B5-R, 216x340 mm, Ledger, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
to limit Legal, 12x18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheets only (106 to 300 g/m²)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m²)

40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
Dimension (WxDxH) 548x618.5x1,050 mm/21.58"x24.36"x41.34"
Weight Approx. 30 kg / Approx. 66.2 lbs
Space Required (WxD) 666x618.5 mm/26.23"x24.36" (with the tray pulled out)
1-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-8)4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)
Items Specification
Paper Size (80 g/ Tray A (No A3, B4, B5-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II,
m²) stapling) Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 1,500 sheetsA5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 4,000 sheets
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-
R, 16K, ISO B5, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,Youkei 2:
200 sheets
Stapling Number of sheets A3, B4, B5-R, 216x340 mm, Ledger, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
to limit Legal, 12x18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheets only (106 to 300 g/m²)
A4-R, A4, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 70 sheets (52 to 74 g/m²)

16K-R, 16K 65 sheets (75 to 90 g/m²)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
Dimension (WxDxH) 607.2x668.5x1,061.3 mm/23.27"x20.36"x39.58"
Weight Approx. 40 kg or less/Approx. 26.5 lbs or less
Space Required (WxD) 725x668.5 mm/26.23"x24.36" (with the tray pulled out)
(5-9)100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130)
Items Specification
Paper Size (80 g/ Tray A (No A3, B4, B5-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II,
m²) stapling) Folio, 8K: Hight 227 mm (1,500 sheets equivalent)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R, 16K: Hight 512 mm (4,000 sheets
equivalent)
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: Hight 91 mm (500 sheets equivalent)
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio,
8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki,
Kakugata 2 go, Yokei 4 go, Yokei 2 go, Chokei 3 go, Chokei 4 go: Hight 45 mm
(200 sheets equivalent)
Stapling Number of sheets A3, B4, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m²)
to limit Legal, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 35 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
A4-R, A4, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 100 sheets (52 to 90 g/m²)
16K-R, 16K 70 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
1-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Specification
Dimension (WxDxH) 870x687x1,181 mm
Weight Approx. 52 kg/Approx. 114,6 lbs
Space Required (WxD) 870x687 mm/34.3"x27.0" (with the tray pulled out)
(5-10)Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheets/4,000-Sheets/100-Staple Finisher)
Items Specification
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
12x18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Paper Weight 45 to 300 g/m2
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High
Quality, Custom
(5-11)Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher (DF-7110) Optional) (MT-730 (B))
Items Specification
Number of Trays 7 trays
Paper Size (80 g/m²) A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 50 sheets
A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216x340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R,
Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets
Weight Approx. 10 kg/Approx. 22.1 lbs.
(5-12)Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher) (BF-730)
Items Specification
Adaptable Sizes Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
for folding
Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-Fold A4-R, Letter-R
Adaptable Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)

number for 3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m²)
folding
1 sheets (121 to 256 g/m²)
Saddle Stitch 20 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)

13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m² or heavier)
Tri-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)

3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m²)
Maximum Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more

Number for Stack 6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
(80 g/m²) 11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more
Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more

6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
Tri-Fold 1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more

1-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Specification
Media type Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Tri-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated, High

Quality,Custom
(5-13)Folding Unit (For 100-Sheet Staple finisher optional) (BF-9100)
Items Specification
Adaptable Sizes Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
for folding
Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-Fold A4-R, Letter-R
Adaptable Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)

number for 3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m²)
folding
1 sheets (121 to 256 g/m²)
Saddle Stitch 20 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)

13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m² or heavier)
Tri-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)

3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m²)
Maximum Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 25 sets or more

Number for Stack 6 to 10 sheets per set: 10 sets or more
(80 g/m²)
Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 25 sets or more

Tri-Fold 1 sheet per set: 50 sets or more

Media type Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Tri-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated, High

Quality,Custom
(5-14)Job Separator Tray (JS-7100)
Items Specification
Maximum Number for Stack 100 Sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio,
8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
EnvelopeMonarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom
(98x148 to 304.8x1,220 mm)
1-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Specification
Weight Approx. 0.6 kg/Approx. 1.3 lbs.
(5-15)Banner Tray (Banner Guide 10)
Items Specification
Max. number of sheets 10 sheets (Multi Purpose tray)
Paper width 210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper length Max. 1,219.0 mm (48")

Media types: Heavy 2
Dimension (WxDxH) 400.6x397.8x193.6 mm/15.78"x15.67"x7.63"
Weight Approx. 0.5 kg/Approx. 1.2 lbs.
1-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-16)FAX System (FAX System 12)

FAX function
Items Specification
Mutual communication G3
Adaptable Communication Line Subscriber telephone line, F-net
Transmission Time Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)
Transmission Speed 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/

7200/4800/2400 bps
Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Error Correction ECM
Original Size Max. width: 297 mm/11", Max. length: 1,600 mm/63"
Number of fax originals to auto feed Max. 270 sheets (with optional document processor)
Resolution Scanning method

200x100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm x 3.85 line/mm)
200x200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm x 7.7 line/mm)
200x400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm x 15.4 line/mm)
400x400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm x 15.4 line/mm)
600x600 dpi
Print: 1,200x1,200 dpi
Gradations 256 shades (Error diffusion)
One Touch Key 1,000 keys
Multi-Station Transmission Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100
stations for i-Fax)
Substitute Memory Reception 7,000 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)
Image Memory Capacity Standard memory (170MB) (for FAX transmission/reception)
Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page
Optional items Handsets, Multi port, Internet FAX kit
Network FAX functions

Items Specification
Hardware IBM PC-AT compatible computer
Interface 10 BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX, 1000 BASE-T
Operating system Windows 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows
Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016
Transmission Resolution Ultra fine (400x400dpi), Fine (200x200dpi), Normal (100x200dpi), 600x600dpi
Document Size Letter, Legal, Ledger (11x17), Statement, A3, A4, A5, Folio, B4, B5 (JIS)
Scheduled job Time setting by Network FAX driver (within 24 hours, 1 minute increments)
Transmit and Print Fax transmission and print out at the machine is available
Broadcast Transmission Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100
stations for i-Fax)
1-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Specification
User Login/Job Accounting In case that “User Login” is set in main unit, Login User Name and Password
have to be registered by the Network FAX Driver setting.
In case that “Job Accounting” is set in main unit, Account ID has to be registered
by the Network FAX Driver setting.
Cover Page Network FAX driver allows to select cover page format and to create templates.
1-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Part Names
1 - 2 Part Names
(1)Main unit appearance
22
13 12 11
14 21
10 15
2 9
16 20
3 17 19
8
7
4 18
5
18
6
1 Document Processor 12 Copy Original Table

2 Operation Panel 13 Copy Original Width Guides
3 Power Switch 14 Slit Glass
4 Waste Toner Box Cover 15 Job Separator Tray
5 Cassette 1 16 Paper Stopper
6 Cassette 2 17 Inner Tray
7 Main Power Switch 18 Handles
8 Multi Purpose Tray 19 Front Cover
9 USB Drive Slot 20 Motion sensor
10 Copy Original Eject Table 21 Platen
11 Copy Original Stopper 22 Copy Original Size Indicator Plates
1-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
30
29
28
27
26
23
24 25
23 Paper Length Guide 27 Multi Purpose Tray

24 Paper Width Guides 28 Paper Width Guides for Multi Purpose Tray
25 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 29 Right Cover 1 Lever
26 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray 30 Right Cover 1
1-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Connectors/Interior
1
2
3 5
4 6
7
8
1
9
10
11
1 Optional Interface Slot 7 Toner Container (Cyan)

2 USB port 8 Toner Container (Yellow)
3 Network Interface Connector 9 Toner Container Cover
4 USB Interface Connector 10 Waste Toner Box
5 Toner Container (Black) 11 Waste Toner Box Cover
6 Toner Container (Magenta)
1-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Optional Equipments Attached
10
11
1
3 9
5 2
4
2 3 9 8
6 7
7 6
1 Tray 1 to 7 (Tray 1 is the top tray) 7 Cassette 4

2 Tray A 8 Cassette 5
3 Tray B 9 Finisher tray
4 Job Separator Tray 10 Copy Original Cover
5 Folding Tray 11 Operation panel for Finisher
6 Cassette 3
1-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)FAX System
1 LINE Connector (L2)

If installing 2 FAX kits, 2 ports are available.
Connect the modular cords for telephone line.
2 LINE Connector (L1)

Connect the modular cords for telephone line.
This connector is port 1.
3 TEL Connector (T1)

In case of using an optional handset or available telephone, connect it here.
1-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Operation Panel Keys
1 2 3 4 5
No Name Symb Specification
ol
1 [Home] key Displays the Home screen.
2 [Job Separator] indicator Lights when there is paper on the job separator tray.
3 [Data] lamp Blink when printing, sending/receiving data or accessing to HDD/SSD

And lit when FAX (Send) is waiting for timer.
4 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
5 [Energy Saver] key Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep Mode.
6 Touch Screen Touch icons and make settings.
1-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Touch Screen Layout

Basic function keys are available in the bottom and right side of the screen.
Admin
Authentic./
Logout 10
Select the function.
9
System Menu
/Counter
Interrupt
8
Copy Send FAX Custom Box Numeric
7
Keypad
11
Reset 6
Job Box USB Drive FAX Box Internet Browser
Stop 5
Status/
Job Cancel
Device
Information
L ang uag e Paper
Settings
Wi-Fi Direct Help Program
Start 4
Status 08/08/2018 14:00
Status/
Job Cancel Copy Function Send Function FAX Function
Accessibility
Display
3
1 2 2 2
No Name Specification
1 [Status/Job Cancel] key Display the Status/Job Cancel screen.
2 Function Key These keys enable functions and applications, such as copy or scan, to be
registered.
3 [Accessibility Display] key This key is to magnify the screen in Copy mode or Send mode.
4 [Start] key Start copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
5 [Stop] key Cancel or pause the job in progress.
6 [Reset] key Return settings to the defaults.
7 [Numeric Keypad] key Displays numeric keys on the screen.
8 [Interrupt] key Display the Interrupt Copy screen.
9 [System Menu/Counter] key Display the System Menu screen.
10 [Authentication/Logout] key Authenticate user switching, and exit the operation for the current user (i.e. log
out).
11 Screen area Display the Home screen.
1-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Enhance Configuration
1 - 3 Enhance Configuration
The following enhancements are available for this model.
(1) DP-7130 (1) DP-7110 (1) DP-7100 (1) DP-7120
(2) MT-730(B)
(1) PLATEN COVER
TYPE E
(14) PH-7A, PH-7C, (13) PH-7100,
PH-7D PH-7120, PH-7130
(12) DF-7100
(3) DF-7110 (4) DF-7130 (11) Banner Guide 10
(15) JS-7100
(10) PF-7120*
(6) BF-730
(5) DF-7120
(7) BF-9100 (8) PF-7100* (9) PF-7110*
* If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110, PF-7120
1-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(18) Printing System 15
(13) Keyboard Holder 10
(19) Keyboard Holder 10
(15) NK-7120
(16) NK-7120, NK-7130 (18)
(20) FAX
FAX System
System 12
12 (23) (25)
IC Card
(17) DT-730(B)
(B) Kit(B)
Authentication
(19) IB-50
(21) IB-50
(21)
(23) IB-35
IB-35
(20)
(22) IB-51
IB-51
(22)
(24) HD-12
HD-12
Optional Software
(26) Internet FAX Kit(A)
(27) UG-33
(28) UG-34
(29) Scan extension kit (A)
(30) USB Keyboard
1-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1)DP-7100 / DP-7110 / DP-7120 / DP-7130 "Document Processor" ,PLATEN COVER TYPE E

“Copy original cover”
Enhancement scan copy originals automatically. Also duplex copying and split copying are available.
See following for Document processor operation.
PLATEN COVER TYPE E can be used instead of Document processor.
(2)MT-730 (B) "Mailbox"

This equipment is to output documents to designate tray and make sorting easy. Installing this option adds 7 output
trays.
When multiple computer users share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. This unit can attach to 4,000-
Sheet Finisher.
NOTE
In order to use the mail box, change output tray with either print driver, operation panel or initial setting.
(3)DF-7110 "4000-sheet Finisher"

This equipment to stack large capacity paper and offset copy to sort. Sorted output documents can be stapled or hole
punched (Optional).
(4)DF-7130 "100 sheet staple finisher"

punched (Optional).
(5)DF-7120 "1000-sheet Finisher"

punched (Optional).
(6)BF-730 "Folding Unit"

This unit is to fold printed output at the center or in tri-fold and to enable the creation of simple booklets. This unit can
attach to 4,000-Sheet Finisher.
(7)BF-9100 "Folding Unit"

This unit is to fold printed output at the center or in tri-fold and to enable the creation of simple booklets. This unit can
install to the DF-7130 (100 sheet staple finisher).
(8)PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500 sheetsx2)"

Two additional cassettes can be installed to the machine. Paper capacity and loading method are same as the standard
cassettes.
Set paper to the cassette 1 (page page 2-15)
(9)PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheetsx2)"

In addition to regular cassettes, large capacity feeder can be installed that allows 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper
to load.
Set paper in the large capacity feeder (page page 2-25)
1-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10)PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3000-sheet x1)"

In addition to regular cassettes, side feeder can be installed that allows 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper to load.
Set paper in the side feeder (page page 2-27)
(11)Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"

This tray enables continuous feeding of banner paper. Up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be loaded. See following for
installation and paper set.
(12) DF-7100 "Inner Finisher"

This equipment is to stack large capacity paper and offset copy to sort. Sorted output documents can be stapled or hole
punched (Optional).
(13)PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit"

This unit can attach to the Inner Finisher and is to make punch holes.
(14)PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit"

This unit can attach to the 1000-sheet/4000-sheet/100-staple Document Finisher and is to make punch holes.
(15)JS-7100 "Job Separator"

Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as
the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the
received fax data.
(16)NK-7120 /NK-7130“Optional numeric keys”

The numeric keypad is added to the operation panel. If the optional numeric keypad is installed, numeric keys do not
appear on the touch panel.
(17)DT-730 (B) "Document Table"

Place copy original or other documents when using the machine.
(18)Printing System 15 "Fiery Controller" (Option for 32ppm/ 35ppm/ 40ppm/ 50ppm/60ppm
model)
When the Fiery Controller is installed, the regular print function of a machine can be replaced with the print function of
the Fiery Controller. The Fiery Controller print functions enable a variety of printing features that are not possible on a
regular machine, such as advanced color management that reproduces the true color of the image by reading each
machine's color display method and characteristics at the time of printing.
(19)Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder"

A USB keyboard connected to the machine can be placed here.
(20)FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it can be used as a network fax with computer.
1-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Two FAX kits allow to connect two different telephone lines that enable quicker message transmission to a number of
recipients. Or the one line can be receiving only that reduce the busy line.
(21)IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. This kit supports
traditional protocol such as “Apple Talk” or “Netware”.
And minimum functions of standard utility.
(22)IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and
11 g/b.
This kit supports traditional protocol such as “Apple Talk” or “Netware”.
And minimum functions of standard utility.
IB-51 setup utility supports Windows OS and Mac OS X.
(23)IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 65 Mbps) and
11 g/b.
In addition, network printing is available without using the wireless LAN router since Wi-Fi Direct is supported.
(24)HD-12 “Hard disk drive” (Optional item for low models)

HDD is for storing printing data. This enables high-speed printing of multiple set using an electric sort function.
(25)Card Authentication Kit (B) "Card Authentication Kit"

This card can be used for User administration. In order to do user administration with IC card, IC card information has to
be registered to local use list in advance,
See following for ID card registration.
(26)Internet FAX Kit (A) "Internet FAX Kit"

Internet FAX Kit allows to send and receive faxes via Internet. It can be added only if the FAX Kit is installed.
(27)UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(28)UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"

Enable emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables PC-
PRO201/65A, IBM 5577 and EPSON VP-1000 emulations.
(29)Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit"

This kit enables the OCR Text Recognition function in the applications of the machine.
1-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(30)USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also
available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on
keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.
1-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Module map
1 - 4 Module map
Unit configuration of each models are follows.
Items Specification
25 ppm 32 ppm 35 ppm 40 ppm 50 ppm 60 ppm

model model model model model model
Cassette 1 Legal paper supportive cassette as maximum size (common)
CT-8550 (302ND9301*)
Cassette 2 SRA3 paper supportive cassette as maximum size (common)
CT-8560 (302ND9302*)
Primary feed Pickup/feed roller+retard roller system (common)
PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP (302ND9421*)
Conveying, Duplex Non-stack paper conveying path (common)
PARTS RIGHT COVER ASSY SP (302ND94740*)
Primary transfer Transfer belt + fur brush cleaning system (common)
TR-8550 (302ND9315*)
Secondary Transfer roller method (common)

transfer
PARTS ROLLER SECONDRY TRANSFER ASSY SP (302ND9418*)
Drum OPC drum (Diameter 30 mm) a-Si drum (Diameter 30 mm)
DK-8350(302L793050) DK-8550 (302ND9307*)
Developing Dual-component developing Touch down developing system
100V 100V
DV-8350K (J) 302L79J01* DV-8560K (J) 302V89J02*
DV-8350M (J) 302L79J02* DV-8560M (J) 302V89J03*
DV-8350C (J) 302L79J03* DV-8560C (J) 302V89J04*
DV-8350Y (J) 302L79J04* DV-8560Y (J) 302V89J05*
120/220-240V 120/220-240V
DV-8350K 302L79301* DV-8560K 302V89302*
DV-8350M 302L79302* DV-8560M 302V89303*
DV-8350C 302L79303* DV-8560C 302V89304*
DV-8350Y 302L79304* DV-8560Y 302V89305*
LSU One polygon motor+2 beams One polygon motor+4 beams
LK-8350 302L79311* LK-8550 302ND9313*
Fuser Sliding IH fuser pressures Sliding IH fuser pressures system (Diameter 35 mm)
system (Diameter 30 mm)
FK-8350 302L79306* 100V

FK-8560 302ND9319*
120/220-240V
FK-8550 302ND9308*
IH 100/120V 100/120V
FK-8600IH 302VH9301* (FK-8590IH) 302ND9310*
220-240V 220-240V
FK-8605IH 302VH9302 (FK-8595IH) 302ND9309
1-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Module map
Items Specification
25 ppm 32 ppm 35 ppm 40 ppm 50 ppm 60 ppm

model model model model model model
Eject Feed-shift and eject conveying path (common)Drum
PARTS EXIT UNIT L SP PARTS EXIT UNIT SP

302L79419* 302ND9408*
1-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Environment
2 Installation
2 - 1 Environment
Installation environment
1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (Humidity should be 70% or less
when the temperature is 90.5°F (32.5°C).)
2. Humidity: 10 to 80% (Temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less when

humidity is 80%.)
3. Power requirements: AC100 V 50/60Hz 15 A or more
AC110 V 60Hz 15 A or more
AC120 V 60Hz 12 A or more
AC 220 to 240 V 50Hz 7.2 A or more
4. Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz+/-2% or 60Hz+/-2%
Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:
Environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine as follows: Humidity: 36 to
65% Temperature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations.
• Locations where the sunlight is hit directly such as the window.
• Locations with vibrations
• Locations with rapid temperature fluctuations
• Locations with where hot or cold air is hit directly.
• Poorly ventilated locations
The floor material may be damaged by moving this product in case of a delicate material.
During operation, ozone is released, but its amount does not affects one's health.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. In order to keep a comfortable environment, ventilation of
the room has to be considered.
2-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Environment
Installation space
400 mm
(15-3/4")
300 mm 450 mm 1000 mm 100 mm

(11-13/16") (17-11/16") (39-3/8") (3-15/16")
2-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
2 - 2 Installing the main unit

Installation procedures
START
Unpacking and checking bundled items

Image adjustment
Maintenance mode workflow
Attaching the sub tray (Maintenance mode U952:
Execute/ SET UP)
Optional unit installation
Setting the ID correction operation
(Maintenance mode U464)
Connecting the Interface Cable
Color registration adjustment

Connecting the FAX cable (Maintenance mode U469)
(FAX installation only)
Adjusting the halftone automatically
Loading Paper (Maintenance mode U410)
Connecting the Power Cord Output a Maintenance report

Turn the power on

Clearing the counts
(maintenance mode U927)
Setting up the Toner Container
Setting the delivery date
Default Setting (Maintenance mode U278)
Installing Software Exiting from the maintenance mode
*: When setting up at high altitude Completion of installing the main unit

㸦Maintenance mode U952:
Execute/ HIGH ALTITUDE㸧
Developer bias adjustment

Primary transfer voltage adjustment

Setting the ID correction operation

*: Initial setting time: approx. 2 minutes for high-end model, approx. 6 minutes for low-end model
Also, do not execute the maintenance mode during the initial setting.
2-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1)Unpacking and checking bundled items

Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove tapes and packing materials from the main unit.
1
10
8
12
5 7
2 3
6
11
13
4 4
4
14 15
4 17 15 17
16
17 17
1 Outer case 8 Eject spacer 15 Right bottom pad

2 Front upper pad 9 Right lower cover 16 Skid
3 Rear upper pad 10 Inner Tray 17 Hinge
4 Side stay 11 Operation cover
5 Accessories box 12 Main unit
6 Size label 13 Bottom case
7 Power cord 14 Left bottom pad
CAUTION
Install the main unit on a level surface.
2-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Notes on main unit transportation

When transporting the main unit, lift the left and right handle of the lower part of the main unit (as marked by red circles)
with four people as shown in the figure.
Do not hold the operation panel because it will cause damage.
2-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame
1 Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame

1 Raise the triangle mark side of the optical lock cover (b) with a flat-blade screwdriver (a) and slide it to the
direction of the arrow to remove it.
2 Put the optical lock cover (b) into the aperture of the hook (c) to fit in the direction of the arrow.
• C3100 error occurs when miss releasing the lock.
1 a
2 b c
2-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Release lift plate stopper

1 Pull out cassette 1 and 2. Remove the lift plate stopper from each cassette and attach it to the storage location.
• When moving the machine, attach the lift plate stopper to original position.
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
2-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Attaching the sub tray

Attach the bundled sub tray to the inner tray.
*: The sub tray is not necessary when installing the DF-7100 (Inner finisher).
*: The Sub Tray is not necessary when installing the AK-7110 (Attachment kit) for DF-7110 (4,000-sheets Finisher), DF-
7120 (1,000-sheets Finisher) or DF-7130 (100-sheets staple finisher).
1 Slide the sub tray (a) and insert two protrusions (b) into two apertures (c) on the inner tray.
2 Insert the rib (d) into the aperture (e) of the inner tray and push it in until it locks.
• Check if it does not come off by lifting up the sub tray (a).
b c
a
d e
Attach the bundled Right lower cover as shown below when the optional feeder is not installed.
1 Insert two protrusions (b) on the lower rear cover (a) into the holes at the machine front side.
2 Insert the hook (c) to fix it.
c
a
b
2-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Connecting the Interface Cable

Connection Environment Available Function Required Cable
Connect a LAN cable to the main Printer/Scanner/ LAN Cable
unit Network FAX*1 (10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-T)
Connect a USB cable to the main Printer USB 3.0 adaptable cable (Super-Speed USB
unit compatible, Max. 5.0 m long)
*1: This can be used for installing optional Fax kit.
IMPORTANT
It can be cause of failure not to use USB 3.0 adaptable cable.
In case of the LAN connection
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to PC or hub.
2-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
In case of the USB connection
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface located on the right side of the main unit.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to PC.
2-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only)

FAX connection example
In case of the regular telephone line
A. Modular jack
ADSL
Connect the LINE connector of the main unit and the PHONE port of the splitter.
a. Modular jack
b. ADSL modem
c. Splitter (PHONE port)
d. PC
d
a c
ISDN
Connect the LINE connector of the main unit and the analog port of the terminal adapter.
a. Modular jack
b. Terminal adapter
(Analog port)
c. PC
a
b
2-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Modular cord connection

Connect a modular cord to the LINE connector of the main unit.
When using a commercially available telephone set, connect a modular cord to the TEL connector of the main unit.
a. Modular jack
b. Modular jack (Phone)
c: Commercially available telephone
d. Modular jack (line2) *1
*1 when two FAX kits are installed
b
c
2-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)Loading Paper
(8-1)Precaution for Loading Paper
Before loading paper to the cassette, fan the paper from a new package to separate them following the procedures
below.
Fan the paper and align the edges at the flat place.
In addition, note the following points.
• Bending or curling causes paper jam.
• Storing paper under high temperature and high humidity after opening the package, gets trouble because of
absorbing moisture. After setting paper in the cassette, seal the rest of the paper in the paper storage bag. Also, seal
the paper remaining on the MP tray in the paper storage bag.
• Setting paper in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may spoil the paper.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the
cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you reuse paper already used for printing, remove staples or clips. Do not use paper with a staple or clip. This may
cause poor image quality or failures.
2-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8-2)Select cassette
Select cassette as paper size or type.
1
2
3
6
5 4 7
Num Name Paper size Paper type Capacit Reference

ber y destinatio
n
1 Cassette A4-R, A4, A5-R. A5, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Plain, Vellum, Recycle, 500 page 2-15
1 Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Preprint, Bond, Hagaki, sheets
Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K, ISO Color, Punched, (80 g/m2)
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope Letterhead, Thick,
#6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope, High Quality,
Envelope C5, Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki, Custom 1 to 8
Kakugata 2 go, Yokei 4 go, Yokei 2 go,
Chokei 3 go, Custom 1 to 4
2 Cassette A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R,

2 B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
3 Cassette Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-
3 R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope
#9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
4 Cassette
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
4
Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki, Kakugata 2 go, Yokei
4 go, Yokei 2 go, Chokei 3 go, Custum 1 to
4
5 Cassette Fix A4, Letter or B5. Plain, Vellum, Recycle, 1,500 page 2-25
3 Preprint, Bond, Hagaki, sheets
Color, Punched, (80 g/m2)
6 Cassette Letterhead, Thick,
4 Envelope, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
7 Cassette 3,000 page 2-27
2 sheets
(80 g/m2)
2-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8-3)Set paper to the cassette 1
1 Pull the cassette completely out of the main unit.
NOTE
Do not pull out multiple cassettes at once.
2 Adjust the position of the paper length guide.

1 Press the tab and slide the guides to the paper size to use.
NOTE
In case of using Legal size, move the paper length guide to the leftmost and lay it down.
2-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides.

4 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2 Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
CAUTION
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper from a new package to separate it. (See page page 2-13)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not folded. Folding or curling causes paper jam.
• Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size, this
makes paper skew or jam.
5 Check if the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
2-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Insert the cassette all the way into the main unit gentry.
7 Insert the paper size sheet and media type labels.
2-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8-4)Set paper in the cassette 2
NOTE
Do not pull out multiple cassettes at once.

NOTE
Move the paper length guide to the leftmost in case of using 12x18".
2-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]

NOTE
Adjust the additional paper size guide in case of using SRA3/12x18", A3 or Leger.
4 Load paper.
2-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
CAUTION
• Load the paper with the print side up.

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Folding or curling causes paper jam.
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size, this
makes paper skew or jam.
2-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8-5)Set postcard and envelope in the cassette

Set postcard and envelope in the cassette. The following procedure is an example for the cassette 1.
2 Take out additional envelope guide.

Proceed to step 5 in case of using a postcard.
3 Open levers in case of using wider than Envelope C5 (162 mm W).
4 Attach the guide as shown in picture.
2-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Load the paper with the print side up.
2-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8-6)Set paper in the large capacity feeder

*: The following procedure is an example for the cassette 3.
2 Load paper.
CAUTION

2-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Insert the cassette all the way gentry.
NOTE
Default paper size is A4/Letter. Please see Operation guide for changing paper size. A4 to B5, A4 to Letter or
Letter to A4.
(See page page 9-213)
Run Maintenance mode U208 for paper size setting after change the size.
2-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8-7)Set paper in the side feeder
2 Load paper.
CAUTION

2-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Insert the cassette all the way gentry.
NOTE
Default paper size is A4/Letter. Please see Operation guide for changing paper size. A4 to B5, A4 to Letter or
Letter to A4.
Run Maintenance mode U208 for paper size setting after change the size.
2-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9)Connecting the Power Cord

1 Connect the power cord in the box to the main unit and the other end to a power outlet.
• Only use the power cord that comes with the main unit.
• Check if the main power switch is ON when the machine does not work.
(10)Turn power on
1 Open the switch cover (a) and turn the main switch (b) on.
ON
a b
2-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)Setting up the Toner Container

Set up 4 color toner containers of C, M, Y, and K. The procedures are same for all colors.
The following procedure is an example for Yellow toner container.
1 Open the front cover.
IMPORTANT
The container cover can not be opened unless the power is on. Turn on the power and release the container
cover lock then open the front cover.
2 Take out the new toner container.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the part with perforation by hand.
3 Slightly tap the toner container.
5~ 5~
2-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Shake the toner container.
5~
5~
5 Install the toner container.
CLICK!
6 Close the toner container cover.
7 Set the Cyan, Magenta and Black toner containers as well.
8 Close the front cover.
2-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12)Default Setting
The Machine Setup Wizard starts when the first power on and available of setting the necessary items. Also, it can be
set from System Menu as below.
[System Menu /Counter] key
Authentic./
Admin Logout
Select the function. System Menu

/Counter
Interrupt
Copy Send FAX Custom Box Numeric

Keypad
(12-1)Setting Date and Time

Set the local date and time at the place of installation to main unit.
1 Display the screen

[System Menu/Counter] key or [System Menu] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
2 Configure the settings

Set [Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]
Item Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Select the nearest location from the list. If you
select a region that utilizes summer time, set for summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. This date and time
is recorded on a mail header once sending mail with send function of main unit.
Setting value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),
Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in A.D.
Value: Month/ Day/ Year, Day/ Month/ Year, Year/ Month/ Day
(12-2)Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

TCP/IP (IPv4) Settings
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
The default settings are as follows.
• TCP/IP: On
• DHCP: On
• Auto-IP: On
• IP Address: 0.0.0.0
• Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
• Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting].
2-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Select [IPv4] for setting.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
Login with administrator privileges.
The factory default of login user name and login password are shown below.
Model Name Login User Name Login Password

25 ppm model 2500 2500
32 ppm model 3200 3200
35 ppm model 3500 3500
40 ppm model 4000 4000
50 ppm model 5000 5000
60 ppm model 6000 6000
In case of using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On].
• In case of setting the static IP address
[DHCP]: Set to [Off].
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet Mask]: Enter the address.
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
• In case of setting Auto IP address
Set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.
In case of setting the static IP address
Set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.
In case of using Host name with DHCP setting [OFF].
In case of using DNS server that is not given IP address from DHCP automatically.
Select [Auto (DHCP)] or [Manual] In case of selecting [Manual], input [DNS server (Primary)] and [DNS server
(Secondly)].
IMPORTANT
Restart the network from System Menu, or turn the power off and then on waiting 5 seconds or more.
2-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12-3)Paper size and media type setting
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP tray Settings].
2 Select [Cassette Setting] > [Cassette 1 (- 5) ] or [MP Tray Setting].
3 Select [Paper Size] and [Media Type] to set them.

(13)Installing Software
Install appropriate software in your PC from the bundled DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer
function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC. (See
the Operation Guide with the main unit)
(14)Set up for high altitude locations.
In case of setting up at high altitude location, run below.
Select Maintenance mode U952 > [Execute] > [High Altitude] and follow bellow.
Low-end model
1 Maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 - 2000m], [2001 - 3000m] or [3001 - 3500m].
2 Maintenance mode U140 > [Force Execute] > [Execute]

Press [Start] key.
3 Maintenance mode U464 > [Calib] > [Execute]

Press [Start] key.
High-end model
4 Maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 - 2000m], [2001 - 3000m] or [3001 - 3500m].
5 Maintenance mode U140 >[AC Calib] >[Calibration] >

Type: 0 (default), all C, M, Y and K have to be [ON] > [Execute]
Press [Start] key.
6 Maintenance mode U140 > [Force Execute] > [Execute]

Press [Start] key.
7 Maintenance mode U464 > [Calib] > [Execute]

Press [Start] key.
• Select [AC Calib] if the developer leak appears after setting the above.
Select U140 >[AC Calib] > [Magnification] and make the values of C, M, Y and K lower.
2-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15)Adjusting image
Adjust image with Maintenance mode work flow (Maintenance mode U952 )
1 Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2 Input "952" using the numeric keys and press {Start] key.
3 Select [Execute].
4 Select [Setup] for main unit and [EH Setup] for optional units.
5 Select maintenance modes listed on the display from top to bottom and press [Start] key to return to
maintenance mode.
6 Run following maintenance modes after back to maintenance mode.
7 Press [Stop] key to get back to flow after finish each modes.
8 Repeat step 5 to 7 and complete the flow.

• In case that not executing the U952, set them with procedures below individually.
(15-1)Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464)
1 Input "464" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
2 Select [Calib].
3 Press [Start] key.

• Calibration starts.
4 Press [Stop] key.

(15-2)Color registration adjustment (Maintenance mode U469)
2 Select [Auto]. Output the automatic adjustment chart.
3 Select [Execute].
4 Set the chart on the table and press [Start] key.

• Execute the automatic adjustment. [OK] is indicated when adjustment completes.
5 Press [Stop] key.
2-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15-3)Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
1 Input "410" using the numeric keys.

• Execution information screen is displayed.
• Output 3 charts (# 1 to 3) with A4/Letter size.
3 Place the test chart 1 on to platen glass table with face down and arrow side far.
• Put approximately 20 sheets of white paper on to the chart.

• The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
5 Repeat same procedures as step 3 and 4 with the rest of charts #2 and #3.
6 [Finish] appears after normal completion.
7 Press [Stop] key.

(15-4)Output Maintenance report (Maintenance mode U000)
2 Select [Maintenance] and press [Start] key to output the maintenance report.
3 Press [Stop] key.

(15-5)Clearing the counts (Maintenance mode U927)
2 Select [Execute].
3 Press [Start] key to clear the counter value.
4 Press [Stop] key.

(15-6)Setting the delivery date (Maintenance mode U278)
2 Select [Today].
3 Press [Start] key to set the delivery date.
4 Press [Stop] key.
2-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(16)Exiting from the maintenance mode

• Get out of the maintenance mode.
(17)Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off)
1 Make sure that each indicators are not blinking, and then turn the power switch off.
2 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

• It may take a few minutes for power off.
(18)Motion sensor
This machine equips a motion sensor that detects a user approaching to machine and recover from sleep or low power
mode automatically.
The detecting area can be changed with the lever located on the front.
1 Setting motion sensor

Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Motion sensor].
Value: [On], [Off]
NOTE
In case of selecting [On], set sensitivity of the sensor. The levels are
[1] (Low) to [3] (High)
2-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(19)Turn the power on again

1 Turn the power switch on.
• Check if the main power switch is ON when the machine does not work.
IMPORTANT
After turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait 5 seconds or more,
and then turn on the power switch.
2-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
2 - 3 Optional unit installation

(1)Unpacking and checking bundled items
Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove tapes and packing materials from the main unit.
(1-1)Paper Feeder (PF-7100)
12
9 10
14
11
8
15
13
15
15
1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
1 Main unit 7 Main unit cover 13 Front right upper pad

2 Outer case 8 Size label 14 Rear right upper pad
3 Left bottom pad 9 Screw 15 Support plate
4 Right bottom pad 10 Pins 16 Screw
5 Front inner frame 11 Front left upper pad
6 Rear inner frame 12 Rear left upper pad
2-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Large capacity feeder (PF-7110)
12
9 10
14
11
8
15 13
15
15 1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
1 Main unit 7 Main unit cover 13 Front right upper pad

2 Outer case 8 Size label 14 Rear right upper pad
3 Left bottom pad 9 Screw 15 Support plate
4 Right bottom pad 10 Pins 16 Screw
5 Front inner frame 11 Front left upper pad
6 Rear inner frame 12 Rear left upper pad
2-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Side Paper Feeder (PF-7120)
16
17
18
13
11
19
10
20
9 21
22
8 15 23
14 24 6
5
9
4
3 12
1 Outer case 9 Rear stay 17 Switch lever

2 Inner frame 10 Cover sheet 18 Lock support plate B
3 Bottom pad 11 Upper pad 19 Screws (M3x8 P-tite)
4 Bottom cushion 12 Size label 20 Screws (M4x8B S-tite)
5 Main unit 13 Attachment A 21 Cover plate
6 Main unit cover 14 Guide film A 22 Attachment B
7 Front right stay 15 Guide film B 23 Wrench
8 Front left stay 16 Lock support plate A 24 Installation guide
*: Not used in this model.
2-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-4)Document Processor (DP-7100)
16
17
18
7
12 13 14 15 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
1 Outer case 7 Original mat 13 DP cable cover rear

2 Rear bottom pad 8 Rear left upper pad 14 Hinge cover left
3 Front bottom pad 9 Rear right upper pad 15 Hinge cover right
4 Document Processor 10 Front left upper pad 16 Label
5 Plastic sheet 11 Front right upper pad 17 Screw
6 Original mat holder 12 DP cable cover front 18 Screw
2-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-5)Document Processor (DP-7110)
10 10
16
10 10 17
11
18
12
19 20 21 15 13
14
8 4 3
7
1 Outer case 8 Original mat 15 Cleaning cloth

2 Inner frame 9 DP relay PWB 16 Rear left upper pad
3 Rear bottom pad 10 Screw 17 Rear right upper pad
4 Front bottom pad 11 DP cable cover front 18 Front upper pad
5 Document Processor 12 DP cable cover rear 19 Angle control bracket
6 Plastic sheet 13 Hinge cover left 20 Right bracket
7 Original mat holder 14 Hinge cover right 21 Left bracket
2-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-6)Document Processor (DP-7120): Low-end model only
7 15
12 13 14 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
1 Outer case 6 Original mat holder 11 Front right upper pad

2 Rear bottom pad 7 Original mat 12 DP cable cover front
3 Front bottom pad 8 Rear left upper pad 13 DP cable cover rear
4 Document Processor 9 Rear right upper pad 14 Hinge cover
5 Plastic sheet 10 Front left upper pad 15 Label
2-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-7)Inner Finisher (DF-7100)
11
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 Outer case 5 Bottom spacer 9 Tray

2 Front bottom pad 6 Inner finisher 10 Staple cartridge
3 Rear bottom pad 7 Main unit cover 11 Screw
4 Right bottom pad 8 Top spacer
2-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-8)Attachment Kit (AK-7110)
4
10
11
2
2
13
12
8
9
7 5
1 Outer case 5 Rear pad 9 Left cover

2 Attachment Kit 6 Rock plate 10 Screw
3 Main unit cover 7 Main unit cover 11 Installation guide
4 Front pad 8 Rail
2-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-9)1,000-sheets Finisher (DF-7120)
10
4
6 18
19
16 17 15
14
5
20 11
20 20 13
1 12
3
20
20 2 20
1 Skid 8 Outer case 15 Staple cartridge

2 Front bottom pad 9 Front upper pad 16 Screw (M4x8)
3 Rear bottom pad 10 Rear upper pad 17 Screw (M4x8*)
4 1000-sheets Finisher 11 Right spacer 18 Connecting plate
5 Left spacer 12 Main tray 19 Installation guide
6 Protect sheet 13 Inner pad 20 Hinge
7 Main unit cover 14 Connector cover*
*: Not used in this model.
2-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-10)4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)
4
20 21
14
16 17 18 19
12
15
13
22 9
22 22
11
10
1 3
22
22 2 22
1 Skid 9 Right spacer 17 Screw (M4x8*)

2 Front bottom pad 10 Main tray 18 Connector cover*
3 Rear bottom pad 11 Inner pad 19 Tray label*
4 4,000-sheets Finisher 12 Ground plate* 20 Connecting plate
5 Main unit cover 13 Wire guide* 21 Installation guide
6 Outer case 14 Staple cartridge 22 Hinge
7 Front upper pad 15 Eject guide*
8 Rear upper pad 16 Screw (M4x8*)
2-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-11)Mailbox (MT-730(B))
16
17
11
13 14 15
10
12
8
9
7
4 5
5 4
1 Mailbox 7 Bottom pad 13 Upper front cover

2 Outer case 8 Side stay 14 Upper rear cover
3 Inner frame 9 Accessory case 15 Screw (M4x10)
4 Bottom pad 10 Tray 16 Tray label
5 Bottom pad 11 Plastic bag 17 Installation guide
6 Plastic sheet 12 Plastic bag
2-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-12)Booklet Unit (BF-730)
12
29
23 24 25 26 27 28
11
20
10
21
9 16
22 8 15
19 18 7
6
5
14
17 13
1 Outer case 9 Booklet bridge Unit 16 Guide 24 Screw (M4x8)

2 Bottom spacer 10 Spacer D 17 Spacer G 25 Screw (M4x10)
3 Spacer A 11 Spacer E 18 Output stock tray 26 Screw (M3x12)
4 Spacer B 12 Booklet eject tray 19 Spacer H 27 Lock plate
5 Booklet unit 13 Spacer F 20 Output stopper 28 Plastic band
6 Plastic sheet 14 Front rail 21 Front side cover 29 Installation guide
7 Top spacer 15 Rear rail 22 Rear side cover
8 Spacer C 23 Pin
2-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-13)Punch Unit (PH-7A/B/C/D)
6 7
8
1 Outer case 4 Upper pad 7 Drive unit

2 Bottom pad 5 Punch PWB 8 Waste punch box
3 Punch unit 6 Waste punch box guide
2-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-14)Punch Unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130)
11
10
5 4
3 1
1 Outer case 5 Front bottom pad 9 Waste punch box

2 Right bottom pad 6 Punch unit 10 Screw
3 Left bottom pad 7 Rear upper pad 11 Front right cover
4 Bottom pad 8 Upper pad
2-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-15)100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130)
8
7
7 6
6
4
3
15 16 17 18
5
12
2 13
19
21
14
20
11
9
10
22 22
22 22
2-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Skid 9 Right spacer 17 Screw (M4x8*)

2 Inner finisher 10 Main tray 18 Connector cover*
3 Protect sheet 11 Inner pad 19 Tray label*
4 Main unit cover 12 Ground plate* 20 Connecting plate
5 Outer case 13 Cartridge 21 Installation guide
6 Right stay 14 Eject guide* 22 Hinge
7 Left stay 15 Screw (M4x8*)
8 Upper pad 16 Screw (M4x10)
2-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-16)Booklet unit (BF-9100)
28 11
27
14 13
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
15 20
12 10
7
17
19
9
16 6 5 30
31
30 4
18
32 3
1 Outer case 9 Spacer D 17 Guide 25 Screw (M3x8)

2 Spacer A 10 Spacer E 18 Spacer I 26 Lock plate
3 Spacer B 11 Spacer F 19 Rear side cover 27 Plastic band
4 Booklet unit 12 Spacer G 20 Eject tray 28 Installation guide
5 Plastic sheet 13 Booklet Unit 21 Pins 29 Label
6 Top spacer 14 Spacer H 22 Screw (M4x8) 30 Spacer J
7 Spacer C 15 Front rail 23 Screw (M4x10) 31 Spacer K
8 Booklet bridge Unit 16 Rear rail 24 Screw (M3x12) 32 Spacer L
2-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Optional unit installation

Attach optional units to the main unit by following the installation procedures.
Product name Low-end High-end Installation
model model guide
Link
PF PF-7100 (500x2 Paper Feeder) x x PF-7100
PF-7110 (1500x2 Paper Feeder) x x PF-7110
PF-7120 (3000 Side Paper Feeder) x x PF-7120
DP DP-7100 (Document Processor (Reversing duplex x x DP-7100

scanning))
DP-7110/7130 (Document Processor (Dual x x DP-7110/ DP-7130

scanning))
DP-7120 (Document Processor (Reversing duplex x - DP-7120

scanning))
DF DF-7100 (Inner Finisher) x x DF-7100

PH-7100 / 7120/ 7130(Punch unit for DF-7100) x x PH-7100/7110/
7120/7130
AK-7110 (Attachment Kit) x x AK-7110
DF-7110 (4000-sheet Finisher) x x DF-7110
Mailbox(B) (Mailbox) x x MT-730(B)
BF-730 (Center-folding Unit) x x BF-730
DF-7120 (1,000-sheet Finisher) x x DF-7120
DF-7130 (100 sheet staple finisher) - x DF-7130
BF-9100 (Booklet for DF-7130) - x BF-9100
PH-7 (Punch unit for DF-7110/7120/7130) x x PH-7A/B/C/D
JOB SEPA JS-7100 (Job Separator Tray) x x JS-7100
Fax kit FAX System 12 x x FAX-System 12
Print kit Printing System 15* x x Printing-System
15
*:120V/230V only
2-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
2 - 4 Installing the optional equipment

(1)SD/SDHC memory card
Reading the SD/SDHC memory Card
The contents of the SD/SDHC memory card are read by the main unit after turning the power on.
SD/SDHC memory card installation
1 Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
• Before inserting the memory card, make sure that the power switch is off.
2 Remove the screw (a) (M3x8).
3 Release the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the SD card cover (c).
b c
a
b
4 Install an SD/SDHC memory card (a) in the memory card slot (b).
b
a
5 Reattach the covers.

Formatting an SD/SDHC Memory Card
New SD/SDHC card has to be formatted with main unit before using.
• Formatting will delete all existing data on the SD card.
If you have installed an application, do not format the SD card. The application may be deleted. Format with
PC in advance or prescribe command
2-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Hard disk (HD-12): (High-end model, 25/35 ppm model (120V) standard)
2 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding to the direction of the arrow.
IMPORTANT
Check if two gaskets (b) are affixed to the hard disk mounting plate (a) before installing it.
a
b
3 Connect two connectors (a) to the hard disk (e).
4 Latch two hooks (b) onto the aperture (c) and attach the hard disk (e) with four screws (d)(M3x8).
c
b b
a
d
d
d
e
d
5 Connect two connectors (a) of the hard disk to two connectors (b) of the main PWB.
2-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Fix the wire (c) with two wire saddle (d) and four wire stopper (d).
b
a
b
a
d
e
c
d
7 Reattach the parts to the original position.
• Formatting will start automatically at the first start-up when new HDD is installed.
• In case that Fax box has data, the memory LED blinks because of forming a preview image into the HDD after
restart.
2-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Formatting a hard disk

1 Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
3 Select [Format].
4 Select [Full].
5 Select [Execute].
6 Press [Start] key to initialize.
7 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
• Formatting HDD is required at first time for the new optional HDD.
Formatting will delete all existing data on the HDD.
2-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50)

(4)Wireless LAN interface (IB-51)
2 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the option slot cover (b).
3 Insert the PWB unit (b) straight into the option slot (c).
4 Secure the PWB unit (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8) that removed in step 2.
a
a
b
• Install it in the upper slot.
2-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Wireless LAN interface (IB-35)

Wireless LAN interface (IB-35) (1503RR0UN0) 1 pc
Accessories
• PWB unit 1 pc
• Screw (M3x6) 1 pc
3 Open it if the DP is installed.
5 Remove the DP rear cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
6 Insert the FPC (b) of the PWB unit (a) into the aperture (c) of the shield box.
2-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Connect the connector (d) to the connector (f) of the main PWB (e).
a
a
b
c e
d
f
8 Secure the PWB unit (b) with a screw (a) (M3x6).
9 Reattach the DP rear cover (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8).
2-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Latch seven hooks (b) and attach the upper rear cover (a) with the screw (c) (M3x10).
2-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Document table (DT-730(B))
Document table DT-5100 (1902LC0UN2) 1 pc
Accessories
• Tray stay 1 pc
• Tray mounting plate 1 pc
• Tray cover 1 pc
• Tray lower cover 1 pc
• Tray fixing plate 1 pc
• Sheet 2
pcs
• Pins 2
pcs
• Nut M4 2 pc
• Screw (M4x8 screw with the binding head) 7 pc
• Screw (M4x14 screw with the binding head) 2

pcs
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Open the right cover (a).
3 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8).
4 Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
2-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6 Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c) (M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
7 Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
8 Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
2-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a) (M4×8).
a
c
10Attach the tray lower cover (a).
11Secure the tray lower cover (a) by two pins (b).
B B
A
B B
b
b
12Affix the two sheet (b) on the document table (a).
b
A
A
B
B A
B
B
2-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)Numeric Keypad (NK-7120/NK-7130)
Numeric Keypad 1 pc
NK-7120 (1903T00UN0)
NK-7130 (1903T00US0)
Accessories
• Numeric Keypad 1 pc
• Numeric Keypad cover 1 pc
• Screw (M3x8) 2 pc
• Label 1 pc
2 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8) from the operation unit (a).
3 Release two hooks (c), and then remove the operation unit lid (d) in the direction of the arrow.
a c d
2-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Connect the connector (b) of the numeric keypad (a) to the connector (c) of the operation unit.
b
a
5 Latch two hooks (b) on the cut-out (c) of the operation unit, and then attach the numeric keypad (a) with two
screws (d) (M3x8).
c
b
a
a
d
6 Slid the cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and latch two hooks (b), and secure the screw (c)(M3x8) that
removed in step 2.
b a c
2-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Affix the label (b) on the numeric keypad (a).
IMPORTANT
Check if shape of label and position are same and affix the label.
2-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)ID card reader
Accessories
• Label 1 pc
IC card reader holder installation requires the following

parts.
• Sponge (302N40446*) 2 pc
• hook-and-loop fasteners A (303LL0253*) 2 pcs
• hook-and-loop fasteners B (303MX0202*) 2 pcs
A and B is a pair.
2 Get the operation panel (a) straight.
3 Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) and pull it to the front side then remove four
lower hooks (d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow then take it away.
2
a
d
2-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade screwdriver (c).
6 Detach the eject upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
7 Affix two sponges (b) and a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to holder (a) on the main unit.
8 Affix card reader (d) to the hook-and-loop fasteners (c).
a
b
c
c d
d
*1: 100V only
9 Connect the USB connector (b) to the lower USB interface slot (c).
2-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Bundle the extra part of the cable (d) and hook it on the hook (f) of the main unit.
c
e
b
c
d
a b
IMPORTANT
Pay attention the direction of USB connector.
11Insert the upper eject cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a) (M3×8).
• Align the upper eject cover (b) to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
12Affix a label (c) on the ISU front right cover (b) aligning it with the positioning mark (a).
b
a
c
2-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
13Attach the IC card reader cover. Latch six upper hooks (b) and then four latch lower hooks (e) by rotate it.
Reattach the ISU front right cover in the original position.
Activating Card Authentication

License key code is needed to install. Please access the designated website of your dealer or service
representative, and register the "Machine No." indicated on your machine and the "Product ID" indicated on the
License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key.
Refer to [Optional Application] when starting the trial. (See pagepage 2-113)
2-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9)USB keyboard (120V/230V model only)
Keyboard holder 10 (1709AN0UN0) 1 pc
Accessories
• Upper keyboard mounting bracket 1 pc
• Lower keyboard mounting bracket 1 pc
• Upper keyboard cover 1 pc
• Lower keyboard cover 1 pc
• Upper lid 1 pc
• Lower lid 1 pc
• Hook-and-loop fastener 2 pairs
• Binding band 1 pc
• Screws (M3x8 S-tite)?1 6 pc
• Screws (M3x8 S-tite Black) 2 pcs
• Screws (M3x8 P-tite) 2 pcs
• Screws (M4x8B S-tite) 4 pc
• Screws (M4x14 S-tite)?2 2 pcs
*1: 4 pc is used for this model.

*2: Not used in this model.
2 Fix the upper keyboard mounting bracket onto the lower keyboard mounting bracket with the four screws (a)
(M3x8).
2-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Align them with each other at the mark B.

a
a
a
a
c
3 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8).
4 Release two hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
5 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8) of the ISU rear cover (a).
6 Remove two screws (d) (M3x8) of the ISU left cover (c).
2-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Lift up the left side of the ISU rear cover (a) and remove the ISU left cover (c).
d c
d
8 Pull up the operation unit (a).
9 Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower
hooks (d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
10Remove the screw (a) (M3x8).
11Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade screwdriver (c).
2-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12Detach the eject upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
14Release the hook (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b), and then remove the keyboard cover (d) by sliding it.
a
d
c
15Pass the arm of attaching keyboard mounting bracket (a) through the machine aperture (b) and latch the hook
(c) to the aperture (d). Secure the keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (e) (M4×8).
e e
a
c
b d
2-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
16Secure the lower keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (b) (M4x8).
b
b
a
17Latch the hook (b) of the lower lid (a) in the hole (c) of the lower keyboard mounting plate and secure it with the
screw (d) (M3x8, black).
• Attach it aligning the hooks to the punch mark B.
b c b
a
d
18Insert two positioning pins (b) of lower keyboard cover (a) into the holes (d) of the upper keyboard mounting
plate (c) and slide it to the rear.
19Insert the lower keyboard cover (a) into three hooks (e) on the keyboard mounting plate (a) and two cutouts (f).
f
e
a
c d
2-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20Fix the lower keyboard mounting bracket (b) onto the upper keyboard mounting bracket (c) with two screws (a)
(M3x8 P-tite).
c
b
21Insert the upper keyboard cover (a) into the upper keyboard mounting plate (b) to attach it.
22Fix the Upper lid (b) to the lower keyboard mounting bracket (C) with the screw (a) (M3x8 Black).
b a
c
2-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
23Affix a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to the concave (b) of the upper keyboard cover (a).
24Place the keyboard (a) on the hook-and-loop fastener (b) and press it to fix.
25Connect the USB connector (c) to the upper USB interface slot (d).
d
c
d
c
a b
IMPORTANT
Pay attention the direction of USB connector.
26Bundle the extra cable (a) and hook it on the hook (b) of the main unit.
b
2-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• In case that the card reader (a) is already installed, remove the USB wire (b) of the card reader from the hook
(c) of the main unit. Bundle two of the extra USB wires and hook them on the hook (c) of the main unit again.
c
c
b
27Push the USB cable (a) to between the ribs of main unit and secure it.
b a
b
28Insert the upper eject cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a) (M3×8).
• Align the cover to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
2-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
29Latch six upper hooks (b) and then four latch lower hooks (e) by rotate it. Reattach the ISU front right cover in
the original position.
30Lift up the left side of ISU rear cover (a) and secure the left ISU cover (c) in original position with two screws (d)
(M3×8).
31Reattach the screw (b) (M3×8) of the ISU rear cover (a).
d c
2-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
32Latch two hooks (c) and reattach the left rear cover (b) in the original position with two screws (a) (M3x8).
b
2-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10)Handset (100V model only)
Handset (1909AG9JP0) 1 pc
Accessories
• Handset 1 pc
• Handset holder 1 pc
• Handset mounting plate*1 1 pc
• Protection cover*1 1 pc
• Pins 2 pcs
• Telephone wire 1 pc
• Modular cord 1 pc
• Nut M4 2 pc
Document table DT-5100 (1902LC0UN2) 1 pc
Accessories
• Tray stay 1 pc
• Tray mounting plate 1 pc
• Tray cover 1 pc
• Tray lower cover 1 pc
• Tray fixing plate 1 pc
• Sheet?1 2 pcs
• Pins 2 pcs
• Nut M4 2 pc
• Screw (M4x8 screw with the binding head) 7 pc
• Screw (M4x14 screw with the binding head) 2 pcs
*1: Not used in this model.
2 Remove the right cover (a).
2-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
5 Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6 Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c) (M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
7 Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
2-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
9 Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
c
10Remove two pins (b) and two nuts (c) from the handset mounting plate (a).
2-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Secure the original tray (d) with two pins and two nuts in step 10.
b
b
A
A
B
A A
a B
A
B
c
d
c
12Put two catches (c) at the backside of the handset holder (b) into two pins (a) and slide it toward you to fix it on
the document tray (d).
c
B
A
b A
A
B
A B
A
B
a B
13Cut the separator cover (b) of the tray lower cover (a) with pliers, etc.
2-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
14Attach the tray lower cover (a).
15Secure the tray lower cover (a) by two pins (b).
A A
B B
A A
B B
b
b
16Affix the sheet (b) on the left side of document table (a).
a
b
A
A
B
B A
A
B
B
17Connect the telephone wire (a) to the handset (b) and handset holder (c).
b
B
A
2-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
18Connect the modular cord (a) to the handset holder (b).
19Connect one end of the connector (b) of the modular cord (a) to the machine right side (c).
a b
c
2-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)Cassette heater
(11-1)In the case of main unit cassette (120V/230V models only)
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:

Cassette heater 100 set (302ND9471_) 1 pc
Cassette heater 120 set (302ND9472_)
Cassette heater 240 set (302ND9473_)
Accessories
• Cassette heater 100 1 pc
• High temperature caution label 1 pc
• Screws (M3x8 with the binding head) 2 pc
2 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
a
4 Insert the cassette heater (a) and put two protrusions (b) in two apertures (c) of the rear side plate.
2-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Attach it with the screw (e) (M3×8) to the base (d).
b
e
b
d
6 Connect the heater connector (a) to the main unit side connector (b).
7 Put the cable (c) into the rib of the heater holder (d) and fix it.
b
ac
d
8 Reattach the parts in the original position.
9 Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
• The setting works after exit maintenance mode and turn off and on.
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is still supplied when the power is
switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh]
2-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11-2)In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7100)

Cassette heater 100 set (303RB9404_) 1 pc
Cassette heater 120 set (303RB9405_)
Accessories
• Cassette heater 120
• Wire saddles 4 pc
2 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3 Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
b
4 Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
5 Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles
(d).
2-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Make sure the wire does not float.
c b
d b
6 Affix the caution label (a) on the groove of the base.
8 Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is
switched off)
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11-3)In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7110)

Cassette heater 100 set (303RB9404_) 1 pc
Accessories
• Wire saddles 4 pc
2 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4 Pull out the right paper deck (c) and left paper deck (d) from the paper feeder (f).
a e
b
G
c f
5 Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
2-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles
(d).
7 Make sure the wire does not float.
b
c
b
8 Affix the caution label (a) on the groove of the base.
10Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
IMPORTANT
switched off)
2-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12)In case of Side Paper Feeder (PF-7120)

Cassette heater 100 set (303RL9404_) 1 pc
Cassette heater 120 set (303RL9405_)
Cassette heater 240 set (303RL9406_)
Accessories
• Cassette heater 100 assembly 1 pc
• Cassette heater 120 assembly
• Cassette heater 240 assembly
• Wire saddles 4 pcs
• Edge saddle 1 pc
• Screws (M3x8 with the binding head) 4 pcs
(Side Paper Feeder side)

2 Remove the connector of the paper feeder at the main unit side.
3 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear cover (b).
a
a
a
2-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Pull out the cassette (a).
5 Release four pins (a) and remove the right cover (b) while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
b a
a
a
6 Pass the heater cassette cable (a) through the aperture.
7 Insert the hook (d) of the cassette heater set (c) into two grooves (e) and secure it with two screws (M3×8) (f).
de
a
d
e
b
f
c
8 Connect the connector (b) of cassette heater wire (a) to the connector (c) of the inlet cable.
9 Attach two wire saddles (d) and the edge saddles (e) and secure the wire.
2-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Attach the right cover and the rear cover.
e
c
a
d
Main unit side

11Remove two screws (a) (M3×8) and remove the cover plate (c) from the main unit side paper feeder (b).
a
c
12 Connect the connector (b) of the heater outlet set (a) to the paper feeder side connector (c).
13Attach the heater outlet set (a) with two screws (d) (M3×8).
c
d
a
2-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
14Connect the side feeder (a) to the main unit side paper feeder (b) with the AC cord (c) and the connector wire
(d).
a b
15Reattach the parts in the original position.
16Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
IMPORTANT
switched off)
2-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13)Coin Vendor (option for 100v model only)
(13-1)Low-end model
Coin vendor installation requires the following parts:
Coin Vendor (1905H99JP0) 1 pc
Accessories
• Vendor wire 1 pc
• Vendor base 1 pc
• Screws (M4x6) 4 pc
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.7
2 Attach the vendor base (b) to coin vendor (c) with four screws (a) (M4x6).
c
b
a
3 Remove the rear lower cover.
4 Remove two screws (a) and remove the concealing lid (b).
5 Remove the cable stopper (d) securing the vendor relay cable (b).
a
b a
6 Pass the vendor wire (a) through the aperture (b).
7 Secure the vendor cable (a) with two screws (c) once removed in step 4.
2-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Connect the connector (d) of the vendor cable (a) to the connector (e) of the vendor relay cable.
e
a
b
c
9 Secure the vendor relay cable (b) at a cable stopper (a) which was removed.
10Remove the screw (a) and attach the ground terminal (b) of the vendor cable.
a
a
11Reattach the lower rear cover in the original position.
2-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12Connect the signal wire of the coin vendor to the connector of the vendor wire.
13Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13-2)High-end model
Coin vendor installation requires the following parts:
Vendor relay wire (302NL4631*) 1 pc
Coin Vendor (1905H99JP0) 1 pc
Accessories
• Vendor wire 1 pc
• Vendor base 1 pc
• Screws (M4x6) 4 pc
2 Attach the vendor base (b) to coin vendor (c) with four screws (a) (M4x6).
c
b
a
2-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Push down the lower rear cover (c), release the upper side rib, and release the lower hook (d) while lifting it up
slightly opened. After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
1
c
d 3
7 Release two hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
2-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (c) into the front side aperture (b) and widen it in the direction of the arrow to
release four hooks (d) and to remove the upper left cover (e).
a
d
e
d d
b
b
11Pull out the lower cassette.
12Remove four screws (a) (M3x8).
13Lift up three hooks (c) and release them. Then remove the lower left cover (b).
c
b
c c c
a
a
b
a
2-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
14Remove two screws (a) and remove the concealing lid (b).
a
b a
15Pass the vendor wire (a) through the aperture (b).
16Secure the vendor cable (a) with two screws (c) once removed in step 5.
a
b
c
17Remove one screw (a) and attach to the earth terminal (b) of the vendor wire.
2-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
18Connect the connector (b) of the vendor relay wire (a) to the connector (d) (YC21) of the engine PWB (c).
a b
YC1 YC29
YC36
YC16
d YC43
YS1 YC38
YC6
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
YC39 YC23
YC33
YC9 YC10 YC34 YC22

YC4 YC27 YC21
19Pass the vendor relay wire (a) through the wire saddle (b) and the edge saddle (c).
20Remove four wire stoppers (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
2-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
21Connect the connector (c) of the vendor relay wire to the vendor wire (d).
c a
22Remove wire stopper (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
23Reattach the left lower cover to the original position.
24Reattach the left upper cover to the original position.
25Reattach the rear left cover to the original position.
26Reattach the lower rear cover in the original position.
27Reattach the rear upper cover to the original position.
2-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
28Connect the signal wire of the coin vendor to the connector of the vendor wire.
29Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14)Banner Tray
Installation of banner tray requires the following parts:

Banner Guide 10 (1203RP0UN0) 1 pc
Accessories
• Tray base 1 pc
• paper guide A 1 pc
• paper guide B 1 pc
• paper guide C 1 pc
1 Attach the paper guide A (b), the paper guide B (c) and the paper guide C (d) to the tray base (a).
d
b
c
2 Unlock the stopper (a) and move it outward.
2-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Open the multi purpose tray (a).
4 Put the banner tray (a) on the MP tray (b) and attach sliding in the direction of the arrow till locking.
2-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > About Optional Applications
2 - 5 About Optional Applications

Application
Data Security Kit Internet FAX kit
Card Authentication Kit*1 Emulation upgrade kit
ThinPrint Option*1 OCR extension kit*1
*1: This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period are different in
each applications.
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Use of an Application
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
Login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name Login User Name Login Password

25 ppm model 2500 2500
32 ppm model 3200 3200
35 ppm model 3500 3500
40 ppm model 4000 4000
50 ppm model 5000 5000
60 ppm model 6000 6000
2 Select the desired application to start use and select [Activate].

• You can see detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Details].
Item
Function
License
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
3 Select [Official] and enter a license key.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to Step 4.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
2-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > About Optional Applications
4 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
NOTE
If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON. Icons of
activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
2-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical Configuration
3 Machine Design
3 - 1 Mechanical Configuration
(1)Cross-section view (Low-end model)
11
7 6 8
10
12
5
3
2
Light path Paper path Paper path (option)
1 Cassette paper feed 5 Laser scanner unit 9 Transfer and separation section
section
6 Developer unit 10 Fuser section
2 MP paper feed section
7 Toner container 11 Exit and branch section
3 Paper conveying section
8 Drum unit 12 Duplex conveying section
4 Image scanner unit
3-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical Configuration
(2)Cross-section view (High-end model)
11
7 6 8
10
12
5 3
2
Light path Paper path Paper path (option)
1 Cassette paper feed 5 Laser scanner unit 9 Transfer and separation section
section
6 Developer unit 10 Fuser section
2 MP paper feed section
7 Toner container 11 Exit and branch section
3 Paper conveying section
8 Drum unit 12 Duplex conveying section
4 Image scanner unit
3-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
3 - 2 Extension device construction (optional)

(1)Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100)
Paper path (option) 2

1 Upper feed section (Cassette 3) 2 Lower feed section (Cassette 4)
(2)Large capacity feeder cross-section view (PF-7110)
2 3 1
Paper path (option)
1 Right feed section (Cassette 3) 3 Paper conveying section

2 Left feed section (Cassette 4)
3-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Side Deck cross-section view (PF-7120)

1
Paper path (option)
1 Feed section (Cassette 5)
3-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100)

2 1
3 Paper path (option)
1 DP feed section 3 DP exit switchback section

2 DP conveying section

2 1
3
Paper path (option)
1 DP feed section 3 DP exit section

3-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Document processor cross-section view (DP-7120) : Low-end model only

2 1
Paper path (option)
1 DP feed section 3 DP exit switchback section


2 1
3
Paper path (option)
1 DP feed section 3 DP exit section

3-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)Attachment Kit (AK-7110)

1
2
Paper path (option)
1 BR exit section 2 BR conveying section
(9)Inner finisher cross-section view (DF-7100)

2 3 5
4
Paper path (option)
1 DF exit section 4 Staple unit

2 DF conveying section 5 Punch unit (optional)
3 DF switchback section
3-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10)4000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7110)

4 2 1
Paper path (option)
1 Punch unit 4 Exit section (Tray B)

2 DF conveying section 5 Exit section (Tray A)
3 Staple unit
3-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)1000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120)

2 1
4
Paper path (option)
1 Punch unit 4 Exit section (Main tray)

2 DF conveying section
3 Staple unit
3-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12)Mailbox cross-section view (MT-730(B))

2
Paper path (option)
1 Paper conveying section 3 Exit section (Tray B)

2 Exit section (Mail tray)
3-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13)Folding unit cross-section view (BF-730)
4 3 2
Paper path (option)
1 Paper conveying section 3 Paper folding section

2 Staple unit 4 Exit section
3-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14)100 sheet staple finisher cross-section view (DF-7130)

DF-BF-PH
3 2 1 10
5
6 9 8 7
1 DF finishing section 6 Folding unit

2 Exit section (Tray B) 7 BF staple unit
3 Exit section (Tray A) 8 BF fold section
4 DF staple unit 9 BF conveying section
5 BF bridge section 10 BF punch unit
3-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15)Job separator cross-section view (JS-7100)

1
Paper path (option)
1 Exit section (Tray)
3-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
3 - 3 Electric parts
(1)Electric parts layout
High model Low model
2
2
1 1
4
4
5 5
3
3
1 Main PWB 4 Feed image PWB

2 Engine PWB 5 Feed drive PWB
3 Main high-voltage PWB
3-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Descriptions about the major PWBs

(2-1)Main PWB
High Model Low Model
Controlling the entire firmware to control the interface to the PC and network and image data process, etc.
(2-2)Engine PWB
High Model
Low Model
3-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
It controls the hardware such as high-voltage/bias output, the image scanner unit, and the paper conveying system.
(2-3)Main high-voltage PWB
Output high voltage for main charger, developer and transfer bias.
(2-4)Transfer high-voltage PWB
Output the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer cleaning bias.
3-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-5)Power supply PWB

100-240V 100-240V
The input voltage (AC) from the AC power supply is changed to DC such as DC24V, and it controls the fuser heater.
(2-6)IH PWB
100-120V
220-240V
IH PWB controls heat up system for fusing belt.
3-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-7)Operation panel main PWB
High Model
Low Model
This PWB controls LCD, LED indicators and keys on operation panel.
(2-8)Fuser high-voltage PWB
Output high voltage for fuser unit.
3-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)PWBs
(3-1)Locations
Developer unit Primary transfer unit
9
19
18
17
16
12
Laser scanner unit 13
Drum unit
24 Main unit
14 28 15 1
23 26
22 8 2
21
30
IH unit Fuser unit
3
10 29
27
11
25 7
4
20 31
Front side: / Inside: / Back side: 6 5
3-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Main PWB Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC and network
and image data process, etc. Controlling the entire hardware to control
operation section.
2 Engine PWB Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high voltage, bias output,
image scanner unit, paper conveying, fuser temperature, etc.
3 Feed image PWB Consisting of the engine PWB and wiring relay circuit for drum units, developer
units, fuser drive section and exit drive section.
4 Feed drive PWB Relay circuit for engine PWB and paper feed/conveying drive section.
5 Main high-voltage PWB Generating main charger bias and developer bias.
6 Power supply PWB Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to DC.
7 Transfer connect PWB Relay circuit for feed image PWB and transfer PWB.
8 Transfer high-voltage PWB Generating the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer cleaning bias.
9 Transfer PWB Storing individual information on EEPROM. Relay board the belt cleaning motor/
belt thermistor and feed image PWB.
10 Operation panel main PWB Relay board for the main PWB, the operation panel sub PWB and the LCD.
11 Operation panel sub PWB Board for LED indicator and the key switches.
12 APC PWB Generate and control the laser beam.
13 PD PWB Control the laser beam synchronize timing.
14 LED PWB Controlling the LED.
15 CCD PWB Scanning the original image.
16 Developer PWB K Relay board for the electric parts inside developer unit, and storing developer
information on EEPROM.
17 Developer PWB M Relay board for the electric parts inside developer unit, and storing developer
18 Developer PWB C Relay board for the electric parts inside developer unit, and storing developer
19 Developer PWB Y Relay board for the electric parts inside developer unit, and storing developer
20 Drum/Developer relay PWB Relay board for the feed image PWB and drum units/developer units.
21 Drum PWB K Relay board for the electric parts inside drum unit, and storing the drum
22 Drum PWB M Relay board for the electric parts inside drum unit, and storing the drum
23 Drum PWB C Relay board for the electric parts inside drum unit, and storing the drum
24 Drum PWB Y Relay board for the electric parts inside drum unit, and storing the drum
25 Fuser PWB Relay board for the electric parts inside fuser unit, and storing the fuser
26 IH PWB Controlling the fuser IH.
27 NFC PWB Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
28 RFID PWB Reading the toner container information.
29 USB hub PWB USB slot distribution.
3-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
30 KUIO relay PWB Relay board for the main PWB and FAX PWB.
31 Fuser high-voltage PWB Discharge the fuser belt.
3-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-2)Parts name table (PWB)
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
1 Main PWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 302V89401* *1, *6

PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY EU SP 302V89402* *1, *5
PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 302VH9401* *2, *6
PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY EU SP 302VH9402* *2, *5
2 Engine PWB PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP 302V89403* *1

PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP 302VH9403* *2
3 Feed image PWB PARTS PWB FEED IMAGE ASSY SP 302V89404* *1

PARTS PWB FEED IMAGE ASSY SP 302VH9404* *2
4 Feed drive PWB PARTS PWB FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302ND9428* *1

PARTS PWB FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302L79404* *2
5 Main high-voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SP 302ND9463* *1

PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SP 302L79415* *2
6 Power supply PWB PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE SP 302V89410* *1

PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE SP 302VH9407* *2
7 Transfer connect PWB PARTS PWB TRANSFER CONNECT ASSY SP 302ND9429*
8 Transfer high-voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFER SP 302ND9464*
9 Transfer PWB - -
(TR-8550) (302ND9315*)
10 Operation panel main PWB PARTS PWB PANEL ASSY SP 302V89405* *1

(PARTS OPERATION UNIT H SP) (302V89412*) *1
PARTS PWB PANEL ASSY SP 302VH9405* *2
(PARTS OPERATION UNIT L SP) (302VH9410*) *2
11 Operation panel sub PWB PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP 302V89406*

12 APC PWB - -
(LK-8550) (302ND9313*)
(LK-8350) (302L79311*)
13 PD PWB - -
(LK-8550) (302ND9313*)
(LK-8350) (302L79311*)
14 LED PWB PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 302V69308*
15 CCD PWB - -
(PARTS ISU ASSY SP) (302V89301*)
16 Developer PWB K - -
(DV-8560K) (302V89302*) *1, *4
(DV-8560K (J)) (302V89J02*) *1, *3
(DV-8350K) (302L79301*) *2, *4
(DV-8350K (J)) (302L79J01*) *2, *3
3-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
17 Developer PWB M - -
(DV-8560M) (302V89303*) *1, *4
(DV-8560M (J)) (302V89J03*) *1, *3
(DV-8350M) (302L79302*) *2, *4
(DV-8350M (J)) (302L79J02*) *2, *3
18 Developer PWB C - -
(DV-8560C) (302V89304*) *1, *4
(DV-8560C (J)) (302V89J04*) *1, *3
(DV-8350C) (302L79303*) *2, *4
(DV-8350C (J)) (302L79J03*) *2, *3
19 Developer PWB Y - -
(DV-8560Y) (302V89305*) *1, *4
(DV-8560Y (J)) (302V89J05*) *1, *3
(DV-8350Y) (302L79304*) *2, *4
(DV-8350Y (J)) (302L79J04*) *2, *3
20 Drum/Developer relay PWB PARTS PWB DRUM DLP CONNECT ASSY SP 302ND9407* *1
PARTS PWB DRUM DLP CONNECT ASSY SP 302L79403* *2
21 Drum PWB K - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
22 Drum PWB M - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
23 Drum PWB C - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
24 Drum PWB Y - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
25 Fuser PWB - -
(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
26 IH PWB PARTS PWB IH 100 ASSY SP 302ND9430* *6

PARTS PWB IH 200 ASSY SP 302ND9431* *5
27 NFC PWB PARTS PWB NFC ASSY SP 302RH9405*
28 RFID PWB PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP 302ND9426*
29 USB hub PWB PARTS PWB USB HUB ASSY SP 302RH9402*
30 KUIO relay PWB PARTS PWB KUIO ASSY SP 302K99427*
31 Fuser high-voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE FUSER SP 302ND9469*
*1: High-end model, *2: Low-end model, *3: 100V *4: 120V, 220V-240V, *5: 220V-240V, *6: 100V, 120V
3-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Sensors and Switches

(4-1)Locations
Developer unit 25 24 23 22 Primary transfer unit
30
38
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
Main unit
Fuser unit 28 29 65 64 15 63 62 14
IH unit 33
43
44
45
52
50
42
56
26 11
32 41 40 46 49
48 27 31
66
55 47
34 58 37 16
7 9
51 4
60 20
17 53
35
61 1
8 3
39 12
57
6
5 2 36 54
Front side: / Inside: / Back side:
59 10 18 21 13 19
3-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 MP paper sensor 1 Detecting paper in the cassette 1.
2 MP paper sensor 2 Detecting paper in the cassette 2.
3 Lower paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 1.
4 Upper paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 1.
5 Lower paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 2.
6 Upper paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 2.
7 Paper length sensor 1 Detecting the paper length in the cassette 1.
8 Paper length sensor 2 Detecting the paper length in the cassette 2.
9 Paper width sensor 1 Detecting the paper width in the cassette 1.
10 Paper width sensor 2 Detecting the paper width in the cassette 2.
11 Duplex sensor 1 Detecting paper jam at the duplex section.
12 Duplex sensor 2 Detecting paper jam at the duplex section.
13 Conveying sensor Paper jam at the conveying section
14 Original size sensor Detecting the original size
15 Home position sensor Detecting the position of the image scanner unit.
16 Rear ID sensor Measuring the image density at the calibration.
17 ID sensor front Measuring the image density at the calibration.
18 MP tray sensor Detecting the MP tray open.
19 MP paper sensor Detecting paper on the MP tray.
20 MP paper length sensor Detecting the MP paper length.
21 MP paper width sensor Detecting the MP paper width.
22 T/C sensor K Detecting the toner concentration in the developer unit and store
information on EEPROM (Black)
23 T/C sensor M Detecting the toner concentration in the developer unit and store
information on EEPROM (Magenta)
24 T/C sensor Detecting the toner concentration in the developer unit and store
information on EEPROM (Cyan)
25 T/C sensor Y Detecting the toner concentration in the developer unit and store
information on EEPROM (Yellow)
26 Toner level sensor K Detecting the toner level in the developer unit (Black)
27 Toner level sensor M Detecting the toner level in the developer unit (Magenta)
28 Toner level sensor C Detecting the toner level in the developer unit (Cyan)
29 Toner level sensor Y Detecting the toner level in the developer unit (Yellow)
30 Belt thermistor Detecting the transfer belt temperature.
31 Belt release sensor Detecting the transfer belt release position.
32 Front belt rotation sensor Detecting the fuser rotation position
33 Rear belt rotation sensor Detecting the fuser rotation position
34 Belt roll-up sensor Detecting the transfer belt roll-up
3-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
35 Lift upper limit sensor 1 Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the cassette
1.
36 Lift upper limit sensor 2 Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the cassette
2.
37 Registration sensor Controlling the timing to start the secondary paper feeding.
38 LSU thermistor Detecting the LSU temperature.
39 Weight detection sensor Detecting the waste toner box weight
40 Fuser jam sensor Detecting the paper jam at the fuser section.
41 Press-release sensor Detecting the mode of the fuser pressure.
42 IH position sensor *1 Detecting the IH core home position.
43 Fuser thermistor 1 (Middle) Detecting the fuser belt temperature. (Middle)
44 Fuser thermistor 2 (Center) Detecting the fuser belt temperature. (Center)
45 Fuser thermistor 3 (Edge) Detecting the fuser belt temperature. (Edge)
46 Fuser thermistor 4 (Press) Detecting the press roller temperature.
47 Exit reversing sensor Detecting jam at the exit section.
48 Lower exit full sensor Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
49 Upper exit full sensor Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
50 JS sensor Paper full detection of Job separator and AK unit.
51 Front cover switch Detecting the right cover open/close.
52 Original size timing sensor Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
53 PF switch Detecting the paper feeder.
54 Main power switch AC power shutdown.
55 Power switch Turning on and off for the main, engine and operation panel PWB, etc.
56 Conveying open/close switch Detecting the conveying section open/close.
57 Right cover switch Shutting off the 24V power supply when the right cover open.
58 Temperature/humidity sensor Detecting the external temperature and humidity
59 MP position switch Detect the position of MP lift plate.
60 PF cassette switch 1 Detecting the cassette 1.
61 PF cassette switch 2 Detecting the cassette 2.
62 Toner motor sensor K Detect toner motor K driving
63 Toner motor sensor M Detect toner motor M driving
64 Toner motor sensor C Detect toner motor C driving
65 Toner motor sensor Y Detect toner motor Y driving
66 Motion sensor Detect approaching person
3-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-2)Part name table (Sensors and Switches)
1 MP paper sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
2 MP paper sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
3 Lower paper gauge sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
4 Upper paper gauge sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
5 Lower paper gauge sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
6 Upper paper gauge sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
7 Paper length sensor 1 SW. PUSH 7SP03090001+H01
8 Paper length sensor 2 SW. PUSH 7SP03090001+H01
9 Paper width sensor 1 SW. PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
10 Paper width sensor 2 SW. PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
11 Duplex sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
12 Duplex sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
13 Conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
14 Original size sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302ND9480*
15 Home position sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
16 Rear ID sensor PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9414*
17 ID sensor front PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9414*
18 MP tray sensor SW. PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
19 MP paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
20 MP paper length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
21 MP paper width sensor PARTS PWB PAPER SIZE SENSOR ASSY SP 303R39405*
22 T/C sensor K - -
(DV-8560K) (302V89302*) *1, *4
(DV-8560K (J)) (302V89J02*) *1, *3
(DV-8350K) (302L79301*) *2, *4
(DV-8350K (J)) (302L79J01*) *2, *3
23 T/C sensor M - -
(DV-8560M) (302V89303*) *1, *4
(DV-8560M (J)) (302V89J03*) *1, *3
(DV-8350M) (302L79302*) *2, *4
(DV-8350M (J)) (302L79J02*) *2, *3
24 T/C sensor C - -
(DV-8560C) (302V89304*) *1, *4
(DV-8560C (J)) (302V89J04*) *1, *3
(DV-8350C) (302L79303*) *2, *4
(DV-8350C (J)) (302L79J03*) *2, *3
3-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
25 T/C sensor Y - -
(DV-8560Y) (302V89305*) *1, *4
(DV-8560Y (J)) (302V89J05*) *1, *3
(DV-8350Y) (302L79304*) *2, *4
(DV-8350Y (J)) (302L79J04*) *2, *3
26 Toner level sensor K - -

(PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP) (302ND9419*) *1
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*) *2
27 Toner level sensor M - -

28 Toner level sensor C - -

29 Toner level sensor Y - -

30 Belt thermistor - -
(TR-8550) (302ND9315*)
31 Belt release sensor - -

(DR-8560) (302V89306*)*1
(DR-8360) (302VH9303*)*2
32 Front belt rotation sensor - -

(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
33 Rear belt rotation sensor - -

(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
34 Belt roll-up sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
35 Lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
36 Lift upper limit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
37 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404*
38 LSU thermistor - -
(LK-8550) (302ND9313*) *1
(LK-8350) (302L79311*) *2
39 Weight detection sensor PARTS PWB EDGE SENSOR ASSY SP 302K99421*
40 Fuser jam sensor - -

(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
3-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
41 Fuser pressure release sensor - -

(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
42 IH position sensor FK-8595IH 302ND9309* *1, *6

FK-8590IH 302ND9310* *1, *5
FK-8600IH 302LH9301* *2, *6
FK-8605IH 302LH9302* *2, *5
43 Fuser thermistor 1 (Middle) - -

(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
44 Fuser thermistor 2 (Center) - -

(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
45 Fuser thermistor 3 (Edge) - -

(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
46 Fuser thermistor 4 (Press) - -

(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
47 Exit reversing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
48 Lower exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
49 Upper exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
50 JS sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
51 Front cover switch SW. PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
52 Original size timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
53 PF setting switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
54 Main power switch SW.SEESAW 7SC020403+++H01
55 Power switch PWB SWITCH ASSY 302NG0110*
56 Conveying open/close switch SW. PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
57 Right cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
58 Temperature/humidity sensor PARTS PWB ASSY THERMISTOR SP 302M29413*
59 MP position switch SW. PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
60 PF cassette switch 1 SW. PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
3-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
62 Toner motor sensor K - -

63 Toner motor sensor M - -

64 Toner motor sensor C - -

65 Toner motor sensor Y - -

66 Motion sensor PARTS HUMAN DETECT ASSY SP 302V89407*
3-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Motors
(5-1)Locations
Developer unit
21 20 Primary transfer unit
22
23
Laser scanner unit

4
Drum unit
3
11 12
10 8
9 19
Fuser unit
28
IH unit 46
Main unit
1
2
47 41
14 24
39 45 30
38 6
27 25
26 18
37 13
42 40
43 17
44
34 33 32 31 36 7 29 16 15 35
1 IH core motor *1 Driving the IH core.
2 Scanner motor Driving the optical section.
3-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Polygon motor Driving polygon mirror.
4 LSU cleaning motor Driving the LSU glass cleaning mechanism.
5 Belt cleaning motor Driving the primary transfer belt cleaning roller.
6 Belt release sensor Drive transfer belt release
7 MP lift motor Operates the MP plate.
8 Container motor Driving container
9 Toner motor K Supplying the toner to developer unit.(Black)
10 Toner motor M Supplying the toner to developer unit.(Magenta)
11 Toner motor C Supplying the toner to developer unit.(Cyan)
12 Toner motor Y Supplying the toner to developer unit.(Yellow)
13 Drum motor K Driving the drum unit. (Black)
14 Drum motor CMY Driving the drum unit. (Color)
15 Lift motor 1 Operating the bottom plate for the cassette 1.
16 Lift motor 2 Operating the bottom plate for the cassette 2.
17 Paper feed motor Driving the paper feed.
18 Developer K/Transfer belt motor Driving the developer unit K and the transfer belt.
19 Developer motor CMY Driving the developer units CMY.
20 Vibration motor K *1 Vibrating the developer unit K.
21 Vibration motor M *1 Vibrating the developer unit M.
22 Vibration motor C *1 Vibrating the developer unit C.
23 Vibration motor Y *1 Vibrating the developer unit Y.
24 Fuser motor Driving the fuser section.
25 Fuser pressure release Drive fuser pressure release
26 Waste toner motor Driving the waste toner mechanism.
27 Exit reversing motor Driving the exit section.
28 IH PWB fan motor Cooling the IH PWB.
29 Toner sucking fan motor *1 Retrieve excess toner.
30 Controller fan motor Cooling Main PWB
31 Developer fan motor K *1 Cooling the developer.
32 Developer fan motor M *1 Cooling the developer.
33 Developer fan motor C *1 Cooling the developer.
34 Developer fan motor Y *1 Cooling the developer.
35 Fuser edge fan motor Cooling the fuser belt edge.
36 Power supply fan motor Cooling the power supply PWB and high-voltage PWB.
37 Front exit/IH fan motor Exit paper/IH cooling.
38 Middle exit/IH fan motor Exit paper/IH cooling.
3-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
39 Rear exit/IH fan motor *1 Exit paper/IH cooling.
40 Container fan motor *1 Cooling container/toner hopper.
41 Exit fan motor Cooling the exit section.
42 Vibration motor K *1 Vibrating the waste toner duct K.
43 Vibration motor M *1 Vibrating the waste toner duct M.
44 Vibration motor C *1 Vibrating the waste toner duct C.
45 Vibration motor Y *1 Vibrating the waste toner duct Y.
46 Rear exit motor *2 Driving the exit section.
47 Left container fan motor *1 Cooling container
*1: High-end model only, *2: Low-end model only
3-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-2)Part name table (motor)
1 IH core motor *1 - -
(FK-8595IH) (302ND9309*) *6
(FK-8590IH) (302ND9310*) *5
2 Scanner motor PARTS MOTOR ISU SP 302N29401* *1

MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410* *2
3 Polygon motor - -
(LK-8550) (302ND9313*) *1
(LK-8350) (302L79311*) *2
4 LSU cleaning motor - -

(LK-8550) (302ND9313*) *1
(LK-8350) (302L79311*) *2
5 Belt cleaning motor (PARTS MOTOR BL INNER W10 SP) (302ND9450*)

(TR-8550) (302ND9315*)
6 Belt release sensor - -

(DR-8560) (302V89306*)*1
(DR-8360) (302VH9303*)*2
7 MP lift motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY A SP 302ND9404*
8 Container motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 SET SP 302ND9451*
9 Toner motor K - -
10 Toner motor M - -
11 Toner motor C - -
12 Toner motor Y - -
13 Drum motor K PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 DRUM Z11 ASSY SP 302ND9453* *1

(DR-8560) (302V89306*) *1
PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 DRUM Z11 ASSY SP 302ND9453* *2
(DR-8360) (302VH9303*) *2
14 Drum motor CMY PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 ASSY SP 302ND9452* *1

(DR-8560) (302V89306*) *1
PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 DRUM Z11 ASSY SP 302ND9453* *2
(DR-8360) (302VH9303*) *2
15 Lift motor 1 MOTOR LIFT ASSY 302ND9448*
16 Lift motor 2 MOTOR LIFT ASSY 302ND9448*
17 Paper feed motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 ASSY SP 302ND9477*
3-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
18 Developer K/Transfer belt PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 ASSY SP 302ND9455* *1

motor (DR-8560) (302V89306*) *1
PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 ASSY SP 302ND9455* *2
(DR-8360) (302VH9303*) *2
19 Developer motor CMY PARTS MOTOR-BL W40 ASSY SP 302V89417* *1

(DR-8560) (302V89306*) *1
PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 ASSY SP 302ND9451* *2
(DR-8360) (302VH9303*) *2
20 Vibration motor K *1 - -
(DV-8560K) (302V89302*) *4
(DV-8560K (J)) (302V89J02*) *3
21 Vibration motor M *1 - -
(DV-8560M) (302V89303*) *4
(DV-8560M (J)) (302V89J03*) *3
22 Vibration motor C *1 - -
(DV-8560C) (302V89304*) *4
(DV-8560C (J)) (302V89J04*) *3
23 Vibration motor Y *1 - -
(DV-8560Y) (302V89305*) *4
(DV-8560Y (J)) (302V89J05*) *3
24 Fuser motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 SET SP 302ND9491*

(PARTS FUSER DRIVE H ASSY SP) (302ND94A3*) *1
PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 ASSY SP 302ND9477*
(PARTS FUSER DRIVE L ASSY SP) (302L79425*) *2
25 Fuser pressure release PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302ND9405*
26 Waste toner motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302ND9487*

(PARTS WTB UNIT SP) (302V89413*)
27 Exit reversing motor PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449*
28 IH PWB fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING DLP 70 SP 302K99435*
29 Toner sucking fan motor *1 PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302K99436*
30 Controller fan motor FAN BOX COOLING 302FZ4404*
31 Developer fan motor K *1 FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401*
32 Developer fan motor M *1 FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401*
33 Developer fan motor C *1 FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401*
34 Developer fan motor Y *1 FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401*
35 Fuser edge fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 ASSY SP 302ND9458*
36 Power source fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302K09430*
37 Front exit/IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459*
38 Middle exit / IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459*
39 Rear exit/IH fan motor *1 PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459*
40 Container fan motor *1 FAN LSU 60-25 302GR4408*
3-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
41 Exit fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 15 SP 302ND9460*
42 Vibration motor K *1 -
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*)
43 Vibration motor M *1 -
44 Vibration motor C *1 -
45 Vibration motor Y *1 -
46 Rear exit motor *2 PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449*
47 Left container fan motor *1 PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438*
3-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Others
(6-1)Locations
Developer unit Primary transfer unit
22 21 20 19
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
18,25 15 16 24 17
Main unit
Fuser unit
IH unit
23 14 7
13
12 9
11 1
29
28 2
27 3
26
10

4 5 6 8
1 Duplex clutch 1 Controlling the duplex drive.
2 Duplex clutch 2 Controlling the duplex drive.
3 MP clutch Controlling the primary paper feeding from the MP tray.
3-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Registration clutch Controlling the secondary paper feeding from the cassette.
5 Paper feed clutch 1 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette 1.
6 Paper feed clutch 2 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette 2.
7 Developer clutch Controlling drive developer unit.(Black)
8 Vertical conveying clutch Controlling the MP tray conveying drive.
9 Middle clutch Controlling the conveying section drive.
10 Cleaning solenoid ID sensor front
11 Container solenoid K Releasing the container lock (Black).
12 Container solenoid M Releasing the container lock (Magenta).
13 Container solenoid C Releasing the container lock (Cyan).
14 Container solenoid Y Releasing the container lock (Yellow).
15 Lower exit solenoid Drive guide flap
16 Upper exit solenoid Drive guide flap
17 HDD Hard disk (HDD)
18 LCD Displaying the operation screen.
19 Eraser K Removing the electric charge on the drum (Black).
20 Eraser M Removing the electric charge on the drum (Magenta).
21 Eraser C Removing the electric charge on the drum (Cyan).
22 Eraser Y Removing the electric charge on the drum (Yellow).
23 Fuser thermostat Prevention of IH belt over heating.
24 Speaker Generating the panel touch sound and error sound.
25 Touch panel Converting the operation position data.
26 Drum heater K Prevention of the drum surface condensation.
27 Drum heater M Prevention of the drum surface condensation.
28 Drum heater C Prevention of the drum surface condensation.
29 Drum heater Y Prevention of the drum surface condensation.
(6-2)Part name table
1 Duplex clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP 302ND9468*
2 Duplex clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP 302ND9468*
3 MP clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP 302ND9468*
4 Registration clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35 302RH4401*
5 Paper feed clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409*
6 Paper feed clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409*
3-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Developer clutch - -
(DR-8560) (302V89306*)
(DR-8360) (302VH9303*)
8 Vertical conveying clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409*
9 Middle clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35 302RH4401*
10 Cleaning solenoid PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9414*
11 Container solenoid K SOLENOID JS 303NM4401*
12 Container solenoid M SOLENOID JS 303NM4401*
13 Container solenoid C SOLENOID JS 303NM4401*
14 Container solenoid Y SOLENOID JS 303NM4401*
15 Lower exit solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT 302K99438*
16 Upper exit solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT 302K99438*
17 HDD PARTS STORAGE DEVICE SP 302ND9318*
18 LCD PARTS LCD OPERATION SP 302V894090 *1

PARTS LCD OPERATION SP 302VH9409* *2
19 Eraser K - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
20 Eraser M - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
21 Eraser C - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
22 Eraser Y - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
23 Fuser thermostat - -
(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
24 Speaker SPEAKER 302RH4507*
25 Touch panel PARTS TABLET OPERATION SP 302V89408* *1

PARTS TABLET OPERATION SP 302VH9406* *2
26 Drum heater K PARTS PWB DRUM HEATER ASSY SP 302ND9433*
27 Drum heater M PARTS PWB DRUM HEATER ASSY SP 302ND9433*
3-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
28 Drum heater C PARTS PWB DRUM HEATER ASSY SP 302ND9433*
29 Drum heater Y PARTS PWB DRUM HEATER ASSY SP 302ND9433*
3-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
3 - 4 Electric parts (Optional unit)

(1)Document processor (DP-7100)
(1-1)Locations
17 2
13
16 19
15
1
8 7
9 11
4
3 12
14 6
10
18
1 DP PWB Relay board for the engine PWB and the DP electric parts.
2 DP top cover switch Shutting off the 24V power supply when the top cover open.
3 DP open/close sensor Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4 DP original sensor Detecting the original in the document processor.
5 DP original width sensor Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6 DP original length sensor Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7 DP paper feed sensor Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
8 DP registration sensor Detects the conveying timing of the document processor.
9 DP timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor.
10 DP branch sensor Detecting the position of the flap in the document processor.
11 DP exit sensor Detecting eject paper of the document processor.
12 DP lift upper limit sensor Detecting the upper limit of bottom plate in the document processor.
13 DP lift lower limit sensor Detecting the lower limit of bottom plate in the document processor.
14 DPLED PWB Indicate original set or original jam of document processor.
15 DP lift motor Driving the document processor original bottom plate.
16 DP paper feed motor Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
17 DP conveying motor Driving the original conveying section in the document processor
3-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
18 DP flap motor Driving branch section in the document processor.
19 DP reversing motor Driving the original switchback section in the document processor.
1 DP PWB PARTS PWB DRIVER ASSY SP 303R79401*
3 DP open/close sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
4 DP original sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94060
5 DP original width sensor PARTS PWB PAPER SIZE SENSOR ASSY SP 303R39405*
6 DP original length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
7 DP paper feed sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW94060
8 DP registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
9 DP timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404*
10 DP branch sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
11 DP exit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
12 DP lift upper limit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
13 DP lift lower limit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
14 DP LED PWB PARTS PWB LED ASSY SP 303M89410*
15 DP lift motor PARTS MOTOR ROTARY GUIDE 302H79431*
16 DP paper feed motor PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W10 SP 303R79408*
17 DP conveying motor PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W10 SP 303R79408*
18 DP flap motor PARTS MOTOR ROTARY GUIDE 302H79431*
19 DP reversing motor PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W10 SP 303R79408*
3-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-1)Locations
18
21
17
9
12 16
15 20
14 7 19
11 1
8
22
4 5
13 6
3
10
8 DP timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor. (Front
page)
9 DP backside timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor. (Back page)
10 DP exit sensor Detecting eject paper of the document processor.
13 DP LED PWB Indicate original set or original jam of document processor.
14 DP SHD PWB Processing the scanned image data in the document processor.
15 DP CIS Scanning the backside of original in the document processor.
18 DP registration motor Driving the original registration section in the document processor.
3-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20 DP exit motor Driving the original eject section in the document processor.
21 DP cooling fan motor Cooling the document processor drive section.
22 DP CIS fan motor Cooling the CIS PWB in the document processor. Document processor (DP-
7120)
2 DP top cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
3 DP open/close sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
4 DP original sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
5 DP original width sensor PARTS PWB SIZE DETECTION ASSY SP 303M89427*
6 DP original length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9405*
7 DP paper feed sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404*
9 DP backside timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404*
10 DP exit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
11 DP lift upper limit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
12 DP lift lower limit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
14 DP SHD PWB PARTS PWB SHD ASSY SP 303R89402*
15 DP CIS PARTS SENSOR A3 COLOR CIS(C) SP 303P29402*
17 DP paper feed motor PARTS MOTOR CONVEYING SP 303M49404*
18 DP registration motor PARTS MOTOR REGISTRATION SP 303M49418*
19 DP conveying motor PARTS MOTOR CONVEYING SP 303M49404*
20 DP exit motor PARTS MOTOR DU SP 302KY9407*
21 DP cooling fan motor FAN COOLING 40-15 302H04412*
22 DP CIS fan motor FAN COOLING CONV 302H744090
3-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-1)Locations
2 11
12
13
14
9
7 4 1
8 10
15 5
3
6
8 DP registration sensor Detects the conveying timing of the document processor.
9 DP timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor.
10 DP branch sensor Detecting the position of the flap in the document processor.
12 DP feedshift motor Driving branch section in the document processor.
13 DP paper feed clutch Controlling drive of the original primary feed section in the document
processor.
14 DP registration clutch Controlling drive of the original registration roller in the document processor.
15 DP LED PWB Indicate original set or original jam of document processor.
3-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 DP PWB PARTS PWB DRIVER ASSY SP 303RJ9401*
2 DP top cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
4 DP original sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
6 DP original length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
7 DP paper feed sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
8 DP registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
9 DP timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
10 DP feedshift sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
11 DP paper feed motor MOTOR DP 303PH4401*
12 DP flap motor PARTS MOTOR ROTARY SP 302KY9414*
13 DP paper feed clutch CLUTCH 50 Z35R 302KV9452*
14 DP registration clutch CLUTCH 50 Z35R 302KV9452*
3-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-1)Locations
18
21
17
9
12 16
15 20
14 7 19
11 1
8 24
22
23
4 5
13 6
3
10
8 DP timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor. (Front
page)
9 DP backside timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor. (Back page)
10 DP exit sensor Detecting the document processor exit paper.
13 DPL ED PWB Indicate original set or original jam of document processor.
14 DP SHD PWB Processing the scanned image data in the document processor.
15 DP CIS Scanning the backside of original in the document processor.
18 DP registration motor Driving the original registration section in the document processor.
3-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20 DP exit motor Driving the original eject section in the document processor.
21 DP cooling fan motor Cooling the document processor drive section.
22 DP CIS fan motor Cooling the CIS PWB in the document processor. Document processor (DP-
7120)
23 DF multi feed sensor 1 Detect multi deed (Emit).
24 DF multi feed sensor 2 Detect multi feed (Receipt)
4 DP original sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
6 DP original length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9405*
7 DP paper feed sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404*
9 DP backside timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404*
10 DP exit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
11 DP lift upper limit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
12 DP lift lower limit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
14 DP SHD PWB PARTS PWB SHD ASSY SP 303R89402*
15 DP CIS PARTS SENSOR A3 COLOR CIS(C) SP 303P29402*
17 DP paper feed motor PARTS MOTOR CONVEYING SP 303M49404*
18 DP registration motor PARTS MOTOR REGISTRATION SP 303M49418*
19 DP conveying motor PARTS MOTOR CONVEYING SP 303M49404*
20 DP exit motor PARTS MOTOR DU SP 302KY9407*
21 DP cooling fan motor FAN COOLING 40-15 302H04412*
22 DP CIS fan motor FAN COOLING CONV 302H744090
23 DF multi feed sensor 1 PARTS PWB TX ASSY SP 303M49415*

PARTS PWB TX-RX SET SP 303M49419*
24 DF multi feed sensor 2 PARTS PWB RX ASSY SP 303M49416*

PARTS PWB TX-RX SET SP 303M49419*
3-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Paper Feeder (PF-7100)

(5-1)Locations
1
26
11
9 19 17 22
5 15 24
6
10 3
27 12 2
8 21
13
7 23
18
20 4 25
14 16
Front side: / Inside: / Back side: 28

1 PF PWB Controlling the electric parts in the PF.
2 PF right cover switch Detecting the right cover open/close.
3 PF paper sensor 1 Detecting paper in the upper cassette.
4 PF paper sensor 2 Detecting paper in the lower cassette.
5 Upper PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the upper cassette.
6 Lower PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the upper cassette.
7 Upper PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the lower cassette.
8 Lower PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the lower cassette.
9 PF paper width switch 1 Detecting the paper width in the upper cassette.
10 PF paper width switch 2 Detecting the paper width in the lower cassette.
11 PF paper length switch 1 Detecting the paper length and upper cassette.
12 PF paper length switch 2 Detecting the paper length and lower cassette.
13 PF retard sensor 1 Detecting the retard roller rotation of upper cassette.
14 PF retard sensor 2 Detecting the retard roller rotation of lower cassette.
15 PF conveying sensor 1 Detecting paper jam at the upper paper conveying section.
16 PF conveying sensor 2 Detecting paper jam at the lower paper conveying section.
17 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the upper cassette.
18 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the lower cassette.
19 PF lift motor 1 Driving the bottom plate in the upper cassette.
20 PF lift motor 2 Driving the bottom plate in the lower cassette.
3-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
21 PF paper feed motor Driving the paper feeding system.
22 PF paper feed clutch 1 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the upper cassette.
23 PF paper feed clutch 2 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the lower cassette.
24 PF conveying clutch 1 Controlling the paper conveying section from the upper cassette.
25 PF conveying clutch 2 Controlling the paper conveying section from the lower cassette.
26 PF cassette switch 1 Detecting the upper cassette.
27 PF cassette switch 2 Detecting the lower cassette.
28 PF cassette heater Dehumidifying paper.
3-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 PF PWB PARTS PWB PF MAIN ASSY SP 303RB9403*
2 PF right cover switch SW. PUSH 7SP01000007+H01
3 PF paper sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
5 Upper PF paper gauge sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*

1
6 Lower PF paper gauge sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*

1
7 Upper PF paper gauge sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*

2
8 Lower PF paper gauge sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*

2
9 PF paper width switch 1 SW. PUSH 7SP01000007+H01
10 PF paper width switch 2 SW. PUSH 7SP01000007+H01
11 PF paper length switch 1 SW. PUSH 7SP03090001+H01
12 PF paper length switch 2 SW. PUSH 7SP03090001+H01
13 PF retard sensor 1 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9432*
15 PF conveying sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
16 PF conveying sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
17 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
19 PF lift motor 1 PARTS MOTOR LIFT ASSY SP 302ND9448*
20 PF lift motor 2 PARTS MOTOR LIFT ASSY SP 302ND9448*
21 PF paper feed motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W10 SP 302LC9429*
22 PF paper feed clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409*
23 PF paper feed clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409*
24 PF conveying clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409*
25 PF conveying clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409*
28 PF cassette heater PARTS HEATER 100 ASSY 303RB9404* *1

PARTS HEATER 120 ASSY 303RB9405* *2
*1: 100V model, *2: 120V model, *3 220v-240V model
3-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)High capacity paper feeder (PF-7110)

(6-1)Locations
1
19
14
4 21
20
16 11
18
7 22
8 17
10 24 12 2
13
5
15
3
6
9 23
25
2 PF right cover switch Detecting the right cover open/close.
3 PF paper sensor 1 Detecting paper in the right cassette.
4 PF paper sensor 2 Detecting paper in the right cassette.
5 Upper PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
6 Lower PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
7 Upper PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
8 Lower PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
9 PF retard sensor 1 Detecting the retard roller rotation of right cassette.
10 PF retard sensor 2 Detecting the retard roller rotation of left cassette.
11 PF horizontal conveying sensor Detecting paper jam at the horizontal paper conveying section.
12 PF vertical conveying sensor Detecting paper jam at the vertical paper conveying section.
13 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the right cassette.
14 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the left cassette.
15 PF lift motor 1 Driving the bottom plate in the right cassette.
16 PF lift motor 2 Driving the bottom plate in the left cassette.
17 PF paper feed motor Driving the paper feeding section.
18 Right PF paper feed clutch 1 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the right cassette.
19 Left PF paper feed clutch 2 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the left cassette.
3-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20 PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 Controlling the right of horizontal paper conveying.
21 PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 Controlling the left of horizontal paper conveying.
22 PF vertical conveying clutch Controlling the vertical paper conveying.
23 PF cassette switch 1 Detecting the right cassette.
24 PF cassette switch 2 Detecting the left cassette.
3-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 PF PWB PARTS PWB PF MAIN ASSY SP 303RC9406*
2 PF right cover switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000007+H01
5 Upper PF paper gauge sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*

1
6 Lower PF paper gauge sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*

1
7 Upper PF paper gauge sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*

2

2
11 PF horizontal conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
12 PF vertical conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
15 PF lift motor 1 PARTS MOTOR LIFT DECK SP 303NF9409*
16 PF lift motor 2 PARTS MOTOR LIFT DECK SP 303NF9409*
17 PF paper feed motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W10 SP 302LC9429*
18 Right PF paper feed clutch 1 CLUTCH 35 Z35R 302RH4401*
19 Left PF paper feed clutch 2 CLUTCH 35 Z35R 302RH4401*
20 PF horizontal conveying clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35R 302RH4401*

1
21 PF horizontal conveying clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35R 302RH4401*

2
22 PF vertical conveying clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35R 302RH4401*
23 PF cassette switch 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000007+H01
25 PF cassette heater PARTS HEATER 100 ASSY 303RB9404* *1

3-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)Side Deck (PF-7120)

(7-1)Locations
12 9
2
10
5
8
1
7
11
3
6
4
13
2 PF paper sensor Detecting paper in the cassette.
3 Upper PF paper gauge sensor Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette.
4 Lower PF paper gauge sensor Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette.
5 PF lift upper limit sensor Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the cassette.
6 PF lift upper limit sensor Detecting the lower limit of the bottom plate in the cassette.
7 PF lift motor Driving the bottom plate in the left cassette.
8 PF conveying motor Driving the paper conveying.
9 PF paper feed clutch Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette.
10 PF paper feed sensor Detecting jam at the feed section.
11 PF cassette switch Detecting the cassette.
12 PF connection switch Detect connection of PF connection and main unit.
3-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 PF PWB PARTS PWB SIDE DECK ASSY SP 303RL9402*
2 PF paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302K99458*
3 Upper PF paper gauge sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*

1

1
5 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
6 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
7 PF lift motor MOTOR,MAIN TRAY 303H32751*
8 PF conveying motor PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W20 SP 303RL9403*
9 PF paper feed clutch CLUTCH 50 Z35R 302KV4404*
10 PF paper feed sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302K99458*
11 PF cassette switch SW. PUSH 7SP01000006+H01
12 PF connection switch SW. PUSH 7SP01000007+H01
13 PF cassette heater PARTS DEHUMIDIFINR 100 SET SP 303RL9404* *1

PARTS DEHUMIDIFINR 120 SET SP 303RL9405* *2
PARTS DEHUMIDIFINR 240 SET SP 303RL9406* *3
3-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)Inner Finisher (DF-7100)

(8-1)Locations
7
6
9 10
11
1 8
5 4
21 17
18 15 23
25 20
19
27
12 24
13
22
16
26
14 3 2
1 DF PWB Controlling the electric parts.
2 DF staple relay PWB Relaying the staple unit control signals.
3 DF front cover switch Shutoff 24V power supply when the front cover open, interlock switch.
4 DF entry sensor Detecting paper at the entry section.
5 DF side registration sensor 1 Detecting home position of the DF front adjusting plate.
6 DF side registration sensor 2 Detecting home position of the DF rear adjusting plate.
7 DF adjusting sensor Detecting home position of the paper guide.
8 DF bundle exit sensor Detecting position of the bundle eject unit.
9 DF exit sensor Detecting paper at the eject section.
10 DF paper press sensor 1 Detecting pressure for the bundle eject paper (Upper limit).
11 DF paper press sensor 2 Detecting pressure for the bundle eject paper (Lower limit).
12 DF paddle sensor Detecting home position of the paddle.
13 DF tray sensor Detecting the exit tray lower limit.
14 DF slide sensor Detecting slide position of the staple unit.
15 DF entry motor Driving the entry roller.
16 DF middle motor Driving the middle roller.
17 DF paddle motor Driving the paper guides.
18 DF exit release motor Driving the bundle exit unit.
19 DF side registration motor 1 Driving the adjusting plate front.
3-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20 DF side registration motor 2 Driving the adjusting plate rear.
21 DF exit motor Driving the exit roller.
22 DF tray motor Drive exit tray up and down.
23 DF slide motor Slide the Staple unit.
24 DF staple unit Paper stapler.
25 DF paper press solenoid Switching the bundle paper pressure.
26 DF connection sensor Detect connection with the main unit and DF (connection detection).
27 DF release LED Lit when releasing the inner finisher.
3-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 DF PWB PARTS PWB DF MAIN ASSY SP 303RD9402*
2 DF staple relay PWB PARTS PWB STAPLER ASSY SP 303NB9402*
3 DF front cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
4 DF entry sensor SENSOR OPT. 303NW9404*
5 DF side registration sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
7 DF adjusting sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
8 DF bundle exit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
9 DF eject sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303PX9403*
10 DF paper press sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
11 DF paper press sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
12 DF paddle sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
13 DF tray sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
14 DF slide sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
15 DF entry motor PARTS MOTOR DP SP 303NV9401*
16 DF middle motor PARTS MOTOR DP SP 303NV9401*
17 DF paddle motor PARTS MOTOR PM FEED SP 302K99430*
18 DF exit release motor PARTS MOTOR-PM MOVING SP 303NB9404*
19 DF side registration motor 1 MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
21 DF exit motor PARTS MOTOR-PM MOVING SP 303NB9404*
22 DF tray motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY SP 303PX9401*
23 DF slide motor PARTS MOTOR-PM MOVING SP 303NB9404*
24 DF staple unit STAPLER EH590 303JY4401*
25 DF paper press solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT SP 302K99438*
26 DF connection sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
27 DF release LED PARTS PWB LED ASSY SP 303RD9407*
3-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9)Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130)

(9-1)Locations
2 6
3 1
7
9 10 4
1 PH PWB Controlling the electric parts of the punch unit.
2 PH home position sensor Detecting home position of the PH.
3 PH pulse sensor Rotation control for PF cam.
4 PH dust tank full sensor (Emit) Detecting the punch dust tank full.
5 PH dust tank full sensor Detecting the punch dust tank full.
(Receipt)
6 PH entry sensor Detecting paper at the entry section.
7 PH dust tank sensor Detecting the punch dust tank.
8 PH motor Driving the punch unit.
9 PH solenoid Switching the punch holes. (Except 100 V model)
10 PH tank solenoid Move the punch dust tank.
3-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 PH PWB PARTS PWB PUNCH ASSY SP 303RF9401*
2 PH home position sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
3 PH pulse sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
4 PH dust tank full sensor 1 SENSOR A,SEPARATION 303H32746*
5 PH dust tank full sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NB9414*
6 PH entry sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
7 PH dust tank sensor SENSOR A,SEPARATION 303H32746*
8 PH motor PARTS MOTOR PUNCH SP 303RF9402*
9 PH solenoid PARTS SOLENOID PRESSURE PULLEY 303LJ9414*

SP
10 PH tank solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT SP 302K99438*
3-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(10-1)Locations
7
6
1
2 3
1 BR PWB Controlling the electric parts in the BR.
2 BR cover switch Detecting the BR cover open/close.
3 BR conveying sensor 1 Detecting paper in the bridge. (right side)
4 BR conveying sensor 2 Detecting paper in the bridge. (left side)
5 BR job separator sensor Detecting eject paper to the job separator.
6 BR conveying motor 1 Controlling the paper conveying in the bridge.
7 BR conveying motor 2 Controlling the paper conveying in the bridge.
1 BR PWB PARTS PWB BRIDGE ASSY SP 303RG94010
2 BR cover switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000007+H01
3 BR conveying sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
4 BR conveying sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
5 BR job separator sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
6 BR conveying motor 1 PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449*
7 BR conveying motor 2 PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449*
3-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)

(11-1)Locations
24 39
41 26 23 32 27 36
47 30
49 29
48
31
45
16
25 13
3 40 44
28 14 11 12 42
34 10 17 7
37 35
8 18
5 43
38
22 6
15 9 33
2
46 19
1
4
21
20
3 DF operation PWB LED indicators and keys.
4 DF front cover switch Detecting the front cover open/close.
3-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 DF exit cover switch Detecting the exit cover open/close.
7 DF middle sensor Detecting paper in the conveying section.
8 DF eject sensor Detecting paper at the eject section.
9 DF side registration sensor 1 Detecting home position of the DF front adjusting

plate.
10 DF side registration sensor 2 Detecting home position of the DF rear adjusting

plate.
12 DF drum sensor Paper detection at the relief drum.
15 DF tray upper surface sensor 1 Detecting paper surface on DF main tray.
17 DF tray sensor 1 Detecting the exit tray home position.
19 DF tray sensor 3 Detecting the exit tray middle position.
20 DF tray sensor 4 Detecting the exit tray lower limit.
21 DF tray sensor 5 Detecting the exit tray lower limit (with BF unit).
23 DF shift set sensor Detecting home position of the shift guide.
24 DF shift release sensor Detecting release position of the shift guide.
25 DF shift sensor 1 Detecting home position of the front shift plate.
26 DF shift sensor 2 Detecting home position of the rear shift plate.
27 DF sub eject sensor Detecting paper to the tray B.
28 DF sub tray full sensor Detecting tray B paper full.
35 DF relief drum motor Driving the relief drum.
39 DF shift release motor Detecting the shift guide release position.
3-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
40 DF shift motor 1 Driving the rear shift guide.
41 DF shift motor 2 Driving the front shift guide.
42 DF Feedshift solenoid 1 Switching the flap.
45 DF exit clutch Driving the eject roller.
47 DF exit fan motor 1 Cooling the eject paper. (Rear) (Not connected)
48 DF exit fan motor 2 Cooling the eject paper. (Front) (Not connected)
49 DF exit fan motor 3 Cooling the eject paper. (Middle) (Not connected)
3-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 DF PWB PARTS PWB DF MAIN ASSY SP 303RW9401*
3 DF operation PWB PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP 303NB9403*
5 DF exit cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB27160
6 DF entry sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
7 DF middle sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
8 DF eject sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
9 DF side registration sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
12 DF drum sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
13 DF adjusting sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
14 DF bundle exit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
15 DF tray upper surface sensor 1 SENSOR A,SEPARATION 303H32746*
16 DF tray upper surface sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NB9414*
17 DF tray sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
22 DF slide sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
23 DF shift set sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
24 DF shift release sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
25 DF shift sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
26 DF shift sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
27 DF sub eject sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
28 DF sub tray full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9405*
31 DF paddle motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
32 DF exit release motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
3-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
35 DF relief drum motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
36 DF exit motor PARTS MOTOR DP SP 303NV9401*
37 DF tray motor PARTS MOTOR-BL BRAKE SP 303NB9405*
38 DF slide motor PARTS MOTOR-PM MOVING SP 303NB9404*
39 DF shift release motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
40 DF shift motor 1 MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
42 DF Feedshift solenoid 1 PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT SP 302K99437*
45 DF exit clutch CLUTCH 50 Z35R 302KV9452*
46 DF staple unit PARTS STAPLER EH600 SP 303NB9413*
47 DF Exit fan motor 1 PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 50 SP 302K994A5*
3-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(12-1)Locations
26
24
9
11 22
4
14 23
19
8 10
12 15
25
21
6 16 27
20
13 7
17
18 1
5
28 2
3-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 DF top cover switch Detecting the top cover open/close.
6 DF middle sensor Detecting paper in the conveying section.
7 DF side registration sensor 1 Detecting home position of the DF front adjusting

plate.
8 DF side registration sensor 2 Detecting home position of the DF rear adjusting

plate.
12 DF eject sensor Detecting paper at the eject section.
3-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 DF PWB PARTS PWB DF MAIN ASSY SP 303RV9401*
4 DF top cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
6 DF middle sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
9 DF adjusting sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
11 DF bundle exit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
12 DF eject sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
18 DF slide sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
23 DF paddle motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
24 DF exit release motor PARTS MOTOR-PM MOVING SP 303NB9404*
25 DF exit motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
26 DF tray motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY SP 303NC9402*
27 DF slide motor PARTS MOTOR-PM MOVING SP 303NB94040
28 DF staple unit STAPLER EH590 303JY4401*
3-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13)Mailbox (MT-730(B))
(13-1)Locations
3
4 1
10
5
6
7
8
9
2
13
11
12
1 MT PWB Controlling electric parts of the mailbox.
2 MT cover switch Detecting the mail box cover open/close.
3 MT tray sensor 1 Detecting overflow of paper to the tray 1.
10 MT tray exit sensor 1 Detecting the paper jam. (photo receptor)
11 MB tray exit sensor 2 Emitting LED pulses. (photo emitter)
12 MT home position sensor Controlling the mailbox drive motor.
13 MT conveying motor Driving the mailbox paper conveying.
3-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 MT PWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY B SP 303N09404*
2 MT cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
3 MT tray sensor 1 SENSOR 248NL1 2C92721*
10 MT tray exit sensor 1 SENSOR B SEPARATION 303H32747*
11 MB tray exit sensor 2 SENSOR A,SEPARATION 303H32746*
12 MT home position sensor SENSOR 248NL1 2C92721*
13 MT conveying motor MOTOR FEED 2FB2711*
3-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14)Punch unit (PH-7)

(14-1)Locations
4
2
3
7 10
11
8
5
6 1
1 PH PWB Controlling the electric parts of the punch unit.
2 PH home position sensor Detecting home position of the PH.
3 PH pulse sensor Rotation control for PF cam.
4 PH slide sensor Detecting the punch unit home position.
5 Punch dust tank full sensor Detecting the punch dust tank full.
6 PH paper edge sensor 1 Detecting the paper edge.
7 PH paper edge sensor 2 Detecting the paper edge.
8 PH dust tank switch Detecting the punch dust tank.
9 PH motor Driving the punch unit.
10 PH slide motor Driving the punch unit.
11 PH solenoid Switching the punch holes. (Except 100 V model)
3-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 PH PWB PARTS PWB PUNCH ASSY SP 303NK9401*
2 PH home position sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
3 PH pulse sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
4 PH slide sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M89426*
5 PH dust tank full sensor SENSOR FEED B 303H32750*
6 PH paper edge sensor 1 PARTS PWB SENSOR B ASSY SP 303NK9403*
7 PH paper edge sensor 2 PARTS PWB SENSOR A ASSY SP 303NK9402*
8 PH dust tank switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000006+H01
9 PH motor PARTS MOTOR PUNCH SP 303PW9402*
10 PH slide motor PARTS MOTOR-PM MOVING SP 303NB9404*
11 PH solenoid SOLENOID PUNCH 3H42706*
3-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15)Folding unit (BF-730)

(15-1)Locations
22 16
12
23
13
6 10
8
3 9
4
19
2 7 21
17
18
11 20 1
15
14

1 BF PWB Controlling the electric parts of the folding unit.
2 BF tray switch Detecting the folding tray open/close.
3 BF left cover switch Detecting the left cover open/close.
4 BF paper entry sensor Detecting paper entering into the folding unit.
5 BF vertical conveying sensor Detecting paper on the BF bridge section.
6 BF paper sensor Detecting paper on the folding bridge section.
7 BF adjusting sensor 1 Detecting home position of the lower BF moving

plate.
8 BF adjusting sensor 2 Detecting home position of the upper BF moving

plate.
9 BF side registration sensor 1 Detecting home position of the BF side registration

guide.
10 BF side registration sensor 2 Detecting home position of the BF side registration

guide.
11 BF blade sensor Detecting BF blade home position.
12 BF exit sensor Detecting paper to the folding tray.
13 BF tray full sensor Detecting folding tray paper full.
14 BF switch Detecting the folding unit.
15 BF main motor Driving the folding conveying.
3-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
16 BF paper entry motor Driving the entry roller.
17 BF blade motor Driving the BF blade.
18 BF adjusting motor 1 Driving lower folding adjuster plate.
19 BF adjusting motor 2 Driving upper folding adjuster plate.
20 BF side registration motor 1 Driving the lower BF side registration guide.
21 BF side registration motor 2 Driving the upper BF side registration guide.
22 BF staple motor Driving the BF staple.
23 BF feedshift solenoid Operates the BF flap guide.
1 BF PWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 303ND9401*
2 BF tray switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
3 BF left cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
4 BF paper entry sensor SENSOR OPT. 303NW9406*
5 BF vertical conveying sensor SENSOR OPT. 303M89426*
6 BF paper sensor SENSOR OPT. 303M89426*
7 BF adjusting sensor 1 SENSOR OPT. 303M89426*
8 BF adjusting sensor 2 SENSOR OPT. 303NW9406*
9 BF side registration sensor 1 SENSOR OPT. 303M89426*
10 BF side registration sensor 2 SENSOR OPT. 303M89426*
11 BF blade sensor SENSOR OPT. 303M89426*
12 BF exit sensor SENSOR OPT. 303M89426*
13 BF tray full sensor SENSOR OPT. 303M89426*
14 BF switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716*
15 BF main motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W40 ASSY SP 302V89417*
16 BF paper entry motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
17 BF blade motor PARTS MOTOR-BL BRAKE SP 303NB9405*
18 BF adjusting motor 1 MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
20 BF side registration motor 1 MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
22 BF staple motor - -
(STAPLER EH280) (303J14401*)
23 BF feedshift solenoid SOLENOID FEED SHIFT 302K99437*
3-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(16)100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130)

(16-1)PWBs
2 DF operation PWB Consisting of LEDs and keys.
4 PH PWB (Punch unit) Controlling the electric parts of the punch unit.
3-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 DF PWB PARTS PWB DF MAIN ASSY WITH SW 303S89401*

(SP)
2 DF operation PWB PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY (SP) 303S89403*
3 DF staple relay PWB PARTS PWB STAPLE ASSY (SP) 303S89402*
4 PH PWB PARTS PWB PUNCH ASSY SP 303NK9401*
3-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(16-3)Sensors and Switches
18
17
19
16 8
21
30 5
22
20 31
6
3 35
7 9
25 34 28
10
15 33 1
4 29
2 23
32
27 11
26
14 36
37
13
24 12
3-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
17 18 7 30 31 2 22 21 23 28 29 1
19,20
25
6
8
16 3
15 4,5
32
35
33
34
9
27
10
14
24
36
26
11
37
13
12
1 DF entry sensor Detecting presence of paper at the paper entry section.
2 DF middle sensor Detecting presence of paper in the conveying section.
3-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 DF exit paper sensor Detecting presence of paper the eject section.
4 DF side registration sensor 1 Detecting the adjusting DF plate front home position.
5 DF side registration sensor 2 Detecting the adjusting DF plate rear home position.
6 JS exit paper sensor Detecting presence of paper the eject section.
7 DF withdraw pulley pressure Detecting the withdraw pulley pressure release position.
release sensor
8 DF adjusting release HP sensor Detect adjusting pulley release.
9 DF tray sensor 1 Detecting the exit tray upper limit.
13 DF tray sensor 5 Detecting the exit tray lower limit (when the folding unit is installed).
15 DF tray upper surface sensor 1 Detecting paper surface on the DF main tray (Emit).
16 DF tray upper surface sensor 2 Detecting paper surface on the DF main tray (Receptor).
17 DF shift set sensor Detecting home position of the shift guide.
18 DF shift release sensor Detecting release position of the shift guide.
19 DF rear shift HP sensor Detecting home position of the rear shift plate.
20 DF front shift HP sensor Detecting home position of the front shift plate.
21 DF eject pressure release HP Detecting home position of the eject pressure release.
sensor
22 DF sub tray full sensor Detecting sub tray paper full.
23 DF drum sensor Paper detection at the relief drum.
25 DF exit cover switch Detecting the exit cover open/close.
26 DF staple tank switch Detect waste staple tank.
27 DF exit paddle HP sensor Detect home position of exit paddle.
28 DP entrance timing sensor Timing sensor of paper conveying.
29 DF Drum timing (Relief path) Paper stop timing sensor in relief drum section.
sensor.
30 DF trail press guide HP sensor. Detect home position of trail press guide.
31 DF withdraw release HP sensor Detect home position of paper withdraw guide.
32 DF bundle exit sensor 2 Detect home position of bundle exit 2.
33 DF bundle exit sensor 1 Detect home position of bundle exit 1.
34 DF exit support guide HP sensor. Detect home position of paper support guide.
35 DF exit paper press sensor 2 Detect home position of exit paper press.
3-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
36 DF staple full sensor 1 Detect waste staple full.
37 DF staple full sensor 2 Detect waste staple full.
2 DF middle sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404*
3 DF exit paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NB9414*
6 JS exit paper sensor SENSOR A,SEPARATION 303H32746*
7 DF bundle exit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
8 DF adjusting release HP sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
9 DF tray sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
14 DF slide sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
17 DF shift set sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
18 DF shift release sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
19 DF rear shift HP sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
20 DF front shift HP sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
21 DF sub exit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
22 DF sub tray full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9405*
23 DF drum sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
24 DF front cover switch SW.MICRO 7SM010102+++H01
25 DF exit cover switch SW.MICRO 7SM010102+++H01
26 DF staple tank switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000007+H01
27 DF exit paddle HP sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
28 DP entrance timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
29 DF Drum timing (Relief path) sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
30 DF trail press guide HP sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
31 DF withdraw release HP sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
3-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
32 DF bundle exit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
33 DF bundle exit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
34 DF exit support guide HP sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
35 DF exit paper press sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
36 DF staple full sensor 1 PARTS PWB SENSOR C ASSY SP 303R19404*
37 DF staple full sensor 2 PARTS PWB SENSOR D ASSY SP 303R19405*
3-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(16-5)Motors
15 4 3 8
29
9 14
32
31
11 2
30 16
10 1
6
27
26 7
13
23 21
24 17
25 22
5 19
28 12
18
20
9 10/11 23 8 14
4
1
3
24
15 2
16 7
5/6
21/22
13
12
17
18 19
20
3-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 DF adjusting pulley motor Drive adjusting pulley
4 DF upper exit motor Drive withdraw puller of upper exit roller.
7 DF relief drum motor Driving the relief drum.
9 DF shift release motor Detecting release position of the shift guide.
10 DF shift motor 1 Driving the rear shift guide.
11 DF shift motor 2 Driving the front shift guide.
12 DF staple motor Drive staple unit.
14 DF sub tray exit motor Drive sub tray exit roller.
15 DF trail press guide motor. Drive vertical motion of trail press guide.
16 DF adjusting release HP sensor Drive adjusting pulley release.
17 DF exit motor Drive main tray exit roller.
18 DF exit support guide motor. Drive paper support guide.
19 DF exit paper press motor. Drive exit paper press.
20 DF exit paddle motor Drive exit paddle.
21 DF bundle exit motor 1 Drive bundle exit 1.
22 DF bundle exit motor 2 Drive bundle exit 2.
23 DF withdraw pulley pressure Drive vertical motion of paper withdraw guide.

release motor
25 DF bundle exit front fan Cooling eject paper.
26 DF bundle exit rear fan Cooling eject paper.
27 DF middle rear exit fan motor Cooling eject paper.
28 DF middle front exit fan motor Cooling eject paper.
29 DF upper rear exit fan Cooling eject paper.
30 DF upper front exit fan Cooling eject paper.
31 DF upper middle exit fan 1 Cooling eject paper.
32 DF upper middle exit fan 2 Cooling eject paper.
3-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 DF entry motor PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W20 SP 303RL9403*
2 DF middle motor PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W20 SP 303RL9403*
3 DF adjusting pulley motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
4 DF upper exit motor (withdraw) PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W20 SP 303RL9403*
7 DF relief drum motor PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W20 SP 303RL9403*
8 DF tray motor PARTS MOTOR-BL BRAKE SP 303NB9405*
9 DF shift release motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
12 DF staple motor PARTS STAPLER EH1200 (SP) 303S89412*
13 DF slide motor PARTS MOTOR DP SP 303NV9401*
14 DF sub tray exit motor PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W20 SP 303RL9403*
15 DF trail press guide motor. MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
16 DF adjusting release HP sensor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
17 DF exit motor PARTS MOTOR-BL INNER W20 SP 303RL9403*
18 DF exit support guide motor. MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
19 DF exit paper press motor. MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
20 DF exit paddle motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
21 DF bundle exit motor 1 PARTS MOTOR DP SP 303NV9401*
22 DF bundle exit motor 2 PARTS MOTOR DP SP 303NV9401*
23 DF withdraw pulley pressure MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*

release motor
24 DF exit release motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
25 DF bundle exit front fan PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438*
26 DF bundle exit rear fan PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438*
27 DF middle rear exit fan motor PARTS,FAN IMAGE SP 302FZ9466*
28 DF middle front exit fan motor PARTS,FAN IMAGE SP 302FZ9466*
29 DF upper rear exit fan FAN COOLING LSU 50 302K94454*
30 DF upper front exit fan FAN COOLING LSU 50 302K94454*
31 DF upper middle exit fan 1 FAN COOLING LSU 50 302K94454*
32 DF upper middle exit fan 2 FAN COOLING LSU 50 302K94454*
3-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(16-7)Solenoid, Clutch
1
2
3
4

1 DF Feedshift solenoid 1 DF switching path to the relief drum.
2 DF Feedshift solenoid 2 DF switching path to the BF bridge.
3 DF Feedshift solenoid 3 Switching path to the DF tray B.
4 DF exit switching solenoid Change the position where gets DF exit switch enable in stapling.
4 DF exit switching solenoid SOLENOID ASSY 302F94409*
3-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(17)Folding Unit (BF-9100)

(17-1)Motor, Solenoid, PWB
10 6 11 12 8 2
Front side: / Inside: / Back side: 13 3 7 9
10 11 12 8 2
7
9
6 4 13 5 1 3
3-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 BF main motor Driving the paper conveying system.
2 BF paper entry motor Driving the entry roller.
3 BF blade motor Driving the BF blade.
4 BF adjusting motor 1 Driving lower folding adjuster plate.
5 BF adjusting motor 2 Driving upper folding adjuster plate.
6 BF side registration motor 1 Detecting home position of the BF lower side registration guide.
7 BF side registration motor 2 Detecting home position of the BF upper side registration guide.
8 BF staple motor Driving the BF staple.
9 BF paddle motor Drive conveying paddle.
10 BF conveying tray motor Drive conveying tray belt.
11 BF exit pressure release motor Driving exit pressure release
12 BF feedshift solenoid Operates the BF flap guide.
13 BF PWB Electric parts layout
1 BF main motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W40 ASSY SP 302V89417*
2 BF paper entry motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
3 BF blade motor PARTS MOTOR-BL BRAKE SP 303NB4403*
7 BF side registration sensor 2 MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
8 BF staple motor - -
(STAPLER EH280) 303J14401*
9 BF paddle motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN4410*
10 BF conveying tray motor PARTS MOTOR-BL BRAKE SP 303NB4403*
11 BF exit pressure release motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY C SP 302R49429*
12 BF feedshift solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT SP 302K99437*
13 BF PWB PARTS PWB BF MAIN ASSY WITH SW 303SP9401*

(SP)
3-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(17-3)Sensors and Switches
10 12 3
4 2 13 11 6 8
1 13 10 2 3 11 8 6
9 7 5 4 14
3-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 BF conveying tray sensor Detecting paper on the conveying tray.
2 BF paper sensor Detecting paper.
3 BF paddle sensor Detect home position of conveying paddle.
4 BF blade sensor Detecting home position of the blade.
5 BF adjusting sensor 1 Detecting lower moving plate home position.
6 BF adjusting sensor 2 Detecting upper moving plate home position.
7 BF side registration sensor 1 Detecting lower side registration guide home position.
8 BF side registration sensor 2 Detecting upper side registration guide home position.
9 BF tray switch Detecting the folding tray open/close.
10 BF exit sensor Detecting paper ejected to the folding tray.
11 BF paper entry sensor Detecting paper entering into the folding unit.
12 BF exit pressure release sensor Detect home position of the exit pressure release.
13 BF set switch Detecting the unit.
1 BF conveying tray sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
2 BF paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
3 BF paddle sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
4 BF blade sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
5 BF adjusting sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
6 BF adjusting sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
7 BF side registration sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
8 BF side registration sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
9 BF tray switch SW.MICRO 7SM010102+++H01
10 BF exit sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
11 BF paper entry sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406*
12 BF exit pressure release sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401*
13 BF set switch SW.MICRO 7SM010102+++H01
3-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(17-5)Sensor, Fan (BF Bridge)

2 1 3
2/3
1 BF vertical conveying sensor Detecting paper on the BF bridge section.
2 BF front enter fan Blow paper that enter to folding unit.
3 BF rear enter fan Blow paper that enter to folding unit.
1 BF vertical conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303M89426*
2 BF front enter fan PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438*
3 BF rear enter fan PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438*
3-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
3 - 5 Driving system
(1)Drive configuration
(1) Paper feed/conveying section (4) Developer K/Transfer belt (6) Toner supply drive unit
motor
Paper feed motor Developer K/Transfer belt 18 Toner motor K

motor
1 Paper feed roller 1 Sleeve roller 19 Toner motor M
2 MP paper feed roller 2 Primary transfer belt drive roller 20 Toner motor C
3 Vertical conveying roller 21 Toner motor Y
4 Middle roller Belt release sensor
5 registration roller 1 Transfer belt (7) Fuser drive unit
6 Secondary transfer roller Fuser motor
7 DU conveying roller (5) Developer CMY drive 1 Fuser belt
Developer motor CMY
(2) Drum K drive 1 Developer roller Fuser pressure release
1 Drum motor K 2 Developer roller C *1 1 Fuser pressure release
3 Developer roller Y *1
(3) Drum CMY drive 1 Developer sleeve roller M *2 (8) Container drive
Drum motor CMY 2 Developer sleeve roller C *2 Container motor
1 Drum M 3 Developer sleeve roller Y *2 1 Toner container
2 Drum C
3 Drum Y
*1: Low model, *2: High model
3-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Paper feed/conveying section

Secondary transfer roller
Registration roller left
Middle roller
Registration clutch
Paper feed motor
Middle clutch
Paper feed clutch 1
Vertical conveying clutch
Paper feed clutch 2
Paper feed roller
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Retard roller
Vertical conveying roller
Pickup roller
Cassette1
Cassette2
3-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
MP drive
MP paper feed roller
Paper feed motor
MP clutch
MP tray
MP lift motor
3-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Drum drive
Drum motor CMY
Drum motor K
Main drive unit
Drum K
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Drum M
Drum C
Drum Y
Drum unit K
Drum unit M
Drum unit C
Drum unit Y
3-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Developer drive (Low model)
⌧ീࣂ࢖࢔ࢫ
Developer roller Y
Developer roller C
Developer roller M
Developer roller K
⌧ീ࣮ࣔࢱ࣮YC
Developer motor CMY
Developer K / Transfer belt motor
Developer clutch
Main drive unit
Developer unit K
Developer unit M
Developer unit C
Developer unit Y
3-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Developer drive (High model)
⌧ീࣂ࢖࢔ࢫ
Developer sleeve roller Y
Developer sleeve roller C
Developer sleeve roller M
Developer sleeve roller K
Developer motor CMY
Developer K ࣋ࣝࢺ㞳㛫࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
/ Transfer belt motor
Developer clutch
Main drive unit
Developer unit K
Developer unit M
Developer unit C
Developer unit Y
3-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Transfer drive
Primary transfer roller Y
Primary transfer roller C
Primary transfer roller M
Primary transfer roller K
Main drive unit
Belt release motor
Developer K / Transfer belt motor
Primary transfer unit
Belt cleaning motor

Transfer belt drive roller
3-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Fuser/Exit/Duplex drive (Low model)
Exit reversing motor
Upper exit roller
Lower exit roller
Exit conveying roller
Rear exit motor
Fuser motor
Fuser pressure release motor
Fuser heater belt
Fuser press roller
Paper feed motor
DU clutch 2
DU clutch 1
DU conveying middle roller
DU conveying lower roller
DU registration roller
DU conveying upper roller
3-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Fuser/Exit/Duplex drive (High model)
Upper exit roller
Lower exit roller
Exit conveying roller
Fuser motor
Fuser pressure release motor
Fuser heater belt

Fuser press roller
Paper feed motor
Duplex clutch 2
Duplex clutch 1
DU conveying middle roller
DU conveying lower roller
DU registration roller
DU conveying upper roller
IH core motor
3-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Drive location
(
11 C
10
13 14 15 16
9 D
12
7 8
B
5 6
2
3
A
4
A: Feed drive unit 9 Belt release sensor

1 Paper feed motor 10 Container motor
2 Paper feed clutch 1
C: Fuser drive unit
3 Vertical conveying clutch
11 Fuser motor
4 Paper feed clutch 2
12 Fuser pressure release motor
B: Main drive unit

D: Toner supply drive unit
5 Drum motor K
13 Toner motor K
6 Drum motor CMY
14 Toner motor M
7 Developer K/Transfer belt motor
15 Toner motor C
8 Developer motor CYM
16 Toner motor Y
3-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Drive unit appearance

(3-1)Feed drive unit
(3-2)Main drive unit
Low model
High model
3-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-3)Toner supply drive unit
(3-4)Fuser drive unit
3-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
3 - 6 Mechanical construction
(1)Paper feed/Conveying section
The paper feed/Conveying section consist of the cassette paper feed section, the MP tray paper feed section, and the
paper conveying section where convey the paper to the transfer and separate section.
(1-1)Cassette paper feed section
The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80 g/m2). Feeding from cassette works as
picking up paper by rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to the paper conveying section by rotating the paper feed
roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
8 7 62 3 1 4
13
12 5 1
23
6
8 14
7
4
12
5
9
8
10
3
12
8 1
7
2
12
11
4
13
2
14
1
4
1. Paper feed roller 6. Friction pad 11. Width guide release lever
2. Pickup roller 7. Lift plate 12. Actuator (Paper sensor)
3. Pickup holder 8. Paper width guides 13. Vertical conveying roller
4. Retard roller 9. Paper length guide 14. Vertical conveying pulley
5. Retard holder 10. Cassette base
3-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
Feed drive PWB

Cassette sensor 2 YC5-B11
Cassette sensor 1 YC5-A1
Paper width sensor 1 YC5-A7
Paper width sensor 2 YC5-B3
Lower paper gauge sensor 1 YC5-A14
Upper paper gauge sensor 1 YC5-A11
YC5-A15
Lift motor 1
YC5-A16
Paper sensor 1 YC6-B9
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DU clutch 2 YC7-A3
Paper feed clutch 1 YC4-1
Lift upper limit sensor 1 YC6-B6
Vertical conveying clutch YC4-3
Paper feed clutch 2 YC4-5
PF lift upper limit sensor 2 YC6-B12
Paper sensor 2 YC6-12
Conveying sensor YC6-B3
YC5-B1
Lift motor 2
YC5-B2
Upper paper gauge sensor 2 YC5-B7
Lower paper gauge sensor 2 YC5-B10
Retard sensor 2 YC6-A10
Retard sensor 1 YC6-A7
YC5-A3
Paper length sensor 1 YC5-A5
YC5-A6
YC5-B13
Paper length sensor 2 YC5-B15
YC5-B16
3-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)MP tray paper feed section

The MP tray can load 150 sheets paper (80 g/m2). The paper on the MP tray is fed by rotating the MP paper feed roller
while lifting up the MP bottom plate by the MP solenoid. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the MP retard
roller.
3 1 6 9 5
2 11
10
9
1
4
5 7
8
11
2 6 12
9 3
1. MP paper feed roller 5. MP lift motor 9. MP paper width guides
2. MP retard roller 6. MP friction pad 10. Actuator (MP paper sensor)
3. MP retard guide 7. MP tray 11. Sub tray
4. MP retard holder 8. MP frame 12. Actuator (MP paper length sensor)
3-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
MP position sensor YC8-
MP clutch YC7-A5
MP paper sensor YC8-9
MP paper width sensor YC7-A8

MP paper length sensor YC7-A14
Feed Drive PWB
MP conveying sensor YC8-11

MP tray sensor YC7-A10
YC8-1
MP lift motor YC8-2
3-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Paper conveying section

The paper conveying section conveys paper from the cassette, the MP tray or the duplex section to the transfer and
separation section. The paper is carried by the middle roller or the MP conveying roller till paper turns on the registration
sensor, and then, conveyed to the transfer and separation section by the registration rollers.
4 5
3
6
7
2
1
2
1
6
3
1. Middle roller 5. Registration roller right
2. Middle pulley 6. Registration guide
3. Registration guide sheet 7. Conveying frame
4. Registration roller left
3-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
Belt roll-up sensor YC7-B5

Registration clutch YC9-13
YC11-1
Paper feed motor YC11-2
YC11-3
YC11-4
Middle clutch YC6-A4

Registration sensor YC6-A2
DU sensor 2 YC7-B9
Feed drive PWB
3-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Optical section
The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning the original and the laser scanner section to write
the image.
(2-1)Image scanner section
Copy original is exposed by the exposure lamp (LED) and reflection light is scanned by the CCD image sensor on the
CCD PWB through three mirrors and the ISU lens, then convert to electric signal.
When using the document processor, the mirror unit A is at the original scanning position (Slit glass) and scans the
image on the original that the document processor conveys.
8 5 9 17 3 6 1 12
8 16 7 15 2
5 9
4 14
8 7
3
13
9
10
11 6
1
2
12
1. CCD 8. Mirror B 15. Charger roller unit
2. Scanner frame 9. LED lamp 16. Charger roller unit
3. Contact glass 10. Drive motor 17. LED PWB
4. Original size indicator 11. Scanner wire
5. Slit glass 12. Scanner wire
6. ISU lens 13. Original size sensor
7. Mirror A 14. Home position sensor
3-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
Home position sensor YC16-A12
YC16-A2
YC16-A3
Scanner motor YC16-A4
YC16-A5
Original size timing sensor YC16-A6

/HQV
Original size sensor YC16-10
CCD PWB YC36
Engine PWB
LED front LED rear
LED PWB
3-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Laser scanner unit

The charged drum surface is scanned by the laser from the laser scanner units. Polygon motor drives the polygon mirror
and the mirror reflects the laser to scan horizontal image. The laser scanner unit has some lenses and mirrors, that
adjust the diameter of the laser to make focus on the drum surface. Also, the LSU cleaning motor operates to
automatically clean the LSU seal glass.
Drum Drum Drum Drum

(Yellow) (Cyan) (Magenta) (Black)
6 4 3 6 4 3 6 4 3 6 4
5 1 2 6 6 6 3 6
7
5 8
9
12
11 13 14
4 10
1
2
6
3
6
1. Polygon motor 6. Mirror 11. Cylindrical lens
2. f-theta lens A 7. Laser emitting diode 12. PD PWB
3. f-theta lens B 8. Collimator lens 13. PD lens
4. LSU seal glass 9. LD slit glass plate 14. PD mirror
5. LSU base 10. LD mirror
3-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
(Low-end model)
Engine PWB
YC9 YC27
YC1 YC3
LSU thermistor YC7-1
PD PWD YC4
YC6-1
LSU cleaning motor
YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
(High-end model)
Engine PWB
YC9 YC10 YC27
YC1 YC2 YC3

LSU thermistor YC7-1
PD PWD YC4
YC6-1
LSU cleaning motor
YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
3-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Developer section
(3-1)Developer unit
The developer section consists of magnet roller that forms magnetic brush, sleeve roller that forms thin toner layer (and
carry toner), developer blade, and the developer screw for toner mixing. Image density is adjusted by impressing the
bias to the magnet roller and the sleeve roller. The toner concentration pf the inside developer unit is detected by the
toner sensor.
(Low-end model)
5 1 7(Y) 5 1 7(C) 5 1 7(M) 5 1 7(K)
4
6
3 2 4 6 3 2 4 6 3 2 4 6 3 2
4 6
3
1. Developer roller 5 Developer case
2. Developer blade 6. Toner sensor
3. Developer screw A 7. Drum
4. Developer screw B
3-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias YC34
Main high voltage PWB
YC33
YC24-20
YC24-21
Developer motor CMY
YC24-22
YC24-23
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer K/
YC24-15
Transfer belt motor
YC24-16
YC24-17
Feed image PWB
developer clutch YC23-4
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
T/C sensor K
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Developer PWB K YC2
T/C sensor M Drum/Developer

relay PWB
Developer PWB M YC3
T/C sensor C
Developer PWB C YC4
T/C sensor Y
Developer PWB Y YC5
3-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(High-end model)
(Y) (C) (M) K
6 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 1
5 7 4 3 57 4 3 5 7 4 3 5 7 4 3
1
5 7
4
1. Sleeve roller 5. Developer screw B
2. Magnet roller 6. Developer case
3. Developer blade 7. Toner sensor
4. Developer screw A
3-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias YC34
YC33
YC24-20
YC24-21
Developer motor CMY YC24-22
YC24-23
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer K/
YC24-15
Transfer belt motor
YC24-16
YC24-17
Feed image PWB
developer clutch YC23-4
T/C sensor K
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Vibration motor
Developer
⌧ീᇶᯈBK PWB K YC2
T/C sensor M Drum/Developer

Vibration motor
relay PWB
Developer PWB M YC3
T/C sensor C
Vibration motor
Developer PWB C YC4
T/C sensor Y
Vibration motor
Developer PWB Y YC5
3-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Drum section
The drum section consists of the drum, the charger roller unit, and the cleaning unit. The drum surface is evenly charged
to prepare forming the electrical latent image by emitting the laser.
(4-1)Charger roller unit
The roller with the electric charge gets the drum surface charge evenly by contacting and rotating the roller.
(4-2)Cleaning
The remaining toner on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and collected to the waste
toner box by the drum screw. The cleaning lamp consists of the LED, and it removes the remaining electric charge on
the drum before the main charge.
(Low-end model)
3 (Y) 3 (C) 3(M) 3 (K)
567 567 567 567
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
3
2
1
6
1. MC roller 5. Cleaning blade
2. Cleaning roller 6. Drum screw
3. Drum 7. Eraser
4. Drum frame
3-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage YC34
YC33
YC24-7
YC24-8
Drum motor CMY
YC24-9
YC24-10
YC24-1
YC24-2
Drum motor K
YC24-3
YC24-4
Feed image PWB
Drum/Developer
Eraser K relay PWB
Drum PWB K YC10
Drum heater YC6
Eraser M
Drum PWB M YC11
Drum heater YC7
Eraser C
Drum PWB C YC12
Drum heater YC8
Eraser Y
Drum PWB Y YC13
Drum heater YC9
3-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(High-end model)
3 (Y) 3 (C) 3(M) 3 (B)

568 568 568 568
1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 7
3 8
2
1
5
7
1. MC roller 6. Cleaning roller
2. Cleaning roller 7. Drum screw
3. Drum 8. Eraser
4. Drum frame
5. Cleaning blade
3-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage
Main high voltage PWB YC34
YC33
YC24-7
YC24-8
Drum motor CMY
YC24-9
YC24-10
YC24-1
Drum motor K YC24-2
YC24-3
YC24-4
Feed image PWB
Drum/Developer
Eraser K
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮ relay PWB
Drum PWB K
⌧ീᇶᯈBK YC10
Drum heater
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK YC6
Eraser M
Drum PWB M YC11
Drum heater YC7
Eraser C
Drum PWB C YC12
Drum heater YC8
Eraser Y
Drum PWB Y YC13
Drum heater YC9
3-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Transfer/Separation section
(5-1)Primary transfer unit
The primary transfer section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt and four primary transfer rollers
facing at each drums. When printing the color image, the toner image with a single color formed on each drums are
repeatedly transferred on the transfer belt by impressing the bias to the primary transfer rollers, and then the full color
toner image is formed. Also, the ID sensor attached to the main unit measures the image density on the transfer belt.
The transfer cleaning unit collects the remaining toner on the transfer belt after the secondary transfer, and carries it to
the waste toner box as waste toner.
8 7 6 3 3 3 5 3 1
10 9 4 2 12 12 12 12
(Y) (C) (M) (K)
2 3
9
8
4
7
1
11
1. Drive roller 5. Transfer belt 9. Cleaning screw
2. Backup roller 6. Belt pre-brush 10. Cleaning blade
3. Primary transfer roller 7. Cleaning fur brush 11. Transfer unit cover
4. Tension roller 8. Cleaning roller 12. Drum
3-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
YC34
Transfer high-voltage
Transfer bias
PWB
Engine PWB
Belt release sensor YC23-7
YC23-1
Belt release motor
YC23-2
Feed image PWB
YC24-13
Developer K / YC24-14
Transfer belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Transfer connect
PWB
Belt thermistor YC2-1

Transfer PWB
YC3-3
Belt cleaning motor
YC3-4
3-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-2)Secondary transfer roller unit

The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller on the paper conveying unit and the
separation brush. The DC bias from the high-voltage PWB (HVPWB) is impressed to the secondary transfer roller, and
the toner image formed on the transfer belt is transfered to the paper by the potential gap. After transfer, the paper is
separated by self stripping and discharge separation brush that contacts to ground.
3 1 4
3 4
1. Secondary transfer roller
2. Discharger needle
3. Transfer front guide
4. Transfer spring
3-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Transfer Bias Transfer T2_OFF_REM

high-voltage T2_CNT YC34-A10
Separate bias T_REM YC34-A13
PWB YC34-A14
3-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Fuser section
The paper from the transfer/separation section go through between the heat belt and the press roller. Heat belt on guide
plate surface is heat by IH, and the paper is pressed by the press roller with spring power source. That makes toner melt
and fix on paper.
The surface temperature of the heat roller and the press roller is detected by the fuser thermistor and controlled by the
Engine PWB.
(6-1)Fuser unit
(Low-end model)
9 8
7
6
4
3
2 5
13 11
12
1
1
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
5
1. Cooling the fuser belt 6. Press roller separation 11. Fuser frame
edge.
2. IH core 7. Actuator (Fuser sensor) 12. Fuser front guide
3. Fuser thermistor 8. Fuser eject roller 13. Discharger needle
4. Separator 9. Fuser exit sub roller
5. Press roller 10. Pressure switching cam
3-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC2-1 YC10-2
Fuser motor
YC3-1 YC10-3
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high voltage Fuser pressure release motor
YC10-8
PWB
FSR-1 Feed drive PWB
Fuser thermostat
Feed image PWB
Rear belt rotation sensor YC22-16
Fuser thermistor 1 YC22-13
YC22
Fuser pressure release sensor YC2-11
Fuser sensor YC2-6
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
3-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(High-end model)
9 8
7
6
2 4
3
5
11
13 12
1
1
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
5
1. Fuser belt 6. Press roller separation 11. Fuser frame
2. IH core 7. Actuator (Fuser sensor) 12. Fuser front guide
3. Fuser thermistor 8. Fuser eject roller 13. Discharger needle
4. Separator 9. Fuser exit sub roller
5. Press roller 10. Pressure switching cam
3-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC10-2
YC2-1 Fuser motor
YC10-3
YC3-1
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high voltage Fuser pressure release motor
YC10-8
PWB
Feed drive PWB
FSR-1
Fuser thermostat
Feed image PWB
Rear belt rotation sensor YC22-16
YC22
Fuser pressure release sensor YC2-11
Fuser jam sensor YC2-6
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
IH position sensor YC32-B8
YC32-B9
YC32-B10
IH core motor
YC32-B11
YC32-B12
3-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)Eject and feedshift section

The eject and branch section consists of the paper path from the fuser section to the inner tray or the duplex conveying
section.
(7-1)Exit unit
1
2
9 8
7
5
3 6
10
4
9
11
8
2 7
9
1
9
4
10
5
6
12
11
1. Upper eject roller 5. Exit conveying roller 9. Actuator (Exit paper full sensor)
2. Upper exit pulley 6. Exit conveying pulley 10. Exit feedshift guide
3. Lower exit roller 7. Switching guide 11. Exit guide pulley
4. Lower exit pulley 8. Switching guide pulley 12. Actuator (Exit switching sensor)
3-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
Feed image PWB
Upper exit full sensor YC17-A10
Lower exit full sensor YC17-A7
YC17-A1
YC17-A2
YC17-A3
YC17-A4
Exit reversing sensor YC17-A19
YC17-1A5
Upper exit solenoid
YC17-A16
YC17-A12
Lower exit solenoid
YC17-A13
3-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7-2)Exit paper jam

In case that exiting paper gets stuck with paper on tray, have the lever longer.
1 Have the eject lever (c) on the eject actuator longer if the leading edge of paper (b) get stuck with trailing edge
(a) of the ejected paper.
2 The lever pushes down the trailing edge (a) of eject paper to prevent from hitting by the leading edge of next
paper (b).
In case of stretching the eject level lever
In case of restoring the eject level lever
3-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)Duplex conveying section

(8-1)Duplex conveying unit
The duplex conveying section consists of the paper path from the branch section (exit/feedshift) to the paper conveying
section.
1
9
2
12
3
4
6
5
4
11
10
7
8
9
1
3
2 4
12
5
6
10
11
7
8
1. DU conveying upper roller 5. DU conveying lower roller 9. Actuator (DU sensor 1)
2. DU conveying upper 6. DU conveying lower 10. Actuator (DU sensor 2)

pulley pulley
3-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3. DU conveying middle 7. DU registration roller 11. DU conveying base

roller
4. DU conveying middle 8. DU registration pulley 12. DU conveying guide

pulley
[Block diagram]
Conveying open/close sensor YC7-B13
Duplex sensor 1 YC7-B12
Feed drive PWB
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Duplex clutch 2 YC7-A3
Duplex clutch 1 YC7-A1
Duplex sensor 2 YC7-B9
3-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
3 - 7 Mechanical configuration (Optional)

(1)Paper feeder (PF-7100)
The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80 g/m2) and consists of 2 cassettes. Feeding
from cassette works as picking up paper by rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to main unit by rotating the paper
feed roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
14 3 4
2 1 12 13
9 10 8 7
15
5
12
13
15
1
4
5
2
9 10 8 7 14 3
8
9 12
7 13
14
2
11 4
6 1
3-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8
9 7
14
2
12
13
4
8 1
6
11
1. PF paper feed roller 9. Paper length guide
2. PF pickup roller 10. PF cassette base 2
3. PF pickup holder 11. PF width guide release lever 2
4. PF retard roller 12. PF conveying roller
5. PF retard holder 13. PF conveying pulley
6. PF friction pad 14. PF actuator (PF paper sensor)
7. PF lift motor 15. PF actuator (PF conveying sensor)
8. PF paper width guides
3-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
PF PWB
YC3-11
PF paper length sensor 1 YC3-13
YC3-15
PF paper width sensor 1 YC3-17
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
PF conveying sensor 1 YC4-6
PF paper sensor 1 YC3-3
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 YC4-3
PF feed clutch 1 YC9-3
PF conveying clutch 1 YC9-1
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
PF conveying clutch 2 YC9-5
PF feed clutch 2 YC9-7
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF paper sensor 2 YC5-3
PF conveying sensor 2 YC4-14
PF paper width sensor 2 YC5-17
YC5-11
PF paper length sensor 2 YC5-13
YC5-15
3-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Large capacity feeder (PF-7110)

(2-1)Cassette 2
The cassette can load 1,750 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 1,500 sheets paper (80 g/m2). Feeding from cassette works as
picking up paper by rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to main unit by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding is
also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
1 1 10
9 8 7 2 4 9 8 13 7 2 4 11
12 3
5 12 3 14
5
8
9
12
4
9 1 8 13
2 10
8 11 14
9
11
9 11 1
2
8 12
10
10
4
6
7
1. PF paper feed roller 6. PF friction pad 11. PF conveying pulley
2. PF pickup roller 7. PF lift motor 12. PF actuator (PF paper sensor)
3. PF pickup holder 8. PF paper width guides 13. PF actuator (PF horizontal conveying sensor)
4. PF retard roller 9. Paper length guide *1 14. PF actuator (PF vertical conveying sensor)
5. PF retard holder 10. PF conveying roller
*1: Inch specification only
3-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
PF feed left clutch 2 YC9-7
PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 YC9-9
PF horizontal conveying sensor YC4-14
PF vertical conveying sensor YC4-6
PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 YC9-5
PF feed right clutch 1 YC9-3
PF vertical conveying clutch YC9-1
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF PWB
3-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The deck can load 3,500 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 3,000 sheets paper (80 g/m2). Feeding from cassette works as
picking up paper by rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to main unit by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding is
also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
9 1 3 2 7 6 8
10
4
11
5
1 7
9
10 8
4 2 6
5
7
1. PF paper feed roller 5. PF friction pad 9. PF conveying roller
2. PF pickup roller 6. PF lift motor 10. PF conveying pulley
3. PF pickup holder 7. PF paper width guides 11. PF actuator
4. PF retard roller 8. Paper length guide
3-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
PF feed clutch YC15-1
YC18-1
YC18-2
PF conveying motor YC18-4
YC18-5
YC18-6
PF PWB
YC8-1
PF lift motor
YC8-2
PF lift upper limit sensor YC5-16
PF lift lower limit sensor YC6-9
YC5-9
PF paper feed solenoid
YC5-10
3-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-1)Original paper feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts in the figure, and conveys the original on the tray to the original conveying
section. The original is fed by rotating the DP pickup roller and the DP feed belt.
11 12 2 3 5 7 13
10 4 1 8
9 6
2
13
11
10
8
1
4
5
8
9 12
1. Pickup roller 6. DP original sensor 11. DP registration pulley
2. DP paper feed belt 7. DP original width guide 12. DP actuator (DP registration sensor)
3. DP feed holder 8. DP original tray 13. DP actuator (DP original length sensor)
4. MP Retard roller 9. DP paper feed sensor
5. DF friction pad 10. DP registration roller
(4-2)Original conveying section and eject/switching section

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The original is scanned at the optical section (CCD) in
the main unit when the original passes by the DP slit glass.
3-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
The original eject/switching section consists of the parts in the figure. The original ,that is already scanned, is ejected to
the eject table by the eject roller. In case of switchback scanning, the original goes to the switchback tray once and then
back to the original conveying section by the switchback roller.
6 8 9
14
1 3 6 11 15 13
2 4 5 7 10 12
5
3
1 4
8
2 9
15 13 14
10 12
8 11
1. DP conveying roller 1 6. DP conveying pulley 2 11. DP feedshift pulley
2. DP conveying pulley 1 7. DP feedshift guide 12. DP eject roller
3. DP reading guide 8. DP reversing roller 13. DP eject pulley
4. DP scanner guide pulley 9. DP reversing pulley 14. DP eject tray
5. DP conveying roller 2 10. DP feedshift roller 15. DP actuator (DP exit sensor)
3-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
DP timing sensor YC7-5
YC9-9
YC9-10
DP conveying motor YC9-12
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP lift motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DP lift lower limit sensor YC7-12
YC11-5
YC11-6
DP reversing motor YC11-8
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP main PWB
DP exit sensor YC17-3
DP original width sensor YC6-5
DP original length sensor YC6-3
DP feed sensor YC4-2
DP registration sensor YC7-3
DP lift upper limit sensor YC16-8
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP feedshift motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
DP feedshift sensor YC16-5
3-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-3)Duplex (switchback) action
2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main body).
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
Conveyed to the DP switchback

2
3
tray by the DP switchback feedshift
guide. DP switchback roller
DP switchback tray
1
DP switchback feedshift guide
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
The second side of original is 2

3
scanned at the slit glass (machine
main body) and the original is
conveyed to the DP switchback tray. DP switchback tray
1
Slit glass: second side scanning
Ejected to the original eject table

DP regist roller
by the DP switchback, DP
feedshift and DP eject rollers. DP switchback roller
2
3 1
DP eject roller
Original eject table
DP conveying roller DP feedshift roller
3-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]

11 10 2
12 9 8 3 1 7 6 13 14
4 5
11
12
9
10
3 6
7
13
2 5 1
4
6
1. DP pickup roller 6. DP original width guide 11. DP conveying roller 1
2. DP paper feed belt 7. DP lift motor 12. DP conveying pulley 1
3. DP belt tension pulley 8. DP paper feed sensor 13. DP original tray
4. DP retard roller 9. DP registration roller 14. DP original length sensor
5. DF friction pad 10. DP registration pulley
3-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The 2nd side of the conveyed original is scanned when
it passes by the CIS and the 1st side is scanned at the optical section (CCD) in the main unit when it passes by the DP
slit glass. The original ,that is already scanned, is ejected to the eject table by the eject roller.
32 1
13
5 4 6 8 10 12
7 9 11
2
3
6 4
13 14
12
8 10
7 11
9
1. DP backside timing 6. DP scanner guide pulley 11. DP eject roller

sensor
2. DPCIS 7. DP reading guide 12. DP exit pulley
3. DPCIS roller 8. DP conveying roller 3 13. DP eject tray
4. DP conveying roller 2 9. DP conveying pulley 3
5. DP conveying pulley 2 10. DP actuator (DP exit

sensor)
3-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
DP backside timing sensor YC7-5
DPSHD PWB
YC9-10
YC9-12
DP conveying motor
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-2
YC9-4
DP registration motor
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-6
YC11-8
DP lift motor
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP PWB
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP exit motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
3-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]

12 11 2 8 7
13 14 4 5 3 1 9 10 15
11
2
14 9
13
12 7
4
5
1
8 6
9 10
15
1. DP pickup roller 6. DP friction pad 11 DP actuator (DP feed sensor)
2. DP feed roller 7. DP actuator (DP original 12. DP registration roller

sensor)
3. DP feed holder 8. DP original stopper 13. DP registration pulley
4. DP retard roller 9. DP original width guide 14. DP actuator (DP registration sensor)
5. DP separation pad 10. DP original tray 15. DP actuator (DP original length sensor)
assembly

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The original is scanned at the optical section (CCD) in
the main unit when the original passes by the DP slit glass.
3-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The original ,that is already scanned, is ejected to the
eject table by the eject roller. In case of switchback scanning, the original goes to the switchback tray once and then
back to the original conveying section by the switchback roller.
12
13
1 5 7 8 11
2 4 6 9 10
7
5
6
3
7
2 1
12
11
8 10
9 13
1. DP conveying roller 1 6. DP conveying pulley 2 11. DP exit pulley
2. DP conveying pulley 1 7. DP feedshift guide 12. Reversing guide
3. DP actuator (DP timing 8. DP reversing roller 13. DP eject tray

sensor)
4. DP reading guide 9. DP reversing pulley
5. DP conveying roller 2 10. DP exit roller
3-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
DP registration clutch YC8-3
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor
YC9-3
YC9-4
DP paper feed clutch YC8-1
YC9-5
YC9-6
DP feedshift motor
YC9-7
YC9-8
DP feedshift sensor YC16-5
DP PWB
YC4-1
YC4-4
DP registration sensor YC5-6
3-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-3)Duplex (switchback) action

2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main body).
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
Conveyed to the DP switchback

2
3
tray by the DP switchback feedshift
guide. 1
DP switchback tray
DP switchback feedshift guide
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
2
The second side of original is 3
scanned at the slit glass (machine
main body) and the original is 1
conveyed to the DP switchback tray.
DP switchback tray
Slit glass: second side scanning
Ejected to the original eject table DP regist roller

by the DP switchback, DP regist, DP switchback roller
DP conveying and DP eject rollers. 2
3 1
Original eject table
DP eject roller
DP conveying roller
3-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]

32 1
13
5 4 6 8 15 14 10 12
7 9 11
11
12
9
10
3 6
7
13
2 5 1
4
6
1. Pickup roller 6. DP original width guide 11. DP conveying roller 1
2. DP paper feed belt 7. DP lift motor 12. DP conveying pulley 1
3. DP belt tension pulley 8. DP paper feed sensor 13. DP original tray
4. DP retard roller 9. DP registration roller 14. DP original length sensor
5. DF friction pad 10. DP registration pulley

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The 2nd side of the conveyed original is scanned when
it passes by the CIS and the 1st side is scanned at the optical section (CCD) in the main unit when it passes by the DP
slit glass. The original ,that is already scanned, is ejected to the eject table by the eject roller.
3-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
32 1
13
5 4 6 8 15 14 10 12
7 9 11
2
3
6 4
13 14
12
8 10
7 11
9
1. DP backside timing 6. DP scanner guide pulley 11. DP eject roller

sensor
2. DPCIS 7. DP reading guide 12. DP exit pulley
3. DPCIS roller 8. DP conveying roller 3 13. DP eject tray
4. DP conveying roller 2 9. DP conveying pulley 3 14. DP multi feed sensor 1 (Emit)
5. DP conveying pulley 2 10. DP actuator (DP exit 15. DP multi feed sensor 2 (Receptor)
sensor)
3-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
DP backside timing sensor YC7-5
DPSHD PWB
YC9-10
YC9-12
DP conveying motor
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-2
YC9-4
DP registration motor
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-6
YC11-8
DP lift motor
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP PWB
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP exit motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
DP multi feed sensor (Emit)
DP multi feed sensor (Receptor)
3-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(8-1)Paper conveying section
The conveying section consists of the parts as shown below. Paper on the middle tray is transferred after adjusting the
side registration by moving the DF side registration guides in the staple and sort modes.
18 12 11 10 7 8 9 5 3 4
13
14
2
1
15 17 6 16
18 13
8
7
14
4
9
2 1
16
1. DF entry roller 7. DF Middle roller 13. DF exit roller
2. DF entry pulley 8. DF Middle pulley 14. DF exit pulley
3. DF conveying roller 9. DF paddle 15. DF actuator (Paper press sensor)
4. DF conveying pulley 10. DF upper guide 16. DF stapler
5. DF entry sensor 11. DF paper width guides 17. DF middle tray
6. DF paper stopper 12. DF bundle eject unit 18. DF tray
3-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
DF bundle eject sensor YC19-18
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
DF side registration sensor 1 YC19-6
YC13-2
DF Paper press solenoid
YC13-3
DF exit paper sensor YC16-3
DF Paper press sensor 2 YC19-24
DF Paper press sensor 1 YC19-21
DF paper entry sensor YC17-5
DF Side registration sensor 2 YC19-3
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF adjusting sensor YC19-27
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF Side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF Side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
DF staple unit
DF staple reley PWB YC10
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF paper entry motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
DF paddle sensor YC17-3
DF slide sensor YC19-30
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF exit release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF middle motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
DF PWB
3-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8-2)Bundle eject operation

1st sheet
1 By rotating the DF entry roller and DF middle roller (a), paper is conveyed to the process section and then
conveyed to the DF exit tray (b).
a
2 The DF bundle exit unit (b) and the DF upper guide (c) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the DF
middle roller (a). Then, the DF exit roller (d) is rotated reversely and paper is sent to the DF middle tray (e).
a
d b
3 Then, the DF upper guide (a) ascends and the DF bundle eject unit (b) ascends by the DF eject release motor
drive. By rotating the DF paddles(c), paper is conveyed to the DF middle tray (d). The DF side registration
motor 1, 2 (e) drive the DF side registration guides (f) to adjust paper.
b a
f c
3-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2nd sheet and after

4 By rotating the DF entry roller and DF middle roller (c), 2nd paper (b) is conveyed to the process section as the
1st sheet (a).
c
5 The DF bundle exit unit (b) descends and The DF upper guide (c) descends when the paper trailing edge
passes the DF middle roller (a). Then, by rotating the DF exit roller (d) and the DF paddles (e), paper is
conveyed to the DF middle tray (f). Paper is adjusted as well as the 1st sheet.
a
d b
c e
6 As completing to adjust the last sheet to bundle, the DF bundle eject unit (a) descends and by rotating the DF
eject roller (b), the paper bundle (c) is ejected to the DF eject tray (d).
a
b
3-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(9-1)Paper entry/Feedshift/DF tray B exit section
The paper entry section convey paper from the main unit to the feedshift section. Also, the feedshift guide 3 switches the
paper conveying path to convey paper to the DF tray B or finishing section.
7 9 8
6
11
10
5 4
3 2
1
11
9
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
1. DF entry roller 5. DF conveying pulley 9. DF actuator (DF sub eject sensor)
2. DF entry pulley 6. DF tray B exit roller 10. DF entry sensor
3. DF feedshift guide 3 7. DF exit pulley 11. DF tray B
4. DF tray B conveying roller 8. DF sub eject sensor
3-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
DF Sub tray full sensor YC21-6
DF sub exit sensor YC21-3
YC12-5
YC12-6
DF exit motor
YC12-7
YC12-8
YC12-13
YC12-14
YC12-15
YC12-16
YC18-12
DF feedshift solenoid 3
YC18-13
DF PWB
3-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9-2)Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section

The feedshift guide 3 (b) is activated by the DF feedshift solenoid 3 (a) and switches the paper conveying path for the
paper conveyed to the feedshift section to exit it to the DF tray B (c) or to convey it to the feedshift section for the relief
drum (d) or finishing section (e). Also, the DF sub exit sensor (f) detects paper jam at exit to the DF tray B (c).
f
a
e
d
b
(9-3)Finishing section
The finishing section consists of the parts below and the paper conveyed from the main unit is exited to the DF tray A.
Also, bundle eject mode and staple mode are processed.
3-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Also, for folding, switch the paper conveying path to the relief drum side by the feedshift guide 1.
13 16,17 15 10 9 6 4 7 1
14 11 8
2
12
3
20
5
18
19
20
10
11
13
12 9
1
5
2
3
1. DF relief drum 8. DF middle sensor 15. DF bundle eject unit
2. DF conveying pulley 9. DF actuator (DF middle sensor) 16. DF side registration sensor
1
3. DF conveying pulley 10. DF Middle roller 17. DF side registration sensor

2
4. DF feedshift guide 1 11. DF Middle pulley 18. DF staple unit
5. DF feedshift guide 2 12. DF tray A exit roller 19. DF slide sensor
6. DF drum sensor 13. DF eject pulley 20. DF tray A
7. DF actuator (DF drum 14. DF eject sensor

sensor)
3-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
DF shift sensor 1 YC23-3
YC14-5 / YC14-6
DF shift motor 2
YC14-7 / YC14-8
YC14-9 / YC14-10
DF shift motor 1
YC14-11 / YC14-12
DF shift sensor 2 YC23-6
DF shift release sensor YC23-18
DF exit clutch YC14-13
YC14-1 / YC14-2
DF shift release motor
YC14-3 / YC14-4
YC15-1 / YC15-2
DF paddle motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC12-17 / YC12-18
YC12-19 / YC12-20
YC12-9 / YC12-10
DF middle motor
YC12-11 / YC12-12
YC18-6
YC18-7
DF drum sensor YC20-3
DF middle sensor YC20-6
YC18-1 / YC18-2
DF relief drum motor
YC18-3 / YC18-4
YC18-9
YC18-10
YC12-1 / YC12-2
DF slide motor
YC12-3 / YC12-4
YC19-1 / YC19-2
DF tray motor
YC19-3 / YC19-4

DF PWB
DF staple relay PWB YC17
DF staple unit
DF bundle exit sensor YC22-15
DF tray upper surface sensor 2 YC13-3
YC15-5 / YC15-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC15-7 / YC15-8
YC15-9 / YC15-10
YC15-11 / YC15-12
DF exit sensor YC22-11
3-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9-4)Relief drum operation

As process multiple copies of A4 size paper to the finishing section or folding section, to secure the time to finish paper,
the 1st and 2nd paper of the next group is relieved until the 3rd paper is conveyed.
1 The feed-shift guide 1 (b) is activated by the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 (a) and the conveying path for the
conveyed paper is switched. The 1st paper of the next group is conveyed to the relief drum (c).
2 Likewise, 2nd paper of the next group is conveyed to the relief drum (c).
b
c
3 When the 3rd paper of the next group is conveyed into the relief drum, it is conveyed to the finishing section (a)
with the 1st and 2nd paper. Then, the paper conveying path is switched by the feed-shift guide 1 (b).
3-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 The DF feedshift solenoid 2 (b) activates the feedshift guide 2 (c) and it switches the paper conveying path to
convey paper to the folding unit (a).
a
1st sheet
1 By rotating the middle roller (a), paper is conveyed to the process section.
Paper is conveyed to the DF tray A (c) by the DF tray A eject roller (b).
c
3-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 The conveying guide (d) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the middle roller (a). Then, the DF tray
A eject roller (b) is rotated reversely and paper is sent to the adjusting tray (e).
d
b e
3 Then, the paper conveying guide (d) ascends and the bundle eject unit (g) ascends by the DF eject release
motor (f) drive.
By rotating the DF tray A exit roller (b) and adjusting paddles (h), paper is conveyed to the adjusting tray (i).
The DF side registration motor 1, 2 (j) drive the adjusting guides (k) to adjust paper.
g f
k
h
d
b i
j
2nd sheet and after
4 By rotating the DF entry roller and DF middle roller (c), 2nd paper (b) is conveyed to the process section as the
1st sheet (a).
b
c
3-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 The conveying guide (d) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the DF middle roller (c). Then, by
rotating the paddles (e) and the adjusting paddles (f), paper is conveyed to the adjusting tray (g). Paper is
adjusted as well as the 1st sheet.
e f
c
d g
6 When adjusting the last paper of bundle is complete, the bundle eject unit (h) descends and the DF tray A eject
roller (i) rotates to eject the paper bundle to the DF tray A (j).
h
3-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The finishing section consists of the parts below and the paper conveyed from the main unit is ejected to the eject tray.
Also, bundle eject mode and staple mode are processed.
9 10 12 8 6 7 5 4 2 1 15 3
11
13,14
16
18
6
7
17
10
9
1
2
1. DF entry roller 8. DF Middle pulley 15. DF side registration sensor

1
2. DF entry pulley 9. DF bundle eject unit 16. DF side registration sensor

2
3. DF entry sensor 10. DF eject roller 17. DF staple unit
4. DF middle sensor 11. DF eject pulley 18. DF slide sensor
3-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5. DF actuator (DF middle 12. DF eject sensor 19. DF paddle

sensor)
6. DF Middle roller 13. DF adjusting tray 20. DF tray
[Block diagram]
DF exit sensor YC19-8
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
YC8-9 / YC8-10
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF middle motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-13 / YC8-14
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF PWB
DF staple unit
YC9-5 / YC9-6
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
YC9-11 / YC9-12
3-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1st sheet
1 By rotating the DF entry roller (a) and DF middle roller (b), paper is conveyed to the process section. Paper is
conveyed to the DF main tray (d) by the eject roller (c).
d b
c
a
2 The conveying guide (e) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the middle roller (b). Then, the eject
roller (c) rotates reversely and paper is sent to the adjusting tray.
h g
c e
j
i k
3-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Then, the conveying guide (e) ascends and the bundle eject unit (h) ascends by the DF eject release motor (g)
drive.
By rotating the exit roller (c) and adjusting paddles (i), paper is conveyed to the side (j) of the adjusting tray (f).
The DF side registration motor 1, 2 (k) drive the adjusting guides (l) to adjust paper.
h g
c e
j
i k
2nd sheet and after
4 By rotating the DF entry roller (c) and DF middle roller (d), 2nd paper (b) is conveyed to the process section as
the 1st sheet (a).
b d
3-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 The conveying guide (e) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the middle roller (d). Then, by rotating
the paddles (f) and the adjusting paddles (g), paper is conveyed to the adjusting tray (h). Paper is adjusted as
well as the 1st sheet.
f
d
e g
h
6 As completing to adjust the last sheet to bundle, the bundle eject unit (i) descends and by rotating the main
tray eject roller (j), the paper bundle is ejected to the DF main tray (k).
k
j
3-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)Mailbox (MT-730(B))
The mailbox exits paper to the designated tray 1 to 7 and stack.
9
10
11
3
4
12
3 8
4
13
3 8
4
14 2 1
3 8
4
15
3 8
4
2 1
3 8
4
3 8
4
2 1
8
7
5 6
9
10
11
12 3
4
13 16 3
4
16 3
14 4
16 3
15 4
16 3
2 4
1
16 3
4
16 3
2 4
1
16 8
2
1
1. MT conveying pulley 7. MT upper entry guide 13. MT tray 5
2. MT conveying roller 8. MT separation 14. MT tray 6
3. MT eject pulley 9. MT tray 1 15. MT tray 7
4. MT eject roller 10. MT tray 2 16. MT actuator (MT overflow

sensor)
3-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5. MT lower entry guide 11. MT tray 3
6. MT middle entry guide 12. MT tray 4
[Block diagram]
MT PWB
MT tray exit sensor 2 YC1-18
MT tray sensor 1 YC1-2
YC5-1
MT conveying motor YC5-2
YC5-3
YC5-4
MT tray exit sensor 1 YC2-2
MT home position sensor YC2-4
YC3
YC7
DF PWB
3-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11-1)Ejecting to the mailbox tray

Belt support plate (b) moves on the belt (a) and passes the feedshift nail lever (c), the feedshift nail (d) switches the
conveying path to eject to each tray. Also, the MT tray eject sensor (d) detects paper jam.
b d
a e
3-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12)Punch unit (PH-7)

The punch unit is installed at the paper entry section of the document finisher and has paper stop and make punch
holes.
1
6
7
2
8
4
1
5
2
1. PH cam 5. PH cam shaft
2. PH cutter 6. PH home position sensor
3. PH dust tank 7. PH pulse sensor
4. PH cutter holder 8. PH pulse plate
3-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
YC4-1
PH motor
YC4-3
PH slide sensor YC6-3
YC3-1
YC3-2
PH slide motor
YC3-3
YC3-4
PH pulse sensor YC8-3
PH home position sensor YC8-6
PH tank set sensor YC9-1
PH PWB
PH tank full sensor YC5-10
YC5-4
YC5-5
PH paper edge sensor 1
YC5-6
YC5-7
PH paper edge sensor 2 YC7-1
YC5-2
PH solenoid
YC5-3
YC1
YC7
DF PWB
3-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13)Folding unit (BF-730)

The folding unit makes the conveyed paper center-fold or tri-fold with the BF blade and exit paper to the fold tray. Also,
the BF staple unit makes center paper center-fold and exits booklet-stapled paper to the fold tray.
2 1
3
21 17 16
22 19 18 14 15
5 4
8
6 7
25
26 20
23
24 13 1211 10
1
2
18
21 17
14 20
5
6
4
26 7
13 12
1. BF conveying roller 1 10. BF blade 16. BF feedshift guide
2. BF conveying pulley 1 11. BF blade sensor 17. BF eject roller
3. BF vertical conveying sensor 12. BF right roller 18. BF eject pulley
4. BF conveying roller 2 10. BF left roller 19. BF tray full sensor
5. BF conveying pulley 2 11. BF upper roller 20. BF eject paper press arm
6. BF entry roller 12. BF staple unit 21. BF lower moving plate
7. BF entry pulley 13. BF exit sensor 22. BF upper moving plate
3-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8. BF paper entry sensor 14. BF conveying roller 3 23. BF tray
9. BF paper sensor 15. BF conveying pulley 3
[Block diagram]
BF tray full sensor YC20-9
BF side registration sensor 1 YC20-6
BF exit sensor YC20-12
YC17-2
BF feedshift solenoid
YC17-3
YC13-6 / YC13-7
BF staple motor
YC13-9 / YC13-10
BF vertical conveying sensor YC20-15
BF paper entry sensor YC20-29
BF adjusting sensor 2 YC20-26
BF side registration sensor 2 YC20-21
YC10-9 / YC10-10
BF paper entry motor
YC10-11 / YC10-12
YC15-1 / YC15-2
BF blade motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
BF paper sensor YC20-18
YC20-5 / YC10-6
BF side registration motor 2
YC10-7 / YC10-8
YC10-1 / YC10-2
BF adjusting motor 2
YC10-3 / YC10-4
YC10-13 / YC10-14
BF adjusting motor 1
YC10-15 / YC10-16
BF PWB
YC16-1 / YC16-2
BF main motor
YC16-3 / YC16-4
YC10-17 / YC10-18
BF side registration motor 1
YC10-19/ YC10-20
BF adjusting sensor 1 YC20-3
BF blade sensor YC20-24
YC3, 5, 7
YC9, 10
DF PWB
(13-1)Paper folding operation (Center-folding, Tri-folding)

Center-folding
1 Paper (b) stuck in the folding unit (a) is conveyed to the center-folding position by the BF adjusting motor 1, 2
(c) that move both upper BF moving plate (d) and lower BF moving plate (e).
3-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 The BF adjusting motor 1, 2 (f) drive and align t the paper side.
e a d
f c
c f
3 The BF blade (a) pushes up the center of paper by driving the BF blade motor and let it go between the BF
right roller (b) and BF left motor (c).
4 Center-folded paper is ejected to the BF tray (e) by the BF right roller (b), BF left roller (c) and BF eject roller
(d).
c b
d a
3-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Tri-folding
1 The paper in the folding unit is conveyed to the center-folding position by drive of the BF adjusting motor 1, 2
as well as the center-folding operation.
2 After align the paper side, the BF blade (a) pushes up the paper and let it go between the BF right roller (b) and
BF left roller (c).
3 The BF feed-shift solenoid (d) activates the BF feed-shift guide (e) it switches the paper conveying path for the
paper from the BF right/left roller to convey it to the relief section (f).
d
e
f
b
c a
4 When the paper stops at the relief section, the paper loop generated in the space goes between the BF right
roller (a) and upper BF roller (b) to get the paper fold on the inside.
b
3-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 The BF conveying roller (b) and BF exit roller (c) convey the folded paper (a) to the BF tray (d).
c b
a
(13-2)Tri-folding position adjustment for the folding unit

Execute the treatment below to make width of A, B and C even as tri-folding.
A B C
B
Z
A C
X Y
* If this adjustment is executed for bundled paper, Z section may be folded since there is little margin at the tri-folding
position (X, Y).
* Machine shipment setting (B)
Metric (A4): 100 to 102 mm
Inch (Letter): 95 to 96 mm
3-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Adjustment 1
Change the width of B.
Adjuster plate relocation method
1 Push the folding unit release lever (a) and pull out the folding unit (b).
a
2 Open the upper folding unit cover (a) upward and remove two screws (b) to take the eject cover (c) away.
b
c
3-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Loosen two screws (b) securing the adjuster plate (a) and move it.
b a b
e
d
• Raising the adjuster plate makes the width B decrease and lowering the adjuster makes increase the width.
(Scale: 1mm)
• When adjusting, fix it where the left and right scale are equal in reference to the scale (c).
Shipment setting position
Metric: A4 (d)
Inch: LT (e)
* “A4” and “LT” punch marks are on the machine rear side only.
Treatment 2
Change the setting values in U246 [Setting: Three Fold] to shift the tri-folding position (a) and to change the width A and
C. (Width of B no change.)
B
A C A C
Left Right
a a
Raise the set value to align the tri-folding to the left.
Lower the set value to align the tri-folding to the right.
3-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(14-1)Paper entry and feedshift and DF tray B exit section
The paper entry section convey paper from the main unit to the feedshift section. Also, the feedshift guide 3 switches the
paper conveying path to convey paper to the DF tray B or finishing section.
10 7 8
5 9
6 2 10
3
1
10 5 4
1
3 2
6
7
1 DF entry roller 7 DF eject pulley

2 DF entry pulley 8 DF sub eject sensor
3 DF feedshift solenoid 3 9 DF entry sensor
4 DF tray B conveying roller 10 DF tray B
5 DF conveying pulley
6 DF tray B exit roller
3-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14-2)Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section

The feedshift guide 3 (b) is activated by the DF feedshift solenoid 3 (a) and switches the paper conveying path, then
convey it to either the DF tray B (c), relief drum (d) or finishing section (e). Also, the DF sub exit sensor (f) detects paper
jam at exit to the DF tray B (c).
f
e
b
3-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
The finishing section consists of the parts below and convey the paper from the main unit to the DF tray A. Also, bundle
eject mode and staple mode are processed.
3-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Also, for folding, switch the paper path to the relief drum by the feedshift guide 1.
18 11 12 13 9 8 7 6 4 1 2
10
3
16
17
8 3 1 2
3-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11
10
1 DF relief drum 7 DF middle sensor 13 DF bundle eject unit

2 DF conveying pulley 8 DF middle roller 14 DF side registration sensor 1
3 DF conveying pulley 9 DF middle pulley 15 DF side registration sensor 2
4 DF Feedshift solenoid 1 10 DF tray A exit roller 16 DF staple unit
5 DF Feedshift solenoid 2 11 DF eject pulley 17 DF slide sensor
6 DF drum sensor 12 DF eject sensor 18 DF tray A
3-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
DF operation PWB YC32
DF staple full sensor YC36
DF PWB
DF staple unit
DF shift motor 1 YC23/1-4
DF shift motor 2 YC23/ 5-8
DF bundle exit motor 1 YC18/ 5-8
DF side registration motor 2 YC21/ 5-8
DF shift release motor YC23/ 9-12
DF trail press guide motor YC19/ 5-8
DF upper exit motor YC14/ 9/10/12-14
DF adjusting pulley motor YC19/ 1-4
DF tray motor YC28/ 1-5
DF sub tray exit motor YC15/ B1/ B2/ B4-B6

DF adjusting release HP sensor YC25/ 1-4
DF middle motor YC14/ 1/ 2/ 4-6
DF entry motor YC15/ A1/ A2/A4-A6
DF relief drum motor YC15/ A9/ A10/A12-A14
DF slide motor YC17 / 1/ 3/ 4/ 6
DF exit motor YC20/ 13/ 14/ 16-18
BF staple motor YC27/ 24/ 25/ 28
DF exit paper press motor YC20/ 5-8
DF bundle exit motor 2 YC18/ 1/ 3/ 4 /6
DF withdraw pressure release motor YC24/ 5-8
DF exit support guide motor YC20/ 1-4
DF exit paddle motor YC20/ 9-12
DF side registration motor 1 YC21/ 1-4
DF exit release motor YC24/ 1-4 DF PWB
3-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DF front shift HP sensor YC14-3 / YC14-4
DF withdraw release HP sensor YC37-3
DF sub tray full sensor YC31-19
DF trail press guide HP sensor YC37-9
DF shift set sensor YC37-27
DF shift release sensor YC37-30
DF rear shift HP sensor YC22-27
DF tray upper surface sensor 2 YC33-16/ YC33-18
DF sub exit sensor YC31-14
DF adjusting release HP sensor YC37-18
DP entrance timing sensor YC31-5
DF entry sensor YC31-2
DF Drum timing sensor YC31-8
DF exit paper press sensor YC38-30
DF drum sensor YC31-11
DF exit paddle HP sensor YC38-36
DF bundle exit sensor 2 YC38-11
DF bundle exit sensor 1 YC38-9
DF exit paper sensor YC38-14
DF side registration sensor 1 YC38-3 DF PWB
3-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14-4)Relief drum operation

As process multiple copies of A4 size paper to the finishing section or folding section, to secure the time to finish paper,
the 1st and 2nd paper of the next group is relieved until the 3rd paper is conveyed.
1 The feed-shift guide 1 (b) is activated by the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 (a) and switch the paper path, then the
first paper of the next group goes to the relief drum (c).
2 Likewise, 2nd paper of the next group goes to the relief drum (c).
3 When the 3rd paper of the next group goes to the relief drum, it goes to the finishing section (a) with the 1st
and 2nd paper. Then, switch the paper path by the feed-shift guide 1 (b).
3-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 The DF feedshift solenoid 2 (b) activates the feedshift guide 2 (c) and switches the paper path to the folding
unit (a).
c b
3-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14-5)DF eject tray

The paper is ejected to main tray in sort or staple function. And ejected to main tray when it is selected as output tray.
9 10 14 13 11,12 1
2,3
4
5
1 DF exit switch solenoid 8 DF tray sensor 5

2 DF tray upper surface sensor 1 9 DF main tray (tray A)
3 DF tray upper surface sensor 2 10 Side shift guide
4 DF tray sensor 1 11 DF rear shift HP sensor
5 DF tray sensor 2 12 DF front shift HP sensor
6 DF tray sensor 3 13 DF shift set sensor
7 DF tray sensor 4 14 DF shift release sensor
3-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
YC12-9/10 DF shift release sensor
YC12-19/20 DF shift set sensor
DF tray upper
YC32-9
surface sensor 1
YC38-30 DF exit paper press sensor
DF exit support guide

YC38-33
HP sensor
YC33-3 DF tray sensor 1
YC20-9/10/11/12 DF exit paddle motor
DF PWB
3-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15)Booklet Unit (BF-9100)

The folding unit makes the conveyed paper bi-fold or tri-fold with the BF blade and exit paper to the fold tray. Also, the
BF staple unit makes center paper center-fold and exits booklet-stapled paper to the fold tray.
2 1
3
21 16 18
19 17 14 15
5 4
25 8
6
26 7
22
20
23
24 13 10
12 11
3-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1
26
2
18
17
14
4
5
21 6
20
12
13
1 BF conveying roller 1 10 BF blade 19 BF feedshift guide

2 BF conveying pulley 1 11 BF blade sensor 20 BF eject roller
3 BF vertical conveying sensor 12 BF right roller 21 BF eject pulley
4 BF conveying roller 2 13 BF left roller 22 BF tray full sensor
5 BF conveying pulley 2 14 BF upper roller 23 BF eject paper press arm
6 BF entry roller 15 BF staple unit 24 BF lower moving plate
7 BF entry pulley 16 BF exit sensor 25 BF upper moving plate
8 BF paper entry sensor 17 BF conveying roller 3 26 BF tray
9 BF paper sensor 18 BF conveying pulley 3
3-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[Block diagram]
DF conveying tray motor YC12-1/ 2/ 3/ 4
BF side registration motor 1 YC10/ 17/ 18/ 19/ 20
BF side registration sensor 1 YC20-10 / YC20-12
BF exit sensor YC17-2 / YC17-3
BF feedshift solenoid YC25-3
BF exit pressure release sensor YC22-27
BF vertical conveying sensor YC20-15
BF exit pressure release motor YC26-1/ YC26-3

BF paddle sensor YC19-6
BF paper entry motor YC10-9/ 10/ 11/ 12
DF paddle motor YC11-1/ 2/ 3 / 4
BF side registration sensor 2 YC10-5/ YC10-8
DF side registration motor 2 YC10-5/ 6/ 7/ 8
BF blade motor YC15-1 / 2/ 3/ 4
BF adjustment sensor 2 YC20-26

BF paper entry sensor YC20-29
BF PWB
BF adjusting motor 2 YC10-1/ 2/ 3/ 4
BF adjusting motor 1 YC10-13/ 14/ 15/ 16
BF paper sensor YC19-2
BF main motor YC16-1/ 2/ 3/ 4
BF adjustment sensor 1 YC20-3
BF blade sensor YC20-24
BF conveying tray sensor YC18-3

YC3/ YC5/ YC-7
YC11/ YC12
DF PWB
3-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Precautions for the maintenance
4 Maintenance
4 - 1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1)Precautions
Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the power lamp
on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the disassembly.
Even after power off and unplug, some capacitors on power supply board may still have electro charge, so pay attention
not to touch those parts. In order to remove this charge, press [Power] key for 1 second.
When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to damage the
PWB.
If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic.
Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook.
Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable.
Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled.
If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.
(2)Storage and handling of the drum

Note the following when handling and storing the drum.
When detaching the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Store in the range of ambient temperature of -20 to 40? (–4°F to 104°F) and ambient humidity of 85% RH or less. Wait
more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Avoid storing the drum unit in the place where the temperature and
humidity suddenly change even if these changes are within the tolerable range.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not hit the drum surface with any object.
Make sure not to touch the drum surface with bare hands or gloves.
If the drum is touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
(3)Storage of the toner container

Store the toner container in a cool and dark place.
Do not place the toner container under direct sunshine or in a damp environment.
4-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
4 - 2 Maintenance parts
(1)Maintenance kits
Main unit
Low-end model
Name used in service Name used in parts list Qua Part No.
manual ntity
MK-8335A MK-8335A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702RL0UN3
(200,000 images) • DRUM UNIT 1
MK-8335B MK-8335B/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702RL0UN0
MK-8335D • MK-8335D/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702RL0JP1*1
MK-8335D • MK-8335D/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702RL0UN1*2
(600,000 images) • DLP K UNIT 1
• FUSER ASSY 1
• TRANSFER UNIT 1
• ROLLER SECONDRY TRANSFER ASSY 1
• PULLEY FEED 2
• PULLEY PICKUP 2
• ROLLER RETARD ASSY 2
• PULLEY FEED ASSY 1
• RETARD ROLLER ASSY 1
• FILTER TOP 1
MK-8335E MK-8335E/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702RL0JP0 *1
MK-8335E MK-8335E/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702RL0UN2 *2
(600,000 images) • DLP M UNIT 1
• DLP C UNIT 1
• DLP Y UNIT 1
*1: 100V (KDJ)

*2: 120V (KDA)/220-240V (KDE)/240V (KDAU)
4-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
High-end Model
Name used in service Name used in parts list Qua Part No.
manual ntity
MK-8525A MK-8525A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702V80JP0 *1
MK-8525A MK-8525A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702V80KL0 *2
• DLP K UNIT 1
• FUSER ASSY 1
• TRANSFER UNIT 1
• ROLLER SECONDRY TRANSFER ASSY 1
• PULLEY FEED 2
• PULLEY PICKUP 2
• ROLLER RETARD ASSY 2
• PULLEY FEED ASSY 1
• RETARD ROLLER ASSY 1
• FILTER TOP 1
• FILTER REAR LOWER 1
MK-8525B MK-8525B/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702V80JP0 *1
MK-8525B MK-8525B/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702ND0UN0 *2
• DLP M UNIT 1
• DLP C UNIT 1
• DLP Y UNIT 1
*1: 100V (KDJ)

*2: 120V (KDA)/220-240V (KDE)/240V (KDAU)
4-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit

(2-1)Maintenance modes that need to run after replacing the above maintenance kit.
Low-end model
Section Mode Maintenance item
Number
Replacing U251 Maintenance counter clear (Clear)
settings
U127 Transfer counter clear (Clear)
Image U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib)

adjustment
U469 Primary transfer unit initial setting (Auto)
U410 Auto halftone adjustment
Maintenance U251 Maintenance counter clear (Clear)
High-end Model
Number
Replacing U119 Drum unit initial settings
settings
U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration)
U469*1 Primary transfer unit initial setting (Belt Initialize)
U127*1 Transfer counter clear (Clear)

adjustment
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (Normal Mode)
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib)
Maintenance U251 Maintenance counter clear (Clear)
*1: MK-8515A
(2-2)Items that perform after replacing the unit
Drum unit
Low-end model
Number
adjustment
4-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
High-end Model
Number
Replacing U119 Drum unit initial settings
settings
U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration)

adjustment
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (Normal Mode)
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib)
Developer unit
Low-end model
Number
adjustment
High-end Model
Number
Replacing U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration)
settings

adjustment
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically

Number
Replacing U469 Primary transfer unit initial setting (Belt Initialize)
settings

adjustment
4-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Secondary transfer roller unit

Number
Replacing U127 Transfer counter clear (Clear)
settings

adjustment
MC roller
Number
Replacing U930 Charging roller counter clear (Clear)
settings

adjustment
Feed roller/MP feed roller

Number
Replacing U901 Feed cassette counter clear (Clear)
settings
4-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
4 - 3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures

Replacement of the maintenance kit is required after about 200,000 images (Low-end model)/about 600,000 images
(High-end model). The message [Replace MK.] appears at the replacement timing.
Execute maintenance mode U251 to reset the count after replacing the maintenance kit in the following procedures.
(1)Cassette paper feed section
(1-1)Detaching and attaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller
1 Remove cassette.
a
b
Notes for attaching

Insert the positioning parts (b) and (d) into the rail shaft and pin (c) when attaching the cassette (a).
d
e
d b
e
c
a
b
c
3 Pinch the lock lever (a) and pull the primary paper feed unit (c) from the upper paper feed section of the main
unit (b).
4-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Pinch the lock lever (d) and pull the primary paper feed unit (e) from the lower paper feed section of the main
unit (b).
a
e
5 Release hooks (a), and remove retard roller (b) from the bushing (c).
a
c d
6 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a).
4-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Slide the feed cover (b) from the primary feed unit (a).
a
8 Release the hooks (a), and remove pickup pulley (b) and paper feed roller (c) from the bushing.
• Take pickup pulley (b) away lifting up it slightly.
c b
9 Attach the new paper feed roller.
10Attach the new pickup roller.
11Turn over the primary paper feed unit (d) again.
4-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12Attach the new retard pulley.
IMPORTANT
• When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller
surface.
• After replacing with the new pickup roller and feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a) to the position where it is
aligned to the triangle mark (b).
b
a
Notes for attaching
When installing the primary paper feed unit (a), align the protrusion (b) at the lower part of the primary feed unit to the
guide (c) and align the protrusion (d) at the upper part of the primary feed unit to the guide (e) of the main unit.
Reseat the primary paper feed unit in case that [Cassette xx error] comes up.
a
e
d
c b
Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.

Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Detaching and attaching the regist cleaner
1 Open the front cover (a) slightly.
2 Open the front cover (a) and then open the front cover for maintenance (b) while grasping the upper left and
right part.
4-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Open inner cover (a) pulling left and right lever (b) on the cover.
b b
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push the part A to the position where the lever (b) and covers are the same
level.
4 Pull out the regist cleaner (a) by holding the handle.
5 Check the sponge on the regist cleaner (a) and clean or replace it.
4-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)MP paper feed section

(2-1)Detaching and attaching the MP paper feed roller
1 Open the manual feed tray (a).
2 Pinch the holder (a) and remove the MP feed roller (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
Detaching and attaching the MP paper feed roller

1 Push MP feed roller holder (c) to where the hook (b) can be seen.
2 Release hook (b) with flat head screwdriver and rotate MP feed roller holder (c) to the direction of arrow.
3 Take MP feed roller away pulling MP feed roller holder (c).
4-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Attach the new MP paper feed roller (e).

a
d
e c
c
b
4-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Detaching and attaching the MP retard roller
1 Remove the MP separation pulley (a) in the direction of the arrow.
2 Attach the new MP paper feed roller.
3 Attach the new retard pulley.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new MP separation pulley or MP paper feed roller, take care not to touch the roller surface.
Execute the following setting after replacing the MP paper feed roller.
• Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Transfer section
(3-1)Detaching and attaching the primary transfer unit
1 Open the right cover (a) of the main unit (b).

b
Notes for detaching

Before installing the primary transfer unit (a), confirm if the pressure release lever (b) is aligned to the right edge of the
primary transfer unit cover (c).
a b
a
b
2 Open the front cover for maintenance while slightly opening the front cover.
3 Open the inner cover.
4-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Push in the release lever (b) and grasp the handle (c), and then pull out the primary feed unit in the direction of
the arrow.
b
5 After that, hold the upper side handle (b) and detach the primary feed unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
6 Check the primary transfer unit (a) and clean or replace it.
a
b
d
c
IMPORTANT
Take care not to hit the primary transfer belt to the inner cover (d) and front cover for maintenance (c).
4-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for attaching

If it shifts to the side A, it will hit the lever when inserting the unit.
If it shifts to the B side, the transfer roller is pressed and this may damage the belt or drum when installing the unit.
b
B A
b
a
b
IMPORTANT
When installing the primary transfer unit (a), hold the handle (f) by both hands and install the unit aligning the
hook (b) on the unit to rail (c) in main unit.
• Slide the unit straightforward touching the parts (A) and (B) that is both side of rib (d) on the upper front of
the unit. Otherwise, for example, install the unit holding release lever (e), the unit cannot be installed
straightforward. It may break connectors on both unit and main unit and cause service call below.
C1950 Primary transfer EEPROM error
C2840 Belt cleaning motor error
c
c
a d
a
b f
A B
b
e d
Execute the following setting after replacing the primary transfer unit.
• Primary transfer unit initial setting (maintenance mode U469): Belt Initialize
• ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib
• Primary transfer unit initial setting (maintenance mode U469): Manual
• Auto halftone adjustment (maintenance mode U410)
4-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the secondly transfer unit
1 Open the right cover (d).
2 Release front/rear hooks (c) with holding transfer guide (a) and pushing front/rear the ribs of arm parts (b) to
the direction of arrow.
b
a c
d
b
c
b
c
3 Push the lock lever (b) toward the machine rear side.
4 Release the hooks (c) and rotate the lock lever (b) in the direction of the arrow.
5 Detach the secondary transfer roller unit (d) while lifting up the machine front side.
6 Check the secondary transfer roller unit (d) and clean or replace it.
d
2
1
b
Execute the following setting after replacing the secondary transfer unit.
• Transfer counter clear (maintenance mode U127): Clear
• Primary transfer unit initial setting (maintenance mode U469): Auto
4-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-3)Detaching and attaching the secondary transfer roller unit

In case that not to remove the transfer guide but only secondly transfer roller
1 Open the right cover (a).
2 Release hooks (c) of the front/rear arm by holding up front/rear lever of the transfer guide and pick the transfer
guide (d) up.
b
c a
b
c
3 Push the lock lever (b) toward the machine rear side.
4 Release the hooks (c) and rotate the lock lever (b) in the direction of the arrow.
5 Detach the secondary transfer roller unit (d) while lifting up the machine front side.
6 Check the secondary transfer roller (d) and clean or replace it.
2
d
2
11
b
cc
Execute the following setting after replacing the secondary transfer unit.
• Transfer counter clear (maintenance mode U127): Clear
4-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Drum section
(4-1)Detaching and attaching the drum unit
right part.
Notes for detaching

a b
a
4-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
b b
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push the part A to the position where the lever (b) and covers are the same
level.

b
4-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Push up the lock lever (a) and remove four drum units (b) (Y,C,M,K).
6 Attach the new drum units.
35/40/50/60 ppm 25/32 ppm
a b b b
b
IMPORTANT
Slide the unit straightforward touching projection (a) on lower front of the unit.
Otherwise, the unit cannot be installed straightforward. It may break connectors on both unit and main unit and
cause service call below.
• C7901 Drum unit K EEPROM error
• C7902 Drum unit C EEPROM error
• C7903 Drum unit M EEPROM error
• C7904 Drum unit Y EEPROM error
4-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IMPORTANT
Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b) of the developer unit when installing the drum unit while the developer
unit is installed. Otherwise, it causes the drum damage.
After drum replacement, close the cover then turn on machine.

Drum refresh starts automatically.
Execute the following setting after machine is ready.
• Drum unit initial setting (maintenance mode U119): Execute
• Developer bias adjustment (maintenance mode U140): AC Calib/Calibration
• Primary transfer unit initial setting (maintenance mode U469): Manual
(4-2)Detaching and attaching the main charge roller unit
1 Open the front cover slightly.
2 Open the front cover for maintenance.
3 Open the inner cover.
4 Open the right cover.
5 Detach the drum unit (a).
6 Lay down the drum unit (a).
7 Push the lock lever (b).
8 Pull up the main charge roller unit (c) while pressing it and remove it from the drum unit (a) in the direction of
the arrow.
9 Check the main charge roller unit (c) and clean or replace it.
4-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]

b
c ղ
IMPORTANT
1 Install the main charge roller unit (a) in the drum unit (c) while releasing the main charger roller
release lever (b).
2 Insert the main charger release lever (b) into the aperture and press down A part to check it clicks to
lock.
c
A
c
IMPORTANT
Note when replacing the main charger roller unit, the shape of the roller edge is different between the low-end
model (b) and high-end model (c). Take care not to attach it wrongly.
4-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
b c
Execute the following setting after replacing the main charge roller.
• Main charger roller counter clear (maintenance mode U930): Clear
4-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Developer section
(5-1)Detaching and attaching the developer unit
In case of Low-end model
right part.
3 Open to pull left and right lever (b) of the inner cover (a).
b b
4-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Push up the lock lever (a) and remove four developer units (b) (Y,C,M,K).
5 Attach the new developer units.
b
b b
b
IMPORTANT
• C7911 Developer unit K EEPROM error
• C7912 Developer unit C EEPROM error
• C7913 Developer unit M EEPROM error
• C7914 Developer unit Y EEPROM error
• Image failure with developer leaking
After developer replacement, close the cover then turn on machine.

Auto developer aging correction and others start automatically.

4-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
In case of High-end model

right part.
3 Open to pull left and right lever (b) of the inner cover (a).
b b
4 Push up the lock lever (a) and remove four developer units (b) (Y,C,M,K).
5 Attach the new developer units.
4-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
b b b b
IMPORTANT
• C7911 Developer unit K EEPROM error
• C7912 Developer unit C EEPROM error
• C7913 Developer unit M EEPROM error
• C7914 Developer unit Y EEPROM error
• Image failure with developer leaking
7 After inserting the developer unit (a), securely push the lock shaft (b).
4-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b) when inserting the developer unit. Otherwise, it causes the drum
damage.
After developer replacement, close the cover then turn on machine.

Auto developer aging correction and others start automatically.

• Developer bias adjustment (maintenance mode U140): AC Calib/Calibration
• Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410)
4-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Fuser section
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit

b
2 Release the hook (b) while pressing the left and right levers (a), detach the fuser unit (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
b
a
b a
4-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for attaching

Align the pins (b) into the main unit rail (c) and push it until it is latched to the hook, when installing the fuser unit (a).
b c
a
c
b
IMPORTANT
Insufficient lock will cause the phenomenon below when installing the fuser unit.
• Back side lock failure
This causes drive failure at the rear side and comes up C6600 fuser belt rotation error.
• Front side lock failure
This causes the image squareness failure due to skew feed.
4-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-2)Hight adjustment of fuser unit (Trail edge skew image adjustment)
1 Compare image length of front and rear side.

[Original]
P rinting direc
ction
(Image front side) (Image rear side)
[ Output imag A ] [ Output image B ]

(Image front side is short) (Image rear side is short)
(Image front side) (Image rear side) (Image front side) (Image rear side)

b
4-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
arrow.
b
a
b a
4 Loosen 2 screws (f) for fixing the fuser positioning guide (g) on inner frame of the front side.
5 Lift up the fuser positioning guide (g) and move the fuser hight adjust lever (h) to either right or left.
Estimate amount of movement
• In case of front side short (Chart A): Move the fuser hight adjust lever (h) to the right side of main unit and
make the fuser positioning guide 1 pitch down. This makes front side about 0.4 mm shorter.
• In case of front side long (Chart B): Move the fuser hight adjust lever (h) to the left side of main unit and make
the fuser positioning guide 1 pitch up. This makes front side about 0.5 mm longer.
f (Inner front frame viewed from the machine rear side)
f
Machine left side
Machine right side

h
6 After adjustment, keep down fuser positioning guide (g) along with fuser hight adjust lever and secure 2
screws.
4-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)Others
(7-1)Detaching and attaching filters.
Upper rear filter
1 Push lever (a) and remove upper rear filter cover (b) and filter (c).
2 Check the upper rear filter (c) and clean or replace it.
Rear filter
1 Push lever (d) and remove rear filter cover (e) and filter (f).
2 Check the filter (f) and clean or replace it.
4-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
4 - 4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)

(1-1)Detaching and attaching PF retard roller, PF pickup pulley and paper feed roller
1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the paper feeder (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
a
b
3 Open the front cover (a).
4 Pinch the lock lever (a) and pull the primary paper feed unit (c) from the upper stage of the paper feeder (b).
4-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Pinch the lock lever (d) and pull the primary paper feed unit (e) from the lower stage of the paper feeder (b).
6 Release hooks (a), and remove retard pulley (b) from the bushing (c).
c d
7 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a).
4-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Slide the feed cover (b) from the primary feed unit (a).
a
9 Release the hooks (a), and remove pickup pulley (b) and paper feed roller (c) from the bushing.
• Take pickup pulley (b) away lifting up it slightly.
c b
10Attach the new paper feed roller.
11Attach the new pickup pulley.
12After replacing with the new pickup roller and feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a) to the position where it is
aligned to the triangle mark (b).
b
a
13Turn over the primary paper feed unit.
4-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller
surface.
Notes for attaching

When installing the primary paper feed unit (a), align the protrusion (b) at the lower part of the primary feed unit to the
guide (c) and align the protrusion (d) at the upper part of the primary feed unit to the guide (e) of the main unit.
Reseat the primary paper feed unit in case that [Cassette xx error] comes up.
a e
d
c b
4-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-1)Detaching and attaching PF retard roller, PF pickup pulley and paper feed roller
1 Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the feeder unit (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3 Slide the stopper (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.
4 Pull out the left cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b).
b
a
4-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Push both slider lock levers (b) to release lock and pull the left cassette (a) furthermore. (50 to 70 mm)
6 Pull out the right cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b).
a
7 Hold the handle (a) and pull out the PF conveying unit in the direction of the arrow.
4-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for attaching

Make sure to pull out the left cassette (d) when attaching the PF conveying unit (a).
Align the PF conveying unit rail (b) into the PF main unit side guide (c) then install.
c
b
d
a
8 Turn over the PF conveying unit (a).
9 Release hooks (b), and remove retard pulley (c) from the bushing (d).
10Release hooks (b), and remove pickup pulley (c) and paper feed roller (d) from the bushing.
11Attach the new paper feed roller.
12Attach the new pickup pulley.
13Turn over the PF conveying unit.
4-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c
b
IMPORTANT
surface.
4-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-1)Detaching and attaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller
1 Pull out the cassette.
2 Remove the screw (a) (M3x8) and detach the wire cover (b).
a
3 Disconnect the connector (b) of the main unit (a).
4 Release the wire (d) from the clamp (c).
5 Remove one screw (e) (M3×8).
6 Slide the PF feed unit (f) frontward and remove it while rotating it by using the positioning shaft (g) as fulcrum.
a
d
f
e
7 Remove two stop rings A (b) from the PF paper feed shaft (a).
4-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Remove two stop rings B (c) and slide the joint (d).
b
c b
9 Slide two bushings (b) at the both sides of the feed roller holder (a).
10Remove the feed roller holder (a) and spring (d) upward from the PF feed unit (c).
d b
a
4-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the PF retard roller
1 Detach the PF paper feed unit (a).
2 Turn over the PF paper feed unit (a).
3 Remove stop ring (c) from the PF retard roller shaft (b).
4 Pull out the spacer (d) from PF retard roller shaft and remove it.
• Take care not to fall the set pin, when removing the spacer.
c
5 Pull out the set pin (b) of torque limiter (a).
6 Pull out the torque limiter (a) and PF retard roller (d) while pushing retard release lever (c), and remove it.
7 Clean or replace the PF retard roller.
8 Attach the PF retard roller back again to the PF feed unit.
9 Reattach the PF paper feed unit in the original position.
d
b a c
IMPORTANT
surface.
4-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-1)Detaching and attaching the DP pickup pulley and DP paper feed roller
1 Open the DP upper cover (a).
2 Pull the release lever (b) and open the fixing cover (c).
c
b
3 Rotating DP paper feed unit (a) and pull out it in the direction of the arrow.
(4-2)Detaching and attaching the DP retard roller
4-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Remove hooks (b) and remove the DP retard roller cover (c).
a
b c
3 Remove the stop ring (a), and remove the DP retard roller (b) and the torque limiter (c).
4 Check or replace the DP retard roller, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
b
4-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Remove one screw (b) (M3×8) of DP paper feed unit (C).
b
a
b
3 Tilt up the DP paper feed guide (a) and remove it upward.
4 Raise the PF paper feed unit (a) upward.
4-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Detach the front side stop ring from the DP feed belt shaft (a).
6 Slide the DP feed unit (c) frontward and remove it from the document processor (d)
d
c
4-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Open the DP top cover.
2 Detach the DP paper feed guide and the DP feed unit.
a
b
4 Remove the stop ring (a), and remove the DP retard roller (b) and the torque limiter (c).
5 Attach the new retard pulley.
a
c
b
4-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Document processor (DP-7120): Low-end models only

2 Pulling release lever (a) and open the fixing cover (b).
3 Rotating DP paper feed unit (a) and pull out it in the direction of the arrow.
4-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
b c
3 Rotate the DP retard roller (a) and detached it.
4 Check or replace the DP retard roller, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit
4 - 5 Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit

After Maintenance Kit replacement, close the cover then turn on machine.
Auto developer aging correction and drum refresh start automatically.
• Execute the following setting after machine is ready.

Execute U952 maintenance mode work flow with preset. (See page page 6-371)
1 Input “10871087” using numeric keys to start maintenance mode.
3 Select [Execute].
4 Select Maintenance kit for setting.
5 Select maintenance modes listed on the display from top to bottom and press [Start] key to return to
maintenance mode.
6 Run following maintenance modes after back to maintenance mode.
7 Press [Stop] key to get back to flow after finish each modes.
4-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit
8 Repeat step 5 to 7 and complete the flow.
MK-8335A
MK-8335D MK-8335B
Start Start
MK-8515A MK-8335E
MK-8515B
U119 Setting the drum *1 U119 Setting the drum *1
(Execute) (Execute)
U140 Developer bias adjustment *1 U140 Developer bias adjustment *1

(AC Calib> Calibration) (AC Calib> Calibration)
U469 Color printing position adjustment U464 ID correction setting

(Belt Initialize > Execute) (Calib > Execute)
U127 Clearing the transfer count U469 Color registration adjustment

(Clear) (Auto)
U464 ID correction setting U412 Adjusting the uneven density *1

(Calib > Execute) (Normal Mode)
U469 Color registration adjustment U464 ID correction setting

(Auto) (Calib > Execute)
U412 Adjusting the uneven density *1 U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
(Normal Mode)
U464 ID correction setting*1 U251 Clearing the maintenance counter

(Calib > Execute) (Clear)
U251 Clearing the maintenance counter

(Clear)
*1: High-end model only
4-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 - 6 Disassembly and assembly procedures

(1)OUTER COVERS
(1-1)Detaching and attaching the front cover
right part.
4-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Close the front cover (a).
4 Remove the stopper (b) of the front cover (a).
5 Slide the front cover in the direction of the arrow and remove the fulcrum (d) from the fulcrum shaft (c).
b c
d
4-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the front cover for maintenance
1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum pin (a).
4 Open the inner cover for maintenance.
5 Remove each one screw, remove the strap (c) from the front cover (a) and remove in the direction of the arrow.
b c
c
b
4-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Detaching and attaching the inner cover
right part.
b b
4-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Release the hook (b) with a flat-blade screwdriver (a), remove the inner cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
(1-4)Detaching and attaching the rear bottom cover
1 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
(1-5)Detaching and attaching the rear bottom cover
4-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened and release the lower hook (c).
After that, detach it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
(1-6)Detaching and attaching the DP rear cover
1 If DP is installed, Open it.
2 Remove the rear top cover.
3 Remove two screw (a) (M3x8).
4 Remove the DP rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
(1-7)Detaching and attaching the LSU rear cover
4-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Detach the LSU rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
(1-8)Detaching and attaching the left top cover/the rear left cover.
2 Release two hooks (c) and remove the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c
4-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Insert flat-head screwdriver (c) to the front side of aperture, spread the aperture in the direction of the arrow,
release four hooks (d) and remove the left top cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
4-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for attaching

latching four lower hooks (f) and the upper hook (d) then attach the top left cover (e).
6 Pull out the lower cassette.
7 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8).
8 Lift and remove four hooks (c) and remove left lower cover (b).
a
a
c
b
b
a
c c c c
(1-9)Detaching and attaching the right top cover
2 After removing the front rib (c), remove the right top cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
4-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-10)Detaching and attaching the rear right top cover, rear right bottom cover
1 Detach the rear top cover.
4 Release the hooks (b) and remove the right rear top cover (c).
c
b
5 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the right rear bottom cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
4-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for attaching

When reattaching it, latch two hooks (b) first.
(1-11)Detaching and attaching the right cover assembly
2 Remove the hooks of the damper spring (a).
3 Remove the stopper (c) of the fulcrum pin (b). Slide the arm (d) in the direction of the arrow and detach it from
the fulcrum pin (b).
c
b d
4 Rotate the wire cover (a).
5 Push both fulcrums and detach the DP wire cover (a).
6 Release the wire (b) from the hook (c) and disconnect two connectors (d).
b
c
d
4-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Remove the stopper (a), and slide the strap (b) then detach it from the pin (b).
8 Open front (a) and back (b) of the handle cover.
9 Tilt up the front cover shaft (c). After that, slide it in the direction of the arrow
10Tilt up the back cover shaft (a). After that draw up in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
c
d
c d
4-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Detach the right cover assembly (a) in the direction of the arrow.
4-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detaching and attaching the conveying unit

12Remove one screw (a) (M3x8).
13Release two hooks (b) and remove the wire cover (c).
a
c
14Disconnect the connector (a) and remove wire stoppers (b).
15Put flat screwdriver (h) to the fulcrums of the middle guide (a) and get the holes (b) out from pins (c).
4-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
16Rotate middle guide (a) to the direction (1) and pull up to the direction (2).
h
h
c
c
b a
f g
b
Notes for attaching

In order to put back the middle guide, insert pin (e) to hole (f) first and then insert to both side holes (b).
17Rotate and open the resist guide (a).
18Slide the stopper (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.
b b a
4-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
19Detach the conveying unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
4-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Optical section
(2-1)Detaching and attaching the LSU

b
2 Remove the stopper (a) ,and slide the strap (b) and detach it from the pin (b).
4-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
right part.
b b
4-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Pull out the regist cleaner (a) by holding the handle of it.
8 Detach the rear secondary transfer guide (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
b
9 Remove the middle conveying unit wire (a) from the connector (b).
4-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for attaching

When reattaching it, connect the middle conveying unit wires (a) first and then insert to the rib (b)..
10Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the middle conveying unit (b).
b
a
a
4-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for attaching

When attaching the middle conveying unit (c), align positioning part(a) to (d) and positioning hole (b) to (e).
a
a
b
c d d
b
e e
11Loosen the LSU fixing pins (c) or spring (c) with a screwdriver (a) and remove them.
c
b
c
b
12Remove two screws (a) (M3x8).
4-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
13Release two hooks (c) and remove the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c
14Open the front cover.
16Insert flat-head screwdriver (c) to the front side of aperture and spread in the direction of the arrow to release
four hooks (d) and remove the left top cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
Notes for attaching

Attach the top left cover (e) after latching four lower hooks (f) and then the upper hook (d).
4-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
19Lift and remove four hooks (c) and remove left lower cover (b).
a
a
c
b
b
a
c c c c
20Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the LSU left stay (b).
b
a
a
21Pull out the laser scanner unit (a) half way.
• (Low model) Disconnect FFC connectors (b) and connector (c).
4-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• (High model) Disconnect two FFC connectors (b) and connector (c).
Low model
b
c
High model
b
b
a
22Pull out the laser scanner unit (a).
23Check the laser scanner unit (a) and clean or replace it.
4-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for replacing the laser scanner unit

Execute the following adjustment after replacing the laser scanner unit.
1 Check and adjust the LSU unit.

1 Execute maintenance mode U034 (Paper timing data adjustment).
2 Select [Start Position] or [Center Line].

• The screen for adjusting is displayed.
3 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.
4 Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.
5 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.
6 Measure two length of A and B in the outputted test pattern.
7 When measuring the size of two places A and B, if the difference of sizes is 1.5mm or less, it is the completion
of adjustment.
• If the difference of size is more than 1.5mm, proceed to the next step.
A B
8 Loosen two screws (c).
9 Adjust the scale (b) for reference using the adjustment knob (a).
• In the measured value B<A, move the adjustment knob (a) to leftward.
• In the measured value A<B, move the adjustment knob (a) to rightward.
10Fasten two screws (c).

• Repeat steps 3 through 10.
c
b
4-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Primary transfer unit initial setting: Skew

1 Execute maintenance mode U469 (Primary transfer unit initial setting).
2 Select [Manual].
3 Select [Print].
4 Press [Start] key to output the manual adjustment chart.
5 Execute the following adjustment if the gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale position is 2 scales or more for
each color.
MV-1 MV-5 MV-1 MV-5
CV-1 CV-1
CV-5 CV-5
YV-1 YV-5 YV-1 YV-5
Sample 1 Sample 2
6 Open the front cover slightly and open the front cover for maintenance.
7 Rotate the hex hole (a) by using a hex wrench (5 mm).

• Direction of rotation
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale is 2 scales or more (Sample 1): counterclockwise
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale is -2 scales or more (Sample 2): clockwise
• Number of rotation
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale multiplied by 4 clicks.
8 Close the inner cover and front cover for maintenance.
9 Output the adjustment chart to check if it is within the range.
10Press [Stop] key.
a a a
b
a
4-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Primary transfer unit initial setting (maintenance mode U469): Auto

2 Select [Auto].
• Output the auto adjustment chart.
3 Select [Execute].
4 Set the chart on the table and press [Start] key.

• Execute the automatic adjustment. When the adjustment complete without error, [OK] is displayed.
5 Press [Stop] key.
4 Drum unit initial setting (maintenance mode U119): Execute (High-end model only)
2 Select [Execute] and press [Start] key.

• Drum setup operation starts.
3 Press [Stop] key.
4-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib

2 Select [Calib].

4 Press [Stop] key.
6 Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode (High-end model
only)
2 Select [Normal Mode].

• Output the test chart with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
4 Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test chart and set as original.
5 Press [Start] key. Correction starts.
6 Press [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test chart. (2nd sheet)
• Output with 20% less light intensity than the 1st test chart.
7 Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test chart and set as original.
8 Press [Start] key. Correction starts.
9 Press [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test chart. (3rd sheet)
10Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test chart and set as original.
11Press [Start] key.

• Check the result of the correction. When correction has normally completed, [Finish] is displayed.
12Press [Stop] key.
7 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib (High-end model only)
2 Select [Calib].

4 Press [Stop] key.
4-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Auto halftone adjustment (maintenance mode U410)


• Test chart 1, 2 and 3 are output on the A4/Letter paper.

5 Once [OK] comes up then continue with chart 2 and 3 repeating step 2 to 3.
6 [Finish] displays after normal completion.
9
1 Exiting from the maintenance mode
• The maintenance mode is exited.
4-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Detaching and attaching the lens unit
2 After removing the front rib (c), remove the right top cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
3 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the right ISU cover (b).
4 Detaches the contact glass (a) in the direction of the arrow.

D
4-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Remove five screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the lens cover (b).
D D
D
D
D
6 Remove the FFC (a).
7 Remove FFC from FFC connector (b).
4-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Detaches the lens unit (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
a
a
a a a
a b a
4-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Attaching the lens unit

Fix the position of lens unit (a) by the following.
The right and leftward of machine: Confirm the number a on the label that affixed on the lens (b). Match the line
numbers (b) and number (c) on the label.
The rear and frontward of machine: Match the edge (e) of lens unit (a) to the positioning line (d) on frame side.
Fix the lens unit (a) as before with four screws.
a
H
D b
4-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)Detaching and attaching the lamp unit
1 Detach the original cover or the document processor.
2 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the right ISU cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
3 Detach the contact glass (a) in the direction of the arrow.

D
4 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the front glass cover (b).
* : Remove the right side of the machine first and then detach it.
b
a
4-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Remove two pins (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear glass cover (b).
a
a
b
6 Peel off two sheets (a).
7 Move the lamp unit assembly (a) to the cut-out (b).
8 Remove FFC (f) from FFC connector (e).
4-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Remove two hooks (g) and remove FFC guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
e
b
g a
h
14j0258a
10Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the lamp unit (b) from mirror frame A (c).
11Check or replace the lamp unit (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
12When replacing the lamp unit (b), execute maintenance mode U411 (adjusting the scanner automatically).
b
a
4-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-4)Detaching and attaching the scanner wires

Precautions
When fitting the scanner wire, be sure to use specified parts below.
• Machine front side (P/N: 302H717380(gray))
• Machine rear side (P/N: 302H717390(black))
Tools for fitting the wire
• Two frame securing tools (P/N: 302NL1711*)
• Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N: 302RH9401*)
1 Detach the right top cover.
2 Detach the ISU right cover.
3 Detach the contact glass.
4 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the front glass cover (b).
• Remove the right side of the machine first and then detach it.
b
a
4-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Remove two pins (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear glass cover (b).
a
a
b
6 Peel off two sheets (a).
7 Move the lamp unit assembly (a) to the cut-out (b).
8 Remove FFC (f) from FFC connector (e).
4-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Remove two hooks (g) and remove FFC guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
e
b
g a
h
14j0258a
10Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the lamp unit (b) from mirror frame A (c).
b
a
11Remove each one screw (c) (M3x×8), the front wire presser plate (d) and the rear wire presser plate (e) from
mirror frame A (f).
4-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12Detach the mirror frame A (f) from the main unit.
d e
c
c
13Detach the round terminals on the left side of scanner unit (a) from the scanner wire springs (c).
14Detach the scanner wire (d) from the main unit.

b
b
d c
Attaching the scanner wires

1 Insert the small ball (a) on the scanner wire into the hole in the scanner wire drum (b).
2 Wind the scanner wires (c) three turns inward and five turns outward.
• Shorter from small ball of the scanner wire is wound to come outside.
• Use the gray wire for the machine front side and black wire for the machine rear side.
4-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Secure the scanner wires (c) using the scanner wire stoppers (d).
5 3
3 5
a
c
b
a
c
d d
4-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Move the mirror frame B (a) as shown in the figure and insert two frame securing tools (c) into the positioning
holes (b) at the front and rear of the machine center to fix the mirror frame B (a) in position.
c
Attach the wire

1 Wind the outer scanner wires (a) around the outside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from
above to below.
• The scanners wires pass the outside of positioning pin.
2 Hook the round terminals (c) to the catches (d) inside the scanner unit.
3 Wind the inner scanner wires (e) around the grooves in the pulleys (f) at the left of the scanner unit from below
to above.
• The scanner wires pass the lower side of mirror frame B (j).
4 Wind the scanner wires around the inside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from below to above.
5 Wind it around the pulley (g).
6 Hook the round terminals (h) to the scanner wire springs (i).
4-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Apply the steps 1 through 6 to another scanner wires.

i h g
b
i
h
f
g
c
d
a
f
c
d e
b a
i
h
g e
j
b e
c a LQQHU
RXWHU
8 Detach the scanner wire stoppers and the mirror frame securing tools.
9 Align the scanner wires to the inside along with the small ball in the wire drum.
10Move the mirror frame B (b) from side to side to make the wire smoothly.
11Refit the mirror frame A (a) in the main unit.
12Move the mirror frame A (a) and the mirror frame B (b) to the machine left, and insert two frame securing tools
(d) into the positioning holes (c) at the front and rear of the scanner unit to secure the mirror frame A (a) and
the mirror frame B (b) in position.
13Attach the front wire holder plate (e) and rear wire holder plate (f) to the mirror frame A (a).
14Detach the frame securing tools (d).
4-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
15Reattach the lamp unit in the original position.
g g d
e
f
d
c h
b
a
a h
b
4-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Drive section
(3-1)Detaching and attaching the PF drive unit
2 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, and release the lower hook (c) lifting the cover. After
that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
3 Remove ten connectors (b) from feed drive PWB (a).
4 Release the wire saddle (c) and remove the wire (d).
YC9
YC10 b
YC1
YC11
YC6
a
YC2
YC3
d
YC7 c
YC4
YC5
5 Remove five screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the feed drive unit (b).
6 Check the drive unit (b) and clean or replace it.
4-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a a
a
a
b a
a
a a
4-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the main drive unit

Low-end model
3 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, and release the lower hook (c) lifting the cover. After
that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Remove 3 connectors (b) from feed drive PWB (a).
5 Release 4 wire saddles(a). Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove the wire (c).
b c
4-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
(b: ) 36
YC
YC36
YC22
21
YC
YC19 19
YC 25
YC
YC21
YC33 YC17 2 2
YC37 YC
YC24 YC25
17
YC
6
YC
YC32 33
YC 30
4 28 YC
YC2 32 YC
YC6 YC 1
YC28 YC
23
YC2
YC3
YC23
YC1
YC30 a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
YC29
3
YC
YC35
7 Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove the wire (c).
4-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Hang the wires (a) on hook (b).
IMPORTANT
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction because of interference between wires
and waste toner joint unless detach the drive unit without hanging the wires (b) on hook (a). This leads waste
toner detection error or clogging up.
9 Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out.
1 2
c
b
IMPORTANT
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction unless detach the drive unit without
removing waste toner joint (a). This leads waste toner detection error.
Waste toner joint has to be released before take the main drive unit away.
4-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Remove six screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a b a a
a
a a a
Detach waste toner convey unit

11Remove three screws (a) (M3x8).
12Release 4 hooks (b) and take the waste toner convey unit (c) away.
13Check the waste toner convey unit (c) and clean or replace it.
14Check the main drive unit (d) and clean or replace it.
b d
c b
a
a
b
a a
4-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
High-end Model
3 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Disconnect two connectors (d). Release four wire saddles(a). Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and
remove the wire (c).
b c
a d d
4-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Remove sixteen connectors (b) from feed drive PWB (a).
a
(b: ) 36
YC
YC36
YC22
21
YC
YC19 19
YC 25
YC
YC21
YC33 YC17 2 2
YC
YC24 YC25
17
YC
6
YC
YC32 33
YC 30
4 28 YC
YC2 32 YC
YC6 YC
YC
1
YC28
23
YC2
YC3
YC23
YC1
YC30
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
YC29
3
YC
YC35
7 Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove the wire (c).
4-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IMPORTANT
9 Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out toward you.
1 2
c
b
IMPORTANT
4-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and detach the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a b a a
a
a a a
Detach waste toner convey unit

11Release 4 hooks (a) and take the waste toner convey unit (b) away.
12Check the waste toner convey unit (b) and clean or replace it.
13Check the main drive unit (c) and clean or replace it.
a c
b a
4-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-3)Detaching and attaching the container motor
1 c
c 3
4 If DP are mounted, Open it.
4-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c
b
4-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Release the hooks (b) and remove the right rear top cover (c).
c
b
12Release four connectors (b) from the main PWB (a) and withdraw from the aperture (e). Remove the wire (c)
from two wire saddles (d).
c
e
d
b
4-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
13Disconnect the FFC and the connector from the engine PWB.
b
c
a
15Lifting and pulling the shield box (a) then release the hooks (b).
4-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
16Open the shield box (a).
a
a
b
CAUTION
In case of operating at the rear lower side of the machine opening the shield box, pay attention not to hit your
head to the shield box.
17Remove the connector (b) from the container motor (a).
b
a
18Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the container motor assembly (b)
19Check the container motor assembly (b) and clean or replace it.
4-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
b a
4-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-4)Detaching and attaching the toner supply drive unit
1 c
c 3
4-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c
b
4-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c
b
c
e
d
b
4-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
b
c
a
4-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
a
b
CAUTION
17Remove the connector (b) from the container motor (a). Remove ten connectors (d) from feed image PWB (c).
18Remove the wire (e) from the five wire saddles (f).
b
a
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
e
d c
4-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20Unlatch six upper side hooks (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b) and then four lower side hooks (c), and then
remove the transfer terminal cover (d).
b
c
c a
a
d
4-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a), make sure that the rib (b) is between two terminals. (Eight
locations)
21Remove three connectors (b) from feed drive PWB (a).
4-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
22Disconnect two connectors (d). Release four wire saddles(a). Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and
remove the wire (c).
b c
23Remove sixteen connectors (b) from feed drive PWB (a).
a
(b: ) 36
YC
YC36
YC22
21
YC
YC19 19
YC 25
YC
YC21
YC33 YC17 C2
2
Y
YC24 YC25
17
YC
6
YC
YC32 33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC 3 2
YC6 YC C1
YC28 Y
23
YC2
YC3
YC23
YC1
YC30
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
YC29
3
YC
YC35
4-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
24Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove the wire (c).
IMPORTANT
4-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
26Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out.
1 2
c
b
IMPORTANT
27Remove six screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a b a a
a
a a a
4-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
28Widen two each hooks (a) and unlatch the hook (b), and then pull out the joint (c) of the toner supply drive unit
to remove it.
b b
1 1
a a
c
2
29Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the toner supply drive unit (b).
30Check the toner supply drive unit (b) and clean or replace it.
a
b a
a a a
b
4-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-5)Detaching and attaching the fuser drive unit
1 c
c 3
4-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c
b
4-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c
b
c
e
d
b
4-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
13Disconnect the FFC (b) and the connector (c) from the engine PWB (a).
b
c
a
4-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
a
b
CAUTION
17Detach the fuser unit.
18Remove the two connectors (a) and wire (b) from the hook (c).
b
c
20Detach the fuser drive unit (c) in the direction of the arrow, while pressing the release lever (b).
21Check the fuser drive unit (c) and clean or replace it.
4-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c
a
Notes for attaching
When reattaching the fuser drive unit (a), pull the lever (b) in the direction of the arrow and pass the opposite side lever
(c) through the aperture (d).
d c
b
4-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Others
(4-1)Detaching and attaching the SSD
3 Remove the SSD (b) from the connector (c).

• Use a Phillips 1 screwdriver and take care not to damage the screws.
• This screw is exclusive. Do not secure rather than the item below.
(7BB000204H BIND M SCREW 2x4)
d
c
a
b
IMPORTANT
In order to avoid from damage, when attaching the SSD (b), align the screw hole (d) to the positioning boss (e).
Do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
4-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
SSD replacement procedures in case that the SSD replacement is indicated.

Data transfer by U026 is not available since data cannot be read when SSD is broken or it is in Read Only mode.
Preparation: 2 USB drives (for firmware and data backup).
Run data backup in U917 before start.
1 Firmware storage in a USB drive (USB drive A)

1 Store the latest firmware upgrade pack or release firmware set (Main/MMI/Panel/Browser/Dictionary/
Language/Color table).
• Check the firmware applicable to the target model. Firmware installation gets unstable with inappropriate one.
At least Main firmware is required for reboot.
2 SSD data backup (USB drive B)

• 64GB USB drive is necessary for 32GB SSD full backup.
1 Install the USB drive B.
2 Execute maintenance mode U026

Input "026" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
Select [SSE].
Select [Backup]. Press [Start] key.
Turn the power off after completion.
3 Replace the new SSD.

• Pay attention that installing SSD that out of specification (8G/32G) makes F010 SSD communication error.
4 Turn ON the power installing USB drive A.

As the program loading from SSD can't be done, SSD recovery program which is SNOR on the main PWB start up and
format SSD automatically.
• Pay attention that no USB drive makes F010 error.
5 When UPDATE completion is displayed on the control panel, turn OFF/ON the power with inserted USB drive
A.
3 Update firmware. (See page page 5-1)
4 Retrieve the data backed up in the USB drive B.
5 Install from HyPAS application, application screen.

• Confirm HyPAS applications that come up on the application screen in advance of replacement.
4-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-2)Detaching and attaching the hard disk drive
2 Disconnect two connectors (a).
3 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8). Remove two hooks (b) (M3x8) and remove the hard disk assembly (c).
d d
b
b
c
b
IMPORTANT
When removing the connector of the hard disk (a), pay attention not to apply the force on the battery of the main
PW.
Applying the force may get damaged the terminal.
4 Remove four screws (a) and remove the hard disk drive (b).
5 Check the hard disk drive (b) and clean or replace it.
4-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
a
a
a
• Execute maintenance mode U024 (See page 6-43) when formatting a new HDD.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch on the PWB face (b) when installing the HDD (a) to avoid from damage.
a a
4-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-3)Detaching and attaching the lift motor
a
b
Notes for attaching

d
e
d b
e
c
a
b
c
3 Disconnect two connectors (a) and three screws (b) (M3x8).
4 Remove the lift motor (c).
5 Check the lift motor (c) and clean or replace it.
c b
b
b
A a
a
b b
c
B
b b
b
b
c
b b c
b
4-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Replacement steps
Upper side (A)
1 When replace lift motor, disconnect connector (b) from original lift motor (a) and remove wire (c) releasing 2
hooks (d).
2 Connect (b) of wire (c) to new lift motor (e).
Lower side (B)

1 When replace lift motor, disconnect connector (b) from original lift motor (a) and remove wire (c) releasing 2
hooks (d).
Do not apply film (b) on the new lift motor.
2 Connect (b) of wire (c) to new lift motor (e).

Do not fix the wire (D) with hook (f).
A a b B db
a
d
c
c
e b
f
e d
f
c
c
A
a
B a
4-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-4)Detaching and attaching the fuser discharge unit

b
arrow.
b
a
b a
3 Remove three screws (a) (M3x12).
4 Take fuser discharge unit (c) away from IH unit (b).
5 Replace fuser discharge unit (c).
4-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
c
a
a
b
a
Clear the MC corrective counter with maintenance mode U167 [Clear] after fuser discharge or IH unit
replacement.
Fuser counter clear (maintenance mode U127): Clear
4-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-5)Detaching and attaching the eject unit

b
2 Detach the fuser unit.
3 Disconnect the connector (a) of the eject unit.
4 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the eject unit (c).
5 Check the eject unit (c) and clean or replace it.
b
c
b
b b
4-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-6)Detaching and attaching waste toner box unit

Low-end model
Pull toner container (Y,M,C,K) out in ready mode.
In case that container cover (b) is locked, open it with container solenoid that is run by maintenance mode U033
a
b
a
b
Notes for attaching

d
e
d b
e
c
a
b
c
4-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Release five hooks (b) of front right cover (a) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4 Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum pin (a) of the front cover for maintenance.
a
6 Open the front cover for maintenance (a).
4-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Remove each one screw (b) of the strap (c) and remove front cover for maintenance (a) in the direction of the
arrow.
b c
c
b
10Slide the front cover in the direction of the arrow and remove the fulcrum (d) from the fulcrum shaft (c).
b c
d
4-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Remove the pin (b) while bending the fulcrum and detach the waste toner box cover (a).
12Detach the waste toner box (a).
13Open inner cover (a) pulling left and right lever (b) on the cover.
14Detach the primary transfer unit.
15Detach the drum units.
4-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
16Detach the developer units.
b b
17Release the hook (b) with the flat-blade screwdriver (a) and remove inner cover (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
18Remove three screws (b) (M3x8).
4-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
19Remove one connector (a) and detach the front container unit (c).
a
b c
b
b c b b
b
20Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x10).
21Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
1 c
c 3
4-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
22Unlock clamp (a) and remove the wire (c) from connector (b) on waste toner box unit.
IMPORTANT
Make room for the wire (a) once it connects.
Otherwise, pay attention, wire pulls the toner box unit and that makes detection error or early detection.
4-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
23Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out toward you.
1 2
c
b
IMPORTANT
Waste toner joint has to be released before take the waste toner box unit away.
24Pull the rail (b) of upper stage cassette and remove one screw (a) (M3x8).
a b
25Open the right cover.
4-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
26Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) of the right front cover.
a
a
27Disconnect the connector (c). Remove seven screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the front inner cover (b).
a
b
a a
b a
a a
a
a
a a
a b
a
a
4-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for attaching

Lay down inner cover hinges (a) and confirm that pressure cam (b) for developer unit is down before attachment.
a
28Disconnect one connector (a).
29Remove two screws (b) (M3x8).
30Remove two hooks (c) and remove the drum developer relay PWB (d).
b c
d
d
a
4-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
32Release 4 hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
f
Notes for attaching
4-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
40Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the waste toner box unit (b).
41Check the waste toner unit (b) and clean or replace it.
4-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
• When replacing with the new waste toner box unit, remove two screws (c)(M3x8) from the old unit (a) and
detach the slide rail (b) and attach it to the new unit.
c
b
b c
4-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Execute the following setting after replacing the waste toner box.
Waste toner bottle weight detection calibration (execute maintenance mode U155): calibration
• Accessories for waste toner box unit
A: Waste toner box unit
B: Waste toner bottle
1 Turn on after waste toner box replacement without waste toner bottle.
2 Select maintenance mode U155 and close the waste toner box cover.
3 Select [Calibration] and confirm [None] indicated next to [Waste Toner] then press [Start] key.
4 Confirm that [OK} comes up at next to [Execute].
5 Insert the empty waste toner box and close the waste toner box cover (a).
6 Press [Waste Toner] and confirm that [None] turn to [Empty] and press [Execute] then [Start] key.
7 Renew the value next to [None/Empty] and confirm [OK] next to [Execute].
• If numbers (error code) is indicated next to [Execute], redo from the first step.
(If the detected waste toner box weight unstable (box installed/not installed), an error is indicated)
4-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
High-end Model
a
b
a
b
Notes for attaching

d
e
d b
e
c
a
b
c
4-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Release five hooks (b) of front right cover (a) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4 Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum pin (a) of the front cover for maintenance.
a
6 Open the inner cover for maintenance (a).
4-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Remove each one screw (b) of the strap (c) and remove front cover for maintenance (a) in the direction of the
arrow.
b c
c
b
10Slide the front cover in the direction of the arrow and remove the fulcrum (d) from the fulcrum shaft (c).
b c
d
4-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Remove the pin (b) while bending the fulcrum and detach the waste toner box cover (a).
12Detach the waste toner box (a).
4-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
13Open inner cover (a) pulling left and right lever (b) on the cover.
14Detach the primary transfer unit.
15Detach the drum units.
16Detach the developer units.
b b
17Release the hook (b) with the flat-blade screwdriver (a) and remove inner cover (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
4-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
b c
b
b c b b
b
21Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
1 c
c 3
4-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
22Unlock clamp (a) and remove the wire (c) from connector (b) on waste toner box unit.
IMPORTANT
Make room for the wire (a) once it connects.
Otherwise, pay attention, wire pulls the toner box unit and that makes detection error or early detection.
4-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
23Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out toward you.
1 2
c
b
IMPORTANT
Waste toner joint has to be released before take the waste toner box unit away.
24Pull the rail (b) of upper stage cassette, remove one screw (a)(M3x8).
a b
25Open the right cover.
4-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
26Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) of the right front cover.
a
a
27Disconnect the connector (c). Remove seven screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the front inner cover (b).
a
b
a a
b a
a a
a
a
a a
a b
a
a
28Disconnect two connectors (a).
29Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
4-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
30Remove two hooks (c), remove the drum developer relay PWB (d).
b c
b
d d
a d
a
31Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).
32Release 4 hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
34Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).
4-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
f
Notes when attaching
37Remove four screws (a)(M3x8).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
4-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
39Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).
4-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
40Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the waste toner box unit (b).
41Check the waste toner unit (b) and clean or replace it.
a
• When replacing with the new waste toner box unit, remove two screws (c)(M3x8) from the old unit (a) and
detach the slide rail (b) and attach it to the new unit.
c
b
b c
4-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Execute the following setting after replacing the waste toner box.
Waste toner bottle weight detection calibration (execute maintenance mode U155): calibration
• Accessories for waste toner box unit
A: Waste toner box unit
B: Waste toner bottle
1 Turn on after waste toner box replacement without waste toner bottle.
2 Select maintenance mode U155 and close the waste toner box cover.
3 Select [Calibration] and confirm [None] indicated next to [Waste Toner]. Press the [Start] key.
4 Confirm that [OK} comes up at next to [Execute].
5 Insert the empty waste toner box and close the waste toner box cover (a).
6 Press [Waste Toner] and confirm that [None] turn to [Empty] and press [Execute] then [Start] key.
7 Renew the value of [None/Empty] side, make sure the[OK]display of[Execute]side.

• If numbers (error code) is indicated next to [Execute], redo from the first step.
(If the detected waste toner box weight fluctuates(box installed/not installed), an error is indicated)
4-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-7)Fan motor attachment direction

When reattaching the fan motor, be careful of the attachment direction (intake/exhaust).
Low-end model
k
c
a
j
h
i
High-end Model
k c
m
l
a
j o
g h
f
e b
d i
a. IH PWB fan motor intake *2 i. Power source fan motor intake *2
b. Toner sucking fan motor *a intake *3 j. Eject/IH fan motor front intake *2
c. Controller fan motor: intake intake *1 k. Eject/IH fan motor middle: intake intake *2
d. Developer fan motor K *a intake *2 l. Eject/IH fan motor middle intake *2
e. Developer fan motor M *a intake *2 m. Container fan motor 1: intake *2 intake *2
f. Developer fan motor C *a intake *2 n. Eject fan motor intake *2
g. Developer fan motor Y*a intake *2 o. Container fan motor intake *2
h. Fuser edge fan motor intake *2
*1: Rating label side: The upper side, *2: Rating label side: The inside, *3: Rating label side: The lower side
*a: High-end model only
4-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)PWBs
IMPORTANT
Following procedures have to be done before PWB replacement.
Otherwise PWB gets broken.
• Unplug power code.
• Press power switch for more than 1 second. (Remove electrical charge in main unit.)
(5-1)Detaching and attaching the engine PWB

Low-end model
2 Disconnect all the connectors from the engine PWB (b).
3 Remove six screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the engine PWB (b).
4-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Check or replace the engine PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
b
a YC1
a YC6
YC36 YC29
YC16 YS15 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
a YC31
YC40
a YC39 YC33 YC23
YC9 YC4 YC27 YC34 YC21 YC22
Notes for detaching

In the case that the FFC connector (YC35) has a lock, release the lock cover (a) and pull out the FFC (b).
a
b b
Connect FFC cable
• In case of FCC replacement for YC9 and YC36, prepare a set of FCC and 2 connectors, and follow the
procedures below.
YC36
YC9
1 Connect FCC cable to connector (c) as shown in picture.
4-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Rib (c) on the center of connector has to be opposite side of conductive face of FCC.
2 Place the FCC to slot (d) of the connector and push it in until conductive face comes to see.
Notes for engine PWB replacement

• When replacing the engine PWB (a), make sure to remove the EEPROM (b) (YS1) from the old board and
install it in the new board.
• Install the latest firmware after replacement.
b
YS1
YS1
b
a a
4-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
High-end Model
1 Remove one screw (a) (M3x10) and slide the rear top cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
2 Disconnect all the connectors from the engine PWB (b).
3 Remove eight screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the engine PWB (b).
4 Check or replace the engine PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
b
a
a
a YC1
YC29 YC6
YC36
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
a YC31
YC40
a YC39 YC33 YC23
YC34
4-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for detaching

• In the case that the FFC connector (YC35) has a lock, release the lock cover (a) and pull out the FFC (b).
a
b b
Connect FFC cable
• In case of FCC replacement for YC9 and YC36, prepare a set of FCC and 2 connectors, and follow the
procedures below.
YC36
YC9 YC10
1 Connect FCC cable to connector (c) as shown in picture.

• Rib (c) on the center of connector has to be opposite side of conductive face of FCC.
2 Place the FCC to slot (d) of the connector and push it in until conductive face comes to see.
4-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for engine PWB replacement

• When replacing the engine PWB (a), make sure to remove the EEPROM (b) (YS1) from the old board and
install it in the new board.
YS1
b
YC39 YC33
YC34
YC4 YC27
a
a
4-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-2)Detaching and attaching the main PWB
(Step 2 to 3 are only for IB-35)

2 Remove connector (a) from connector (c) on main PWB (b).
3 Remove screw (d) (M3x6) and take the PWB (e) away.
d e
e
f
a
c
IMPORTANT
In case that remove connector (a) from main PWB (b), pull it straightforward against the PWB (b) and do not
pull in the other ways.
Pulling in the other ways gets FPC (f) broken
(Step 4 to 6 is for Document processor (CIS) only)

4 Disconnect the connector (b) from the DP relay PWB (a).
4-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Detach the DP relay PWB (a) while removing the backside connector (d).
b
YC25
c
d
c
a YC1
c
7 Disconnect all the connectors from the main PWB (a).
8 Remove eight screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the main PWB (a).
9 Check the main PWB (a) and clean or replace it if necessary.
b
YC6
YC59 YC11 YC63 YC9
YC58
b YC12 YC8
YC43
YC5
b YC10
b
YC2
b
YC51
a b
YC33
b YC32
YC23 YC42
Notes for main PWB replacement

• When replacing the main PWB, make sure to remove the SSD from the old board and install it in the new main
board. (See page page 4-137)
IMPORTANT
Main unit does not work without SSD.
Do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
4-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Execute the following setting after replacing the main PWB.
1 Restore backup data on SSD.

• This has to be done before run U004.
Execute maintenance mode U026 Flash/Restore
2 Restore exported machine settings and job settings with U917 in advance.
3 Set Machine serial number

• C0180 error comes up when turn on machine since no serial number so that U004 has to be run to match the
serial numbers in the PWBs.
Execute it after confirming the engine PWB machine serial number matches the main unit serial number.
Wrong data will be written when there is a discrepancy in U004.
4 Firmware update (See page page 5-1)

• Check the latest firmware and upgrade it.
5 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib

2 Select [Calib].

4 Press [Stop] key.
6 Auto halftone adjustment (maintenance mode U410)


4-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 [Finish] displays after normal completion.
7 Resetting the initial settings

• Input setting from maintenance report (U000) that output in advance.
No. Maintenance mode relating to the main unit
U250 Maintenance counter preset
U251 Maintenance counter clear
U253 Double/single count switch
U260 Feed/eject counter switch
U345 Maintenance timing pre-caution setting
U251: Cassette counter

U265: Destination setting
U065: Main Scan adjustment value
U402: Margin setting value
Other setting that is changed in setup
• Registration for net work certification

• In case of displaying customize screen U224: Home screen install
• Set interface block function or security level setting from [System Menu] in case that those are changed from
default.
• In case of install Security Kit, Input the key code.
• Set network since MAC address (Printer name) gets changed.
8 Exiting from the maintenance mode

Input "001" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
4-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-3)Detaching and attaching the main high voltage PWB

Low-end model
hook (c). After that, detach it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Detach the rear stay (b).
a
a
b a
6 Disconnect all the connectors from the main high voltage PWB (a).
7 Remove five screws (b) (M3x8).
8 Release three board supports (e).
9 Release two hooks (c) at the left and right side.
10Release three upper side hooks (d) and remove the main high voltage PWB (a).
4-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Check or replace the main high voltage PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
c d
d
e d
c
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
e
High-end Model
4-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 c
c 3
a
a
b a
6 Disconnect all the connectors from the main high voltage PWB (a).
7 Remove five screws (b) (M3x8).
8 Release three board supports (e).
9 Release two hooks (c) at the left and right side.
4-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Check or replace the main high voltage PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
d
c d
d
e d
c
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
e
4-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the transfer high voltage PWB
2 If DP is installed, Open it.
4-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c
b
4-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Release the hooks (b) and remove the right rear top cover (c).
c
b
10Release four connectors (b) from the main PWB (a) and draw from the aperture (e). Remove the wire (c) from
two wire saddles (d).
c
e
d
b
4-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
b
c
a
13After lifting the shield box (a), draw it and release the hooks (b).
4-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
a
b
CAUTION
15Remove the connector (b) from the container motor (a). Remove ten connectors (d) from feed image PWB (c).
16Remove the wire (e) from the five wire saddles (f).
b
a
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
e
d c
4-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
18Unlatch six upper side hooks (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b) and then four lower side hooks (c), and then
remove the transfer terminal cover (d).
b
c
c a
a
d
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a), make sure that the rib (b) is between two terminals. (Eight
locations)
19Disconnect one connector (b) from the transfer high voltage PWB (a).
20Remove two screws (c) (M3x8).
21Release two board supports (b) and remove the transfer high voltage PWB (a).
4-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
22Check or replace the transfer high voltage PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
d b
c
a
4-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-5)Detaching and attaching the power supply PWB
CAUTION
Even after power off and unplug, some capacitors on power supply board may still have electro charge, so pay
attention not to touch those parts.
Low-end model
1 c
c 3
a
a
b a
4-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Disconnect two connectors (c).
6 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8) and remove the ground terminal (c).
7 Remove the wire saddles (d).
a
b
a
d
8 Remove one screw (a) (M3x8).
9 Take PF drawer holder (c) away with pulling to release from grooves (d).
c
IMPORTANT
When attaching the PF drawer holder (c), make sure to hang it to the two grooves (b).
10Disconnect all the connectors from the main high voltage PWB (a).
11Remove five screws (b) (M3x8).
12Release three board supports (e).
13Release two hooks (c) at the left and right side.
4-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c
c d
d
d
e d
c
e e
b
b a c
b
b
b
15Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the shield lid (b).
a
b
a
4-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
17Rotating to unplug the lower side in advance and remove the power shield (b).
a
a
b
b
a
18Disconnect all the connectors from the power supply PWB (a).
20Release two board supports (c) and remove power supply PWB (a).
21Check or replace the power supply PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC8
YC2 YC9 YC7 YC6 YC5
YC1
c
TB1 TB2
b TB3
b YC4
c
b
a
High-end Model
4-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
23Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, and release the lower hook (c) lifting the cover. After
that, detach it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
25Detach the rear stay (b).
a
a
b a
26Disconnect two connectors (a).
27Remove the screw (b) (M3x8) and remove the ground terminal (c).
4-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
28Remove the wire saddles (d).
a
b
a
d
30Take PF drawer holder (c) away with pulling to release from grooves (d).
c
IMPORTANT
When attaching the PF drawer holder (c), make sure to hang it to the two grooves (b).
31Disconnect all the connectors from the main high voltage PWB (a).
33Release three board supports (e).
34Release two hooks (c) at the left and right side.
4-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c d
c d
e d d
c
e e
b
b a
b c
b
b
36Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the shield lid (b).
a
b
a
4-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
38Rotating to unplug the lower side in advance and remove the power shield (b).
a
a
b
b
a
39Disconnect all the connectors from the power supply PWB (a).
41Release two board supports (c) and remove the power supply PWB (a).
42Check or replace the power supply PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC8
YC2 YC9 YC7 YC6 YC5
YC1
c TB1 TB2
b TB3
b YC4
c
b
a
4-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-6)Detaching and attaching the IH PWB
1 Lift up operation panel (a).
2 Lift up the lever (b) of the sub tray (a) and release the lock then lift up the machine rear side (c) and slide it to
the front side.
3 Lift up the pin (d) and remove it then detach the sub tray (a).
4 Remove one screw (e) (M3×8).
4-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Remove connector cover (f).
d
b
a
In case that the job separator is installed

b a
4-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Lift the lever (b) of the upper tray (a), release the lock, slide in the direction of the arrow, unplug pin (c) and
remove in the direction of the arrow.
c
4-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Insert the front side of aperture into flat-head screwdriver (c), spread in the direction of the arrow and release
four hooks (d) then remove the left top cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
Notes for attaching

latch four lower hooks (f) first and the upper hook (d) then attach the top left cover (e).
8 Detach the sub tray (a) in the direction of the arrow.
4-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Remove the DP rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b a
12Detach the sensor mounting plate (b).
4-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
14Detach the IH shield plate (b).
a
a
15Disconnect all connectors from the IH PWB (b).
16Remove six screws (a) (M3x8).
17Release 3 board supports (c) and remove the IH PWB (b).
18Check or replace the IH PWB (b), and then reattach the parts which is removed.
c
a
a
a
a
a
a
4-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-7)Detaching and attaching the operation panel PWB
1 Get the operation panel (a) straight.
2 Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower
hooks (d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
4 Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade screwdriver (c).
4-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Detach the eject upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
7 Remove the operation lid (c) from the operation unit (b) in the direction of the arrow.
8 Disconnect 4 connectors (b) from the operation unit (a).
9 Detach the wire guide (c).
4-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Remove two screws (d) (M3x8).

d
d
b a
b
a
b
a
b c
b
b c b b
b
13Lift up operation panel (a).
4-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
14Unlatch two hooks (b) with a flat-blade screw driver and remove the front cover (d).
b
c
d
Notes for attaching

When attaching the front cover (d), insert two lower hooks latch the hooks (b) completely.
15Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the operation section (b).
a a
4-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
17Release two hooks (b), and then remove the operation unit lid (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
c
b
18If the bracket is down then rotate it to up.
19Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the operation rear cover (c) from operation section (b).
a
a
a c
a
4-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
20Remove 2 screws (g) (M3x8) and remove the operation lower rear cover (e) from operation section (b).
a
a
a
c
a
4-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
21Disconnect all FFCs , FPCs and the connectors from the operation PWB (c).
22Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the operation panel main PWB (c) from operation section (b).
23Check or replace the operation panel main PWB (c) and then reattach the parts which are removed.
a
a
a
c
a
4-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Sensor adjustment
(6-1)Attach MP paper width sensor
1 Set MP paper width guide to A6 size.
6
A
a
b
a
2 Insert positioning pin (b) to square hole (a) on MP lift plate.
b
3 Up side of MP lift plate (b) down holding the positioning screw (a)
4-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Insert the positioning screw (a) to hole of the gear and attach it.
b
5 Align D-cut of MP paper width sensor to D-cut shaft and attach it.
6 Align Cut-off if sensor cover to positioning screw (b) and remove the positioning screw. Attach sensor cover.
a
b
4-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
4 - 7 Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)

1 Remove five screws (a) (M3x8). Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).
a c a
a
a
2 Disconnect the connector (b) of the motor (a).
3 Remove three screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the PF drive unit (d).
4 Check or replace the PF drive unit (d), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
c
c
c
4-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Detaching and attaching the PF lift motor
1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the paper feeder (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
a
3 Disconnect two connectors (a) and three screws (b) (M3x8). Remove the PF lift motor (c).
4 Check, clean or replace PF lift motor (c) and then reattach in the original position the parts which are removed.
b a
c
b
b
c
b c b
b
a b
b
b
b b
b c
Replacement steps
1 When replace PF lift motor, disconnect connector (b) from original PF lift motor (a) and remove wire (c)
releasing 2 hooks (d).
4-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Connect (b) of wire (c) to new PF lift motor (e) and latch 2 hooks (f).
a b
e b
4-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Detaching and attaching the PF PWB
1 Remove five screws (a) (M3x8). Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).
a c a
a
a
2 Disconnect all the connectors from the PF main PWB (a).
3 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the PF main PWB (a).
4 Check or replace the PF main PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC11 YC10 b
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC14
YC12 b
a
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Notes for PF PWB replacement

• When replacing the PF PWB, make sure to remove the EEPROM from the old board and install it in the new
board.
4-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Remove five screws (a) (M3x8).
2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).
c a
a
a
a
3 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8).
4 Remove the interface assembly (a).
b
b a
b
b
4-224
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Release the three wire saddles, and release the wire stoppers (b) and remove wires (c)
a a a b
6 Pull the lever (b) of the wire holder (a) and remove the wire holder (a).
a a b
7 Remove five screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the PF drive unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
8 Check or replace the PF drive unit (a), and then reattach in the original position the parts which are removed.
b
b
b b
4-225
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c a
a
a
a
4 Remove the interface assembly (a).
b
b a
b
b
4-226
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Disconnect the connector (c). Remove three screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the lift motor 2 (a).
b a
b c
6 Release the hook (d) from the square hole (c) of the side frame and remove the PF lift motor 1 unit (a).
b
d
b
b
7 Disconnect connector (c) and detach the PF lift motor 1 (a).
a
b
c
b
8 Check or replace the PF lift motor, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-227
[CONFIDENTIAL]
c a
a
a
a
3 Disconnect all the connectors from the PF main PWB (a).
4 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the PF PWB (a).
5 Check or replace the PF main PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
b a
b
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
4-228
[CONFIDENTIAL]

board.
4-229
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8). Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).
a
a
a
2 Disconnect the three connectors (a) and the connector (b) from the PF PWB (d).
3 Remove two wire stoppers (c) and remove the wire.
a d
b a
a
c c
4-230
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the PF drive unit (a) from the main unit while pushing in the switch
lever (c).
b
b
4-231
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the DP rear cover (b).
a
a
a
2 Release six wire stoppers (d) and one cable clamp, and then remove the wire of PF lift motor (a).
3 Disconnect the connector (b) and (c).
d
d
d
d
c d a
e
4 Remove three screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the PF lift motor (a).
4-232
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Check or replace the PF lift motor unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-233
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
a
a
2 Disconnect all the connectors from the PF PWB (a).
3 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the PF PWB (a) from 2 hooks (c).
4 Check or replace the PF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC12 YC11
YC14
YC17
YC5
YC15
YC2
YC8 YC4
YC10
YC7
YC13
YC16 YC1
YC18 YC3 YC6
4-234
[CONFIDENTIAL]

board.
4-235
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-1)Detaching and attaching the document processor
1 Open the document processor (a).
2 Remove one screw (a) (M3x10) and slide the rear top cover (b).
3 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear cover (b).
4-236
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Close the document processor (a).
5 Detach the DP wire cover (a).
6 Remove the DP wire connector (a).
7 Remove the DP wire from wire saddles (b) and wire saddles (c)
4-237
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Remove the DP wire connector from the wire holder (b).
9 Lift up the document processor (a) in the direction of the arrow and remove the hinge (c) from the main unit (b).
c
b
4-238
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Open the DP top cover (b) of the document processor (a).
2 Remove one screw (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear left cover (b).
4-239
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-3)Detaching and attaching the DP PWB
2 Remove one screw (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear left cover (b).
4-240
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Open the lid (a) and remove the DP rear middle cover (b).
4 Remove one screw (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear right cover (b).
a
5 Remove two wire stoppers (a).
4-241
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Remove one screw (b) (M3x8) and detach the wire guide (c).
b
7 Disconnect all connectors from the DP PWB (b).
9 Detach the DP PWB (b) from the document processor (c).
10Check or replace the DP PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
a
Notes for DP PWB replacement

• When replacing the DP PWB, make sure to remove the EEPROM from the old board and install it in the new
board.
4-242
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Document processor (DP-7110/DP-7130)

4-243
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Close the document processor (a).
6 Disconnect the connector (a), release two wire saddle (b) and remove the DP wire (b).
7 Disconnect the connector (d), release three wire saddle (f) and remove the DP wire (e).
e
f a
c b
c
4-244
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Remove the DP wire connector (a) from the wire holder (b).
a
9 Open the document processor.
10Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and the pin (b).
b a a
4-245
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11Slide the document processor (a) in the direction of the arrow and remove the hinge (c) from the main unit (b).
a
c
4-246
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Remove the strap (c) from DP top cover.
b
c
a
b
a
a
(5-3)Detaching and attaching the DP PWB
4-247
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Detach the Strap (c) from the DP top cover (b).
b
c
a
b
a
a
4 Disconnect all connectors from the DP PWB (b).
4-248
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Check or replace the DP PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c a
b
a

board.
4-249
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-4)Detaching and attaching DPCIS
2 Detach the Strap (c) from the DP top cover (b).
b
c
a
b
a
a
4-250
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) at the machine rear side, detach DPCIS unit (a) the upward.
5 Disconnect two connectors (b) from the DPSHD PWB (a).
a
6 Pushing the two hooks (c) of the front and rear glass holder (b) in the direction of the arrow to unlatch them
then take them away.
7 Take DPCIS glass (d) and DPCIS (e) from DPCIS unit (a)
4-251
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Pay attention about face/back of DPCIS glass when attaching the CIS glass.
Pay attention to the marking in the figure.
Miss the face/back or the marking leads paper dust contamination and it is affected scanning quality.
b
1 b
2 2 f
c c
IMPORTANT
Check the position of black marking (f) for distinction of the face/back side of the glass.
Also, make sure not to touch the glass surface.
If it should get dirty, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
8 Disconnect the connector (e).
9 Remove four pins (c) with the flat-head screwdriver (b) and detach DPSHD PWB (d).
10Replace the DPCIS and then reattach the parts in the original position.
11When replacing the new DPCIS assembly, execute the following procedures.
12Clean the CIS roller and contact glass (CIS).
13Execute maintenance mode U091 (White lines correction setting). (See page page 6-96)
14Make test copy with gray originals.
15When white streak appears on the image of the test copy, executing step 13, 14 again, repeating till white
streak disappears.
4-252
[CONFIDENTIAL]
16Execute maintenance mode U411 (scanner auto adjustment) (See page page 6-263)
4-253
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Document processor (DP-7120): Low-end models only

2 Remove one screw (a) (M3x10) and slide the rear top cover (b).
a
a
a
4-254
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
6 Remove the connector (a) of DP wire (c).
7 Detach the DP wire (c) from the two wire saddle (b).
a
b b
4-255
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Remove the DP wire connector (a) from the wire holder (b).
a
10Lift up the document processor (a) and detach the hinge (c) from the main unit (b).
b c
c
4-256
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Release three hooks (a).
a
a
4-257
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Release two hooks (a) and remove the DP rear cover (b) from the document processor (c).
a
c
4-258
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-3)Detaching and reattaching the DP PWB
2 Release three hooks (a).
a
a
4-259
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Release two hooks (a) and remove the DP rear cover (b) from the document processor (c).
a
c
4 Disconnect all the connectors (a) from the DP main PWB (e).
5 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8).
6 Remove one screw (c) (M3x8, P tight).
7 Detach the wire guide (d).
b
d
a
a
a c
a
8 Remove six screws (a) (M3x8).
4-260
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Check or replace the DP PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
a
a

board.
4-261
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(7-1)Detaching and attaching the DF PWB
1 Slide the DF main unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
2 Open the staple cover (a).
4-262
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Lift up the DF front cover (b) and unlatch two hooks (c) to remove it.
a b
6 Disconnect all the connectors from the DF PWB (a).
7 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the DF PWB (a).
8 Check or replace the DF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC4 YC8 YC13 YC9
YC7
YC17
YC20
YC5
YC11
YC10
YC6
YC3 YC16
YC19
b
a b b
Notes for DF PWB replacement

• When replacing the DF PWB, make sure to remove the EEPROM from the old board and install it in the new
board.
4-263
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7-2)Detaching and attaching the staple unit
1 Open the front cover (a).
3 Detach the left top cover (c).
a
b
Notes for attaching

• Attach the top left cover (c) after latching four lower hooks (d) and then the upper hook (e).
4-264
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Slide the DF main unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
IMPORTANT
Do not get positions (b) to touch anything once place DF unit (a).
a
b
6 Get the DF unit (a) slide.
7 Open the staple cover (b).
8 Remove the screw (c) (M3x8).
b
c
4-265
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Detach the upper exit cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c b
11Pull out wire saddle (a).
12Disconnect two connectors (b).
b b
13Get top of DF unit (f) down.
14Slide drawer unit (b).
b a
4-266
[CONFIDENTIAL]
16Detach DF front sensor cover (b).
17Slide DF staple unit (a) to center.
18Remove two screws (b) (M3x8).
19Slide the removed DF staple unit (a) without any interference with the mount.
20Rotate it and make the gear up.
4-267
[CONFIDENTIAL]
21Rotate it and get the DF staple unit (c) to aperture (d) side.
1
a
d
b
c
22Pull out DF stable unit (a) from the aperture.
23Check or replace the DF staple unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
IMPORTANT
Be careful that damage on gear or other parts while the unit go through the aperture.
4-268
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• In case of DF staple unit (a) replacement, detach staple guide (b) and attach to the new staple unit.
a
b
4-269
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(8-1)Detaching and attaching BR convey motor
1 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
a
b
a
4-270
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8) and detach BR convey motor 1 (b) and 2 (c).
a c
a
b
a
4 Check or replace the BR convey motor 1 or 2, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-271
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8-2)Detaching and attaching the BR PWB
1 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
a
b
a
2 Disconnect all connector.
3 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the BR PWB (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
1
1
YC4
YC2
a
11
11 1 YC1
YC3 4 1
a
a
4 Check or replace the BR PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-272
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(9-1)Detaching and attaching the DF staple unit
1 Open the DF front cover (a).
2 Pull out the waste punch box (b) and then remove it.
3 Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and lift it up to release the lock and
open the DF staple cover (a).
4-273
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Disconnect two connectors (b) from the DF staple unit (a).
a
b
b
5 Lift up the DF staple unit (a) from the front side to release the hook (b) and pull it out toward you.
6 Check or replace the DF staple unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-274
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• When replacing the DF staple unit (a), detach the staple guide (b) and staple mounting plate (c) to attach the
new DF staple unit.
4-275
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Detach the lid (b).
a
4 Release three hooks (b) and remove the DF rear cover (c).
a a
7 Remove the board support (c) and remove the DF PWB (a).
4-276
[CONFIDENTIAL]
YC4 YC8 YC9
YC17
YC5
YC11
YC10
YC19
YC3 YC16
U3
b
c
a
b

board.
4-277
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(10-1)Detaching and attaching the DF staple unit
1 Open the DF front cover (a).
2 Pull out the waste punch box (b) and then remove it.
a
b
3 Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and lift it up to release the lock and
open the DF staple cover (a).
4-278
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Disconnect two connectors (b) from the DF staple unit (a).
a
b
b
5 Lift up the DF staple unit (a) from the front side to release the hook (b) and pull it out toward you.
6 Check or replace the DF staple unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
• When replacing the DF staple unit (a), detach the staple guide (b) and staple cover (c) to attach the new DF
staple unit.
c
b
4-279
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Detach the lid (b).
a
4 Detach the DF rear cover (b).
6 Remove six screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the DF PWB (a).
4-280
[CONFIDENTIAL]
YC3 YC12 YC18 YC17 YC16

YC19
YC21
YC14
YC5 YC20
YC15
YC4
YC8
YC7 YC22
YC6
YC9
YC1
U3
YC10 YC23
YC2 YC13
a
b
b b
board.
4-281
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(11-1)Detaching and attaching the BF staple unit
1 Remove 4 screws (a) (M4x10) and remove the 2 brackets (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
a
a
a
b
2 Remove 2 screws (a) (M4x10) and remove the BF staple unit (b) in the direction of the arrow.
(11-2)Detaching and attaching the BF PWB
1 Raise the BF unit (a) upward.
4-282
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the PWB cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b a a
a
a
a
a
3 Disconnect all connectors.
1
1 YC6 4 YC10 3 YC17 1
20 10
1 YC13
1
2 YC15
YC4
1
6
YC16
7
4
YC3
1
7
4
YC7
YC5
1
1
1 15
YC20
30 16
5 Release lock for saddle (b) and take BF PWB away.

b
b
c a
a
a
a
Notes for BF PWB replacement
• When replacing the BF PWB, make sure to remove the EEPROM from the old board and install it in the new
board.
4-283
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(12-1)Separation of enhancement units
NOTE
In case of maintenance for enhancement, separate them if necessary.
See Installation guide for the detail of separation.
(12-2)Detaching and attaching the front cover
Top cover/Upper inner cover/Upper rear cover/Lower rear cover

1 Open upper front cover (a).
2 Remove top cover front lid (a) and rear lid (b) with flat screwdriver (c).
3 Remove four screws (d) (M3x8).
a d
b
c
d
c d
4-284
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the upper inner cover (b).
a
a
b a
a
5 Remove connector (a) and wire form clamp (b).
6 Detach the top cover (a) in the direction of the arrow.
4-285
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the upper rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b a
8 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8). Release two hooks (c), and then remove the lower rear cover (b) in the
direction of the arrow.
a
b
a
4-286
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Upper front cover/Upper left cover/Middle front cover/Lower inner cover/Lower front cover/
Lower left cover
2 Remove top cover front lid (a) and rear lid (b) with flat screwdriver (c).
3 Remove four screws (d) (M3x8).
a d
b
c
d
c d
4-287
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
a
b a
a
5 Remove connector (a) and wire form clamp (b).
6 Detach the top cover (a) in the direction of the arrow.
4-288
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Remove the strap (c) in the direction of the arrow by pushing hook (a) with screwdriver (b).
c a
c
8 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and fulcrum shaft bracket (b) and upper front cover (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
b
a
9 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the upper left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
a
4-289
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Remove screw (a) (M3x8) and remove the middle front cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b a
11Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the lower front cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
12Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the lower inner cover (b).
4-290
[CONFIDENTIAL]
13Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the lower left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
Detaching and reattaching the DF staple unit

a
a
b a
a
3 Insert the flat-blade screwdriver (a) into the opening (b), release the hook (c) and detach the connector cover
(e) in the direction of the arrow.
4-291
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Hang the hook (d) first and attach it.
b b
e
c
e d
4 Remove 2 connectors (a) and clamp (b).
5 Remove screw (a) (M4x8).
6 Release the projection (c) and detach the waste duct (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
a
b
4-292
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Remove two screws (b) (M4x10) from DP staple unit (a).
a
b
b
8 Slide the staple lock cover (a) in the direction of the arrow to release the lock and move the staple unit (b)
9 Insert the screwdriver (b) through the round hole (a) and press the staple shift plate (c) in the direction of the
arrow to release the lock.
10Move DF staple unit (d) close to the center.
d
a
4-293
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11After lifting up Section A and releasing two positioning bosses (a), release two hooks (b) and detach the DF
staple unit (c) from the base (d).
d
c
d
12Rotate Section A so that it is on the side of the opening (b) . Then, detach the DF staple unit (a).
13Check or replace the DF staple unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
b
b
a a
a
• When replacing the DF staple unit (a), detach the staple guide (b) and staple mounting plate (c) to attach the
new DF staple unit.
c c
a
4-294
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12-3)Detaching and attaching the PWB

Main PWB
b a
9 1 8 1 1 6 20 1
1 2 YC19 9 YC29 1 YC18 YC17 YC20 30 1
YC10 YC27
5
13 YC40
1
YC9 1
YC28
1 1
B1 A16
YC42 7
YC15
12
16
B16 A1 10
5 YC23
YC14
YC41
1
1
1
6 16
YC7
YC30
1
19
YC6 1
1
19 8 4
YC8 YC25
YC31 1
1
12 9
YC32 19 YC33 1 YC24

1
1 1
YC12 11 1 36 16 30
8 19 YC38
YC11 5 1 YC36 YC37 1
1 18 1 15 9 YC21 1
3 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the DF main PWB (a).
a
a
4-295
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes for DF Main PWB replacement

• When replacing the DF Main PWB, make sure to remove the EEPROM from the old board and install it in the
new board.
4-296
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13)PH PWB (Punch unit)

b a
YC5 YC3
YC4
11 1 4 1
1 3
1
3
YC2
YC6 2
1
2
YC7 1
6 1
YC8 YC10
1 4
1 YC1
2
YC9
1 12
5 YC11 1
3 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the PH PWB (a).
4-297
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(14-1)Separate from DF and detach unit
1 Unlock with release lever and pull out BF-9100 (a) from DF-7130.
ߑ
ߒ
a
2 Remove 4 screws (a) (M4x8) and detach the guide (b).
b a
b
a
4-298
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Remove the band (b) from frame and take the wire out.
6 Remove screw (b) (M4x8) and take the ground wire (a) away.
b
a
4-299
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Remove screw (b) (M3x8) and detach the wire guide (a).
b
a
8 Remove four screws (a) (M4x8) and remove the middle conveying unit (b).
b a
9 Open exit cover (a) and hold up exit tray unit (b).
4-300
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10Remove screw (a) (M3x10 Black TP) and take side cover front (b) away.
b
b
11Remove screw (a) (M3x10 Black TP) and take side cover rear (b) away.
b b
12Put down exit tray unit (b) and close exit cover (a).
a
13Remove screw (a) (M3x8) and take the ground wire out.
4-301
[CONFIDENTIAL]
14Remove the connector (c) from the connector (d).

b
a
15Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the exit tray support plate rear (b).
16Detach the exit conveying tray unit (a).
ߒ
ߑ
4-302
[CONFIDENTIAL]
17Push in Booklet unit (a) into DF.
18Take Booklet unit (a) away from the right side of DF.
(14-2)Detaching and reattaching the BF staple unit
1 Remove 4 screws (a) (M4x10) and remove the 2 brackets (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
a
a
a
4-303
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Remove 2 screws (a) (M4x10) and remove the BF staple unit (b) in the direction of the arrow.
(14-3)Detaching and reattaching the BF PWB
1 Raise the BF unit (a) upward.
2 Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the PWB cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b a a
a
a
a
a
4-304
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Disconnect all connectors.
1
YC6 4 YC10 3 YC17 1 1 YC23 4
20 1 1
1 YC13 10
YC15
1
7
YC19
YC16
1
7
4
1
YC3 YC11
1 1
4
1
7 YC26
4
YC7 3
YC5
1 YC22
1 6
1
YC25 6
3 1 1 YC18 YC20
16
30
5 Release lock for saddle (b) and take BF PWB away.

b
b
c a
a
a
a
Notes for BF PWB replacement
• When replacing the BF PWB, make sure to remove the EEPROM from the old board and install it in the new
board.
4-305
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
4 - 8 Scheduled maintenance procedure

(CH: Inspection CL: Cleaning AD: Adjustment LU: Lubrication RE: Replacement
(1)Main unit
(1-1)Low-end model
Set up
Maintenance Deliv Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ery (X 1,000 counts)
200 400 600 800

Test copy CH CH CH CH CH CH -
Test print AD AD AD AD AD AD
(Maximum copy size)
Internal Machine CL CL CL CL CL Vacuum : Remove toner or paper dust around

paper path and image processing section.
MK-8535 A RE RE RE RE RE Drum unit K
MK-8535 B RE RE RE RE RE Drum unit C, M, Y
MK-8535 D RE Drum unit K, Developer unit K, Fuser unit,

Primary transfer unit, Secondly transfer unit,
Filter (1 pc), Pick up roller, Feed roller, Retard
roller, MP feed roller, MP retard roller.
MK-8535 E RE Developer unit C, M, Y
Appearance/Cover
200 400 600 800

OUTER COVERS CH CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
FILTER TRANSFER CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM

302ND3324* Primary transfer filer
FILTER COVER CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM

RIGHT PWB filer
302ND3330_
Paper feed/convey
200 400 600 800

PARTS CLEANER CL CL CL CL CL Vacuum: Paper dust
REGIST ASSY SP RE
(302ND9402*)
PARTS ROLLER CL CL CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

RETARD ASSY SP RE RE RE no replacement)
(302ND9435_) CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace every
300K
4-306
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PARTS PRIMARY CL CL CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

FEED ASSY SP RE RE RE no replacement)
(302ND94210*) CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace every
300K
PARTS PULLEY CL CL CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

PICKUP SP RE RE RE no replacement)
300K
Roller/Pulley CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
Conveying guides CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
MPT feed
200 400 600 800

PARTS PULLEY CL CH CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of
FEED ASSY SP RE RE RE RE no replacement)
300K
RETARD ROLLER CL CH CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

ASSY RE RE RE RE no replacement)
(302F90917) CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace every
300K
Exit/Duplex
200 400 600 800

4-307
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Scanning
200 400 600 800

PARTS CONTACT- CL CL CL CL CL CL DP slit glass: Wipe with alcohol and dry
GLASS ASSY(I)SP material (Surface only).
(302RH9415*) Wipe it with dry material either in time of DP
installation.
PARTS CONTACT- CL CL CL CL
DP slit glass: Wipe with alcohol and dry
GLASS ASSY(C)SP
material (Surface only).
(302RH9416*)
MIRROR A/B/C CL Cleaning only for image failure (lines). Dry

wipe and air blow.
LENS ISU CL Cleaning only for image failure (lines). Dry

wipe and air blow.
PARTS MOUNT LED CL In case of image failure, replace.

ASSY SP RE
(302ND9312)
RAIL ISU R/F LU Lubricate only for noise or other failures.

Optical Rail Grease PG-671 (P/N: 6017000)
SENSOR OPT. CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material only for

(7NXPS181EL1MH0 CL failure. (Sensor emit/receipt only)
1)
PARTS ISU CH Replace in case of image failure.

RE
Drive/Others
200 400 600 800

Clutches CH CH CH CH CH Check paper path timing and condition at
RE feed/convey section.
Sensors CH CH CH CH CH Dry wipe or air blow on receptor or of optical

sensor.
Gears CH CH CH CH CH Lubricate EM-50LP on gear in case of noise.

LU (PN 7BG010009H GREASE MOLYKOTE EM-
50LP 50G)
IMPORTANT
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-308
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)High-end Model
Set up
300 600 900 1200

Test copy CH CH CH CH CH CH -
Test print AD AD AD AD AD AD
(Maximum copy size)
Internal Machine CL CL CL CL CL Vacuum : Remove toner or paper dust around

paper path and image processing section.
MK-8515 A RE RE RE RE RE Drum unit K, Developer unit K, Fuser unit,

Primary transfer unit, Secondly transfer unit,
Filter (1 pc), Pick up roller, Feed roller, Retard
roller, MP feed roller, MP retard roller.
MK-8515 B RE RE RE RE RE Drum unit C, M, Y, Developer unit C, M, Y
Appearance/Cover
300 600 900 1200

OUTER COVERS CH CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
SHEET DUCT PU H CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM

(302ND04B*) Inner cooling filer
FILTER TRANSFER CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM

(302ND3324*) Primary transfer filer
FILTER COVER CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM

RIGHT PWB filer
(302ND333*)
Paper feed/convey
300 600 900 1200

PARTS CLEANER CL CL CH CL CH Vacuum: Paper dust
REGIST ASSY SP RE RE
(302ND9402*)
PARTS ROLLER CL CL CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

RETARD ASSY SP RE RE RE no replacement)
300K
PARTS PRIMARY CL CL CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

FEED ASSY SP RE RE RE no replacement)
300K
PARTS PULLEY CL CL CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

PICKUP SP RE RE RE no replacement)
300K
4-309
[CONFIDENTIAL]
MPT feed
300 600 900 1200

PARTS PULLEY CL CH CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of
FEED ASSY SP RE RE RE RE no replacement)
300K
RETARD ROLLER CL CH CH CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

ASSY RE RE RE RE no replacement)
(302F90917) CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace every
300K
Exit/Duplex
200 400 600

Roller/Pulley CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
Conveying guides CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
Scanning
300 600 900 1200

PARTS CONTACT- CL CL CL CL CL CL DP slit glass: Wipe with alcohol and dry
GLASS ASSY(I)SP material (Surface only).
(302RH9415*) Wipe it with dry material either in time of DP
installation.
PARTS CONTACT- CL CL CL CL
DP slit glass: Wipe with alcohol and dry
GLASS ASSY(C)SP
material (Surface only).
(302RH9416*)
MIRROR A/B/C CL Cleaning only for image failure (lines). Dry

wipe and air blow.
LENS ISU CL Cleaning only for image failure (lines). Dry

wipe and air blow.
PARTS MOUNT LED CL In case of image failure, replace.

ASSY SP RE
(302ND9312)
RAIL ISU R/F LU Lubricate only for noise or other failures.

Optical Rail Grease PG-671 (P/N: 6017000)
SENSOR OPT. CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material only for

(7NXPS181EL1MH0 CL failure. (Sensor emit/receipt only)
1)
PARTS ISU CH Replace in case of image failure.

(302VD9311*) RE
4-310
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Drive/Others
200 400 600

Clutches CH CH CH CH Check paper path timing and condition at
Sensors CH CH CH CH Dry wipe or air blow on receptor or of optical

sensor.
Gears CH CH CH CH Lubricate EM-50LP on gear in case of noise.

LU (PN 7BG010009H GREASE MOLYKOTE EM-
50LP 50G)
IMPORTANT
(2)Document processor DP-7100 (Option)

Set up
300 600 900 1200

Test copy/print CH CH CH CH CH CH -
(Maximum copy size) AD AD AD AD AD AD
Appearance/Cover
300 600 900 1200

OUTER COVERS CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol
DP glass CH CL CL CL CL Main unit

CL CL: Alcohol or dry material
DP paper feed
300 600 900 1200

PARTS PAPER CL RE RE RE RE CL: Alcohol or dry material
FEED ROLLER CH: Check feed counter U905: Replace every
ASSY SP 300K
(303R79410*)
PULLEY CL RE RE RE RE CL: Alcohol or dry material

SEPARATION CH: Check feed counter U905: Replace every
(303LL0719*) 300K
SENSOR OPT CL CL CL CL CL CL: Air blow or dry wipe

(7NXPS133GD1+H0
1)
4-311
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DP convey/switchback section
300 600 900 1200

ROLLER CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
REGISTRATION
(303R72402*)
PULLEY CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

REGISTRATION X5
(303P72417*)

CONVEYING LEFT
(303R72403*)

CONVEYING BK X5
(303M82421*)

CONVEYING RIGHT
(303R72404*)

CONVEYING BK X3
(303M82421*)
ROLLER LOOP CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303R72901*)

CONVEYING BK X4
(303M82421*)
ROLLER EXIT CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303R72801*)
PULLEY EXIT CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(3HK1003*) X2
ROLLER SHIFT CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303R72902*)
PULLEY EXIT CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(3HK1003*) X2
GUIDE READING CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303R72406*)
SENSOR OPT CL CL CL CL CL CL: Air blow or dry wipe

(7NXPS124GD1+H0 X2
1)
4-312
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DP/Others
300 600 900 1200

PLATE ORIGINAL CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(303JC0420*)
IMPORTANT
(3)Document Processor DP-7110/7130 (Optional)

Set up
300 600 900 1200

Test copy/print CH CH CH CH CH CH -
(Maximum copy size) AD AD AD AD AD AD
Appearance/Cover
300 600 900 1200

OUTER COVERS CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol
DP glass CH CL CL CL CL Main unit

DP paper feed
300 600 900 1200

BELT PF CL RE RE RE RE CL: Alcohol or dry material
(303LL0719*) CH: Check feed counter U905: Replace every
300K
PULLEY LF CL RE RE RE RE CL: Alcohol or dry material

(303M40748*) CH: Check feed counter U905: Replace every
300K
PULLEY CL RE RE RE RE CL: Alcohol or dry material

SEPARATION CH: Check feed counter U905: Replace every
(303LL0719*) 300K
PARTS GUIDE CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol

SEPARATE ASSY
SP
(303M49420*)
4-313
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DP conveying section
300 600 900 1200

PARTS ROLLER CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry material
REGISTRATION SP
(303M49407*)
PULLEY, CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

REGISTRATION BK X8
(303M42430*)
PULLEY REG B BK CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303M42431*)
PARTS ROLLER CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

CONVEYING LEFT
SP
(303M49409*)
PULLEY GUIDE CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

READING X10
(303LL2419*)

CONVEYING RIGHT
SP
(303M49410*)

CONVEYING
UPPER SP
(303M49408*)

EJECT SP
(303M49411*)
GUIDE READING CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303M42425*)
SENSOR OPT. CL CL CL CL CL CL: Air blow or dry wipe

(7NXPS124GD1+H0
1)
DP table section
300 600 900 1200

SENSOR OPT. CL CL CL CL CL CL: Air blow or dry wipe
(7NXPSR11GD6FH0
1)
4-314
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DP Others
300 600 900 1200

(303JC0420*)
DP CIS section
300 600 900 1200

PARTS ROLLER CIS CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
SP
GLASS CIS CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry material (Must not wet).
IMPORTANT
(4)Document processor DP-7120 (Option)

Set up
200 400 600

Test copy/print CH CH CH CH CH -
(Maximum copy size) AD AD AD AD AD
Appearance/Cover
200 400 600

OUTER COVERS CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol
DP glass CH CL CL CL Main unit

DP paper feed
200 400 600

PARTS PAPER CL RE RE RE CL: Alcohol or dry material
FEED ASSY SP CH: Check feed counter U905: Replace every
(302MV9414*) 300K
PARTS GUIDE CL RE RE RE CL: Alcohol or dry material

RETARD ASSY SP CH: Check feed counter U905: Replace every
(302MV9415*) 300K
4-315
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PARTS HOLDER CL RE RE RE CL: Air blow or dry wipe

RETARD ASSY SP
(302MV9416*)
ROLLER CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol

REGISTRATION
(303M89411*)
PULLEY CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol

REGISTRATION (X5)
(303M82422*)
DP convey/switchback section
200 400 600

ROLLER CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
CONVEYING A
(303M82405*)
PULLEY CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

CONVEYING BK X5
(303M82421*)
ROLLER CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

CONVEYING B
(303M82406*)

CONVEYING BK X5
(303M82421*)
ROLLER LOOP CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303M82910*)

CONVEYING BK X4
(303M82421*)
ROLLER EXIT CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303M82801*)
PULLEY EJECT CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303M82804*) X2
GUIDE READING CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303M82415*)
DP Others
200 400 600

(303JC0420*)
IMPORTANT
4-316
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Paper feeder (PF-7100) (Optional)

Set up
Parts/Location ery Conform to main unit cycle
PAPER LINE CH ------
AD
Appearance/Cover
OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
Paper feed/convey
PARTS PULLEY SET CL CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material
SP RE CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace
(302ND9470*) every 300K
PARTS ROLLER CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

RETARD ASSY SP no replacement)
(302ND9435*)
PULLEY FEED CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

(302N40603*) no replacement)
PARTS PULLEY CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

PICKUP SP no replacement)
(302ND9434*)
PARTS ROLLER CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

FEED LOW SP
(302ND9436*)
Conveying guides CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
PF drive section/Others
Clutches CL CL Check paper path timing and condition at
Sensors CH CH Dry wipe or air blow on receptor or of optical

sensor.
IMPORTANT
4-317
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Set up
AD
Appearance/Cover
Paper feed/convey
PARTS PULLEY SET CL CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material
SP RE CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace
(302ND9470*) every 300K
PARTS ROLLER CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

RETARD ASSY SP no replacement)
(302ND9435*)
PULLEY FEED CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

(302N40603*) no replacement)
PARTS PULLEY CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (In case of

PICKUP SP no replacement)
(302ND9434*)

FEED LOW SP
(302ND9436*)

FEED LOWER SP
(303RC9407*)
PF drive section/Others
Clutches CH CH Check paper path timing and condition at

sensor.
IMPORTANT
4-318
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Set up
AD
Appearance/Cover
Paper feed/convey
PULLEY FEED CL CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(302K90635*) RE CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace
every 300K
PULLEY RETARD CL CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material

every 300K
PULLEY PICKUP CL CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material

every 300K
PARTS ROLLER CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

ASSIST SP
(303NG9406*)
CLUTCH 50 Z35R CH CH Check paper path timing and condition at

(302KV4404*) RE feed/convey section.
Others
sensor twice.
IMPORTANT
4-319
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)Attachment Kit (AK-7110) (Optional)

Appearance/Cover
Parts/Location ery Conform to main unit
counts
OUTER COVERS CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
BR conveying section
counts

FEED A SP
(303RG9402*)

FEED C SP
(303RG9404*)
PULLEYS CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
GUIDES CH CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material
IMPORTANT
4-320
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9)Inner Finisher (DF-7100) (Optional)

Appearance/Cover
counts
Cover, Tray CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
DF convey/exit section
counts
ROLLER FEED CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(303RD2401*)

UPPER
(303RD0702*)
ROLLER CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

CONVEYING X2
(303RD2402*)
PULLEY MIDDLE A CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(302H72276*)
ROLLER MIDDLE CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303RD3611*)
PULLEY MIDDLE CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303NB3666*) X2
PULLEY PAPER CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

FEED X2
(3BR0704*)
PULLEY EXIT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303RD3613*) X2

ONEWAYCLUTCH X2
(303RD3618*)
STATIC- CH CH: Remove dust from brush.

ELIMINATOR EJECT X2
CENTER
(303NB3650*)

ELIMINATOR EJECT X2
(303RD3620*)
4-321
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Sensors
counts
SENSOR OPT CL CL: Air blow
(7NXPSR11GD6MH0
1)

UPPER
(7NXPS124GD1+H0
1)

(7NXSG2A241++H0
1)
IMPORTANT
4-322
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10)Punch Unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) (Optional)

Appearance/Cover
counts
Sensors
counts
SENSOR OPT. CL CL: Air blow
(7NXPS133GD1+H0
1)

(7NXSG2A241++H0 X3
1)
SENSOR CL CL: Air blow

A,SEPARATION
(303H32746_)

(7NXKB1281AA2H01
)
IMPORTANT
4-323
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Appearance/Cover
counts
counts
LOWER
(303RW0701*)

UPPER
(303RW0703*)

(303RW3601*)

(303NB3666*) X2
ROLLER EXIT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303NB3634*)

(303NB3620*) X2
ROLLER SUB CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

CONVEYING
(303RW2404*)
ROLLER SUB EXIT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303RW2405*)
PULLEY SUB EJECT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303B81702*) X2
PULLEY SUB EJECT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303NB2431*) X4
STATIC CH CH: Remove dust from brush.

ELIMINATOR EJECT
(6321221*)

ELIMINATOR EJECT
CENTER
(303NB3650*)

ELIMINATOR EJECT X2
SIDE
(303NB3649*)

ELIMINATOR EJECT
(303NB2430*)
4-324
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DF Sensors
counts

X2
(7NXPS133GD1+H
01)

X16
(7NXSG2A141++H
01)
(7NXSG2A241++H
01)
SENSOR A, CL CL: Air blow

SEPARATION
(303H32746*)
(7NXKB1281AA2H
01)
(7NXPSR11GD6F
H01)
IMPORTANT
4-325
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Appearance/Cover
counts
counts
LOWER
(303RW0701*)

UPPER
(303RW0703*)

(303RW3601*)

(303NB3666*) X2
ROLLER EXIT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303NB3634*)

(303NB3620*) X2

ELIMINATOR EJECT
(6321221*)

ELIMINATOR EJECT
CENTER
(303NB3650*)

ELIMINATOR EJECT X2
SIDE
(303NB3649*)
4-326
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DF Sensors
counts

X2
(7NXPS133GD1+H
01)

X8
(7NXSG2A141++H
01)
(7NXSG2A241++H
01)
SENSOR A, CL CL: Air blow

SEPARATION
(303H32746*)
(7NXKB1281AA2H
01)
(7NXPSR11GD6F
H01)
IMPORTANT
4-327
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Appearance/Cover
counts
counts
EJECT SP
(303ND9403*)

EJECT 3 FOLD UP
SP
(303ND9404*)
BRUSH PAPER EJ CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

REGIST

FEED IN SP
(303ND9402*)

BRIDGE LOW S X2
(303ND9409*)
PARTS ROLLER Wipe with alcohol or dry material

BRIDGE UP SP
(303ND9408*)
PULLEY DU LOW CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (Puller for

exit guide)
X2
PULLEY MIDDLE CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (Puller for

exit guide)
X2
PULLEY FEED IN CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (Fold

entrance section)
X4
PULLEY, EJECT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (Fold

entrance section)
X4
RUBBER FEED IN CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (Rubber of

fold entrance section)
X4

X4
4-328
[CONFIDENTIAL]
BF center fold section

counts
PRESS A SP
(303ND9405*)

PRESS B SP
(303ND9406*)

PRESS C SP
(303ND9407*)
BF Sensors
counts
PARTS SENSOR CL Air blow
OPT SP X8
(303M89426*)
PARTS SENSOR CL Air blow

OPT SP X2
(303NW9406*)
IMPORTANT
4-329
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14)Mailbox (MT-730(B)) (Optional)

Appearance/Cover
counts
MT convey/exit section
counts
CONVEYING X3
(303LW9401*)

EJECT A X6
(303LW9402*)

EJECT C SP
(303N09402*)
IMPORTANT
4-330
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15)Punch Unit (PH-7A/B/C/D) (Optional)

PH convey/exit section
counts
GEAR 40 CAM LU Lubricate EM-50LP on gear.
DRIVE (PN 7BG010009H GREASE MOLYKOTE EM-
(303H41611*) 50LP 50G)
GEAR 16-51 IDLE LU Lubricate EM-50LP on gear.

(303H41612*) (PN 7BG010009H GREASE MOLYKOTE EM-
50LP 50G)
PARTS MOTOR-PM LU Lubricate EM-50LP on gear.

MOVING SP (PN 7BG010009H GREASE MOLYKOTE EM-
(303NB9404*) 50LP 50G)
PH Sensors
counts
SENSOR FEED B CL CL: Air blow or dry wipe
(303H32750*)
IMPORTANT
4-331
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(16)100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130) (Optional)

Appearance/Cover
Parts/Location ery Conform to main unit counts
counts
ROLLER FEED LOW CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(303S80705_)
ROLLER FEED UP CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303S80703_)

FEED LOW
(303S83657_)

(302H72276_) x2

FEED B x2
(303S83667_)

UPPER
(303S83626_)

FEED x2
(303S83654_)
PULLEY EJECT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

ROLLER x4
(303S82846_)

CONVEYING
(303S82604_)
PULLEY FEED CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303S82429_) x2

EJECT
(303S82602_)

(303NB3666_) x4
ROLLER CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

SIDETRACK
(303S82413_)

ELIMINATOR x2
(303S80711_)
4-332
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ELIMINATOR x2
CURSOR
(303JY3722_)

ELIMINATOR SUB
EJECT
(303NB2430_)
DF Sensors
counts
(7NXPS133GD1+H0 x4
1)

(7NXPS124GD1+H0
1)

(7NXSG2A241++H0 x21
1
)
SENSOR CL x2
A,SEPARATION
(303H32746_)

(7NXKB1281AA2H01 x2
)

(7NXPSR11GD6FH0
1)
PWB SENSOR C CL CL: Air blow

ASSY
(303R10104_)
PWB SENSOR D CL CL: Air blow

ASSY
(303R10105_)
IMPORTANT
4-333
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Appearance/Cover
counts
counts
ROLLER EJECT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(303SP2816_)
ROLLER EJECT 3 CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

FOLD
(303SP2817_)
BRUSH PAPER EJ CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

REGIST X2
(303ND2830_)
ROLLER FEED IN CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303SP2409_)
ROLLER BRIDGE CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

LOW
(303SP3704_)
ROLLER BRIDGE CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

UP
(303SP3703_)
PULLEY DU LOW CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(302F92926_) X2
PULLEY CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

CONVEYING X2
(303JX2916_)
PULLEY FEED IN CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303SP2401_) X4
RUBBER FEED IN CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303ND2424_) X6

(302H72276_) X4
SHEET PADDLE CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303PX3670_) X2
SHEET PADDLE CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303SP2414_) X2
4-334
[CONFIDENTIAL]
BELT EJECT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

CONVEYING X4
(303SP2855_)
DISCHARGER CL CH: Remove dust from brush.

GUIDE UP
(303JY3740_)
BF center fold section

counts
ROLLER PRESS A CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(303SP3101_)
ROLLER PRESS B CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303SP3102_)
ROLLER PRESS C CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

(303SP3103_)
BLADE MID CH/ CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material

PRESSING RE CH: Replace it if there is deformation, bet, etc.
(303SP2482_)
BF Sensors
counts
SENSOR OPT. CL Air blow
(7NXSG2A141++H0 X3
1
)

(7NXPS133GD1+H0 X3
1)

(7NXSG2A241++H0 X6
1)
IMPORTANT
4-335
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
5 Firmware
5 - 1 Firmware update
Execute the following to update the firmware below.
*The processing time is reduced with parallel processing by group.
5-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[GROUP 1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Controller Package DL_PKG_CTRL.2V8 (High) CPKG
DL_PKG_CTRL.2VG (Low)
Product Line Platform DL_CTRL_PLP.2V8 (High) PLP

DL_CTRL_PLP.2VG (Low)
Common Basic App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN.2V8 (High) CMN

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN.2VG (Low)
System Setting App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_SST.2V8 (High) SST

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_SST.2VG (Low)
Maintenance App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_MNT.2V8 (High) MNT

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_MNT.2VG (Low)
Copy App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_CPY.2V8 (High) CPY

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_CPY.2VG (Low)
Print App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_PRT.2V8 (High) PRT

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_PRT.2VG (Low)
Send App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_SND.2V8 (High) SND

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_SND.2VG (Low)
Box App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_BOX.2V8 (High) BOX

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_BOX.2VG (Low)
Fax App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_FAX.2V8 (High) SFAX

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_FAX.2VG (Low)
Web Page App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_WPG.2V8 (High) WPG

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_WPG.2VG (Low)
Auth App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_AUTH.2V8 (High) AUTH

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_AUTH.2VG (Low)
External Print App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_EPRT.2V8 EPRT

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_EPRT.2VG (Low)
Panel Control System App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS.2V8 (High) PCS

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS.2VG (Low)
Service Cooperation App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_SCO.2V8 (High) SCO

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_SCO.2VG (Low)
Extension Service Platform DL_CTRL_EXSP.2V8 (High) EXSP

DL_CTRL_EXSP.2VG (Low)
Package Version Info DL_CTRL_VINF.2V8 (High) VINF

DL_CTRL_VINF.2VG (Low)
1 Option Language Data DL_OPT.2V8 OPT
1 Color Table Data (Printer1) DL_PCLT1.2V8 (High) P-CLUT1

DL_PCLT1.2VG (Low)
1 Color Table Data (Printer2) DL_PCLT2.2V8 (High) P-CLUT2

DL_PCLT2.2VG (Low)
1 Color Table Data (Copy1) DL_CCLT1.2V8 (High) C-CLUT1

DL_CCLT1.2VG (Low)
5-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

step
1 Color Table Data (Copy2) DL_CCLT2.2V8 (High) C-CLUT2
DL_CCLT2.2VG (Low)
1 OCR Dictionary Data DL_OCR.2V8 OCR
Each FW-Update targets in Group 1 are updated by Parallel Update method.
[GROUP2 UPDATE]
step
1t FAX Board DL_FAX.3R2 FAX1,2
[GROUP 3 UPDATE]
step
1 Engine Firmware DL_ENGN.2V8 (High) ENGN
DL_ENGN.2VG (Low)
2 Paper Feeder Main (500*2) DL_03RB.2ND PF-UNDER
3 Large Capacity Feeder (3000) DL_03RB.2ND PF-UNDER
4 Paper Feeder Side Deck DL_03RL.2ND PF-SIDE
5 100-staple Document Finisher DL_03SW.2V8 STP-DF
6 100-staple Document Finisher Booklet DL_03SP.2TJ BKLT-ADV
7 100-staple Document Finisher (Sub) DL_M3S8.2TJ SUB-DF
8 3000/4000 Document Finisher Main DL_03RW.2ND DF
9 3000/4000 Document Finisher Mail Box DL_03N0.2ND MAIL-BOX
10 Document Finisher Simple (1000) DL_03RW.2ND DF
11 4000 Document Finisher Booklet DL_03ND.2ND BOOKLET
12 3000 Document Finisher Punch Unit DL_03NK.2RH P-UNIT
13 Inner Document Finisher DL_03RD.2ND INNER-DF
14 Inner Punch DL_03RF.2ND INNER-PU
15 Document Processor Main (with multi-feed DL_03SR.2V8 DP-MFD

detection)
16 Document Processor Main (CIS) DL_03R8.2ND DP-CIS
17 Document Processor Main (REV) DL_03R7.2ND DP-REV
18 Document Processor Main (LOW) DL_03RJ.2ND DP-LOW
[GROUP 4 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available.

[GROUP 5 UPDATE]
step
1 Sub Panel Board (Sub Panel) DL_SPNL.2V8 SPNL
Sub Panel Board (Configuration File) DL_SPCF.2V8 (High) SPCF
5-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Verify the signature at firmware update

Verify the signature of the update file to prevent the firmware update with illegally falsified data.
File names of the signature and firmware certificate
Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file name
Product Line Platform 2V8_CTRL_PLP_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_PLP_cert.pem (High)
2VG_CTRL_PLP_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_PLP_cert.pem (Low)
Common Basic App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN_cert.pem (Low)
System Setting App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_SST_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_SST_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_SST_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_SST_cert.pem (Low)
Maintenance App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_MNT_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_MNT_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_MNT_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_MNT_cert.pem (Low)
Copy App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_PRT_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_PRT_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_PRT_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_PRT_cert.pem (Low)
Print App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_cert.pem (Low)
Send App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_cert.pem (Low)
Box App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_BOX_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_BOX_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_BOX_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_BOX_cert.pem (Low)
Fax App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_FAX_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_FAX_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_FAX_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_FAX_cert.pem (Low)
Web Page App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_WPG_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_WPG_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_WPG_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_WPG_cert.pem (Low)
Auth App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_AUTH_sign.bin 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_AUTH_cert.pem

(High) (High)
2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_AUTH_sign.bin 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_AUTH_cert.pem
(Low) (Low)
External Print App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_EPRT_sign.bin 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_EPRT_cert.pem

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_EPRT_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_EPRT_cert.pem
(Low)
Panel Control System App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS_cert.pem (Low)
Service Cooperation App 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_SCO_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_STDAPP_SCO_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_SCO_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_STDAPP_SCO_cert.pem (Low)
Extension Service Platform 2V8_CTRL_EXSP_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_EXSP_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_EXSP_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_EXSP_cert.pem (Low)
Package Version Info 2V8_CTRL_VINF_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CTRL_VINF_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CTRL_VINF_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CTRL_VINF_cert.pem (Low)
Option Language Data 2V8_OPT_sign.bin 2V8_OPT_cert.pem
Color Table Data (Printer1) 2V8_PCLT1_sign.bin (High) 2V8_PCLT1_cert.pem (High)

2VG_PCLT1_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_PCLT1_cert.pem (Low)
Color Table Data (Printer2) 2V8_PCLT2_sign.bin (High) 2V8_PCLT2_cert.pem (High)

2VG_PCLT2_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_PCLT2_cert.pem (Low)
5-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file name

Color Table Data (Copy1) 2V8_CCLT1_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CCLT1_cert.pem (High)
2VG_CCLT1_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CCLT1_cert.pem (Low)
Color Table Data (Copy2) 2V8_CCLT2_sign.bin (High) 2V8_CCLT2_cert.pem (High)

2VG_CCLT2_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_CCLT2_cert.pem (Low)
OCR Dictionary Data 2V8_OCR_sign.bin 2V8_OCR_cert.pem
FAX Board 3R2_FAX_sign.bin 3R2_FAX_cert.pem
Engine Firmware 2V8_ENGN_sign.bin (High) 2V8_ENGN_cert.pem (High)

2VG_ENGN_sign.bin (Low) 2VG_ENGN_cert.pem (Low)
Paper Feeder Main (500*2) 2ND_03RB_sign.bin 2ND_03RB_cert.pem
Large Capacity Feeder 2ND_03RB_sign.bin 2ND_03RB_cert.pem

(3000)
Paper Feeder Side Deck 2ND_03RL_sign.bin 2ND_03RL_cert.pem
100-staple Document 2VG_03SW_sign.bin 2VG_03SW_cert.pem

Finisher
100-staple Document 2TJ_03SP_sign.bin 2TJ_03SP_cert.pem

Finisher Booklet
100-staple Document 2TJ_M3S8_sign.bin 2TJ_M3S8_cert.pem

Finisher (Sub)
3000/4000 Document 2ND_03RW_sign.bin 2ND_03RW_cert.pem

Finisher Main
3000/4000 Document 2ND_03N0_sign.bin 2ND_03N0_cert.pem

Finisher Mail Box
Document Finisher Simple 2ND_03RW_sign.bin 2ND_03RW_cert.pem

(1000)
4000 Document Finisher 2ND_03RL_sign.bin 2ND_03ND_cert.pem

Booklet
3000 Document Finisher 2RH_03NK_sign.bin 2RH_03NK_cert.pem

Punch Unit
Inner Document Finisher 2ND_03RD_sign.bin 2ND_03RD_cert.pem
Inner Punch 2ND_03RF_sign.bin 2ND_03RF_cert.pem
Document Processor Main 2V8_03SR_sign.bin 2V8_03SR_cert.pem

(with multi-feed detection)
Document Processor Main 2ND_03R8_sign.bin 2ND_03R8_cert.pem

(CIS)
Document Processor Main 2ND_03R7_sign.bin 2ND_03R7_cert.pem

(REV)
Document Processor Main 2ND_03RJ_sign.bin 2ND_03RJ_cert.pem

(LOW)
Sub Panel Board (Sub 2ND_SPNL_sign.bin 2ND_SPNL_cert.pem

Panel)
Sub Panel Board 2ND_SPCF_sign.bin (High) 2ND_SPCF_cert.pem (High)

(Configuration File)
5-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Note for upgrading the firmware

In case that a USB drive takes time to get ready , the time may be longer than the main unit starts up and fail firmware
update mode.
Maintenance mode U025 firmware update (S): Execute the firmware upgrade at Firmware Update (Security)
Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file (skip files:
ES_SKIP.ON) to “FWUP_02V8” (*1) or “FWUP_02VG” (*2) folder that is made in the root folder of the USB drive.
* The high-speed master file has the same version firmware update skip.
*1: High-end Model, *2: Low-end model
1 After turning the power switch (a) on and the screen is properly displayed, turn the
power switch (a) off.
2 Insert the USB drive (b) with the firmware into the USB drive slot and turn the power
switch (a) on.
c
b
a
• Several kinds of firmware updates are processed in parallel.
• "Completed" comes up as the firmware update is complete.
5-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Check if the new firmware versions are displayed.
• In case of no corresponding master file, "No Change" is displayed.

“*“ is displayed after the firmware version update that has been skipped.
• “----------” is displayed when the FAX PWB, the option equipment, etc. is not installed.
In case of an error
5-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• When an error occurs during the firmware upgrade, the process is immediately interrupted and the error code
and error message come up.
Error Error content Error Error content
code code
0000 Other S000 Other signature verification error *1
0100 No Master file S001 Signature verification file is inadequate
0200 Version mismatch of the master file N001 Network connection failed. *2
(There is no upgrade target interrupted)
03xx No Download File (No.xx)
04xx File (No.xx) Checksum mismatch N002 Network connection failed. *3

(There is an upgrade target interrupted)
05xx File (No.xx) Preparation failure
06xx File (No.xx) Oversize
08xx File (No.xx) Writing failure
The file numbers in this table are for “xx” in the error codes.
File Target File Target

number number
01 Product Line Platform 09 Fax App
02 Common Basic App 10 Web Page App
03 System Setting App 11 Auth App
04 Maintenance App 12 External Print App
05 Copy App 13 Panel Control System App
06 Print App 15 Service Cooperation App
07 Send App 16 Extension Service Platform
08 Box App 17 Package Version Info
*1: Including the expired FM certificate

*2: Automatically restarted for the normal start-up since the normal start-up is available next time.
*3: Transferred to the USB upgrade mode instead of the automatic restart since the normal start-up may not be available next
time.
Indication of the signature verification result
Official signature verification file Indicate the result
Both certificate and signature files exist and verification is successful. Version number
Both certificate and signature files exist but verification is unsuccessful. S000
Neither certificate nor signature files exist. S001

Or either of them does not exist.
1 Unplug the power cord and disconnect the USB memory.
2 Plug in the power cord and turn the power switch (a) on.
3 Check that the "Home" screen is displayed and then turn the power switch (a) off.
IMPORTANT
Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB drive (b) during the firmware update.
5-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Safe-Update
When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB memory during the firmware
update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power on again while the USB memory is installed.
* The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.
5-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6 Maintenance mode
6 - 1 Maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1)Execute the maintenance mode
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the >ȁ@>9@ keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the >ȁ@>9@ keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
6-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Maintenance modes list

Section Maintenance item Outline
General U000 Printing Maintenance Report Print the reports and export them to a USB drive.
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Exit from the maintenance mode
U002 Set Factory Default Initialize to the factory-default setting
U003 Setting the telephone number of the Set the telephone number of the service person.
service person
U004 Machine Number Display the machine serial number and setting
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID Set the maintenance mode ID
U018 Firmware self verification Check the firmware falsification.
U019 Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the PWB
Initializati U021 Initializes Memory Initialize the backup RAM

on
U024 Formatting an HDD Format the HDD
U025 Firmware update (S) Update the firmware
U026 Retrieve the backup data Retrieve the backup data
Drive U030 Motor operation check Drive the drive motor

Paper
U031 Check the conveying switch Check the conveying switch On/Off
feed
Conveyin U032 Clutch operation check Check the paper conveying clutch operation
g
U033 Solenoid operation check Drive the paper conveying and toner supply solenoids
Cooling
U034 Paper timing data adjustment Adjust the lead edge timing and the center line
U035 Folio size setting Set the Folio paper length and width.
U037 fan operation check Drive each fan.
U051 Registration paper loop amount Adjust the paper loop level between the rollers
adjustment
U053 Adjusting the motor speed Set speed correction of each motor
U059 Fan mode setting Set the drive mode of the conveying fan
Optical U061 Lamp lighting check Turn on the exposure
U063 Shading position adjustment Change the scanner shading position
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table Adjust the magnification for table scanning
scanning
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing Adjust the lead edge timing for table scanning
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center Adjust the center line for table scanning
line
U068 DP scanning position adjustment Adjust the starting position for DP scanning
U070 DP magnification adjustment Adjust the magnification for DP scanning
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Adjust the DP scan timing

Timing
U072 Adjusting the DP original center Adjust the center line for DP scanning
U073 Scanner motor operation check Scan in the specific condition
6-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Optical U074 Adjusting the DP input Set the image density correction for scanning
characteristics
U087 Setting the DP scanning position Change the scanning position as the corrective measure for the
change operation black lines
U089 MIP-PG chart output Output MIP-PG chart
U091 void lines correction setting Set the void lines detection threshold
U099 Original size detection setting Check the original size detection and set the detection threshold
High U100 Main high voltage adjustment Adjust the drum surface potential
voltage
system U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment Set and output the primary transfer bias voltage
U106 Secondary transfer voltage Set the secondary transfer bias voltage correction
adjustment
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage Set the transfer belt cleaning bias voltage
adjustment
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment Set the transfer belt unit cleaning control voltage
U110 Drum counter Display the drum counter
U115 LSU driving time Display the LSU drive time
U117 Drum unit number Display the drum number
U118 Drum unit history Display the drum history
U119 Setting the drum Set the initial LSU laser power
U120 Drum drive distance counter Display the distance counter of drum
U122 Display the primary transfer unit Display the primary transfer unit number
number
U123 Primary transfer unit history Display the machine number and the primary transfer unit counter
history
U127 Clearing the transfer count Display the transfer count
U128 Transfer timing adjustment Adjust the transfer high-voltage output ON/OFF timing
Develope U131 Toner sensor control voltage Adjust the toner sensor control voltage
r system adjustment
U132 Forcible toner supply operation Execute the toner supply into the toner control level
U135 Checking the toner motor operation Drive the toner motor
U136 Toner level detection setting Set the number of printable pages at toner near end
U139 Temperature, humidity Display internal/external temperature and humidity
U140 Developer bias adjustment Adjust the developer bias values or set the high altitude mode.
U147 Setting the toner applying mode Set the removal mode of overcharge toner
U148 Drum refresh mode setting Set auto drum refresh
U155 Toner sensor output Display the toner sensor output
U156 Toner control level adjustment Display/Set the toner empty level
U157 Developer drive time Display/Set the developer drive time
U158 Developer counter Display/Set the developer counter
U159 Toner container function setting Set the toner container lock and waste toner box
6-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Fuser U161 Fuser temperature adjustment Set the control temperature of fuser unit
U164 Fuser unit history Display the machine number and the fuser unit history
U165 Fuser unit number Display the fuser unit number
U167 Clearing the fuser count Display/Clear the counts
U169 Setting the fuser power source Display/Set the IH PWB control voltage
U193 Fuser drive control setting Change fuser drive control setting
U197 Fuser control setting Set the fuser control
U199 Fuser temperature Monitor the fuser temperature
Operatio U200 All LEDs lighting Light all the LEDs on the operation panel
n
section/ U201 Initializing the touch screen Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch screen
Support
U203 Check DP operation Check the DP paper conveying operation
Equipme
nt U204 Key card/key counter setting Key card/Key counter connection setting
U206 Set the coin vendor Set the coin vendor
U207 Operation key check Check the operation panel key
U208 Setting the paper size for the side Set the paper size of side deck
feeder
U211 Enhancement unit connection Set the connection of the enhancement units
setting
U221 USB host lock function setting Set USB Host lock function ON/OFF
U222 Setting the IC card type Set the ID card type
U223 Operation panel lock Set On/Off of the operation unit lock
U224 Setting Original Panel Display Set the opening screen
U230 Optional device serial number Display the optional device serial number
U234 Setting destination for punch Set the punch destination
U237 Finisher eject volume limit Set the main tray stack capacity
U240 Finisher operation check Check the drive operation
U241 Finisher switch check Check the switch operation
U243 Checking the DP motor Drive the PF motor and solenoid
U244 DP switch check Drive the DP sensor
U246 Finisher adjustment Set the finisher adjustment value
U247 Paper feed operation check Drives the PF motor and clutch
Mode U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set Change the preset value
Setting
U251 clearing the maintenance counter Display/Clear/Change the counter value
U252 Destination Set the machine operation and indication to the specification of the
destination
U253 Switching the double/single counts Set the double count by paper size
U260 Switching the timing for copy Set the count up timing
counting
6-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Mode U265 Setting by destination Set the OEM code
Setting
U271 Setting the page count unit Set the long paper count unit
U276 Switching the copy count mode Set the single color copy count mode
U278 Delivery date setting Register delivery date
U283 China Red Setting Set China Red
U284 Setting the 2-color copy Switch the 2-color copy function mode
U285 Set Service Status Page Set the contents of Service status page
U286 Optional language setting Add/Delete/Change the optional language
U287 Automatic recovery function Set the auto recover function
U323 Abnormal temperature and Switch the indication mode of the abnormal temperature/humidity
humidity notification setting detection
U326 Cassette heater control setting Select the cassette heater control setting
U332 Adjusting the black coverage Set the coefficient of the custom size
coefficient
U335 Paper interval setting Set the print interval in high coverage
U336 Black line cleaning indication Set the cleaning guidance
U339 Drum heater ON mode setting Set the drum heater
U340 Setting the applied mode Set the memory allocation
U341 Printer cassette setting Set the cassette to printer output only
U343 Duplex priority mode Switch the duplex printing priority mode
U345 Setting the value for maintenance Set the maintenance timing display
due indication
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Set the BAM related sleep mode
Image U402 margin adjustment Adjust the scan image margins

processi
ng U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjust the margin for scanning originals
original on the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjust the margin for scanning originals
original from the document processor
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/ Adjust the write timing for 180 degree rotation copy
Reversal)
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Execute auto halftone adjustment and retrieve correction data
U411 Scanner auto adjustment Execute auto scanner/DP adjustment
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (High- Correct the image density unevenness from LSU
end model only)
U415 Adjusting the print position Execute the auto print position adjustment
automatically
U425 Set Target Input the Lab value on the adjustment original
U429 Adjusting the color balance offset Adjust the color balance offset
U460 Sensor adjustment Correct the threshold of multi feed sensor in DP
6-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Image U464 ID correction setting Set the ID correction
processi
ng U465 ID correction data Display the control value of laser power after the ID correction
U467 Color registration correction Set the color registration correction

operation setting
U468 Color registration correction data Display the color registration correction data
U469 Primary transfer unit initial setting Set the primary transfer unit
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate Set the JPEG compression rate
U474 Checking the LSU cleaning Check the LSU cleaning operation and Set the cleaning cycle
U485 Image process mode setting Set the image processing
U486 Color/BW mode setting Set the productivity or color/bw mixed original
U520 Remote Service Setting Set the remote service
FAX U600 Initialize: All Data Initialize all data and image memory.
U601 Initialize: Keep data Initialize the software switches of other than the machine data
U603 User data 1 Set the fax user
U604 User data 2 Set the fax user
U605 Data clear Initialize the FAX communication data
U610 System 1 Set the number of scrap lines in actual size receiving or auto size
reduction.
U611 System 2 Set the number of adjustment lines for auto size reduction.
U612 System 3 Set the FAX communication operation
U615 System 6 Set the printing size and receiving image size
U620 FAX system Set the signal detection method for remote switching
U625 Communication settings Set the auto redialing interval and number
U630 Communication control procedures Set the FAX communication

1

2

3

4
U634 Communication control procedures Set the acceptable error for TCF signal
5
U640 Communication time setting 1 Set the detection time by remote switching mode
U641 Communication time setting 2 Set the time-out for the fax communication
U650 Modem 1 Set the G3 transmission cable equalizer
U651 Modem 2 Set the modem output level
U660 Call Setting Set the NCU (network control unit)
U670 List output Output the fax communication data list
U671 FAX backup data clear Clear the FAX backup data
6-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]

FAX U695 FAX function customization Set the batch transmission
U698 Setting the maintenance port Set the applicable port
U699 Software switch: Set Set the software switches individually
Others U901 Clearing the counters by paper Display/Clear the counters by paper source
source
U903 Clearing the jam counter Display/Clear number of jam by the trigger code
U904 Clearing the service call error Display/Clear the service call error and system error counts
counter
U905 Optional counter Display the counts
U906 Resetting the partial operation Reset the failure isolation
U908 Total counter Display the FAX count
U910 Black rate data Clear the print coverage data and period
U911 Counter by media type Display/Clear the counts by media type
U917 Read/Write Backup Data Read/Write the backup data to USB drive
U920 Billing counter Display the billing count
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters Clear the billing count and machine life count
U928 Machine life counter Display the machine life count
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts Display/Set the MC roller count
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log Set the maintenance mode log
U942 DP loop amount setting Adjust the paper loop level in DP
U952 Maintenance mode workflow Execute the work flow for maintenance
U964 Retrieve Log Flow Transfer the log files from HDD to USB drive.
U977 Setting the data capture mode Store the data sent to the main unit into USB drive
U984 Developer unit number Display the developer unit number
U985 Developer unit history Display the developer unit number history
U989 HDD scan disk Execute the HDD scan disk
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time Display the accumulated DP CIS lighting time
U991 Scanner counter Display the scanner count
6-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Content of the maintenance mode

U000 Printing Maintenance Report
(Message: Output Maintenance Report)
Contents
Print the list of the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error. Output the event
log and service status page.
Also, sends output data to USB drive.
Purpose
Check the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup memory, print the list of the current settings of the maintenance items to
reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
2 Select the item to output.

Items Output list
Maintenance Maintenance mode setting list
User Status Output User Status Page
Service Status Output Service Status Page
Event Output the event log report
Network Status Output Network Status Page
Fax System Config *1

Print the list of local telephone number, confidential boxes, firmware versions
Fax Action List *1 Output error history and commutation line list
Fax Self Status *1 Output the maintenance mode and fax settings
Fax Protocol List *1 Output the fax protocol list
Fax Error List *1 Output error list
Configuration List Output setting information list
LLU Report Output LLU report
All All reports output
*1: Only if fax is installed
3 Press [Start] key and output the list.
NOTE
If A4/Letter paper is available, it is output with this size. Select an alternative cassette in case of missing A4 or
Letter paper size. Outputting status is displayed.
Method: when sending output data to USB drive
2 Insert USB drive into the USB drive slot.
3 Select the item to send.
6-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Select [USB(Text)] or [USB(HTML)].

Items Output list
Print Print the reports
USB(Text) Destination: Send to USB drive (Text format)
USB(HTML) Destination: Send to USB drive (HTML format)

The data is sent to the USB drive.
NOTE
LLU Report data can not be transfered to the USB drive. Only print out is available.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detail of Unit History Report
Unit History Report

MFP ZF4860XXXX
TASKalfa 6053ci 2019/03/25 15:15
Firmware version 2V8_S000.001.241 2019.03.25 [2V8_1000.001.002] [2ND_1100.001.007]
Machine No.:ZF4860XXXX Total Life Count:100000 Color Life Count:50000
(1) Drum Unit Serial/Counter/History

Cyan: (2) FR500Z6XXXXX (3) 55000 (4) ZF4860XXXX (5) 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
Serial/Counter/History
Magenta: FR500Z6XXXXX 55000 ZF4860XXXX 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
Yellow: FR500Z6XXXXX 55000 ZF4860XXXX 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
Black: FR500Z6XXXXX 90000 ZF4860XXXX 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
6-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Unit History Report

MFP ZF4860XXXX
TASKalfa 6053ci 2019/03/25 15:15
Develop Unit Serial/Counter/History

Cyan: FR200Z6XXXXX 55000 ZF4860XXXX 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
Magenta: FR100Z6XXXXX 55000 ZF4860XXXX 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
Yellow: FR300Z6XXXXX 55000 ZF4860XXXX 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
Black: FQZ00Z6XXXXX 90000 ZF4860XXXX 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
6-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Unit History Report

MFP ZF4860XXXX
TASKalfa 6053ci 2019/03/25 15:15
Transfer Unit Serial/Counter/History

FR700Z6XXXXX 90000 ZF4860XXXX 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
Fuser Unit Serial/Counter/History
FR900Z6XXXXX 90000 ZF4860XXXX 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
------------------------ 0 --------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
--------------------- 0
(6) Charger roller Unit Counter
Cyan: 10000
Magenta: 10000
Yellow: 10000
Black: 20000
(7) System
Counter: 36/0
Version: 2KV_D100.003.001/-/-/-/-/-
(8) RP Code
0009 0C08 CXXX
0009 0C08 CYYY
0009 0C08 CXXX
0009 0C08 CYYY
6-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Contents of Unit History Report

No. Title Contents
1 Unit Name Name of the unit
2 Unit Serial number Unit serial number that is actually installed (Was installed in the past) (Descending order:
Serial no. of 3 history information) (The top is the latest)
3 Unit counter value Unit counter value that is actually installed (Was installed in the past) (For the past unit, the
counter value at the time of replacement)
4 Main unit serial Main unit serial number that the unit is installed (Descending order: 3 history information of
number the unit installation)
5 Unit counter value Unit counter value when start using the unit with the applicable main unit
6 Charger roller unit Charger roller unit counter value that is actually installed
counter value
7 Boot count, Sample Display reset count/sample set count/various type of the version
set count, etc.
8 RP code Acquires the last two update dates of the main software version and the engine software
version, encodes them, and displays them
The contents to be displayed are the following in order from the top
-Encoded engine software version and the last updated date
-Encoded main software version and the last updated date
-Encoded engine software version and the one previous updated date
-Encoded main software version and the one previous updated date
6-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detail of event log
Event Log
MFP ZF48600001
TASKalfa 6053ci (2) 2018/07/03 15:15
(1) Firmware version 2V8_S000.001.169 2018.07.17 [2V8_1000.001.001] [2ND_1100.001.007]
(3) (4)
(5) Machine No.:ZF48600001 (6)Total Life Count:100000 (7) Color Life Count:100000
(8) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time
12 55555( 5558) 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
11 44444( 4448) 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
10 33333( 3338) 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
9 22222( 2228) 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
8 111111( 1118) 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
7 9999( 998) 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 8888( 888) 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5
4
7777( 778)
6666( 668) 0501.01.08.01.00
4002.01.08.01
0501.01.08.01
2014/02/12 17:30
2014/02/12 17:30
3 5555( 558)(a) (b) (c) (d)
4002.01.08.01 (e) 2014/02/12 17:30
2 4444( 448) 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
1 3333( 338) 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
(9) Service Call Log

# Count. Service Code Data and Time
8 111111( 1118) 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30
7 9999( 998) 01.01.2100 2014/02/12 17:30
6 8888( 888) 01.01.0000 2014/02/12 17:30
5 7777( 778) 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30
4 6666( 668) 01.00.2100 2014/02/12 17:30
3 5555( 558) 01.01.4000 2014/02/12 17:30
2 4444( 448) 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30
1 3333( 338) 01.00.2100 2014/02/12 17:30
(10) Maintenance Log

# Count. Item. Data and Time
2 5555( 558) 02.01 2014/02/12 17:30
1 4444( 448) 02.02 2014/02/12 17:30
(11) Toner Log

# Count. Item. Serial Number Data and Time Detail
4 66666( 6668) 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/02/12 17:30 A.000
3 55555( 5558) 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/02/12 17:30 B.010
2 44444( 4448) 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/02/12 17:30 B.100
1 33333( 3338) 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/02/12 17:30 C.029
6-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Event Log
MFP ZF48600001
TASKalfa 6053ci 2018/07/03 15:15
Machine No.:ZF48600001 Total Life Count:100000 Color Life Count:100000
(12) Counter Log

(f) J0000: 0 J4202: 0 J7300: 0
J0100: 1 J4203: 1 J7310: 1
J0101: 11 J4204: 1 J7404: 11
J0104: 22 J4205: 0 J7500: 2
J0105: 1 J4208: 1 J7600: 1
J0106: 1 J4209: 11 J7700 0
J0107: 1 J4211: 2 J7710: 1
J0110: 1 J4212: 2 J7800: 1
J0111: 1 J4213: 1 J7810: 2
J0114: 1 J4214: 2 J7900: 1
J0212: 1 J4215: 1 J7901: 1
J0213: 9 J4218: 1 J7902: 0
J0300: 1 J4219: 9 J9000: 1
J0501: 1 J4301: 1 J9001: 1
J0502: 1 J4302: 1 J9002: 2
J0503: 1 J4303: 1 J9004: 1
J0504: 1 J4304: 1 J9005: 1
J0508: 1 J4305: 1 J9226: 2
J0509: 1 J4309: 1 J9007: 1
J0511: 1 J4311: 1 J9008: 1
J0512: 1 J4312: 1 J9009: 2
J0513: 1 J4313: 1 J9010: 1
J0514: 1 J4314: 1 J9011: 1
J0518: 1 J4315: 1 J9020: 2
J0519: 1 J4319: 1 J9030: 1
J0523: 1 J4401: 1 J9110: 1
J0524: 1 J4402: 1 J9210: 2
J0533: 1 J4403: 1 J9300: 1
J0534: 1 J4404: 1 J9310: 1
J0555: 1 J4405: 1 J9400: 2
J1403: 1 J4409: 1
J1413: 1 J9410: 1
J4701: 1 J9600: 1
J1414: 1
J4702: 1
J1604: 1 J9610: 2
J1614: 1 J4703: 1 (g) C1020: 1
J4002: 1 J4704: 1 CF245: 11( 0)
J4003: 1 J4705: 1 CF248: 12( 0)
J4004: 1 J4709: 1 CF345: 13( 0)
J4005: 1 J4711: 1
(h) T00: 10
J4012: 1 J4712: 1
M00: 20
J4013: 1 J4713: 1
M01: 30
J4014: 1 J4714: 0
J4015: 1 J4715: 1
J4101: 1 J4719: 1
J4102: 1 J4901: 0
J4103: 1 J4902: 1
J4104: 1 J4903: 11
J4105: 1 J4904: 2
J4108: 1 J4905: 1
J4109: 1 J4908: 2
J4111: 1 J4909: 1
J4112: 1 J4911: 2
J4113: 1 J4912: 1
J4114: 1 J4913: 2
6-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Description of event log

No. Contents
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine firmware version
(4) Engine boot version
(5) Machine serial number
(6) Total life counter
(7) Color life counter
6-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Contents
(8) Paper Jam Log
# Count. Event Descriptions Date and

Time
Up to 16 times are recorded. The total page count of paper Log code (5 types in Date and
All jams are displayed If the jam. hexadecimal) time of
last jams are less than 16 Number in ( ) is the color total occurrence
times. Older jam is deleted page counter (a) Cause of paper jam
from the Log in case of
(b) Paper source
exceeding 16 times.
(c) Paper size
(d) Paper type
(e) Paper eject
(A) Description of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
• Refer to "2-2 Paper Misfeed Detection",for the detail of Cause of paper jam. (See page 7-
113)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (Paper feeder)
06 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)
00: Not specified 0B: B4 22: Special 1

01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 Wide
03: International DL 8D: A5E 25: Ledger Wide
04: International C5 0E: A6 26: Full bleed paper (12x8)
05: Executive 0F: B6 27: 8K
06: Letter-R 10: Commercial #9 28: 16K-R
86: Letter-E 11: Commercial #6 A8: 16K-E
07: Legal 12: ISO B5 32: Statement-R
08: A4R 13: Custom size B2: Statement-E
88: A4E 1E: C4 33: Folio
09: B5R 1F: Hagaki 34: Youkei type 2
89: B5E 20: Oufuku Hagaki 35: Youkei type 4
0A: A3 21: Oficio II
6-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Contents
(8)cont. Paper Jam Log
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1

02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
01: Main unit face down (FD)

02: Main unit face up (FU)/1000-sheet finisher (FU)/
4000-sheet finisher tray B (FU)
03: 1000-sheet finisher (FD)
4000-sheet finisher tray A (FD)
05: Job separator tray
07: 4000-sheet finisher tray B (FD)
0A: Folding unit tray
0B: MT tray 1 (FD)
0C: MT tray 1 (FU)
15: MT tray 2 (FD)
16: MT tray 2 (FU)
1F: MT tray 3 (FD)
20: MT tray 3 (FU)
29: MT tray 4 (FD)
2A: MT tray 4 (FU)
33: MT tray 5 (FD)
34: MT tray 5 (FU)
3D: MT tray 6 (FD)
3E: MT tray 6 (FU)
47: MT tray 7 (FD)
48: MT tray 7 (FU)
6-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Contents
(9) Service Call Log
# Count. Service Code Date and

Time
Up to 8 times of Self Total page count at the time The first two digits Date and
diagnostics errors are of self diagnostic error. (Identification) time of
recorded. Number in ( ) is the color total 01: Service call/System error occurrence
All the Self diagnostics error page counter 02: Unit replacement
are displayed unless
occurrences are 8 times or
less. Next two digits (Auto reboot
information)
00: No auto reboot
01: Auto reboot
Last four digits

Self diagnostic error code
(Example) 01.00.6000
01 for Self diagnostic error,
00 for no auto reboot and
6000 for Self diagnostic error
code.
The auto reboot function is
set in U287
(10) Maintenance Log
# Count. item Date and

Time
Up to 8 times are recorded. Total page count at the time Item code for the Date and
All occurrences are displayed of a maintenance item maintenance replace (2 items time of
in case of less than 8 times. replace. for 1 byte value) occurrence
Number in ( ) is the color total
page counter First byte (Replacing item)
02: Maintenance kit
Second 1 byte (replacement

item type)
(Low-end model)
01: MK-8335A
02: MK-8335B
03: MK-8335D
04: MK-8335E
(High-end model)
01:MK-8525A
02:MK-8525B
6-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Contents
(11) Toner Log
# Count. Item. Serial Number Date and

Time
UP to 32 times are recorded. The total page count at the log code Date and
All occurrences are recorded time of toner container First 1 byte (Replacing item) time of
in case of less than 32 times. replacement. (both genuine occurrence
01: Genuine product
and non-genuine toner)
02: Non-genuine product
Number in ( ) is the color total
page counter.
Next 1 byte (type of
replacement item)
If installing the same toner
container twice or used toner 00: Black
container, all of them are 01: Cyan
counted. 02: Magenta
03: Yellow
Last 16 digits
Display the serial number of
the toner container.
• When detecting non-

genuine toner, no serial
number is displayed.
Detail
Further information of toner

replacement
• The first letter
A: Start
B: Replace with the new
toner
C: Replaced with the used or
non-genuine toner
• Next 3 digits
Toner remaining (%)
6-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Contents
(13) Counter Log
(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Replacement for
maintenance Item
Indicate the log counter of Indicate the log counter of Indicate the log counter by Consist of
paper jams by causes. self diagnostics errors by the maintenance replacing three log
See Paper Jam Log. causes. items. counters,
paper jams,
self
Service call/System error T: Toner container
• All causes are diagnostics
includes a number of auto 00: Black
displayed even no errors, and
reboots either.
record. 01: Cyan maintenanc
02: Magenta e
replaceme
03: Yellow nt items.
(Example) CF245: 4 (2)
System Error 245 occurred
M: Maintenance kit
four times and auto reboot
twice. (Low-end model)
01: MK-8335A
02: MK-8335B
03: MK-8335D
04: MK-8335E
(High-end model)
01:MK-8525A
02:MK-8525B
Example: T00: 1
The toner container (Black)
replaced once.
Toner container replacement

log counts the time of
replacement since the 1st
container (genuine toner
only).
If installing the same toner
container twice or used toner
container, all of them are
counted.
6-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detail of service status page
Service Status Page (2) ZF48600001

MFP (3) 2018/07/03 15:15
TASKalfa 6053ci (4) [2.1.10]
(1) Firmware version 2V8_S000.001.169 2018.07.17 [2V8_1000.001.001] [2ND_1100.001.007]
(5) (6)
Controller Information
Memory Status Default Pattern Switch B8 00
(7) Total Size 4.5 GB Page Orientation C1 00
Default Font Number C5*10000+C2*100+C3 00000
Time Reserved . C6 00
(8) Local Time Zone PCL Font Switch . C8 00
GMT Greenwich Mean Time: Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London Print density . D4 03
(9) Date and Time 04/08/2016 01:46 Reserved . D6 03
(10) Time Server Host Buffer Size . H8 05
FF Time Out H9 06
.
Installed Options Reserved I5 01
Reserved . I6 00
(11) Document Processor Dual Scan
(12) Paper Feeder Cassette (500 x 2) Zoom . J0 00
(13) Side Feeder Not Installed Text wrap mode . J7 00
(14) SD Card Not Installed Horizontal user offset . K0+K1/100 0.00
(15) Finisher Not Installed Vertical user offset . K2+K3/100 0.00
(16) Mail Box Not Installed Default KANJI number . K4 00
(17) Job Separator Not Installed KANJI code switch . K6 00
(18) Card Authentication Kit (B) Not Installed Reserved K9 00
.
(19) Internet FAX Kit(A) Not Installed KIR Mode N0 02
Duplex mode . N4 00
(20) Data Security Kit (F) Not Installed
(21) Sleep Timer . N5 120
UG-33 Not Installed
(22) UG-34 Not Installed EcoPrint Mode . N6 00
(23) USB Keyboard Not Connected Reserved . N7 00
(24) USB Keyboard Type US-English Print Resolution . N8 01
Scan extention kit(A) Not Installed Default Emulation . P1 06
(25)
CR/LF Action P2/P3 1/1
AES Mode
. P4 00
(26) Print Coverage .
Average (%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) AES Option 1/2 P7 10
Command Recognition . P9 82
(27) Total Default Paper Output . R0 01
K(Total): 0.00 / 0.00
K(Color) : 0.00 / 0.00 Default Paper Size . R2 00
K(B&W): 0.00 / 0.00 Reserved . R3 00
C: 0.00 / 0.00 Default Paper Source . R4 01
M: 0.00 / 0.00 Override A4/LT . S4 01
Y: 0.00 / 0.00 Host Buffer Size Rate S5 01
RAM Disk Size
. S6 128
(28) Copy .
RAM Disk Mode S7 01
K(Total): 0.00 / 0.00 .
Wide A4 T6 00
K(Color): 0.00 / 0.00
Default Line Spacing . U0+U1/100 6.00
K(B&W): 0.00 / 0.00
Default Character Spacing . U2+U3/100 10.00
C: 0.00 / 0.00
Reserved U4 01 .
M: 0.00 / 0.00
Country Code/Symbol Set . U6/U7 41/53
Y: 0.00 / 0.00
Default Pitch . U8+U9/100 10.00
(29) Printer
Default Font Height V0*100+V1+V2/100 12.00
K(Total): 0.00 / 0.00 .
Default Font Name V3 Courier
K(Color): 0.00 / 0.00 .
Default KANJI Font Size V4*100+V5+V6/100 10.00
K(B&W): 0.00 / 0.00 .
Default KANJI Font Name V7 MTHSMINCHO-W3
C: 0.00 / 0.00
Courier/LetterGothic . V9 05
M: 0.00 / 0.00
Y: 0.00 / 0.00
MP Tray Paper Type . X0 01
Cassette 1 Paper Type . X1 01
(30) FAX(Total)
K: 0.00 / 0.00
(31) Period (2017/06/23 - 2017/07/03 01:46)
PCL Paper Source X9 00
(32) Last Page K/C/M/Y (%) 0.00 .
Auto Error Clear Y0 00
(33) Last Job
Error Clear Timer Y1 06
Total K (%) 0.00
Finishing error Y3 127
Color K/C/M/Y (%) 0.00 / 0.00 / 0.00 / 0.00
Special Type Act Mode Y4 00
B&W K (%) 0.00
PDF mode Y5 00
(34) FAX Information
e-MPS error control Y6 03
Rings (Normal) 2
Rings (FAX/TEL) 0
Rings (TAD) 15
(35) FRPO Status

User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.00
User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.00
User Page Length A5+A6/100 0.00
User Page Width A7+A8/100 0.00
Reserved B0 00
6-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Service Status Page ZF48600001

MFP
2018/07/03 15:15
TASKalfa 6003i [2.1.10]
Firmware version 2VK_S000.001.169 2018.07.17 [2VK8_1000.001.001][2ND_1100.001.007]
Controller Information Engine Information

RP Code (40) NVRAM Version _Cb26630_Cb26630
(36) 0008 01E2 3177 (41) MAC Address 00:17:C8:16:84:04
0008 027A C873 (42) DP Counters
FFFF FFFF FFFF Total 0
0008 01E2 31F5
(37) Print Settings
MP Tray Priority Off
(38) Storage Status

Hard Disk 320GB
SSD 8GB
SD Card 4.0GB
USB Memory 256.0MB
(39) System Firmware(Details)

2V8_Q000.001.146
2V8_QA00.001.146
2V8_R000.001.146
2V8_R100.001.146
2V8_R200.001.146
2V8_R300.001.146
2V8_R400.001.146
2V8_R500.001.146
2V8_R600.001.146
2V8_R700.001.146
2V8_R800.001.146
2V8_R900.001.146
2V8_RB00.001.146
2V8_RD00.001.146
2V8_RA00.001.146
2V8_S100.001.146
6-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Service Status Page ZF48600001

MFP
2018/07/03 15:15
TASKalfa 6053ci [2.1.10]
1/1 (43) (44)

(45) 635/600
(46) 0/50/50/0/
(47) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0600000/0600000/
F00/U00/0/1/1/1/1/28/23/48/0/23/0/0/abcde/5/2/0/1/1/ (48) (49) (50) (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62)(63) (64) (65) (66) (67)
(68) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(69) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(70) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(71) XXXXXXXX/
(72) [ABCDEFGHIJ] [ ] [ ] [ABCDEFGHIJ]
(73) [ABCDEFGHIJ] [ABCDEFGHIJ]
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (74) (75)
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (76) (77)
(78) 0/
0/0/12.3/56.7 (79) (80) (81) (82)
(83) 1/1/1/0/1/0/0/ 2010/12/15 12:34:56
1/5/ (84)(85)
1/1/ (86) (87)
1/0/0 (88)(89)(90)
(91) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/
(92) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/
6-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Description

(1) Firmware Version -
(2) Machine serial number -
(3) System date -
(4) API version of the HyPAS application
(5) Engine firmware version -
(6) Engine boot version -
(7) Total memory size -
(8) Local time zone -
(9) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour : minute
(10) NTP server name -
(11) Document processor installation Duplex scan/Dual scan/Not available
(12) Paper feeder installation Cassette (500-sheet x2)/Cassette (1500-sheet x2)/Not

available
(13) Side deck installation Available/Not available
(14) SD memory card Available/Not available
(15) Finisher installation 1000-sheet finisher/inner finisher/

4000-sheet finisher/100-staple finisher/Not available
(16) Mailbox installation Available/Not available
(17) Job separator installation Available/Not available
(18) ID Card Authentication Kit Introduced/Before introduction/Trial
(19) Availability of the Internet FAX Kit (A) Installed/Not Installed
(20) Availability of the data security kit (F) Installed/Not Installed
(21) Availability of UG-33 Introduced/ before introduction/trial
(22) Availability of UG-34 Installed/Not Installed
(23) USB keyboard connection status Connected/Not connected
(24) Type of the USB keyboard US-English/US-English with Euro symbol/German/French
(25) Availability of the Scan extension kit (A) Introduced/ before introduction/trial
(26) Print coverage Print Coverage provides just a reference of toner consumption
and is not actual toner consumption.
(27) Average coverage for total Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(28) Average coverage for copy Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(29) Average coverage for print Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(30) Average coverage for FAX Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(31) Cleared and output date -
(32) Coverage on the last page Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(33) Coverage information of the last job Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
6-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(34) Fax information Number of fax rings (Normal): 0 to 15
Number of fax rings before auto switching 0 to 15
Number of rings before connecting to the answering machine 0
to 15
(35) FRPO setting -
(36) RP code Coding the engine software version and the date of the latest
update.
Coding the main software version and the date of the latest
update.
Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the

previous update.
Coding the main software version and the date of the previous
update.
(37) MP tray priority setting Off (No setting)/Auto (Auto paper feed)/Always (All times)
(38) Storage availability Hard disk (HDD)/SSD
(39) System firmware (Detail) -
(40) NVRAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
(a) Consistency of the current firmware version and the
database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version and the ME
firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME firmware version
It is normal in conditions of; (a) and (d) are underscored, (b)
and (e) are same and (c) and (f) are same.
(41) Mac address -
(42) DP counter Scan counts of DP
(43) Destination information -
(44) Area information -
(45) Margin setting Top margin/Left margin
(46) L parameters Integer part of top margin/Decimal part of top margin/Integer

part of left margin/Decimal part of left margin
6-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(47) Life counter (The first line) Machine life/ Color life/MP tray/Cassette/Paper feeder 1/Paper
feeder 2/Paper feeder 3/Paper feeder 4/Paper feeder 5/Duplex
Life counter (The second line) Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/Primary
transfer unit/Secondary transfer roller unit/Developer unit K/
Developer unit C/Developer unit M/Developer unit Y/the main
charger roller K/the main charger roller C/the main charger
roller M/the main charger roller Y/Fuser unit/Fuser discharge
unit
Life counter (The third line) Maintenance kit A/Maintenance kit B

Maintenance kit D */Maintenance kit E *
Maintenance kit A pre-set/Maintenance kit B pre-set
Maintenance kit D pre-set*/Maintenance kit E pre-set*
(*: Low-end model only)
(48) Panel lock information F00: OFF

F01: Partial lock1
F02: Partial lock2
F03: Partial lock3
F04: Full lock
(49) USB information U00: Not Connected

U01: Full speed
U02: Hi speed
(50) Paper handling information 0: Paper source select

1: Paper source fixed
(51) Auto cassette change 0: OFF

1: ON (Default)
(52) Color printing double count mode 0: All single counts

3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
(53) Black and white printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
(54) Billing counts timing 0: When secondary paper feed starts

1: When the paper is ejected
(55) Internal temperature -
(56) External temperature -
(57) External relative humidity -
(58) External absolute humidity -
(59) Internal humidity
(60) LSU1 humidity information
(61) LSU2 humidity information
(62) Asset Number -
(63) Job end timeout -
(64) Job end detection mode 0: Detect as one job, even if contained multiple jobs
1: Detect as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a break in
job
6-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(65) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On
(66) SMB mode setting 0: Off

1: On
(67) Display logo 0: Off

1: On
(68) Media type properties Weight settings Fuser settings

1 to 28, except 18, 19, 20 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
See MDAT command in "Prescribe 2: Normal 2 2: Low
Commands Reference Manual” for further 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
information.
4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2 Duplex settings
6: Heavy 3 0: Disable
7: Heavy 4 1: Enable
8: Heavy 5
9: Extra Heavy
(69) Calibration information -
(70) RFID information (K, C, M, Y) -
(71) RFID reader/writer version -
(72) Optional paper feeder firmware version -
(73) Optional language firmware version -
(74) Color table version for printer -
(75) Color table 2 version for printer -
(76) Color table version for copy -
(77) Color table 2 version for copy -
(78) Altitude Adjustment setting 0: Normal (0 to 1000m)

1: 1001 to 2000m
2: 2001 to 3000m
3: 3001 to 3500m
(79) Auto color conversion judgment 0: Off

1: On
(80) Three tier setting 0: Full-color count display

1: Color coverage count display
(81) Low coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(82) Middle coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(83) Data sanitization information FAX Board/Main Memory/Panel Memory/HDD/SSD/Execute

time
1: Success
0: Fail
-: Not performed or Not installed
(84) Toner low setting 0: Disabled

1: Enabled
6-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(85) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(86) Shift limitation setting for one copy 0: Disable (Limitation OFF)
original. 1: Enable (Limitation ON)
(87) Banner print confirmation display setting 0: No display

1: Display every page
(88) ErP mode setting 0: ErP not available

1: ErP available
(89) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory setting)

1: Full-page mode
(90) Wake-up mode 0: Off (No wake up)

1: On (Wake up)
(91) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(92) Developer serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
6-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

(Message: Set Factory Default)
Contents
Exit the maintenance mode and return to the copy mode.
Purpose
Exit the maintenance mode.
Method

Return to copy mode.
6-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U002 Set Factory Default

Contents
Set the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Set the machine setting values to the factory default
Execution
2 Select [Mode1(All)].

Items Contents
Mode1(All) Set the machine setting values to the factory default
4 Turn the power switch off.
NOTE
An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization by using maintenance mode
U002 again.
Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
6-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code list

Codes Contents
0002 Initialize failure of setting information
0003 Initialize failure of address book information
0004 Initialize failure of Job accounting information
0005 Initialize failure of Event log/Fax communication log/Job log information
0006 Initialize failure of fax memory transfer/panel program information
0007 Initialize failure of shortcut key information
0008 Initialize failure of fax reserve information
0009 Initialize failure of account information
0010 Back up failure of RP code
0011 Initialize failure of counters in Event log/billing/maintenance category
0012 Initialize failure of coverage counter
0013 Initialize failure of machine life counter information
0014 Initialize failure of engine information
0015 Initialize failure of scanner information
0016 Initialize failure of log verification
0017 Initialize failure of device information
0018 Initialize failure of unit log information
0019 Initialize failure of counter information by coverage/Job/CBM alert feeding
0020 Initialize failure of send history information
6-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U003 Setting the telephone number of the service person

(Message: Set Telephone Number for Service Call)
Contents
Set phone number that will be displayed at the service call error.
Purpose
Set telephone number for service call at the installation of machine.
Setting
2 Input keys are indicated on the touch screen.
3 Input telephone number (15 digits maximum).
4 Press [Start] key to fix the setting.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U004 Machine Number

(Message: Machine Number)
Contents
Set or display the machine serial number.
Purpose
Check the machine serial number
Execute in case of displaying “C0180 machine number mismatch" after replace main or engine PWB.
IMPORTANT
Do not execute U004, or select [Execute] and press [Start] key, if machine serial number in
engine PWB is different from main unit serial number. Different machine serial number is
overwritten in the main PWB.
Method

In case of matching the machine serial number between engine PWB and main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No. Display the machine serial number
In case that the machine serial number in the engine PWB does not match the one in the main PWB
Items Contents
Machine No. (Main) Display the machine serial number in the main PWB
Machine No. (Eng) Display the machine serial number in the engine PWB
Setting
Execute if the serial numbers do not match.
1 Select [Execute].
NOTE
Start serial number writing.
3 Turn the power switch off then on.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID

(Message: Set Maintenance Mode ID)
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
Purpose
Changing the maintenance mode ID makes service activity more secure.
Method
2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID
New ID (Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)
Initialize Initialize the maintenance mode ID for service
Setting: New ID
1 Select [New ID].
2 Press numeric keys (0–9, *, #) to enter a new 8-digit ID.
NOTE
Either [*] or [#] must be included.
4 Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
5 Press numeric keys (0–9, *, #) to enter the new 8-digit ID again.

Method: Initialize
1 Select [Initialize].
2 Press [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

• Following error code come up in case that new ID has inappropriate manner.
Error code list
Contents Error message

No "#" or "*” in ID. ID does not have "#" or "*".
Discrepancy between New ID and New ID ID does not match.

(Reconfirm).
ID is less than 8 digits. Input 8-digit ID
6-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U018 Firmware self verification

(Message: Check Firmware Checksum)
Contents
Verify that the firmware is not falsified.
Purpose
Calculate the checksum and verify the firmware is not falsified.
Method

Items Contents
Expected Display the checksum expected value
Result Display the checksum calculation result.
Execute Execute self-verification
2 Select [Execute].

After execution, display the checksum obtained in [Expected].
The following code come up if the verification result is injustice.
Items Contents
f001 The expected value file does not exist
f002 Expected value file read failure
f003 Injustice data in the expected value file (not 64-byte data)
s001 Obtain the checksum failure
NG Discrepancy in check sum value
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U019 Firmware Version

(Message: Firmware Version)
Contents
Display the firmware version installed in each PWB.
Purpose
Check the firmware version installed in each PWB
Method

The firmware version is displayed.
6-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Change the screen using [▲][▼] key.

Items Contents
Controller Main firmware
CMN App CMN App firmware
SST App SST App firmware
MNT App MNT App firmware
CPY App CPY App firmware
PRT App PRT App firmware
SND App SND App firmware
BOX App BOX App firmware
Fax App FAX App firmware
WPG App WPG App firmware
AUTH App AUTH App firmware
PCS App PCS App firmware
EPRT App*8 EPRT App firmware
SCO App SCO App firmware
PLP PLP firmware
EXSP EXSP firmware
Version Info Version Info firmware
RFID RFID firmware
OCR OCR
Sub MMI Sub MMI firmware
Sub MMI Boot Sub MMI Boot
Sub MMI Conf *9 Sub MMI Configuration firmware
Engine Engine firmware
Engine Boot Engine boot
HyPAS Embedded API HyPAS Embedded API firmware
Option Language Optional language firmware
Color Table1(Prn) Color table 1 firmware (Printer)
Color Table2(Prn) Color table 2 firmware (Printer)
Color Table1(Copy) Color table 1 firmware (Copy)
Color Table2(Copy) Color table 2 firmware (Copy)
DP *2 DP firmware
DP Boot *2 Document processor boot
DP SSW *2 Document processor firmware
PF1 Paper feeder firmware
PF1 Boot Paper Feeder boot
Side PF Side PF firmware
6-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents
Side PF Boot Side PF boot
DF *3 finisher firmware
DF Boot *3 finisher boot
DF Sub *4 finisher sub firmware
DF Sub Boot *4 finisher sub boot
PH *5 Punch firmware
PH Boot *5 Punch Boot

*6
MT Mailbox Firmware
MT Boot *6 Mailbox boot
BF *7 BF firmware
BF Boot *7 BF boot
Fax APL1 *1 Fax APL1 firmware
Fax Boot1 *1 Fax 1 boot
Fax IPL1 *1 Fax IPL1 firmware
Fax APL2 *1 FAX App firmware
Fax Boot2 *1
Fax 2 boot
Fax IPL2 *1 Fax 2 IPL firmware
Application Name 01 Application 1 firmware
*1: Only if fax is installed/*2: Only if DP is installed (DP SSW is only for Multi feeding detection model)/*3: Only if DF is installed
*4: Only if DF (100 sheets staple) is install/*5: Only if PH is install/*6 Only if MT is installed/*7: Only if BF is installed
*8 Except 25 ppm model/*9: High-end model only
Completion
6-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U021 Initializes Memory

(Message: Initialize Memory)
Contents
Initialize all settings, except not adjustable setting such as each counter, service call error history and mode
setting. Also, initialize the backup RAM according to the settings selected in the maintenance mode U252 (Setting
the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except not adjustable settings in the field.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information
NOTE
All data other than for adjustments is initialized by the destination setting.
NOTE
An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode U021.
6-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error codes
Items Contents
0002 Initialize failure of setting information
0003 Initialize failure of address book information
0004 Initialize failure of Job accounting information
0005 Initialize failure of Event log/Fax communication log/Job log information
0006 Initialize failure of fax memory transfer/panel program information
0007 Initialize failure of shortcut key information
0008 Initialize failure of fax reserve information
0009 Initialize failure of account information
0010 Back up failure of RP code
0011 Initialize failure of counters in Event log/billing/maintenance category
0012 Initialize failure of coverage counter
0013 Initialize failure of machine life counter information
0014 Initialize failure of engine information
0015 Initialize failure of scanner information
0016 Initialize failure of log verification
0017 Initialize failure of device information
0018 Initialize failure of unit log information
0019 Initialize failure of counter information by coverage/Job/CBM alert feeding
0020 Initialize failure of send history information
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U024 Formatting an HDD

(Message: Format HDD)
Contents
Initialize the HDD.
Purpose
Initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD in the field.
IMPORTANT
The following settings are also initialized with this HDD initialize.
System Menu (User Management, Job Accounting, Address Book, One Touch Key,
Document Box, etc.), Shortcut key, Panel program.
The following installed firmwares are deleted with Full format function.
Optional language, HyPAS application (FMU, etc.), OCR dictionary software, Color table.
Method
2 Select the item to execute.

Items Contents
HDD Format Executing the HDD format
SSD Format Executing the SSD format
Method: HDD Format
1 Select [HDD Format].
2 Select the item to execute. Display the item to delete.

Items Contents
Full Full format
Data Data format (The application software is saved)
3 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Start operation
4 Press [Start] key to execute the initialization.
Method: SSD Format
1 Select [SSD Format].
2 Select the item to execute. Display the item to delete.

Items Contents
Full (BOX Priority) Full format (BOX priority)
Full (HyPAS Priority) Full format (HyPAS priority)
Data Data format (The application software is saved)
6-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Start operation
4 Press [Start] key to execute the initialization.
NOTE
Reinstall deleted firmware manually.
Optional language, OCR dictionary software, (OCRDATA): Install using USB drive.
Install the HyPAS application (FMU, etc.) from the Application screen.
Color table: Execute U485
NOTE
If there is no OCR dictionary software, a warning dialog is displayed, and the OCR function is unavailable.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U025 Firmware update (S)

(Message: Firm Updatability))
Contents
Update firmware with USB drive in case of selecting security level “Very High” in the System Menu.
Supplement
Start the firmware updating by executing U025 with USB drive.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Updates the firmware
NOTE
This mode does not work without USB drive.
4 Turn the power switch off then on after completed. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U026 Retrieve the backup data

(Message: Pulling Backup Data)
Contents
Execute to retrieve backup data after replacing the main PWB.
Purpose
Restore the setting values that backup from the HDD to the flash memory on the main PWB.
Transfer the backup data from origin SSD to destination SSD via USB drive.
Execution

Items Contents
Flash Restore the backup data
SSD Backup and restore SSD data when USB drive is installed
Method:Flash
1 Select [Restore].
Items Contents
Restore Restore the backup data

Method:SSD

Items Contents
Backup Backup the SSD data
Restore Restore the backup data
3 Turn the power switch off then on after [Restore] completion.

NOTE
Indicate "NG" when completing abnormally.
Saved data:
U278 Delivery date setting
U402 margin adjustment
U952 Maintenance workflow data
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U030 Motor operation check

(Message: Check Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each motor.
Purpose
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method
2 Select the motor to operate.

Each operation starts.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the paper feed motor
DLP(K) Operate drum motor CMY, drum motor K, developer motor CMY, developer
motor K, transfer belt motor, belt cleaning motor or feed motor.
DLP(CMY)
Belt Lift Operate the belt release motor
Belt Clean Operate the belt cleaning motor
Drum(K) Operate the drum motor (K)
Drum(COL) Operate the drum motor (CMY)
IH Core Operate the IH Core motor
Fuser Operate the fuser motor
Fuser Release Operate the fuser motor
SB(CW) Operate the exit reversing motor (CW)
SB(CCW) Operate the exit reversing motor (CCW)
Bridge1(CW) Operate the BR conveying motor 1 (CW)
Bridge1(CCW) Operate the BR conveying motor 1 (CCW)
Bridge2(CW) Operate the BR conveying motor 2 (CW)
Bridge2(CCW) Operate the BR conveying motor 2 (CCW)
Container Mix Operate the toner container motor
Toner Recovery Operate the waste toner motor
Vibration Operate the vibration motor

*1
Exit Operate the exit rear motor
*1: Low-end model only
NOTE
Press [Stop] key to quit operation.
Completion
6-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U031 Check the conveying switch

(Message: Check Conveying Switch)
Contents
Display the on/off status of each switches and sensors that detect paper on the conveying path.
Purpose
Check if the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method

• Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
• Indication of the switches turn to blue when the switches are on.
Items Contents
Casstte2 Feed Display the switching status of the SSW 2 sensor
Regist Display the switching status of the SSW 2 sensor
Belt Jam Display the switching status of the belt wound sensor
Exit Feed Display the switching status of the exit sensor
DU1 Display the switching status of the duplex sensor 1
DU2 Display the switching status of the duplex sensor 2
Bridge1 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 1
Bridge2 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 2
Exit Paper Display the switching status of the exit switchback sensor
FuserFeed Display the switching status of the fuser sensor
Inner Job Separator Display the switching status of the JS sensor
Setting Feed source setting
Print Print with the setting
Setting: Setting
1 Select [Execute].
3 Pressing [Cassette][Duplex] key switch the screen.

Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
Cassette7 Feed source setting Cassette1 Cassette1
Cassette2
Cassette3
Cassette4
Cassette5
MP
Duplex Duplex print setting Off/On Off
6-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Print
1 Select [Execute].

Start printing
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U032 Clutch operation check

(Message: Check Clutch Operation)
Contents
Supply power and turn each clutch on.
Purpose
Check if each clutch works.
Method
2 Select the clutch to operate.

The clutch operation is available while the motor is driving
Items Contents
Feed Operate the vertical conveying clutch
Middle Operate the middle clutch
DU1 Operate DU clutch 1
DU2 Operate DU clutch 2
DLP Operate the developer clutch
Regist Operate the registration clutch
MPT Feed Operate the MP clutch
Cassette2 Operate the paper feed clutch 2
Cassette1 Operates the paper feed clutch 1
Motor Operate the motor
NOTE
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U033 Solenoid operation check

(Message: Check Solenoid Operation)
Contents
Supply power and turn each clutch on.
Purpose
Check if each clutch works.
Method
2 Select the solenoid to operate.

In case of checking with motor drive, select the motor first.
It can not work with “Front cover open”.
Also It can not work during “Prepare for print”.
The clutch operation is available while the motor is driving
Items Contents
Branch Eject Up Operate the exit solenoid up
Branch Eject Down Operate the exit solenoid down
ID Sensor Operate the cleaning solenoid
Container Cover(C) Operate the toner container solenoid (C)
Container Cover(M) Operate the toner container solenoid (M)
Container Cover(Y) Operate the toner container solenoid (Y)
Container Cover(K) Operate the toner container solenoid (K)
Motor Operate the motor
NOTE
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U034 Paper timing data adjustment

(Message: Adjust Paper Timing Data)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Execute in case of a consistent error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Run in case of a consistent error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Method

Display screen for setting.
Items Contents
Start Position Adjust the leading edge timing
Center Line Adjust the center line
Start Position B/ W *1 Adjust the leading edge timing (B/W)
Start Position 3/4 Adjust the leading edge registration (3/4 speed)
*1: 60 ppm model

Adjust: Start Position
1 Select the item to adjust.
2 Press [System Menu] key.
NOTE
Pressing [System Menu] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
3 Press [Start] key and output a test chart.
6-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Press [System Menu] key.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
MPT(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
(L)
MPT Half(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half (L)
Cassette(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
paper feed (L)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(L) paper feed Half (L)
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copy (L)
Duplex Half(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copy Half (L)
MPT(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
(S)
MPT Half(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half (S)
Cassette(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
paper feed (S)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(S) paper feed Half (S)
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copy (S)
Duplex Half(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copy Half (S)
Test Copy *1 Run test copy - - -
*1: Display when USB drive is installed
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value in case of test chart 1.
Decrease the value in case of test chart 2.
The image moves backward by increasing setting value and moves forward by decreasing the value.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.5 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
6-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IMPORTANT
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image still have a problem, attempt those
maintenance modes.
U034 > U066(P.6-80) > U071(P.6-84)
Adjust: Start Position B/W
2 Press [System Menu/Counter] key.
NOTE
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
3 Press [Start] key and output a test chart.

setting variatio
n
(L) when B/W copying
feed (L) when B/W copying
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the B/W -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (L)
(S) when B/W copying
feed (S) when B/W copying
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the B/W -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (S)
6-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.5 mm)

example 1 example 2
IMPORTANT
maintenance modes.
U034 > U066(P.6-80) > U071(P.6-84)
Adjust: Start Position 3/4
NOTE
3 Press [Start] key and output test chart.
6-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting variatio
n
(L) at 3/4 speed
feed (L) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing when duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copying (L) at 3/4 speed
(S) at 3/4 speed
feed (S) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing when duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copying (S) at 3/4 speed
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.5 mm)

example 1 example 2
IMPORTANT
maintenance modes.
U034 > U066(P.6-80) > U071(P.6-81)
Adjust: Center Line
NOTE
6-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting variatio
n
MPT Adjust the center line for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Cassette1 Adjust the center line for cassette 1 feed -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Cassette2 Adjust the center line for cassette 2 feed -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Cassette3 Adjust the center line for cassette 3 (Optional -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
unit) feed
unit) feed
unit) feed
Duplex Adjusting the center line when duplex copying -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
(Back page)
The image moves to the right side by increasing setting value and moves to the left side by decreasing the value.
Center line of printing

(within ± 2 mm)

example 1 example 2
IMPORTANT
maintenance modes.
U034 < U067(P.6-81) < U072(P.6-87)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U035 Folio size setting

(Message: Adjust Folio Size)
Contents
Change the printable area in case of copying with Folio paper.
Purpose
Set the actual size of Folio and avoid from image missing on the trailing edge or right/left edges.
Method
setting variatio
n
Length Set the Folio paper length. 330 to 356 (mm) 330 1(mm)
Width Set the Folio paper width. 200 to 220 (mm) 210 1 mm

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U037 fan operation check

(Message: Check Fan Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each fan.
Purpose
Check if each fan works.
Method
2 Select the fan to operate.

Items Contents
All Operate all the fans
Fuser Edge Operate the fuser edge fan
IH PWB Operate the IH PWB fan
DLP4 *1 Operate the developer fan Y
Exit Container Fan *1 Operate the toner container right fan
Exit Cooling Operate the exit fan
Exit PaperIH Coil Operate the exit/IH fan
Toner *1 Operate the toner suction fan
LVU CL Fan Operate the power supply fan
Container Cooling *1 Operate the toner container left fan

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U051 Registration paper loop amount adjustment

(Message: Adjust Paper Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjust the paper loop level.
Purpose
Adjust loop level in case of missing image or inconsistent on the leading edge, or Z-shape fold.
Or use for check/adjust skew feed.
Method

Items Contents
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment
Paper Loop Amount B/W Paper loop amount adjustment at B/W
Paper Loop Amount 3/4 Paper loop amount adjustment at 3/4 speed
Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount
NOTE
3 Place an original and press [Start] key to make a test copy.
6-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents Setting range Data

variation
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP tray feed (L) -30 to 20 1mm
MPT Half(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP tray feed (L) at half speed -30 to 20 1mm
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the cassette feed (L) -30 to 20 1mm
Cassette Paper loop amount adjustment for the cassette feed (L) at half speed -30 to 20 1mm
Half(L)
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the duplex (L) -30 to 20 1mm
Duplex Half(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the duplex (L) at half speed -30 to 20 1mm
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP tray feed (S) -30 to 20 1mm
MPT Half(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP tray feed (S) at half speed -30 to 20 1mm
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the cassette feed (S) -30 to 20 1mm
Cassette Paper loop amount adjustment for the cassette feed (S) at half speed -30 to 20 1mm
Half(S)
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the duplex (S) -30 to 20 1mm
Duplex Half(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the duplex (S) at half speed -30 to 20 1mm
6-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 ppm 32 ppm 25 ppm
MPT(L) -4 -4 -4 -4 -3
MPT Half(L) -4 -3 -3 -3 -3
Cassette(L) -4 -4 -4 -5 -4
Cassette Half(L) -5 -4 -4 -4 -4
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -3 -3 -2
Duplex Half(L) -3 -2 -2 -2 -2
MPT(S) -4 -4 -4 -4 -3
MPT Half(S) -4 -3 -3 -3 -3
Cassette(S) -4 -4 -4 -5 -4
Cassette Half(S) -5 -4 -4 -4 -4
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -3 -3 -2
Duplex Half(S) -3 -2 -2 -2 -2
Increase the value for the copy sample 1.
Decrease the value for the copy sample 2.
Increasing setting value makes high loop level and decreasing makes low loop level.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount B/W
NOTE
3 Place an original and press the [Start] key to run a test copy.
6-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]


variatio
n
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W MP tray feed (L) -30 to 20 1mm
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W cassette feed (L) -30 to 20 1mm
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W duplex feed (L) -30 to 20 1mm
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W MP tray feed (S) -30 to 20 1mm
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W cassette feed (S) -30 to 20 1mm
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W duplex feed (S) -30 to 20 1mm
Initial setting
MPT(L) -4 -6 -6 0 0
Cassette(L) -4 -7 -7 0 0
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -4 -4 -4
MPT(S) -4 -6 -6 0 0
Cassette(S) -4 -7 -7 0 0
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -4 -4 -4
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
6-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount 3/4
NOTE


variatio
n
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 MP tray feed (L) -30 to 20 1mm
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 cassette feed (L) -30 to 20 1mm
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 duplex feed (L) -30 to 20 1mm
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 MP tray feed (S) -30 to 20 1mm
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 cassette feed (S) -30 to 20 1mm
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 duplex feed (S) -30 to 20 1mm
Initial setting
MPT(L) -4 -4 -4 -4 -5
Cassette(L) -5 -5 -5 -5 -4
Duplex(L) -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
MPT(S) -4 -4 -4 -4 -5
Cassette(S) -5 -5 -5 -5 -4
Duplex(S) -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Completion
6-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U053 Adjusting the motor speed

(Message: Adjust Motor Speed)
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
NOTE
Press “+” gets motor slower and “-” gets it faster.
Execution

Items Contents
Motor1 Set drum motor K, drum motor CMY
Motor2 Set developer CMY, developer K/Transfer belt motor
Motor3 Set exit, fuser, BR conveying, feed, PF feed (Optional) motor
Motor4 Set drum motor K in B/W high speed mode

Set drum motor K in B/W mode (CMY release)
Motor5 *1 Set developer K/Transfer belt motor in B/W high speed mode
Motor6 *1 Set exit, fuser, BR conveying, feed, PF feed (Optional) motor in B/W high speed mode
Motor1 Half Set drum motor K, drum motor CMY in half speed mode
Motor2 Half Set developer CMY, developer K/Transfer belt motor in half speed mode
Motor3 Half Set exit, fuser, BR conveying, feed, PF feed (Optional) motor in half speed mode
Motor1 3/4 Set drum motor K, drum motor CMY in 3/4 speed mode
Motor2 3/4 Set developer CMY, developer K/Transfer belt motor in 3/4 speed mode
Motor3 3/4 Set exit, fuser, BR conveying, feed, PF feed (Optional) motor in 3/4 speed mode
6-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Motor1
variatio
n
Drum(CMY) Adjust the drum motor (COL) -5000 to 5000 -
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor (K) -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting

Drum(CMY) 8 8 11 13 16
Drum(K) 8 8 11 13 16

Setting: Motor2
variatio
n
Dev(CMY) Adjust the developer motor(COL) -5000 to 5000 -
Trans Belt Adjust the developer motor(BK)/transfer belt -5000 to 5000 -

motor
Initial setting
Dev(CMY) 0 0 0 0 0
Trans Belt 0 0 0 0 0
6-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Motor3
variatio
n
SB Adjust the eject motor -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjust the fuser motor -5000 to 5000 -
Exit *1 Adjust the eject rear motor -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjust the BR conveying motor 1 -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge 2 Adjust the BR conveying motor 2 -5000 to 5000 -
Feed Adjust the paper feed motor -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjust PF the paper feed motor (Optional). -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 DF High Adjust the BR conveying motor 1 (High speed) -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 DF Low Adjust the BR conveying motor 2 (Low speed) -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge2 DF High Adjust the BR conveying motor 2 (High speed) -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge2 DF Low Adjust the BR conveying motor 2 (Low speed) -5000 to 5000 -

Initial setting
SB 0 0 0 0 0
Fixing -113 -124 -157 -114 -141
Exit 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge1 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge2(CW) 0 0 0 0 0
Feed 53 58 73 60 74
Option 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge1 DF High 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge1 DF Low 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge2 DF High 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge2 DF Low 0 0 0 0 0

Setting: Motor4
6-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
variatio
n
Drum B/W(K)*1 Adjust drum motor K in B/W high speed mode. -5000 to 5000 -
Drum Mono(K) Adjust drum motor K in B/W mode (CMY release) -5000 to 5000 -
*1: 60 ppm model only

Initial setting
Drum B/W(K) 0 - - - -
Drum Mono(K) 22 25 32 13 16

Setting: Motor5
variatio
n
Trans Belt B/W Adjust developer K/Transfer belt motor in B/W high -5000 to 5000 -
speed mode
Initial setting
Trans Belt B/W 0 0 0 0 0
6-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Motor5
variation
SB B/W Adjust exit motor in B/W high speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing B/W Adjust fuser motor in B/W high speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 B/W Adjust BR conveying motor in B/W high speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge 2 B/W Adjust BR conveying motor 2 in B/W high speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Feed B/W Adjust feed motor in B/W high speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Option B/W Adjust PF feed motor (Optional) in B/W high speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting
SB 0 - - - -
Fixing -105 - - - -
Bridge1 0 - - - -
Bridge2 0 - - - -
Feed 65 - - - -
Option B/W 0 - - - -

Setting: Motor1 Half
variation
Drum(CMY) Adjust the drum motor (COL) -5000 to 5000 -
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor (K) -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting
Drum(CMY) 16 16 22 22 22
Drum(K) 16 16 22 22 22

6-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
variation
Dev(CMY) Adjust the developer motor (CMY) in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Trans Belt Adjust the developer motor(K)/transfer belt motor in half -5000 to 5000 -
speed mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm

ppm
Dev(CMY) 0 0 0 0 0


variation
SB Adjust the exit motor in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjust the fuser motor in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Exit *1 Adjust the exit rear motor in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjust the BR conveying motor 1 in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge2 Adjust the BR conveying motor 2 in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Feed Adjust the paper feed motor in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjust PF the paper feed motor (Optional) in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
6-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Initial setting
SB 0 0 0 0 0
Fixing -307 -328 -426 -209 -209
Bridge1 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge2 0 0 0 0 0
Feed 70 74 97 97 97
Option 0 0 0 0 0

Setting: Motor1 3/4

variation
Drum(CMY) Adjust the developer motor (CMY) in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor (K) in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting
Drum(CMY) 11 11 16 16 22
Drum(K) 11 11 16 16 22

Setting: Motor2 3/4

variation
Dev(CMY) Adjust the developer motor (CMY) in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Trans Belt Adjust the developer motor(K)/transfer belt motor in 3/4 -5000 to 5000 -
speed mode
Initial setting
Dev(CMY) 0 0 0 0 0

Setting: Motor3 3/4
6-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]

variation
SB Adjust the exit motor in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjust the fuser motor in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Exit *1 Adjust the exit rear motor in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjust the BR conveying motor 1 in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge2 Adjust the BR conveying motor 2 in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Feed Adjust the paper feed motor in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjust the motors for the optional device in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -

Initial setting
SB 0 0 0 0 0
Fixing -213 -213 -307 -150 -209
Bridge1 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge2 0 0 0 0 0
Feed 49 49 70 70 97
Option 0 0 0 0 0
NOTE
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode when
executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U059 Fan mode setting

(Message: Set Fan Mode)
Contents
Set condition for the cooling mode in which drive all fans.
Purpose
Set the temperature that gets start the cooling mode in which drive all fans when external temperature gets high in
continuous printing.
Setting

Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Cooling Mode Set the Cooling Mode
Setting: Cooling Cycle
variation
Cooling Mode Set the Cooling Mode -3 to 3 ?
Initial setting

Cooling Mode 2 2 2 0 0

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U061 Lamp lighting check

(Message: Check Lamp ON)
Contents
Turn on the exposure lamp.
Purpose
Turn on the exposure lamp for checking.
Method
2 Select the item to operate.

Items Contents
CCD Turns the exposure lamp on
CIS Turn the CIS lamp on (when the dual scanning is available)
3 Press [Start] key. Lamps are lit.

Press [Stop] key to turn the lamp off.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U063 Shading position adjustment

(Message: Adjust Shading Position)
Contents
Change the scanner shading position.
Purpose
Execute when the vertical void area appears on the image and they are not improved after cleaning the shading
plate, namely there are scratches or dirt inside the shading plate.
By changing the shading position, shading is available where is no influence of dirt or scratch on the shading
plate.
Setting
setting variation
Position Changes the scanner shading position 0 to 18 0 0.16mm
Increasing the set value have the shading position move toward the left side of main frame and decreasing have it move
toward the right.
NOTE
Test copy is available by pressing [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode while this maintenance mode
is running.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning

(Message: Adjust Scanner Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjust the equal magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning in case of incorrect.
Purpose
Adjust the equal magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning in case of incorrect.
IMPORTANT
The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks
depending on the original document.
Follow the orders below in case of an adjustment in time of scanning.
U065(main scanning direction)(P.6-78)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P.6-78)
Method
NOTE

setting variation
Main Scan Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction -75 to 75 0 0.02%
Sub Scan Adjusts scanner magnification in the sub-scanning -125 to 125 0 0.02%
direction
Adjustment: Main Scan
Increasing the setting value makes the image wider, and decreasing makes it narrow.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Adjustment: Sub Scan
6-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Increasing the setting value makes the image long, and decreasing makes it short.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing

(Message: Adjust Table Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Execute in case of a consistent error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjustment
NOTE

setting variation
Front Adjust the leading edge timing of CIS scanning -30 to 30 0 0.16 mm
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
IMPORTANT
maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-53) > U065(P.6-78) > U066
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line

(Message: Adjust Table Center)
Contents
Adjust the center line for the table scanning.
Purpose
Run this mode in case of a consistent error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Adjustment
NOTE

setting variation
Front Adjust the center line -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys. Decrease the value for the copy sample 1.
The image moves to the left side by increasing setting value and moves to the right side by decreasing the value.
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
IMPORTANT
maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-53) > U065(P.6-78) > U067
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U068 DP scanning position adjustment

(Message: Adjust DP Scan Position)
Contents
Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used
Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Method

setting variation
DP Read Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals -38 to 38 0 0.16 mm
Black Line Adjusts the scanning position for the test copy originals 0 to 3 0 -
Adjustment: DP Read
1 Select [DP Read].
3 The image moves backward by increasing setting value and moves forward by decreasing the value.

Adjustment: Black Line
1 Select [Black Line].
4 Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu] key.
NOTE
5 Press [Start] key to execute the test copy.
6 Run the test copy at each scanning position which are 0 to 3 and check if no black line appears and the image
is normally scanned.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U070 DP magnification adjustment

(Message: Adjust DP Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjust the equal-magnification for DP.
Purpose
Adjust if the equal magnification is incorrect in the main and sub scanning direction with DP.
Adjustment
NOTE
3 Place an original on the DP and press [Start] key to make a test copy.
4 Set [Duplex] in case of checking duplex scanning in test copying.

Items Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Sub Scan (F) Adjust the equal magnification in simplex scanning -125 to 125 0 0.02%
Sub Scan (B) *1 Adjust the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning
Main Scan (CIS) *2 Adjust the 2nd side magnification in the main 0 to 75 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning (DP CIS)
Sub Scan (CIS) *2 Adjust the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning (DP CIS)
*1: Only DP-7100/7120 *2 Only DP-7110/7130
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing

(Message: Adjust DP Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjust the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjust if observed consistent error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image from
DP scan.
Method
NOTE
6-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Select the item to adjust. DP-7110

DP-7100

setting variation
Front Head Leading edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Front Tail Trailing edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Head Leading edge registration. (Back page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Tail Trailing edge registration. (Back page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
DP-7110/7130

setting variation
CIS Head Adjust the leading edge timing for the DP CIS -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
scanning
CIS Tail Adjust the trailing edge timing for the DP CIS -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
DP-7100
setting variation
Back Head Leading edge registration. (Back page) -27 to 27 0 0.12 mm
Back Tail Trailing edge registration. (Back page) -27 to 27 0 0.12 mm
Adjustment: Front Head/Back Head/CIS
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
6-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IMPORTANT
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following
in the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-53) > U071
Adjustment: Front Tail/Back Tail/CIS Tail
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U072 Adjusting the DP original center

(Message: Adjust DP Original Center)
Contents
Adjust the DP original center line.
Purpose
Adjust if observed consistent error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image from
DP scan.
Adjustment
NOTE

setting variation
Front DP center line. (Front page) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
Back *1 DP center line. (Back page) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
CIS *2 Adjust the DPCIS center line -39 to 39 0 0.085 mm
*1: Only DP-7100/7120 *2: Only DP-7110/7130
The image moves to the left side by increasing setting value and moves to the right side by decreasing the value.
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
6-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IMPORTANT
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
U034(P.6-53) > U065(P.6-78) > U067(P.6-81) > U072
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U073 Scanner motor operation check

(Message: Check Scanner Motor Operation)
Contents
Simulate the scanner operation in any condition.
Purpose
Execute the scanner operation to check the abnormal operation and dust adhesion on the slit glass.
Method

Items Contents
Scanner Motor Execute the scan operation
Home Position Home positioning operation
Dust Check Check if there is dust by turning the exposure lamp on
DP Reading Scan position operation for the document processor
3 Select [Execute].
5 Scanning starts with the condition specified.
6 Press [Stop] key to quit operation.

Setting: Scanner Motor
setting variation
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400 (%) 100 1%
Size Original size 3400 to 10200 10200 100
Lamp Turning the exposure lamp On/Off 0: OFF 1: ON -

1: ON
Paper size for each setting values

setting Paper size setting Paper size setting Paper size
4300 B5 6100 B5R 8600 B4
5000 A4 6600 8 1/2"×11" 9000 11"×15"
5000 A5R 7100 A4R 10000 A3
5100 11"×8 1/2" 7800 Folio 10200 11"×17"
5100 5 1/2"×8 1/2" 8400 8 1/2"×14"

Completion
6-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U074 Adjusting the DP input characteristics

(Message: Adjust DP Input)
Description
Set the image density correction for scanning
Purpose
Change the setting when the gray background appears by scanning bluish original or originals with slightly dark
background Adjust the image difference between the table scanning and DP scanning DP CIS scanning is not
available.
Setting
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Coefficient Density correction for DP image scanning 0: No correction 0
1: Low-level
correction
2: Middle-level
DP Color Regist Set permission for the DP color registration correction 1: On 1
operation 2: Off

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U087 Setting the DP scanning position change operation

(Message: Set DP Scanning Position Operation)
Contents
If dust can be detected by comparing the scanned data of original trailing edge with the scanned data after the
original feed, change the scan position for next time.
Also, reduce the black lines by image correction.
Purpose
Use as the corrective measure for the black lines that happen with dust on the original scanning position, in case
of using the document processor.
Setting
setting
Front Set the scanning data threshold on the face 0 to 128 48
Back Set the scanning data threshold on the back in duplex mode 0 to 128 48
Black Line Initialize the original scanning position - -
NOTE
Decreasing the value makes dust detection frequently since dark image is detected as dust also.
If the set value is increased, dust detection becomes less likely.
Method: Black Line
1 Select [Clear].

Position of scan original back to the initial line.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U089 MIP-PG chart output

(Message: Output MIP-PG chart)
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG chart generated by the main unit.
Purpose
Run this mode is to check main frame conditions except scanning section in time of adjusting scan setting, by
using the MIP-PG chart that is output without scan process.
NOTE
Output in Maintenance mode such as test chart never affect print coverage and counter on Service status
page.
Method
1 Select the MIP-PG chart to output
2 [System Menu/Counter] key
3 Select number of copies [Copies].
6-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
Color Belt PG for checking developer conditions and fundamental
image density. (four color PG)
White
White(Color)
Gray(C) For drum quality check (Cyan PG)
Gray(M) For drum quality check (Magenta PG)
Gray(Y) For drum quality check (Yellow PG)
6-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents
Gray(K) For drum quality check (Gray PG)
Mono Belt PG for vertical streaks check
Sample Set Output the following charts for the long life unit warranty application
PG for the developer status and engine ID check (four color PG)
For drum quality check (Yellow PG)
For drum quality check (Cyan PG)
For drum quality check (Magenta PG)
For drum quality check (Gray PG)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U091 void lines correction setting

(Message: Set void line Correction)
Contents
Set threshold for error detection threshold in void lines correction and display the abnormal pixel count result.
Purpose
Execute in case of replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller.
Setting
setting variation
Coefficient(R) Display the red pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Coefficient(G) Display the green pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Coefficient(B) Display the Blue pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Threshold(R) Set the red error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(G) Set the green error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(B) Set the blue error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold Set the abnormal pixel threshold 0 to 8191 75 -

(Abnormal)
Mode Set the void lines correction mode 0: No correction 0 -

1: Correction
2: Test mode
Execute Execute retaining the white reference data - - -
NOTE
Do not change the initial threshold 112 basically.
Increase the value when void lines appear even if the CIS roller/glass is not dirty.
Decrease the value when thin lines disappear in any types of original.
Set it in between 50 and 200. (Out of range may affect an image output)

Method: Execute
1 Select [Execute].
3 Start retaining the white reference data.
5 Set the gray original face-down on the document processor and set paper in the cassette.
6 Match the original and paper size.
6-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Output 2-sheet test chart.

1st sheet: black band of about 60mm width2nd sheet: blank (or may be gray band of about 60mm width)
9 Setting is correctly complete if no vertical line is observed on both sheets.

If a vertical black line appears on blank paper or a gray band or vertical void line appear on the black band,
execute the void line correction again after cleaning the CIS roller or CIS glass.
Void line correction is complete if both sheets have vertical black lines or vertical void lines. However, check
the engine since there are factors of vertical streaks at the engine Side.
10Press [System Menu/Counter] key.

Mode is set to [1].
How to check the test copy
Blank Black band Factor Corrective action

paper
No lines No lines - Completion
Black line Void lines DP CIS roller/ Execute the U091 CIS roller/glass contamination
Glass
contamination
Black line No lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
No lines Void lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U099 Original size detection setting

(Message: Set Original Size Detection)
Description
Check the original size detection and set the detection threshold
Purpose
Change the threshold when the original size is often missed because of entirely dark originals (high density) or
originals that has dark edges.
Change the threshold
Setting

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Data1 Display of the copy original width
B/W Level1 Threshold setting of original size detection.
Data2 Display the original width of Original Area color (The document processor is
installed)
Execution: Data1/Data2
3 Place an original on the table and close the document processor.
4 The light source turn on and the CCD sensor detects the original width. The original size sensor detects the
original lengthwise. (Detect twice if the document processor is installed)
setting variation
Original Detected number of pixels in the original width 0 to 7352 - 1dot
Area(dot)
Original Detected the original width 0 to 300 - 1mm

Area(mm)
Size SW L Display ON/OFF of the original length sensor 0,1 - 1

(0: Off/1: On)
Setting: B/W Level1
6-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
setting variation
Original1 Set the threshold for original judgment 0 to 255 50 *1 1
40 *2

30 *2

30 *2
*1: With DP, *2: Without DF
NOTE
Decreasing the setting value makes the sensor's sensitivity high and allows to detect high density originals but
the original mat may be detected as an original.
Detection error may occur in any positions of original when values are too much difference each other.
Original mat Original

In the figure Original width size range
R/G/B
1 1 A4R㹼A3 8.5"㹼11"
1 2 3 2 2 B6R㹼A4R 5.5"㹼8.5"
297mm 3 3 㹼B6R 㹼5.5"

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U100 Main high voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust Main High Voltage Output)
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the main charge roller.
Purpose
Change the set value to adjust the image when an image failure (background image) occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Adj AC Bias *1 Adjust the main charge AC bias of each color
Set AC Auto Adj *1 Set the automatic AC bias adjustment
Set DC Auto Adj *2 Set the automatic DC bias adjustment
Set DC Bias Before Display the main charge DC bias correction value for each color. (Adjusted
value before correction)
Set DC Bias After Display the main charge DC bias base value for each color. (Adjusted value
after correction)
Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value
Set DC Bias After Manual adjustment for DC bias
Set Charger Freq *1 Set the frequency of the main charger
Chk Current *1 Display the electric current flows
Set AC Gain *1 Set the AC Gain
Delay Mode *2 Set the Cooling Mode

Setting: Adj AC Bias
Increasing the setting value makes the image density light, and decreasing makes it dark.
Set value is variable depending on the environment.
In case that [AC Auto Adj] is on, this function works in conditions and adjust to proper value automatically.
In case that [AC Auto Adj] is off, keep the changed value unless change it manually.

setting
AC Bias(K) Black main charge AC bias value 0 to 2300 1040
AC Bias(C) Cyan main charge AC bias value 0 to 2300 1040
AC Bias(M) Magenta main charge AC bias value 0 to 2300 1040
AC Bias(Y) Yellow main charge AC bias value 0 to 2300 1040

Setting: Set AC Auto Adj/Set DC Auto Adj
6-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
On Adjust automatically
Off Not adjusted automatically
Initial setting: On

Setting: Set DC Bias Before
1 Display the current setting.

Items Contents
DC1 Bias(K) Base of black main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(C) Base of cyan main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(M) Base of magenta main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(Y) Base of yellow main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
Setting: Set DC Bias After

Items Contents
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(C) Cyan main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(M) Magenta main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full speed)
Setting: Adj DC Bias
Developer bias leaking (High-end model), carrier developing (Low-end model) may occur by increasing too much high.

setting
DC2 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -200 to 200 0
DC2 Bias(C) Cyan main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -200 to 200 0
DC2 Bias(M) Magenta main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -200 to 200 0
DC2 Bias(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -200 to 200 0

Setting: Set DC Bias Manual
6-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
The setting is effective when [AC Auto Adj] is off.
Items Contents Setting range

DC Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias value 1 to 600 *1
1 to 2000 *2
DC Bias(C) Cyan main charge DC bias value 1 to 600 *1

1 to 2000 *2
DC Bias(M) Magenta main charge DC bias value 1 to 600 *1

1 to 2000 *2
AC Bias(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias value 1 to 600 *1

1 to 2000 *2

Initial setting
DC Bias(K) 370 370 370 1200 1200
DC Bias(C) 370 370 370 1200 1200
DC Bias(M) 370 370 370 1200 1200
AC Bias(Y) 370 370 370 1200 1200

Setting: Set Charger Freq
Interference fringes may occur by changing the setting.

High *1 Set the frequency of the main charger (High speed) 2000 to 3300
Generally Set the frequency of the main charger (Normal speed) 2000 to 3300
3/4 Set the frequency of the main charger (3/4 speed) 2000 to 3300
Half Set the frequency of the main charger (Half speed) 2000 to 3300

Initial setting
Generally 2362 2992 2362 - -
High 2355 2992 2362 - -
3/4 2362 2362 2362 - -
Half 2362 2362 2362 - -

Setting: Chk Current
6-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
K Black inflow current
C Cyan inflow current
M Magenta inflow current
Y Yellow inflow current
Do not run [Chk Current] for more than 10 seconds.

Run drum refresh after this mode since discharge product stick on drum.
Setting: Set AC Gain

Items Contents
Mode Multiplication Mode setting
Value Multiplication value setting
Setting: Mode

Items Contents
Auto Automatic environmental setting
Mode Charge Multiplication Mode
Initial setting: Auto

Setting: Value

setting
Multiple Value Charge Multiplication value 0.8 to 1.3 1.0

Setting: Delay Mode

Items Contents
On Set the Delay Mode
Off Release the Delay Mode
Initial setting: Off

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 1st Transfer Voltage Output)
Contents
Set the primary transfer control voltage
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Setting

Items Contents
Voltage Set the primary transfer feedback voltage
Altitude Adjustment Altitude Adjustment setting
Current Set the primary transfer feedback current
Final Current Set the primary transfer feedback final current
Prohibit Reflection Set the primary transfer feedback correction ON/OFF setting
Force Execute Set the manual primary transfer feedback
Env adj prohibit Set prohibiting the environmental correction of the primary transfer feedback
Setting: Voltage

Items Contents
Target Set the primary transfer feedback voltage target
Step Set the primary transfer feedback voltage step
Value Set the primary transfer feedback voltage (1st side)
Value 2nd Set the primary transfer feedback voltage (2nd side)
6-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Target
setting variation
K Black primary transfer feedback voltage target 0 to 290 70 -
C Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage target 0 to 290 70 -
M Magenta primary transfer feedback voltage target 0 to 290 70 -
Y Yellow primary transfer feedback voltage target 0 to 290 70 -

Setting: Step
setting variation
Step Primary transfer feedback voltage step 0 to 290 30 -
6-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Value
variation
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage Constant speed) 0 to 290 -
Normal(C) Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage (Constant speed) 0 to 290 -
Normal(M) Magenta primary transfer feedback voltage (Constant 0 to 290 -

speed)
Normal(Y) Yellow primary transfer feedback voltage (Constant 0 to 290 -

speed)
B/W B/W primary transfer feedback voltage (Half speed) 0 to 290 -

(B/W printing at Constant speed)
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage (3/4 speed) 0 to 290 -
3/4(C) Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage (3/4 speed) 0 to 290 -
3/4(M) Magenta primary transfer feedback voltage (3/4 speed) 0 to 290 -
3/4(Y) Yellow primary transfer feedback voltage (3/4 speed) 0 to 290 -
B/W 3/4 B/W primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -

(B/W printing at 3/4 speed)
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage (Half speed) 0 to 290 -
Half(C) Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage (Half speed) 0 to 290 -
Half(M) Magenta primary transfer feedback voltage (Half speed) 0 to 290 -
Half(Y) Yellow primary transfer feedback voltage (Half speed) 0 to 290 -
B/W Half B/W primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -

(B/W printing at half speed)
6-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Initial setting
Normal(K) 199 194 180 138 130
Normal(C) 185 181 167 138 130
Normal(M) 185 181 167 138 130
Normal(Y) 183 178 165 134 126
B/W 230 210 190 130 120
3/4(K) 180 180 161 130 112
3/4(C) 167 167 147 130 112
3/4(M) 167 167 147 130 112
3/4(Y) 165 165 145 126 108
B/W 3/4 180 180 160 120 110
Half(K) 161 157 142 112 112
Half(C) 147 143 129 112 112
Half(M) 147 143 129 112 112
Half(Y) 145 141 126 108 108
B/W Half 160 150 140 110 110
6-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Value 2nd
variation
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage Constant speed) 0 to 290 -
Normal(C) Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage (Constant speed) 0 to 290 -
Normal(M) Magenta primary transfer feedback voltage (Constant speed) 0 to 290 -
Normal(Y) Yellow primary transfer feedback voltage (Constant speed) 0 to 290 -
B/W B/W primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -

3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage (3/4 speed) 0 to 290 -
3/4(C) Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage (3/4 speed) 0 to 290 -
3/4(M) Magenta primary transfer feedback voltage (3/4 speed) 0 to 290 -
3/4(Y) Yellow primary transfer feedback voltage (3/4 speed) 0 to 290 -
B/W 3/4 B/W primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -

Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage (Half speed) 0 to 290 -
Half(C) Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage (Half speed) 0 to 290 -
Half(M) Magenta primary transfer feedback voltage (Half speed) 0 to 290 -
Half(Y) Yellow primary transfer feedback voltage (Half speed) 0 to 290 -
B/W Half B/W primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -

6-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Initial setting
Normal(K) 184 179 166 136 127
Normal(C) 182 177 163 136 127
Normal(M) 182 177 163 136 127
Normal(Y) 180 176 162 131 123
B/W 200 180 170 140 120
3/4(K) 166 166 146 128 110
3/4(C) 163 163 143 128 110
3/4(M) 163 163 143 128 110
3/4(Y) 162 162 142 123 105
B/W 3/4 170 170 150 140 110
Half(K) 146 142 128 110 110
Half(C) 143 140 125 110 110
Half(M) 143 140 125 110 110
Half(Y) 142 138 124 105 105
B/W Half 150 150 135 140 110

Setting: Altitude Adjustment

Items Contents
1st Side Altitude Adjustment setting (1st side)
2nd Side Altitude Adjustment setting (2nd side)
Setting: 1st Side
6-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
variation
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -
C Altitude Adjustment setting (C) -250 to 250 -
M Altitude Adjustment setting (M) -250 to 250 -
Y Altitude Adjustment setting (Y) -250 to 250 -
Initial setting
K -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
C -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
M -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
Y -2 -2 -2 -1 -1

Setting: 2nd Side
variation
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -
C Altitude Adjustment setting (C) -250 to 250 -
M Altitude Adjustment setting (M) -250 to 250 -
Y Altitude Adjustment setting (Y) -250 to 250 -
Initial setting
K -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
C -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
M -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
Y -2 -2 -2 -1 -1

Setting: Current

Items Contents
Target Primary transfer feedback current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer feedback current target setting (2nd side)
6-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Target
Items Contents Setting Data
range variation
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target (Constant speed) 0 to 500 -
Normal(C) Cyan primary transfer feedback current target (Constant speed) 0 to 500 -
Normal(M) Magenta primary transfer feedback current target (Constant speed) 0 to 500 -
Normal(Y) Yellow primary transfer feedback current target (Constant speed) 0 to 500 -
B/W Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -

3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target (3/4 speed) 0 to 500 -
3/4(C) Cyan primary transfer feedback current target (3/4 speed) 0 to 500 -
3/4(M) Magenta primary transfer feedback current target (3/4 speed) 0 to 500 -
3/4(Y) Yellow primary transfer feedback current target (3/4 speed) 0 to 500 -
B/W 3/4 Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -

Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target (Half speed) 0 to 500 -
Half(C) Cyan primary transfer feedback current target (Half speed) 0 to 500 -
Half(M) Magenta primary transfer feedback current target (Half speed) 0 to 500 -
Half(Y) Yellow primary transfer feedback current target (Half speed) 0 to 500 -
B/W Half B/W primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -

6-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Initial setting
Normal(K) 242 223 174 90 77
Normal(C) 189 174 136 90 77
Normal(M) 189 174 136 90 77
Normal(Y) 181 167 130 85 72
B/W 260 200 156 82 71
3/4(K) 174 174 121 78 56
3/4(C) 136 136 95 78 56
3/4(M) 136 136 95 78 56
3/4(Y) 130 130 91 74 53
B/W 3/4 156 156 109 71 51
Half(K) 121 113 87 56 56
Half(C) 95 88 68 56 56
Half(M) 95 88 68 56 56
Half(Y) 91 85 65 53 53
B/W Half 260 200 156 51 51
6-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Target Value

Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.

range variation



6-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Initial setting
Normal(K) 165 155 119 87 74
Normal(C) 157 147 113 87 74
Normal(M) 157 147 113 87 74
Normal(Y) 153 143 110 81 69
B/W 260 200 156 82 70
3/4(K) 133 133 93 76 54
3/4(C) 127 127 89 76 54
3/4(M) 127 127 89 76 54
3/4(Y) 124 124 87 70 51
B/W 3/4 133 133 93 72 51
Half(K) 93 87 67 54 54
Half(C) 89 83 64 54 54
Half(M) 89 83 64 54 54
Half(Y) 93 87 67 54 54
B/W Half 180 155 119 51 51

Setting: Final Current

Items Contents
Target Primary transfer final current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer final current target setting (2nd side)
6-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Target
range variation



6-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Initial setting
Normal(K) 242 223 174 90 77
Normal(C) 189 174 136 90 77
Normal(M) 189 174 136 90 77
Normal(Y) 181 167 130 85 72
B/W 260 200 156 82 71
3/4(K) 174 174 121 78 56
3/4(C) 136 136 95 78 56
3/4(M) 136 136 95 78 56
3/4(Y) 130 130 91 74 53
B/W 3/4 156 156 109 71 51
Half(K) 121 113 87 56 56
Half(C) 95 88 68 56 56
Half(M) 95 88 68 56 56
Half(Y) 91 85 65 53 53
B/W Half 260 200 156 51 51
6-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
range variation



6-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Initial setting
Normal(K) 165 155 119 87 74
Normal(C) 157 147 113 87 74
Normal(M) 157 147 113 87 74
Normal(Y) 153 143 110 81 69
B/W 180 155 119 82 70
3/4(K) 133 133 93 76 54
3/4(C) 127 127 89 76 54
3/4(M) 127 127 89 76 54
3/4(Y) 124 124 87 70 51
B/W 3/4 133 133 93 72 51
Half(K) 93 87 67 54 54
Half(C) 89 83 64 54 54
Half(M) 89 83 64 54 54
Half(Y) 87 81 62 51 51
B/W Half 180 155 119 51 51

Setting: Prohibit Reflection

Items Contents
On Set of prohibiting the reflection of the primary transfer feedback result On
Off Set of prohibiting the reflection of the primary transfer feedback result

Setting: Force Execute

The operation starts.
Items Contents
Execute Forcibly executes the primary transfer feedback
6-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Env adj prohibit

Items Contents
On Set of prohibiting the environmental correction of the primary transfer feedback On
Off Set of prohibiting the environmental correction of the primary transfer feedback Off
Default setting: Off
NOTE
is running.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U106 Secondary transfer voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 2nd Transfer Roller Output)
Contents
Set the secondary transfer control voltage.
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Light/Normal1 Transfer control value for Light and Normal 1
Normal2/3 Transfer control value for Normal 2, 3
Heavy1 Transfer control value for Heavy 1
Heavy2/3 Transfer control value for Heavy 2, 3
Heavy4/5 Transfer control value for Heavy 4, 5
Transparency Transfer control value for Transparency
Bias Bias setting
Setting: Light/Normal1

Items Contents
1st 1st side transfer control value at full speed
2nd 2nd side transfer control value at full speed
1st 3/4(Gloss) 1st side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
2nd 3/4(Gloss) 2nd side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
1st B/W *1 1st side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
2nd B/W *1 2nd side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
6-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: 1st/2nd/1st (3/4 Gloss)/2nd (3/4 Gloss)/1st (B/W)/2nd (B/W)
6-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
range variatio
n
Width=105 Set paper width=105 2 to 200 1[uA]
[1st]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 132 120 91 84 69
Width=210 102 93 69 65 54
Width=297 71 65 50 50 41
[2nd]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 166 158 126 121 98
Width=210 114 104 81 75 71
Width=297 66 61 48 49 41
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 91 91 64 48 39
Width=210 69 69 48 41 35
Width=297 50 50 35 39 33
[ 2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 118 118 82 77 50
Width=210 81 81 57 47 46
Width=297 48 48 34 28 29
[ 1st B/W]
Initial setting
6-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ppm
Width=105 132 0 0 - -
Width=210 102 0 0 - -
Width=297 71 0 0 - -
2nd B/W *1
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 166 140 111 - -
Width=210 114 103 92 - -
Width=297 100 93 87 - -

Setting: Normal2/3

Items Contents
1st 1st side transfer control value at full speed
2nd 2nd side transfer control value at full speed
1st 3/4(Gloss) 1st side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
2nd 3/4(Gloss) 2nd side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
1st B/W *1 1st side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
2nd B/W *1 2nd side transfer control value of B/W at full speed

Setting: 1st/2nd/1st (3/4 Gloss)/2nd (3/4 Gloss)/1st (B/W)/2nd (B/W)
6-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
range variatio
n
[1st]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 132 120 91 84 69
Width=210 102 93 69 65 54
Width=297 71 65 50 50 41
[2nd]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 166 158 126 121 98
Width=210 114 104 81 75 71
Width=297 66 61 48 49 41
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 91 91 64 48 39
Width=210 69 69 48 41 35
Width=297 50 50 35 39 33
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 118 118 82 77 50
Width=210 81 81 57 47 46
Width=297 48 48 34 28 29
[1st B/W]
Initial setting
6-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ppm
Width=105 132 0 0 - -
Width=210 102 0 0 - -
Width=297 71 0 0 - -
2nd B/W *1
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 166 0 0 - -
Width=210 114 0 0 - -
Width=297 71 0 0 - -

Setting: Heavy1

Items Contents
1st 3/4 1st side transfer control value at full speed
2nd 3/4 2nd side transfer control value at full speed
Setting: 1st 3/4 / 2nd 3/4
6-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]

range variatio
n
1st 3/4
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 91 91 64 37 36
Width=210 69 69 48 31 30
Width=297 50 50 35 31 30
[2nd 3/4]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 118 118 82 49 49
Width=210 81 81 57 45 45
Width=297 48 48 34 26 26
Heavy2/3

Items Contents
1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed
2nd Half 2nd side transfer control value at half speed
Setting: 1st Half/2nd Half
6-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
range variatio
n
[1st Half]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 56 52 40 33 33
Width=210 46 42 32 29 29
Width=297 45 42 32 27 27
[2nd Half]
Initial setting
]

ppm
Width=105 77 71 55 44 44
Width=210 71 65 50 40 40
Width=297 40 37 28 23 23
6-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Heavy4/5

Items Contents
1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed
2nd Half 2nd side transfer control value at half speed
Setting: 1st Half/2nd Half
range variatio
n
[1st Half]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 56 52 40 38 38
Width=210 46 42 32 26 26
Width=297 45 42 32 26 26
[2nd Half]
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 77 71 55 48 48
Width=210 71 65 50 36 36
Width=297 40 37 28 26 26

Setting: Transparency
6-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
range variatio
n
Initial setting
ppm
Width=105 60 56 43 35 35
Width=210 51 4 37 30 30
Width=297 40 37 29 29 29

Setting: Bias
variatio
n
Reverse Reverse bias setting (Full speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse Half Reverse bias setting (Half speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse 3/4 Reverse bias setting (3/4 speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse B/W Reverse bias setting (B/W) 0 to 200 -
Cleaning Cleaning (Full speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]
Cleaning Half Cleaning (Half speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]
Cleaning 3/4 Cleaning (3/4 speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]

Initial setting
ppm
Reverse 0 0 0 0 0
Reverse Half 0 0 0 0 0
Reverse 3/4 0 0 0 0 0
Reverse B/W 0 0 0 - -
Cleaning 67 62 48 38 31
Cleaning Half 50 46 36 29 23
Cleaning 3/4 56 52 40 32 26
6-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 1st Transfer Unit Cleaning Output)
Contents
Belt(A)/(B): Set the transfer belt cleaning control voltage
1St sheet CLN B/W: Printing size gets off from cleaning position.
Purpose
Belt(A): Change the setting when offset images appear because of the transfer belt cleaning failure.
1St sheet CLN B/W: Set if transfer belt cleaning failure happen only in the first page for continuous B/W printing.
NOTE
First copy time gets slower with this function.
Method

Items Contents
Belt(A) Belt A setting
Belt(B) Belt B setting
1st sheet CLN B/W *1 Set cleaning mode after B/W printing

Setting: Belt(A)
variatio
n
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Half Half speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
B/W *1 B/W setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]

Initial setting
ppm
Full 15 15 15 45 43
Half 10 10 10 41 41
B/W *1 15 15 15 45 43
3/4 10 10 10 43 43
6-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Belt(B)
variatio
n
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Half Half speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
B/W B/W setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Initial setting
ppm
Full 15 15 15 30 25
Half 10 10 10 21 21
B/W 15 15 15 30 25
3/4 10 10 10 24 25

Setting: 1st sheet CLN B/W

Items Contents
On Set on for cleaning mode after B/W printing
Off Set off for cleaning mode after B/W printing
NOTE
is running.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment

(Message: Adjust Separation Shift Bias)
Description
Separation shift bias OFF timing
Purpose
Change the setting value if paper separation failure occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Output Separation Shift bias output adjustment
Output 3/4 Separation Shift bias output adjustment at 3/4 speed
Output B/W *1 Separation Shift bias output adjustment at B/W mode
Timing ON/OFF timing adjustment by paper position

Setting: Output
variatio
n
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting for 0 to 60 1[uA]
front side of light paper at full
speed
Light 2nd Separation shift bias setting for 0 to 60 1[uA]

back side of light paper at full
speed
Normal 1st Separation shift bias setting for 0 to 60 1[uA]

front side of normal paper at full
speed
Normal 2nd Separation shift bias setting for 0 to 60 1[uA]

back side of normal paper at full
speed
Add Normal Lead Additive setting for the leading -60 to 60 1[uA]
edge of normal paper
Heavy/Transparency Separation shift bias setting for 0 to 60 1[uA]

Heavy and Transparency
Initial setting
ppm
Light 1st 20 17 14 5 5
Light 2nd 20 17 14 5 5
6-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ppm
Normal 1st 5 5 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 5 5 5 5 5
Add Normal Lead 1 2 2 5 5
Heavy/ 0 0 0 0 0
Transparency

Setting: Output 3/4 / Output B/W
variatio
n
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting for front side of light 0 to 60 1[uA]
paper at full speed
Light 2nd Separation shift bias setting for back side of light 0 to 60 1[uA]
paper at full speed
Normal 1st Separation shift bias setting for front side of 0 to 60 1[uA]
normal paper at full speed
Normal 2nd Separation shift bias setting for back side of 0 to 60 1[uA]
normal paper at full speed
Initial setting
Output 3/4
ppm
Light 1st 14 14 14 5 5
Light 2nd 14 14 14 5 5
Output B/W
ppm
Light 1st 20 17 14 5 5
Light 2nd 20 17 14 5 5

Setting: Timing
6-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
setting variatio
n
On Timing Lead Separation shift bias ON timing -200 to 200 -20 1mm
at the leading edge
On Timing Center Separation shift bias ON timing -200 to 200 30 1mm

at the center of page
Off Timing Separation shift bias OFF -200 to 200 10 1mm

timing
NOTE
is running.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U110 Drum counter

(Message: Drum Unit Counter)
Contents
Display the drum counter values.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method

The drum counter is displayed.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan drum counter
M Display the magenta drum counter
Y Display the yellow drum counter
K Display the black drum counter
Completion
2 Press [Stop] key.

6-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U115 LSU driving time

(Message: LSU Driving Time)
Contents
Display the LSU driving time.
Purpose
Use for check LSU life or change/reset
Method

Display the count.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the LSU drive time
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U117 Drum unit number

(Message: Drum Unit Number)
Contents
Display the drum number.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Method

Display the drum number.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan drum number
M Display the magenta drum number
Y Display the yellow drum number
K Display the black drum number
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U118 Drum unit history

(Message: Drum Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method

Select the item to refer to.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan drum history
M Display the magenta drum history
Y Display the yellow drum history
K Display the black drum history
Display the machine serial number and 3 items of the drum counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 The drum counter history
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U119 Setting the drum

(Message: Set Up Drum Unit)
Contents
Set the initial LSU laser power based on the drum sensitivity
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Send the drum sensitivity data in EEPROM to engine PWB and correct LSU
laser power.

Start the drum setup operation.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U120 Drum drive distance counter

(Message: Drum Driving Distance Counter)
Contents
Display the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Display the drum drive distance counter.
Method

Display the count.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan drum drive distance counter
M Display the magenta drum drive distance counter
Y Display the yellow drum drive distance counter
K Display the black drum drive distance counter
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U122 Display the primary transfer unit number

(Message: 1st Transfer Unit Number)
Description
Display the primary transfer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the primary transfer unit number.
Method

Display the primary transfer unit number
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U123 Primary transfer unit history

(Message: 1st Transfer Unit History)
Description
Display the machine number and the primary transfer unit counter history
Purpose
Confirm the machine number and primary transfer unit counter
Method

Display the machine serial number and 3 items of the primary transfer unit counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine Number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Primary transfer unit counter history
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U127 Clearing the transfer count

(Message: Clear Transfer Roller Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counts for the transfer high-voltage output correction etc.
Purpose
Verify the primary/secondary transfer unit counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacement
Method

The transfer counter value appears.
Items Contents
Mid Trans(Cnt) Display the primary transfer counts
2nd Trans(Cnt) Displaying the secondary transfer counts
Mid Trans(Time) Display the primary transfer unit drive time counts
2nd Trans(Time) Display the secondary transfer unit drive time counts
Method: Clear
1 Select [Clear].
2 Press [Start] key and clear the counter value.

Only 2nd Trans(Cnt)/2nd Trans(Time)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U128 Transfer timing adjustment

(Message: Adjust Transfer Timing)
Contents
Adjust On/Off timing of the transfer high voltage output.
Purpose
Prevent paper from being rolled up by the drum.
Setting
range variatio
n
On Timing 1st 1st side transfer On timing adjustment -200 to 200 0.1 ms
value
On Timing 2nd 2nd transfer On timing adjustment -200 to 200 0.1 ms

value
Off Timing Transfer Off timing adjustment value -200 to 200 0.1mm
Initial setting
ppm
On Timing 1st 72 72 71 70 70
On Timing 2nd 72 72 71 70 70
Off Timing 10 13 16 20 20
On timing conversion list

ppm
Distance(mm) per 0.3 0.253 0.2 0.161 0.13
1(ms)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U131 Toner sensor control voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust Toner Sensor Control Voltage)
Description
Adjust the toner sensor control voltage
Purpose
If control values can not be read correctly because of EEPROM failure, use manual adjustment and fix control
value temporary.
Method

Items Contents
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
Method: Auto
1 The current setting is displayed.

Items Contents
Default(C) Toner sensor C default control voltage
Default(M) Toner sensor M default control voltage
Default(Y) Toner sensor Y default control voltage
Default(K) Toner sensor K default control voltage
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U132 Forcible toner supply operation

(Message: Supply Toner Forcefully)
Contents
Toner is supplied forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply level.
Purpose
Execute if toner empty is often detected.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Installs toner

Run toner supply until the toner sensor output value gets the toner supply level.
Items Contents
Supply(C) Cyan toner supply level
Supply(M) Magenta toner supply level
Supply(Y) Yellow toner supply level
Supply(K) Black toner supply level
Sensor(C) Cyan toner sensor output value
Sensor(M) Magenta toner sensor output value
Sensor(Y) Yellow toner sensor output value
Sensor(K) Black toner sensor output value

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U135 Checking the toner motor operation

(Message: Check Toner Motor Operation)
Contents
Drives the toner motor.
Purpose
Execute to check the toner motor operation.
IMPORTANT
If driven for a long time or several times repeatedly, the developer unit will be full of toner
inside and it may lock up.
Method

Items Contents
Toner Drive the toner motor (All Color)
Toner(BK) Drive the toner motor (Only K)
Hopper Drive the toner motor
Sensor(C) *1 Toner sensor output deference (C)
Sensor(M) *1 Toner sensor output deference (M)
Sensor(Y) *1 Toner sensor output deference (Y)
Sensor(K) *1 Toner sensor output deference (K)
*1: Display only (Update regularly)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U136 Toner level detection setting

(Message: Set Toner Near End Detection)
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of toner near end earlier than the current setting if user feels it is too short between near end
and empty.
Setting

Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.

setting variatio
n
CMY Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow toner level 0 to 9 3 -
setting
K Setting the black toner level 0 to 9 3 -
If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection
NOTE
The setting value can not work if the change has done while “Toner Low” is already displaying.
Main switch has to be turned on and off in case of changing the value while “Toner Low” is already displaying.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U139 Temperature, humidity

(Message: Temperature/Humidity)
Contents
Display internal and external temperature, and external humidity.
Purpose
Check internal and external temperature, and external humidity.
Method

Items Contents
Ext/Int Machine inside/outside temperature (?) and machine outside humidity (%)
LSU Machine inside temperature around LSU (?)
Developing Machine inside temperature around Developer (?)
Method: Ext/Int
1 Display the current temperature and humidity

Items Contents
External Temp Machine outside temperature (?)
External Humidity Machine outside humidity (%)
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature (?)
Method: LSU

Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Laser Scanner Unit (?)
Method: Developing

Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Developer Unit (?)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U140 Developer bias adjustment

(Message: Adjust Developing Bias)
Contents
Display the developer bias set values or Set high altitude mode.
Purpose
Execute to check/change the developer bias values.
Method

Items Contents
Sleeve DC *1 Set the developer sleeve roller DC bias.
Sleeve AC *1 Set the developer sleeve roller AC bias.
Mag DC Set the developer magnet roller DC bias.
Mag AC Set the developer magnet roller AC bias.
Sleeve Freq *1 Set the developer sleeve roller frequency.
Sleeve Duty *1 Set the developer sleeve roller duty.
Mag Freq *2 Set the developer magnet roller frequency.
Mag Duty Set the developer magnet roller duty.
AC Calib *1 Execute and set AC Calibration
Image Preference Set the toner concentration
Altitude Adjustment Set the altitude adjustment mode
Freq Mode *1 Set the develop frequency mode
Mag DC Offset *1 Set offset value of the developer magnet roller DC bias.
6-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Sleeve DC
]
Solid Image
On Off
C *1 Cyan developer sleeve DC bias setting 0 to 100 50 60
M *1 Magenta developer sleeve DC bias setting 0 to 100 50 60
Y *1 Yellow developer sleeve DC bias setting 0 to 100 50 60
K *1 Black developer sleeve DC bias setting 0 to 100 60 60
High *2 Developer sleeve DC bias setting (High speed) 0 to 100 60 60
*1: High-end model only, *2: 60 ppm model only

Setting: Sleeve AC
]

setting
C *1 Cyan developer sleeve AC bias setting 1000 to 1900 1400
M *1 Magenta developer sleeve AC bias setting 1000 to 1900 1400
Y *1 Yellow developer sleeve AC bias setting 1000 to 1900 1400
K *1 Black developer sleeve AC bias setting 1000 to 1900 1400
High *2 Developer sleeve AC bias setting (High speed) 1000 to 1900 1400
6-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Mag DC
C Cyan developer magnet roller DC bias setting 150 to 500 360 *2
350 *3
M Magenta developer magnet roller DC bias setting 150 to 500 360 *2

350 *3
Y Yellow developer magnet roller DC bias setting 150 to 500 360 *2

350 *3
K Black developer magnet roller DC bias setting 150 to 500 360 *2

350 *3
High *1 Developer magnet roller DC bias setting (High 150 to 500 360
speed)
*1: High-end model only, *2: 60 ppm model only, *3: Low-end model only

Setting: Mag AC
High-end Model
]
Solid Image
On Off
C Cyan developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2200 2000
M Magenta developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2200 2000
Y Yellow developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2200 2000
K Black developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2000 2000
High *1 Developer magnet roller AC bias setting (High 1500 to 2800 2000 2000
speed)
*1: 60 ppm model only

Low-end model
setting
C Cyan developer magnet roller AC bias setting 400 to 1400 1200
M Magenta developer magnet roller AC bias setting 400 to 1400 1200
Y Yellow developer magnet roller AC bias setting 400 to 1400 1200
CMY CMY developer magnet roller AC bias setting 400 to 1400 1200
K Black developer magnet roller AC bias setting 400 to 1400 2000
6-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Sleeve Freq
Items Contents Setting
range
CMY *1 CMY developer sleeve roller frequency setting (Full 3500 to 4900
speed)
K *1 K developer sleeve roller frequency setting (Full 3500 to 4900

speed)
High *2 Developer sleeve roller frequency setting (High 3500 to 4900

speed)

Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35
ppm
CMY 4000 4189 4000
K 4724 4488 4724
High 4710 - -

Setting: Sleeve Duty
range
CMY *1 CMY developer sleeve roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99
speed)
K *1 K developer sleeve roller duty setting (Full speed) 1 to 99
High *2 Developer sleeve roller duty setting (High speed) 1 to 99

Initial setting
ppm
CMY 43 43 40
K 43 43 40
High 43 - -
6-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Mag Freq
Full Developer magnet roller frequency setting (Full 3500 to 4900 4000
speed)
Press [Start] key to fix the setting.
Setting: Mag Duty
CMY *1 CMY developer magnet roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99 68
speed)
K *1 Developer magnet roller duty setting (Full speed) 1 to 99 68
High *2 Developer magnet roller duty setting (High speed) 1 to 99 68
Full *3 Developer magnet roller duty setting (Full speed) 1 to 99 50
*1: High-end model only, *2: 60 ppm model only, *3: Low-end model only

Setting: AC Calib

Items Contents
Calibration Executing AC Calibration (Developer AC bias setting)
Execution timing
Setup at high altitude
When replacing the developer unit or drum unit
When the developer leakage occurs
When the solid image density is low after executing the AC calibration
Magnification *1 Setting the AC calibration target bias value

Execution timing
When the developer leak occurs after executing the AC calibration
6-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Calibration
2 Changes the developer to execute AC calibration.

C Turns on/off Cyan developer 0: Off/1: On
M Turns on/off Magenta developer 0: Off/1: On
Y Turns on/off Yellow developer 0: Off/1: On
K Turns on/off Black developer 0: Off/1: On
Execute Executing Calibration
3 Select [Execute].
4 Press [Start] key. AC calibration is started.
NOTE
An error code appears when there is an error.
Setting: Magnification
C Set for Cyan developing leak outbreak -10 to 15
M Set for Magenta developing leak outbreak -10 to 15
Y Set for Yellow developing leak outbreak -10 to 15
K Set for Black developing leak outbreak -10 to 15
Initial setting
ppm
C 11 11 7
M 11 11 7
Y 11 11 7
K 11 11 7
6-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Image Preference
Copy Set the copy image density -1 to 1 0

If the set value is reduced, toner consumption decreases.
Setting: Altitude Adjustment

Items Contents
Normal Set 1000 m or less
1001 to 2000 m Set at 1001 to 2000 m
2001 to 3000 m Set at 2001 to 3000 m
3001 to 3500 m Set at 3001 to 3500 m
Initial setting: Normal

Setting: Freq Mode

Items Contents
Mode0 Set to Mode0
Mode1 Set to Mode1
Initial setting: Mode1
Setting: Mag DC Offset

Items Contents
Half Half speed setting
3/4 3/4 speed setting
6-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Half
K Developer magnet roller DC offset (K) -100 to 0 -20
C Developer magnet roller DC offset (C) -100 to 0 -40
M Developer magnet roller DC offset (M) -100 to 0 -40
Y Developer magnet roller DC offset (Y) -100 to 0 -40

Setting: 3/4
K Developer magnet roller DC offset (K) -100 to 0 -10
C Developer magnet roller DC offset (C) -100 to 0 -20
M Developer magnet roller DC offset (M) -100 to 0 -20
Y Developer magnet roller DC offset (Y) -100 to 0 -20

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U147 Setting the toner applying mode

(Message: Set Toner Apply Mode)
Contents
Mode selection for removing overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner applying mode). Also, Set the
operation that is to take back accumulated toner on the developer blade to the developer unit (vibration motor
control).
Purpose
Change the setting to reduce the toner applying amount. Execute to change the vibration motor control frequency.
IMPORTANT
Image density gets lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Method

Items Contents
Timing Set the toner apply timing
Mode Set the toner applying mode.
Upper limit Set the upper coverage limit of the toner applying amount for each operation
mode.
Setting: Timing
Job End Set the toner apply count (job end) 1 to 255 12

Setting: Mode

Items Contents
On Execute the toner applying operation
Off Not to execute the toner applying operation
Initial setting: On

Setting: Upper limit
6-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents Setting range Data variation
Value Set the upper coverage limit of the toner applying 0 to 1.0 *1 0.1%
amount for each operation mode. 0 to 2.0 *2
*1: Low-end model, *2: High-end model

Initial setting
ppm
Value 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U148 Drum refresh mode setting

(Message: Set Drum Refresh Mode)
Contents
Set the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting
setting variati
on
Mode Set Auto drum refresh 0:Off *2 2 1
1: Short
2: Standard
3: Long
Void line Aging Set the void line prevention aging 0: Off 0 1
*1
1: On
Grinder Time Set time for drum polishing 0 to 255 0 1 sec

*1

Press [Start] key to fix the setting.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U155 Toner sensor output

(Message: Toner Sensor Output Value)
Contents
Display the toner sensor output
Purpose
Check output value by each color when an image failure occurs.
Method
2 Select the item to refer to.

Switched to each reference screen.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Display the waste toner sensor value
Toner Display the toner sensor value and supply level value for each color
Calibration Executing the calibration for the waste toner
Method: Waste Toner
1 Display the waste toner sensor value.

Items Contents
Full Display the waste toner sensor value 1 (WTS1)
Method: Toner
1 Display the toner sensor value.

Items Contents
Sensor(C) Display the deference between cyan toner sensor output value and target
Sensor(M) Display the deference between magenta toner sensor output value and target
Sensor(Y) Display the deference between yellow toner sensor output value and target
Sensor(K) Display the deference between black toner sensor output value and target
Method: Calibration
1 Display each setting values.

Items Contents
Waste Toner Display the waste toner weight detection sensor output value
None Display the adjustment value (no bottle)
Empty Display the adjustment value (empty bottle)
Level Display the accumulate waste toner amount
Execute Executing the calibration
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U156 Toner control level adjustment

(Message: Adjust Toner Control Level)
Contents
Display and adjust the toner supply level for each color.
Purpose
Display and adjust the toner empty level for each color.
Setting
2 Select [Empty].
Items Contents
Empty Display the toner empty level
3 Display the toner supply level for each color.

Items Contents
C Display the cyan toner empty level
M Display the magenta toner empty level
Y Display the yellow toner empty level
K Display the black toner empty level
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U157 Developer drive time

(Message: Developing Unit Drive Time)
Contents
Display the developer drive time to refer for the toner concentration control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time since replacing the developer unit.
Method

Display the developer drive time.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer unit drive time.
M Display the Magenta developer unit drive time.
Y Display the Yellow developer unit drive time.
K Display the Black developer unit drive time.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U158 Developer counter

(Message: Developing Unit Counter)
Contents
Display the developer counter
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method

The developer count is displayed.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan developer counter.
M Display the magenta developer counter.
Y Display the yellow developer counter.
K Display the black developer counter.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U159 Toner container function setting

(Message: Set Toner Container Function)
Description
Set container cover setting and guidance display for lock release or waste toner for black toner bottle.
Purpose
This mode is to set container cover setting and guidance display for lock release. Or change setting for black
toner container as waste toner bottle.
NOTE
In case that container cover lock release regularly, set it disable.
Method

Items Contents
Container Lock Container Lock setting
Container Unlock Display Display setting of the toner container lock
Waste Box Setting Setting reuse of the toner container as the waste toner box
Setting: Container Lock

Items Contents
Off Lock disabled
Low Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Low
Empty Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Empty
Initial setting: Empty
NOTE
Setting Off gets all container cover open when front cover open.
6-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Container Unlock Display

Items Contents
On Display the lock release option on [System Menu][Adjust/Maintenance]
Off Not display the lock release option on [System Menu][Adjust/

Maintenance]
Initial setting:
10 (100V model) Off
1 (120V model) Off
220V-240V Machine: Off

Setting: Waste Box Setting
setting variati
on
Message Set the message display to replace the waste On/Off *1 -
toner box with the BK toner container
Waste Toner Level Set the waste toner amount to display message 0 to 20 20 10%
*2
and stop job.
*1: 100V model: Off, 120/220-240V model: On

*2: It can set only if the message setting is on.
NOTE
Ether waste toner replace message comes up or stops job, unless waste toner is below the waste toner level
setting at timing of toner empty. (Replace message comes up if it is above the setting.)
Turn off/on message comes up after setting.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U161 Fuser temperature adjustment

(Message: Adjust Fuser Control Temperature)
Contents
Set the fuser temperature.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl, creases and
fusing failure on thick paper.
Method

Items Contents
Warm Up Control temperature except at printing
Print Control temperature at printing
Grain Mode Control for the impalpable unevenness in glossiness
Ready Time Adjust Setting of fuser temperature control in environment
Setting: Warm Up
Ready(Center) Control temperature at displaying Ready 100 to 200
(Center)
Ready(Edge) Control temperature at displaying Ready 100 to 200

(Edge)
Ready(Press) Control temperature at displaying Ready 0 to 200

(Press)
Drive(Center) Stable temperature during driving (Center) 100 to 200
Wait(Center) Stable temperature during halt (Center) 100 to 200
Low Power Control temperature at low power consumption 0 to 200

(Center) (Center)
Full Speed Shift Full speed shift temperature (Center) 0 to 200

(Center)
Pressure (Center) Press start temperature (Center) 0 to 200
6-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Initial setting
100V
ppm
Ready(Center) 160 155 135 135 130
Ready(Edge) 125 120 105 105 100
Ready(Press) 30 30 30 20 20
Drive(Center) 165 160 140 140 135
Wait(Center) 160 155 145 130 125
Low Power 85 85 85 85 85
(Center)
Full Speed Shift 50 50 50 50 50

(Center)
Pressure (Center) 110 105 100 95 90
11 (120V)
ppm
Ready(Center) 170 165 145 145 140
Ready(Edge) 135 130 105 105 100
Ready(Press) 40 40 40 30 30
Drive(Center) 175 170 150 150 145
Wait(Center) 170 165 155 140 135
Low Power 85 85 85 85 85
(Center)

(Center)
Pressure (Center) 120 115 110 105 100
220-240V
ppm
Ready(Center) 170 165 145 145 140
Ready(Edge) 135 130 105 105 100
Ready(Press) 40 40 40 30 30
Drive(Center) 175 170 150 150 145
Wait(Center) 170 165 155 140 135
Low Power 85 85 85 85 85
(Center)

(Center)
Pressure (Center) 120 115 110 105 100

Setting: Print
6-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Full Speed Shift Temperature at maximum print speed (Center) 100 to 200
(Center)
Shift(Center) Shift temperature at full speed duplex print 0 to 255

(Center)
Initial setting
100V
ppm
Full Speed Shift 170 165 155 150 145
(Center)
Shift(Center) 0 0 0 0 0
120/220-240V
ppm
Full Speed Shift 180 175 165 160 155
(Center)
Shift(Center) 0 0 0 0 0

Setting: Grain Mode
1 Select the mode to set.

Items Contents
Mode0 Current level (Nor special control)
Mode1 Improvement mode for the rough glossiness
Mode2 More improvement

Setting: Ready Time Adjust
Items Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Value Level of environmental correction (alpha) 0 to 4 2 *1
4 *2
*1: Low-end model, *2: High-end model
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U164 Fuser unit history

(Message: Fuser Unit History)
Description
Display the machine serial number and the fuser unit counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and the fuser counter values.
Method

Display the machine serial number and 3 items of the fuser counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Fuser unit history
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U165 Fuser unit number

(Message: Fuser Unit Number)
Description
Display the fuser unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser unit number.
Method

Display the fuser unit number.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U167 Clearing the fuser count

(Message: Clear Fuser Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the fuser count, fuser discharge needle bias correction counter.
Purpose
Verify the fuser count after replacement. Also, clear the bias correction counts after replacing IH unit, fuser
discharge needle.
Method

The fuser count is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the fuser count
Release(Time) Display the fuser unit drive time (release)
Press(Time) Display the fuser unit drive time (press)
Correction Display and change the fuser discharge needle bias correction counter.
Clear Clear the fuser discharge needle bias correction counter.

Clear the counter after replacing the fuser discharge needle unit.
Setting; Correction
1 Select [Correction].

Method: Clear
1 Select [Clear].

Corrective fuser counter gets cleared.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U169 Setting the fuser power source

(Message: Set Fuser Power Source)
Description
Display and set the control voltage of the IH PWB.
Purpose
Check the control voltage
When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH controlPWB.
Setting

Items Contents
Set Fuser Destination setting for Fuser

Mode Destination setting for Fuser 1: 100 V -
specifications (Destination)
2: 200 V
specifications
3: 120 V
specifications
4: 110 V
specifications
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U193 Fuser drive control setting

(Message: Set Fuser Drive Control)
Contents
Display and set bias value for fuser belt charging needle
Purpose
Check or set bias current value for fuser belt surface as corrective measure for fuser static offset that comes from
over charge on fuser belt.
IMPORTANT
Increasing the value reduce sticking toner on the fuser belt, but pay attention that too much
change gets the charging needle to stick organic substance and it makes the static offset.
In case that this adjustment does not work, replace the fuser discharge unit and clear the
count with U167.
Setting

Items Contents
Bias Display and set bias value for fuser belt charging needle

variation
B/W B/W (High speed) 0 to 200 0.1 uA
Color Color (Full speed) 0 to 200 0.1 uA
3/4 3/4 speed 0 to 200 0.1 uA
Half Half speed 0 to 200 0.1 uA
Initial setting
ppm
B/W 20 20 20 20 20
Color 20 20 20 20 20
3/4 20 20 20 20 20
Half 20 20 20 20 20
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U197 Fuser control setting

(Message: Set Fuser Control)
Contents
Change fuser control setting
Purpose
Change fuser control setting in case that the security gate affects to fuser control.
Specific destination (100V model)
Setting

Items Contents
Security Gate Prevent malfunction of security gate
Method: Security Gate

Items Contents
On Prevent malfunction of security gate mode on
Off Prevent malfunction of security gate mode off
Security gate
Direct Path
Swept Transmitter Signal
Reradiated
Signal
Swept
Transmitter Tag
Signal
Transmitter Receiver
6-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U199 Fuser temperature

(Message: Fuser Temperature)
Contents
Fuser temperature is displayed.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Method

Fuser temperature is displayed.
Items Contents
Heat Roller Edge1 Display the heat roller edge temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Center Display the heat roller center temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Middle Display the heat roller center temperature (°C)
Press Roller Center Display the press roller center temperature (°C)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U200 All LEDs lighting

(Message: Turn ON All Panel LEDs)
Contents
All the LEDS on the operation panel are lit.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation panel LED lighting.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
4 All the LEDs on the operation panel are blinking.
5 Press [Stop] key to turn the display off.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U201 Initializing the touch screen

(Message: Initialize touch screen)
Contents
Adjust touch screen detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and check the touchscreen detecting points, after the panel PWB or the operation panel is replaced or
when the detecting points are not aligned.
NOTE
In case that not able to get into Maintenance mode because of misalignment, press key behind operation panel
for more than 3 seconds and start U201.
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance Mode Active U201
Initialize Touch Panel
Initialize
Check
Method

The screen for executing is displayed.
Items Contents
Initialize Automatically corrects the touch screen display position
Check Check the touch screen display position
Method: Initialize
Please do not touch a operation panel.
Do not touch the touch screen.
6-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press the center of indicated "+".
Press the center of the "+" sign.

*Press it using a tool with a fine tip.


If you cannot proceed to the next step, press the Stop key and try again.

6-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 [Initialize Completed] appears after setting and the touch screen is automatically corrected.
7 After finishing setting, [Check] screen is automatically displayed.
Initialize completed.
Method: Check
Single Tap Check
1 Press the center of indicated three "+", and then check the display position.

Initialize
Single Tap Check.


If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.
6-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Check that the gap of the X and Y axis of the displayed coordinate is 6 or less.

(13, -3)
Initialize
Multi Tap
Check
Single Tap Check.

(-8, 15)
Select "Mult Tap Check" and press the Startkey to go to the next step.
If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.

(4, -1)
NOTE
If out of the specified value, select [Initialize] and press [Start] key to return to Step.1.
Multi Tap Check
1 Select [Multi Tap Check] and press [Start] key.
2 Press 2 points of [?] simultaneously. (Step1)

Display the detected point with a red dot if it is out of the default value.
If out of the specified value, select [Initialize] and press [Start] key to return to Step.1.
Step 1 : Not completed.

Initialize
Multi tap Check. Step1.

Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
*Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
3 Press 2 points of [?] simultaneously. (Step2)

[Completed] appears in Step1 and Step2 if it is within the default value.

Initialize
Multi tap Check. Step1.

Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
*Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
6-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 [Multi Tap Check completed.] appears when the setting is complete.
Step 1 : Completed.
Step 2 : Completed.
Multi Tap Check completed.

Press the Stopkey.
The screen for selecting a maintenace item No. is displayed.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U203 Check DP operation

(Message: Check DP Operation)
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Check the DP operation
Method
2 Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3 Select the scan speed

Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)
High Speed Scanning method
Mode Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Result Check the conveying timing
Method: Normal Speed/High Speed

Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD
CCD RADP With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD
CIS With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous operation)
CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous operation)
CIS(Non-P) Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS (continuous operation)


Setting: Mode

Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
6-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Reset
1 Select [Execute].
2 Press [Start] key to reset.

Display the conveying timing data.
Method: Result
1 Select [Result] .
Display the conveying timing data.
Items Contents
Check Point 01 to 09 Conveying timing data
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U204 Key card/key counter setting

(Message: Set Key-Card/Key-Counter)
Contents
Set the optional key card or key counter connection.
Purpose
Execute when installing the key card or key counter.
Method

Items Contents
Device Set the key card/counter connection.
Message * Set the message indicated when the device is not installed.
*: Display in case of On for U206 On/Off Config

Setting: Device
1 Select the type of the optional counter.

Items Contents
Key-Card Key card installation
Key-Counter Key counter installation
Parallel Coin Vendor * Parallel coin vendor installation
Off Not installed
*: Display in case of On for U206 On/Off Config

*: No display in case that designate cassette for FAX is set by system menu.
Setting: Message

Items Contents
Key Device Prioritized display of the key device on the login screen when multiple devices
are used.
Coin Vendor Prioritized display of the coin vendor on the login screen when multiple devices
are used .
Initial setting: Coin Vendor
Completion
6-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U206 Set the coin vendor

(Message: Set Coin Vendor Mode)
Description
Set the optional Coin Vendor connection.
Also, Set the details such as the operation mode and unit price when the coin vendor is installed. (This is an optional
device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines.)
Purpose
Run this maintenance item if a coin vendor is installed.
Method

Items Contents
On/Off Config Set the presence or absence of the coin vendor
No Coin Action Behavior when change runs out during copying
Price Charge per copy by size and color
Boot Mode Setting activation mode
Apl Charge Mode Extended charge unit price
*: No display in case that Parallel Coin vendor is selected in U204.

*: No display in case that designate cassette for FAX is set by system menu.
Setting: On/Off Config

Items Contents
On The coin vendor is installed
Off The coin vendor is not installed
Setting: No Coin Action

Items Contents
All Clear All clear at coin shortage in printing.
Auto Clear Auto clear at coin shortage in printing.
Off Do nothing at coin shortage
6-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Price

]
Items Contents
Normal Charge setting: Normal
AD Charge setting: Commercial
Print Charge setting: Print
Apl * Charge setting: Extended
*: Display only if Apl Charge Mode is on

Setting: Normal / AD

]Items Contents
B/W Black & White
CMY Single color C, M, Y
RGB Single color R, G, B
Full Color Full color
2 By using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the charger setting value.
]Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
B/W CMY /RGB /

Full Color
A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10 100
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10 50
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10 30
Other Others 0 to 300 10 50
Settable in 10-yen increments

Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
6-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Print

]Items Contents
B/W Black & White
Full Color Full color
B/W Full Color

A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10 100
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10 50
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10 30
Other Others 0 to 300 10 50
Settable in 10-yen increments

Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)

Setting: Apl
Apl1 Expanded charging unit 1 0 to 300 10
Apl2 Expanded charging unit price 2 0 to 300 10

Setting: Boot Mode

]Items Contents
Normal Assign activation to normal mode
Copy Service Assign activation to copy service display
Initial setting: Copy Service
6-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Apl Charge Mode

]Items Contents
On The extended charge unit is used.
Off The extended charge unit is not used.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U207 Operation key check

(Message: Check Panel Key Operation)
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1 Press [Start] key to display execution window.
2 [Count 0] appears and turn on the LED in the leftmost row on operation panel.
3 Count up as pressing keys in order from the top in the leftmost row, and once press all keys in the row, next
row to the right turn on if available.
The job separator LED is lit during execution and turns off when completing.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U208 Setting the paper size for the side feeder

(Message: Set Deck Paper Size)
Description
Set the size of paper used in Side Paper Feeder
Purpose
To change the setting when installing the side paper feeder or the size of paper used in the side paper feeder is
changed.
Setting

]Items Contents
Cassette3 * Setting the paper size for Cassette3
*: Only for large capacity feeder (1,650 sheet x2) and side feeder (3,500 sheet x1).
Setting

Items Contents
A4 Paper size of the side paper feeder: A4
B5 Paper size of the side paper feeder: B5
Letter Paper size of the side paper feeder: Letter
Initial setting: Letter (Inch specifications), A4 (Other specifications)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U211 Enhancement unit connection setting

(Message: Set Enhancement Connection)
Contents
Execute the inner job separator installation setting.
Purpose
Execute when installing the inner job separator.
Make sure to set to [Off] to prevent wrong LED lighting when not installed.
Method
2 Select [Inner Job Separator].

Items Contents
Inner Job Separator Inner job separator setting
Method

Items Contents
On Installing the inner job separator
Off The inner job separator is not installed
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U221 USB host lock function setting

(Message: Set USB Host Lock Function)
Contents
Set ON/OFF of the USB Host lock function. The device connected to the USB host can not be recognized when it
is ON.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Method
2 Select [Host Lock].

Items Contents
Host Lock Turns the USB Host lock function on/off

Items Contents
On The USB Host lock function is available
Off The USB Host lock function is not available
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U222 Setting the IC card type

(Message: Set IC Card Type)
Contents
Set the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting

Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.
SSFC Select when the ID card type is SSFC.
Initial setting: Other

SSFC: Shared Security Formats Cooperation

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U223 Operation panel lock

(Message: Set Panel Operation Lock)
Contents
Execute setting the operation panel function.
Purpose
This mode is to prohibit the system menu and job cancel operations from the operation panel by the users other
than administrator privileges.
Setting

Items Contents
Unlock Unlock System Menu operation
Partial Lock 1 Lock System Menu operation and Input/Output setting
Partial Lock 2 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting and Job execution setting
Partial Lock 3 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting, Job execution setting and
Paper settings
Lock Lock System Menu operation and Job Cancel operation
Initial setting: Unlock

Operation item Partial Lock Partial Lock Partial Lock Lock
1 2 3
Entering the maintenance mode Permission Permission Permission Permission
Switching to System Menu Permission Permission Prohibition Prohibition
Send, Send from Document Box Permission Permission Permission Permission
Switches the Yellow developer On/Off Permission Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition

setting
Switch to registration/editing Document Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition

Box
Pressing [Stop] key Permission Permission Permission Prohibition
Pressing [Status/Job Cancel] key Permission Permission Permission Prohibition
Disconnect the FAX line Permission Permission Permission Prohibition
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U224 Setting Original Panel Display

(Message: Install Original Panel Display)
Description
Change the image data and the message for the opening screen at the startup and the image data and for the
service call screen to specified data.
Purpose
This mode is to customize a display as user's preference.
Setting
1 Write the image data or the message data to the USB drive.
2 Insert a USB drive into the USB drive slot.

Items Contents
Install Install the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restore the original image data or message data

Operation item Partial Lock 1 Lock
Opening Img Startup screen Entire start display
Call Img Service call screen Graphic display area
Home Menu Img Home Menu screen Home Menu display area
Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Message display area (top)
Call Msg Detail Service call message 2 Message display area (descriptive area)

Install or uninstall start.
6-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 [OK] is displayed when complete properly

Supplement 1: File information
Description File name Image size (in File format

pixels)
Startup screen opening_ext_image.png Length: 480 PNG
Width : 800
Service call screen callwin_ext_image.png Length: 200 PNG

Width : 180
Home Menu menu_background.png Length: 480 PNG

screen Width : 800
Service call callwin_ext_mes_top.txt - TEXT

message 1 (Unicode)
Service call callwin_ext_mes_detail.txt - TEXT

message 2 (Unicode)
NOTE
Supplement 1: Displaying Startup screen
An installed graphic file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping.
Graphics display on service call screen
An installed graphic file is displayed at service call.
How to change the message
Enter 4 letters “#562” using the numeric keypad during a service call display and service call messages 1 and
2 show up.
How to reset the message display
Back to the maintenance mode will automatically reset the message to the previous one.
IMPORTANT
The graphic file for startup screen must be opaque, because it may overlap on the
background at recovering from sleeping.
UP to 4 MB in total size can be installed.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U230 Optional device serial number

(Message: Optional Device Serial No)
Contents
Display the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to make it help of investigation at problem occurrence.
Method

Display the serial number.
Items Contents
DP Display the document processor serial number.
Finisher Display the finisher serial number.
Booklet Display the book let folder serial number.
PF1 Display the paper feeder 1 serial number.
PF2 Display the paper feeder 2 serial number.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U234 Setting destination for punch

(Message: Set Punch Destination)
Contents
Set destination of the punch unit for the finisher.
Purpose
Execute when installing the punch unit for the destination different from the main unit.
Setting
2 Select [Destination].
Items Contents
Auto Match the destination setting.
Japan Metric Japan metric
Inch North American inch specification
Europe Metric European metric
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U237 Finisher eject volume limit

(Message: Set Finisher Paper Stack Limit)
Contents
Set the stacking count of the main tray and middle tray.
Purpose
Execute when stacking failure occurs.
Method
2 Select [Main Tray].
setting
Main Tray Set the main tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0
Middle tray Set the middle tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0
Main Tray
Input value 4000-sheet finisher DF-7130 "100 sheet 1000-sheet finisher
staple finisher"
0 4000 sheets 4000 sheets 1000 sheets
Tray
Input value 4000-sheet finisher DF-7130 "100 sheet 1000-sheet finisher
staple finisher"
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U240 Finisher operation check

(Message: Check Finisher Operation)
Contents
Turn the finisher's motors and solenoids on.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's motors and solenoids operation check.
Method

Items Contents
Motor Finisher motor operation check
Solenoid Finisher solenoid operation check
Mail Box Mail Box motor operation check
Booklet Booklet folder operation check
Method: Motor
6-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
Feed In(H) Drive the DF paper entry motor at high speed.
Feed In(L) Drive the DF paper entry motor at low speed.
Middle(H) Drive the DF middle motor at high speed.
Middle(L) Drive the DF middle motor at low speed.
Eject(H) Drive the DF exit motor at high speed.
Eject(L) Drive the DF exit motor at low speed.
Save(H) *1 Drives the DF relief drum motor at high speed
Save(L) *1 Drives the DF relief drum motor at low speed
Tray Drive the DF tray motor.

Operation chart: After descending to the lower limit, ascends and descends
again when passing 1s after detecting the middle sensor off. ascends again
when detecting the middle sensor on and stops at the upper limit.
Staple Move Drive the DF slide motor.
Staple Drive the DF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Width Test(LD) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Beat Drive the DF paddle motor.
Eject Unlock(HP) Drive the DF exit release motor at the home position.
Sort Test *1 Execute the DF shift operation.
Eject Unlock(30) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 30-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(50) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 50-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(Fix) Drive the DF exit release motor at the fixed position
Eject Unlock(Full) Drive the DF exit release motor at the full open position
Punch Drive the drive motor
Punch Move *2 Drive the DF slide motor.
Eject Conv(H) Drive the DF drum motor at high speed.
Eject Conv(L) Drive the DF drum motor at low speed.
Cooling Fan *1 Drive exit fan.
Eject Up Pull DF upper exit motor (draw-in)
Eject Down Pull DF lower exit motor (draw-in)
Eject Up Feed DF upper exit motor (conveying)
Eject Down Feed *3 Drive lower exit motor.
B Tray Eject (H) *3 Drive the DF tray exit motor at high speed.
B Tray Eject (L) *3 Drive the DF tray exit motor at low speed.
Tray Down *3 Descend Main Tray motor
Tray Width Init *3 Process tray width alignment initial operation
6-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents
Tray Cursor Init *3 Main Tray cursor initial operation
Pull Pressure *3 Drive the draw-in pressure motor
Match Pressure *3 Drive the DF match release motor
Match Coro *3 Drive the DF match pulley motor
Eject Guide *3 Drive the DF ejection support guide
Tray Eject Paddle *3 Drive the exit paddle
Press Paper *3 Drive paper hold
Bundle Eject *3 Bundle ejection operation
Bundle Up *3 Drive the bundle eject motor 1, 2
*1; Only for 4000 sheets DF, *2: Except Inner DF, *3: Only for 100 sheets staple
Method: Solenoid

Items Contents
Sub Tray *1, *3 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 on
Save Drum *1, *3 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 2 on
Booklet *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 3 on
Punch Turn the punch solenoid on
Three Fold *1 Turn the BF feed-shift solenoid on
Press Paper *2 Turn the DF paper press solenoid
Punch Tank *2 Turn the punch dust vibration solenoid on
Eject Guide (REM) *3 Turn the eject switch solenoid REM on
Eject Guide (RET) *3 Turn the eject switch solenoid RET on
Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Conv Drive the MB drive motor to convey paper
Branch Drive the MB drive motor for feed-shift
Method: Booklet
6-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
Folding Drive the BF main motor.
Blade Drive the BF blade motor.
Bundle Up Drive the BF adjuster motor 2
Bundle Down Drive the BF adjuster motor 1
Staple Drive the DF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Execute the side registration test (A3).
Width Test(LD) Execute the side registration test (LD).
Feed In Drive the BF paper entry motor.
Paddle *1 Drive the paddle motor.
Feed Tray *1 Drive the conveying tray motor.
EjectPressUnlock *1 Drive exit pressure release motor.
Feed Fan *1 Drive conveying fan
*1: 100 sheets staple only

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U241 Finisher switch check

(Message: Check Finisher Switches)
Contents
Display the status of finisher's switches and sensors operation.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's switches and sensors operation check.
Method

Items Contents
Finisher Check the finisher switch and sensor operation.
Mail Box Check the mail box switch and sensor operation.
Booklet Check the booklet switch and sensor operation.
Punch Check the punch unit switch and sensor operation.
Method: Finisher
6-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.

The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Front Cover DF front cover sensor
Eject Cover DF exit cover sensor
Top Cover *2 DF upper cover sensor
Tray U-Limit *3 DF tray sensor 1
Tray HP2 *1 DF tray sensor 2
Tray Middle *3 DF tray sensor 3
Tray L-Limit DF Tray sensor 4
Tray L-Limit(BL) *1 DF tray sensor 5
Tray Top *3 DF tray upper side sensor
HP DF paper entry sensor
Sub Tray Eject *1 DF sub tray exit sensor
Middle Tray Eject *3 DF middle exit sensor

*1
Drum DF drum sensor
Staple HP DF slide sensor
Middle Tray DF bundle exit sensor
Width Front HP DF width adjustment 1
Width Tail HP DF width adjustment 2
Bundle Eject HP DF bundle exit sensor
Match Paddle DF adjustment sensor
Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor
Shift Front HP *1 DF shift sensor 1
Shift Tail HP *1 DF shift sensor 2
Shift Unlock HP *1 DF shift release sensor
Sub Tray Full *1 DF sub tray full sensor
Shift Set *1 DF shift set sensor
Press Paper Up *4 DF press paper sensor 1
Press Paper Down *4 DF press paper sensor 2
Release *4 DF installation detection switch
Middle *5 Middle sensor
Paper Guide HP *5 Paper support guide HP sensor.
Rear Beat HP*5 DF trail press HP sensor.
Eject Paddle HP*5 DF paper exit paddle HP sensor

*5
Press Paper HP Paper press HP sensor
Match Coro HP *5 DF match pulley pressure release HP sensor
Pull Coro HP *5 DF draw-in pulley pressure release HP sensor
6-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents
Eject Press HP *5 Exit pressure release HP sensor
Bundle Eject HP1*5 Bundle exit HP sensor 1
Bundle Eject HP2*5 Bundle exit HP sensor 2
Eject *5 Exit sensor
Staple Tank *5 Staple waste tank sensor
Staple Tank Full *5 Staple waste tank full sensor
Feed In Timing *5 Entry timing sensor
Drum Timing *5 Drum timing sensor
*1; Only for 4000 sheets DF, *2: Only for 1000 sheet DF, *3: Except inner DF, *4: Only for inner DF, *5: Only for 100 sheets
staple
Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Eject MT tray exit sensor 2
Cover MT cover open close switch
Over Flow1 MT tray sensor 1
Motor HP MB home position switch
6-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Booklet

Items Contents
HP BF paper entry sensor
Eject BF exit sensor
Paper BF paper sensor
Tray Full BF tray full sensor
Bundle Up HP BF adjustment sensor 2
Bundle Down HP BF adjustment sensor 1
Width Up HP BF side registration sensor 1
Width Down HP BF side registration sensor 2
Blade HP BF blade sensor
Tray BF tray open/close detection switch
Set DF shift set sensor
left Guide BF left cover sensor:
Vertical Feed Vertical feed sensor
Paddle HP *1 Paddle HP sensor
Eject Press HP *1 Exit pressure release HP sensor
Feed Tray *1 Conveying tray paper sensor

Method: Punch

Items Contents
Punch HP *1 PH home position sensor
Edge Face 1 *1 PH paper edge sensor 1
Edge Face 2 *1 PH paper edge sensor 2
Edge Face 3 *1 Punch paper edge sensor 3
Edge Face 4 *1 Punch paper edge sensor 4
Tank Punch tank set switch
Tank Full 1 PH dust tank full sensor
HP *2 PH paper entry sensor
*1: Except inner DF, *2: Inner DF only

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U243 Checking the DP motor

(Message: Check DP Motors)
Contents
Drive the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Method

Items Contents
Feed Motor *3 Drive the DP paper feed motor for normal rotation
Conv Motor DP conveying motor
Rev Motor *2 Drive DP feedshift motor.
Lift Motor *3 DP lift motor
Feed clutch *2 Drive DP feed clutch.
Regist clutch *2 DP registration clutch
Eject motor *3 DP eject motor
Regist Motor *1 DP registration motor

*1
DP Fan DP drive fan
CIS Fan *1 DP CIS fan
*1:DP-7110/7130 only, *2:DP-7120 only, *3:Except DP-7120
3 Press [Start] key. Each operation starts.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U244 DP switch check

(Message: Check DP Switches)
Contents
Display each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method

Items Contents
Feed Check DP feed sensor.
Regist Check DP registration sensor.
Timing Check DP timing sensor.
CIS Head *2 Check DP timing sensor.
Set Check DP original length sensor.
Longitudinal Check DP original length sensor.
Lift U-Limit *3 Check DP lift upper limit sensor.
Lift L-Limit *3 Check DP lift lower limit sensor.
Cover Open Check DP top cover switch.
Open Check DP open/close switch.
Eject *3 Check DP eject sensor.
Branch Motor HP *1 Check DP feedshift sensor.
*1: DP-7100 only, *2:DP-7110/7130 only, *3:Except DP-7120

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U246 Finisher adjustment

(Message: Adjust Finisher)
Contents
Execute adjustment for the finisher installation.
Purpose
• Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust if paper skews or is folded in Z-shape in the punch mode.
• Stop timing adjustment of punch position
Adjust if the punch hole position is not as specified in the punch mode.
• Center position timing adjustment
Adjust the punch center position if it is shifted in the punch mode.
• Home position adjustment of front/rear width alignment.
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam occurs.
• Home postilion adjustment of front/rear shift
No width alignment in ejected paper
• Home position adjustment of front/rear staple
Adjust if the staple is not centered on the paper in the staple mode.
• Adjustment of relief drum
In case 2-ply or triply sheets on the relief drum are shifted, adjust it.
• Pull-in timing and amount adjustment
Adjust the leading edge timing of up to the 3rd sheet and 4th sheet and after
• Front/Rear bind staple adjustment
Adjust the front/rear staple position if it is different from the specified in the staple mode
• Punch entry registration thick paper correction
Adjust the skew conveying or punch position shift on thick paper in the PH mode
• Home position adjustment of upper/lower side width alignment
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam occurs.
• Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjust the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
• Adjustment of center folding position
Adjust the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
• Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjust the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
• Adjustment of bundle down position
Adjust the position of the BF lower moving plate according to paper length
6-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting

Items Contents
Finisher Setting the finisher adjustment value
Booklet Adjustment of center-folding unit
Setting: Finisher

Items Contents
Punch Regist Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Punch Feed Stop timing adjustment of punch position
Punch Width *2 Center position timing adjustment
Width Front HP Front width adjuster home position adjustment
Width Tail HP Rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Shift Front HP *1 Adjustment of front shift home position
Shift Tail HP *1 Adjustment of rear shift home position
Staple HP Front/rear staple home position adjustment
Save Drum(2nd F) *3 Relief drum adjustment value (2nd sheet entry)
Save Drum(3rd C) *3 Relief drum adjustment value (3rd sheet confluence)
Save Drum(2nd C)*3 Relief drum adjustment value (2nd sheet confluence)
Pull Timing *3 Pulling start timing (4th sheet and after)
Pull Amount *3 Pulling level adjustment (4th sheet and after)
Pull Timing(Conf) *3 Pulling start timing (Confluence: up to the 3rd sheet)
Pull Amount(Conf) *3 Pulling level adjustment (Confluence: up to the 3rd sheet)
Front Bind Staple *3 Front bind adjustment
Back Bind Staple *3 Back bind adjustment
Punch(T) Resist *3 Punch entry registration thick paper correction
6-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Punch Regist
1 Select [Punch Regist].
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
Adjusting the punch registration stop timing -20 to 20 0 0.15 mm
Increase the value if paper is skewed (sample 1).

Reduce the set value if paper is folded in a Z-shape (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2

Setting: Punch Feed
1 Select [Punch Feed].
Adjusting the punch stop timing -10 to 10 0 0.30 mm *1
0.50 mm *2
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Inner finisher only

Increase the specified value if the punch position is shorter than specified.
Reduce the specified value if the punch position is longer than specified.
Preset value A㸸9.75 mm (metric model㸧

0.25 inch (6.25 mm) (inch model㸧
6-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Punch Width
1 Select [Punch Width].
Punch center position timing adjustment -4 to 4 0 0.52 mm
Increase the set value if the punch position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the punch position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Center line
Sample 1 Sample 2

Setting: Width Front HP / Width Tail HP
1 Select [Width Front HP] or [Width HP].
Front width adjuster home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.1 mm
Rear width adjuster home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.1 mm
4 Press [Stop] key and return to the screen for selecting the maintenance item number.
5 Enter U240 and select [Motor] and then [Width Test(A3)].
6 The width guides of the center-folding unit will move to A3-size position.
7 Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
8 Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
6-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Shift Front HP/Tail HP
1 Select [Width Front HP] or [Width HP].
Adjustment of front shift home position -30 to 30 0 0.1 mm
Adjustment of rear shift home position -30 to 30 0 0.1 mm
5 Enter U240 and select [Motor] and then [Sort Test].

Setting: Staple HP
1 Select [Staple HP].
Front/rear staple home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.19 mm
Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2

Setting: Save Drum(2nd F)
1 Select [Save Drum(2nd F)]
Relief drum adjustment value (2nd sheet entry) -15 to 15 0 0.15 mm
6-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Save Drum(3rd C)
1 Select [Save Drum(3rd C)]
Relief drum adjustment value (3rd sheet confluence) -15 to 15 0 0.15 mm

Setting: Save Drum(2nd C)
1 Select [Save Drum(2rd C)]
Relief drum adjustment value (3rd sheet confluence) -15 to 15 0 0.15 mm

Setting: Pull Timing
1 Select [Pull Timing]
Pulling start timing 0 to 30 0 2 msec

Setting: Pull Amount
1 Select [Pull Amount]
Pulling level adjustment 0 to 30 0 2 msec

Setting: Pull Timing(Conf)
1 Select [Pull Timing(Conf)]
Pulling start timing (Confluence) 0 to 30 0 2 msec

Setting: Pull Amount(Conf)
1 Select [Pull Amount(Conf)]
6-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Pulling level adjustment (Confluence) 0 to 30 0 2 msec

Setting: Front Bind Staple
1 Select [Front Bind Staple]
Front bind adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.19 mm

Setting: Back Bind Staple
1 Select [Back Bind Staple]
Back bind adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.19 mm

Setting: Punch(T) Resist
1 Select [Punch(T) Resist]
Punch entry registration thick paper correction -20 to 20 0 0.15 mm
6-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Booklet

Items Contents
Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position
Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position
Staple Pos 1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size
Staple Pos 2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size
Staple Pos 3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Booklet Pos 1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size
Booklet Pos 2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size
Booklet Pos 3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Three Fold Adjustment of tri- folding position
Bundle Down *1 Bundle down position adjust value

Setting: Width Up HP/Width Down HP
1 Select [Width Up HP] or [Width Down HP].
Adjustment of upper side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.10 mm
Adjustment of lower side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.10 mm
5 Enter U240 and select [Booklet] and then [Width Test(A3)].
6 The width guides of the center-folding unit will move to A3-size position.
7 Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
6-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Staple Pos1/ 2/ 3
1 Select [Staple Pos1], [Staple Pos2] or [Staple Pos3].
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
size
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm

size
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/ -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm

8K size
Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the staple position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mmA3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3 mm
2 mm 2 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2

Setting: Booklet Pos1/ 2/ 3
1 Select [Booklet Pos 1], [Booklet Pos 2] or [Booklet Pos 3].
Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm

size
Increase the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3mm
A
Center line Sample 1 Sample 2
6-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Three Fold
1 Select [Three Fold].
Adjustment of tri- folding position -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Increase the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: 7.0 ± 2mm
A
Sample 1 Sample 2

Setting: Bundle Down
1 Select [Bundle Down]
Bundle down position adjust value -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U247 Paper feed operation check

(Message: Check Paper Feeder)
Contents
Turn the motor and clutch power on for each feed unit.
Purpose
Execute to check motor and clutch operation of each feed unit.
Method

Items Contents
2PF Operates 2-tray paper feeder
LCF Operate the large capacity feeder
Side Deck Operate the side deck
Setting: 2PF

Display Contents
Motor Off PF paper feed motor OFF
On PF paper feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2: ON
Feed1 Clutch PF conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed2 Clutch PF conveying clutch 2: ON
Execute Starts operation
2 Select [Execute].
3 Press [Start] key. Starts the motor operation.

6-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: LCF

Display Contents
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2: ON
Feed1 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed2 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 2: ON
2 Select [Execute].

Setting: Side Deck

Display Contents
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch: ON
Cassette1 Solenoid PF paper feed solenoid: ON
2 Select [Execute].

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-224
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set

(Message: Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set)
Contents
Changes the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic gray-scale adjustment.
Purpose
Change the timing to display the message for maintenance and automatic gray-scale adjustment
Setting
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
M.Cnt A Change the maintenance counter preset value (Kit A) 0 to 9999999 600000
200000 *1
M.Cnt B Change the maintenance counter preset value (Kit B) 0 to 9999999 600000
200000 *1
M.Cnt D *1 Change the maintenance counter preset value (Kit D) 0 to 9999999 600000
M.Cnt E *1 Change the maintenance counter preset value (Kit E) 0 to 9999999 600000
M.Cnt HT Change the maintenance counter preset value (HT 0 to 9999999

adjustment)
Cassette1 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 1)
Cassette2 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 2)
Cassette3 *2 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 3)

(Cassette 4)

(Cassette 5)
*1: Low-end model only, *2: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *3: 3000-sheet side paper feeder only

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-225
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U251 clearing the maintenance counter

(Message: Clear Maintenance Counter)
Contents
Display, clear or changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance count
Also, clear the count at the maintenance.
Setting
range
M.Cnt A Maintenance cycle counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt B Maintenance cycle counter (Kit B) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt D*1 Maintenance cycle counter value (Kit D) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt E*1 Maintenance cycle counter value (Kit E) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt HT Maintenance cycle counter (HT adjustment) 0 to 9999999
Cassette1 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 1) 0 to 9999999
Cassette2 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 2) 0 to 9999999
Cassette3 *2 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 3) 0 to 9999999
Clear clear all the maintenance counts -
*1: Low-end model only, *2: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *3: 3000-sheet side paper feeder only
Clearing
1 Select [Clear].
2 Press [Start] key to clear the setting value.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-226
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U252 Destination
(Message: Set Destination)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the destination.
Purpose
Execute after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or
initialization
Method

Items Contents
Japan Metric *1 Japan metric
Inch *2 Inch
Europe Metric *2 Europe Metric
Asia Pacific *2 Asia Pacific
Australia *2 Australia
China *2 China
Korea *2 Korea
*1: 100 V model only, *2: Except 100 V model

Initial setting: Destination

Initializes according to the destination
An error code is displayed when an error occurs.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode U252.
Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity Error)
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-227
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U253 Switching the double/single counts

(Message: Set Double/Single Count)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be counted as one
sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
2 Select [Color] or [B/W].

Items Contents
Full Color Switch the counter for full color mode (Single/Double Count)
Mono Color *1 Switch the counter for mono color (Single/Double Count)
B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode (Single/Double Count)
*1: Appears if U276 set to other than [Mode0]
3 Select [SGL(All)] or [DBL(Folio)].

Items Contents
SGL(All) Set single count for all the paper sizes
DBL(A3/Ledger) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2
DBL(B4) Set single count for Legal(356mm) size or smaller
DBL(Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2
*2: The Folio length can be set to between 330 and 356 mm using maintenance mode U035. However, the double count will
be applied when the set value is 330mm (Initial value) or longer.
Initial setting:SGL(All) (100V machine), DBL(A3/Ledger) (120V/220-240V machine)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-228
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U260 Switching the timing for copy counting

(Message: Set Copy Count Mode)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters between paper feed and eject.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
2 Selects the copy count timing.

Items Contents
Feed When secondary paper feed starts.
Eject Selects the paper eject timing
Initial setting: Eject

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-229
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U265 Setting by destination

(Message: Set Model Destination)
Contents
Set the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting
Items Contents
No. Display the OEM code
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-230
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U271 Setting the page count unit

(Message: Set Page Count Unit)
Contents
Execute the long paper count setting.
Purpose
Execute to change the long paper count.
NOTE
If double count is set in U253, the value multiplied with this is the long paper count.
Setting
setting variatio
n
Banner A Count setting of Long Paper A (470.1mm to 2 to 30 2 -
915mm/18.51” to 36”)
Banner B Count setting of Long Paper B (915.1mm to 2 to 30 3 -

1220mm/36.01” to 48”)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-231
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U276 Switching the copy count mode

(Message: Set Charge Count Mode)
Contents
Set the single color count mode
Purpose
Execute to change the billing counter to count up in the single color mode.
Setting

Items Contents
Mode0 Count the single color count in the full color counter
Mode1 Count the single color count in the single color counter
Initial setting: Mode1(100V), Mode0(120/220-240V)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-232
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U278 Delivery date setting

(Message: Set Delivery Date)
Contents
Registers the date of delivery of the machine.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the delivery date of the machine.
Method
2 Select [Today].

Set the delivery date of the machine.
Clearing
1 Select [Clear].

clear the delivery date of the machine.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-233
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U283 China Red Setting

(Message: Set China Red Mode)
Contents
Set China Red
Purpose
Setting

Items Contents
On Enable China Red setting
Off Disable China Red setting
Initial setting: For China: On/For others: Off

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-234
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U284 Setting the 2-color copy

(Message: Set 2 Color Copy)
Contents
Set the 2-color copy.
Purpose
Setting

Items Contents
On 2-color copy enabled
B/W *1 2-color copy enabled, B/W count
Mono Color *1,*2 2-color copy enabled, mono color count
Off 2-color copy disabled
*1: 100V model only, *2: Appears if U276 set to other than [Mode0]
Initial setting: Mono Color (100V), Off (120/220-240V machine)
When setting it to on, 2-color copy appears on the color function screen.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-235
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U285 Set Service Status Page

(Message: Set Service Status Page)
Contents
Set the contents of Service status that is printed from system menu.
Purpose
Setting

Items Contents
Coverage Set coverage information on Service status page
Rep Permit Set permission of service report
Setting: Coverage

Items Contents
On Display the digital dot coverage.
Off Not to display the digital dot coverage.
Initial setting: On
2 Press [Start] key. Set the setting value.

Setting: Rep Permit

Items Contents
On Enable output service report
Off Disable output service report

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-236
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U286 Optional language setting

(Message: Set Option Language)
Description
Add/Delete/Change the optional language
Purpose
Set the optional languages selectable from System Menu
Setting

Items Contents
Option Language 1 Optional language 1 setting
Initial setting: 0 (None)
Setting

Items Contents
ARABIC Installed language list
CHINESE-S
DANISH
JAPANESE
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
VIETNAMESE
None
Display varies depending on installed optional language package.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-237
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U287 Automatic recovery function

(Message: Set Auto Reset Function)
Description
Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error
Purpose
Set the automatic recovery function after the service call error or system error
Setting

Items Contents
C0XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C0xxx code
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
service call error
CFXXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the CF code system
error

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-238
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U323 Abnormal temperature and humidity notification setting

(Message: Set Abnormal Heat and Humidity Warning)
Contents
Set the notification of abnormal temperature and humidity.
Purpose
Setting

Items Contents
On Indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
Off Do not indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
Initial setting: On

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-239
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U326 Cassette heater control setting

(Message: Set Cassette Heater Control)
Contents
Selects the cassette heater control setting.
Purpose
Selects the cassette heater control setting
Set the cassette heater for the optional cassette.
Method

Items Contents
Mode1 Set the cassette heater control Mode1.
Mode2 Set the cassette heater control Mode2.
Off Set the cassette heater control Off (not installed).

Drum refresh is not executed at power-up when the cassette heater control is [On].
Mode1: ON at 65%RH or more of the machine outside humidity (OFF: during drive ), Mode2: always ON

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-240
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient

(Message: Adjust Coverage Size Calculation Rate)
Contents
Set the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in
relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size
Setting
setting
Rate Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Mode Switch full-color count and color coverage count 0: Full color 0
display 1: by coverage
Level1 Set low coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.8 1.0
Level2 Set middle coverage threshold value 0.2 to 99.9 2.5

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-241
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U335 Paper interval setting

(Message: Set Paper Interval (Add Toner))
Contents
Set the print interval at high coverage.
Purpose
Changes the print interval at high coverage.
Setting
setting
Interval Set On/Off of print interval at high coverage. On/Off Off
Mode Set the print interval mode at high coverage 1 to 10 1

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-242
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U336 Black line cleaning indication

(Message: Set Black Line Clean Display)
Contents
Set indication of the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Display the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the contact glass when
scanning from the document processor.
Method
3 The screen for setting is displayed.

Items Contents
Black Line Mode Set On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance indication

Items Contents
On Indicate the black lines cleaning guidance
Off Black line cleaning guidance is not indicated
Initial setting: On

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-243
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U339 Drum heater ON mode setting

(Message: Set Drum Heater On Mode)
Description
Set the drum heater
Purpose
Set the drum heater setting display and drum heater setting in System Menu
Method
3 The screen for setting is displayed.

Items Contents
System Set the drum heater setting display and drum heater setting in System Menu
Drum Heater Set the drum heater
Mode Drum heater operation mode
Setting: System

Items Contents
On Enabled
Off Disabled

Drum Heater

Items Contents
On Enabled
Off Disabled
6-244
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Mode

Items Contents
Mode0
Mode1
NOTE
If it is set to [Off] in [System], [Drum Heater] is set to [Off]
Setting: Mode

Items Contents
Mode 0 Environmental correction mode
Mode 1 Blurred image prevention priority mode
Initial setting: Mode 0

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-245
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U340 Setting the applied mode

(Message: Set Applied Mode)
Description
Allocate memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct printing occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Adj Memory Set the memory allocation
Adj Max Job (Prn) Setting the maximum of multiple jobs
Adj Max Job (Send) Setting the maximum of multiple jobs
setting: Adj Memory
range setting
Image Area temporarily used to create output image. -100 to 0
100(MB)
Set the values below in case print failure occurs with the memory shortage. (recommended value)
Image : +100
The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large.
Setting: Adj Max Job
range setting
Copy Maximum copy (Scan To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 10
Printer Maximum printer (Host To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 50
The maximum [Printer] jobs should be maximum jobs.
6-246
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Adj Max Job
range setting
Send Upper limit of Send (ScanToHost) 0 to 10 10
FAX Upper limit of FAX job 0 to 210 210
The maximum [Printer] jobs should be maximum jobs.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-247
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U341 Printer cassette setting

(Message: Set Printer Exclusive Cassette)
Contents
Set the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it cannot be used for
copy.
• Cassette designated for FAX on system menu can not be set.
Setting
3 Multiple cassettes are selectable.

Items Contents
Cassette1 Setting cassette 1 to the printer paper source
Cassette2 Setting cassette 2 to the printer paper source
Cassette 3 *1 Setting cassette 3 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
Cassette 4 *1 Setting cassette 4 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
Cassette5 Setting cassette 5 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
*1: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *2: 3000-sheet side paper feeder only

Initial setting: Off (Cassette1 to 4)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-248
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U343 Duplex priority mode

(Message: Set Duplex Priority Mode)
Contents
Switches between duplex or simplex copy for the initial copy mode.
Purpose
Set the frequently used settings depending on the user’s usage.
Setting

Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex print priority is enabled
Off Duplex print priority is disabled

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-249
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication

(Message: Set Maintenance Time Soon Display)
Contents
Set when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to reach, by setting the number of
prints that can be made before the current maintenance cycle reaches.
Display the maintenance precaution message when the page count reaches the set value before the
maintenance count.
Purpose
Change the time for maintenance precaution display.
Setting
range setting
Cnt Setting the maintenance time precaution display 0 to 9999 0
(Remaining number of prints that can be made before
the current maintenance cycle reaches)
SSD Life Setting the maintenance time precaution display for the 0 to 99 5(%)
SSD replacement.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-250
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode

(Message: Selecting Sleep Mode)
Contents
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Purpose
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Method

Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting
Auto sleep Switches AutoSleep function setting
Fuser Power Mode Setting of fuser power source mode
Setting: Timer/Sleep Level

Items Contents
More Energy Save BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)
Less Energy Save BAM conformity setting Off

Set Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)
Initial setting: More Energy Save
Setting: Auto sleep

Items Contents
On Enable auto sleep function
Off Disable auto sleep function
Initial setting: On
Sleep mode can not work from system menu if disable this function.
Peel off the energy saver label when setting it to off
6-251
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Fuser Power Mode

Items Contents
Auto In case that sleep timer setting is less than 10 min, fuser gets off 1 or 2 min (*1)
later from job end. In case of longer than 10 min, fuser does not get off even
after job end.
On Fuser does not get off even after job end.
Off Fuser gets off 1 or 2 min (*1) later from job end.
*1: High-end model=1 min, Low-end model=2 min

Initial setting: Auto

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-252
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U402 margin adjustment

(Message: Adjust Print Margin)
Contents
Adjusts the scan image margins.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
NOTE
If the leading edge margin is less than the specified value, it may cause jam at the fuser.
If there is no bottom margin, when continuously printing, it may cause an image smudge on the second page.
Adjustment
NOTE

setting variation
Lead Adjusts the printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
A Margin Printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C Margin Printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
Trail Printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm
When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.
Leading edge margin(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
A
Left margin Right margin
(4.0 mm or less) (4.0 mm or less)
Trailing edge margin(4.0 mm or less)
6-253
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IMPORTANT
Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following
maintenance mode.
U034(49 page) > U402
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-254
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass

(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(Table))
Contents
Adjusts the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment
NOTE

setting variation
A Margin Adjusts the scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
C Margin Adjusts the scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
Increasing the setting value makes the margin wider, and decreasing makes it narrow.
A
IMPORTANT
U034(P.6-53) > U402(P.6-253) > U403
Completion
6-255
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-256
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the document processor
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(DP))
Contents
Adjust the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment
NOTE

Items Contents Setting Initial Data
A Margin Adjusts the DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjusts the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
C Margin Set the DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
A Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP left margin (2nd side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP leading edge margin (2nd 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
side)
C Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP right margin (2nd side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin (2nd 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
side)
*1: Dual scan model only
Increasing the setting value makes the margin wider, and decreasing makes it narrow.
A
6-257
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IMPORTANT
U034(P.6-53) > U402(P.6-253) > U403(P.6-255) > U404
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-258
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/Reversal)

(Message: Adjust Writing Timing (Reverse))
Contents
Adjust write timing for copy with 180 rotation original.
Purpose
Adjusted when the back page image of duplex copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the scanner reading
image (image on the memory)
IMPORTANT
Adjust this after finishing the following maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-53) > U402(P.6-253) > U066(P.6-80) >
U403(P.6-255) > U071(P.6-84) > U404(P.6-257) > U407
Adjustment
NOTE
5 Select [Adj Data].

setting variation
Adj Data Adjusts the leading edge timing when writing -47 to 47 0 1dot
the image in the memory
When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value is
decreased.
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Completion
6-259
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-260
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(Message: Half Tone Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Acquires the data for the automatic halftone adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped
Adjustment
2 Input “410” with numeric keys.

• Display the execution information screen.

• The first auto adjustment is executed.
6-261
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Error codes
Codes Occurrence Contents Re-adjustment

position
S001 Scanner Original type error Enable
S002 Original reference patch is not detected Enable
S003 Original deviation is in excess in the main scanning Enable

direction
S004 Original deviation is in excess in the sub-scanning Enable

direction
S005 Original skew is in excess Enable
S006 Other scanner error Disable
E001 Engine Engine status error Disable
E002 SSW sensor error Disable
E003 Engine is working Enable
C101 Controller Pause status Disable
C210 Table adjustment value error (K) Disable
C220 Table adjustment value error (C) Disable
C240 Table adjustment value error (M) Disable
C280 Table adjustment value error (Y) Disable
C310 Monotonic increase adjustment value error (K) Disable
C320 Monotonic increase adjustment value error (C) Disable
C340 Monotonic increase adjustment value error (M) Disable
C380 Monotonic increase adjustment value error (Y) Disable
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-262
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U411 Scanner auto adjustment

(Message: Scanner Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Uses the specified originals and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning
sections.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberration in main/sub
scanning direction, MTF correction, color/B/W input gamma, color correction matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF correction, Input
gamma, automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Automatically adjusts the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Items Use Contents Original for adjustment
(P/N)
Table (Chart A) In case of losing Execute automatic adjusts the table 7505000005
adjustment data, scanning.
differing from the
color tone extremely
Magnification in the sub scanning
(not improve in case
direction / Leading edge timing
of executing U410)
Center line / chromatic aberration
ISU(CCD unit),
Optical LED lamp, Sub scanning chromatic aberration /
Engine EEPROM, MTF correction COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
when replacing DP gamma in color mode / color correction

No.302K357010
CIS matrix
Use when setting up Input gamma in B/W mode
DP or executing
U021 initialization
DP FU(ChartB) Use when setting up Execute the 1st side automatic 302AC68243
*1 DP or executing adjustment in the DP scanning section.
U021 initialization Execute the 2nd side automatic
adjustment in the DP scanning section.
DP FD(ChartB)
*2
Magnification in the sub-scanning
direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing
DP FU(ChartA) Execute the 1st side automatic 7505000005

*1 adjustment in the DP scanning section.
Main scanning chromatic aberration /
sub scanning chromatic aberration /
MTF correction
gamma in color mode / color correction
matrix
DP FD(ChartA) Execute the 2nd side automatic

*2 adjustment in the DP scanning section.
Main scanning chromatic aberration /

sub scanning chromatic aberration /
MTF correction
gamma in color mode / color correction
matrix
6-263
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Use Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
Target Set-up for obtaining the target value 7505000005
DP Auto Adj *1 Adjusting the document processor Without Chart B, executed in a

scanning section with the chart output simplified manner.
by the local machine
Magnification in the sub-scanning

direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
*1: DP installed machine only, *2: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP machine only
Method: Table (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value
Usually, it adjusts here.
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
2 Enter maintenance item U411.
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6 Select [Table(ChartA)].
7 Press [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.
8 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
NOTE
When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and the
barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
Manual input of the target value

1 Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/N:
7505000005) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
2 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
7 Select [Table(ChartA)].
8 Press [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.
6-264
[CONFIDENTIAL]
NOTE
If the image position is shifted largely at the DP adjustment below, an error might occur when adjusting it with
ChartA. First, use ChartB (image position) to adjust it and then use ChartA (color).
6-265
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: DP FU (Chart B)
Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.

DP adjustment original (ChartB)
PP
sPP
sPP
3 Select [DP FU(ChartB)].

Method: DP FD (Chart B)
Adjusting the second side of the DP duplex scanning
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.
3 Select [DP FD(ChartB)].

Method: DP Auto Adj
1 Set A4/Letter paper.
2 Press [Start] key to print the adjustment original.
3 Set the adjustment original output on the table and press [Start] key.
4 Set the output adjustment original with face-up on the DP.
5 Press [Start] key and scan the original.
6 Press [Start] key to start the 1st side automatic adjustment.
7 Set the output adjustment original with face-down on the DP.
8 Press [Start] key and scan the original.
9 Press [Start] key to start the 2nd side automatic adjustment.
6-266
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6 Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
NOTE
When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
7 Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
6-267
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: DP FD (Chart A)
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6 Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
NOTE
When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
7 Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
6-268
[CONFIDENTIAL]
NOTE
When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If an error occurs during auto
adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this case, check the error and execute the
automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
Codes Contents Corrective action
00 Automatic adjustment success -
01 Black band detection error Set the original correctly and execute
(Table scanning leading edge skew in the sub- the adjustment again.
scanning direction) Check lighting of the lamp or replace it.
04 Black band is not detected (Table leading edge

in the sub-scanning direction)
05 Black band is not detected (Table far end in the

main scanning direction)
06 Black band is not detected (Table near end in

the main scanning direction)
07 Black band is not detected (Table trailing edge

in the sub-scanning direction)
08 Black band is not detected (DP far end in the Check the attachment position of DP.
main scanning direction) Check lighting of the lamp or replace it.
09 Black band is not detected (DP near end in the Check the back and front of the
main scanning direction) adjustment original.
0a Black band is not detected (DP leading edge in

the sub-scanning direction)
0b Black band is not detected

(Original check of DP leading edge in the sub-
scanning direction)
0c Black band is not detected (DP trailing edge in

0d White band is not detected (DP trailing edge in

0e DMA time out Turn the power switch off then on, and
execute again.
0f Magnification error in the sub-scanning Turn the power switch off then on, and
direction execute again.
Adjust manually.
10 Leading edge error in the sub-scanning
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
direction
11 Trailing edge error in the sub-scanning

direction
12 DP skew error in the sub-scanning direction
13 Maintenance request error Turn the power switch off then on, and
execute again.
6-269
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Codes Contents Corrective action

14 Center line error in the main scanning direction Turn the power off and on, and execute
again.
15 DP skew error in the main scanning direction
Adjust manually.
16 Magnification error in the main scanning (U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
direction
17 Service call error Turn the power off and on, and execute
again.
18 DP paper jam error Set the original correctly and execute

again.
19 PWB replacement error -
1a Original error Clean the contact glass and slit glass.

Exchange the adjustment original.
1b Input gamma adjustment original error Set the original correctly and execute
again.
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference correction

coefficient error
1e Lab value detection error Check the following and execute again.
Is the bar code dirty?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
1f Lab value comparison error Check the following and execute again.
Is the acquired bar code the same?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
20 Input gamma correction coefficient error Set the original correctly and execute
again.
21 Color correction matrix coefficient error
30 Chromatic aberration adjustment original error
63 Completed to obtain the test RAW -
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-270
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (High-end model only)

(Message: Adjust Uneven Density)
Contents
Scan the test chart image distribution directly from the scanner .
Purpose
Correct uneven developer/transfer density in the main scanning direction.
IMPORTANT
After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method

Items Contents
Normal Mode Normal Mode
On/Off Config Uneven density correction On/Off setting
Method: Normal Mode

Output the test patter with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
2 Set the test chart 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
3 Press [Start] key. Scanning starts.

Test chart is output after completing scanning. (2nd sheet)
According to the test chart of 1st sheet, output with -20% light intensity setting.
5 Press [Start] key. Scanning starts.

Test chart is output after completing scanning. (3rd sheet)

Check the correction result. [Finish] appears after normal completion.
1st retrial
1 [Retry] appears unless normally completed.
2 Execute Step 3 to 7
2nd retrial
1 [Retry] appears unless normally completed.
6-271
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Execute Step 3 to 7
An error code appears when an error occurs.
Error codes list
Display Contents Display Contents

S001 Patch is not detected E002 Background image error
S002 Original position shift in the main E003 Density error

scanning direction
S003 Original position shift in the sub- E004 Uneven density error
scanning direction
S004 Original skew error EFFF Other engine error
S005 Original type error C001 Controller error
SFFF Other scanner error CFFF Other controller error
E001 Engine status error

Items Contents
On Enable the uneven density correction
Off Disable the uneven density correction
Initial setting: On
Automatically set to on after completing correction.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-272
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U415 Adjusting the print position automatically

(Message: Print Position Auto Adjust)
Description
Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing at the print engine
Adjusting the leading edge timing, center line and margins
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine.
* Execute this mode in a simplified manner when the Chart B(302AC68243) is not available.
Method
1 Set A3/Ledger paper.

Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
3 Select [Execute].

A test chart is outputted.
5 Set the output Test chart as the original.

Automatically perform adjustment from the top to bottom cassettes.
7 [OK] is displayed when complete properly

Error codes list
Display Contents Display Contents

S001 Black band is not detected (main C103 Adjustment value error (leading edge
scanning direction far end) timing)
S002 Black band is not detected (main C104 Adjustment value error (center line)
scanning direction near end )
S003 Black band is not detected (auxiliary CFFF Other controller error
scanning direction leading edge)
S004 Black band is not detected (auxiliary

scanning direction trailing edge)
S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew

error (1.5 mm or more)
S006 Main scanning direction skew error

(1.5 mm or more)
S007 Original error (detection of reverse

original paper)
S008 Original error (page mismatch)
SFFF Other scanner error
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-273
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U425 Set Target

(Message: Set Target Adjustment Value)
Description
Enter the Lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N: 7505000005).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Execution

Items Contents
ChartA Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning
ChartB Set the adjustment value of the DP scanning
Method: ChartA

Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original
Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original
C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original
M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original
Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original
R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original
G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original
B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original
Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions
6-274
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: White
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 93.6 -
a A value setting -200 to 200 0.9 -
b B value setting -200 to 200 -0.4 -

Setting: Black
setting variation
a A value setting -200 to 200 -0.2 -

Setting: Gray1
setting variation
b B value setting -200 to 200 1.2 -
6-275
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Gray2
setting variation

Setting: Gray3
setting variation

Setting: C
setting variation
6-276
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: M
setting variation

Setting: Y
setting variation

Setting: R
setting variation
6-277
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: G
setting variation

Setting: B
setting variation

Setting: Adjust Original
NOTE
This setting is usually unnecessary.

setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 4.0 to 6.0 5.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Set the adjustment value of the left 9.0 to 11.0 10.0 0.1mm
edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing 189.0 to 191.0 190.0 0.1mm
edge.
1 Measure the distances "A", "B" and "C" from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of black belt 3 of
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance "A", "B" and "C" between two points as follows. (A: 30mm from the left edge, B:
105mm from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge)
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)
2 Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the [+] [-] keys.
6-278
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment original.
Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the right edge of black
belt 2.
5 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
7 Measure the distance "D" and "E" from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black belt 3 on the
adjustment original at two positions.
1) Measure the distance "D" and "E" between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance from the leading
edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of the left edge and deduct A. E:
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at
180mm of the left edge and deduct C.)
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2)
8 Enter the value solved in "Sub Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.

30mm 148.5mm 267mm
A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge

15mm
Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)
6-279
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: DP(ChartB)
NOTE

setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Set the adjustment value of the left 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing 388.0 to 392.0 390.0 0.1mm
edge.
1 Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
2 Enter the value measured in "Lead" using the [+] [-] keys.
3 Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
5 Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside) on the
adjustment original.
6 Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.

Main Scan
Lead
Sub Scan
Original for adjustment Chart 2-2 (P/N: 302AC68243)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-280
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U429 Adjusting the color balance offset

(Message: Adjust Color Balance Offset)
Contents
Display/changes the density of each color in various image quality mode.
Purpose
Execute to change each color's balance.
Method
2 Select the image mode to change the setting.

Items Contents
Text+Photo Density of each color in the text+photo mode
Photo Density of each color in the photo mode
Photo/Printout Each color's density in the printed photo mode
Text Density of each color in the text mode
Graphics/Map Density of each color in the map mode
Copy/Printout Each color's density in the printed document mode
Setting: Text+Photo
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0
M Magenta color balance offset value -5 to 5 0
Y Yellow color balance offset value -5 to 5 0
K Black color balance offset value -5 to 5 0
When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is decreased.
6-281
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Photo
range setting

Setting: Photo/Printout
range setting

Setting: Text
range setting
6-282
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Graphics/Map
range setting

Setting: Copy/Printout
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value 0 to 10 5
M Magenta color balance offset value 0 to 10 5
Y Yellow color balance offset value 0 to 10 5
K Black color balance offset value 0 to 10 5
NOTE
Test copy of the original is available by pressing [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode when executing
this maintenance mode.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-283
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U460 Sensor adjustment

(Message: Adjust Conveying Sensor)
Contents
Correct the threshold of multi feed sensor in DP
• DP-7130 installed
Purpose
In case that multi feed happen frequently, adjust the threshold in conditions.
Method

Items Contents
DP Adjust/Set DP conveying sensor
Method: DP

Items Contents
Conveying Sensor Executing Calibration
On/Off Config Set conveying sensor availability
2 Press [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Conveying Sensor

Items Contents
Sensor(Non-P)* Display sensor value without paper
Sensor* Display sensor value with paper
Threshold(Single) Setting paper conveying threshold
Threshold(Multi) Setting multi feed threshold
Execute Executing Calibration
*: Display only for center
6-284
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting:Threshold(Single)/(Multi)
2 By using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
range setting
Threshold(Single) Setting paper conveying threshold 0 to 255 0
Threshold(Multi) Setting multi feed threshold 0 to 255 0

Method: Execute
1 Select [Execute].

AC calibration is started.
1 Select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On Enable multi feed detection (1)
Off Disable multi feed detection (0)
Initial setting: On

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-285
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U464 ID correction setting

(Message: Set ID Adjustment Mode)
Contents
Set permission/prohibition of the ID correction operation (calibration). Executes each setting of the calibration.
Purpose
Execute the calibration setting when an image failure occurs or depending on the user’s request.
Execute Calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method

Items Contents
Permission Permit/Prohibit Calibration
Time Interval Set the time interval to execute calibration after completing printing.
Mode Executing Calibration
On/Sleep Out Calibration operation setting (power-up/recovery from sleep mode)
AP/NE Calibration operation setting (AP/NE)
Leaving Time Setting the time to determine whether to execute calibration when recovering
from Sleep mode
Timing Setting the execution timing by drive time
Target Value Setting the target sensor value for the toner thick layer calibration and light
intensity calibration
Print Rate(B/W) Setting the B/W calibration target value
Calib Executing Calibration
Solid Image Edge reduction setting
Setting: Permission

Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration
Initial setting: On
6-286
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Time Interval

• Setting the mode to Custom, following changes are reflected.
range
Time(sec) Calibration interval 0 to 9999
Setting is changeable in 10 count increments.
Setting value for each mode

Items Mode 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Timing Short 150 165 207 258 330
Normal 300 330 413 516 660
Long 600 660 825 1032 1320
Custom 0 to 9999

Setting: Mode

Items Contents
Short 0: Executing the calibration: short
Normal 1: Executing the calibration: standard
Long 2: Executing the calibration: long
Custom 3: Executing the calibration: custom
Auto 4: Executing the calibration: auto

Setting: On/Sleep Out

Items Contents
Initial setting: On
6-287
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: AP/NE

Items Contents
Initial setting: On

Setting: Leaving Time
1 By using [+] [-] keys change the setting value. Every 120 min (0, 120, 240, 360, 480)
range
Time(min) Setting the sleep timer 0 to 480

ppm
Time(min) Short 120 120 120 120 120
Normal 480 480 480 480 480
Long 480 480 480 480 480
Custom 0 to 480 (120 min increments)
Setting: Timing
range
Time(sec) Setting continuous printing standard time 60 to 9999
Setting is changeable in 10 count increments.

ppm
Timing Short 300 330 413 516 660
Normal 600 660 825 1031 1320
Long 1200 1320 1650 2063 2640
Custom 60 to 9999

6-288
[CONFIDENTIAL]
range
High-end Model Low-end
model
Solid Solid
Image ON Image
OFF
Thickness(C) Toner layer calibration (Cyan) 0 to 1000 720 819 755
Thickness(M) Toner layer calibration (Magenta) 0 to 1000 710 821 777
Thickness(Y) Toner layer calibration (Yellow) 0 to 1000 710 818 747
Thickness(K) Toner layer calibration (Black) 0 to 1000 140 125
Gamma(C) Light amount calibration (Cyan) 0 to 1000 313 363
Gamma(M) Light amount calibration (Magenta) 0 to 1000 299 384
Gamma(Y) Light amount calibration (Yellow) 0 to 1000 285 335
Gamma(K) Light amount calibration (Black) 0 to 1000 391 560
Procedure for changing image create process as follow
1 In case that change thinning amount to improve darkness on trailing edge of image
when High-end model Solid Image is on. (Apply Cyan, Magenta, Yellow)
1 Change the value like follows (setting 1, setting 2)
Items Contents Setting Initial Setting1 Setting2
range setting (+20) (+40)
2 Run U464 Clib
3 Check if the setting works with image.

• However, check MagDC in U140 and if the value is like follows, this means the bias is max and trouble may
happen. In this case the value has to be reconsidered.
And Higher setting make toner layer thick and could cause of toner dusting, gray background, cut off fine line or jaggy.
Items Contents 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 ppm

C Cyan developer magnet roller DC bias setting 440 430 430
M Magenta developer magnet roller DC bias setting 440 430 430
Y Yellow developer magnet roller DC bias setting 440 430 430
6-289
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 In case of High-end model Solid Image Off and ON (BK), and make image density darker.

Thickness(K) Toner layer calibration (Black) 0 to 1000 140 150 160
2 Run U464 Clib

And Higher setting could cause of toner dusting, gray background, fixing failure.
Items Contents 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 ppm

C Cyan developer magnet roller DC bias setting 400 400 400
M Magenta developer magnet roller DC bias setting 400 400 400
Y Yellow developer magnet roller DC bias setting 400 400 400
K Black developer magnet roller DC bias setting 400 400 400
3 Make image density darker with Low-end model.


Thickness(K) Toner layer calibration (Black) 0 to 1000 125 150 145
2 Run U464 Clib
6-290
[CONFIDENTIAL]

And Higher setting could cause of toner dusting, gray background, fixing failure.
Items Contents 32 ppm 25 ppm

C Cyan developer magnet roller DC bias setting 450 450
M Magenta developer magnet roller DC bias setting 450 450
Y Yellow developer magnet roller DC bias setting 450 450
K Black developer magnet roller DC bias setting 450 450
Setting: Print Rate(B/W)
range setting
Threshold Proportion of black/white printing (Threshold) 1: On / 0: Off 0

Method: Calib
1 Select [Execute].

Calibration is started.
Items Contents
Execute Executes Full Calibration
Setting: Solid Image (High-end model only)

Items Contents
On 1: Enable smoothing edges
Off 0: Disable smoothing edges
Initial setting: On

Set from on to off
1 Select [Off].
Items Contents
Off 0: Disable smoothing edges
3 Run U464 Clib
4 Run halftone adjustment
5 Run U464 Clib
6-291
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Set from off to on

1 Select [On].
Items Contents
On 1: Enable smoothing edges
3 Run U464 Clib
4 Run halftone adjustment
5 Run U464 Clib

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-292
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U465 ID correction data

(Message: ID Adjustment Data)
Contents
Refers to the ID correction data.
Purpose
Execute for data check.
Method

The screen is switched.
Items Contents
Laser Power Display the Cyan light intensity control value.
Laser Power(En) Display the exposure level
Laser Power(Drum) Display the drum exposure level at half-life (Drum)
Laser Power(Max) Display the maximum exposure level (Max)
Bias Calib Sensor value for the toner layer calibration
T7 CTD T7 control value
Stress Primary transfer belt durability
Method: Laser Power

The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan light intensity control value.
M Display the Magenta light intensity control value.
Y Display the Yellow light intensity control value.
K Display the Black light intensity control value.
Method: Laser Power(En)

The current value is displayed. (High-end model only)
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan exposure level
M Display the Magenta exposure level
Y Display the Yellow exposure level
K Display the Black exposure level
6-293
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Laser Power(drum)

Items Contents
C Display the drum exposure level at half-life (Cyan) (Drum)
M Display the drum exposure level at half-life (Magenta) (Drum)
Y Display the drum exposure level at half-life (yellow) (Drum)
K Display the drum exposure level at half-life (Black) (Drum)
Method: Laser Power(Max)

Items Contents
C Display the Cyan maximum exposure level (Max)
M Display the Magenta maximum exposure level (Max)
Y Display the Yellow maximum exposure level (Max)
K Display the Black maximum exposure level (Max)
Method: Bias Calib

Items Contents
C Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (cyan)
M Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Magenta)
Y Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Yellow)
K Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Black)
Method: T7 CTD
Items Contents
C T7 control value (Cyan)
M T7 control value (Magenta)
Y T7 control value (Yellow)
K T7 control value (Black)
Method: Stress
Items Contents
Front Primary transfer belt durability (Front)
Rear Primary transfer belt durability (Rear)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-294
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U467 Color registration correction operation setting

(Message: Set Color Regist Adjustment Mode)
Contents
Color registration correction operation setting
Also, Set the execution condition of the color registration correction by the LSU temperature variation.
Purpose
If the color registration is unstable due to the sensor failure, etc., set it to off to temporarily fix the control value.
Method

Items Contents
Color Regist Set the color registration correction
Timing Execute the color registration correction if the LSU temperature changes by the
specified value after the previous correction
Setting: Color Regist

Items Contents
On 1: Permitting the color registration correction operation
Off 0: Prohibiting the color registration correction operation
Initial setting: On

Setting: Timing
range setting
LSU Temp Execution condition by the LSU temperature 2 to 10 10
variation

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-295
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U468 Color registration correction data

(Message: Color Regist Adjustment Data)
Contents
Display the color registration correction data and transfer belt speed correction data.
Purpose
Execute for data check.
Method
2 Select the item to refer to.

The screen is switched.
Items Contents
V Correction Display the primary transfer belt speed adjustment value
Auto(C) Displaying the automatic color registration correction value (Cyan)
Auto(M) Displaying the automatic color registration correction value (Magenta)
Auto(Y) Displaying the automatic color registration correction value (Yellow)
Manual(C) Display the manual color registration correction value (Cyan)
Manual(M) Display the manual color registration correction value (Magenta)
Manual(Y) Display the manual color registration correction value (Yellow)
Reference: V Correction
Items Contents
Status Primary transfer belt speed adjustment value
Refer: Auto(C) / Auto(M) / Auto(Y)

Items Contents
Main Scan Automatic color registration adjustment value in the main scanning direction.
Sub Scan Automatic color registration adjustment value in the sub scanning direction.
Magnification Automatic color registration correction value for magnification
Refer: Manual(C) / Manual(M) / Manual(Y)

Items Contents
Main Scan Manual color registration adjustment value in the main scanning direction.
Sub Scan Manual color registration adjustment in the sub scanning direction.
Magnification 1-6 Manual color registration correction value 1 for magnification 1-6
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-296
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U469 Primary transfer unit initial setting

(Message: Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit)
Contents
Set the operation of the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction.
Purpose
Adjust in case of color shift in printing
IMPORTANT
Make sure to execute U464 Calib before executing this maintenance mode.
Method

Select [Auto] to output the automatic adjustment chart.
Select [Manual] to enter the setting display.
Items Contents
Auto Executing the auto color registration correction
Manual Executing the manual color registration correction
Belt Initialize Executing the primary transfer belt speed correction
Method: Auto

Items Contents
Print Output the automatic adjustment chart.
Execute Start scanning and execute the automatic adjustment.
Method: Print

Output the automatic adjustment chart.
ㄪᩚ⏝ࢳ࣮ࣕࢺ
6-297
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Execute
1 Place an original on the table and press [Start] key.

Execute the automatic adjustment.
2 When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

Error codes list

Error codes Place of occurrence Factor
S001 Scanner Original reference patch is not detected
S002 Scanned image position shifted in excess in the main

scanning direction.
S003 Scanned image position shifted in excess in the sub

scanning direction.
S004 Original skew is in excess
S005 Original type mismatch
SFFF Other scanning failure
E001 Engine Engine error
CFFF Controller Other errors
Method: Manual

Items Contents
Regist Set the color registration adjustment value
Print Output the manual adjustment chart.
6-298
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Print
1 Press [Start] key to output the manual adjustment chart.

Chart sample
Print the chart that have H-1 to 7 for m, c and y (upper part) and V-1, 3, 5 (lower part).
Find the positions where two lines are best matched on each chart.
If it is in "1” to “A” then the correction is unnecessary.
In case of the illustration below, "B” (-2) is the value that should be set.
A to I are for -1 to 9.
Method: Regist
6-299
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 By using [*] [#] keys change the setting value.

range setting
CH-1 CH-1 adjustment value I to 9 -
CV-3 CV-3 adjustment value I to 9 -
MH-1 MH-1 adjustment value I to 9 -
MV-3 MV-3 adjustment value I to 9 -
YH-1 YH-1 adjustment value I to 9 -
YV-3 YV-3 adjustment value I to 9 -
4 Press [Start] key after completing input number

Color registration correction starts
5 Output the automatic adjustment chart.
6 Confirm if the gauge match in “1” to “A”
6-300
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Belt Initialize
1 Select [Execute].

Primary transfer belt speed correction starts.
3 When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

Error codes list
Codes Description Codes Description

1 Main body cover open 51 IO (AM) Calibration error 1
2 toner empty 52 IO (AM) Calibration error 2
3 Waste toner over-filled 53 IO (AM) Calibration error 3
4 Detecting the service call error 54 IO (AM) Calibration error 4
19 No discharge detection error C 55 IO Calibration error 5
20 No discharge detection error M 56 IO (FM) Calibration error 1
21 No discharge detection error Y 57 IO (FM) Calibration error 2
22 No discharge detection error K 58 IO (FM) Calibration error 3
31 ID sensor correction error 1 59 IO (FM) Calibration error 4
32 ID sensor correction error 2 60 Toner thick layer calibration error
41 Background measurement error 1 70 Light amount calibration error
42 Background measurement error 2 80 Color registration correction error
Display: Result
1 Select [Result].

The result is displayed.
Items Contents
Base Spd Temp Transfer belt temperature
Belt Spd Adj Primary transfer belt speed adjustment value
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-301
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate

(Message: Adjust JPEG Compression Rate)
Contents
Set the JPEG compression rate by image mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. Lower the set value to reduce the image
roughness by changing the compression rate in case of 200% or more of the enlarged copy . If the set value is
reduced, compression is high and image quality is lowered. If the set value is increased, image quality is improved
but processing speed is slower.
Method

Items Contents
Copy Compression rate of the copy
Send Compression rate of the Send
System Compression rate of the temporary saving in the system
Print Compression rate for printer
Method: Copy

Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
Setting: Photo
range setting
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 10 10
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 10 10
6-302
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Text
range setting
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 10 10
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 10 10

Method: Send

Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
HC-PDF(BG) Set the compression rate for high compression PDF
HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (text color).
HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (compression priority).
Setting: Photo
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 30(%)
CbCr1 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 30(%)
6-303
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Text
range setting

Setting: HC-PDF(BG)
range setting
6-304
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: HC-PDF(Char)
range setting

Setting: HC-PDF(File Size)
range setting
6-305
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: System
range setting
Y Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)
CbCr Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)

Setting: Print
range setting
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 10 7(%)
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 10 7(%)
NOTE
is running.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-306
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U474 Checking the LSU cleaning

(Message: Check LSU Cleaning Operation)
Contents
Execute the LSU cleaning by operating the LSI cleaning motor. Also, Set the cleaning operation interval and
timing to enter the operation.
Method

Items Contents
Execute Executes the LSU cleaning operation.
Cycle Set the LSU cleaning operation.
Method: Execute

The LSU slit glass is cleaned.
Method: Cycle

range setting
Cnt Set the LSU cleaning cycle. 0 to 5000 1000
Setting: Cnt
Settable in 500-sheet increments

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-307
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U485 Image process mode setting

(Message: Set Image Process Mode)
Contents
Set the PDF image rotation method. Also, changes/installs the color table.
Purpose
Execute to change the PDF image rotation method.
Execute to change the copy and printer color mode.
Method

Items Contents
Mode Set the image process mode
Color Table Set the color table
Setting: Mode

Items Contents
PDF Rotation Rotate the PDF image
settin Contents
g
0 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
1 The image rotation is designated to the actual image
2 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter (CTM

rotation)
Initial setting: 0
6-308
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Color Table

Items Contents
Color Table 1(Prn) Setting the default printer color table
Color Table 2(Prn) Set the custom printer color table
Color Table1(Copy) Setting the default copy color table
Color Table2(Copy) Set the custom copy color table
Install Color table installation
Uninstall(Prn) Uninstalling the printer color table
Uninstall(Copy) Uninstalling the copy color table
Setting:Color Table 1(Prn)/Color Table 2(Prn)
1 Display color table that is installed.
2 Select the printer color table.

setting
TYPE_CA
TYPE_FJ
TYPE_HE
TYPE_K1
TYPE_KO
TYPE_KY*1
TYPE_RH
TYPE_ST*2
TYPE_TO
*1: TYPE_KY can be used to back to factory default

*2: sRGB(PC monitor)
6-309
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting:Color Table 1(Copy)/Color Table 2(Copy)
1 Display color table that is installed.
2 Select the copy color table.

setting
CTYPE_A1*1
CTYPE_2Color(vivid)
CTYPE_CA
CTYPE_FJ
CTYPE_I1*3
CTYPE_KO
CTYPE_KY*2
CTYPE_RH
CTYPE_SH
CTYPE_TO
*1: Current model table

*2: TYPE_KY can be used to back to factory default
*3: Color table for previous model
Method: Install
Insert the USB drive with the color table files before selecting them.
Check if there is the color table file in the root folder of a USB drive.
1 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Color table installation
2 Press [Start] key to install.

The following is indicated after completing installation.
Code Contents
OK Normal completion
E002 Error in handling a file
EFFF Other errors
Method: Uninstall(Prn)/Uninstall(Copy)
1 Selects the color table to uninstall.

Simultaneous uninstallation of multiple items is available.

Completion
6-310
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-311
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U486 Color/BW mode setting

(Message: Set ACS mode (Color/BW Operation))
Contents
Set the operation mode after detecting color originals with color/BW mixed originals.
Purpose
Mode: To prioritize the productivity when copying color/BW mixed originals in ACS mode, change the setting to
Mode3. However, if setting it to Mode3, even when B/W originals come after color originals, C/M/Y developer
maintenance counts are counted up.
Permission: set in case of color background image when printing an envelope in BW half speed mode processed
as color printing.
Method

Items Contents
Mode Color/BW mode setting
Permission Permit B/W printing at half speed
Setting: Mode

Items Contents
Mode1 For users mostly printing in B/W mode and color/B/W mixed mode is not high
during continuous printing.
B/W printing remains in the color process speed after switching to color and
other process is switched .
Mode2 For users mostly printing in B/W mode and color/B/W mixed mode is high during
continuous printing.
Even when receiving a B/W print request during color printing, color printing
operation is continued until 9 pages and color mode is switched to B/W mode
when starting printing of the 10th page (Color process is stopped).
Mode3 Appropriate for users who mostly print in color.

Once switched to the color mode, B/W printing after that remains in the color
process including the surface speed.
Auto Mode 1 to 3 is automatically selected depending on the user's usage.

Select Mode 1 to 3 based on color print ratio and switch rate from the print
volume during the specified period.
6-312
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Permission

Items Contents
On Permit: B/W printing (three colors separated)
Off Prohibit: color printing (four color process)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-313
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U520 Remote Service Setting

(Message: Set Remote Service)
Contents
Set the remote service
Purpose
Set remote service function
Method

Items Contents
On/Off Config Changes to the remote service setting dialog

Items Contents
On Enable remote service function
Off Disable remote service function

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-314
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U600 Initialize: All Data

(Message: Initialize: All Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to
the destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered contents if the file
system is checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
2 The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.
3 Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
Refer to the following destination code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Set the country code
OEM Code Set the OEM code
Execute Executing data initialization
No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].
4 Select [Execute].
6-315
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Data initialization starts.
Press [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
When initialization is successful, "Completed" is displayed for one second.
Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed.
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)
Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)
Unknown Country (When both are unknown)
Country code table

County code Destination County code Destination
000 Japan 181 North America *2
156 All Asia *1 181 South America *3
254 Taiwan 253 All Europe *4
097 Korea 009 Australia
038 China 126 New Zealand *5
*1: Sales company for Singapore, India, Thailand and Hong Kong.
*2: Sales company for USA, Mexico and Canada.
*3: Sales company for Bolivia, Chile, Peru, Argentine and Brazil.
*4: Sales company for Italy, Germany, Spain, UK, Holland, Sweden, France, Australia, Switzerland, Belgium, Denmark, Fin-
land, Portugal, Ireland, Norway, Turkey, Russia, and Saudi Arabia.
*5: In case of handling in New Zealand, the country code has to be set at sales company. The code is 126 for this handling.
6-316
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U601 Initialize: Keep data

(Message: Initialize: Keep Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and OEM
setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method
2 The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.
3 Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
Refer to the following destination code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Set the OEM code
OEM Code Set the OEM code
Execute Executing data initialization
No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].
4 Select [Execute].

Data initialization starts.
Press [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
6-317
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U603 User data 1

(Message: User Data 1)
Contents
Set the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
2 Select [Line Type].

Items Contents
Line Type Line Type

Items Contents
DTMF DTMF
10PPS 10PPS
20PPS 20PPS

[Completed] is displayed.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-318
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U604 User data 2

(Message: User Data 2)
Contents
Set the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
2 Select [Rings(F/T)].
range
Rings (F/T) Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15 -
If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.

Completion
5 Press [Stop] key.

6-319
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U605 Data clear

(Message: Clear Data)
Contents
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
2 Select [Clear Com.Rec.].

Items Contents
Clear Com.Rec. Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-320
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U610 System 1
(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction mode.
Method

Items Contents
Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode.
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR) in the
auto reduction mode.
Setting: Cut Line(100%)

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If it is over the setting, they are
recorded on the next page.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variatio
n
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 0 to 22 3 -
100% magnification.
Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception. Decrease the value if there is
dropout in received image.

Setting: Cut Line: Auto
Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a
page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
n
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction 0 to 22 0 -
mode.
Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge margin.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
6-321
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Cut Line: Auto
Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when
the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or Letter R paper.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a
page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
n
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the A4R auto 0 to 22 0 -
reduction mode.
Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge margin.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-322
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U611 System 2
Contents
Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Method

Items Contents
ADJ LINES Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is
set.
Setting: ADJ LINES

n
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 0 to 22 7 -

Setting: ADJ LINES(A4)

n
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 0 to 22 22 -
paper is set.

6-323
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: ADJ LINES(LT)

Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.
n
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter 0 to 22 26 -
size paper is set.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-324
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U612 System 3
Contents
Set the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method
2 Display the item to delete.

Items Contents
Auto reduct Selects auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction
Protocol List Set the automatic protocol list printing.
Setting: Auto Reduct

Set whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the sub-scanning direction or at actual
size.
1 Change display by pressing key.

Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the FAX
paper.
Off Auto reduction is not performed.
Initial setting: On

Setting: Protocol List

Set the automatic protocol list printing.
1 Change display by pressing key.

Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.
On Automatically printed out after communication.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-325
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U615 System 6
Contents
Set the record width capacity and process if 11 inch width paper is set for the inch specification machine
Method

Items Contents
RX WIDTH FOR 11"
Setting: RX WIDTH FOR 11"

Items Contents
LEDGER Transmits the A3 width to the destination machine
B4 Transmits the B4 width to the destination machine
Initial setting: LEDGER

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-326
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U620 FAX system

(Message: FAX System)
Contents
Set the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
2 Select [Remote Mode] and press [Start] key.

Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode

Items Contents
One Set the one-shot type detection
Cont Set the continuous type detection
Initial setting: One

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-327
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U625 Communication settings

(Message: Set Communication)
Contents
Set the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to complete
transmission. Changes the setting to prevent the above phenomenon.
Method

Items Contents
Interval Set the auto redialing interval
Times Set the number of times of auto redialing
Setting: Interval
n
Set the redialing interval 1 to 9 minutes 3 -
minutes

Setting: Times
n
Set the number of times of redialing 0 to 15 times 3 times -

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-328
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U630 Communication control procedures 1

(Message: Communication Control 1)
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Set the following to correspond to field claims
• Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality line
• Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method

Items Contents
TX Speed Set the communication starting speed.
RX Speed Set the reception speed.
TX Echo Set the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
RX Echo Set the reception speed.
Setting: TX Speed
Set the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for
transmission regardless of this setting.
1 Select the communication speed.

Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
9600bps/V29 V.29 9600bps
4800bps/V27ter V.27ter 4800bps
2400bps/V27ter V.27ter 2400bps
Initial setting: 14400bps/V17

6-329
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: RX Speed
Set the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination unit has the V.34
capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1 Select the reception speed.

Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
9600bps V.29, V.27ter
4800bps V.27ter
2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)
Initial setting: 14400bps

Setting: TX Echo
Set the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with echo at
the transmitter side.

Items Contents
500 Sends the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
300 Sends the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
Initial setting: 300

Setting: RX Echo
Set the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when an error occurs
with echo at the receiver side.

Items Contents
500 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.
Initial setting: 75

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-330
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Purpose
Set the transmission and reception of ECM
Set the CED frequency
Method

Items Contents
ECM TX Set ECM transmission.
ECM RX Set ECM reception.
CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
NOTE
Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.

Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.
Off ECM transmission is disabled.
Initial setting: On

Completed is displayed.
6-331
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
NOTE
Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.

Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.
Off ECM reception is disabled.
Initial setting: On

Setting: CED Freq

Set the CED frequency. Execute it as one of the communication accuracy improvement measures for the
international communication.

Items Contents
2100 2100Hz
1100 1100Hz
Initial setting: 2100

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-332
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Corresponds to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method

Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Set the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Set the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone switching
mode.
Setting: DIS 4Byte

Set whether to send bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal.

Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Setting: Num OF CNG(F/T)

Set the CNG detection times in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode.

Items Contents
1Time Detects CNG once.
2Time Detects CNG twice.
Initial setting: 1Time (100V model)/2Time (Others)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-333
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method

Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Set the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
DIS 2Res Set the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN Check Set the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Set whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and reception.

Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
Initial setting: On

Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Set if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.

Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.
Initial setting: On

Setting: DIS 2Res

Set the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Execute it as one of the corrective measures for
transmission errors and other problems.
6-334
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.
Twice Responds to the second signal.
Initial setting: Once

Setting: RTN Check

Set the error line rate to be a reference to the RTN signal transmission. If transmission errors occur frequently due
to the line quality, lower this setting to reduce them.

Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%
Initial setting: 15%

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-335
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Set the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Execute it as one of
measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
Relax the communication conditions
Setting
2 Select [TCF Check].
setting
TCF Check Set the allowed error bytes when detecting the 1 to 255 0
TCF signal

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-336
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U640 Communication time setting 1

(Message: Communication Time 1)
Contents
Set the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Set the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method
range setting
Time(One) Set the one-shot detection time for remote 0 to 255 7
switching. 1 (New Zealand)
Time (Cont) Set the continuous detection time for 0 to 255 80

remote switching.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-337
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U641 Communication time setting 2

(Message: Communication Time 2)
Contents
Set the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method

Items Contents
T0 TIME OUT Set the T0 time-out time.
Ta TIME OUT Set the Ta time-out time.
Tb1 TIME OUT Set the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 TIME OUT Set the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc TIME OUT Set the Tc time-out time.
Td TIME OUT Set the Td time-out time.
Setting: T0 Time Out

Set the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Set to prevent disconnection of a line that occurs depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the
destination unit Set the auto switching function.
Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Set the T0 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 56
58 (100V model)

6-338
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Set the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception.
range setting
Set the T1 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 36
38 (100V model)


The T2 time-out time is specified as follows.
• From CFR signal output to image data reception
• From image data reception to the next signal reception
• In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception
range setting
Set the T2 time-out time. 1 to 255 69

Setting: Ta Time Out

Set the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/
telephone automatic switching mode. (See page ). If either receiving a FAX signal within this time or passing this
time, the mode automatically switches to the FAX reception mode. Execute when a reception error occurs when in
the automatic FAX/telephone switching.
range setting
Set the Ta time-out time. 1 to 255 s 30
6-339
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Start of fax reception

as a fax machine
Line connection
Ring back tone

Ring detection
send start
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
Setting: Tb1 Time Out

Set the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine in the FAX/telephone
automatic switching mode, (See page ). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/
telephone switching.
range setting
Set the Tb1 time-out time. 1 to 255 20

Setting: Tb2 Time Out

Set the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/
telephone automatic switching mode. (See page ). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic
FAX/telephone switching.
range setting
Set the Tb2 time-out time. 1 to 255 80

Setting: Tc Time Out

In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to FAX reception after a connected
handset receives a call. Unless switched to FAX reception during this period, operated as a normal phone after
this.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
range setting
Set the Tc time-out time. 1 to 255 s 60

6-340
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Td Time Out

Set the length of time to determine silent status, one of the triggers for Tc time check.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be
sure not to set too short, otherwise the mode may be switched to fax while the unit is being used as a telephone.
range setting
Set the Td time-out time. 1 to 255 6
30 (100V model)
9 (120V model)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-341
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Set the G3 cable equalizer. Set the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjusts the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method

Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Set the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Reg G3 RX Eqr Set the G3 reception cable equalizer.
RX Mdm Level Set the modem detection level.
Setting: Reg G3 TX Eqr
1 Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].

Initial setting: 0dB

Setting: Reg G3 RX Eqr
1 Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].

Initial setting: 0dB

Setting: RX Mdm Level
1 Select [-33dBm], [-38dBm], [-43dBm] or [-48dBm].

Initial setting: -43dBm

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-342
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Set the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting
range setting
Sgl LVL Modem Set the modem output level -15 to 0 11
10 (100V model)
12 (Australia)
DTMF LEV (Cent) DTMF output level (center value) -15.0 to 0.0 -8
-9 (100V model)
-7 (Australia)
-6 (120V model)
DTMF LEV (Diff) Set the DTMF output level (level 0 to 5.5 2
difference) 1.5 (Australia)
1 (New Zealand)

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-343
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U660 Call Setting

(Message: Set Calls)
Contents
Set the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method

Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
Dial Tone Set the PSTN dial tone detection.
Busy Tone Set the busy tone detection.
PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection
DC Loop Set the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting: Exchange
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.

Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
PBX Connecting to the PBX
Initial setting: PSTN

Setting: Dial Tone

Selects whether or not to check for a dial tone to check if the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to
a public switched telephone network.

Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.
Off The dial tone is not detected.
Initial setting: On
6-344
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Busy Tone

Set whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone is not detected
and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time, when a FAX signal is sent
FAX transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When setting it to OFF, this problem may be
improved. However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy.

Items Contents
On Detects the busy tone.
Off Does not detect the busy tone.
Initial setting: On/Off (Australia)

Setting: PBX Setting

Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
IMPORTANT
*According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.

Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode
Loop Code number mode
Initial setting: Loop

Setting: DC Loop
Set if the loop current is detected before dialing.

Items Contents
On Loop current before dialing is detected
Off Loop current before dialing is not detected
Initial setting: On

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-345
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U670 List output

(Message: Output List)
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print Jobs] is pressed to
halt printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
4 Output selected list.

Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential boxes,
firmware versions and other information.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance mode
(self-status report).
Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Error List Output the error list.
Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order
Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.
One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.
Group List Outputs the group list.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-346
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U671 FAX backup data clear

(Message: Clear FAX Back Up Data)
Contents
clear the FAX/i-FAX communication history and scheduled FAX transmission backup data in the FAX PWB.
Purpose
Execute to prevent information disclosure of the backup data.
Setting
2 Select the object item.

Items Contents
RECOVERY FAX Storage Enable to use the DIMM used in another machine.
Use for releasing C0650
FAX Data CLEAR clear all the data in the DIMM.
Change FAX Storage Change folder for the backup data
Method: FAX Data CLEAR
1 Select [FAX Data CLEAR] .

clear the backup data.
Method: Change FAX Storage
1 Select: [Change FAX Storage] .

Items Contents
SSD Set SDD as destination.
HDD Set HDD as destination.

• [Change FAX Storage] is available only if the security kit is on.
• In case that the security kit is off, SSD is set as destination device.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-347
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U695 FAX function customization

(Message: Customize FAX Function)
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method

Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX FAX batch transmission is set up.
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
DetectionTime Setting detection time of FAX print job suspend error (C0950).
Setting: FAX Bulk TX
1 By using [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.
Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.
Initial setting: On

Setting: A5 Pt Pri Chg
1 By using [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3
Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4
2 Initial setting: Off

Setting: Detection Time
setting
DetectionTime Setting detection time of FAX print job suspend 1/2/3 3 hours
error (Time).

Completion
6-348
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-349
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U698 Setting the maintenance port

(Message: Set Port for Maintenance)
Contents
Set the port applicable to the maintenance mode.
Purpose
Set the maintenance mode target port when installing multiple ports .
Setting is unnecessary if the same contents are set for both ports. Set only when different items are set for each
port.
NOTE
This maintenance mode only appears when the multiple ports are installed.
Setting
2 Press [Port Select].

Current setting display is inverted.

Items Contents
ALL All ports
PORT 1 Port 1 (FAX PWB port)
PORT 2 Port 2 (Optional multiple port)
IMPORTANT
These contents to set are cleared when exiting the maintenance mode or turning the power
off and the settings are necessary when entering the maintenance mode.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-350
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U699 Software switch: Set

(Message: Set: Soft SW)
Contents
Set the FAX software switches individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
NOTE
Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed.
Method
2 Select [SW No.].
3 Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specifies the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
4 Press the keys of bit 0 to 7 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.

Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-351
[CONFIDENTIAL]
List of software switches which can be configured

Communication control procedures
No. Bit Contents
36 7654 Coding format in transmission
3210 Coding format in reception
37 5 33600bps/V34
4 31200bps/V34
3 28800bps/V34
2 26400bps/V34
1 24000bps/V34
0 21600bps/V34
38 7 19200bps/V34
6 16800bps/V34
5 14400bps/V34
4 12000bps/V34
3 9600bps/V34
2 7200bps/V34
1 4800bps/V34
0 2400bps/V34
41 3 FSK detection in V.8
42 4 4800 bps transmission when low-speed setting is active
2 FIF length when transmitting DIS/DTC signal 4 times or more
Communication time setting

No. Bit Contents
53 76543210 T3 timeout setting
54 76543210 T4 timeout setting (auto transmission)
55 76543210 T5 timeout setting
60 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal
63 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual transmission)
64 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception
66 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Modem setting
No. Bit Contents
89 76543 RX gain adjust
6-352
[CONFIDENTIAL]
NCU setting
No. Bit Contents
121 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection chart
122 7654 Busy tone detection chart
1 Busy tone detection in FAX/TEL automatic switching
125 76543210 Registering the access code for connection to PSTN
126 7654 Ring-back tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/
telephone switching
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Calling time setting

No. Bit Contents
133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time
134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time
141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)
142 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)
143 76543210 Ringer ON time detection
144 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection
145 76543210 Ringer OFF time undetected
147 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)
148 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time
149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC
circuit
151 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time
6-353
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U901 Clearing the counters by paper source

(Message: Clear Paper Feeder Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the counts by paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance
parts.
Method

Display the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Display/clear the MP tray feed counter
Cassette1 Display/clear Cassette 1 count
Cassette2 Display/clear Cassette 2 count
Cassette 3 *1 Display Cassette 3 count
Cassette 4 *1 Display Cassette 4 count
Cassette5 Display Cassette 4 count
Duplex Display/clear the duplex unit count
*1: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2, *2: 3000-sheet side paper feeder
2 Select the counter to clear.

Unable to clear [Cassette 3], [Cassette 4] and [Cassette 5]

• Select screen come up with both main unit and PF cassette counter in case of discrepancy between them.
Items Contents
Cassette3 * Display counter of [Engine] and [Enhancement].
*: Display only if cassette 3 to cassette 5 is available.

• Switch [Engine] and [Enhancement] by pressing key.
2 Select [Execute].

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-354
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U903 Clearing the jam counter

(Message: Clear Paper Misfeed Counter)
Contents
Display/clear the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

Items Contents
Cnt Displaying/clearing the jam counts
Total Cnt Displaying the accumulate jam counts
Method: Cnt
1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2 Select [Clear] to clear the jam counts.

Individual counters cannot be cleared.

Method: Total Cnt
1 Select [Total Cnt].

Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
2 Change the screen using [▲] [▼] key.

Unable to clear the accumulated jam counter values.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-355
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U904 Clearing the service call error counter

(Message: Clear Service Call Counter)
Contents
Display/clear the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Executes to check the service call error. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

Items Contents
Cnt Display/clear the service call counter.
Total Cnt Display accumulate service call error counts.
Method: Cnt
1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2 Select [Clear] to clear the service call error counter.

Individual counters cannot be cleared.

Method: Total Cnt
1 Select [Total Cnt].

Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Unable to clear the accumulated service call error counter values.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-356
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U905 Optional counter

(Message: Option Counter)
Contents
Display the counter values of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher and inner finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher and inner
finisher.
Method
2 Select the device to check.

Switched to the counter screen.
Items Contents
DP *1 Display the document processor count.
DF *2 Display the document finisher count.
*1: DP installed machine, *2: DF installed machine

Method: DP
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.
RADP Duplex original count is displayed.
CIS *1 Display the count of simultaneous duplex scanning
*1: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP installed machine

Method: DF
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Carry in Display the sorter counter.
Staple Display the staple counter.
Punch Display the punch counts
Tray A Display the main tray eject counter.
Saddle *1 Display the saddle eject counter.
Fold *1 Display the center folding counter.
Three Fold *1 Display the three folding counter.
*1: 4000-sheet/100 sheet staple finisher installed machine

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-357
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U906 Resetting the partial operation

(Message: Reset Disable Function Mode)
Contents
Release the service call error with partial operation.
Purpose
If the partial operation is executed with a broken cassette, etc., make sure to execute it after repairing the parts.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Reset the partial operation.
3 Press [Start] key to release the partial operation.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-358
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U908 Total counter

(Message: Total Counter)
Contents
Display the total counter.
Purpose
Display the total counter for check.
Method

Display the total count.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-359
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U910 Black rate data

(Message: Clear Coverage Data)
Contents
Clear the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as shown on the
service status page).
Purpose
clear data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clear the print coverage data
3 Press [Start] key to clear the print coverage data.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-360
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U911 Counter by media type

(Message: Paper Size Counter)
Contents
Display the paper feed counts by paper size.
Purpose
Display the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method

Display the paper feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A3 *1 Display A3 feed counts
B4 *1 Display B4 feed counts
B5 *1 Display B5 feed counts
Folio *1 Display Folio feed counts
Ledger *2 Display Statement feed counts

*2
Legal Display Legal feed counts
Letter *2 Display Letter feed counts
Statement *2 Display Statement feed counts
ETC Display Other paper feed counts.
*1: metric specification, *2: inch specification

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-361
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U917 Read/Write Backup Data

(Message: Read/Write Backup HDD Data(USB))
Contents
Retrieve the backup data to a USB drive from the main unit, or writes the data from the USB drive to the main unit.
Purpose
Makes a back up of the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information
Method
1 Turn the power switch off.

Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB drive.
5 Select the object item.

Items Contents Depending data*
Address Book Address book information -
Job Account Job accounting information -
One Touch One-touch key information Address book information
User User management information Job accounting information
Document Box Document box information Job accounting, User information
Shortcut Short-cut information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
Fax Forward FAX forward information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
System System setting information -
Network Network setting information -
Job Setting Job setting information -
Printer Printer setting information -
Fax Setting FAX setting information -
Program Program information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User

management, Document box, FAX transfer and FAX setting
Panel Setting Panel setting information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX setting and
Program
* 1: Storing data in box are not saved as backup.

* 2: Only if fax is installed
Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or written.
6 Select [Export] or [Import].

Items Contents
Import Import data from the USB drive to the main unit.
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB drive.
6-362
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Press [Start] key. Starts reading or writing.

The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code appears.
9 When selecting [Import], turn the power switch off then on, after completing writing. Wait more than 5 seconds
between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
e0001 Error in the internal process
e0002 File access error (Access failure to USB drive etc.)
e0003 The XML file to import does not exist
e0004 Specified incompatible file with Import.
e0005 File is broken (Extract failure of ZIP)
e0100 to e01ff Error in handling address-book
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-363
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U920 Billing counter

(Message: Charge Counter)
Contents
Display the billing count.
Purpose
Execute to check the current billing counts
Method
2 Select the item to display.

Switched to each display screen.
Items Contents
Main Function Main function counts
Sub Function Sub functions counts
Method: Main Function

The charge counts for the main functions are displayed.
Items Contents
Col Copy (H) Display Color copy counts (Coverage: High)
Col Copy (M) Display Color copy counts (Coverage: Middle)
Col Copy (L) Display Color copy counts (Coverage: Low)
Mono Color Copy Display Mono color copy count
B/W Copy Display B/W copy count is displayed.
Col Prn (H) Display Color print counts (Coverage: High)
Col Prn (M) Display Color print counts (Coverage: Middle)
Col Prn (L) Display Color print counts (Coverage: Low)
B/W Prn Display B/W print count is displayed
B/W FAX Display FAX count
Method: Sub Function

The charge counts for the sub functions are displayed.
Items Contents
Simplex Display Simplex print count
Duplex Display Duplex print count
Combine (Off) Display Combine print counts (Off)
Combine (2in1) Display Combine print counts (2in1)
Combine (4in1) Display Combine print counts (4in1)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-364
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters

(Message: Clear All Charge/Life Counter (one time only))
Contents
clear all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the billing count and machine life count.

clear all charge counts and machine life counts.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-365
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U928 Machine life counter

(Message: Machine Life Counter)
Contents
The current machine life counts is displayed.
Purpose
Executed to check the machine life count
Method

The current machine life counts is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the machine life count
Color Cnt Display the machine color life count
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-366
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts

(Message: Clear Charger Roller Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the current main charger roller counts.
Purpose
To verify the main charger roller counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacement
Method

The main charge roller counter for each color is displayed.
Items Contents
C The current main charger roller count for C is displayed.
M The current main charger roller count for M is displayed.
Y The current main charger roller count for Y is displayed.
K The current main charger roller count for K is displayed.
Method: Clear
2 Select [Clear].

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-367
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log

(Message: Set Maintenance Mode Execute Log)
Contents
Set the function to record the in/out date of the maintenance mode or date executing each maintenance item
individually and output the log file.
Purpose
Record the maintenance mode history to analyze the cause when a problem occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Export Exports Maintenance Log.
Setting Maintenance log output setting
Method: Export
1 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Export the maintenance log to a USB drive.

Export the maintenance log to a USB drive.
If a USB drive is not inserted, [Execute] is grayed out .
Display OK/NG after execution.
6-368
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Setting

Select the key including the number to set indicated by each block.
Items Contents
U000-U019 Set the maintenance log output for U000 to U019.
Set on/off for the number desired to set.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-369
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U942 DP loop amount setting

(Message: Adjust DP Original Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document processor.
Purpose
Execute when original no-feed jam, skew or creases on the original appears.
Method
NOTE
Items Contents Setting Initial Data variation
range setting
Front Single-side original loop amount -32 to 32 0 0.20mm (DP-7100)
0.16mm (DP-7110/ DP-7130)
0.06mm (DP-7120)
Back *1 Double-side original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.18mm
Mix *2 Mixed original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.18mm
*1: Reversing duplex scanning machine only, *2: except DP-7120

When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases when the setting value is
decreased.
Increase the set value if no feed jam or skew feed occurs and reduce the set value if creases appear on the original.

Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-370
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U952 Maintenance mode workflow

(Message: Maintenance Mode Work Flow)
Contents
Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the main unit or the USB drive.
Purpose
Execute to register regular maintenance items.
Method

Items Contents
Continue Resume interrupted workflow.
Execute(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB drive.
Execute Execute the workflow saved in the main unit.
Entry(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB drive.
Entry Register the workflow in the main unit manually.
Log Display the latest workflow execution history.
Method: Continue
1 Select maintenance item number to execute.

Selected maintenance mode is executed.
Method: Execute(USB)
1 Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
5 Select [Execute(USB)].
6 Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB drive

Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the workflow.
6-371
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Method: Execute
1 Select the place to save the data to execute.

Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit
3 Press [Start] key to start the processing.

Following workflow is preset in main unit from factory.
Low-end model
Items Contents
SET UP 464, 469, 410, 000, 927, 278
HIGH ALTITUDE 140, 101, 464
WARRANTY 089, 000
MK-A 930, 464, 469, 410, 251
MK-B 930, 464, 469, 410, 251
MK-A MK-D 930, 469, 127, 464, 469, 410, 251
MK-B MK-E 930, 464, 469, 410, 251
EH SETUP 411, 034, 246, 211
High-end Model
Items Contents
SET UP 464, 469, 410, 000, 927, 278
HIGH ALTITUDE 140, 101, 464
WARRANTY 089, 000
MK-A 119, 930, 140, 469, 127, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251
MK-B 119, 930, 140, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251
EH SETUP 411, 034, 246, 211
Method: Entry(USB)
5 Select [Entry(USB)].
6 Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB drive
6-372
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Select the workflow save area.

Items Contents
8 Select [Execute].
Registers the workflow in a USB drive to the main unit.
Method: Entry
1 Select [Entry].
2 Select the workflow save area.

Items Contents
3 By using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, enter the maintenance number to register in the workflow.
Items Contents
Flow 1 - 14 Registered maintenance numbers

Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the workflow.
e.g.
When inserting a USB drive the following items can be registered: commands, texts and maintenance numbers (variable).
File format: xxx.mwf
1, SET UP, 464, 469, 410, 000, 927, 278
2, HIGH ALTITUDE, 140, 101, 464
3, WARRANTY, 089, 000
4, MK-A, 119, 930, 140, 469, 127, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251
5, MK-B, 119, 930, 140, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251
6, EH SETUP, 411, 034, 246, 211
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-373
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U964 Retrieve Log Flow

(Message: Hide)
Contents
Transfer the log files saved in the HDD to a USB drive.
The data contains log and screen shot at retrieving log.
Purpose
In order to investigate a failure, retrieve the log file saved in the HDD to a USB drive.
Method
5 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.

Starts transferring the log files saved in the HDD to a USB drive.
[Processing] is displayed. (About 3 to 5 minutes)
7 [Completed] appears after normal completion.
Error codes
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB drive is not installed
No File No file
Mount Error USB drive mount error
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB drive
Copy Error HDD to USB drive copy failure
Unmount Error USB drive unmount error
Other Error Other error
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-374
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U977 Setting the data capture mode

(Message: Set Data Capture Mode)
Contents
Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB drive.
Purpose
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB drive to check it.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB drive.
Stop Stop storing

When the operation is completed abnormally, an error code is displayed.
Error codes
Items Contents
1 USB drive is broken. USB drive was disconnected during data processing or is
write-protected.
4 USB drive is full.
50 Other error occurs
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-375
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U984 Developer unit number

(Message: Developing Unit Number)
Contents
Display the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method

Display the developer unit number.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer unit number
M Display the Magenta developer unit number
Y Display the Yellow developer unit number
K Display the Black developer unit number
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-376
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U985 Developer unit history

(Message: Developing Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Display the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method

Select color to refer to.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer unit history
M Display the Magenta developer unit history
Y Display the Yellow developer unit history
K Display the Black developer unit history
Display the machine serial number and 3 items of the developer counter history
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Developer counter history
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-377
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U989 HDD scan disk

(Message: HDD Scan disk)
Contents
Apply Scan disk to the HDD for data recovery.
Purpose
Execute recovery of HDD management data error by turning the power off while accessing to the HDD.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute HDD scan disk request
3 Press [Start] key to execute Scan disk.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-378
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time

(Message: Clear Scanner Lamp ON Time)
Contents
Display the accumulated CIS lighting time
Purpose
Execute to check the CIS usage.
Method

CIS accumulated lighting time is displayed in minutes.
Items Contents
CIS Display the accumulated CIS lamp lighting time
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-379
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U991 Scanner counter

(Message: Scanner Counter)
Contents
Display the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method

Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Display times of copy and scan operations
Fax Scan Display times of FAX scan operations
Other Scan Display times of other scan operations
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.

6-380
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7 Troubleshooting
7 - 1 Image formation problems
(1)Isolate the place of image failure
How to isolate the cause
Print Test Page to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: engine factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.

Yes: Scanner factor
1 Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](See page P.7-2, P.7-24 or P.7-38).
(LED lamp for originals on the contact glass>CCD failure at scanning factor)
Isolate with the original scanning position.

a. DP simplex (Scan by the main unit CCD)
b. On the contact glass (Scan by the main unit CCD)
2 Refer to image failure with engine factor (See page P.7-56 or P.7-24).
(Main charge --> Drum --> LSU --> Developer --> Transfer image formation process failure)
Image data flow
Copying :
APC PWB
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB
(LSU)
Sending :
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB PC
Printing data from PC :

APC PWB
Printer driver Engine PWB
(LSU)
7-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back side
through the mechanically reversed DP)
No. Contents Image sample
(2-1) Abnormal image (page 7-5)
(2-2) Colored background (page 7-6)
(2-3) Black or color spots (page 7-8)
(2-4) Blurred characters (page 7-9)
(2-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and

the center of the copy image (Front side) (page
7-10)

the center of the copy image (Back side) (page
7-10)
(2-7) Horizontal black streaks (page 7-11)
(2-8) Vertical streaks, band (black or color) (page 7-

12)
7-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-9) Regular difference of the leading edge on the
original image and copy image (Front side)
(page 7-14)

original image and copy image (Back side)
(page 7-14)
(2-11) Vertical streaks, band (white) (page 7-15)
(2-12) moiré (front side) (page 7-16)
(2-13) moiré (back side) (page 7-16)
(2-14) Missing entire image (White / Black) (page 7-17)
(2-15) Image is dark partly or light (page 7-17)
(2-16) Blurred image (page 7-18)
7-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-17) Image is missing partly (page 7-19)
(2-18) Color registration (page 7-20)
(2-19) Skewed image (page 7-21)
(2-20) Entire image is light (page 7-22)
7-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)
(2-1)Abnormal image
(When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection FFC is not connected properly. Clean the FFC terminals of the following FFC Service
Or it is faulty. and reconnect them. If the FFC terminal is Manual -
deformed or broken, replace the FFC. Section 8
• CCD PWB - Engine PWB "PWBs"
2 Checking the connection The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD connection cable. Or, Detaching
connected, or is faulty. replace it. and
reattaching
the HDD
3 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD. Detaching
and
reattaching
the HDD
4 Checking the lens unit The lens unit is not attached Reattach the lens unit. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
5 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7 Checking the main PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the Service
not connected properly. Or, main PWB, reconnect the connector of the Manual -
the wire, FFC, the PWB is wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the Section 8
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace "PWBs"
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Colored background

1 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density] to [Auto] at Function
Adjustment is not set. [System Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
Settings] > [Function Defaults] (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
2 Changing the setting The background density is Set [Background Density] to [Manual] to Function
dark. adjust the density at [System Menu/Counter] Defaults
> [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults] (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
3 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Auto] in Background
Adjustment is not set. [Color/Image Quality]. Density
Adjustment
(Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
4 Changing the setting The original background Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Manual] in Background
density is dark. The [Color/Image Quality], and adjust the Density
background density background density. Adjustment
adjustment is dark. (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
5 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original while holding it
scanning.
6 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the backside of Detaching
the contact glass. and
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. When the same phenomenon occurs at the Maintenanc
table scanning too, execute U411 e Mode List
[Table(chartA)].
8 Reattaching the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.
10 Checking the lamp unit The lamp unit is not attached Reattach the lamp unit. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
11 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty or not Clean the DP slit glass or reattach it.
properly attached.
12 Adjusting the left DP hinge The original is raised at Adjust the left DP hinge height.
height scanning.
7-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]

13 Replacing the DP The DP frame is deformed or Replace the document processor. Detaching
the DP hinges are faulty. and
reattaching
the DP
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
15 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)Black or color spots


1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Cleaning the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass.
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-4)Blurred characters

1 Checking the original The originals out of Ask a user to use the specified paper.
specification are used. (They
are thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
original is bent. the original.
3 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller or the Clean the DP conveying roller and the
roller and the bushings bushing is dirty. bushing.
4 Checking the DP conveying The original conveying pulley Reattach the DP conveying pulley and the
pulley and the pressure spring does not rotate smoothly. pressure spring.
5 Checking the DP drive parts The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
properly attached.
6 Checking the original pick-up The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up guide.
guide does not operate properly.
7 Replacing the DP scanning The DP scanning guide is Replace the DP scanning guide.
guide deformed.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights of Adjust the left DP hinge height.
height the DP do not match.
9 Checking the DP The document processor is Check the positioning of the document
not properly installed in the processor and tighten the screws again.
main unit.
10 Checking the DP hinges The holding pressure of the Adjust the DP hinges holding pressure.
holding pressure DP hinge is not properly
adjusted. (The DP hinge does
not operate smoothly in the up
and down direction, and the
right and left sides of the DP
are distorted because the DP
can not hold the opened
condition.)
11 Replacing the DP hinges DP hinge is faulty. (The DP Replace the DP hinges.
hinge does not operate
smoothly in the up and down
direction, and the right and left
sides of the DP are distorted
because the DP can not hold
the opened condition.)
7-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-5)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Front
side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)

1 Checking the original The originals are not properly Reset the originals.
set on the original tray.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scanning Adjust U072 [Front]. Maintenanc
the front page of the originals e Mode List
at the document processor is
not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjustment Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. (For the dual Maintenanc
when DP scanning is not scan DP only) e Mode List
executed.
4 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjustment Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)]. Maintenanc
when DP scanning is not e Mode List
executed.
(2-6)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Back
side)
(When scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)

1 Checking the original The originals are not properly Reset the originals.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scanning Adjust U072 [Back]. Maintenanc
the back page of the originals e Mode List
at the document processor is
not adjusted.
7-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-7)Horizontal black streaks


3 Executing U072 Scanning the image on the Adjust U072 [Front]. Maintenanc
back of the size indication e Mode List
plate. (U072 [Front]
adjustment value is not
proper.)
4 Executing U411 Scanning the image on the Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
back of the size indication e Mode List
plate. (U411 [Table(ChartA)]
adjustment value is not
proper.)
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-8)Vertical streaks, band (black or color)


1 Cleaning the DP slit glass and The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass and the DP
the DP original conveying conveying guide.
guide
2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and the shading Detaching
shading plate at the backside plate at the backside of the contact glass. and
of the contact glass is dirty. reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
3 Cleaning the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the mirror in the lamp unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
4 Checking the lamp unit The dust is adhered on the Remove dust inside the laser path of the Detaching
lamp unit. lamp unit. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
5 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using an air-blower.
6 Executing U063 The image scanning position Execute U063 to change the scanner Maintenanc
is incorrect. shading position. e Mode List
8 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original paper size. Original Size
detected original size are (Operation
mismatched. Guide -
Section 8)
9 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
10 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust U067 [Front]. Maintenanc
incorrect. (The streaks or e Mode List
bands appear out of the
original image.)
11 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
incorrect. (Streaks or bands e Mode List
appear out of the original.)
12 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust U068 [DP Read]. Maintenanc
scanning an original on the DP e Mode List
is incorrect.
original image.)
14 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Maintenanc
15 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)]. Maintenanc
7-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-9)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Front side)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust U071 [Front]. Maintenanc
original leading edge at the e Mode List
document processor is not
properly set.
2 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. (For the dual Maintenanc
scanning an original on the DP scan DP only) e Mode List
is incorrect.
3 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)]. Maintenanc
is incorrect.
5 Replacing the DP conveying The DP conveying roller is Replace the DP conveying roller.
roller worn down.
6 Applying the grease The DP drive motor rotates Apply the grease to the drive gear of the DP
irregularly and the excessive drive motor. (EM-50LP: Part number
load is applied to the DP drive (7BG010009H))
gear.
7 Replacing the DP drive motor The DP drive motor rotates Reattach the DP drive motor and reconnect
irregularly due to the fault. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
(2-10)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Back
side)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust U071 [Back]. Maintenanc
leading edge on the back page e Mode List
of the originals at the
document processor is not
properly set.
7-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-11)Vertical streaks, band (white)


and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
4 Checking the lens cover The lens cover is off. Reattach the lens cover. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
5 Executing U063 The shading plate at the Execute U063 to change the scanner Maintenanc
backside of the contact glass shading position. e Mode List
is dirty.
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
9 Cleaning the DP slit glass and The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass and the DP original
guide
7-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-12)moiré (front side)


1 Changing the setting The original image quality is Set [Original Image] at [System Menu/ Function
not set properly. (moiré Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults
changes depending on the Defaults] (Operation
image quality.) Guide -
Section 6)
2 Reloading the original The original is not set properly. Rotate the originals in 90 degrees and reset
(moiré appears in the original them.
scanning direction.)
(2-13)moiré (back side)


1 Changing the setting The original image quality is Set [Original Image] at [System Menu/ Function
not set properly. (moiré Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults
changes depending on the Defaults] (Operation
Section 6)
7-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-14)Missing entire image (White / Black)


1 Checking the original The originals were set upside Reset the front and back of the original
down. correctly
2 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is not Reattach the DP slit glass.
properly attached.
is incorrect.
4 Checking the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
6 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive belt comes Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt off.
7 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive gear is not Reattach the scanner drive gear.
gear properly attached.
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
(2-15)Image is dark partly or light


1 Checking the table scanning The table scanning of originals Check if the same phenomenon occurs Measures
is faulty. when scanning on the contact glass. If it for Table
occurs, perform the field measures for the Scanning
same phenomenon that occurs when
scanning on the contact glass.
3 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is bent. Reattach the DP slit glass.
4 Checking the DP scanning DP scanning guide is not Reattach the DP scanning guide.
guide installed properly.
7-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-16)Blurred image

1 Replacing the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or replace it if
possible.
2 Removing condensation The DP slit glass has Remove the condensation on the DP slit
condensation. glass.
3 Removing condensation The mirror has condensation. Remove the condensation on the mirror in Detaching
the lamp unit. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
4 Removing condensation The lens has condensation. Remove the condensation on the lens in the Detaching
lens unit. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
5 Removing condensation The glass of the CCD PWB Remove the condensation on the CCD PWB Detaching
has condensation. glass using a blower brush and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
6 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
scanner is incorrect. e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-17)Image is missing partly


1 Checking the original The original is not set properly. Reset the originals.
2 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manually. Original Size
paper side do not match on (Operation
the operation panel. (The Guide -
setting is incorrect.) Section 8)
3 Changing the setting The copy position is rotated Set [Auto Image Rotation] to [Off] from the Function
automatically. System Menu. Defaults
(Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
properly attached.
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-18)Color registration

1 Checking the original The originals out of Ask a user to use the specified paper.
specification are used. (They
are thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
original is bent. the original.
4 Checking the DP conveying The original conveying pulley Reattach the DP conveying pulley and the
pulley and the pressure spring does not rotate smoothly. pressure spring.
5 Checking the DP drive parts The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
properly attached.
6 Replacing the DP scanning The DP scanning guide is Replace the DP scanning guide.
guide deformed.
7 Checking the original pick-up The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up guide.
guide does not operate properly.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights of Adjust the left DP hinge height.
height the DP do not match.
9 Checking the DP The document processor is Check the positioning of the document
not properly installed in the processor and tighten the screws again.
main unit.
10 Checking the DP hinges The holding pressure of the Adjust the DP hinges holding pressure.
holding pressure DP hinge is not properly
adjusted. (The DP hinge does
not operate smoothly in the up
and down direction, and the
right and left sides of the DP
are distorted because the DP
can not hold the opened
condition.)
11 Replacing the DP hinges DP hinge is faulty. (The DP Replace the DP hinges.
hinge does not operate
smoothly in the up and down
direction, and the right and left
sides of the DP are distorted
because the DP can not hold
the opened condition.)
7-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-19)Skewed image

1 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
creased. the original.
2 Checking the original width The original skews. Relocate the original width guides.
guides
3 Adjusting the right DP hinge The right DP hinge position is Adjust the right DP hinge position back and Right DP
position not adjusted back and forth. forth. Hinge
Adjustment
(DP-7110
Installation
Guide)
4 Cleaning the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. (It Clean the DP feed roller.
can be removed by cleaning.)
5 Replacing the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. (It Replace the DP feed roller.
cannot be removed by
cleaning.)
6 Cleaning the DP registration The DP registration roller is Clean the DP registration roller.
roller dirty.
7 Checking the DP registration The operation of the DP Reattach the DP registration pulley.
pulley registration pulley is faulty.
8 Executing U942 The original loop amount Adjust the original loop amount at U942. Maintenanc
before registration is improper. e Mode List
7-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-20)Entire image is light


is incorrect.
2 Cleaning the DP slit glass and The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass and the DP
guide
properly attached.
4 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality according to the Original
adjusted. (The original type originals. Image
and image quality differs.) (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
5 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] > Function
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set to [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] > Defaults
"On".) [EcoPrint] (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
6 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be dark. Adjustment/
adjusted. (The density setting Maintenanc
is too light.) e (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
7 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Background Density Adjustment/
adjusted. ([Background Adjustment to make it dark. Maintenanc
density] is set to "Off".) e (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
8 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] setting is Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] > Function
[On] [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] > Defaults
[Prevent Bleed-thru] (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
10 Executing U411 The scanner image is not Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)] and [DP Maintenanc
adjusted. FU(ChartA)]. e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
7-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Scanner Factors (Dual scan DP:When scanning the back side through DP)

the center of the copy image (page 7-29)

30)

original image and copy image (page 7-31)
7-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-9) Moiré (page 7-32)
(3-10) Missing entire image (White / Black) (page 7-32)
(3-14) Color shift (page 7-36)
7-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)

(3-1)Abnormal image
Object: Dual scan DP
(When scanning the back side through DP)

1 Checking the DP relay PWB The DP relay PWB is not Reattach the DP relay PWB.
properly attached.
2 Checking the SATA cable The SATA cable is not Reinsert the connectors of the SATA cable Service
properly connected. between the DPSHD PWB and the DP relay Manual -
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
3 Replacing the SATA cable The SATA cable is deformed Replace the SATA cable between the Service
or broken. DPSHD PWB and the DP relay PWB. Manual -
Section 8
"PWBs"
4 Checking the DPSHD PWB The DPSHD PWB is not Reconnect the DPSHD PWB to the DPCIS.
properly connected.
5 Replacing the DPSHD PWB The DPSHD PWB is faulty. Replace the DPSHD PWB.
6 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS then execute U091 and Detaching
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
7 Replacing the DP relay PWB The DP relay PWB is faulty. Replace the DP relay PWB.
8 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Setting Background Density The original background Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Auto] in Background
Adjustment density is dark. The [Color/Image Quality]. Density
background density Adjustment
adjustment is set to Off. (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
2 Setting Background Density The original background Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Manual] in Background
Adjustment density is dark. The [Color/Image Quality], and adjust the Density
Guide -
Section 6)
3 Executing U411 The CIS image adjustment Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. Maintenanc
(U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]) is not e Mode List
executed.
4 Checking the CIS roller The CIS roller is dirty Clean the CIS roller
5 Checking the CIS roller The CIS roller does not rotate Reattach the CIS roller driving section.
properly.
properly attached.
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
Section 8
"PWBs"
properly connected.
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]


1 Checking the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
properly attached.
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
Section 8
"PWBs"
properly connected.
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-4)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image

1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reload the original properly.
set on the DP.
2 Executing U072 The DP scanning position is Adjust the DPCIS center line by executing Maintenanc
not adjusted. U072 [CIS]. e Mode List
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Maintenanc
not adjusted. e Mode List
4 Executing U411 The DP scanning position is Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. Maintenanc


2 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the DP conveying
guide.
properly attached.
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
Section 8
"PWBs"
properly connected.
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]


1 Executing U072 The leading edge timing is Adjust U072 [CIS]. Maintenanc
improperly adjusted. (Streaks e Mode List
or bands appear on the image
outside the original.)
2 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Maintenanc
3 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. Maintenanc
4 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the DP conveying
guide.
5 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying guide is Clean the DP conveying guide.
guide dirty.
6 Checking the DP registration The DP registration pulley is Clean the DP registration pulley.
pulley dirty.
8 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line Execute U091. Maintenanc
correction) is not executed. e Mode List
properly attached.
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
Section 8
"PWBs"
properly connected.
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-7)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image

1 Executing U072 The DP scanning position is Adjust the DPCIS center line by executing Maintenanc
not adjusted. U072 [CIS]. e Mode List
2 Executing U411 The DP scanning position is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Maintenanc
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position is Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. Maintenanc


2 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the DP conveying
guide.
3 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line Execute U091. Maintenanc
correction) is not executed. e Mode List
properly attached.
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
Section 8
"PWBs"
properly connected.
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-9)Moiré

1 Changing the image quality The image quality mode is not Change the image quality mode. Printer
mode set properly. (Moiré changes Driver
depending on the image Operation
mode) Guide
3 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. Maintenanc
adjustment is not executed. e Mode List
(3-10)Missing entire image (White / Black)


properly attached.
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
Section 8
"PWBs"
properly connected.
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]


1 Checking the image quality Image quality is not properly Select the image quality fitting the original Original
mode adjusted. (Original type and type. Image
image quality are (Operation
mismatched.) Guide -
Section 8)
3 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the fold or creases of the original.
creased.
properly.
guide.
properly attached.
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
Section 8
"PWBs"
properly connected.
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-12)Blurred image

1 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass has Remove condensation on the CIS glass.
condensation.
guide.
3 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is warped. Reattach the CIS glass.
4 Replacing the CIS glass The CIS glass has some Replace the CIS glass.
scratches.
properly.
6 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. Maintenanc
7 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS is not properly Reattach the DPCIS. Detaching
attached. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
8 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS then execute U091 and Detaching
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
7-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]


1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reload the original properly.
2 Setting the original size Actual original size and Set the original size manually. Original Size
mismatched. Guide -
Section 8)
3 Changing the Border Erase The Border Erase function is Lower the setting of the Border Erase. Border
function not properly set. (Setting is too Erase
large.) (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
properly attached.
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
Section 8
"PWBs"
properly connected.
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-14)Color shift

1 Checking the first side There is a factor in the original Check if the same phenomenon occurs Measures
scanning through DP feeding. when scanning the front side through DP. If it for 1st Page
occurs, perform the field measures for the DP
same phenomenon that occurs when Scanning
scanning the front side through DP.
2 Checking the CIS roller The originals are conveyed Reattach the CIS roller.
without contacting the CIS
roller.
3 Checking the DP conveying The DP conveying roller is Clean the DP conveying roller and the
roller (before and after dirty. bushing.
scanning)
4 Checking the DPCIS The originals are away from Reattach the DPCIS. Detaching
the CIS glass. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
(3-15)Skewed image

1 Checking the first (front) side This is the same as the issue Perform the treatment when scanning the Measures
DP scanning that occurs when scanning the first (front) side through DP. for 1st Page
first (front) side through DP. DP
Scanning
attached. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
7-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]


1 Checking the table scanning The table scanning of originals Check if the same phenomenon occurs Measures
is faulty. when scanning on the contact glass. If it for Table
occurs, perform the field measures for the Scanning
same phenomenon that occurs when
scanning on the contact glass.
2 Executing U411 U411 [DP FD(ChartA)] is not Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. Maintenanc
executed. e Mode List
3 Cleaning the CIS roller The CIS roller is dirty Clean the CIS roller
properly.
attached. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
properly attached.
PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
Section 8
"PWBs"
properly connected.
U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(4-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift (page 7-43)


45)

original image and copy image (page 7-46)
7-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-10) Moiré (page 7-48)
(4-11) No image comes out (White or Black) (page 7-

48)
7-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(4-1)Abnormal image

1 Checking the connection The FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. If FFC Service
connected, or it is faulty. terminal is turned up or deformed, or FFC is Manual -
damaged, replace FFC. Section 8
2 Checking the cable The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD cable, or replace it.
connected, or is faulty.
and
reattaching
the HDD
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
6 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors to the main Detaching
PWB. If the wire is pinched up or has and
damage, repair or replace it. If not repaired, reattaching
replace the main PWB. the Main
PWB
7-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density] to [Auto] at Function
Adjustment is not set. [System Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
Settings] > [Function Defaults] (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
2 Changing the setting The background density is Set [Background Density] to [Manual] to Function
dark. adjust the density at [System Menu/Counter] Defaults
> [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults] (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
3 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Auto] in Background
Adjustment is not set. [Color/Image Quality]. Density
Adjustment
(Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
4 Changing the setting The original background Set [Background Density Adj.] to [Manual] in Background
density is dark. The [Color/Image Quality], and adjust the Density
Guide -
Section 6)
5 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original during pressing.
scanning.
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
e Mode List
properly. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
7-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]

12 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass.
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
(4-4)Blurred characters / Color Shift

1 Removing foreign material There is a load on the scanner Remove the foreign objects on the scanner
movement since the foreign rails.
objects adhere on the scanner
rails.
properly. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
3 Checking the belt tension A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt tension
scanner movement since the properly.
belt tension is improper.
4 Removing foreign material The foreign objects adhere on Remove the foreign objects on the scanner
the scanner wire drum. wire drums.
5 Removing foreign material The foreign objects adhere on Remove the foreign objects on the pulley of Detaching
the pulley groove. the lamp unit assy. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
6 Checking the scanner wires The scanner wire is dirty or Clean the scanner wire or reattach it. Detaching
dropped out. and
reattaching
the Scanner
Wires
7 Replacing the scanner wire There are scratches on the Replace the scanner wires. Detaching
scanner wire. and
reattaching
the Scanner
Wires
7-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Checking the original The original is not properly set Reset the originals.
on the contact glass.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass. Detaching
properly attached. and
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
3 Executing U067 The scanner center line is not Adjust U067 [Front]. Maintenanc
adjusted. e Mode List
4 Executing U411 The automatic table scanning Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc

3 Executing U066 Scan the image at back side of Adjust U066 [Front]. Maintenanc
the size indication plate. e Mode List
(Adjustment value at U066
[Front] is not appropriate.
4 Executing U411 Scan the image at back side of Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
the size indication plate. e Mode List
(Adjustment value at U411
[Table(ChartA)] is not
appropriate.
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original paper size. Original Size
mismatched. Guide -
Section 8)
3 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
original image.)
5 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
6 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and the shading Detaching
shading plate at the backside plate at the backside of the contact glass. and
of the contact glass is dirty. reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
9 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using an air-blower.
10 Executing U063 The image scanning position Execute U063 to change the scanner Maintenanc
is incorrect. shading position. e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-8)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image

(The leading edge of the
original is not set on the
contact glass properly)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust U066 [Front]. Maintenanc
timing is incorrect e Mode List
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
timing is incorrect e Mode List
5 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt loose.
6 Checking the scanner wire Installation of the scanner wire Retighten the screw of the scanner wire
drums drum is loosen. drums.
7 Checking the scanner drive The attachment of the scanner Retighten the screw of the scanner drive
gear drive gear is loose. gear.
7-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
5 Checking the shading plate The shading plate at the Execute U063 to change the scanner Maintenanc
backside of the contact glass shading position. e Mode List
is dirty.
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-10)Moiré

1 Changing the setting The original image quality is Set [Original Image] in [System Menu/ Function
not set properly. (moiré Counter] key > [Common Settings] > Defaults
changes depending on the [Function Defaults]. (Operation
Section 6)
2 Checking the original The original is not set properly. Rotate the originals in 90 degrees and reset
3 Executing U065 The ratio in the main scanning Change the value at U065 [Main Scan] to Maintenanc
direction is large. (This reduce the scanner magnification in the main e Mode List
problem occurs when the print scanning direction.
ratio is set as 100%.)
4 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
scanner section is incorrect e Mode List
(4-11)No image comes out (White or Black)

1 Checking the original The originals were set upside Reset the original to correct the front and
down. back direction.
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Changing the setting Image quality is not properly Set [Original Image] in [System Menu/ Function
adjusted. (Original type and Counter] key > [Common Settings] > Defaults
image quality are [Function Defaults]. (Operation
mismatched.) Guide -
Section 6)
3 Checking the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
creased. the original.
4 Checking the original mat The original mat shifts. Reattach the original mat.
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
7 Checking the contact glass Original is scanned on the Set the booklet original while not bending the
bent contact glass. contact glass.
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
10 Replacing the lamp unit A part of LED does not switch Check if the LED lamp lights by executing Detaching
on. U061 [CCD]. If it does not light, replace the and
lamp unit and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)]. reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
11 Removing the foreign objects As the foreign objects adhere Remove the foreign objects on the scanner
and applying grease on the scanner rail or the rails and apply the grease (PG-671) to the
grease is not enough, the rails if necessary.
lamp unit does not operate
correctly.
12 Checking the lamp unit The mirror is attached at the Reattach the lamp unit. Detaching
incorrect position. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
13 Replacing the lamp unit The LED reflector is not Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
attached properly or and
deformed. reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
7-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-13)Blurred image

1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or replace it if
possible.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass has Remove the condensation on the contact Detaching
condensation. glass. and
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
3 Checking the lamp unit The mirror has condensation. Remove the condensation on the mirror in Detaching
the lamp unit. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
4 Checking the lens unit The lens has condensation. Remove the condensation on the lens in the Detaching
lens unit. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
5 Checking the CCD PWB The glass of the CCD PWB Remove the condensation on the CCD PWB Detaching
has condensation. glass using a blower brush and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
6 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
scanner is incorrect. e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Changing the setting Marked part by highlighter pen Set [Highlight] to [On] at [System Menu/ Original
on the original cannot be Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function Image
scanned. Defaults] > [Original Image] (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
3 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manually. Original Size
paper side do not match on (Operation
the operation panel. (The Guide -
setting is incorrect.) Section 8)
4 Changing the setting The copy position is rotated Set [Auto Image Rotation] to [Off] from the Function
automatically. System Menu. Defaults
(Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
5 Changing the setting The Border Erase function is Lower the setting of the Border Erase. Border
not properly set. (Setting is too Erase
large.) (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
6 Cleaning the contact glass The original scanning side of Clean the original scanning side of the
the contact glass is dirty. contact glass.
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
7-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Checking the original size Original size and paper size Replace the original size sensor.
sensor are not matched on the
operation panel display.
(Original size sensor is
misdetected.)
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
(4-15)Skewed image

1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set. (The original is skewed.)
2 Checking the scanner unit The scanner unit height is Adjust the whole scanner unit height. Adjustment
improper. of Scanner
Unit Height
properly. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
7-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality according to the Original
adjusted. (The original type originals. Image
and image quality differs.) (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
2 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] > Function
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set to [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] > Defaults
"On".) [EcoPrint] (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
3 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be dark. Adjustment/
adjusted. (The density setting Maintenanc
is too light.) e (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
4 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Background Density Adjustment/
adjusted. ([Background Adjustment to make dark. Maintenanc
density] is set to "Off".) e (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
5 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] setting is Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] > Function
[On] [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] > Defaults
[Prevent Bleed-thru] (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit")
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(Chart A)]. Maintenanc
e Mode List
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]

PWB
7-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

(5-2) Black spots, color spots (toner smudges) (page

7-60)
(5-3) Image is missing partly (blank image, white

spots) (page 7-61)
(5-4) Blank image (page 7-62)

(5-6) Color shift in the main scanning direction (page

7-62)
(5-7) Color shift in the sub scanning direction (page 7-

63)
(5-8) Dirty reverse side (page 7-63)
7-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-10) Horizontal streaks or band (White, black, color)

(page 7-65)
(5-11) Irregular errors at the leading edge of the

original image and the copy image (variation of
paper leading edge timing) (page 7-65)
(5-12) Blurred characters (page 7-66)
(5-13) Offset (page 7-67)
(5-14) Color reproduction is poor (page 7-69)
(5-15) Fusing failure (page 7-71)
(5-16) Paper skew at the trailing edge (page 7-71)
7-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-17) Uneven transfer (page 7-72)

74)
(5-22) Granular image (page 7-75)
7-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

1 Checking the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch Detaching
unit dirty. (long period that spans between papers) of and
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt. After reattaching
cleaning, in case if it is not improved even the Primary
performing the calibration and color Transfer
adjustment, replace the primary transfer unit. Unit
Adjust/
Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
2 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer bias contact so
bias contact contact is deformed. that it grounds securely.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer bias Correct the secondary transfer bias contact
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. so that it grounds the shaft of the secondary
transfer roller securely.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller If image failure occurs at the circumferential Detaching
transfer roller is dirty. pitch of the secondary transfer roller, clean it. and
If it is not improved, replace the secondary reattaching
transfer roller. the
Secondary
Transfer
Roller
7-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-2)Black spots, color spots (toner smudges)

1 Cleaning the cleaning pre- The transfer belt can't be Clean the cleaning pre-brush of the primary Detaching
brush cleaned as the cleaning pre- transfer section. And Next, execute U474 and
brush is dirty. [Execute] (LSU cleaning) to perform cleaning reattaching
of the transfer belt. the Primary
Transfer
Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
2 Checking the primary transfer There is dirt and scratches of If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch Detaching
unit the long period that spans (long period that spans between papers) of and
between the sheets at the the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt with reattaching
outer pitch (A3 3-sheet the soft cloth that has toner on it. If it is not the Primary
continuous printing) of the improved, replace the primary transfer unit. Transfer
transfer belt Unit
transfer roller is dirty or has some scratches. pitch of the secondary transfer roller, clean it. and
Secondary
Transfer
Roller
4 Checking the fuser unit Fuser belt is dirty. Or, foreign If image failure occurs at the circumferential Detaching
objects are adhered or pitch (96mm) of the fuser belt, clean it. Or, and
scratched. remove foreign objects on the fuser belt by reattaching
printing the solid image. If it is not improved, the Fuser
replace the fuser unit. Unit
5 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt can't be Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit cleaned as the cleaning pre- and
brush is faulty. reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-3)Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots)

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper storage The paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if necessary. And Installing the
place humidity environment. instruct the user to store the paper in a place optional
with low humidity. equipment
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
3 Checking the primary transfer Surface of the transfer belt is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch Detaching
unit dirty or scratched. (long period that spans between papers) of and
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt. If it is reattaching
not improved, replace the primary transfer the Primary
unit. Transfer
Unit
4 Checking the primary transfer The pressure release gear at Check if the pressure release joint gear at 2ND-0076
unit the machine front side of the the machine rear side of the primary transfer
primary transfer unit comes unit can be pulled out. If yes, it means the
off. pressure release gear at the machine front
side of the unit comes off. Therefore, replace
the primary transfer unit.
Secondary
Transfer
Roller
6 Setting the media type The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
set. Menu. MP Tray
Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
7 Executing U161 The fuser temperature is Execute U161 [Print] and reset the fuser Maintenanc
shifted largely. temperature to the default value. e Mode List
7-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-4)Blank image

1 Checking the right cover The right conveying unit is not Check the lock of the right cover Assy, and
closed. open and close the right cover (conveying
unit).
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• Transfer high voltage PWB - Engine 'PWBs'
PWB
• Transfer high voltage PWB - Feed image
PWB
3 Checking the transfer high The secondary transfer bias Replace the transfer high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB output from the transfer high and
voltage PWB is faulty. reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
4 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
5 Replacing the engine PWB The ON signal of the Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
secondary transfer high and
voltage (3.3V to 0V) is not reattaching
output from the engine PWB. the Engine
PWB

1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides or the MP paper paper width guides to fit them with the paper
guides width guides do not fit with the size.
paper size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when image Adjust the center line at U034 [LSU Out Left]. Maintenanc
writing the data is incorrect. e Mode List
(5-6)Color shift in the main scanning direction

1 Color Registration Color Registration is executed Execute U467 and reset [Color Regist] by Maintenanc
instead of Calibration. changing [On] > [Off] > [On] in order. Then, e Mode List
execute [Calib] at U464 and execute Color
Registration at U469.
2 Checking the ID sensor and The ID sensor is dirty or the ID Check the opening / closing operation of the
the ID sensor shutter sensor shutter is not opened. ID sensor shutter and fix it if necessary. And,
clean the ID sensor.
3 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
7-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-7)Color shift in the sub scanning direction

1 Color Registration Color Registration is executed Execute U467 and reset [Color Regist] by Maintenanc
instead of Calibration. changing [On] > [Off] > [On] in order. Then, e Mode List
execute [Calib] at U464 and execute Color
Registration at U469.
2 Checking the ID sensor and The ID sensor is dirty or the ID Check the opening / closing operation of the
the ID sensor shutter sensor shutter is not opened. ID sensor shutter and fix it if necessary. And,
clean the ID sensor.
3 Checking the primary transfer Transfer belt is worn out. Check if the color registration patches Detaching
unit appear twice at the both edge of the transfer and
belt. If it does not appear twice, replace the reattaching
primary transfer unit. the Primary
Transfer
Unit
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the Service
not connected properly. Or, engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the Manual -
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it. 'PWBs'
If not resolved, replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
(5-8)Dirty reverse side

Secondary
Transfer
Roller
2 Changing the setting The secondary transfer bias is Reset the secondary transfer bias to the Maintenanc
improperly set. default value at U106. e Mode List
3 Checking the fuser pressure The fuser pressure roller is Perform the duplex printing with the solid
roller dirty caused by the paper type image and clean the fuser pressure roller.
setting. And set proper paper thickness in System
Menu.
4 Cleaning the conveying guide The conveying guide or the Clean the conveying guide and developer
and the developer unit developer unit is dirty. unit.
7-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
2 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if necessary. And Installing the
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
3 Checking the right cover The right DP hinge position is Open the right cover (conveying unit) once,
not adjusted back and forth. and close it firmly.
4 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer roller If the position of the primary transfer roller is 2ND-0076
unit does not contact the transfer not aligned, correct the pressing position.
belt or weak. The pressure And also, please check if the pressure
release gear at the machine release joint gear can be pulled out from the
front side of the primary machine rear side of the primary transfer
transfer unit comes off. unit. If yes, it means the pressure release
gear at the machine front side of the unit
comes off. Therefore, replace the primary
transfer unit.
5 Executing U101 The proper current does not Execute U101 [Force execute]. Maintenanc
flow on the primary transfer e Mode List
roller.
6 Changing the setting The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer voltage to the Maintenanc
voltage is improperly set. default value at U106. e Mode List
7 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer bias Clean the secondary transfer bias contact.
transfer bias contact contact is dirty or deformed, Or, correct its shape so that it is grounded
so, the impression is securely.
unavailable.
PWB
PWB
9 Checking the transfer high The secondary transfer bias Replace the transfer high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB output from the transfer high and
voltage PWB is faulty. reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
PWB
11 Replacing the engine PWB The ON signal of the Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
secondary transfer high and
voltage (3.3V to 0V) is not reattaching
output from the engine PWB. the Engine
PWB
7-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-10)Horizontal streaks or band (White, black, color)

1 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch Detaching
dirty. (long period that spans between papers) of and
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt. reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Cleaning the fuser belt The fuser belt is dirty. When the image failure appears in the fuser Detaching
belt length interval, clean the fuser belt. and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
3 Checking the right cover Only one side of the right Close the right cover (conveying unit).
cover (conveying unit) is
closed, or the pressure spring
is deformed.
4 Checking the secondary The pressure spring is not Reattach the pressure spring. If not repaired, Detaching
transfer unit properly attached or replace the secondary transfer unit. and
deformed. reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
5 Checking the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit faulty. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
6 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser belt surface has Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
some scratches. and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
(5-11)Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image (variation
of paper leading edge timing)

1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is not Adjust the leading edge timing at U034 [LSU Maintenanc
properly adjusted. Out Top]. e Mode List
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount before Execute U051 to adjust the paper loop Maintenanc
registration is improper. amount before registration. e Mode List
3 Checking the clutch The feed conveying related Execute U032. If the paper feed / conveying Maintenanc
clutch does not operate related clutches (feed clutch, middle clutch e Mode List
correctly. or registration clutch) do not operate Detaching
properly, reattach them and reconnect the and
connectors. If not repaired, replace the feed reattaching
drive unit. the Feed
Drive Unit
7-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-12)Blurred characters

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the paper within the Basic Paper
specification. Specification
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
set. Menu. MP Tray
Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
3 Applying the grease The drives from the conveying Apply the grease to the drive gear of the
motors are not smoothly conveying related motor. (EM-50LP: Part
transmitted. number (7BG010009H))
4 Replacing the conveying The conveying guide is Replace the conveying guide.
guide deformed.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser forwarding guide is Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
deformed or the fuser and
pressure is uneven. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-13)Offset

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the paper within the Cassette /
specification, or change to the media type MP Tray
setting closest to the specified paper. Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Change the settings according to the media Cassette /
set. type (paper weight). MP Tray
Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
3 Firmware upgrade The initial setting value Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
change for the transfer belt version Update
cleaning bias by the engine
firmware is not reflected.
(Implemented in the middle of
production)
4 Executing U107 The setting value of the Reset the primary transfer cleaning voltage Maintenanc
primary transfer cleaning to the default value at U107. e Mode List
voltage at U107 is incorrect.
5 (If occurs only on the first The transfer belt is not Set [On] at U107 [1stSheetCLN B/W]. Maintenanc
sheet after finishing cleaned properly at the time of (Engine firmware version 002.007 or after) e Mode List
continuous monochrome the first sheet output after
printing) Execute U107 finishing continuous
(35ppm or faster models) monochrome printing.
6 Checking the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch Detaching
unit dirty. (long period that spans between papers) of and
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
7 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer cleaning Clean the primary transfer cleaning bias
cleaning bias contact bias contact smudges or is contact. Or, correct its shape so that it is
deformed. securely grounded.
8 Executing U106 The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer voltage to the Maintenanc
voltage is improperly set. default value at U106. e Mode List
9 Cleaning the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failure appears with the
transfer roller is dirty. secondary transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
10 Executing U161 The higher fuser temperature Execute U161 [Print] and reset the fuser Maintenanc
is set. temperature to the default value. e Mode List
11 Cleaning the fuser belt The fuser belt is dirty. When the image failure appears in the fuser Detaching
belt length interval, clean the fuser belt. and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
12 Checking the fuser discharge If toner organic material If image failure occurs at the circumferential Detaching
needles adheres and accumulates on pitch of the fuser belt after cleaning, check and
the leading ends of the fuser the fuser discharge needle. If yellow dirt reattaching
discharge needles depending (toner organic objects) adhere to the fuser the Fuser
on the high print volume with discharge needle, replace the fuser Discharge
the high print coverage, the discharge needle and execute U167 Needle Unit
charging efficiency is reduced. [Correction] to reset. Maintenanc
e Mode List
7-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]

13 Replacing the primary transfer Transfer cleaning voltage is Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit not applied due to the broken and
wire in the primary transfer reattaching
unit. the Primary
Transfer
Unit
connected properly or, the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
cleaning bias of the primary there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
transfer does not apply as the • Transfer high voltage PWB - Engine 'PWBs'
wire is faulty. PWB
PWB
15 Replacing the transfer high The transfer high voltage PWB Replace the transfer high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB is faulty. and
reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
18 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser belt surface has Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
some scratches. and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-14)Color reproduction is poor

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
3 Checking the paper Rough paper for monochrome Use the color paper with smooth surface that
print is used. fits for color print.
4 Executing U161 Fused toner is not fitted on Select U161 [Gain mode] to set it to [1]. Maintenanc
paper e Mode List
5 Executing U140 The main unit is installed in Execute U140 and adjust the altitude at Maintenanc
high altitude. [Altitude Adjustment]. e Mode List
6 Adjusting the image The half tone image cannot be Execute [Calibration] and [Tone Curve Adjust/
reproduced. Adjustment] from [Adjustment/Maintenance] Maintenanc
in the System Menu. e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
7 Checking the developer unit The developer powder in the Isolate the abnormal color and execute Adjust/
developer unit is deteriorated. Developer Refresh for that color. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
8 Checking the drum unit and The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger unit or the drum Detaching
the developer unit charger unit is not properly unit that has poor reproduction. and
installed. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
9 Changing the setting The proper color reproduction Change [Color reproduction] in the [Imaging] Printer
mode is not selected in the tab in the print settings at the PC. Driver
[Imaging] tab in the print Operation
settings at the PC. Guide
10 Executing U485 The printer color table is not Select the proper color table at U485. Maintenanc
selected. e Mode List
11 Changing the setting Printer data is CYMK, but not Change [Color conversion processing] of Printer
RGB. Print quality in KPDL to Image Quality prior Driver
mode. Operation
Guide
• CCD PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
13 Replacing the lens unit The full color cannot be Replace the lens unit. Detaching
reproduced since the CCD and
PWB is faulty. (Red images reattaching
are output.) the Lens
Unit
7-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-15)Fusing failure

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the proper paper.
used.
2 Setting the media type The media type is not Set the proper media type via the Sys- Cassette /
properly set. tem Menu. MP Tray
Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Executing U161 The lower fuser tempera- Change the fuser temperature to the Mainte-
ture is set. default value. nance
Mode List
4 Replacing the fuser unit The nipped pressure Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
(width) to the solid image is and reat-
low and fuser pressure set- taching the
ting (spring) is too weak. Fuser Unit
(5-16)Paper skew at the trailing edge

1 Cleaning the secondary The neighboring parts of the Clean the secondary transfer roller, Cleaning the
transfer unit secondary transfer roller are discharge needle, discharge sheet and the Secondary
dirty with paper dust. paper conveying route. Transfer /
Separation
Section
2 Removing foreign material Paper is caught by foreign Replace the toner sucking fan motor if it
material such as a piece of does not operate properly when executing
paper. U037 [Toner].
3 Relocating the paper width The set position of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides / MP paper width paper width guides to fit them with the paper
guides guides is mismatched with the size.
paper size, and so, the paper
is skewed.
4 Checking the conveying The registration rollers or the Check if the registration rollers and the
section middle pulleys are not properly middle pulleys are properly attached. If
attached, or they are dirty. necessary, reattach them. Also, they are dirty
with toner or paper dust, clean them.
5 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (conveying unit) once,
right cover closed. and close it firmly.
6 Reinstalling the fuser unit The fuser unit is not properly Insert the fuser unit straight into the main Detaching
installed. unit, and lock both sides of the fuser unit and
firmly. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7 Adjusting the fuser unit height The fuser unit height is Adjust the height adjusting lever at the Adjusting
improper. machine inner front side that can adjust the the fuser
fuser unit height. unit height
7-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-17)Uneven transfer

1 Opening and closing the The conveying section is not Open the right cover (conveying unit) once,
conveying section closed completely. and close it firmly.
2 Cleaning the cleaning pre- Paper dust is accumulated Remove the cleaning cover and clean the
brush around the cleaning pre- cleaning pre-brush.
brush.
4 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch Detaching
dirty. (long period that spans between papers) of and
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
5 Cleaning the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failure appears with the
transfer roller is dirty. secondary transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
6 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller Repair the deformation of the pressure Detaching
transfer unit is faulty. Or, the pressure spring. If not repaired, replace the secondary and
spring is deformed. transfer unit. reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
7 Replacing the primary transfer There is a scratch on the Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit surface of the transfer belt. Or, and
the primary transfer cleaning reattaching
bias contact is faulty. the Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB
PWB
9 Replacing the transfer high The primary transfer cleaning Replace the transfer high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB bias contact is faulty. and
reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
12 Replacing the fuser unit The roller, or the parts in the Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
drive section or the fuser and
press-release section are reattaching
deformed or worn down. the Fuser
Unit
7-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-18)Blurred image

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the new dry paper.
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List

unit. Transfer
Unit
Secondary
Transfer
Roller
3 Checking the exit feed-shift Paper contacts to the exit Check the deflection of paper at the time of Detaching
guide feed-shift guide strongly. output and reinstall the exit feed-shift guide. and
reattaching
the Exit Unit
7-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Checking the fuser unit The fuser pressure roller, the Execute duplex printing with the solid image Detaching
fuser pressure roller to clean the fuser pressure roller. And also and
separation claw and the fuser clean the separation claw of the fuser reattaching
separation plate are dirty by pressure roller and the fuser separation the Fuser
the paper dust. The fuser belt plate. Check the parts inside the fuser unit Unit
is worn down or the parts such as the fuser belt, and if worn down or
inside the fuser unit are damaged, replace the fuser unit.
damaged.
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
set. Menu. MP Tray
Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
3 Cleaning the exit feed-shift The exit feed-shift guide has Clean the exit feed-shift guide. Detaching
guide toner dirt or welding. and
reattaching
the Exit Unit
4 Cleaning the discharge needle The discharge needle is dirty Clean the discharge needle which is upper
by the paper dust or the toner. part of the secondary transfer roller by the
Cleaning brush, etc..
unit. Transfer
Unit
6 Cleaning the cleaning pre- The transfer belt can't be Clean the cleaning pre-brush of the primary Detaching
brush cleaned as the cleaning pre- transfer section. And Next, execute U474 and
brush is dirty. [Execute] (LSU cleaning) to perform cleaning reattaching
of the transfer belt. the Primary
Transfer
Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
transfer roller is dirty, is deformed or is worn pitch of the secondary transfer roller, clean it. and
down. If it is not improved, replace the secondary reattaching
Secondary
Transfer
Roller
9 Replacing the fuser discharge The leading edge of the fuser Replace the fuser discharge needle unit.
needle unit discharger needle is dirty,
deformed or worn down.
PWB
PWB
7-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Replacing the transfer high The cleaning bias is not Replace the transfer high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB generated from the transfer and
high voltage PWB. reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB

1 Checking paper size setting The MP tray size is detected Set the MP tray paper size properly. And pull
as unknown [---]. out the sub tray until the position where the
triangle mark can be seen or store it in the
MP frame completely.
(5-22)Granular image

1 Checking the paper The paper surface is not Replace with paper for color print.
smooth.
2 Firmware upgrade The setting of maintenance Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
mode U161 (by engine version (002.021 or later). Also, install the Update
firmware) or the image latest MLTCOLORTABLE
processing (by (2RL_GZ00.001.003 / 2ND_GZ00.001.004).
MLTCOLORTABLE) is not
latest.
3 Executing U161 The fuser temperature does Change U161 [Grain Mode] to [Mode1] Maintenanc
not match the media type. (Granular image improvement mode). If not e Mode List
repaired, change to [Mode2] (Granular
image further improvement mode).
4 (When using the thick paper The fuser temperature does In case of using the thick paper with Heavy 1 Cassette /
with Heavy 1-3) Setting the not match the media type. to 3 of the media type setting, the MP Tray
media type phenomenon might not be solved even if Settings
setting [Mode1] or [Mode2] at U161 [Grain (Operation
Mode]. In that case, keep the setting as Guide -
[Mode1] or [Mode2], manually change Section 8)
[Media Type Settings] to the original setting
(the value before executing U161) at
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common
Settings] > [Original/Paper Settings].
7-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

(6-7) Blank image (page 7-91)
(6-8) Toner dirt (Single color) (page 7-93)
7-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(6-9) Periodic toner dirt (Single color) (page 7-94)
(6-10) Missing entire image (Solid image by a single

color) (page 7-95)
(6-11) Horizontal streaks or band (White or single

color) (page 7-97)
(6-12) Irregular horizontal white streaks, white spots

(page 7-99)
(6-13) Horizontal uneven density (page 7-100)
(6-15) Offset (page 7-101)
(6-16) Gradation reproducibility is low (page 7-102)
7-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(6-18) Light vertical black streaks at both edge of paper

which is outside of the image area (page 7-102)
(6-19) Vertical streaks, bands (single color) (page 7-

103)
(6-20) Vertical uneven density (page 7-104)
(6-22) Uneven halftone image (page 7-105)
7-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Engine Factors (Image forming cause)


1 Measures for the image Uncharged toner is increasing Execute 'Developer Refresh', 'Calibration' Adjust/
quality improvement due to the high density and 'Tone Curve Adjustment' in order. Maintenanc
continuous printing in the high e Menu
temperature environment. (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
2 Checking the toner coverage Toner coverage (T/C) is high. Each color sensor value on U155 [Toner] is a Maintenanc
(T/C) positive value, execute developer refresh e Mode List
until the value becomes [0]. Adjust/
Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
3 Checking the print coverage The charge amount of the Check the print coverage on the service Maintenanc
toner is low. status page and if printing is done with high e Mode List
density, execute the developer refresh. Adjust/
Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
4 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
5 Checking the developer unit The toner sensor is faulty. Reinstall the developer unit. Replace it if it is Detaching
not fixed. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
6 Checking the high voltage The high voltage contact of the Clean the high voltage contact and correct it Detaching
contact main high voltage PWB is dirty to ensure that it is grounded. Or, reinstall the and
or deformed. main high voltage PWB. reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
• Main high voltage PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
• Main high voltage PWB - Feed image

PWB
8 Replacing the main high Developing bias output from Replace the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB main high voltage PWB is high and
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Checking the temperature Temperature is low in the If the machine inside temperature is below Maintenanc
inside the main unit installation environment. 10°C / 50°F at U139, instruct user to change e Mode List
the installation environment of the room
temperature 16°C / 60.8°F or higher. (This
phenomenon tends to occur immediately
after being left in a low temperature
environment for few days if turning on the
power).
2 Setting the drum heater Developing section is affected Set [ON] at U339 [Drum Heater]. Maintenanc
by the humidity e Mode List
3 Specifying the abnormal color (Specify the abnormal color) Output the Color Belt at U089 and specify Maintenanc
the failure color. e Mode List
4 Checking the main charger The MC roller surface is dirty. Clean the MC roller surface. If not improved, Detaching
unit replace the main charger unit. and
reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
5 Reinstalling the main charger The main charger unit is not Reinstall the main charger unit to the drum Detaching
unit installed properly. unit, and Reinstall the drum unit to the main and
body to ensure that the connector is reattaching
connected. the Main
Charger Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
6 Replacing the main charger The MC roller reaches its life. If the MC roller counter is over the below Maintenanc
unit value at U930, replace the main charger unit e Mode List
as the drum surface potential become low Detaching
under the low temperature environment. and
• 35ppm or faster models: 400,000 reattaching
• 25/32ppm models: 150,000 the Main
Charger Unit
7 Changing the setting The setting value of the main If the setting values at U100 are not the Maintenanc
high voltage is incorrect. default values, reset them to the default e Mode List
values.
8 Checking the drum unit and The drum is faulty. Replace the drum unit. Detaching
the developer unit and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
9 Checking the main charger Main charger high voltage Clean the charger high voltage contact and Detaching
high voltage contact contact on the main high correct it to ensure that it is grounded. Or, and
voltage PWB is dirty or reinstall the main high voltage PWB. reattaching
deformed. the Main
High Voltage
PWB
• Main high voltage PWB - Feed image

PWB
7-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Replacing the main high Main charger bias output from Replace the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB the main high voltage PWB is and
low. reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 (When the yellow background When making continuous Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
image appears) Upgrading the output, the color drum is version Update
firmware continuously driven depending
on the contents and timing of
the print job, and the charging
ability temporarily decreases
2 Checking the drum driving The drum driving distance Check the drum driving distance counts of
distance counts. counts are not reset since the the corresponding drum by executing U120.
drum unit was replaced If the counts on the operation panel certainly
without turning off the main differ from the actual ones, turn the main
power, and accordingly the power on and off. When the counts are not
excessive image correction is recovered, replace the drum unit since the
performed. EEPROM PWB in the drum unit might be
damaged due to the hot-swapping.
3 Checking the ID sensor Calibration is not executed Output the event log report and if there is a Event Log
properly. history of C7601 or C7602, clean the front ID Report
sensor or rear ID sensor, and execute Output
calibration. If not improved, replace front ID Adjust/
sensor or rear ID sensor. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
connected properly. The connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
foreign objects adhere on the there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
connector terminal which • Front ID sensor / rear ID sensor - Feed 'PWBs'
makes contact failure. Or, the drive PWB
wire is faulty.
5 Checking the cleaning The cleaning solenoid does Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If the cleaning Maintenanc
solenoid not operate. solenoid does not operate properly, reattach e Mode List
it and reconnect the connector. If not
repaired, replace it.
6 Replacing the feed drive PWB The feed drive PWB is faulty. Replace the feed drive PWB.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
8 Checking the connection FFC terminal is not connected Reconnect the following FFC. If FFC Service
properly. The foreign objects terminal is deformed or FFC is damaged, Manual -
adhere on the connector replace FFC. Section 8
terminal which makes contact • LSU (APC PWB) - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
failure. Or, FFC is faulty.
9 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
7-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Reinstalling the toner Toner is collected on one side. Sufficiently shake the toner container and Toner
container reinstall it to the main unit. Container
Replacemen
t (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
3 Replacing the toner container The toner supply opening If toner opening does not open, replace the Toner
does not open. toner container. Container
Replacemen
t (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
4 Measures for the image Calibration is executed with Execute 'Developer Refresh', 'Calibration' Adjust/
quality improvement the condition of the light and 'Tone Curve Adjustment' in order. Maintenanc
density, and developing bias is e Menu
controlled with a high level. Or, (Operation
the toner is deteriorated due to Guide -
many low density printing. Section 10)
5 Checking the drum unit and The developing roller does not Reinstall the drum unit and the developer Detaching
the developer unit contact with the drum as the unit. and
drum unit or the developer unit reattaching
is not installed properly. the Drum
Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
6 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the
developer unit.
7 Checking the toner coverage Toner density (T/C) is low. If the sensor value of each color at U155 Maintenanc
(T/C) [Toner] is minus value, the toner should be e Mode List
supplied forcibly with U132 [Execute] until
the value become [0].
8 Checking the print coverage The charge amount of the Check the print coverage on the service Maintenanc
toner is high. status page and if printing is done with low e Mode List
density lower than 2%, execute the Adjust/
developer refresh. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
9 Checking the developer unit The toner sensor has a fault Execute Developer Refresh when the four- Adjust/
and so toner is not supplied. color PG image output as test page is too Maintenanc
light. e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
Detaching
and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
7-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]

10 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Correct the developer bias contact so that it
contact deformed. grounds securely.
11 Executing U140 The developer bias values that Execute U140 and reset the developer bias Maintenanc
are fixed (except 'Sleeve AC' to the default value. e Mode List
and 'Mag DC') and are not
changed according to the
Calibration are changed from
the default value.
12 Correcting the primary transfer Primary transfer bias is not Execute U101 [Force execute]. After that, Maintenanc
bias contact applied properly select U101 [Voltage] > [Value] and if the e Mode List
displayed value is 290 (upper limit value) or Detaching
85 (lower limit value), correct the primary and
transfer bias contact. reattaching
Output event log report and if there is a the Transfer
history of [C513*] is available, replace High Voltage
transfer high voltage PWB. PWB
13 Checking the primary transfer Primary transfer bias is not Select U101 [Current] > [Target] and Maintenanc
bias applied properly increase the setting value of each color [+50 e Mode List
(35ppm or faster models)] or [+30 (25/32ppm Detaching
models)] and execute [Force Execute]. If it is and
improved, check the primary transfer bias reattaching
terminal, and if it is no problem, replace the the Primary
primary transfer unit. Transfer
Unit
14 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer roller is When the primary transfer roller comes off, Detaching
unit not properly attached. replace the primary transfer unit. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
15 Checking the primary transfer The image become light since If the conductive grease adheres in between
unit there is a conductivity the drive roller and the back up roller, wipe
between the backup roller of off the grease.
the primary transfer unit and
the drive roller, and the
secondary transfer current
leaks to the backup roller.
16 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer bias contact so
bias contact contact is deformed. that it grounds securely.
17 Replacing the primary transfer Transfer belt is worn out. Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
connector terminal which • Main high voltage PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
makes contact failure. Or, the
wire is faulty. • Main high voltage PWB - Feed image
PWB
19 Replacing the main high The main high voltage PWB is Replace the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB faulty. and
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
7-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]

connector terminal which • Transfer high voltage PWB - Engine 'PWBs'
makes contact failure. Or, the PWB
wire is faulty.
PWB
reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
connector terminal which • Toner motor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
wire is faulty.
23 Replacing the toner motor Toner motor does not operate Execute U135 to check the toner motor Maintenanc
properly operation. If the toner motor does not e Mode List
operate properly, reattach it and reconnect
the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Executing Drum refresh Condensation on the drum Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
surface Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
4 Checking the setting (35ppm Drum surface potential is If the following value at U100 is out of the Maintenanc
or faster models) higher than the setting value. range of the normal value, the electric e Mode List
charge adjustment is not correctly Detaching
performed. And, if the value at U100 [Chk and
Current] is out from 100 to 250 or changing reattaching
value is more than 30, there is an error on the Drum
the electric charge. Unit
Replace the drum unit (Eraser damage or
drum grounding failure) or correct the main
high voltage PWB contact. (The execution of
U100 [Chk Current] should be done within 10
seconds and execute the drum refresh.)
• U100 [Adj AC Bias] > [AC Bias]: 600 -
1300
• U100 [Set DC Bias After] > [DC2Bias]:
300 - 450
5 Checking the MC roller The voltage applied to the MC Correct the MC roller contact to secure the
contact roller contact is high grounding.
6 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty Clean the eraser.
7 Checking the eraser Eraser is faulty Reinsert the drum unit into the main unit all Detaching
the way and reconnect the connector. If not and
repaired, replace the drum unit. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
8 Executing U120 Since the photosensitive layer If the drum drive distance counter at U120 is Maintenanc
is thin, the drum surface more than 150000m (25/32ppm models), e Mode List
potential after exposure is high 450000m (35ppm or faster models), replace Detaching
the drum unit. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
9 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn out. If there is no continuity between the drum Detaching
Or, the drum is not grounded. and the frame, replace the drum unit. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
PWB
7-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]

reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Correcting the release The primary transfer roller Check if the primary transfer roller is in
mechanism does not contact the transfer contact with the transfer belt. If not, correct
belt. the separation mechanism of the transfer
belt.
3 Changing the setting The setting value of the If the setting values at U106 are not the Maintenanc
transfer high voltage PWB is default values, reset them to the default e Mode List
changed. values.
4 Checking the ID sensor Calibration is not executed Output the event log report and if there is a Event Log
properly. history of C7601 or C7602, clean the ID Report
sensor and execute calibration. If not Output
improved, replace ID sensor. Adjust/
Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
connector terminal which • Front ID sensor / rear ID sensor - Feed 'PWBs'
makes contact failure. Or, the drive PWB
wire is faulty.
6 Checking the cleaning The cleaning solenoid does Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If the cleaning Maintenanc
solenoid not operate. solenoid does not operate properly, reattach e Mode List
it and reconnect the connector. If not
7 Checking the connection The connector or FFC terminal Reconnect the following wire connectors and Service
is not connected properly. Or, reconnect the FFC. If there is no continuity, Manual -
the wire and FFC is faulty. replace the wire. If the FFC terminal section Section 8
is deformed or FFC is broken, replace the 'PWBs'
FFC.
• LSU - Engine PWB
8 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty (1-line of Replace the LSU. Detaching
laser is not emitted since the and
FFC terminals of the LSU are reattaching
deformed.) the LSU
9 Changing the setting The setting value of the If the setting values at U106 are not the Maintenanc
transfer high voltage PWB is default values, reset them to the default e Mode List
changed. values.
wire is faulty.
PWB
reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
7-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
15 Changing the setting Toner on the developing roller Change the value at U464 [Target Value] > Maintenanc
is little as the developing bias [Thickness] from the default value to the e Mode List
is set low. value between [0 to +30]. And after that, Adjust/
execute [Calibration] and [Tone curve Maintenanc
adjustment]. e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
7-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-7)Blank image

2 Reattach the developer roller The developing roller does not Switch the lock lever up and down and return Detaching
(for 35ppm or faster models) contact with the drum. the developer roller to the setting position. and
If the developer roller does not return due to reattaching
the breakage of the lock lever or the failure of the
the developer roller pressure wire, replace Developer
the developer unit. Unit
3 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
4 Replacing the developer unit The developer drive gear is Replace the developer unit. Detaching
faulty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
5 Executing U140 The setting value of the Execute U140 and reset the developer bias Maintenanc
developer bias is improper. to the default value. e Mode List
connector terminal which • Developer motor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
wire is faulty. • Developer clutch K - Feed image PWB
• Feed image PWB - Engine PWB
7 Checking the developer motor The developing motor does Execute U030 to check the developer motor Maintenanc
not operate properly. operation. If the developer motor does not e Mode List
8 Checking the developer clutch The developing clutch K does Execute U032 and check the developer Maintenanc
K (25/32ppm models) not operate properly. clutch operation. If it does not operate e Mode List
correctly, reattach the developer clutch and
reconnect the connector.
9 Checking the main drive unit The developer roller does not If the developer roller, the gear/coupling of
rotate since drive of the main the main drive unit which transfer the drive to
drive unit is not transmitted. the drum or the drive shaft, etc. are not
Or, the drum does not rotate attached properly, repair them. If they are
since drive of the main drive damaged, replace them.
unit (drum motor) is not
transmitted.
10 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer bias contact. Or,
bias contact contact is dirty or deformed. correct its shape so that it grounds securely.
11 Replacing the drum unit The ground plate in the drum Check the continuity of the drum and the Detaching
is deformed, and can't be frame, if there is no continuity, replace drum and
grounded. unit. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
12 (If occurs only on the first The latest main charge Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. Firmware
sheet of monochrome printing correction control at low Update
under the low temperature temperature is not applied due
environment) Upgrading the to the firmware which is not
firmware. (25/32ppm models) the latest version.
7-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]

PWB
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
15 Checking the contact The contact is dirty or Clean the contacts between the transfer high
deformed. voltage PWB and the primary transfer
section, or correct them so that they ground
securely.
wire is faulty.
PWB
reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
properly. Or, FFC is faulty. terminal is deformed or FFC is damaged, Manual -
replace FFC. Section 8
• LSU (APC PWB) - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
19 Replacing the LSU APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-8)Toner dirt (Single color)

1 Cleaning the developer unit / Toner drops off from the Clean the developer unit and execute the Adjust/
executing Developer Refresh developer unit. developer refresh. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
Detaching
and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
2 Executing U474 Toner drops off from the Execute LSU cleaning few times at U474. Maintenanc
cleaning fur brush of the (Solve the problem of the toner clogging of e Mode List
transfer belt. the cleaning fur brush by the high density
printing.)
3 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt reaches to its If the value at U127 [Mid Trans(Cnt)] is more Maintenanc
unit life. than 250000, replace the primary transfer e Mode List
unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-9)Periodic toner dirt (Single color)

1 (In case of 94mm cycle) The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
Executing drum refresh Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
3 (In case of 94mm cycle) There are some scratches on Replace the drum unit. Detaching
Replacing drum unit the drum surface. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
4 (In case of 38mm cycle) There is dirt or foreign object Wipe the MC roller by dry cloth or wipe it with Detaching
Replacing main charger unit on the MC roller surface. Or, water. If it does not improve, replace the and
the shaft is corroded. charger unit. reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
5 (In case of 25/32ppm models: There is dirt, foreign object or Wipe the developer roller dry. If it does not Detaching
28mm cycle, 35ppm or faster scratch on the developing improve, replace the developer unit. and
models: 39mm cycle) roller. reattaching
Cleaning / replacing developer the
unit. Developer
Unit
6 (In case of 45mm cycle) The foreign objects adhere on Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
Replacing primary transfer the primary transfer roller. and
unit reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-10)Missing entire image (Solid image by a single color)

2 reinstalling the main charger The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger unit to the drum Detaching
unit and drum unit charger unit is not properly unit and reinstall the drum unit into the main and
installed. unit to ensure secure contact . reattaching
the Drum
Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
3 Replacing the drum unit The cleaning blade winds up Replace the drum unit. Detaching
and is caught between the MC and
roller and the drum. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
4 Checking the MC roller The contact of the MC roller is Clean the MC roller contact. And correct Detaching
contact dirty or deformed. (Charge contact to secure the grounding. For the and
bias can't be applied) 35ppm or faster models, check the value at reattaching
U100 [Chk Current] and if the value is less the Main
than 100 or changes extremely (30), finish Charger Unit
checking within 10 seconds and execute the Maintenanc
drum refresh. e Mode List
5 Checking the high voltage The high voltage contact of the Clean the high voltage contact and correct it Detaching
contact main high voltage PWB is dirty to ensure that it is grounded. Or, reinstall the and
or deformed. main high voltage PWB. reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
PWB
7 Replacing the main high Bias voltage is not output Replace the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB uniformly from the main high and
voltage PWB. reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
properly. Or, FFC is faulty. terminal is deformed or FFC is damaged, Manual -
replace FFC. Section 8
10 Replacing the LSU APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
7-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]

PWB
7-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-11)Horizontal streaks or band (White or single color)

2 Executing U140 (35ppm or U140 [AC Calib] is not Change the value of all color at U140 [AC Maintenanc
faster models) executed. Calib] > [Calibration] from [0] (Off) to [1] (On) e Mode List
and execute. (Sleeve AC value at U140 will
be lower than the value before AC calib is
executed.)
3 Checking the developer unit Both ends of the developer Clean both ends of the developer roller and
roller are dirty and it causes the developer bias contact.
the developer bias leakage.
4 Executing Developer refresh The last image remains on the Execute the developer refresh. Adjust/
developer roller surface. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
5 Replacing the developer unit Both ends of the developer Replace the developer unit. Detaching
roller and the developer bias and
contact are deteriorated and it reattaching
causes the developer bias the
leakage. Developer
Unit
6 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
8 Replacing the drum unit Scratches or pinholes are on Replace the drum unit. Detaching
the drum surface, which and
makes leakage. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
9 Replacing the main charger The MC roller surface is dirty If image failure occurs at the circumferential Detaching
unit or scratch. pitch of the MC roller, replace charger unit. and
reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
10 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer bias contact. Or, Detaching
bias contact contact is dirty or deformed. correct its shape so that it grounds certainly. and
If it is not fixed, replace the primary transfer reattaching
unit. the Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB
7-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]

12 Replacing the main high Bias voltage is not output Replace the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB uniformly from the main high and
voltage PWB. reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-12)Irregular horizontal white streaks, white spots

1 Checking the installation The settings do not match the Change the setting at U140 [Altitude Maintenanc
environment (25/32ppm installation environment (High Adjustment] to [1001 - 2000m] (if it does not e Mode List
models) altitude exceeding 1,500m improved, [2001 -3000m]).
above sea-level).
2 Checking the installation The settings do not match the Change the setting at U140 [Altitude Maintenanc
environment (35ppm or faster installation environment (High Adjustment] to [1001 - 2000m] (if it does not e Mode List
models) altitude exceeding 1,500m improved, [2001 -3000m]). And next, set the
above sea-level). corresponding color [AC Calib] >
[Calibration] to [1] (On) and also set
[Magnification] to lower than 0. (Lower limit
value: -10)
3 Changing the setting The developer bias is easy to Execute U140 [Altitude Adjustment] and set Maintenanc
leak since the main unit is the proper altitude. e Mode List
installed in the low altitude
environment.
4 Executing U140 Developer bias leaks. Execute U140 [AC Calib]. (Except the OPC Maintenanc
models) e Mode List
5 Checking the MC roller MC roller contact is not Correct the MC roller contact to secure the
contact grounded. grounding.
6 Checking the drum unit and The drum unit is not properly Reinstall the drum unit. Detaching
the developer unit installed, so it does not ground and
the drum drive shaft. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
7 Replacing paper Paper with the high surface Replace with the recommended paper.
resistance is used.
7-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-13)Horizontal uneven density

2 Checking the main charger MC roller rotation is uneven. Reattach the main charger unit. Detaching
unit and
reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
3 Replacing the main charger The MC cleaning roller is Replace the main charger unit. Detaching
unit deformed. and
reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
4 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the
developer unit.
5 Replacing the developer unit The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
6 Cleaning the developing bias The conduction is not Clean the developer bias contact.
contact stabilized due to the dirty
developer bias contact.
7 Checking the developer unit The developer powder in the Execute the developer refresh. If not Adjust/
developer unit is deteriorated. repaired, replace the developer unit. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
Detaching
and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
8 Executing Drum refresh Toner smudges in the shape Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
of a streak are on both ends of Maintenanc
the drum surface. e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
10 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit. Detaching
down. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
11 Replacing the LSU The laser emission is uneven. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
7-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
4 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer roller is Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit dirty or deformed. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
5 Checking the developer roller The developer roller does not Return the developer roller to the original Detaching
return to the setting position, position. Also, if the machine rear side of the and
or the developer roller at the developer roller does not contact the drum, reattaching
machine rear side does not replace the developer unit. the
contact the drum since the Developer
developer roller pressing wire Unit
is faulty.
(6-15)Offset

Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
down or has some scratches. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
5 Cleaning the developing roller The developer roller is dirty Clean the developer roller.
6 Replacing the developer unit The developer roller surface is Replace the developer unit. Detaching
worn down or has scratches. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
7-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-16)Gradation reproducibility is low

1 Adjusting the image The calibration or gradation Execute System Menu [Adjustment/ Adjust/
adjustment is not executed. Maintenance] > [Calibration] and [Tone curve Maintenanc
adjustment]. e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
(6-17)Blurred image

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
condensation. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
3 Executing the Laser Scanner The LSU dustproof glass is Execute Laser Scanner Cleaning. Adjust/
Cleaning dirty. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
4 Replacing the LSU The LSU dustproof glass is Replace the LSU. Detaching
deteriorated. and
reattaching
the LSU
(6-18)Light vertical black streaks at both edge of paper which is outside of the image area

1 Executing Developer Refresh Toner outside the developing As a relief measure, execute Developer Adjust/
area width (311mm) of the Refresh. Maintenanc
developing roller flies and is e Menu
transferred to the drum side. (Operation
As a result, light vertical black Guide -
streaks appears on both ends Section 10)
(out of the image area) of the
SRA3 paper which is wider
than the developing area
width.
2 Explanation for user Toner outside the developing Explain to the user that it is a vertical black
area width (311mm) of the streak which is outside the image area and
developing roller flies and is can not be completely eliminated. (It will not
transferred to the drum side. be completely eliminated by exchanging the
As a result, light vertical black developing unit, etc.).
streaks appears on both ends 'SRA 3 (450 x 320 mm) is the paper width
(out of the image area) of the that can be printed in the margin' Line for
SRA3 paper which is wider marking design work and marking for cutting
than the developing area (registration mark) '.The location where this
width. vertical black streak occurs is outside the
[registration mark] and it is not an image
area. therefore, there is no problem in actual
use.'
7-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-19)Vertical streaks, bands (single color)

Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
4 Replacing the drum unit The cleaning blade or drum Replace the drum unit. (If the drum drive Detaching
surface is worn out. distance counter at U120 is more than and
constant value (upper segment reattaching
model:450000, lower segment model: the Drum
150000), the cleaning blade is worn out.) Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
5 Cleaning the MC roller Streaky dirt adheres to the Wipe the MC roller surface with water. Detaching
surface of the MC roller, and and
no electric potential is applied. reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
6 Replacing the main charger MC roller surface is streaky Replace the main charger unit. Detaching
unit altered. and
reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
7 Checking the developer unit Foreign objects and Clean the developer roller. Or, replace the Detaching
aggregated toner adhere to developer unit if not repaired after cleaning. and
the developing roller surface. reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
8 Checking the primary transfer The transfer belt is scratched Clean the transfer belt. If not repaired, Detaching
unit or foreign objects adhere. replace the primary transfer unit. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6-20)Vertical uneven density

1 Replacing the LSU LSU emits the laser unevenly. Replace the LSU. Detaching
(Inner mirror comes off.) and
reattaching
the LSU
2 Checking the primary transfer The transfer belt is not contact Reattach the primary transfer unit.
unit with the drum. (The primary
transfer roller does not press
evenly the transfer belt against
the drum).
3 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt is not contact Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit with the drum uniformly. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
4 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
condensation. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
7 Checking the main charger Streaky dirt adheres to the Clean the MC roller surface. If not improved, Detaching
unit surface of the MC roller. replace the main charger unit. and
reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
down. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
9 Checking the developer unit The toner layer on the Execute the developer refresh. If not Adjust/
developer roller is uneven. repaired, replace the developer unit. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
Detaching
and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
10 Installing the cassette heater The cassette heater is not Install the cassette heater. Installing the
installed in the high humidity optional
environment. equipment
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
7-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Executing the Laser Scanner The LSU dustproof glass is Execute Laser Scanner Cleaning. Adjust/
Cleaning dirty. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
3 Replacing the developer unit Foreign objects and Replace the color developer unit that has a Detaching
aggregated toner are mixed in problem. And next, check the supply and
the developer unit. entrance of the toner container (shutter reattaching
section) and remove if the aggregated toner the
is adhered. Developer
Unit
4 Removing foreign material There are foreign objects on Remove foreign objects on the frame or
the laser path of the LSU. sealing material between the developer unit
and the drum unit.
5 Replacing the LSU Foreign objects are on the Replace the LSU.
mirrors inside the LSU.
Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
8 Replacing the drum unit There are some scratches on Replace the drum unit. Detaching
the drum surface. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
9 Checking the main charger There is dirt, foreign object or Clean the MC roller surface. If not improved, Detaching
unit scratch on the MC roller. replace the main charger unit. and
reattaching
the Main
Charger Unit
10 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty Clean the eraser.
(6-22)Uneven halftone image

1 Cleaning the transfer belt There are foreign objects on Clean the transfer belt surface. Detaching
the transfer belt. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit uneven due to the transfer belt and
skew. reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7 - 2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
(1)Prior standard check items
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always damp.)
7-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection

1 Checking the conveying unit Each conveying units are not Check if the front / back or left / right of the
properly attached. vertical conveying section and the horizontal
conveying section do not open pulling by a
slight strength. If necessary, reattach them.
2 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not aligned Open the right cover and close it again
right cover to the other exterior covers. securely.
(1-2)Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper

1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
enough. the paper direction
3 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl

1 Checking the paper path and The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs, check if a piece of
the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the torn paper, foreign objects or the burrs on the
leading edge of the sheet is part do not exist on the paper path, and
bent. remove them.
2 Fuser temperature setting The paper curls since the Reset the fuser temperature to the default Maintenanc
fuser temperature is improper. value at U161 when the paper curls. e Mode List
3 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
enough or the cutting edge of the paper direction. Correct or replace paper
loaded paper is damaged. if a dog-ear is found.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the paper Unspecified paper is used or Ask a user to use the specified paper type. Basic Paper
foreign objects are on the Or, remove the paper with foreign objects. Specification
paper. s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
7-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-4)Paper jam due to the guide

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove any paper or foreign objects on the
piece of paper, etc. paper path and remove the burrs on the
parts such as the guide or the actuator.
2 Checking the guide The guide is dirty. If the guide or the discharge needle is dirty
by the toner, the paper dust, etc., clean by
the waste cloth or the brush.
3 Checking the guide The guide does not properly Check the guide, and remove any burrs.
operate due to the incorrect Also, if the guide does not operate smoothly
attachment or a fault. manually, reattach the guide. Then, replace
the guide if it is not fixed or if there is
deformation or frictional wear.
4 Checking the solenoid The solenoid does not operate Execute U033 and check if the guide can Maintenanc
properly. move smoothly by the operation sounds. If e Mode List
the guide does not operate thoroughly or
smoothly, reattach the guide. And, replace
the solenoid if the issue is not resolved.
(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette

1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides width guides do not fit with the paper width guides along the paper size
paper size. when the paper skew or the paper creases
occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the paper source.
enough. If a part of the paper is bent, remove it.
3 (When feeding the paper from The paper is not properly When the paper is loaded over the guide in
the large capacity feeder) loaded. the cassette of the large capacity paper
Checking the paper feeder,
reload the paper so the paper edge is not on
the bump in the cassette.
(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within Basic Paper
the specifications. Specification
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
7-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-7)Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys

1 Checking the roller or the The roller or surface of the Check if the rollers or the pulleys have no
pulley pulley is dirty, or faulty. paper dust, toner, foreign objects, diameter
change or frictional wear, and clean their
surface. If not repaired, replace the parts.
2 Checking the motor The motor does not operate Execute U030 (main unit), U240 (finishers) Maintenanc
properly. or U243 (document processors) to check the e Mode List
related motor operation. If the motor does
not operate properly, perform the field
measures of each paper jam code.
3 Checking the clutch The clutch does not operate Execute U032 (main unit), U243 (dual scan Maintenanc
properly. DP) to check the clutch operation. If the e Mode List
clutch does not operate properly, reattach it
and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace the individual clutch or the unit
containing the clutch.
4 Cleaning the roller shaft and The roller shaft or the bearings If a load is given to the roller rotation caused
the bearings are dirty. by the dirt of the roller shaft or the bearings,
clean.
5 Checking the spring The spring does not press the Check if the spring is dropping off or the
conveying roller or pulley roller and the pulley are pressed properly,
properly. then reattach them if necessary.
(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor

1 Checking the actuator and the The actuator or the return If the actuator is caught or came off, reattach
recovery spring spring does not operate the actuator or recovery spring.
correctly.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. When the sensor surface or photoreceptor
black felt is dirty by paper dust, etc., clean
them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not operate Check the sensor operation by executing Maintenanc
correctly. U031 (main unit), U241 (finishers) or U244 e Mode List
(document processor). If the sensor does not
operate properly, clean and reattach it, then
reinsert the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
7-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure

1 Checking the paper leading The leading edge margin is When there is no margin from the paper Maintenanc
edge margin not enough. leading edge to 4.0mm(+1.5/-0.0mm) and e Mode List
also there is no check line on 20mm(+/-
1mm) from the paper leading edge of the test
pattern output at U034 (In case that the fuser
jam occurs), adjust the paper leading edge
timing at U034 and then adjust the leading
margin at U402.
2 Relocating the paper width The paper size is misdetected. Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides paper width guides along the paper size to
properly detect the paper size.
3 Checking the settings The media type is not properly If the media type setting does not matched Cassette /
set. the actual paper weight (the paper jam MP Tray
occurs due to the paper separation failure), Settings
set the media type at [System Menu/ (Operation
Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Org./ Guide -
Paper Set] > [Media Type]. Section 8)
(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity

1 Checking the ground The static electricity When the main unit is installed in the low
accumulates. humidity environment where the static
electricity easily accumulates on the
conveying guide during the continuous
printing,
check if the discharge sheet in the exit
section and the metal guide in the transfer
section are grounded securely. Reattach
them if necessary.
(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are
always damp.)

1 Checking the paper storage Papers have been stored in Ask users to store paper in a dry place.
place the improper place.
2 Installing the cassette heater The paper is damp. Install the cassette heater and set the mode Installing the
by executing U327. optional
equipment
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
7-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Paper misfeed detection

(2-1)Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed message on the
operation panel. To remove paper misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the front cover or paper conveying
cover.
The locations are displayed on the operation panel when a paper jam has occurred.
Jam location indication
Paper jam.
1. Open main unit right cover 1.
2. Open cover (A3) and
remove the paper.
3. Close the main unit right cover.
4. Open cassette 1.
JAM
5. Remove the paper. L
To remove paper which is difficult
JAM to get access to, the cassette
1
can be removed.
6. Close the cassette.
1/12 4
2 1/12
3
e011001
K
M
Q
O J H N
P P H N
N N
P P H
H
H G
A
H
B F
E C
R I
S D
1 Shows the location of a paper jam.
2 Shows the previous step.
3 Shows the next step.
4 Shows the removal procedure.
Display Jam location

A Cassette 1
B Cassette 2
7-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C Cassette 3(500-sheet×2)
Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×1)
D Cassette 4 (500-sheet×2)
E Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2)
F Cassette 5 (Side Feeder)
G Multipurpose Tray
H Right Cover 1
I Right Cover 2
J Bridge Unit
K Mailbox
L Inner Finishe
M Document Processor
N 1,000-sheet Finisher
O 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher (Inner)
P 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray A)
Q 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray B)
R Folding Unit
S Folding Tray
7-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Paper misfeed detection condition

Main unit + Optional unit
19
20
M 22
31 21
K
27
Q 23 11
13 J
N U
26 N N 12 10 9
L
P 25 24
8
W H
N 3
7
4
V
29
6 G
1
18 F
A T 5
2
R 28 H
S B 16
30
17
I
E 15 C 14
Item Sensor name Item Sensor name Item Sensor name

1 Paper sensor 1 12 BR conveying sensor 1 23 DF entry sensor
2 Paper sensor 2 13 BR conveying sensor 2 24 DF middle sensor
3 DU sensor 1 14 PF paper sensor 1 25 DF exit sensor
4 DU sensor 2 15 PF paper sensor 2 26 DF drum sensor
5 Conveying sensor 16 PF vertical conveying sensor 27 DF sub exit sensor
6 Registration sensor 17 PF horizontal conveying 28 BF entry sensor

sensor
7 Belt roll-up sensor 18 PF feed sensor 29 BF vertical conveying sensor
8 Fuser sensor 19 DP feed sensor 30 BF exit sensor
9 Exit reversing sensor 20 DP backside timing sensor 31 MT tray exit sensor
10 Lower exit full sensor 21 DP timing sensor
11 Upper exit full sensor 22 DP exit sensor
7-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
18
19
32 20 M 21
N 11
N 22 13
J
12 U
P 24 23 L 10 9
N 8
L
W H
H
3
7
4
VV
6V G
G
G
1
T
A
A
A 5
2 HH
B
B
B
16
III
C
C
C 14
17
D 15
Item Sensor name Item Sensor name Item Sensor name

1 Paper sensor 1 9 Exit reversing sensor 17 PF conveying sensor 2
2 Paper sensor 2 10 Lower exit full sensor 18 DP feed sensor
3 DU sensor 1 11 Upper exit full sensor 19 DP backside timing sensor
4 DU sensor 2 12 BR conveying sensor 1 20 DP timing sensor
5 Conveying sensor 13 BR conveying sensor 2 21 DP exit sensor
6 Registration sensor 14 PF paper sensor 1 22 DF entry sensor
7 Belt roll-up sensor 15 PF paper sensor 2 23 DF middle sensor
8 Fuser sensor 16 PF conveying sensor 1 24 DF exit sensor
7-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code and JAM location

Error code JAM Error code JAM Error code JAM Error code JAM
location location location location
J0000 - J4002 T J4302 U J4912 J
J0100 - J4003 T J4303 U J4913 J
J0101 - J4004 T J4304 U J4914 J
J0104 - J4005 T J4305 U J4915 J
J0105 - J4012 V J4309 U J4918 J
J0106 - J4013 V J4311 U J4919 J
J0107 - J4014 V J4312 U J5001 J
J0110 - J4015 V J4313 U J5002 J
J0111 - J4101 V J4314 U J5003 J
J0114 - J4102 V J4315 U J5004 J
J0212 - J4103 V J4319 U J5005 J
J0213 - J4104 V J4401 U J5008 J
J0300 - J4105 V J4402 U J5009 J
J0501 A J4108 V J4403 U J5011 J
J0502 B J4109 V J4404 U J5012 J
J0503 C J4111 W J4405 U J5013 J
J0504 D J4112 W J4409 U J5014 J
J0508 U J4113 W J4701 W J5015 J
J0509 G J4114 W J4702 W J5018 J
J0511 V J4115 W J4703 W J5019 J
J0512 T J4118 W J4704 W J6000 N
J0513 T J4119 W J4705 W J6001 N
J0514 T J4201 W J4709 W J6002 N
J0518 V J4202 W J4711 U J6012 N
J0519 V J4203 W J4712 U J6020 -
J0523 C J4204 W J4713 U J6021 -
J0524 E J4205 W J4714 U J6030 N
J0533 C J4208 W J4715 U J6040 R
J0534 E J4209 W J4719 U J6041 -
J0545 F J4211 W J4901 O J6050 -
J0555 F J4212 W J4902 O J6060 -
J1403 C J4213 W J4903 O J6070 -
J1404 E J4214 W J4904 O J6080 -
J1413 I J4215 W J4905 O J6100 J
J1414 I J4218 W J4908 O J6101 J
7-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code JAM Error code JAM Error code JAM Error code JAM
location location location location
J1604 I J4219 W J4909 O J6102 J
J1614 I J4301 U J4911 J J6110 N
7-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code JAM Error code JAM Error code JAM

location location location
J6200 N J7500 R J9000 M
J6210 N J7600 R J9001 M
J6300 N J7700 R J9002 M
J6301 N J7710 R J9004 M
J6310 N J7800 K J9005 M
J6311 N J7810 K J9006 M
J6400 N J7900 N J9007 M
J6401 N J7901 N J9008 M
J6402 N J7902 L J9009 M
J6410 P J7911 N J9010 M
J6411 P J7912 N J9011 M
J6412 P J7913 N J9020 M
J6500 N J7914 N J9030 M
J6510 N J7915 N J9110 M
J6511 N J7916 N J9200 M
J6512 P J7917 N J9210 M
J6600 N J7918 N J9300 M
J6610 N J7919 N J9310 M
J6700 N J7920 N J9400 M
J6710 N J7921 N J9410 M
J6810 N J7922 N J9600 M
J6811 N J7923 N J9610 M
J6812 L J7924 N
J6910 N J7925 N
J6911 N J7930 -
J6912 L J7931 -
J7000 N J7932 -
J7001 N J7933 -
J7002 L J7934 -
J7100 R J7935 -
J7110 R
J7200 R
J7210 R
J7300 R
J7310 S
J7400 R
7-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Jam Codes
Error code/ Contents

J0000: Power ON jam (page 7-123)
J0107: Fuser temperature stabilization time-out (page 7-123)
J0100/J0101/J0104/J0105/J0106: Paper jam caused by the firmware factor (page 7-124)
J0110/J0111/J0114: Cover open detection (page 7-124)
J0212/J0213: PF right cover open detection (page 7-124)
J0300: Paper output completion non-detection jam (page 7-125)
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: Cassette no feed (Prior check item) (page 7-125)
J0501/J0502: No paper feed from cassette (page 7-126)
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: No paper feed from cassette 1 - 4 (page 7-130)
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section (page 7-140)
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section (page 7-141)
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray (page 7-142)
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray (page 7-143)
J0511: Multi-feeding from cassette (page 7-144)
J0512: Multi-feeding from cassette (page 7-146)
J0513/J0514: Multi-feeding from cassette (page 7-147)
J0518: Multi-feeding from the duplex section (page 7-149)
J0519: Multi-feeding from the MP tray (page 7-150)
J0523/J0524: No paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder (page 7-151)
J0523/J0524: No paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder (page 7-152)
J0533/J0534: Multi-feeding from the large capacity paper feeder (page 7-153)
J0545: No paper feed from the side feeder (page 7-154)
J0545: No paper feed from the side feeder (page 7-155)
J0555: Multi-feeding from the side feeder (page 7-156)
J1403/J1404: Conveying sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-158)
J1403/J1404: Conveying sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-158)
J1413/J1414: Conveying sensor stay jam (page 7-159)
J1604: PF conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam (page 7-161)
J1604: PF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-162)
J1604: PF conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam (page 7-163)
J1604: PF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-164)
J1614: PF conveying sensor 1 stay jam (page 7-165)
J1614: PF vertical conveying sensor stay jam (page 7-167)
J4002/J4003/J4004/J4005: Registration sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-169)
7-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]

J4002/J4003/J4004/J4005: Registration sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-171)
J4012/J4013/J4014/J4015: Registration sensor stay jam (page 7-172)
J4101/J4102/J4103/J4104/J4105/J4108/J4109: Belt winding sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-174)
J4111/J4112/J4113/J4114/J4115/J4118/J4119: Belt winding sensor stay jam (page 7-178)
J4201/J4202/J4203/J4204/J4205/J4208/J4209: Fuser sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-179)
J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/J4215/J4218/J4219: Fuser sensor stay jam (page 7-183)
J4301/J4302/J4303/J4304/J4305/J4309: DU sensor 1 non-arrival jam (page 7-190)
J4311/J4312/J4313/J4314/J4315/J4319: DU sensor 1 stay jam (page 7-192)
J4401/J4402/J4403/J4404/J4405/J4409: DU sensor 2 non-arrival jam (page 7-193)
J4701/J4702/J4703/J4704/J4705/J4709: Exit reverse sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-195)
J4711/J4712/J4713/J4714/J4715/J4719: Exit reverse sensor stay jam (page 7-197)
J4901/J4902/J4903/J4904/J4905/J4908/J4909: BR conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam (page 7-199)
J4911/J4912/J4913/J4914/J4915/J4918/J4919: BR conveying sensor 1 stay jam (page 7-200)
J5001/J5002/J5003/J5004/J5005/J5008/J5009: BR conveying sensor 2 non-arrival jam (page 7-201)
J5011/J5012/J5013/J5014/J5015/J5018/J5019: BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam (page 7-202)
J6000/J6001/J6002: DF paper entry failure jam (page 7-203)
J6012: Inner DF open jam (page 7-203)
J6020/J6021: DF front cover open jam (page 7-203)
J6030: DF staple jam (page 7-204)
J6040: Folding staple jam (page 7-204)
J6041: DF top cover open jam (page 7-205)
J6050: BF tray open jam (page 7-205)
J6060: MT cover open jam (page 7-205)
J6070: BF unit open jam (page 7-206)
J6080: BF left cover open jam (page 7-206)
J6100/J6101/J6102: DF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-207)
J6110/J6111/J6112: DF paper entry sensor stay jam (page 7-208)
J6200: Sub tray eject non-arrival jam/ Entry timing sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-209)
J6210: DF sub exit sensor stay jam (page 7-210)
J6300/J6301: Finishing tray non-arrival jam/ Sub tray eject sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-211)
J6310/J6311: Finishing tray stay jam/ Sub tray eject sensor stay jam (page 7-212)
J6400/J6401/J6402: DF exit sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-213)
J6400/J6401/J6402: DF middle sensor non-arrival jam1/jam2/jam3 (page 7-214)
J6410/J6411/J6412: DF exit sensor stay jam (page 7-215)
J6410/J6411/J6412: DF middle sensor stay jam (page 7-216)
J6500: DF bundle eject non-arrival jam/eject sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-217)
J6510/J6511/J6512: DF bundle eject stay jam/ Eject sensor stay jam (page 7-218)
J6600: DF drum sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-219)
J6610: DF drum timing sensor stay jam (page 7-220)
7-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]

J6700: Drum timing sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-221)
J6710: DF drum sensor stay jam during paper conveying into the BF unit (page 7-222)
J6810/J6811/J6812: DF side registration jam 1/ bundle eject stay jam (page 7-223)
J6910/J6911/J6912: Rear DF side registration jam (page 7-224)
J7000/J7001/J7002: DF staple jam (page 7-225)
J7100: BF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-226)
J7110: BF paper entry sensor stay jam (page 7-227)
J7200: BF exit sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-228)
J7210: BF exit sensor stay jam (page 7-228)
J7300: BF exit sensor non-arrival jam at tri-folding (page 7-229)
J7310: BF exit sensor stay jam at tri-folding (page 7-229)
J7400: Upper BF side registration jam (page 7-230)
J7500: Lower BF side registration jam (page 7-231)
J7600: BF staple jam (page 7-232)
J7700: BF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-233)
J7710: BF vertical conveying sensor stay jam (page 7-234)
J7800: Mail Box exit non-arrival jam (page 7-235)
J7810: Mail Box exit stay jam (page 7-236)
J7900/J7901/J7902: DF paddle jam (page 7-237)
J7910: Adjusting pulley pressure release motor jam (page 7-238)
J7911: Pull-in guide release motor jam (page 7-238)
J7912: Pull-in pulley pressure release motor jam (page 7-239)
J7913: Eject pressure release motor jam (page 7-239)
J7914: Shift motor 1 jam (page 7-240)
J7915: Shift motor 2 jam (page 7-240)
J7916: Shift release motor jam (page 7-241)
J7917: Side registration motor 1 jam (page 7-241)
J7918: Side registration motor 2 jam (page 7-242)
J7919: Staple shift motor jam (page 7-242)
J7920: DF staple motor jam (page 7-243)
J7921: Bundle eject motor 1 jam (page 7-243)
J7922: Bundle eject motor 2 jam (page 7-244)
J7923: Eject paddle motor jam (page 7-244)
J7924: Eject paper holding motor jam (page 7-245)
J7925: Eject support guide motor jam (page 7-245)
J7930: Required paper interval time data jam (page 7-246)
J7931: Main unit eject data jam 1 (page 7-246)
J7934: Required paper interval time cancel data 1 jam (page 7-248)
J7935: Required paper interval time cancel data 2 jam (page 7-248)
J9000: No original feed from the DP (page 7-249)
J9001: DP small size original jam (page 7-251)
J9002: Paper jam detected when starting the paper conveying (page 7-251)
J9004: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing (page 7-252)
J9005: No original feed from the DP (page 7-254)
J9006: DP exit sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing (page 7-255)
7-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]

J9007: DP exit sensor stay jam during the original reversing (page 7-256)
J9008: No original feed from the DP (Original is B6 size or smaller) (page 7-257)
J9009: DP original jam caused by the image scanning (page 7-258)
J9010: Document processor open detection (page 7-258)
J9011: DP top cover open detection (page 7-259)
J9020: Original skew jam (page 7-260)
J9030: Original double feed jam (page 7-261)
J9110: DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam (page 7-262)
J9200: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-263)
J9210: DP registration sensor stay jam (page 7-264)
J9300: DPCIS non-arrival jam (page 7-266)
J9310: DP backside timing sensor stay jam (page 7-267)
J9400: DP timing sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-268)
J9410: DP timing sensor stay jam (page 7-269)
J9600: DP exit sensor non-arrival jam (page 7-271)
J9610: DP exit sensor stay jam (page 7-272)
7-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Jam Code

J0000: Power ON jam
The power was turned on while the unspecified conveying sensor turns on.

1 Specifying the sensor (Specify the sensor which is Specify the sensor that displays ON at U031. Maintenanc
turned on) (Go to the next step.) e Mode List
2 Checking the paper path There is a piece of paper If a piece of paper or the foreign objects
remaining on paper conveying adhere on the conveying path, or a burr in
route to turn on the sensor. the parts such as the guide or the actuator,
remove them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not operate Clean and reattach the sensor specified at Maintenanc
correctly. U031, and reconnect the connector. If not e Mode List
• Feed drive unit - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• Faulty sensor defined at U031 - Feed

drive PWB
J0107: Fuser temperature stabilization time-out

The fuser temperature does not achieve to the paper feed-able temperature within the specified time.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove a piece of paper from each
activate properly. conveying section and check the sensors.
Then, turn the power switch and the main
power switch off. After 5s passes, turn the
main power switch and the power switch on.
2 Checking the installation The electric power supply Plug the power cord into another wall outlet.
environment fluctuates or the electric
voltage reduces.
3 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
paper settings (media type, Menu. MP Tray
paper size) do not match. Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. Firmware
properly activate. Update
5 Checking the fuser unit The fuser heater is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0100/J0101/J0104/J0105/J0106: Paper jam caused by the firmware factor

Firmware does not operate correctly. (The conveying related control error)

J0110/J0111/J0114: Cover open detection

J0110: Right cover / Maintenance front cover open detection (Right cover switch), J0111: Front
cover open detection (Front cover sensor), J0114: BR cover open detection (BR cover sensor)
The cover-open is detected during print.

1 Checking the cover The covers are not fitted. Check if the cover is closed firmly, and
reattach it if necessary. If the cover is
deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the cover switch The cover switch does not Reattach the cover switch and reconnect the
operate properly. connector. If the cover switch is faulty,
replace it.
J0212/J0213: PF right cover open detection

Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, PF right cover open is detected during printing.

1 Checking the PF right cover The PF right cover is not Check if the PF right cover is securely
aligned to the other exterior closed, and reattach it if necessary. Fix or
covers. replace it if it is deformed.
2 Checking the PF right cover PF right cover sensor does not Reattach the PF right cover sensor and
sensor operate correctly. reconnect the connector. If the PF right cover
sensor is faulty, replace it.
7-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0300: Paper output completion non-detection jam

Object: 4000-sheet finisher, 1000-sheet finisher, 100-sheet staple finisher
The paper output completion is not communicated from the finisher.

2 Checking the connection The finisher cable is not Reconnect the finisher cable to the main unit.
connected correctly to the
main unit.
4 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: Cassette no feed (Prior check item)

Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper feeder (Cassette3, 4)
Remarks: Items to be checked beforehand when the cassette no paper feed jam occurs
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on after passing
the specific time.

1 Reloading the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction
3 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper in the cassette.
bent.
4 Checking the paper Paper is curled downward or Correct or replace paper. If it is difficult to
waving. replace, switch the leading edge and the
trailing edge of paper, or flip paper upside
down and reset them.
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
6 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove paper that the foreign objects
paper. adheres in the cassette.
7-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0501/J0502: No paper feed from cassette

Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift plate does not
rise up (Can't hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the cassette).
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding mark on the
leading edge of paper)

connected properly. Or, the lift connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
motor does not drive as the there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
wire is faulty. • Lift motor 1, 2 - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• Feed drive PWB - Engine PWB

2 Checking the drive parts The lift motor drive is not If there are any problems such as breakage
transmitted to the lift plate or biting of foreign objects in the joints of the
drive parts because of the gears, couplings etc. of the motor, clean or
engagement failure. replace them.
3 Checking the lift motor The lift motor is not attached Reattach the lift motor 1 or 2 and reconnect Detaching
properly or faulty. the connector. If not repaired, replace it. and
reattaching
the Lift
Motor
4 Replacing the lift plate The lift plate is damaged or Replace the lift plate.
deformed.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Object: Paper feeder
Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift plate does not
rise up (Can't hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the cassette).
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding mark on
the leading edge of paper)

connected properly or PF lift connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
motor does not drive as the there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
wire is faulty. • PF lift motor 1, 2 - PF PWB 'PWBs'
• PF PWB - Engine PWB

2 Checking the drive parts The PF lift motor drive is not If there are any problems such as breakage
transmitted to the PF lift plate or biting of foreign objects in the joints of the
drive parts because of the gears, couplings etc. of the motor, clean or
engagement failure. replace them.
3 Checking the PF lift motor PF lift motor is not attached Reattach the PF lift motor 1 or 2 and Detaching
properly or faulty. reconnect the connector. If not repaired, and
replace it. reattaching
the PF Lift
Motor
4 Replacing the PF lift plate The PF lift plate is damaged or Replace the PF lift plate.
deformed.
5 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift plate rise up
(Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the cassette), but feed drive does not
start.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding mark on the
leading edge of paper)

• Feed clutch 1, 2 - Feed drive unit 'PWBs'
• Feed drive unit - Feed drive PWB
2 Checking the paper feed shaft Feed roller does not rotate as Reattach the feed shaft and feed pin. If there
and the pin feed shaft and feed pin of the is deformation, etc., replace them.
feed roller is not attach
properly.
3 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch is not Execute U032. If feed clutch 1 or 2 does not Maintenanc
clutch connected, so the paper feed operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect e Mode List
roller does not rotate. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
4 Removing the foreign objects The lift plate does not rise up Remove a piece of paper or foreign objects.
and checking the operation of till the upper limit position Check if the actuator of the lift upper limit
the actuator while the lift upper limit sensor sensor 1 or 2 is switched to on when the lift
turns on. plate rises up. Then, reattach the actuator if
necessary.
5 Checking the drive gear The drive from the feed motor If there are any problems on the gear, etc. of Detaching
is not transmitted. the feed drive unit, replace them. and
reattaching
the Feed
Drive Unit
6 Replacing the feed motor The feed roller does not rotate Execute U030 [Feed]. If the feed motor does Maintenanc
since the feed motor does not not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
drive. reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift plate rise up
(Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the cassette), but feed drive does not
start.
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding mark on
the leading edge of paper)

• PF feed clutch 1, 2 - PF feed unit 'PWBs'
• PF feed motor - PF feed unit
• PF feed unit - PF PWB
2 Checking the paper feed shaft Feed roller does not rotate as Reattach the feed shaft and feed pin. If there
and the pin feed shaft and feed pin of the is deformation, etc., replace them.
feed roller is not attach
properly.
3 Checking the PF paper feed PF feed roller does not rotate Execute U247. If PF feed clutch 1, 2 does Maintenanc
clutch since PF feed clutch is not not operate properly, reattach it and e Mode List
engaged. reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
4 Removing the foreign objects The PF lift plate does not rise Remove a piece of paper or foreign objects.
and checking the operation of up till the upper limit position Check if the actuator of the PF lift upper limit
the actuator while the PF lift upper limit sensor 1 or 2 is switched to on when the PF
sensor turns on. lift plate rises up. Then, reattach the actuator
if necessary.
5 Checking the drive gear The PF feed motor drive is not If there are any problems on the gear, etc. of Detaching
transmitted. the PF drive unit, replace them. and
reattaching
the PF Drive
Unit
6 Replacing the PF feed motor The PF feed roller does not Execute U247. If the PF feed motor does not Maintenanc
rotate since the PF feed motor operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect e Mode List
does not drive. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: No paper feed from cassette 1 - 4

Condition: Feed slip mark on paper leading edge. (Pick up pulley can't convey paper)
When feeding from cassette 1 to 4, paper stops at the pickup roller after feed clutch turns on, and next sensor does not
turn on.

1 Checking the paper gauge More than upper limit of paper Reset the number of sheets that fit in the
is loaded. upper limit label position.
2 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
guides width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
paper size.
3 Checking the pressure spring The conveying function of the Reattach the spring for the pickup pulley if it Detaching
for the pickup pulley pickup pulley is not enough. comes off. If deformed, replace it. and
reattaching
the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
4 Checking the pickup pulley The conveying function of the Clean the pickup pulley surface. If worn Detaching
pickup pulley is not enough. down, replace it and
reattaching
the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
6 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn Detaching
paper feed roller is not down, replace it. and
enough. reattaching
the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
7-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: There is a bent or tear on the center of paper leading edge (Can't feed till retard roller. Or,
the retard roller does not roll forward.)
When feeding from cassette 1 to 4, paper stops at the retard roller after feed clutch turns on, and next sensor does not
turn on.

1 Checking the retard roller Conveying capability of the Clean the surface of the retard roller. If it is Detaching
retard roller is not enough. worn out, replace it. and
reattaching
the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
2 reattaching the retard spring The retard spring is out of Reattach the retard spring.
position.
3 (When the paper leading edge Paper is caught at the If a piece of paper or the foreign objects
is bent or paper is skewed) conveying guide, piece of adhere on the conveying path, or a burr in
Checking the paper path paper, etc.. the parts such as the conveying surface of
the conveying guide or the actuator, remove
or replace them. If the sheet or film has a
damage, deformation, floating, repair or
replace them.

Condition: There is a bent other than the center of paper leading edge (The paper jam occurs as
paper is caught before paper goes into the retard roller.)
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on since the
paper stops at the paper feed roller.

1 Checking the paper Paper is curled downward. Correct or replace paper. If it is difficult to
replace, switch the leading edge and the
replace them.
7-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Conveying capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette after feed clutch turns on, it
does not reach to next sensor.

1 Checking the retard roller The conveying performance is Clean the surface of the retard roller. If it is Detaching
deteriorated due to poor worn out, replace it. and
forward rotation of the retard reattaching
roller the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
2 reattaching retard release The retard release lever and Reattach the retard release lever and retard
lever and retard holder the retard holder do not holder.
operate correctly due to the
installation failure.
3 (When feeding special media) Conveying capability of the Set special media below the storage limit to
Change setting method for the special media is not enough. the paper feed tray other than cassette 1.
special media Also, when using envelopes, set the
envelope after attaching the envelope
attachment
enough. reattaching
the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
5 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
6 (When paper is skewed) More than upper limit of paper Reset the number of sheets that fit in the
Checking the paper gauge is loaded. upper limit label position.
• Middle clutch - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
(Cassette 1)
• Vertical conveying clutch - Feed drive
PWB (Cassette 2)
8 Checking the clutch The clutch does not operate Execute U032 to the operation of the clutch Maintenanc
properly. related to paper feeding. If the clutch does e Mode List
not operate correctly, reattach it and
reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it. (Cassette 1: Middle clutch,
Cassette 2: Vertical conveying clutch)
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing, or paper is slipping.
When feeding from cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette after feed clutch turns on, it
does not reach to next sensor.

1 Checking the retard roller The conveying performance is Clean the surface of the retard roller. If it is Detaching
deteriorated due to poor worn out, replace it. and
forward rotation of the retard reattaching
roller the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
2 reattaching retard release The retard release lever and Reattach the retard release lever and retard
lever and retard holder the retard holder do not holder.
operate correctly due to the
installation failure.
3 (When feeding special media) Conveying capability of the Set special media below the storage limit to
Change setting method for the special media is not enough. the paper feed tray other than cassette 1.
special media Also, when using envelopes, set the
envelope after attaching the envelope
attachment
enough. reattaching
the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
guides paper size.
• PF conveying clutch 1, 2 - PF PWB 'PWBs'

8 Checking the PF conveying PF conveying clutch does not Execute U247. If PF conveying clutch 1, 2 Maintenanc
clutch operate correctly. does not operate properly, reattach it and e Mode List
replace it.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: The sensor detection is not stable.
When feeding from cassette1, 2, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette and conveyed through next
roller after feed clutch turns on, and reach to next sensor.

1 (In case there is a paper loop The registration sensor does Execute U031 [Regist]. If the registration Maintenanc
mark when feeding the paper not operate properly. sensor does not operate properly, clean and e Mode List
from cassette 1) Checking the reattach it then reconnect the connector. If
registration sensor not repaired, replace it.
2 (When feeding paper from The conveying sensor does Execute U031 [Cassette2 Feed]. If the Maintenanc
cassette 2) Checking the not operate correctly. conveying sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
conveying sensor clean and reattach it then reconnect the
connector. If not repaired, replace it.
3 (When feeding paper from The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
cassette 1) Checking the connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
connection wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• Registration sensor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'

3 (When feeding paper from The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
cassette 2) Checking the connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
• Conveying sensor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: The sensor detection is not stable.
When feeding from cassette1, 2, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette and conveyed through next
roller after feed clutch turns on, and reach to next sensor.

• PF conveying sensor 1, 2 - PF PWB 'PWBs'

2 Checking the PF conveying PF conveying sensor does not Clean and reattach the PF conveying sensor
sensor operate correctly. 1 or 2 and reconnect the connector. If not
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing or paper is slipping. Or, the roller is not rotating.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, after feed clutch turns on, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette but
stops at next roller.

enough. reattaching
the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
2 Checking the conveying roller Conveying capability of the Clean the surface of the conveying roller and
and the pulley conveying roller is not enough. pulley. Check the pressure level of the
conveying roller and pulley and if the spring
or bearing is dropped off, reattach them. If
they are deformed or worn out, replace them.
3 Checking the drive gear The conveying roller does not If the foreign objects adhere on the drive
rotate since the drive gear gear, remove them. If it is damaged, etc.,
does not transfer the drive. replace it.
4 Checking the feed drive unit Feed drive unit does not Check the operation of the feed drive unit. If Detaching
operate correctly. the feed drive unit does not operate correctly, and
reattach it. If not repaired, replace it. reattaching
the Feed
Drive Unit
guides paper size.
replace them.
• Middle clutch - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
(Cassette 1)
• Vertical conveying clutch - Feed drive
PWB (Cassette 2)
9 Checking the clutch The clutch does not operate Execute U032. If the middle clutch (for Maintenanc
properly. cassette 1) or the vertical conveying clutch e Mode List
(for cassette 2) does not operate correctly,
reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
not repaired, replace it.
10 Checking the feed motor The feed motor does not Execute U030 [Feed]. If the feed motor does Maintenanc
rotate. not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
replace it.
7-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing or paper is slipping. Or, the roller is not rotating.
When feeding from cassette3, 4, after feed clutch turns on, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette but
stops at next roller.

enough. reattaching
the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
2 Checking the conveying roller Conveying capability of the Clean the surface of the conveying roller and
and the pulley conveying roller is not enough. pulley. Check the pressure level of the
conveying roller and pulley and if the spring
or bearing is dropped off, reattach them. If
they are deformed or worn out, replace them.
3 Checking the drive gear The conveying roller does not If the foreign objects adhere on the drive
rotate since the drive gear gear, remove them. If it is damaged, etc.,
does not transfer the drive. replace it.
4 Checking the PF drive unit PF drive unit does not operate Check the operation of the PF drive unit. If Detaching
correctly. the PF drive unit does not operate correctly, and
reattach it. If not repaired, replace it. reattaching
the PF Drive
Unit
guides paper size.
replace them.
• PF conveying clutch 1, 2 - PF PWB 'PWBs'
• PF feed motor - PF PWB
9 Checking the PF conveying PF conveying clutch does not Execute U247. If PF conveying clutch 1, 2 Maintenanc
clutch operate correctly. does not operate properly, reattach it and e Mode List
replace it.
10 Checking the PF feed motor The PF feed motor does not Execute U247. If the PF feed motor does not Maintenanc
rotate. operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect e Mode List
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
7-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section

Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
The registration sensor does not turn on after DU clutch is ON (dual reverse operation).

1 Performing the prior standard There is a mechanical cause Perform the prior standard check items.
check items such as the dirty guide, etc.
replace them.
3 (When paper leading edge is The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper if it is damp.
bent) Checking paper
4 (When paper stops at the DU Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within Basic Paper
conveying roller due to slip) the specifications. Specification
Checking paper s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
5 (When paper stops at the DU Paper conveying capability is Clean the DU conveying roller and the
conveying roller) Checking the decreasing or slipping. surface of the DU conveying pulley. Check
DU conveying roller and the (Rotation is not smooth) the pressure level of the roller and the pulley,
pulley if the spring or bearing are dropped off,
reattach them. If they are deformed or worn
out, replace them. If the foreign objects are
on the drive gear, remove them. If it is
damaged, replace it.
6 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate Reattach the actuator and the spring of the
spring properly. registration sensor. If the do not operate
correctly due to the deformation, etc., repair
or replace them.
7-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Duplex conveying drive does not rotate. Or, DU clutch
does not operate correctly.)
The registration sensor does not turn on after DU clutch is ON (dual reverse operation).

1 (When paper stops at the DU The feed motor drive is not Check if the DU conveying roller manually
conveying roller) Checking the transmitted properly. rotates smoothly. And clean and reattach the
drive parts drive parts if necessary. If not repaired,
replace them.
• DU sensor 1, 2 - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• DU clutch 1, 2 - Feed drive PWB
• Feed motor - Feed drive PWB
3 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not operate Execute U031 [DU1] or [DU2]. If the DU Maintenanc
correctly. sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly, e Mode List
clean and reattach it then reconnect the
4 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not operate Execute U032 [DU1] or [DU2]. If DU clutch 1 Maintenanc
correctly. or 2 does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
operate correctly. not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

paper is slipping.)
The MP conveying sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray.

1 (When paper stops at the MP The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
feed roller) Checking paper crushed. the paper direction
2 (When paper leading edge is The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from MP tray.
bent) Checking paper bent.
3 (When paper leading edge is Paper is curled downward or Correct or replace paper. If it is difficult to
bent) Checking paper waving. replace, switch the leading edge and the
4 (When paper leading edge is foreign objects are on the Remove paper that the foreign objects
bent) Checking paper paper. adheres from MP tray.
5 (When paper stops at the MP Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within Basic Paper
feed roller) Checking paper the specifications. Specification
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
replace them.
7 (When paper stops at the MP Paper conveying capability is Clean the surface of the MP feed roller. If it is Detaching
feed roller) Checking the MP decreasing or slipping. worn out, replace it. And if the foreign objects and
feed roller and the drive gear (Rotation is not smooth) are on the drive gear, remove it. If it is reattaching
damaged, replace it. the MP
Feed Roller
spring properly. MP conveying sensor. If the do not operate
or replace them.
7-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, MP clutch does not operate
correctly.)
When feeding from MP tray, registration sensor does not turn on.

1 Replacing the MP retard guide The paper edge is caught by Replace the MP retard guide sheet Detaching
sheet the MP retard guide sheet. (302ND0885_) affixed on the MP retard roller and
guide. reattaching
the MP
retard roller
2 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate if it does not rise
attached properly. up.
3 Checking the MP lift motor The MP lift motor does not When the MP lift plate does not rise up,
operate properly. reattach the MP lift motor and reconnect the
4 (When paper stops at the MP The feed motor drive is not Check if the drive of the feed motor is
feed roller) Checking the drive transmitted properly. transmitted to the conveying unit and, clean
parts and reattach the drive parts if necessary. If
not repaired, replace the parts.
• MP clutch - Feed drive PWB
6 Checking the registration The registration sensor does Execute U031 [Regist]. If the registration Maintenanc
sensor not operate properly. sensor does not operate properly, clean and e Mode List
reattach it then reconnect the connector. If
7 Checking the MP clutch The MP clutch does not Execute U032 [MPT Feed]. If the MP clutch Maintenanc
operate correctly. does not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
replace it.
replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0511: Multi-feeding from cassette

When feeding from cassette 1, registration sensor is kept ON and does not turn off.

1 Checking the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
2 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace paper. And install the cassette Installing the
heater if necessary. optional
equipment
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
3 Checking the retard roller The paper separation force of Clean the surface of the retard roller. If it is Detaching
the retard roller is not enough. worn out, replace it. and
The retard roller contacts the reattaching
feed roller unevenly. the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
4 Checking the retard spring The retard spring is out of Reattach the retard spring.
position.
5 Checking the primary paper The primary paper feed unit is Replace the primary paper feed unit with the Detaching
feed unit faulty one in other paper source and check if it and
operates properly. If repaired, replace the reattaching
primary paper feed unit. the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. IfManual -
• Paper length sensor 1 - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• Registration sensor - Feed drive PWB
• Registration clutch - Feed drive PWB
• Feed clutch 1 - Feed drive PWB
7 Checking the paper length Paper size is misdetected by If the paper size loaded in the cassette
sensor paper length sensor. differs from the paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach paper length
sensor 1 and reconnect the connector. If not
8 (When there is no paper loop The rotation of the registration Execute U032 [Regist]. If the registration Maintenanc
mark) Checking the roller does not stop while the clutch does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
registration clutch registration clutch remains and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
engaged. replace it.
10 Checking the paper feed The rotation of the feed roller Execute U032 [Cassette1]. If feed clutch 1 Maintenanc
clutch does not stop while the feed does not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
clutch remains engaged. reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
7-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0512: Multi-feeding from cassette

Conveying sensor does not turn off at paper feed from cassette 2.

equipment
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
3 Checking the retard roller The paper separation force of Clean the surface of the retard roller. If it is Detaching
the retard roller is not enough. worn out, replace it. and
The retard roller contacts the reattaching
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
4 Checking the retard spring The retard spring is out of Reattach the retard spring.
position.
5 Checking the primary paper The primary paper feed unit is Replace the primary paper feed unit with the Detaching
feed unit faulty one in other paper source and check if it and
operates properly. If repaired, replace the reattaching
primary paper feed unit. the Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
• Paper length sensor 2 - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• Conveying sensor - Feed drive PWB
• Feed clutch 2 - Feed drive PWB
7 Checking the paper length Paper size is misdetected by If the paper size loaded in the cassette
sensor paper length sensor. differs from the paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach paper length
sensor 2 and reconnect the connector. If not
8 Checking the conveying The conveying sensor does Execute U031 [Cassette2 Feed]. If the Maintenanc
sensor not operate correctly. conveying sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
9 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch does Execute U032 [Cassette2]. If feed clutch 2 Maintenanc
clutch not operate properly. does not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0513/J0514: Multi-feeding from cassette

When feeding from the cassette3, 4, PF conveying sensor does not turn off.

equipment
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
3 (In case of occurring at the The fan shaped arm shifts due Reattach the fan shaped arm
initial setup) Checking the fan to run-over of the actuator for (302DN0918_). If it is deformed, replace it.
shaped arm paper length sensor. Or, if the
fan shaped arm is deformed,
the paper length sensor in the
cassette misdetects.
4 Checking the PF retard roller The paper separation force of Clean the PF retard roller surface. If it is Detaching
the PF retard roller is not worn down, replace it. and
enough. The PF retard roller reattaching
contacts the PF feed roller the PF
unevenly. Retard
Roller
5 reattaching PF retard spring The PF retard spring comes Reattach the PF retard spring.
off.
6 Checking the PF primary The PF primary paper feed Replace the PF primary paper feed unit with Detaching
paper feed unit unit is faulty the one in other paper source and check if it and
operates properly. If repaired, replace the PF reattaching
primary paper feed unit. the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7 Checking the installation There is no ground between Check the continuity between the main unit
the main unit and the paper and the paper feeder, and reconnect the
feeder. drawer connector.
• PF paper length sensor 1, 2 - PF PWB 'PWBs'
• PF conveying sensor 1, 2 - PF PWB
• PF feed clutch 1, 2 - PF PWB
9 Checking the PF paper length Paper size is misdetected by If the paper size loaded in the cassette
sensor the PF paper length sensor. differs from the paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach the PF paper
length sensor 1 or 2 and reconnect the
sensor operate correctly. 1 or 2, then reconnect the connector. If not
7-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Checking the PF paper feed The PF paper feed clutch does Execute U247 [2PF] > [Clutch] > [C1 Clutch] Maintenanc
clutch not operate properly. or [C2 Clutch]. If PF feed clutch 1 or 2 does e Mode List
not operate properly, reattach it and
replace it.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0518: Multi-feeding from the duplex section

The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the duplex section.

2 Checking the paper Paper is curled or waved due Correct or replace paper. If it is difficult to
to the moisture absorption. replace, switch the leading edge and the
• Registration clutch - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• Registration sensor - Feed drive PWB
• DU clutch 1, 2 - Feed drive PWB
4 (When there is no paper loop The rotation of the registration Execute U032 [Regist]. If the registration Maintenanc
mark while paper is at the roller does not stop while the clutch does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
registration section) Checking registration clutch remains and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
the registration clutch engaged. replace it.
6 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not operate Execute U032 [DU1] or [DU2]. If DU clutch 1 Maintenanc
correctly. or 2 does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0519: Multi-feeding from the MP tray

When feeding from MP tray, registration sensor does not turn off.

2 Checking the paper Paper is curled or waved. Correct or replace paper. If it is difficult to
3 Checking the MP feed roller The paper fanning is not Clean the MP feed roller and the MP friction Detaching
and the MP friction pad enough. pad, or replace them. and
reattaching
the MP
Feed Roller
spring properly. MP conveying sensor. If the do not operate
or replace them.
• MP clutch - Feed drive PWB
7 Checking the MP clutch The rotation of the MP feed Execute U032 [MPT Feed]. If the MP clutch Maintenanc
roller does not stop while the does not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
MP clutch remains engaged. reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0523/J0524: No paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder

Object: Large capacity feeder
paper is slipping.)
When feeding from large capacity feeder, the PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying sensor does
not turn on even predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch is turned on.

1 (When paper leading edge is The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from the deck.
bent) Checking paper paper. adhere from the deck
replace them.
6 (When paper stops at the PF The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
7 (When paper stops at the PF Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within Basic Paper
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
8 (When paper stops at the PF Paper conveying capability is Clean the surface of the PF feed roller. If it is Detaching
feed roller) Checking the PF decreasing or slipping. worn out, replace it. and
feed roller (Rotation is not smooth) reattaching
the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
9 (When paper stops at the PF The PF feed motor drive is not Check if the drive of the PF feed motor is Detaching
feed roller) Checking the drive transmitted correctly. transmitted to the PF drive unit and, clean and
parts and reattach the drive parts if necessary. If reattaching
not repaired, replace the parts. the PF Drive
Unit
spring properly. PF feed sensor. If they do not operate
or replace them.
unevenly. Retard
Roller
off.
7-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0523/J0524: No paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, PF feed clutch does not
operate correctly.)
When feeding from large capacity feeder, the PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying sensor does
not turn on even predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch is turned on.

1 (When paper stops at the PF The PF feed motor drive is not Check if the drive of the PF feed motor is Detaching
feed roller) Checking the drive transmitted correctly. transmitted to the PF drive unit and, clean and
parts and reattach the drive parts if necessary. If reattaching
not repaired, replace the parts. the PF Drive
Unit
• PF horizontal conveying sensor - PF 'PWBs'
PWB (Left deck)
• PF vertical conveying sensor - PF PWB
(Right deck)
3 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal conveying Clean and reattach the PF horizontal
conveying sensor or the PF sensor or the PF vertical conveying sensor or the PF vertical
vertical conveying sensor conveying sensor does not conveying sensor, then reconnect the
operate correctly. connector. If not repaired, replace it.
4 Checking the PF paper feed The PF paper feed clutch does Execute U247. If PF feed clutch 1, 2 does Maintenanc
clutch not operate properly. not operate properly, reattach it and e Mode List
replace it.
operate correctly. operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect e Mode List
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0533/J0534: Multi-feeding from the large capacity paper feeder

When feeding from large capacity feeder, they do not turn off even predetermined time has passed since the PF
horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying sensor turns on.

2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from the deck.
bent.
paper. adhere from the deck
unevenly. Retard
Roller
off.
6 Checking the installation The ground between the main Check the continuity between the main unit
unit and the large capacity and the large capacity paper feeder, and
paper feeder is not secured. reconnect the drawer connector.
• PF vertical conveying sensor - PF PWB 'PWBs'
(Right deck)
• PF horizontal conveying sensor - PF
PWB (Left deck)
8 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal conveying Clean and reattach the PF horizontal
conveying sensor or the PF sensor or the PF vertical conveying sensor or the PF vertical
vertical conveying sensor conveying sensor does not conveying sensor, then reconnect the
operate correctly. connector. If not repaired, replace it.
9 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate Reattach the actuators and the springs for
spring properly. the PF horizontal conveying sensor or the
PDF vertical conveying sensor. If they do not
operate properly due to deformation, etc.,
correct or replace them.
replace it.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0545: No paper feed from the side feeder

Object: Side feeder
paper is slipping.)
The PF feed sensor does not turn on even after the predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch turns on
when feeding from side feeder.

1 (When paper leading edge is The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from the side feeder.
bent) Checking paper paper. adhere from the side feeder.
replace them.
6 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance of front and Reattach the pressure spring of the PF feed Detaching
Checking the pressure spring rear of the PF feed rollers are roller. If it is deformed, repair or replace it. and
not proper. reattaching
the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7 (When paper stops at the PF The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
8 (When paper stops at the PF Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within Basic Paper
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
9 (When paper stops at the PF Paper conveying capability is Clean the surface of the PF feed roller. If it is Detaching
feed roller) Checking the PF decreasing or slipping. worn out, replace it. And if the foreign objects and
feed roller and the drive gear (Rotation is not smooth) adhere on the drive gear, remove them. If it reattaching
has a damage, replace it. the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
unevenly. Retard
Roller
off.
7-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0545: No paper feed from the side feeder

Object: Side feeder
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, the conveying clutch does
not operate correctly.)
The PF feed sensor does not turn on even after the predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch turns on
when feeding from side feeder.

1 (When paper stops at the feed The PF feed motor drive is not Check if the drive of the PF feed motor is
roller) Checking the drive parts transmitted correctly. transmitted to the PF drive unit and, clean
and reattach the drive parts if necessary. If
2 Checking the installation There is no ground between Check the continuity between the main unit
the main unit and the side and the large capacity paper feeder, and
feeder. reconnect the drawer connector.
• PF feed sensor - PF PWB 'PWBs'
• PF feed clutch - PF PWB
• PF conveying motor - PF PWB
4 Checking the PF paper feed The PF paper feed sensor Clean and reattach the PF feed sensor, then
sensor does not operate properly. reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
5 Checking the PF paper feed The PF paper feed clutch does Execute U247 [Side Feeder] > [Clutch] > [C1 Maintenanc
clutch not operate properly. Clutch]. If the PF feed clutch does not e Mode List
6 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying motor does Execute U247 [Side Feeder] > [Motor]. If the Maintenanc
motor not operate correctly. PF conveying motor does not operate e Mode List
properly, reattach it and reconnect the
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0555: Multi-feeding from the side feeder

Object: Side feeder
The PF feed sensor does not turn off even after the predetermined time has passed since it turns on when feeding paper
from the side feeder.

2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
unevenly. Retard
Roller
5 Checking the PF retard spring The PF retard spring comes Reattach the PF retard spring.
off.
6 Checking the installation There is no ground between Install the rail of the side feeder (Bundled PF-7120
the main unit and the side items of the side feeder) to the main unit. Installation
feeder. Guide
• PF feed sensor - PF PWB 'PWBs'
• PF feed clutch - PF PWB
8 Checking the PF paper feed The PF paper feed sensor Clean and reattach the PF feed sensor, then
sensor does not operate properly. reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
9 Checking the PF paper feed The rotation of the PF feed Execute U247 [Side Feeder] > [Clutch] > [C1 Maintenanc
clutch roller does not stop while the Clutch]. If the PF feed clutch does not e Mode List
PF feed clutch remains operate properly, reattach it and reconnect
engaged. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J1403/J1404: Conveying sensor non-arrival jam

paper is slipping.)
The conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.

replace them.
guides paper size.
the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
4 (When paper is skewed or Paper conveying capability is Clean the surface of the PF feed roller. If it is Detaching
conveyed late) Checking the decreasing or slipping. worn out, replace it. And if the foreign objects and
PF feed roller and the drive (Rotation is not smooth) adhere on the drive gear, remove them. If it reattaching
gear has a damage, replace it. the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
bent.
9 (When paper slips) Checking Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within Basic Paper
paper the specifications. Specification
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
7-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J1403/J1404: Conveying sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, conveying clutch does not
operate correctly.)
The conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.

1 (When paper stops at the PF The PF feed motor drive is not Check if the drive of the PF feed motor is
feed roller) Checking the drive transmitted correctly. transmitted to the PF drive unit and, clean
replace it.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J1413/J1414: Conveying sensor stay jam

The conveying sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.

replace them.
guides paper size.
the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
5 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. If a burr in the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. conveying surface of the conveying guide,
remove or replace it.
6 Checking the PF feed roller Paper conveying capability is Clean the surface of the PF feed roller. If it is Detaching
and the drive gear decreasing or slipping. worn out, replace it. And if the foreign objects and
(Rotation is not smooth) adhere on the drive gear, remove them. If it reattaching
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7 Checking the PF cover The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is closed securely.
Replace it if it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
bent.
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
7-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]

replace it.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J1604: PF conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

paper is slipping.)
PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feed paper from the cassette 4.

paper. adhere in the cassette.
replace them.
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
guides paper size.
the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7 (When paper leading edge is The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper in the cassette.
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
7-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J1604: PF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

paper is slipping.)
The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 4.

paper. adhere in the deck.
replace them.
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
guides paper size.
the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7 (When paper leading edge is The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper in the deck.
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
7-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J1604: PF conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

operate correctly.)
PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feed paper from the cassette 4.

• PF conveying sensor 1 - PF PWB 'PWBs'
• PF conveying clutch 2 - PF PWB
sensor operate correctly. 1, then reconnect the connector. If not
4 Checking the PF conveying PF conveying clutch does not Reattach the PF conveying clutch 2 and
clutch operate correctly. reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J1604: PF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

operate correctly.)
The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 4.

• PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 - PF
PWB
3 Checking the PF vertical The PF vertical conveying Clean and reattach the PF vertical conveying
conveying sensor sensor does not operate sensor, then reconnect the connector. If not
correctly. repaired, replace it.
4 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal conveying Execute U247. If PF horizontal conveying Maintenanc
conveying clutch clutch does not operate clutch 2 does not operate properly, reattach it e Mode List
correctly. and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J1614: PF conveying sensor 1 stay jam

PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn off when feed paper from the cassette 4.

replace them.
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
guides paper size.
the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
6 (When the paper conveying The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is closed securely.
was delayed) Checking the PF Replace it if it cannot be closed due to
cover deformation.
bent.
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
paper.
12 Checking the PF paper feed The PF feed sensor is not Reattach the PF feed sensor and reconnect
sensor attached properly. The the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
connector is not connected
properly. Or, the wire is faulty.
• PF PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
7-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]

14 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J1614: PF vertical conveying sensor stay jam

The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 4.

replace them.
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
guides paper size.
5 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance of front and Reattach the pressure spring of the
Checking the pressure spring rear of the conveying related conveying related rollers. If it is deformed,
rollers are not proper. repair or replace it.
cover deformation.
bent.
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
paper.

14 Checking the PF vertical The PF vertical conveying Clean and reattach the PF vertical conveying
conveying sensor sensor does not operate sensor, then reconnect the connector. If not
correctly. repaired, replace it.
7-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4002/J4003/J4004/J4005: Registration sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or Side feeder
Condition: There is a damage on paper.
The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side feeder.

1 (When there is a catch mark at Paper is caught by foreign If the foreign objects, a burr are on the
the paper leading edge or objects, a hole, a burr, etc. on conveying surface of the conveying guide,
paper is skewed) Checking the conveying surface of the remove or replace them. If the sheet guide
paper path conveying guide. has a damage, deformation, floating, repair
or replace it.
2 (When paper is bent such as The conveying path is clogged If the foreign objects, a burr are on the
Z-shape) Checking paper path with foreign objects such as a conveying surface of the conveying guide,
piece of paper, etc.. remove or replace them. If there is a
damage, replace them.
3 (When paper is skewed or Paper conveying capability is Clean the surface of the middle roller. If it is
bent such as Z-shape) decreasing or slipping. worn out, replace it. If the foreign objects
Checking the middle roller and (Rotation is not smooth) adhere on the drive gear, remove them. And
the drive gear if it is damaged, replace it.
guides paper size.
cover deformation.
8 (When paper leading edge is The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper in the cassette.
bent) Checking paper paper. adheres in the cassette.
11 (When paper stops at the The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
middle roller and paper crushed. the paper direction
leading edge is bent)
Reloading paper
12 (When paper stops at the Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within Basic Paper
middle roller) Checking paper the specifications. Specification
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
13 (When paper is bent such as The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
Z-shape and jammed before connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
the registration roller) wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
Checking the connection • Registration sensor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• Middle clutch - Feed drive PWB
7-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]

15 Checking the middle clutch When paper stops at the Execute U032 [Middle]. If the middle clutch Maintenanc
middle roller: As the middle does not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
clutch does not turn on, the reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
middle roller does not rotate. replace it.
When paper become Z-fold
and paper JAM occurs before
the registration roller: The
rotation of the middle roller
does not stop while the middle
clutch remains engaged.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4002/J4003/J4004/J4005: Registration sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (The middle roller does not rotate. The middle clutch does
not operate correctly.)
The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side feeder.

1 (When paper stops at the The feed motor drive does not Check if the drive of the feed motor is
middle roller) Checking the transmit to the middle roller. transmitted to the feed drive unit and, clean
drive parts and reattach the drive parts if necessary. If
2 (When paper JAM occurs The paper is not sufficiently Set the paper loop amount at U051. Maintenanc
before registration roller) pinched between the e Mode List
Setting paper loop registration rollers.
• Middle clutch - Feed drive PWB
5 Checking the middle clutch The middle clutch does not Execute U032 [Middle]. If the middle clutch Maintenanc
operate properly. does not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
replace it.
replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4012/J4013/J4014/J4015: Registration sensor stay jam

The registration sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side feeder.

replace them.
guides paper size.
5 (When multi-feed occurs) The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
Reloading the paper crushed. the paper direction
6 (When multi-feed occurs) The paper separation force of Clean the feed roller and the retard roller. Detaching
Checking the paper feed roller the retard roller is not enough. And replace them. and
and the retard roller The retard roller contacts the reattaching
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/Feed
Roller
7 Checking the conveying The paper conveying force of Clean or replace the conveying related
rollers the conveying rollers is rollers.
insufficient.
bent.
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
• Registration clutch - Feed drive PWB
7-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]

14 Checking the registration The registration clutch does Execute U032 [Regist]. If the registration Maintenanc
clutch not operate properly. clutch does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4101/J4102/J4103/J4104/J4105/J4108/J4109: Belt winding sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper JAM on the primary transfer belt. (Paper does not separate from the belt)
The belt roll-up sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, the side feeder, duplex section or the
MP tray.

1 Cleaning the discharge needle Toner, paper dust are sticking Clean the discharge needle located at upper Cleaning the
and separation sheet to the discharge needle or section of the secondary transfer roller and Secondary
separation sheet, and the separation sheet. Transfer /
separation performance is Separation
decreasing. Section
2 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
4 Checking the connection The connector at the paper Reconnect the connector between the paper
conveying unit that connects conveying unit and the main unit.
to the main unit is not properly
connected. (Loose
connection, etc.)
• Belt roll-up sensor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'

6 Checking the belt winding The belt winding sensor does Execute U031 [Belt Jam]. If the belt roll-up Maintenanc
7 Execute U108 The separation shift bias ON Change the setting [On Timing Lead] at Maintenanc
timing of paper leading edge is U108 [Timing] back to the default value. e Mode List
late.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper jam after passing through the secondary transfer roller (Belt winding sensor does
not detect.)
MP tray.

connected. (Loose
connection, etc.)

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper jam before the secondary transfer roller.
MP tray.

1 (When there is any damage at Paper is caught at the If a piece of paper or the foreign objects
paper leading edge) Checking conveying guide, piece of adhere on the conveying path, or a burr in
paper path paper, etc.. the parts such as the conveying surface of
replace them.
2 (If there is a damage on paper Paper is caught in clearance Reattach the transfer forwarding guide.
leading edge) Reinstalling the of the transfer forwarding
transfer forwarding guide guide.
3 (When there is a damage in Paper is caught in the If the registration guide sheet has a damage,
the middle of paper) Checking registration guide sheet. deformation, floating, repair or replace it.
the registration guide sheet
4 (If there is a damage in the Paper stiffness is weakening Replace paper and install the cassette Installing the
middle of paper) Replacing due to moisture absorption. heater. optional
paper and install the cassette equipment
heater (Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
5 Changing the setting The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
6 Setting the paper loop amount The paper is not sufficiently Set the paper loop amount at U051. Maintenanc
pinched between the e Mode List
registration rollers.
8 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller Close the right cover securely so that the
transfer roller does not rotate properly. drive of the primary transfer belt is
transmitted to the secondary transfer roller. If
there is deformation of the secondary
transfer roller, breakage of the drive gear,
scraping of the bearing etc., replace it.
9 Checking the drive gear The drive is not transmitted to Repair or replace the drive gears transmitting
the registration roller. the drive of the feed motor to the registration
roller.
connected. (Loose
connection, etc.)
• Registration clutch - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'

7 Checking the registration The registration clutch does Execute U032 [Regist]. If the registration Maintenanc
clutch not operate properly. clutch does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
7-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4111/J4112/J4113/J4114/J4115/J4118/J4119: Belt winding sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper jam before fuser section.
The belt roll-up sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, the side feeder, duplex section or the
MP tray.

1 Performing the prior standard There is a mechanical cause Perform the prior standard check items.
check items such as the dirty guide, etc.
2 (When the paper leading edge Paper is caught in the fuser If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
is bent or paper is skewed) entrance guide. the conveying path, or the foreign objects, a
Checking the paper path burr are on the conveying surface of the
fuser entrance guide, remove them. Or,
replace the fuser entrance guide. If the sheet
or the film is dropped off, repair or replace
them.
guides paper size.
4 Checking the fuser roller and The fuser roller does not Install the fuser unit so that the drive of the Detaching
the drive parts operate correctly. fuser motor is transmitted to the fuser roller. and
If there is a drive gear damage of the fuser reattaching
roller, scraping of the bearing etc., replace it. the Fuser
Unit
5 Checking the connection (belt The connector at the paper Reconnect the connector between the paper
roll-up sensor) conveying unit that connects conveying unit and the main unit.
connected. (Loose
connection, etc.)

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4201/J4202/J4203/J4204/J4205/J4208/J4209: Fuser sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper jam at fuser section.
The fuser sensor does not turn on since the paper is jammed inside the fuser unit when feeding paper from cassette 1 to
4, the side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.

1 (When the jam occurs such as The actuator does not operate Reinstall the actuator and the spring of the Detaching
an accordion jam) Checking properly. fuser sensor. If it does not operate correctly and
the actuator and the spring due to the deformation, repair or replace reattaching
them. the Fuser
Unit
2 Checking the fuser exit guide Paper is caught in the If welding of toner, a burr are on the Detaching
conveying surface of the fuser conveying surface of the fuser exit guide, and
exit guide. remove or replace them. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
3 Changing the setting The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
4 Replacing paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
bent.
6 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If it is difficult to
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
paper.
9 Checking the fuser pressure The foreign objects adhere on Clean the fuser pressure roller, fuser belt and Detaching
roller/fuser belt/fuser the fuser pressure roller, fuser fuser forwarding guide. Or, replace the fuser and
forwarding guide belt or fuser forwarding guide. unit. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
The fuser sensor does not turn on since the paper wraps around the fuser roller when feeding paper from cassette 1 to
4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.

1 Adjusting the paper leading The margin at the paper If each margin is not uneven, adjust the Maintenanc
edge timing leading edge is incorrect. leading margin in U034. e Mode List
guides paper size.
3 Replacing paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
bent.
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
paper.
8 Checking the fuser pressure The foreign objects adhere to Clean the fuser pressure roller and the fuser Detaching
roller and the fuser belt the fuser pressure roller or the belt. And replace the fuser unit. and
fuser belt. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
9 Checking the fuser separation Toner or etc. adheres to the If the toner, etc. are on the fuser separation Detaching
plate fuser separation plate, or there plate, remove them. If it is deformed, replace and
is deformation or floating. the fuser unit. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
The fuser sensor does not turn on since the paper wraps around the fuser roller when feeding paper from cassette 1 to

1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
2 (When using the thin paper) Thin paper of 55g or less is Change paper type to [Custom 7] at System Cassette /
Checking the image used and the solid image of Menu and also change paper weight of MP Tray
30mm and more appears at [Custom 7] to [light]. Custom 7 thin paper Settings
the leading edge. setting: this is the mode to support the fuser (Operation
separation failure by decreasing the Guide -
conveying speed and the fuser temperature. Section 8)
(After change setting, [
3 Checking the fuser pressure The foreign objects adhere to Clean the fuser pressure roller and the fuser Detaching
roller and the fuser belt the fuser pressure roller or the belt. And replace the fuser unit. and
fuser belt. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
4 Checking the fuser separation Toner or etc. adheres to the If the toner, etc. are on the fuser separation Detaching
plate fuser separation plate, or there plate, remove them. If it is deformed, replace and
is deformation or floating. the fuser unit. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper jam after passing through the fuser exit roller.
Although the paper jam occurs after passing through the fuser exit roller when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side
feeder, duplex section or the MP tray, the fuser sensor does not turn on.

1 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate Reinstall the actuator and the spring of the Detaching
Checking the actuator and the properly. fuser sensor. If it does not operate correctly and
spring due to the deformation, repair or replace reattaching
them. the Fuser
Unit
2 (When paper is skewed) The fuser exit guide is Reattach the fuser exit guide. If there is a Detaching
Checking the fuser exit guide deformed. warp on the conveying surface of the fuser and
exit guide, repair or replace it. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
3 (When paper is skewed) The conveying capability of Clean the fuser exit roller. If the surface is Detaching
Checking the fuser exit roller the fuser exit roller is not worn out, replace it. and
enough. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
bent.
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
paper.
9 Checking the connection The drawer connector is not Reconnect the drawer connector between Detaching
properly connected. the fuser unit and the feed image PWB. and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
• Fuser sensor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'

8 Checking the fuser sensor The fuser sensor does not Execute U031 [Fuser Feed]. If the fuser Maintenanc
operate properly. sensor does not operate properly, clean and e Mode List
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/J4215/J4218/J4219: Fuser sensor stay jam

The fuser sensor does not turn off since the paper jam occurs in front of the exit roller when feeding paper from cassette
1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.

1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
2 Checking the exit guide Paper is caught in the exit If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
guide, a piece of paper, etc.. the conveying path, or a burr in the parts
such as the conveying surface of the exit
guide or the actuator, remove or replace
them.
3 Installing the cassette heater Due to steam generated from Install the cassette heater. Installing the
paper, paper sticks to the exit optional
guide. equipment
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
4 Checking the exit guide Toner is welded to the exit Clean the conveying surface of the exit Detaching
guide. guide. and
reattaching
the Exit Unit
5 Checking the actuator The actuator is not attached Reattach the actuator for the fuser sensor.
properly.
6 Checking the connection The drawer connector is not Reconnect the drawer connector between Detaching
properly connected. the fuser unit and the feed image PWB. and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
• Fuser motor - Feed drive PWB

8 Checking the exit roller and The exit roller or drive parts do Reinstall the exit unit so that the drive of the Detaching
the drive parts not operate correctly. fuser motor is transmitted to the upper and and
lower exit roller. If there is a damage of the reattaching
upper and lower exit roller, scraping of the the Exit Unit
bearing tec., replace it.
9 reattaching corrugation parts Corrugation parts do not Reattach the corrugation parts in the exit Detaching
operate correctly. unit. (Parts to add stiffness to the output and
paper) reattaching
the Exit Unit
11 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor does not Execute U030 [Fuser]. If the fuser motor Maintenanc
operate properly. does not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
replace it.
12 (When the issue occurs when The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
conveying paper to the job connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
separator or the duplex wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
section) Checking the • Exit reverse motor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
connection
7-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]

13 (When the issue occurs when The exit reverse motor does Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If the exit reverse Maintenanc
conveying paper to the job not operate properly. motor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
separator or the duplex and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
section) Checking the exit replace it.
reverse motor.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper jam in the exit unit
The fuser sensor does not turn off since the paper jam occurs at the exit section when feeding paper from cassette 1 to

1 Checking the paper tray There is an obstacle on the Remove an obstacle.
tray.
2 Checking the paper tray Paper stopper is not stored. Store paper stopper upper exit tray.
guides paper size.
5 Checking the exit guide Foreign objects such as toner Clean the exit guide, or replace the exit unit.
are on the exit guide.
6 Checking the exit roller The exit roller does not rotate. Replace the exit unit if the drive gear is Detaching
deformed, the torque limiter is faulty, or the and
bushing is worn down. reattaching
the Exit Unit
7 (When the sensor does not The fuser unit or the exit unit is Reinstall the fuser unit and the exit unit, and Detaching
turn on under the condition not installed properly. reconnect the connector of the exit unit. and
that paper is available) reattaching
reinstalling the fuser unit or the the Fuser
exit unit Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Exit Unit
• Exit reverse motor - Feed image PWB
9 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate Reinstall the actuator and the spring of the Detaching
spring properly. fuser sensor. If it does not operate correctly and
due to the deformation, repair or replace reattaching
them. the Fuser
Unit
11 (When the issue occurs when The exit reverse motor does Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If the exit reverse Maintenanc
conveying paper to the job not operate properly. motor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
separator or the duplex and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
section) Checking the exit replace it.
reverse motor.
PWB
7-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper jam at the exit section when feeding LetterR or Legal on the machine with the
punch unit installed for the inner finisher. (Inch specification only)
When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder), duplex section or the
MP tray, the corners of the paper leading edge are caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit and paper
jam occurs, and the fuser sensor does not turn on.

1 Reloading the paper The paper is curled upward. Reload paper upside down.
And so, it is easy to be caught
by the PH cutter receiving
hole.
2 Relocating the paper width Paper skew occurs since there Relocate the paper width guides so that
guides is a gap between the paper there is no gap between them to the paper
width guides and the paper edges.
edges.
3 Explanation for user (request The corners of the paper Request user to feed paper as 'Letter' not but
to change from 'LetterR' to leading edge of LetterR are 'LetterR'. If user accepts, relocate the paper
'Letter') close to the PH cutter width guides to 'Letter' position and load the
receiving holes of the punch paper. Then, explain users who need to
unit. Consequently, the change 'Orientation' in Quick Print on the
corners are caught by the printer drive so that the orientation is rotated
holes if each center position is to 90 degrees C.
not adjusted.
4 Adjusting the center positions The center positions of the Adjust each center position by the following Adjusting
of the punch unit and the punch unit and the paper width procedures. the center
paper width guides guides are mismatched, and (Refer to the reference document' for the positions of
so, the corners of the paper details.) the punch
leading edge is caught by the unit and the
1. Load paper on the MP tray. Then, set the
PH cutter receiving holes of paper width
punch holes and execute the test print to
the punch unit. guides
align the position of the punch unit.
2. Feed paper from each paper source
except the MP tray to check if the forward
and backward punch holes are not shifted.
3. If the forward and backward punch holes
are shifted aside in above 2, change the
center position of the paper width guides to
adjust. After changing the center position,
execute U034 [LSU Out Left] and adjust the
center line except for 'MPT'.
7-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The fuser sensor does not turn off since the paper jam occurs at the exit feed-shift guide when feeding paper from
cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.

s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
paper.
bent.
5 (When paper stick to the exit Toner is welded to the exit Clean the conveying surface of the exit feed-
feed-shift guide and paper feed-shift guide. shift guide.
JAM occurs) Clean the exit
feed-shift guide
6 (When paper JAM occurs in The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
the middle of the exit feed-shift
guide) Replacing paper
7 (When paper JAM occurs in Paper stiffness is weakening Replace paper and install the cassette Installing the
the middle of the exit feed-shift due to moisture absorption. heater. optional
guide) Replacing paper and equipment
installing the cassette heater (Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
8 (When the paper jam occurs at The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
the middle of the exit feed-shift paper settings (media type, Menu. MP Tray
guide) Checking paper paper size) do not match. Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
9 (When the paper jam occurs Paper is caught in the exit If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
since paper hits the exit feed- feed-shift guide, a piece of the conveying path, or a burr in the parts
shift guide) Checking paper paper, etc.. such as the conveying surface of the exit
conveying path feed-shift guide or the actuator, remove or
replace them.
10 (When the paper jam occurs The exit feed-shift guide does Reattach the exit feed-shift guide. Or,
since paper hits the exit feed- not operate correctly. reconnect the connector of the exit unit.
shift guide) Checking the exit
feed-shift guide
11 (When the paper jam occurs The exit solenoid does not Execute U033 [Branch Eject Up] or [Branch Maintenanc
since paper hits the exit feed- operate correctly. Eject Down] to check the exit feed-shift guide e Mode List
shift guide) Checking the exit operation. If it does not operate correctly,
solenoid reattach the exit upper solenoid or the exit
lower solenoid and reconnect the connector.
If not repaired, replace it.
12 (When the paper jam occurs The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
since paper hits the exit feed- connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
shift guide) Checking the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
connection • Exit upper solenoid / Exit lower solenoid - 'PWBs'
Feed image PWB
7-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]

13 (When paper hit the exit feed- The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
shift guide and paper JAM
occurs) Replacing the feed
image PWB
14 (When paper hit the exit feed- The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
shift guide and paper JAM and
occurs) Replacing the engine reattaching
PWB the Engine
PWB
7-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4301/J4302/J4303/J4304/J4305/J4309: DU sensor 1 non-arrival jam

DU sensor 1 does not turn on after dual reverse operation when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck or the MP
tray.

1 (When paper is bent before Paper is caught at the If a piece of paper or the foreign objects
the DU conveying roller) conveying guide, piece of adhere on the conveying path, or a burr in
Checking paper path paper, etc.. the parts such as the conveying surface of
replace them.
2 (When paper is bent before The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
the DU conveying roller)
Replacing paper
3 (When paper is bent before Paper stiffness is weakening Replace paper and install the cassette Installing the
the DU conveying roller) due to moisture absorption. heater. optional
Replacing paper and install equipment
the cassette heater (Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
4 (When paper is bent before The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
the DU conveying roller) paper settings (media type, Menu. MP Tray
Changing setting paper size) do not match. Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
paper.
bent.
8 Checking the paper conveying The roller, the guide, etc. is not Clean , repair and reattach the conveying
parts attached properly. Or, they are parts such as the roller, guide, etc. If not
dirty, deformed, worn out. repaired, replace it.
9 (When paper is skewed) Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within Basic Paper
Checking paper the specifications. Specification
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
10 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the reverse guide Reattach the reverse guide pulley. If the
Checking the reverse guide pulley is not enough. pressing parts are deformed or damaged,
pulleys replace them.
11 (When paper is skewed) Conveying capability of the Clean the DU upper conveying roller. If the
Checking the DU conveying DU conveying roller is not surface is worn out, replace it.
roller enough.
12 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the DU conveying Reattach the DU upper conveying pulley. If
Checking the DU conveying pulley is not enough. the pressing parts are deformed or
pulleys damaged, replace them.
7-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]

13 Checking the connection The exit unit connector or the Reconnect the connector of the exit unit and Detaching
conveying unit connector the connector between the conveying unit and
connecting to the main unit is and the main unit. reattaching
not connected properly. (Pin is the Exit Unit
disconnected, etc.) Detaching
and
reattaching
the Right
Cover Assy
• DU sensor 1 - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• DU clutch 1 - Feed drive PWB

• Engine PWB - Main PWB (In case that
the abnormal image due to the FFC
connection failure also appears at the
same timing)
15 Checking DU sensor 1 The DU sensor 1 does not Execute U031 [DU1]. If DU sensor 1 does Maintenanc
operate correctly. not operate properly, clean and reattach it e Mode List
then reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
16 (When paper jam occurs at the The DU conveying roller does Repair the drive parts in between the feed
DU conveying roller) Checking not rotate as the drive parts motor and the DU upper conveying roller. If
the drive parts are faulty. they do not operate correctly due to the
damage, replace them.
17 (When paper jam occurs at the The DU conveying roller does Execute U032 [DU1]. If DU clutch 1 does not Maintenanc
DU conveying roller) Checking not rotate as DU clutch does operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect e Mode List
DU clutch 1 not operate correctly. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4311/J4312/J4313/J4314/J4315/J4319: DU sensor 1 stay jam

DU sensor 1 does not turn off after dual reverse operation when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder or the
MP tray.

connected. (Loose
connection, etc.)
4 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not operate Execute U031 [DU1]. If DU sensor 1 does Maintenanc
correctly. not operate properly, clean and reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
5 Checking the drive parts The DU conveying roller does Repair the drive parts in between the feed
not rotate correctly as the motor and the DU upper conveying roller or
drive parts are faulty. the DU middle conveying roller. If they do not
operate correctly due to the damage, replace
them.
6 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not operate Execute U032 [DU1]. If DU clutch 1 does not Maintenanc
correctly. operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4401/J4402/J4403/J4404/J4405/J4409: DU sensor 2 non-arrival jam

DU sensor 2 does not turn on even predetermined time has passed after DU sensor 1 turns on when feeding paper from
cassette 1 to 4, side feeder or the MP tray.

2 (When paper is bent before Paper is caught at the If a piece of paper or the foreign objects
the DU conveying roller) conveying guide, piece of adhere on the conveying path, or a burr in
Checking paper path paper, etc.. the parts such as the conveying surface of
replace them.
3 (When paper is bent before The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
the DU conveying roller)
Replacing paper
4 (When paper is bent before Paper stiffness is weakening Replace paper and install the cassette Installing the
the DU conveying roller) due to moisture absorption. heater. optional
Replacing paper and install equipment
the cassette heater (Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
5 (When paper is bent before The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
the DU conveying roller) paper settings (media type, Menu. MP Tray
Changing setting paper size) do not match. Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
paper.
bent.
9 (When paper is skewed) Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within Basic Paper
Checking paper the specifications. Specification
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
10 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the reverse guide Reattach the reverse guide pulley. If the
Checking the reverse guide pulley is not enough. pressing parts are deformed or damaged,
pulleys replace them.
11 (When paper is skewed) Conveying capability of the Clean the DU middle/lower conveying roller.
Checking the DU conveying DU conveying roller is not If the pressing parts are deformed or
roller enough. damaged, replace them.
12 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the DU conveying Clean the DU middle/lower conveying pulley.
Checking the DU conveying pulley is not enough. If the pressing parts are deformed or
pulleys damaged, replace them.
connected. (Loose
connection, etc.)
7-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]


• Engine PWB - Main PWB (In case that
the abnormal image due to the FFC
connection failure also appears at the
same timing)
15 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not operate Execute U031 [DU2]. If DU sensor 2 does Maintenanc
correctly. not operate properly, clean and reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
16 (When paper jam occurs at the The DU conveying roller does Repair the drive parts in between the feed
DU conveying roller) Checking not rotate as the drive parts motor and the DU middle conveying roller or
the drive parts are faulty. the DU lower conveying roller. If they do not
operate correctly due to the damage, replace
them.
17 (When paper jam occurs at the The DU conveying roller does Execute U032 [DU2]. If DU clutch 2 does not Maintenanc
DU conveying roller) Checking not rotate as DU clutch does operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect e Mode List
the DU clutch not operate correctly. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4701/J4702/J4703/J4704/J4705/J4709: Exit reverse sensor non-arrival jam

The exit reverse sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder or the MP tray.

2 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. the conveying path, or a burr in the parts
such as the guide or the actuator, remove
them.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate Reattach the actuator and spring of the exit
Checking the actuator and the properly. reverse sensor. If they do not operate
spring correctly due to the deformation, etc., repair
or replace them.
5 (When paper jam occurs in the The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
middle of the exit feed-shift
guide) Replacing paper
6 (When paper jam occurs in the Paper stiffness is weakening Replace paper and install the cassette Installing the
middle of the exit feed-shift due to moisture absorption. heater. optional
guide) Replacing paper and equipment
installing the cassette heater (Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
7 (When paper jam occurs in the The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
middle of the exit feed-shift paper settings (media type, Menu. MP Tray
guide) Changing setting paper size) do not match. Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
s (Operation
Guide -
Section 11)
paper.
bent.
12 (When the paper jam occurs The exit feed-shift guide does Reattach the exit feed-shift guide and Detaching
since the paper hits the exit not operate correctly. reconnect the connector of the exit unit. and
feed-shift guide) Checking the reattaching
exit feed-shift guide the Exit Unit
13 (When paper hits the exit feed- Toner or etc. adheres to the Clean the exit feed-shift guide. If not Detaching
shift guide and paper jam exit feed-shift guide. repaired, replace the exit unit. and
occurs) Cleaning the exit feed- reattaching
shift guide or replacing the exit the Exit Unit
unit.
7-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]

14 Checking the exit upper roller The exit upper roller does not Replace the exit unit if the drive gear is Detaching
rotate. deformed, the torque limiter is faulty, or the and
the Exit Unit
15 Checking the connection The connector of the exit unit Reconnect the connector of the exit unit. Detaching
is not connected properly. and
reattaching
the Exit Unit
• Exit reverse sensor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
• Exit upper solenoid / Exit lower solenoid -
Feed image PWB
17 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse sensor does Execute U031 [Exit Paper]. If the exit reverse Maintenanc
18 Checking the exit solenoid The exit solenoid does not Execute U033 [Branch Eject Up] or [Branch Maintenanc
operate correctly. Eject Down] to check the exit feed-shift guide e Mode List
operation. If it does not operate correctly,
reattach the exit upper solenoid or the exit
19 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse motor does Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If the exit reverse Maintenanc
motor not operate properly. motor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4711/J4712/J4713/J4714/J4715/J4719: Exit reverse sensor stay jam

The exit reverse sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder or the MP tray.

them.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate Reattach the actuator and spring of the exit
Checking the actuator and the properly. reverse sensor. If they do not operate
or replace them.
5 Checking the exit feed-shift Toner or etc. adheres to the Clean the exit feed-shift guide. Or, replace Detaching
guide exit feed-shift guide. the exit unit. and
reattaching
the Exit Unit
6 Checking the exit upper roller The exit upper roller does not Replace the exit unit if the drive gear is Detaching
rotate. deformed, the torque limiter is faulty, or the and
the Exit Unit
7 reconnecting the connector of The connector of the exit unit Reconnect the connector of the exit unit. Detaching
the exit unit. is not connected properly. and
reattaching
the Exit Unit
• Exit reverse sensor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
• Exit upper solenoid / Exit lower solenoid -
Feed image PWB
9 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse sensor does Execute U031 [Exit Paper]. If the exit reverse Maintenanc
10 Checking the exit solenoid The exit solenoid does not Execute U033 [Branch Eject Up] or [Branch Maintenanc
operate correctly. Eject Down] to check the exit feed-shift guide e Mode List
operation. If it does not operate correctly,
reattach the exit upper solenoid or the exit
11 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse motor does Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If the exit reverse Maintenanc
motor not operate properly. motor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
PWB
7-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4901/J4902/J4903/J4904/J4905/J4908/J4909: BR conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP
tray.

them.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate Reattach the actuator and spring of BR
Checking the actuator and the properly. conveying sensor 1. If they do not operate
or replace them.
5 Checking the conveying guide The foreign objects such as Clean or replace the conveying guide.
toner are on the conveying
guide.
6 Checking the paper conveying The paper conveying roller Replace the parts if the gear is deformed, the
roller does not rotate. torque limiter is faulty, or the bushing is worn
down.
7 Checking BR conveying The BR conveying sensor 1 Execute U031 [Bridge1 Feed]. If BR Maintenanc
sensor 1 does not operate correctly. conveying sensor 1 does not operate e Mode List
properly, clean and reattach it then reconnect
8 Replacing the BR conveying The BR conveying motor does Execute U030 [Bridge]. If the BR conveying Maintenanc
motor not operate correctly. motor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
9 reattaching the attachment kit The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying unit. AK-7100
between BR PWB and feed Installation
image PWB is not connected Guide
properly.
10 Replacing the BR PWB The BR PWB is faulty. Replace the BR PWB.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J4911/J4912/J4913/J4914/J4915/J4918/J4919: BR conveying sensor 1 stay jam

BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP
tray.

them.
or replace them.
guide.
down.
replace it.
properly.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J5001/J5002/J5003/J5004/J5005/J5008/J5009: BR conveying sensor 2 non-arrival jam

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP
tray.

them.
or replace them.
guide.
down.
replace it.
9 Reinstalling the bridge unit The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying unit. AK-7100
properly.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J5011/J5012/J5013/J5014/J5015/J5018/J5019: BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP
tray.

them.
or replace them.
guide.
down.
8 Checking the BR conveying The BR conveying motor does Execute U030 [Bridge]. If the BR conveying Maintenanc
replace it.
properly.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6000/J6001/J6002: DF paper entry failure jam

Object: J6000 (4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher), J6001 (1000-sheet finisher), J6002
(Inner finisher)
Turning on of the DF paper entry sensor is detected before the paper output from the main unit.

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
piece of paper, etc. the conveying path, or a burr in the parts
them.
• DF entry sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
3 Checking the DF paper entry The DF entry sensor does not Execute U241 [Finisher] > [HP]. If the DF Maintenanc
sensor operate correctly. entry sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
clean and reattach it, then reconnect the
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J6012: Inner DF open jam

Object: Inner finisher
The Inner DF open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF connection The DF connection sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Release]. If the Maintenanc
sensor does not operate properly. DF connection sensor does not operate e Mode List
J6020/J6021: DF front cover open jam

Object: J6020 (4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher), J6021 (1000-sheet finisher)
The DF front cover open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF front cover The DF front cover is not Check if the DF front cover closes firmly and
aligned to the other exterior reattach the DF front cover if necessary. If
covers. the DF front cover is deformed, repair or
replace it.
2 Checking the DF front cover The DF front cover sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Front Cover]. If Maintenanc
sensor does not operate properly. the DF front cover sensor does not operate e Mode List
7-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6030: DF staple jam

Object: 100-sheet staple finisher
The home position cannot be detected when passing 600ms after the motor starts up.

1 Checking the staple Staples are jammed. Remove jammed staples from the staple
cartridge.
2 Checking the drive The DF staple motor does not Check if the DF staple motor rotates Maintenanc
components rotate due to heavy load. manually. Replace the DF staple unit if it e Mode List
does not rotate smoothly due to the
damaged gear, etc.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected. connectors and reconnect the connectors.
Or the wire is faulty. If there is no continuity, replace the power
cord.
• DF staple unit - DF staple relay PWB
• DF staple relay PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing DF staple unit DF staple unit is faulty. Replace DF staple unit.
5 Replacing DF staple relay DF staple relay PWB is faulty. Replace DF staple relay PWB.
PWB
6 Replacing DF PWB DF PWB is faulty. Replace DF PWB.
J6040: Folding staple jam

Object: 100-sheet staple finisher with the folding unit
Home position cannot be detected when passing 1000ms after starting the motor, or the lock signal is 1V or more for
1000ms continuously when operating the motor.

cartridge.
2 Checking the BF staple unit The BF staple motor does not Check if the BF staple motor rotates Maintenanc
rotate due to heavy load. manually. Replace the BF staple unit if it e Mode List
damaged gear, etc.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected. connectors and reconnect the connectors.
Or the wire is faulty. If there is no continuity, replace the power
cord.
• BF staple unit (BF staple motor) - BF
PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing BF staple unit BF staple unit is faulty. Replace BF staple unit.
5 Replacing BF PWB BF PWB is faulty. Replace BF PWB.
7-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6041: DF top cover open jam

Object: 1000-sheet finisher
The DF top cover open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover is not Check if the DF top cover is closed firmly and
aligned to the other exterior reattach the DF top cover if necessary. If the
covers. DF top cover is deformed, repair or replace
it.
2 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Top Cover]. If the Maintenanc
sensor not operate correctly. DF top cover sensor does not operate e Mode List
J6050: BF tray open jam

Object: 4000 finisher/100-sheet staple finisher + holding unit
The BF tray open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray does not operate Check if the BF tray closes firmly, and
properly. reattach the BF tray if necessary. If the BF
tray is deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the BF tray sensor The BF tray sensor does not Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Tray]. If the BF Maintenanc
operate correctly. tray sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
J6060: MT cover open jam

Object: 4000 finisher + mail box
The MT cover open is detected during the paper conveying to the Mail Box.

1 Checking the MT cover The MT cover is not aligned Check if the MT cover is securely closed,
with the other exterior covers. and reattach it if necessary. Repair or
replace it if it is deformed.
2 Checking the MT cover sensor The MT cover sensor does not Execute U241 [Mail Box] > [Cover]. If the MT Maintenanc
operate properly. cover sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
7-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6070: BF unit open jam

The BF unit open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF set sensor The BF set sensor does not Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Set]. If the BF set Maintenanc
operate correctly. sensor does not operate properly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
J6080: BF left cover open jam

Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
The BF left cover open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF left cover The BF left cover is not Check if the BF left cover turns on the BF left
sensor aligned with the other exterior cover sensor firmly. If the BF left cover is
covers. deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the BF left cover The BF left cover sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Left Guide]. If the Maintenanc
sensor not operate correctly. BF left cover sensor does not operate e Mode List
7-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6100/J6101/J6102: DF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam

(Inner finisher)
• J6100/6101: Turning on the entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after receiving the
main unit eject command
• J6102: Turning on the entry sensor or punch entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after
receiving the main unit eject command
Object: J6100 (4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher), J6101 (1000-sheet finisher), J6102 (Inner finisher)

• DF entry motor - DF PWB

4 Checking the DF paper entry The DF entry motor does not Execute U240 [Motor] > [Feed In]. If the DF Maintenanc
motor operate correctly. entry motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6110/J6111/J6112: DF paper entry sensor stay jam

(Inner finisher)
• J6110/J6111: Turning off the entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the
entry switch.
• J6112: Turning off the entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the entry
sensor, or turning off the punch entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the
punch entry sensor


and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6200: Sub tray eject non-arrival jam/ Entry timing sensor non-arrival jam
Object: 4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher
Turning on the sub tray eject sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the entry
sensor (4000-sheet finisher)/turning on the entry timing sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after
turning on the entry sensor (100-sheet staple finisher).

1 (When printing the banner) The custom size paper of Set the following at the printer driver Printer
Checking the paper length 470.1mm (18.5inch) or more properties. Driver
length is fed. • Media Type: Plain Operation
Guide
• Source: MP tray
• DF sub exit sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF feed-shift solenoid 3 - DF PWB
• DF exit motor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF sub exit The DF sub exit sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Sub Tray Eject]. If Maintenanc
sensor not operate correctly. the DF sub exit sensor does not operate e Mode List
5 Checking DF feed-shift The DF feed-shift solenoid 3 Execute U240 [Solenoid] > [Booklet]. If DF Maintenanc
solenoid 3 does not operate correctly. feed-shift solenoid 3 does not operate e Mode List
7 Checking the DF exit motor The DF exit motor does not Execute U240 [Motor] > [Eject]. If the DF exit Maintenanc
operate correctly. motor does not operate properly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6210: DF sub exit sensor stay jam

Object: 4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher
Turning off the sub tray eject sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the sub tray
eject sensor (4000-sheet finisher)/turning off the sub tray eject sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified
time after turning off the entry timing sensor (100-sheet staple finisher)

• DF sub exit sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
3 Checking the DF sub exit The DF sub exit sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Sub Tray Eject]. If Maintenanc
sensor not operate correctly. the DF sub exit sensor does not operate e Mode List
replace it.
7 Checking the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6300/J6301: Finishing tray non-arrival jam/ Sub tray eject sensor non-arrival jam
Turning on the middle sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the eject switch
(4000-sheet finisher/1000-sheet finisher)/turning on the sub tray eject sensor cannot be detected when passing the
specified time after turning on the entry timing switch (100-sheet staple finisher).

1 Checking the mechanical The roller, the guide, etc. is not Perform the prior standard check items.
factor attached properly. Or, they are
dirty, deformed, worn out.
• DF middle sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF middle motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF middle The DF middle sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Middle Tray Maintenanc
sensor not operate correctly. Eject]. If the DF middle sensor does not e Mode List
6 Checking the DF middle motor The DF middle motor does not Execute U240 [Motor] > [Middle]. If the DF Maintenanc
operate correctly. middle motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6310/J6311: Finishing tray stay jam/ Sub tray eject sensor stay jam
Turning off the middle sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the middle sensor
(4000-sheet finisher/1000-sheet finisher)/turning off the sub tray eject sensor cannot be detected when passing the
specified time after turning off the entry timing sensor (100-sheet staple finisher).

• DF exit clutch - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF exit clutch The DF exit clutch does not Reattach the DF exit clutch and reconnect
operate correctly. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
replace it.
6 Checking the DF middle motor The DF middle motor does not Execute U240 [Motor] > [Middle]. If the DF Maintenanc
operate correctly. middle motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6400/J6401/J6402: DF exit sensor non-arrival jam

Object: J6400 (4000-sheet finisher), J6401 (1000-sheet finisher), J6402 (Inner finisher)
The DF exit sensor does not turn on even specific time has passed after DF middle sensor turned on.

• DF exit sensor - DF PWB
• DF tray motor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF exit sensor The DF exit sensor does not Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Middle Tray]. If Maintenanc
operate correctly. the DF exit sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace it.
6 Checking the DF tray motor The DF tray motor does not Execute U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If the DF tray Maintenanc
replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6400/J6401/J6402: DF middle sensor non-arrival jam1/jam2/jam3

Turning on the DF middle sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the DF entry
timing sensor (straight)/turning on the DF middle sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after
turning on the DF entry timing sensor (finishing tray)/turning on the DF middle sensor cannot be detected when passing
the specified time after ejecting paper from the relief drum (relief drum eject).

• DF entry timing sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF middle sensor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF entry timing The DF entry timing sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Feed In Timing] Maintenanc
sensor does not operate properly. If the DF entry timing sensor does not e Mode List
the connector.
Replace it if not repaired.
4 Checking the DF middle motor The DF middle motor does not Execute U241[Motor] > [Middle] Maintenanc
operate properly. If the DF middle motor does not operate e Mode List
correctly, reattach it and reconnect the
connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6410/J6411/J6412: DF exit sensor stay jam

The DF exit sensor does not turn on even specific time has passed after DF exit sensor turned on.

• DF exit sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
replace it.
replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the DP firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version. Update
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6410/J6411/J6412: DF middle sensor stay jam

Turning off the middle sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning off the entry timing
sensor (straight)/turning off the middle sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning off the
entry timing sensor (finishing tray)/turning off the middle sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time
after turning off the drum timing sensor (relief drum eject).

• DF entry timing sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF middle sensor - DF PWB<br>
• DF drum timing sensor - DF PWB
• DF middle sensor - DF PWB<br>
• DF retraction drum motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF entry timing The DF entry timing sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Middle] Maintenanc
sensor does not operate properly. If the DF entry timing sensor does not e Mode List
the connector.
4 Checking the DF middle The DF middle sensor does Execute U241[Finisher] > [Middle] Maintenanc
sensor not operate properly. If the DF middle sensor does not operate e Mode List
connector.
5 Checking the DF drum timing The DF drum timing sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Drum Timing]
sensor does not operate properly. If the DF drum timing sensor does not
the connector.
6 Checking the DF retraction The DF retraction drum motor Execute U240[Motor] > [Save] Maintenanc
drum motor does not operate properly. If the DF relief drum motor does not operate e Mode List
connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6500: DF bundle eject non-arrival jam/eject sensor non-arrival jam

Object: 4000 finisher/100-sheet staple finisher
Turning on the eject paper sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the middle
sensor at the bundle conveying (4000-sheet finisher)/turning on the eject paper sensor cannot be detected when
passing the specified time after turning on the middle sensor (straight eject only) (100-sheet staple finisher)

• DF exit sensor - DF PWB
replace it.
replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6510/J6511/J6512: DF bundle eject stay jam/ Eject sensor stay jam

(Inner finisher)
Turning off the eject paper sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after starting the bundle eject/
turning off the eject sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning off the middle switch
(straight eject only).

• DF exit sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
replace it.
replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6600: DF drum sensor non-arrival jam

The DF drum sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the DF paper entry sensor turned on.

• DF drum sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF drum motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF drum timing The DF drum timing sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Drum Timing] Maintenanc
sensor does not operate properly. If the DF drum timing sensor does not e Mode List
the connector.
4 Checking DF feed-shift The DF feed-shift solenoid 1 Execute U240[Solenoid] > [Save Drum] Maintenanc
solenoid 1 does not operate correctly. If the DF feedshift solenoid 1 does not e Mode List
the connector.
5 Checking the DF relief drum The DF relief drum motor Execute U240[Motor] > [Save] Maintenanc
motor does not operate correctly. If the DF relief drum motor does not operate e Mode List
connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6610: DF drum timing sensor stay jam

Turning off the drum timing sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the drum timing
sensor at the relief operation/turning off the drum timing sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time
after turning off the entry timing sensor.

connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. Manual -
wire is faulty. If there is no continuity, replace the power Section 8
cord. 'PWBs'
• DF feedshift solenoid 1 - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF drum timing The DF drum timing sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Drum Timing] Maintenanc
sensor does not operate properly. If the DF drum timing sensor does not e Mode List
the connector.
the connector.
5 Checking the DF retraction The DF relief drum motor does Execute U240[Motor] > [Save] Maintenanc
drum motor not operate correctly. If the DF relief drum motor does not operate e Mode List
connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6700: Drum timing sensor non-arrival jam

Turning on the drum timing switch cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the drum sensor

cord. 'PWBs'
• DF drum sensor - DF PWB
• DF feedshift solenoid 1 - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF drum sensor DF drum sensor does not Execute U241[Finisher] > [Drum] Maintenanc
operate correctly. If the DF drum sensor does not operate e Mode List
connector.
4 Checking the DF drum timing The DF drum timing sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Drum Timing]
sensor does not operate properly. If the DF drum timing sensor does not
the connector.
the connector.
6 Checking the DF retraction The DF relief drum motor does Execute U240[Motor] > [Save] Maintenanc
drum motor not operate correctly. If the DF relief drum motor does not operate e Mode List
connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6710: DF drum sensor stay jam during paper conveying into the BF unit
The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on when conveying the paper to the
folding unit.

• DF drum sensor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF relief drum motor - DF PWB
• BF entry motor - BF PWB
• DF PWB - BF PWB
3 Checking the DF drum sensor The DF drum sensor does not Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Drum]. If the DF Maintenanc
operate correctly. drum sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
4 Checking the DF retraction The DF relief drum motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > [Save]. If the DF Maintenanc
drum motor not operate correctly. relief drum motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
5 Checking the BF paper entry The BF entry motor does not Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Feed In]. If the BF Maintenanc
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7 Replacing the BF PWB The BF PWB is faulty. Replace the BF PWB.
7-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6810/J6811/J6812: DF side registration jam 1/ bundle eject stay jam

Object: J6810 (4000 finisher/100-sheet staple finisher), J6811 (1000-sheet finisher), J6812 (Inner
finisher)
During the standby operation, turning DF side registration sensor 1 off is not detected when passing the specified time
after DF side registration motor 1 turned on/turning the eject paper sensor off is not detected when passing the specified
time after the bundle eject started.

1 Checking the front DF The front DF adjusting plate is Check if the DF front adjusting plate shifts
adjusting plate not properly attached, or it is manually. Clean and reattach it if it does not
dirty, deformed, or worn down. shift smoothly. Then, replace it if it is not
fixed.
• DF side registration sensor 1 - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF side registration motor 1 - DF PWB

3 Checking DF side registration The DF side registration Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Front HP]. Maintenanc
sensor 1 sensor 1 does not operate If the DF side registration sensor 1 does not e Mode List
correctly. operate properly, reattach it and reconnect
4 Checking DF side registration The DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test]. If DF Maintenanc
motor 1 1 does not operate correctly. side registration motor 1 does not operate e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6910/J6911/J6912: Rear DF side registration jam

DF side registration sensor 2 does not turn off after passing the specific time since DF side registration motor 2 turned
on during the standby operation.

1 Checking the rear DF The rear DF adjusting plate is Check if the DF rear adjusting plate shifts
adjusting plate not properly attached, or it is manually. Clean and reattach it if it does not
dirty, deformed, or worn down. shift smoothly. Then, replace it if it is not
fixed.
• DF side registration sensor 2 - DF PWB 'PWBs'

3 Checking DF side registration The DF side registration Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP]. If Maintenanc
sensor 2 sensor 2 does not operate the DF side registration sensor 2 does not e Mode List
4 Checking DF side registration The DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test]. If DF Maintenanc
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-224
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7000/J7001/J7002: DF staple jam

The DF staple home position cannot be detected after activating the DF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up was detected
during the DF staple motor operation.

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF Check if the lower BF registration guide Staple Jam
registration guide shifts shifts manually, and reattach it if it does not Clear
manually, and reattach it if it smoothly shift. (Operation
does not smoothly shift. Guide -
Section 10)
2 Checking the drive parts The DF staple motor does not Check if the DF staple motor rotates Detaching
rotate due to the excessive manually. Replace the DF staple unit if it and
load. does not rotate smoothly due to the reattaching
damaged gear, etc. the DF
Staple Unit
• DF staple unit - DF staple relay PWB 'PWBs'

4 Replacing the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF
Staple Unit
5 Replacing the DF staple relay The DF staple relay PWB is Replace the DF staple relay PWB.
PWB faulty.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-225
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7100: BF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam

The BF paper entry sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the BF vertical conveying sensor turned
on.

• BF entry sensor - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF paper entry The BF entry sensor does not Execute U241 [Booklet] > [HP]. If the BF Maintenanc
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-226
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7110: BF paper entry sensor stay jam

The BF paper entry sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since the BF vertical conveying sensor turned
on.

• BF entry sensor - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF paper entry The BF entry sensor does not Execute U241 [Booklet] > [HP]. If the BF Maintenanc
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-227
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7200: BF exit sensor non-arrival jam

The BF exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the center fold operation started.

• BF exit sensor - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF blade motor - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF exit sensor The BF exit sensor does not Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Eject]. If the BF Maintenanc
operate correctly. exit sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
4 Checking the BF blade motor The BF blade motor does not Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Blade]. If the BF Maintenanc
operate correctly. blade motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7210: BF exit sensor stay jam

The BF exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on during the center fold operation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray is not properly Remove the paper and reattach the BF tray.
attached.
• BF PWB - DF PWB
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-228
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7300: BF exit sensor non-arrival jam at tri-folding

The BF exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since starting the tri-fold operation.

• BF feed-shift solenoid - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
4 Checking the BF feed-shift The BF feed-shift solenoid Execute U240 [Solenoid] > [Three Fold]. If Maintenanc
solenoid does not operate correctly. the BF feed-shift solenoid does not operate e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7310: BF exit sensor stay jam at tri-folding

The BF exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on during the tri-fold operation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray is not properly Remove the paper and reattach the BF tray.
attached.
• BF PWB - DF PWB
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-229
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7400: Upper BF side registration jam

BF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the upper BF side registration guide
shifted toward the sensor.

1 Checking the upper BF side The upper BF side registration Check if the upper BF side registration guide
registration guide guide is not properly attached, shifts manually, and reattach it if it does not
or it is dirty, deformed, or worn smoothly shift.
down.
• BF side registration sensor 2 - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF side registration motor 2 - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking BF side registration The BF side registration Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Width Down HP]. Maintenanc
sensor 2 sensor 2 does not operate If the BF side registration sensor 2 does not e Mode List
4 Checking BF side registration The BF side registration motor Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Width Test]. If BF Maintenanc
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-230
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7500: Lower BF side registration jam

BF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the lower BF side registration guide
shifted toward the sensor.

1 Checking the lower BF side The lower BF side registration Check if the lower BF side registration guide
registration guide guide is not properly attached, shifts manually, and reattach it if it does not
or it is dirty, deformed, or worn smoothly shift.
down.
• BF side registration sensor 1 - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF side registration motor 1 - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking BF side registration The BF side registration Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Width Up HP]. If Maintenanc
sensor 1 sensor 1 does not operate the BF side registration sensor 1 does not e Mode List
4 Checking BF side registration The BF side registration motor Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Width Test]. If BF Maintenanc
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-231
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7600: BF staple jam

The BF staple home position cannot be detected after activating the BF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up was detected
during the BF staple motor operation.

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF Check if the lower BF registration guide Staple Jam
registration guide shifts shifts manually, and reattach it if it does not Clear
manually, and reattach it if it smoothly shift. (Operation
does not smoothly shift. Guide -
Section 10)
2 Checking the BF staple unit The BF staple motor does not Check if the BF staple motor rotates
rotate due to the excessive manually. Replace the BF staple unit if it
load. does not rotate smoothly due to the
damaged gear, etc.
• BF staple unit (BF staple motor) - BF 'PWBs'
PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing the BF staple unit The BF staple unit is faulty. Replace the BF staple unit.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-232
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7700: BF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the paper output signal from the
main unit was received.

• BF vertical conveying sensor - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Vertical Feed]. If Maintenanc
conveying sensor sensor does not operate the BF vertical conveying sensor does not e Mode List
4 Checking the drive parts The BF paper entry motor Check if the BF entry motor rotates by
drive parts are faulty. manually and if it does not rotate smoothly
due to the damage of the gear, etc., replace
the drive parts of the BF entry motor.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-233
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7710: BF vertical conveying sensor stay jam

The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since it turned on.

• BF vertical conveying sensor - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Vertical Feed]. If Maintenanc
conveying sensor sensor does not operate the BF vertical conveying sensor does not e Mode List
4 Checking the drive parts The BF paper entry motor Check if the BF entry motor rotates by
drive parts are faulty. manually and if it does not rotate smoothly
due to the damage of the gear, etc., replace
the drive parts of the BF entry motor.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-234
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7800: Mail Box exit non-arrival jam

MT tray exit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the paper is output from the main unit.

1 Checking the belt and the The belt and surrounding parts Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv] to check Maintenanc
neighboring parts are not attached properly. Or, the operation of the belt. If the belt does not e Mode List
they are dirty, deformed or operate correctly, repair the belt and the
worn out. neighboring parts (feed-shift claw lever,
guide, etc.). If not repaired, replace the part.
• MT tray exit sensor 1, 2 - MT PWB 'PWBs'
• MT home position sensor - MT PWB
• MT conveying motor - MT PWB
• MT PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the MT tray exit MT tray exit sensor 1 or 2 Execute U241 [Mail Box] > [Eject]. If MT tray Maintenanc
sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly. exit sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly, e Mode List
4 Checking the MT home The belt holding plate does Execute U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor HP]. If the Maintenanc
position sensor not operate properly since the MT home position sensor does not operate e Mode List
MB home position sensor is properly, reattach it and reconnect the
not properly connected or not connector. If not repaired, replace it.
attached.
5 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying motor does Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If the MT Maintenanc
motor not operate properly. conveying motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
6 Replacing the MT PWB The MT PWB is faulty. Replace the MT PWB.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-235
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7810: Mail Box exit stay jam

The MT tray exit sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

1 Checking the belt and the The belt and surrounding parts Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv] to check Maintenanc
neighboring parts are not attached properly. Or, the operation of the belt. If the belt does not e Mode List
they are dirty, deformed or operate correctly, repair the belt and the
worn out. neighboring parts (feed-shift claw lever,
guide, etc.). If not repaired, replace the part.
2 Checking the MT tray The MT tray is not properly Reattach the MT tray.
attached.
• MT tray exit sensor 1, 2 - MT PWB 'PWBs'
• MT conveying motor - MT PWB
• MT PWB - DF PWB
4 Checking the MT tray exit MT tray exit sensor 1 or 2 Execute U241 [Mail Box] > [Eject]. If MT tray Maintenanc
sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly. exit sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly, e Mode List
5 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying motor does Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If the MT Maintenanc
motor not operate properly. conveying motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-236
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7900/J7901/J7902: DF paddle jam

Object: J7900 (4000-sheet finisher), J7901 (1000-sheet finisher), J7902 (Inner finisher).
Turning on of the DF paddle sensor is not detected after passing 1s since the DF paddle motor activated.

1 Removing the paper The paper is jammed in the Remove the jammed paper from the DF
DF paddle. paddle.
2 Checking the drive parts The DF paddle does not rotate Check if the DF paddle motor rotates by
due to the excessive load. manually and if it does not rotate smoothly
due to the damage of the drive parts, replace
it.
• DP paddle sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
• DP paddle motor - DP PWB
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Lead Paddle]. If Maintenanc
sensor not operate correctly. the DF paddle sensor does not operate e Mode List
5 Checking the DF paddle motor The DF paddle motor does not Execute U240 [Motor] > [Beat]. If the DF Maintenanc
operate correctly. paddle motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-237
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7910: Adjusting pulley pressure release motor jam

Change of the adjusting pulley pressure release HP sensor is not detected when driving the adjusting pulley pressure
release motor for 3s in the direction of the HP sensor change.

wire is faulty. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
'PWBs'
• DF adjusting pulley pressure release HP
sensor - DF PWB
• DF adjusting pulley pressure release
motor - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF adjusting The DF adjusting pulley Execute U241[Finisher] > [Match Coro HP] Maintenanc
pulley pressure release HP pressure release HP sensor If the DF adjusting pulley pressure HP e Mode List
sensor does not operate properly. sensor does not operate properly, reattach it
and reconnect the connector.
3 Checking the DF adjusting The DF adjusting pulley Execute U240[Motor] > [Match Pressure] Maintenanc
release motor pressure release motor does If the DF adjusting pulley pressure motor e Mode List
not operate properly. does not operate properly, reattach it and
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7911: Pull-in guide release motor jam

Change of the pull-in guide release HP sensor is not detected when driving the pull-in guide release motor for 3s in the
direction of the HP sensor change.

'PWBs'
• DF pull-in guide release HP sensor - DF
PWB
• DF pull-in guide release motor - DF PWB
2 Checking the connection The DF pull-in guide release Execute U241[Finisher] > [Rear Beat HP] Maintenanc
Checking the DF pull-in guide HP sensor is not operated If the DF pull-in guide release HP sensor e Mode List
release HP sensor correctly. does not operate properly, reattach it and
3 Checking the DF pull-in guide The DF pull-in guide release Execute U240[Motor] > [Beat] Maintenanc
release motor motor is not operated If the DF pull-in guide release motor does not e Mode List
the connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-238
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7912: Pull-in pulley pressure release motor jam

Change of the pull-in pulley pressure release motor is not detected when driving the pull-in pulley pressure release
motor for 3s in the direction of the HP sensor change.

cord. 'PWBs'
• DF pull-in release HP sensor - DF PWB
• Pull-in pulley pressure release motor -
DF PWB
2 Checking the DF pull-in The DF adjusting pulley Execute U241[Finisher] > [Pull Coro] Maintenanc
release HP sensor pressure release HP sensor If the DF adjusting pulley pressure HP e Mode List
does not operate properly. sensor does not operate properly, reattach it
3 pull-in pulley pressure release The DF adjusting pulley Execute U240[Motor] > [Pull Pressure] Maintenanc
motor pressure release motor does If the DF adjusting pulley pressure motor e Mode List
not operate properly. does not operate properly, reattach it and
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7913: Eject pressure release motor jam

Change of the eject pressure release HP sensor is not detected when driving the eject pressure release motor for 3s in
the direction of the HP sensor change.

'PWBs'
• DF eject pressure release HP sensor -
DF PWB
• DF eject pressure release motor - DF
PWB
2 Checking the DF eject The DF eject pressure release Execute U241[Finisher] > [Eject Press HP] Maintenanc
pressure release HP sensor HP sensor does not operate If the DF adjusting pulley pressure HP e Mode List
properly. sensor does not operate properly, reattach it
3 Checking the DF eject The DF eject pressure release Execute U240[Motor] > [Eject Unlock (Full)] Maintenanc
pressure release motor motor does not operate If the DF adjusting pulley pressure motor e Mode List
properly. does not operate properly, reattach it and
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-239
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7914: Shift motor 1 jam

Change of the shift HP sensor 1 is not detected when driving the shift motor 1 for 3s in the direction of the HP sensor
change.

'PWBs'
• DF shift HP sensor 1 - DF PWB
• DF shift motor 1 - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF shift HP The DF shift HP sensor 1 does Execute U241[Finisher] > [Shift Front HP] Maintenanc
sensor 1 not operate properly. If the DF adjusting pulley pressure HP e Mode List
sensor does not operate properly, reattach it
3 Checking the DF shift motor 1 The DF shift motor 1 does not Execute U240[Motor] > [Sort Test] Maintenanc
operate properly. If the DF adjusting pulley pressure motor e Mode List
does not operate properly, reattach it and
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7915: Shift motor 2 jam

Change of the shift HP sensor 2 is not detected when driving the shift motor 1 for 3s in the direction of the HP sensor
change.

'PWBs'
• DF shift HP sensor 2 - DF PWB
• DF shift motor 2 - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF shift HP The DF shift HP sensor 2 does Execute U241[Finisher] > [Shift Tail HP] Maintenanc
sensor 2 not operate properly. If the DF adjusting pulley pressure HP e Mode List
sensor does not operate properly, reattach it
3 Checking the DF shift motor 2 The DF shift motor 2 does not Execute U240[Motor] > [Sort Test] Maintenanc
operate properly. If the DF adjusting pulley pressure motor e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-240
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7916: Shift release motor jam

Change of the DF shift release HP sensor is not detected when driving the DF shift release motor for 3s in the direction
of the HP sensor change.

'PWBs'
• DF shift release HP sensor - DF PWB
• DF shift release motor - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF shift release The DF shift release HP Execute U241[Finisher] > [Shift Unlock HP] Maintenanc
HP sensor sensor does not operate If the DF adjusting pulley pressure HP e Mode List
properly. sensor does not operate properly, reattach it
3 Checking the DF shift release The DF shift release motor Execute U240[Motor] > [Sort Test] Maintenanc
motor does not operate properly. If the DF adjusting pulley pressure motor e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7917: Side registration motor 1 jam

Change of the side registration HP sensor 1 is not detected when driving the side registration motor 1 for 3s in the

'PWBs'
• DF side registration HP sensor 1 - DF
PWB
2 Checking the DF side DF side registration HP sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Width Front HP] Maintenanc
registration HP sensor 1 1 does not operate properly. If DF side registration HP sensor 1 does not e Mode List
the connector.
3 Checking the DF side DF side registration motor 1 Execute U240[Motor] > [Width Test] Maintenanc
registration motor 1 does not operate properly. If DF side registration motor 1 does not e Mode List
the connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-241
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7918: Side registration motor 2 jam

Change of the side registration HP sensor 2 is not detected when driving the side registration motor 2 for 3s in the

'PWBs'
PWB
2 Checking the DF side DF side registration HP sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Width Tail HP] Maintenanc
registration HP sensor 2 2 does not operate properly. If DF side registration HP sensor 2 does not e Mode List
the connector.
3 Checking the DF side DF side registration motor 2 Execute U240[Motor] > [Width Test] Maintenanc
registration motor 2 does not operate properly. If DF side registration motor 2 does not e Mode List
the connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7919: Staple shift motor jam

Change of the staple shift HP sensor is not detected when driving the staple shift motor for 5s in the direction of the HP
sensor change.

'PWBs'
• Staple shift HP sensor - DF PWB
• Staple shift motor - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF staple shift The DF staple shift HP sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Staple HP] Maintenanc
HP sensor does not operate properly. If the DF staple shift HP sensor does not e Mode List
the connector.
3 Checking the DF staple shift The DF staple shift motor does Execute U240[Motor] > [Staple Move] Maintenanc
motor not operate properly. If the DF staple shift motor does not operate e Mode List
connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-242
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7920: DF staple motor jam

The home position cannot be detected when passing 600ms after the staple motor is started up.

cartridge.
2 Checking the drive The DF staple motor does not Check if the DF staple motor rotates
components rotate due to heavy load. manually. Replace the DF staple unit if it
damaged gear, etc.
'PWBs'
• DF staple unit - DF staple relay PWB
4 Replacing DF staple unit DF staple unit is faulty. Replace DF staple unit.
5 Replacing DF staple relay DF staple relay PWB is faulty. Replace DF staple relay PWB.
PWB
6 Replacing DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7921: Bundle eject motor 1 jam

Change of the bundle eject HP sensor 1 is not detected when driving the bundle eject motor 1 for 3s in the direction of
the HP sensor change.

'PWBs'
• Bundle eject HP sensor 1 - DF PWB
• Bundle eject motor 1 - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF bundle eject The bundle eject HP sensor 1 Execute U241[Finisher] > [Bundle Eject HP1] Maintenanc
HP sensor 1 does not operate properly. If the DF bundle eject HP sensor 1 does not e Mode List
the connector.
3 Checking the DF bundle eject The bundle eject motor 1 does Execute U240[Motor] > [Bundle Up] Maintenanc
motor 1 not operate properly. If the DF bundle eject motor 1 does not e Mode List
the connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-243
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7922: Bundle eject motor 2 jam

Change of the bundle eject HP sensor 2 is not detected when driving the bundle eject motor 2 for 3s in the direction of
the HP sensor change.

'PWBs'
• Bundle eject HP sensor 2 - DF PWB
• Bundle eject motor 2 - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF bundle eject The bundle eject HP sensor 2 Execute U241[Finisher] > [Bundle Eject HP1] Maintenanc
HP sensor 2 does not operate properly. If the DF bundle eject HP sensor 2 does not e Mode List
the connector.
3 Checking the DF bundle eject The DF exit motor 2 does not Execute U240[Motor] > [Bundle Up Maintenanc
motor 2 operate correctly. If the DF bundle eject motor 2 does not e Mode List
the connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7923: Eject paddle motor jam

Change of the eject paddle HP sensor is not detected when driving the adjusting the eject paddle motor for 3s in the

'PWBs'
• Eject paddle HP sensor - DF PWB
• Eject paddle motor - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF eject paddle The DF eject paddle HP Execute U241[Finisher] > [Eject Paddle HP] Maintenanc
HP sensor sensor does not operate If the DF eject paddle HP sensor does not e Mode List
properly. operate properly, reattach it and reconnect
the connector.
3 Checking the DF eject paddle The DF eject paddle motor Execute U240[Motor] > [Tray Eject Paddle] Maintenanc
motor 2 does not operate properly. If the DF eject paddle motor does not e Mode List
the connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-244
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7924: Eject paper holding motor jam

Change of the eject paper holding HP sensor is not detected when driving the eject paper holding motor for 3s in the

'PWBs'
• Eject paper holding sensor - DF PWB
• Eject paper holding motor - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF eject paper The DF eject paper holding Execute U241[Finisher] > [Eject Paddle HP] Maintenanc
holding sensor sensor does not operate If the DF eject paper holding sensor does not e Mode List
the connector.
3 Checking the DF eject paper The DF eject paper holding Execute U240[Motor] > [Press Paper] Maintenanc
holding motor motor does not operate If the DF eject paper holding motor does not e Mode List
the connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7925: Eject support guide motor jam

Change of the eject support guide HP sensor is not detected when driving the eject support guide motor for 3s in the

'PWBs'
• Eject support guide HP sensor - DF PWB
• Eject support guide motor - DF PWB
2 Checking the DF eject support The DF eject support guide Execute U241[Finisher] > [Paper Guide HP] Maintenanc
guide HP sensor HP sensor does not operate If the DF eject paddle HP sensor does not e Mode List
the connector.
3 Checking the DF eject support The DF eject support guide Execute U240[Motor] > [Eject Guide] Maintenanc
guide motor HP motor does not operate If the DF eject support guide motor does not e Mode List
the connector.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-245
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7930: Required paper interval time data jam

Same paper ID is notified with required paper interval time command.

1 Resetting the main power The engine firmware does not Remove a piece of paper from each Maintenanc
operate properly conveying section and turn the power switch e Mode List
and the main power switch off.
After 5 seconds, turn on the main power
switch and the power switch.
connected to the main unit
properly.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not operate Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
properly
4 DF PWB is faulty. The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
5 Engine PWB is faulty. Engine PWB is faulty. Replace Engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7931: Main unit eject data jam 1

Main unit eject command is received before turning on print ready.

properly.
properly
4 Replacing DF PWB. The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
5 Replacing Engine PWB. Engine PWB is faulty. Replace Engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-246
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Main unit eject command is received when other than during print operation, or during operation stop.

properly.
properly
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
and
reattaching
the DF PWB

No paper ID exists when receiving the main unit eject command.

properly.
properly
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-247
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J7934: Required paper interval time cancel data 1 jam

No paper ID exists when receiving required paper interval time cancel command.

properly.
properly
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
J7935: Required paper interval time cancel data 2 jam

Paper ID is "during conveying" when receiving required paper interval time cancel command.

properly.
properly
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-248
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9000: No original feed from the DP

Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP
The DP feed sensor does not turn on after the paper feed was retried.

1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is folded.
2 Checking the original The original curls downward or Correct or replace the original. If it is difficult
waves. to replace, switch the front end and the rear
end of the original, and reset.
3 Checking the original The original out of Explain users to use the original within the
specification is used. specifications.
4 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on the Remove the original with the foreign objects.
original.
5 Checking the paper path The original is caught up by a If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
piece of paper. the conveying path, or a burr in the parts
them.
6 Checking the DP feed roller The paper conveying force of Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn
the DP feed roller is down, replace it.
insufficient.
7 Replacing the DP front The film of the DP front Replace the DP front separation pad assy
separation pad assy separation pad assy is peeling (including the film).
off.
spring properly. DP feed sensor. If it does not operate
or replace them.
9 Checking the connection for The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
the mechanically reversed DP connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
with the DP feed roller wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• DP feed sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
• DP feed clutch - DP PWB
• DP conveying motor - DP PWB
the dual scan DP or the connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
mechanically reversed DP wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
with the DP feed belt • DP feed sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
• DP feed motor - DP PWB

11 Checking the DP feed sensor The DP feed sensor does not Execute U244 [Feed]. If the DP feed sensor Maintenanc
replace it.
12 Checking the DP feed clutch The DP feed clutch does not Execute U243 [Feed Clutch]. If the DP feed Maintenanc
for the mechanically reversed operate correctly. clutch does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
DP with the DP feed roller and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
13 Checking the DP conveying The DP conveying motor does Execute U243 [Conv Motor]. If the DP Maintenanc
motor for the mechanically not operate correctly. conveying motor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
reversed DP with the DP feed reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
roller not repaired, replace it.
14 Checking the DP feed motor The DP feed motor does not Execute U243 [Feed Motor]. If the DP feed Maintenanc
(For the dual scan DP and the operate correctly. motor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
mechanically reversed DP and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
with the DP feed belt)) replace it.
7-249
[CONFIDENTIAL]

15 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-250
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9001: DP small size original jam

1. DP timing sensor turned off immediately after DP timing sensor turns ON.
2. When secondary feed starts, DP feed sensor or DP registration sensor is OFF.
3. When DP timing sensor is ON, DP feed sensor or DP registration sensor is OFF.
4. When DP registration sensor is OFF, the original at secondary feed section does not reach to DP timing sensor.

specification is fed. specifications.
2 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate Remove the sponge for the sound cut of the
spring properly. actuator operation (for the DP registration
sensor). And if the actuators or the springs
are deformed, etc. that they do not operate
correctly, replace them.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
J9002: Paper jam detected when starting the paper conveying

Remarks: When detecting the DP feedshift motor error (C9180) (up to 2 times), J9002 is displayed.
(Reversing dual scan DP only)
The unspecific conveying sensor turns on when starting the paper conveying.

1 Specifying the sensor (Specify the sensor which is Specify the sensor that displays ON at U244. Maintenanc
turned on) (Go to the next step.) e Mode List
2 Checking the paper path There is a piece of paper If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
remaining on paper conveying the conveying path, or a burr in the parts
route to turn on the sensor. such as the guide or the actuator, remove
them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not operate Clean and reattach the sensor specified at Maintenanc
correctly. U244, and reconnect the connector. If not e Mode List
• Faulty sensor defined at U244 - DP PWB 'PWBs'
7-251
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9004: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing

Object: Reversing dual scan DP
The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation started.

them.
2 (If the thin original with low The gap at the time of Replace the release lever in order to widen
stiffness is used) Replacing separation of the DP reversing the gap at the time of DP reverse roller
the release lever. roller is narrow, and the separation. (LEVER DU PRESS:
second original (first side) 303R70730_, the last digit 1 or newer).
can't enter between the DP
reversing rollers when
reversing the first original
3 (When the original is skewed) The paper conveying Clean the DP conveying roller surface. If
Checking the DP conveying performance of the DP worn down, replace it.
roller conveying roller is insufficient.
4 (When the original is skewed) The location of the original Align the original width guides to the original
Relocating the original width width guides and the original size.
guides size are mismatched.
5 (When the original is skewed) The original is hooked with the Reattach the DP feed-shift guide. If there is a
Checking the DP feed-shift DP feed-shift guide. burr on the conveying surface of the DP
guide branch guide, remove or replace it.
6 (When the original is skewed) The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
Checking the connection connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
• DP feed-shift motor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
7 (When the original is skewed) The DP feed-shift guide does Execute U243 [Rev Motor]. If the DP feed- Maintenanc
Checking the DP feed-shift not switch as the DP feed-shift shift motor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
motor for the mechanically motor does not operate reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
reversed DP with the DP feed correctly. not repaired, replace it.
roller
8 (When the original is skewed) The DP feed-shift guide does Reattach the DP feed-shift motor and
Checking the DP feed-shift not switch as the DP feed-shift reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
motor for the mechanically motor does not operate replace it.
reversed DP with the DP feed correctly.
belt
9 (When the original conveying The paper conveying force of Clean the DP reverse roller surface. If worn
delays) Checking the DP the DP reverse roller is down, replace it.
reverse roller insufficient.
original is folded.
original.
7-252
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• DP registration sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
• DP conveying motor - DP PWB (DP feed

roller type)
• DP reverse motor - DP PWB (DP feed
belt type)
15 Checking the DP registration The DP registration sensor Execute U244 [Regist]. If the DP registration Maintenanc
sensor does not operate correctly. sensor does not operate correctly, clean and e Mode List
reattach it, then reconnect the connector. If
motor for the mechanically not operate correctly. conveying motor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
roller not repaired, replace it.
17 Checking the DP reverse The DP reverse motor does Execute U243 [Eject Motor]. If the DP Maintenanc
motor for the mechanically not operate correctly. reverse motor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
belt not repaired, replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-253
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9005: No original feed from the DP

Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP (feed belt type)
The DP lift upper limit sensor does not turn on even the specific pulse has passed when the DP lift plate rise up.

1 (When the DP lift plate does The DP lift plate is not Reattach the DP lift plate. If the fulcrum shaft
not lift up) Checking the DP lift attached properly, or the is broken, replace the DP lift plate.
plate fulcrum shaft of the DP lift
plate is damaged.
2 (When the DP lift plate does The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
not rise up) Checking the connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
• DP lift motor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
• DP original sensor - DP PWB

3 (When the DP lift plate does The DF lift motor does not Execute U243 [Lift Motor]. If the DP lift motor Maintenanc
not rise up) Checking the DP operate properly. does not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
rise motor reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
4 (When the DP lift plate does The DP original sensor does Execute U244 [Set]. If the DP original sensor Maintenanc
not rise up) Checking the DP not operate correctly. does not operate correctly, reattach it and e Mode List
original sensor reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
5 Checking the original The original is not set properly. Insert the original all the way and align the
original width guides to the original.
original is folded.
9 Checking the actuator The actuator does not operate Depending on the original, if the actuator of
properly. the DP lift upper sensor does not turn on,
reattach the actuator.
• DP lift upper limit sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
11 Checking the DP lift upper limit The DP lift upper limit sensor Execute U244 [Lift U-Limit]. If the DP lift Maintenanc
sensor does not operate correctly. upper limit sensor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-254
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9006: DP exit sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing

Object: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
The DP exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation started.

1 (When the original leading end The original is caught by the If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
has any damage) Checking conveying guide or a piece of the conveying path, or a burr in the parts
the paper path paper, etc. such as the guide or the actuator, remove
them. If the rib of the guide is damaged,
replace it.
4 (When the original is skewed) The original is hooked with the Reattach the DP feed-shift guide. If the burrs
Checking the DP feed-shift DP feed-shift guide. are on the original conveying side of the DP
guide feed-shift guide, remove them or replace the
guide.
5 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor does Reattach the DP feed-shift motor and
motor not operate correctly. reconnect the connector.
6 (When the original conveying The conveying capability of Clean the DP reverse roller or the surface of
delays) Checking the DP the DP reverse roller or the DP the DP feed-shift roller. If they are worn out,
reverse roller and the DP feed-shift roller is not enough. replace them.
feed-shift roller
original is folded.
original.
• DP exit sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
• DP reverse motor - DP PWB

11 Checking the DP exit sensor The DP exit sensor does not Execute U244 [Eject]. If the DP exit sensor Maintenanc
replace it.
motor not operate correctly. reverse motor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-255
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9007: DP exit sensor stay jam during the original reversing

The DP exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation started.

them.
4 (When the original is skewed) The original is hooked with the Reattach the DP feed-shift guide. If the burrs
Checking the DP feed-shift DP feed-shift guide. are on the original conveying side of the DP
guide feed-shift guide, remove them or replace the
guide.
5 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor does Reattach the DP feed-shift motor and
motor not operate correctly. reconnect the connector.
6 (When the original conveying The conveying capability of Clean the DP reverse roller or the surface of
delays) Checking the DP the DP reverse roller or the DP the DP feed-shift roller. If they are worn out,
reverse roller and the DP feed-shift roller is not enough. replace them.
feed-shift roller
original is folded.
original.
• DP reverse motor - DP PWB

replace it.
motor not operate correctly. reverse motor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-256
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9008: No original feed from the DP (Original is B6 size or smaller)

Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP
The DP backside timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the original feeding started.

them.
2 (When the original is skewed) The paper conveying Clean the DP feed belt surface. If worn
Checking the DP feed belt performance of the DP feed down, replace it.
belt is not enough.
3 Checking the original The original is not set properly. Insert the original all the way and align the
original width guides to the original.
original is folded.
• DP backside timing sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
• DP feed motor - DP PWB

8 Checking the DP backside The DP backside timing Execute U244 [CIS Head]. If the DP Maintenanc
timing sensor sensor does not operate backside timing sensor does not operate e Mode List
correctly. correctly, reattach it and reconnect the
9 Checking the DP feed motor The DP feed motor does not Execute U243 [Feed Motor]. If the DP feed Maintenanc
operate correctly. motor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-257
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9009: DP original jam caused by the image scanning

The next original is in standby of the secondary paper feed during the image scanning.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove the originals and check the sensors.
activate properly. Then, turn the power switch and the main
3 Checking the DP relay cable The image data transmission Reconnect the DP relay cable.
processing failed due to the
DP relay cable connection
failure.
4 Executing [Memory The memory in the main PWB Execute [Memory Diagnostics] at Adjustment/
Diagnostics] is faulty. [Adjustment/Maintenance] in the System Maintenanc
Menu. e (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
J9010: Document processor open detection

The document processor open is detected during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP The document processor is Check if the document processor is securely
not properly installed, or it is closed, and reinstall it if necessary. Fix or
faulty. replace the DP covers if it is deformed.
• DP opening/closing sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Open]. If the DP opening/ Maintenanc
closing sensor sensor does not operate closing sensor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
properly. reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-258
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9011: DP top cover open detection

The DP top cover open is detected during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover is faulty. Check if the DP top cover is securely closed,
and reattach it if necessary. Fix or replace it if
it is deformed.
• DP top cover sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
3 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover sensor does Execute U244 [Cover Open]. If the DP top Maintenanc
sensor not operate correctly. cover sensor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-259
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9020: Original skew jam

Object: Double feed detection DP
The DP double feed sensor does not turn on when passing the specified time after the DP feed sensor turns on.

original is folded.
2 Checking the original The original curls downward or Correct or replace the original.
waves. If the original cannot be replaced, relocate
the original leading end and trailing end.
4 Checking the original The original is stapled or Remove the staple.Remove foreign objects
foreign objects adhere to it. on the original.
If the foreign objects cannot be removed
completely, remove the original with the
foreign objects.
5 (When the original is skewed) The paper conveying force of Clean the DP feed belt surface.
Checking the DP feed belt the DP feed belt is not If worn down, replace it.
enough.
6 (When the original is skewed) The original width guides is Align the original width guides to the original
Relocating the original width not aligned to the original size. size.Reattach the DP feed guide.
guides If there are burrs, etc. on the paper
conveying surface of the DP feed guide,
remove them.
7 (When the original is skewed) The original is caught up by Clean the DP double feed sensors Service
Checking the DP feed belt the DP feed guide. (transmitter) and (receiver), reattach them, Manual -
and reconnect the connectors. Section 8
Replace it if not repaired. 'PWBs'
8 Checking the DF double feed The DF double feed sensor Reinsert the connectors on the PF main Maintenanc
sensor does not operate properly. PWB. e Mode List
Then, if the wire is pinched up or damaged,
fix or replace it.
Replace DP main PWB if not repaired.
9 Checking DP main PWB The connector is not properly Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
connected. and
Or the wire or PWB is faulty. reattaching
the DF PWB
7-260
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9030: Original double feed jam

Object: Double feed detection DP
Turning on the DP original double feed sensor was detected.

1 Checking the original Sticky originals are used. Fan the originals and load them.
2 Checking the original Original out of specification is Explain users to use the original within the
used as below. specifications.
1. Overlaid original
2. Multi-layer original like
Japanese paper
3. Cut and paste original
3 Executing U460 Misdetection occurs Execute U460 [DP] > [Conveying Sensor] >
depending on original type if [Execute] (Calibration)
installed at high altitude with
low atmospheric pressure.
4 Checking the DF double feed The DF double feed sensor Clean the DP double feed sensors
sensor does not operate properly. (transmitter) and (receiver), reattach them,
and reconnect the connectors.
5 Checking DP main PWB The connector is not properly Reinsert the connectors on the PF main Detaching
connected. PWB. and
Or the wire or PWB is faulty. Then, if the wire is pinched up or damaged, reattaching
fix or replace it. the DF PWB
Replace DP main PWB if not repaired.
7-261
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9110: DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam

The DP feed sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.

original is folded.
original.
5 (Except for the dual scan DP) The paper separation force of Clean the DP reverse roller surface. If worn
Checking the DP reverse roller the DP reverse roller is down, replace it.
insufficient.
6 Checking the DP reverse The DP reverse cover comes Reattach the DP reverse cover.
cover off.
7 (When the original is skewed) Conveying capability of the DP Clean the DP feed roller or the surface of the Detaching
Checking the DP feed roller or feed roller or DP feed belt is DP feed belt. If they are worn out, replace and
the DP feed belt not enough. them. reattaching
the DP
Pickup
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
9 (When the original is skewed) The original is hooked with the Reattach the DP feed guide. If the burrs are
Checking the DP feed belt DP feed guide. on the original conveying side of the DP feed
guide, remove them or replace the DP feed
guide.
• DP feed sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
the mechanically reversed DP connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
with the DP feed roller wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• DP feed clutch - DP PWB 'PWBs'
12 Checking the DP feed sensor The DP feed sensor is dirty, is Clean and reattach the DP feed sensor, then
not properly attached, is not reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
properly connected, or it is replace it.
faulty.
13 Checking the DP feed clutch The rotation of the DP feed Execute U243 [Feed Clutch]. If the DP feed Maintenanc
for the mechanically reversed roller does not stop while the clutch does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
DP with the DP feed roller DP feed clutch remains and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
engaged. replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-262
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9200: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Mechanically reversed DP
The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned on.

them.
the DP
Pickup
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
4 (When the original is skewed) The original is hooked with the Reattach the DP conveying guide. If there is
Checking the DP conveying DP conveying guide. a burr on the conveying surface of the DP
guide conveying guide, remove or replace it.
5 (When the original conveying The paper conveying Clean the DP conveying roller surface. If
delays) Checking the DP performance of the DP worn down, replace it.
conveying roller conveying roller is insufficient.
6 (When the original conveying The DP top cover is deformed. Check if the DP top cover is securely closed.
delays) Checking the DP top If it cannot be closed due to the deformation,
cover replace it.
original is folded.
waves. to replace, switch the leading edge and the
trailing edge of paper, and reset. Or, when
scanning duplex, flip paper upside down and
reset them.
original.

sensor does not operate correctly. sensor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
motor not operate correctly. conveying motor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-263
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9210: DP registration sensor stay jam

The DP registration sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned on.

them.
belt is not enough.
cover replace it.
original is folded.
reset them.
original.

sensor does not operate correctly. sensor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
7-264
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-265
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9300: DPCIS non-arrival jam

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned on.

them.
belt is not enough.
cover replace it.
original is folded.
reset them.
original.

and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-266
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9310: DP backside timing sensor stay jam

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned off.

them.
belt is not enough.
cover replace it.
original is folded.
reset them.
original.

and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-267
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9400: DP timing sensor non-arrival jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP registration
sensor turned on.

them.
the DP
Pickup
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
cover replace it.
original is folded.
reset them.
original.
• DP timing sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'

12 Checking the DP timing DP timing sensor does not Execute U244 [Timing]. If the DP timing Maintenanc
sensor operate correctly. sensor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-268
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9410: DP timing sensor stay jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP registration
sensor turned off.

them.
the DP
Pickup
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
cover replace it.
original is folded.
reset them.
original.
• DP timing sensor - DP PWB 'PWBs'

13 Checking the DP timing DP timing sensor does not Execute U244 [Timing]. If the DP timing Maintenanc
sensor operate correctly. sensor does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
replace it.
7-269
[CONFIDENTIAL]

and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-270
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9600: DP exit sensor non-arrival jam

The DP exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.

them.
4 (When the original conveying The height of the DP hinges is Adjust the height of the DP hinges.
delays in the dual scan DP) improper.
Adjusting the height of the DP
hinges
5 (When the original conveying The opening/closing operation Check if the document processor is securely
delays) Checking the opening/ of the document processor is closed. If it cannot be closed due to the DP
closing motion of the faulty. frame deformation, replace the document
document processor processor.
original is folded.
reset them.
original.

replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-271
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9610: DP exit sensor stay jam

The DP exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned off.

them.
3 (When the original conveying The paper conveying force of Clean the DP exit roller surface. If worn
delays) Checking the DP exit the DP exit roller is insufficient. down, replace it.
roller
4 (When the original conveying The height of the DP hinges is Adjust the height of the DP hinges.
delays in the dual scan DP) improper.
Adjusting the height of the DP
hinges
5 (When the original conveying The opening/closing operation Check if the document processor is securely
delays) Checking the opening/ of the document processor is closed. If it cannot be closed due to the DP
closing motion of the faulty. frame deformation, replace the document
document processor processor.
original is folded.
reset them.
original.

replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-272
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Other Feeding/Conveying Failures

No. Contents Condition
(1) Paper creases (Fuser factor)
(2) Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor)
(3) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in When feeding LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4
the main unit with the punch unit for the inner (except the large capacity feeder), duplex section or the MP tray,
finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of the paper the corners of paper leading edge is caught by the PH cutter
leading edge being caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit and the dog-ear occurs
receiving holes
(4) Dog-ear When feeding from the large capacity feeder, the dog-ear occurs at
the primary feeding due to the downward curl of paper.
7-273
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(4-1)Paper creases (Fuser factor)
Condition: The image is printed on the crease section. (Fuser factor)
1 Checking the paper Paper is curled caused by the Flip paper upside down and reset. Or,
moisture absorption. Or, paper replace with new paper which is unopened
leading edge is waving. paper.
2 Clean the rear transfer guide The surrounding area of the Clean the rear transfer guide, the discharge Cleaning the
and the discharge needle rear transfer guide is dirty with needle, the discharge sheet and paper Secondary
the toner, paper dust, etc.. conveying path. Transfer /
Separation
Section
3 (When the paper is skewed) Paper is caught in the rear If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
Checking the rear transfer transfer guide, discharge the conveying path, or the foreign objects, a
guide and the discharge needle, a piece of paper, etc.. burr are on the rear transfer guide, the
needle. discharge needle, remove or replace them. If
the guide materials are dropped off, repair or
replace them.
4 (When the paper creases Under the condition of Clean the fuser exit guide and clear the
occur at the center of the condensation in the fuser exit condensation. After that, replace with new
paper leading edge in case of guide, curled paper due to paper which is unopened paper.
feeding the duplex 2nd page) moisture absorption is used (it
Checking the use environment is caught in the dent located at
the center of the fuser exit
guide as there is no stiffness
on paper.)
5 (If occurring under a specific The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System Cassette /
condition) Changing the paper settings (media type, Menu. MP Tray
setting paper size) do not match. Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
6 (When occurring under a Large size printing after Change the setting of the fuser temperature Maintenanc
specific condition that the continuous small size printing, back to the default condition and check . e Mode List
fuser temperature of before long standby setting after (after open the right conveying section and
and after becomes non- printing drive is done leave it open to decrease the fuser
uniform) Changing the setting temperature.)
7 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in a damp Instruct the user to store paper tightly sealed Installing the
place place. in the location where the humidity is low. Or, optional
install the cassette heater. equipment
(Cassette
Heater)
8 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller Clean the secondary transfer roller. If the Detaching
transfer roller is dirty with the toner, paper secondary transfer roller is worn out, replace and
dust, etc.. Or, it is worn out. it. reattaching
the
Secondary
Transfer
Roller
9 Replacing the fuser unit Paper entrance guide of the Check the pressure balance of both ends of Detaching
fuser unit is deformed. The the fuser unit by checking the nipped and
center of the fuser pressure pressure on the solid image. If the balance is reattaching
roller is worn out. The uneven, replace the fuser unit. the Fuser
pressure spring of back and Unit
front of fuser unit is not
attached properly.
7-274
[CONFIDENTIAL]

10 Replacing the fuser discharger The front and back of paper If the leading edge of the fuser discharge Detaching
needle unit entry guide of the fuser unit needle is dirty with sediments, replace the and
are unevenly charged and fuser discharge needle unit. reattaching
discharged. the Fuser
Discharger
Needle Unit
(4-2)Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor)

Condition: The image is not printed on the crease section. (Registration, transfer factor)
1 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
paper. adhere from the cassette.
3 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (conveying unit) once,
right cover closed. and close it firmly.
4 (When the paper is being The set position of the paper Reset the paper width guide or the MP paper
conveyed obliquely) Resetting width guides / MP paper width width guide matches to paper size. Or, check
the paper width guide or MP guides is mismatched with the set position of the support guide. (Excluding
paper width guide paper size, and so, the paper the cassette1)
is skewed.
enough. reattaching
the Pickup
Roller and
Feed Roller
6 Checking the conveying Conveying related rollers are Clean the surface of the conveying related
rollers not attached properly. Or, the rollers and the pulleys (vertical conveying,
conveying capability is not middle, registration) and reattach.
enough due to dirty.
7 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance is not good Check the pressure of the conveying related
Checking the pressure spring because the pressure spring rollers and the pulleys, and if the spring or
of front and back of the roller the bearings are dropped off, reattach them.
are not attached properly. If they are deformed or worn out, replace
them.
8 (When the paper skew occurs) Paper is caught at the If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
Checking the paper path conveying guide, piece of the conveying path, or the foreign objects, a
paper, etc.. burr are on the conveying surface of the
conveying guide, remove or replace them. If
the sheet guide material has a damage,
deformation, floating, repair or replace them.
9 Cleaning the conveying guide The middle roller guide, Clean the middle roller guide and conveying
transfer forwarding guide are surface of the transfer forwarding guide.
dirty with the toner, paper dust,
etc..
10 Checking the conveying guide The middle roller guide, Reattach the middle roller guide and the
transfer forwarding guide are transfer forwarding guide. If they are faulty,
not attached properly. Or, they replace them.
are faulty.
7-275
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-3)(When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit with the punch unit for the
inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of the paper leading edge being caught by the PH
cutter receiving holes
Condition: When feeding LetterR or Legal on the machine with the punch unit installed for the inner
finisher. (Inch specification only)
When feeding LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder), duplex section or the MP
tray, the corners of paper leading edge is caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit and the dog-ear
occurs

1 Reloading the paper The paper is curled upward. Reload paper upside down.
And so, it is easy to be caught
by the PH cutter receiving
hole.
2 Relocating the paper width Paper skew occurs since there Relocate the paper width guides so that
guides is a gap between the paper there is no gap between them to the paper
width guides and the paper edges.
edges.
3 Explanation for user (request The corners of the paper Request user to feed paper as "Letter" not
to change from "LetterR" to leading edge of LetterR are but "LetterR". If user accepts, relocate the
"Letter") close to the PH cutter paper width guides to "Letter" position and
receiving holes of the punch load the paper. Then, explain users who
unit. Consequently, the need to change "Orientation" in Quick Print
corners are caught by the on the printer drive so that the orientation is
holes if each center position is rotated to 90 degrees C.
not adjusted.
4 Adjusting the center positions The center positions of the Adjust each center position by the following Adjusting
of the punch unit and the punch unit and the paper width procedures.@(Refer to the reference the center
paper width guides guides are mismatched, and document" for the details.)@1. Load paper positions of
so, the corners of the paper on the MP tray. Then, set the punch holes the punch
leading edge is caught by the and execute the test print to align the unit and the
PH cutter receiving holes of position of the punch unit.@2. Feed paper paper width
the punch unit. from each paper source except the MP tray guides
to check if the forward and backward punch
holes are not shifted.@3. If the forward and
backward punch holes are shifted aside in
above 2, change the center position of the
paper width guides to adjust. After changing
the center position, execute U034 [LSU Out
Left] and adjust the center line except for
"MPT".
(4-4)Dog-ear
When feeding from the large capacity feeder, the dog-ear occurs at the primary feeding due to the downward curl of
paper.

1 Reloading the paper Paper is caught up at the PF Reload paper upside down.
frame with the downward curl.
2 Affixing the seal materials The leading edge corner In order to relieve the entry angle to the Procedures
section of paper enters into location on the PF frame where paper hits, for affixing
the gap between the PF lift affix the seal material (PARTS SHEET DECK PARTS
plate and the PF frame, and FEED SET SP:303RC9408_) to the PF SHEET
hits the vertical surface of the frame. DECK
PF frame. FEED SET
7-276
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7 - 3 Self Diagnostic
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
CAUTION
Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the power
switch off and unplug the machine from power.
Even if the power switch of the main unit is turned off and the power cord is unplugged, the electric charge may
remain in the capacitors on the low voltage PWB, so that please be careful not to touch the mounted parts to
protect you from electric shock.
(1)Self diagnostic error codes

(1-1)Error codes list
Error code/ Contents Note

C0030: FAX PWB system error (page 7-282)
C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error (page 7-282)
C0080: Optional Printing System device error (page 7-282)
C0100: Backup memory device error (page 7-283)
C0120: MAC address data error (page 7-283)
C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error (page 7-283)
C0150: Engine EEPROM reading / writing error (page 7-284)
C0160: EEPROM data error (page 7-285)
C0170: Charger count error (page 7-286)
C0180: Machine serial number mismatch (page 7-287)
C0350: Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
(page 7-288)
C0361: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC (page 7-288)
C0362: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC (page 7-289)
C0640: Hard Disk error (page 7-289)
C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error (page 7-290)
C0660: Hard Disk encryption key error (page 7-290)
C0670: Hard Disk overwriting error (page 7-291)
C0680: SSD error (page 7-291)
C0800: Image processing error (page 7-292)
C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error (page 7-292)
C0840: RTC error ('Time for maintenance T' appears) (page 7-293)
C0850: TPM security chip error (page 7-293)
C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error (page 7-294)
C0920: FAX file system error (page 7-294)
C0950: FAX job stay error (page 7-294)
C0980: 24V power interruption detection (page 7-295)
C1000: MP lift motor error (page 7-295)
C1010: Lift motor 1 error (page 7-297)
C1020: Lift motor 2 error (page 7-298)
C1030: PF lift motor 1 error (Paper Feeder) (page 7-299)
7-277
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C1040: PF lift motor 2 error (Paper Feeder) (page 7-300)
C1140: PF lift motor error (Side feeder) (page 7-301)
C1750: AK unit type mismatch error (page 7-301)
C1800: Paper Feeder communication error (page 7-302)
C1820: Side feeder communication error (page 7-303)
C1900: Paper Feeder EEPROM error (page 7-304)
C1920: Side feeder EEPROM error (page 7-305)
C1950: Primary transfer unit EEPROM error (page 7-306)
C2102: Developer motor CY error (page 7-307)
C2103: Developer motor CMY error / Developer motor M error (page 7-308)
C2201: Drum motor K steady-state error (page 7-309)
C2203: Drum motor CMY steady-state error (page 7-310)
C2300: Fuser motor error (page 7-311)
C2500: Feed motor error (page 7-312)
C2600: PF feed motor error (page 7-313)
C2700: Primary / secondary transfer release error (page 7-314)
C2760: Developer K/Transfer belt motor startup error (page 7-315)
C2810: Waste toner motor error (page 7-316)
C2840: Belt cleaning motor error (page 7-317)
C3100: Carriage error (page 7-318)
C3200: LED lamp startup error (page 7-319)
C3210: CIS lamp error (page 7-320)
C3300: CCD AGC error (page 7-321)
C3310: CIS AGC error (page 7-322)
C3500: Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC (page 7-322)
C3600: Scanner sequence error (page 7-322)
C3800: AFE error (page 7-323)
C4001: Polygon motor synchronization error (page 7-323)
C4011: Polygon motor steady-state error (page 7-324)
C4101: BD initialization error (page 7-324)
C4201: BD steady-state error (page 7-325)
C4600: LSU cleaning motor error (page 7-325)
C4701: VIDEO ASIC device error 1 (page 7-326)
C4702: VIDEO ASIC device error 2 (page 7-326)
C4801: LSU type mismatch error (page 7-326)
C5101: Main high voltage error K (page 7-327)
C5102: Main high voltage error C (page 7-328)
C5103: Main high voltage error M (page 7-329)
C5104: Main high voltage error Y (page 7-330)
C5131: Primary transfer high voltage error K (page 7-331)
C5132: Primary transfer high voltage error C (page 7-333)
C5133: Primary transfer high voltage error M (page 7-335)
C5134: Primary transfer high voltage error Y (page 7-337)
C6000: IH heating error 1 (page 7-339)
C6020: Center thermistor high temperature error (page 7-340)
C6030: Center thermistor broken (page 7-341)
C6050: Center thermistor low temperature error (page 7-342)
7-278
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C6120: Press thermistor high temperature error (page 7-343)
C6130: Press thermistor broken (page 7-344)
C6200: IH heating error 2 (page 7-345)
C6220: Edge thermistor high temperature error (page 7-346)
C6230: Edge thermistor broken (page 7-347)
C6250: Edge thermistor low temperature error (page 7-348)
C6320: Middle thermistor high temperature error (page 7-349)
C6330: Middle thermistor broken (page 7-350)
C6410: Uninstalled fuser unit (page 7-351)
C6600: Fuser belt rotation error (page 7-352)
C6610: Fuser pressure release sensor error (page 7-353)
C6620: IH core motor rotation error (page 7-354)
C6740: IH PWB high temperature error (IGBT2) (page 7-355)
C6760: Fuser IH input excessive electric current error (page 7-356)
C6770: IH low power error (page 7-357)
C6900: Edge fan motor error (page 7-358)
C6910: Engine firmware unexpected error (page 7-359)
C6920: Exit/IH fan motor error (page 7-359)
C6950: IH PWB communication error (page 7-361)
C6980: Fuser unit EEPROM error (page 7-362)
C6990: Fuser power source destination error (page 7-362)
C7001: Container motor error (page 7-363)
C7101: T/C sensor K error (page 7-364)
C7102: T/C sensor C error (page 7-365)
C7103: T/C sensor M error (page 7-366)
C7104: T/C sensor Y error (page 7-367)
C7200: Inner thermistor broken (developer) (page 7-368)
C7210: Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer) (page 7-369)
C7221: LSU thermistor broken (page 7-369)
C7231: LSU thermistor short-circuited (page 7-371)
C7241: Belt thermistor broken (page 7-371)
C7251: Belt thermistor short-circuited (page 7-372)
C7301: Toner motor K error (page 7-372)
C7302: Toner motor C error (page 7-373)
C7303: Toner motor M error (page 7-373)
C7304: Toner motor Y error (page 7-374)
C7320: Toner container detection connector error (page 7-374)
C7401: Developer unit K type mismatch error (page 7-375)
C7402: Developer unit C type mismatch error (page 7-375)
C7403: Developer unit M type mismatch error (page 7-376)
C7404: Developer unit Y type mismatch error (page 7-376)
C7420: Uninstalled primary transfer unit (page 7-377)
C7470: Toner absorption fan motor error (page 7-377)
C7480: Power source fan motor error (page 7-378)
C7490: Exit fan motor error (page 7-378)
C7601: Front ID sensor error (page 7-379)
C7602: Rear ID sensor error (page 7-380)
7-279
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C7611: Bias calibration read value error (Black) (page 7-381)
C7612: Bias calibration read value error (Cyan) (page 7-383)
C7613: Bias calibration read value error (Magenta) (page 7-385)
C7614: Bias calibration read value error (Yellow) (page 7-387)
C7620: Automatic color registration error (page 7-389)
C7800: Outer thermistor broken (page 7-391)
C7810: Outer thermistor short-circuited (page 7-391)
C7901: Drum unit K EEPROM error (page 7-392)
C7902: Drum unit C EEPROM error (page 7-394)
C7903: Drum unit M EEPROM error (page 7-395)
C7904: Drum unit Y EEPROM error (page 7-396)
C7911: Developer unit K EEPROM error (page 7-397)
C7912: Developer unit C EEPROM error (page 7-398)
C7913: Developer unit M EEPROM error (page 7-399)
C7914: Developer unit Y EEPROM error (page 7-400)
C7941: LSU EEPROM error (page 7-401)
C7942: LSU EEPROM error 2 (page 7-401)
C7970: Weight sensor error (page 7-402)
C7980: Waste toner overflow (Waste toner full sensor error) (page 7-403)
C8000: Finisher incompatibility detection (page 7-403)
C8010: PH motor error 1 (page 7-404)
C8040: Punch shift motor error 1 (page 7-407)
C8050: Punch shift motor error 2 (page 7-408)
C8090: DF paddle motor error (page 7-409)
C8090: Punch unit communication error/Main program error (Punch unit) (page 7-409)
C8100: DF exit release motor error (page 7-410)
C8110: DF shift motor 1 error (page 7-411)
C8120: DF shift motor 2 error (page 7-412)
C8130: DF shift release motor error (page 7-413)
C8140: DF tray motor error 1 (page 7-414)
C8160: DF tray motor error (3) (page 7-419)
C8170: DF side registration motor 1 error 1 (page 7-421)
C8200:DF side registration motor 2 error 2 (page 7-424)
C8210: DF staple motor front/rear error (page 7-425)
C8230: DF staple motor error 1 (page 7-426)
C8250: DF main tray error 4 (page 7-426)
C8260: DF middle motor HP detection error (page 7-427)
C8300: Main program error / BF unit communication error (page 7-427)
7-280
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C8310: BF side registration motor 2 error (page 7-428)
C8320: BF adjustment motor error (page 7-428)
C8330: BF blade motor error (page 7-429)
C8340: BF staple motor error 1 (page 7-429)
C8350: BF side registration motor 1 error (page 7-430)
C8360: BF main motor error (page 7-430)
C8370: BF staple motor error 2 (page 7-431)
C8380: BF eject pressure release motor error (page 7-431)
C8390: BF paddle motor error (page 7-432)
C8400: BF conveying tray motor error (page 7-432)
C8410: PH slide motor error 1 (page 7-433)
C8420: PH slide motor error 2 (page 7-434)
C8430: Main program error / Punch unit communication error (page 7-435)
C8500: Main program error / Mail Box communication error (page 7-435)
C8510: MB conveying motor error 1 (page 7-436)
C8520: MB conveying motor error 2 (page 7-436)
C8600:DF adjusting release motor error (page 7-437)
C8610: DF pull-in guide release motor error (page 7-437)
C8620:DF pull-in pulley pressure release motor error (page 7-438)
C8630: Eject pressure release motor error (page 7-438)
C8640: DF side registration motor 1 error (page 7-439)
C8650: DF side registration motor 2 error (page 7-439)
C8700:DF bundle eject motor 1 error (page 7-440)
C8710:DF bundle eject motor 2 error (page 7-440)
C8720:DF eject paddle motor error (page 7-441)
C8730: DF eject paper trailing edge holding motor error (page 7-441)
C8740: DF eject support guide motor error (page 7-442)
C8800: Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF) (page 7-443)
C8810:DF-SubCPU communication error (page 7-443)
C8900: DF backup error (page 7-444)
C8930: BF unit backup error (page 7-444)
C9000: Main program error / DP communication error (page 7-445)
C9040: DP lift motor ascend error (page 7-445)
C9050: DP lift motor descend error (page 7-446)
C9060: DP EEPROM error (page 7-446)
C9070: DP - SHD communication error (page 7-447)
C9080: LED failure detection (page 7-447)
C9180: DP feed-shift motor error (page 7-448)
C9500: Image processing PWB error (Scanner) (page 7-448)
C9510: Image processing circuit error (DP) (page 7-449)
C9540: Backup data error (page 7-449)
7-281
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Content of Self diagnostic

C0030: FAX PWB system error
The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and the main FAX
operate properly. power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the Installation
FAX PWB, and then turn on the main power Guide
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware. Firmware
Update
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX
Installation
Guide
C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX PWB is Install the FAX PWB for the applicable FAX
installed. model. Installation
Guide
2 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware. Firmware
Update
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
C0080: Optional Printing System device error

Object: Printing System 15 (for 120V, 230V and 240V)
It is not possible to read FPGA version of the Fiery relay PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM does not Turn the power switch and the main power
operate properly. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
power switch and the power switch on.
2 Replacing the Fiery relay PWB Fiery relay PWB for the other Replace Fiery relay PWB which is applicable
models is installed. to the model.
3 Firmware upgrade The version of the main Upgrade the main firmware to the latest Firmware
firmware is not supported for version. Update
the fiery relay PWB.
4 Checking the Fiery relay PWB The connector is not Clean the terminal of the connectors
connected properly. The wire connecting on the Fiery relay PWB and
or the PWB is faulty. reconnect the connector. If the wire is faulty,
repair or replace it. If not resolved, replace
the Fiery relay PWB.
5 Checking the main PWB The connector is not Clean the terminal of the connector (for Fiery
connected properly. The wire relay PWB) on the main PWB and reconnect.
or the PWB is faulty. If it is not improved, replace Fiery relay PWB.
7-282
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0100: Backup memory device error

An abnormal status is output from the flash memory.

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does not Turn the power switch and the main power
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace 'PWBs'
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
C0120: MAC address data error

The MAC address data is incorrect.

2 Checking the MAC address The MAC address is incorrect. Replace the main PWB when the MAC Detaching
address is not indicated on the network and
status page. reattaching
the Main
PWB
C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error

The reading or writing into the flash memory is unavailable.

and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-283
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0150: Engine EEPROM reading / writing error

1. Five times consecutive detection of no response from the device for more than 5ms on reading / writing.
2. Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times.
3. Writing data and reading data does not match 8 consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the engine Turn the power switch and the main power
PWB does not operate switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
properly. power switch and the power switch on.
2 Checking the EEPROM on the The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM on the engine PWB. Detaching
engine PWB attached. and
reattaching
the
EEPROM
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the engine PWB Maintenanc
and execute U169. e Mode List
Next, compare the setting value of the Detaching
maintenance report outputted at U000 in and
advance and the setting value of the reattaching
maintenance report outputted after replacing the Engine
EEPROM, and change the setting value PWB
which are different. (Related maintenance
mode: U053, U100, U101, U106, U140,
U161, U464, U252, U034, U065, U066,
U067)
Finally, execute the following maintenance
mode in the following order.
U119 (for the 35 ppm or faster models) >
U411 > U469 [Auto] > U140 [AC Calib] >
U140 [Calibration] > U412 [Normal Mode]
(for the 35 ppm or faster models) > U464
[Calib] (for the 35 ppm or faster models) >
U410 > U155 [Calibration] (The empty waste
toner box is necessary.)
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-284
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0160: EEPROM data error

The data read from the EEPROM is judged as abnormal.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the engine Turn the power switch and the main power
PWB does not operate switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
properly. power switch and the power switch on.
2 Executing U021 The storage data in the Execute U021. Maintenanc
EEPROM on the engine PWB e Mode List
is faulty.
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the engine PWB Maintenanc
and execute U169. e Mode List
Next, compare the setting value of the Detaching
maintenance report outputted at U000 in and
advance and the setting value of the reattaching
maintenance report outputted after replacing the Engine
EEPROM, and change the setting value PWB
mode: U053, U100, U101, U106, U140,
U161, U464, U252, U034, U065, U066,
U067)
U411 > U469 [Auto] > U140 [AC Calib] >
7-285
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0170: Charger count error

The values in one of the billing counters, life counter or the scanner counter mismatch between the main side and the
engine side.

1 Checking the machine serial The main PWB for the Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and Maintenanc
No. of the main PWB different main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct e Mode List
main PWB if the MAIN No. differs. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
2 Checking the machine serial The EEPROM for the different Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and Maintenanc
No. in the EEPROM on the main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct e Mode List
engine PWB EEPROM on the engine PWB if the ENGINE Detaching
machine serial No. differs. and
reattaching
the
EEPROM
3 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine serial No. differs at Maintenanc
U004, replace the main PWB and execute e Mode List
U004. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
4 Checking the EEPROM on the The EEPROM is faulty. If the machine serial number in the engine Maintenanc
engine PWB PWB is different at U004, reattach the e Mode List
EEPROM on the engine PWB. If not Detaching
repairing, replace the EEPROM and execute and
U169. reattaching
Next, compare the setting value of the the Engine
maintenance report outputted at U000 in PWB
advance and the setting value of the
maintenance report outputted after replacing
EEPROM, and change the setting value
mode: U053, U100, U101, U106, U140,
U161, U464, U252, U034, U065, U066,
U067)
U411 > U469 [Auto] > U140 [AC Calib] >
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-286
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0180: Machine serial number mismatch

The machine serial Nos. in the main PWB and the EEPROM on the engine PWB mismatch when turning the power on.

1 Checking the machine serial The main PWB for the Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and Maintenanc
No. of the main PWB different main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct e Mode List
main PWB if the MAIN No. differs. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
2 Checking the machine serial The EEPROM for the different Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and Maintenanc
No. in the EEPROM on the main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct e Mode List
engine PWB EEPROM on the engine PWB if the ENGINE Detaching
machine serial No. differs. and
reattaching
the
EEPROM
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine serial No. differs at Maintenanc
U004, replace the main PWB and execute e Mode List
U004. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
4 Checking the EEPROM on the The EEPROM is faulty. If the machine serial number in the engine Maintenanc
engine PWB PWB is different at U004, reattach the e Mode List
EEPROM on the engine PWB. If not Detaching
repairing, replace the EEPROM and execute and
U169. reattaching
Next, compare the setting value of the the Engine
maintenance report outputted at U000 in PWB
advance and the setting value of the
maintenance report outputted after replacing
EEPROM, and change the setting value
mode: U053, U100, U101, U106, U140,
U161, U464, U252, U034, U065, U066,
U067)
U411 > U469 [Auto] > U140 [AC Calib] >
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-287
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0350: Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
Since NACK was received during the I2C communication, the retry was repeated 5 times and the initial command was
transmitted, and then the retry was repeated 5 times again. After that, NACK was also received.

1 Resetting the main power The operation of the operation Turn the power switch and the main power
panel main PWB is faulty. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
• Operation panel main PWB - Main PWB 'PWBs'
• Operation panel main PWB - NFC PWB

3 Replacing the operation panel The operation panel main Replace the panel main PWB. Detaching
main PWB PWB is faulty. and
reattaching
the
Operation
Panel Main
PWB
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
5 Replacing the NFC PWB The NFC PWB is faulty. Replace the NFC PWB.
C0361: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn the power switch and the main power
• Feed drive PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-288
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0362: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn the power switch and the main power
• Feed image PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C0640: Hard Disk error

The HDD cannot be accessed properly.

1 Releasing the partial operation The partial operation is Execute resetting the partial operation at Maintenanc
executed. U906. e Mode List
2 (For the main unit without the When installing the 8GB HDD Replace with the correct 32GB SSD. Detaching
HDD) Replacing the SSD mistakenly, it tries to access and
the HDD. At that time, the reattaching
error appears if the HDD is not the SSD
installed in the main units .
3 (When abnormal sounds The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the abnormal Detaching
occur) Replacing the HDD sounds are from the HDD. and
reattaching
the HDD
4 Checking the connection The connector is not Reconnect the below SATA cable and Service
connected properly. The SATA connector of the wire. If there is no continuity, Manual -
cable or the wire is faulty. replace SATA cable or the wire. Section 8
• HDD - main PWB 'PWBs'
5 Initializing the HDD The HDD storage data is Execute U024 [FULL] (HDD Format). Maintenanc
faulty. e Mode List
and
reattaching
the HDD
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-289
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error

The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Checking the SSD The SSD (FAX image storage) When installing the SSD used once, replace Detaching
already used in other unit is with the correct SSD. and
the SSD
2 Executing U671 The SSD (FAX image storage) When installing the SSD used once, execute Maintenanc
already used in other unit is U671 [FAX Data CLEAR]. e Mode List
reused without executing
U671.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The SSD (FAX image storage) Be sure to install the SSD to the connector Detaching
is not properly installed. on the main PWB. and
reattaching
the SSD
4 Replacing the SSD The SSD (FAX image storage) Replace with the new SSD. Detaching
is faulty. and
reattaching
the SSD
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
C0660: Hard Disk encryption key error

1. The encrypted password entered when replacing the main PWB is not correct.
2. Install SSD which is used in the other machine.

1 (When the issue occurs after The encryption key after Execute U004 when this issue occurs after Maintenanc
replacing the main PWB) replacing the main PWB is replacing the main PWB. e Mode List
Executing U004 faulty.
2 Replacing the HDD (abnormal The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the abnormal Detaching
sounds) sounds are from the HDD. and
reattaching
the HDD
faulty. e Mode List
and
reattaching
the HDD
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-290
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0670: Hard Disk overwriting error

The area that cannot be properly overwritten exists in a part of the HDD.

1 Replacing the HDD (abnormal The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the abnormal Detaching
sounds) sounds are from the HDD. and
reattaching
the HDD
faulty. e Mode List
and
reattaching
the HDD
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
C0680: SSD error

The SSD cannot be accessed, or the error occurs when accessing to the SSD.

1 Checking the SSD (if lit after An SSD out of specification is Install the SSD matching the memory
replacing the SSD) installed. capacity specification.
2 Resetting the main power The SSD is faulty. Turn the power switch and the main power
switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
3 Reinstalling the SSD The connection with the main Reinstall the SSD on the main PWB. Detaching
PWB is faulty. and
reattaching
the SSD
4 Initializing the SSD The data stored in the SSD is Retrieve the SSD storage data at U026, and Maintenanc
faulty. then initialize the SSD at U024. e Mode List
5 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Retrieve the SSD storage data at U026, and Maintenanc
then replace the SSD. e Mode List
Detaching
and
reattaching
the SSD
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-291
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0800: Image processing error

The print sequence jam (J010x) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the image data The image data is faulty. When this issue occurs only when handling
the certain image data, check if the image
data is faulty.
2 Checking the situation The printing operation of the Acquire the job's log if the phenomenon can Checking
certain file is faulty. be reproduced by specifying the job when Job & Job
the error was detected. Operation
(Operation
Guide -
Section 7)
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Update
2 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not Turn off the power switch and the main FAX
connected properly. power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the Installation
3 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB is Execute U600 to initialize the FAX. Maintenanc
faulty. e Mode List
Installation
Guide
7-292
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0840: RTC error ('Time for maintenance T' appears)

<Check at the start up>
• Setting value of RTC has returned to the past.
• The power has not turned on more than 5 years.
• Setting value of RTC is older than 00:01 January 1st, 2000.
<Check regularly (each 5 minutes) after start up>
• Setting value of RTC has returned to the past which is older than the time previously checked. After detecting C0840,
reset the main power to go into disable function and [Time for Maintenance] is displayed.

1 Executing U906 The backup battery on the Execute U906 and reset the display Maintenanc
main PWB is faulty, and so, [Maintenance T]. After that, set the date and e Mode List
the RTC settings are erased time (RTC) through System menu. (It is Date/Timer/
after unplugging the power necessary to perform this process every time Energy
cord. when unplug/plug the power cord.) Saver
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
2 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty, or the The user call regarding C0840 is frequent Detaching
backup battery runs out. even if performing the previous treatment, and
replace the main PWB. reattaching
the Main
PWB
C0850: TPM security chip error

TPM is not accessible or an access error occurs after installing the security kit

1 Reset the main power Main PWB does not operate Turn the power switch and main power
properly switch off. Turn the power switch and main
power switch on after passing 5s
2 Upgrading the firmware The firmware version is not Upgrade the firmware to the latest version
the latest
3 Replacing main PWB Main PWB is faulty Replace main PWB
7-293
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data is
transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn the power switch and the main power FAX
operate properly. switch off. After 5s passes, reattach the FAX Installation
PWB and turn the main power switch and the Guide
power switch on.
faulty. e Mode List
3 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest Firmware
version. Update
Installation
Guide
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD is Execute U024 [SSD Format]. Maintenanc
faulty. e Mode List
C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the FAX. Maintenanc
incorrect e Mode List
3 Reconnecting the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not Reinstall FAX PWB to Main PWB. FAX
connected properly. Installation
Guide
Update
Installation
Guide
C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

1 Resetting the main power Print processing is not Turn the power switch and the main power
properly executed. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the main firmware to the latest Firmware
properly activate. version. Update
7-294
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0980: 24V power interruption detection

1. Detected 24 V power off signal for 1s continuously.
2. Another service call occurred when passing 100ms after detecting 24V power failure detection signal, and then 24
power supply was recovered.

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn the power switch and the main power
• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
3 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. When the +24V generation from the low Detaching
PWB voltage PWB is not stable, and it lowers, and
replace the low voltage PWB. reattaching
the Low
Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C1000: MP lift motor error

1. When the MP lift motor rotates in the descending direction, the MP position sensor does not turn on within 1850ms.
2. When the MP lift motor rotates in the ascending direction, the MP position sensor does not turn off within 1600ms.

1 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate does not Repair or replace the MP lift plate on the MP
operate properly. tray when it does not move vertically.
3 Checking the lift lever The lift lever is not properly Check if the lift lever is vertically shifted by
attached. the lift motor cam, or if it has the excessive
load. Then, reattach the MP tray. Then,
replace the MP tray if it is not fixed.
4 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the MP Check if the MP lift plate lift-up drive gears
lift plate does not rotate rotate smoothly or have no excessive load.
properly. And apply the grease (EM-50LP, Part no.:
7BG010009H) to the sliding section and
repair the related parts so that they can
rotate smoothly.
• Main unit - Paper conveying unit 'PWBs'
• MP position sensor - Relay connector -

Feed drive PWB
6 Replacing the MP lift motor The MP lift motor does not Replace the MP lift motor.
operate properly.
7 Checking the MP position The MP position sensor is not Reattach MP position sensor.
sensor attached properly.
7-295
[CONFIDENTIAL]

8 Replacing the MP position The MP position sensor is Replace MP position sensor.
sensor faulty.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-296
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1010: Lift motor 1 error

Five times consecutive detection of any one of the below condition.
1. Turning on of lift upper limit sensor is not detected even 16s passed after inserting cassette 1.
2. After turning on lift motor 1, lock signal does not release for 300ms.
3. After detecting lift upper limit sensor 1 OFF during printing, lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on even passing 1s
from ascending control.

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not operate Repair or replace the lift plate when it does
properly. not move vertically.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the lift Check if the lift plate lift-up drive gears rotate
plate does not rotate properly. smoothly or have no excessive load. And
apply the grease (EM-50LP, Part no.:
rotate smoothly.
• Lift motor 1 - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'

4 Checking lift motor 1 Lift motor 1 is faulty. Check the operation of lift motor 1, and Detaching
replace it if necessary. and
reattaching
the Lift
Motor
• Lift upper limit sensor 1 - Feed drive 'PWBs'
PWB
6 Checking lift sensor 1 Lift upper limit sensor 1 is not Reattach lift upper limit sensor 1. Replace it if
properly attached, or it is it is not fixed.
faulty.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-297
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1020: Lift motor 2 error

Five times consecutive detection of any one of the below condition.
1. Turning on of lift upper limit sensor 2 is not detected even 16s passed after inserting cassette 2.
2. After turning on lift motor 2, lock signal does not release for 300ms.
3. After detecting lift upper limit sensor 2 OFF during printing, lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on even passing 1s
from ascending control.

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not operate Repair or replace the lift plate when it does
properly. not move vertically.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the lift Check if the lift plate lift-up drive gears rotate
plate does not rotate properly. smoothly or have no excessive load. And
rotate smoothly.
• Lift motor 2 - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'

4 Checking lift motor 2 Lift motor 2 is faulty. Check the operation of lift motor 2, and Detaching
replace it if necessary. and
reattaching
the Lift
Motor
• Lift upper limit sensor 2 - Feed drive 'PWBs'
PWB
6 Checking lift sensor 2 Lift upper limit sensor 2 is not Reattach lift upper limit sensor 2. Then,
properly attached, or it is replace it if it is not fixed.
faulty.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-298
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1030: PF lift motor 1 error (Paper Feeder)

[PF-7100 (Paper Feeder)]
1. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 16s since cassette 3 was inserted.
2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of PF lift motor 1.
3. Since PF lift sensor 1 turned off during printing, PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 1s from the
ascend control.
[PF-7110 (Large Capacity Feeder)]
1. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 24s since cassette 3 was inserted.
2. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 3s from the ascend control when starting printing.

1 Checking the PF lift plate The PF lift plate does not Repair or replace the PF lift plate when it
operate properly. does not move vertically.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the PF Check if the PF lift plate lift-up drive gears
rotate smoothly.
• PF lift motor 1 - PF PWB 'PWBs'
4 Checking PF lift motor 1 PF lift motor 1 is faulty. Replace PF lift motor 1.

• PF lift upper limit sensor 1 - PF PWB 'PWBs'
6 Checking PF lift sensor 1 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 is Reattach PF lift upper limit sensor 1. Then,
not properly attached, or it is replace it if it is not fixed.
faulty.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
7-299
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1040: PF lift motor 2 error (Paper Feeder)

[PF-7100 (Paper Feeder)]
1. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 16s since cassette 4 is inserted.
2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of PF lift motor 2.
3. Since PF lift sensor 2 turned off during printing, PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 1s from the
ascend control.
[PF-7110 (Large Capacity Feeder)]
1. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 24s since cassette 4 is inserted.
2. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 3s from the ascend control when starting printing.

rotate smoothly.
• PF lift motor 2 - PF PWB 'PWBs'
4 Replacing PF lift motor 2 PF lift motor 2 is faulty. Replace PF lift motor 2.

• PF lift upper limit sensor 2 - PF PWB 'PWBs'
6 Checking PF lift sensor 2 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 is Reattach PF lift upper limit sensor 2. Then,
not properly attached, or it is replace it if it is not fixed.
faulty.
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
7-300
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1140: PF lift motor error (Side feeder)

Object: Side feeder
1. The PF lift upper limit sensor does not turn on even 30s passed after inserting cassette 5.
2. The lock signal is detected for 200ms continuously during the PF lift motor operation.
3. When start printing, the PF lift upper limit sensor does not detect on even passing 2s from ascending control.

rotate smoothly.
• PF lift motor - PF PWB 'PWBs'
4 Checking the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. Replace the PF lift motor.
• PF lift upper limit sensor - PF PWB 'PWBs'
6 Checking the PF lift upper limit The PF lift upper limit sensor Reattach the PF lift upper limit sensor. Then,
sensor is not properly attached, or it is replace it if it is not fixed.
faulty.
7 Checking the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
C1750: AK unit type mismatch error

Connection of the AK for other model is detected when checking the DF installation status

1 Checking AK unit AK-7100 is installed. Install AK=7110.
7-301
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1800: Paper Feeder communication error

1. Communication error was detected 10 times continuously.
2. The ready signal is not notified from the paper feeder or the large capacity feeder within 6s after communication
starts.

1 Checking the connection The cable is not properly Reconnect the cable into the main unit.
connected to the main unit.
• PF PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-302
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1820: Side feeder communication error

Object: Side feeder
1. Communication error was detected 10 times continuously.
2. The ready signal is not notified from the side feeder within 6s after communication starts.

1 Checking the connection It is not properly connected to Reconnect to the main unit.
the main unit.
• PF PWB - PF PWB (Side feeder) 'Wiring
diagram
(Options
connection)'
4 Checking the PF PWB (side The PF PWB (side feeder) is Replace PF PWB (side feeder). Detaching
feeder) faulty. and
reattaching
the PF PWB
(Side
feeder)
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-303
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1900: Paper Feeder EEPROM error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.

1 Reconnecting the paper It is not properly connected to Reinstall the paper feeder to the main unit. PF-7100
feeder the main unit. Installation
Guide
PF-7110
Installation
Guide
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Reconnect the connector of the wire Service
connected properly, or the between the engine PWB and the PF PWB. Manual -
wire is faulty. If the wire is faulty, repair or replace it. If not Section 8
resolved, replace the PF PWB. 'PWBs'
Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-304
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1920: Side feeder EEPROM error

Object: Side feeder
For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.

1 Reconnecting the side feeder It is not properly connected to Reinstall the side feeder to the main unit. PF-7120
the main unit. Installation
Guide
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Reconnect the connector of the wire Service
connected properly, or the between the engine PWB and the PF PWB Manual -
wire is faulty. (side feeder). If the wire is faulty, repair or Section 9
replace it. If not resolved, replace the PF 'Wiring
PWB. diagram
(Options
connection)'
3 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace PF PWB (side feeder). Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
(Side
feeder)
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-305
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1950: Primary transfer unit EEPROM error


1 Reinstalling the primary The primary transfer unit is not Reinstall the primary transfer unit. Detaching
transfer unit properly installed. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
• Primary transfer unit - Transfer PWB 'PWBs'
• Transfer PWB - Feed image PWB
3 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit faulty. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-306
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2102: Developer motor CY error

Object: 35ppm or faster models
1. After the developer motor CY drive starts, the ready signal does not reach to L level even passing 2s.
2. After the developer motor CY stabilizes, the ready signal shows H level for 2s continuously.

1 Checking the developer drive The developer drive section is Replace the developer unit drive gear if it is
section faulty. faulty.
2 Checking the developer roller The developer roller is faulty. Check if the developer roller rotates, and Detaching
replace the developer unit if not rotating. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
3 Checking the drive parts The drive from the developer Execute U030 [DLP(CMY)] to check the Maintenanc
motor is not transmitted developer motor CY operation. Check if the e Mode List
properly. drive gears rotate and have no excessive
load, and apply the grease (EM-LP, Part no:
rotate smoothly.
• Developer motor CY - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'

5 Checking the developer motor The developer motor is faulty. Reattach developer motor CY. If not
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-307
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2103: Developer motor CMY error / Developer motor M error

Remarks: Developing motor CMY: 32/25ppm models, Developing motor M: 35ppm or faster models
1. After the developer motor CMY drive or the developer motor M drive start, the ready signal does not reach to L level
even passing 2s.
2. After the developer motor CMY or the developer motor M stabilize, the ready signal shows H level for 2s continuously.

1 Checking the developer drive The developer drive section is Replace the developer unit drive gear if it is
section faulty. faulty.
2 Checking the developer roller The developer roller is faulty. Check if the developer roller rotates, and Detaching
replace the developer unit if not rotating. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
3 Checking the drive parts The drive from the developer Execute U030 [DLP(CMY)] to check the Maintenanc
motor is not transmitted developer motor CMY operation or the e Mode List
properly. developer motor M operation. Check if the
drive gears rotate and have no excessive
rotate smoothly.
• Developer motor CMY - Feed image 'PWBs'
PWB (For the 25/32ppm models)
• Developer motor M - Feed image PWB
(For the 35ppm or faster models)
5 Checking the developer motor The developer motor is faulty. Reattach developer motor CMY or developer Maintenanc
motor M. If not repaired, replace them. e Mode List
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-308
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2201: Drum motor K steady-state error

The ready signal is at the H level for 2s continuously after drum motor K becomes stable.

1 Checking drum motor K The drum motor K drive is Execute U030 [Drum K] to check the drum Maintenanc
faulty. motor K operation. Check if the drive gears e Mode List
rotate and have no excessive load, and
apply the grease (EM-LP, Part no:
rotate smoothly.
• Drum motor K - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'

3 Checking drum unit K The drum unit is faulty. Check if the drum or the drum screw is Detaching
rotated manually, and replace the drum unit if and
not rotated. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
4 Checking drum motor K Drum motor K is faulty. Replace drum motor K.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-309
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2203: Drum motor CMY steady-state error

The ready signal is at the H level for 2s continuously after drum motor CMY become stable.

1 Checking drum motor CMY The drum motor CMY drive Execute U030 [Drum COL] to check the Maintenanc
are faulty. drum motor CMY operation. Check if the e Mode List
drive gears rotate and have no excessive
rotate smoothly.
• Drum motor CMY - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'

3 Replacing drum motor CMY Drum motor CMY are faulty. Replace drum motor CMY.
4 Checking the drum unit and The drum unit is faulty. Check if the drum or the drum screw is Detaching
the developer unit rotated manually, and replace the drum unit if and
not rotated. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-310
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2300: Fuser motor error

The ready signal is at the H level for 1.5s continuously during the fuser motor drive.

1 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor operation is Execute U030 [Fuser] to check the fuser Maintenanc
faulty. motor operation. Check if the drive gears e Mode List
rotate smoothly.
• Fuser motor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'

3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
4 Replacing the fuser drive unit The fuser drive unit is faulty. Replace the fuser drive unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Drive Unit
5 Replacing the fuser motor The fuser motor is faulty. Replace the fuser motor. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Drive Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-311
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2500: Feed motor error

The ready signal is not at the L level after passing 2s since the feed motor drive was started.

1 Checking the feed motor The operation of the feed Execute U030 [Feed] to check the feed Maintenanc
motor is faulty. motor operation. Check if the drive gears e Mode List
rotate smoothly.
• Feed motor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'

3 Replacing the feed motor The feed motor is faulty. Replace the feed motor.
4 Replacing the feed drive unit The feed drive unit is faulty. Replace feed drive unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Feed
Drive Unit
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
8 Replacing the feed image The power can't be supplied to Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB the feed drive PWB.
7-312
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2600: PF feed motor error

The ready signal is not at the L level (stable rotation) after passing 1s since the PF feed motor drive started.

1 Checking the PF feed motor The PF feed motor is not Execute U247 [2PF] or [LCF] > [Motor On] to Maintenanc
properly connected, or it is check the paper feed operation. If the PF e Mode List
faulty. feed motor does not operate properly,
reconnect the connector of the motor. Check
if the PF feed roller and the drive gears
rotate smoothly and have no excessive load,
rotate smoothly.
• PF feed motor - PF PWB 'PWBs'
• PF PWB - Engine PWB (Drawer

connector between the paper feeder and
the main unit)
3 Replacing the PF feed motor The PF feed motor is faulty. Replace the PF feed motor. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF Drive
Unit
4 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware or the PF Upgrade the engine firmware and the PF Firmware
firmware is faulty. firmware to the latest version. Update
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-313
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2700: Primary / secondary transfer release error

The belt release motor was pressed or drove to the releasing direction, and releasing or pressing condition continued for
2.3s.

1 Checking the drive parts The drive transmission of the Execute U030 [Belt Lift]. If the motor drive is Maintenanc
belt release motor is faulty. not transmitted, repair the drive transmission e Mode List
parts.
• Belt release motor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
• Belt release sensor - Feed image PWB
• Feed image PWB - Low voltage PWB
3 Checking the belt release The belt release sensor Reattach or replace the belt release sensor.
sensor comes off.
4 Checking the belt release The belt release motor is not Reattach or replace the belt release motor.
motor operated correctly.
5 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer roller lift- Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit up drive section is faulty. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB
7 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
9 Replacing the low voltage The power is not supplied If the power is not supplied from the low Detaching
PWB from the low voltage PWB to voltage PWB, replace the low voltage PWB. and
the belt release motor. reattaching
the Low
Voltage
PWB
7-314
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2760: Developer K/Transfer belt motor startup error

1. FG pulse of the motor does not enter for 2s continuously during driving the motor.
2. FG pulse exceeding 4000rpm was detected 10 times continuously.
3. The condition where the target speed +/-6.25% of the motor deviated continued for 2s.

1 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt is faulty. Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Checking the developer K/ The drive transmission of the Execute U030 [DLP(K)] to check the Maintenanc
transfer belt motor drive developer K/transfer belt excessive load is not applied to the drive e Mode List
transmission section motor is faulty. gears, roller and the belt by rotating them.
After that, clean the drive section of the
primary transfer unit.
• Developer K/Transfer belt motor - Feed 'PWBs'
image PWB
4 Checking the developer K/ The developer K/transfer belt Reattach the developer K/transfer belt motor
transfer belt motor motor is faulty. and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
version Update
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-315
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2810: Waste toner motor error

1. The lock detection signal shows L level during driving the waste toner motor. (0.5s x 3 times retry continuously with
2ms cycle)
2. Low level of the lock detection signal can not detect within 50ms from the switching REM signal L to H. (3 times retry
with 50ms cycle)

1 Checking the waste toner box The waste toner box is not Reinstall the waste toner box. Replacing
properly installed. the Waste
Toner Box
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
2 Checking the waste toner The waste toner motor does Execute U030 [Toner Recovery] to check Maintenanc
motor not operate properly. whether the waste toner motor operation has e Mode List
an excessive load or not. Then, repair it if
necessary.
3 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not rotate Check if the excessive load is not applied to
properly. the drive gears by rotating the gears, and
clean the drive gears and the bushing, etc.
4 Replacing the waste toner box The waste toner box is faulty. Replace the waste toner box. Replacing
the Waste
Toner Box
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
5 Checking the waste toner The waste toner motor is not Reinsert the connector into the waste toner
motor properly connected. motor.
• Waste toner motor - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-316
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2840: Belt cleaning motor error

1. FG pulse of the motor does not enter for 2s continuously during driving the motor.
2. FG pulse exceeding 4000rpm was detected 10 times continuously.
3. The condition where the target speed +/-6.25% of the motor deviated continued for 2s.

1 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer unit is not Reinstall the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit properly installed. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Cleaning the primary transfer The roller in the primary Remove the waste toner remaining in the
cleaning section transfer cleaning section does primary transfer cleaning section.
not rotate properly.
• Belt cleaning motor - Transfer PWB 'PWBs'
• Transfer PWB - Transfer connect PWB
• Transfer connect PWB - Feed image
PWB
• Feed image PWB - Feed drive PWB
4 Checking the belt cleaning The belt cleaning motor does Reattach the belt cleaning motor. If not
motor not operate properly. repaired, replace it.
5 Replacing the primary transfer The cleaning drive section of Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit the primary transfer unit is and
faulty. Transfer PWB or reattaching
transfer connection PWB is the Primary
faulty. Transfer
Unit
PWB
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-317
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3100: Carriage error

The position of the home position sensor (turning on / off) mismatches when turning the main power on or finishing the
original scan by the scanner.

1 Unlocking the primary mirror The primary mirror unit is not Unlock the primary mirror unit. Unlocking
unit unlocked. the scanner
mirror frame
2 Removing foreign objects and A load is applied to the Confirm the operation of the mirror unit by Maintenanc
applying the grease scanner movement. executing U073 or moving by manual e Mode List
operation. If there is a heavy load on it,
check whether there are any foreign objects
on the scanner wire or the scanner wire
drum, and then clean it. After that, apply
grease (PG-671) on the scanner rail.
3 Checking the scanner wires The scanner wires are dirty or Clean the scanner wire or reattach it. Detaching
come off. and
reattaching
the Scanner
Wires
4 Checking the scanner motor The scanner motor is faulty. Reattach the scanner motor and reconnect
5 Checking the belt tension of A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt tension
the scanner motor scanner movement since the properly.
belt tension is improper.
• Scanner motor - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
• Home position sensor - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
9 Checking the home position The home position sensor is Replace the home position sensor.
sensor faulty.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-318
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3200: LED lamp startup error

1. The white reference data acquired by lighting the lamp at the initial operation is at the specified value or less. (2 or
more LED lamps do not light.)
2. The black level adjustment of the A/D convertor on the CCD PWB is faulty. (The image contrast is faulty due to the
transmission error of the A/D conversion data signal or clock.)

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp does not light. Check if the LED lamp lights by executing Detaching
U061 [CCD]. If it does not light, replace the and
the Lamp
Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
• LED PWB - CCD PWB

3 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit and execute U411. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-319
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3210: CIS lamp error

The input data did not exceed threshold for 5s when lighting the CIS lamp.

2 Checking the DPCIS The CIS lamp does not light. Check if the CIS lamp lights by executing Detaching
U061 [CIS]. If it does not light, replace the and
DPCIS and execute U091 and U411. reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
3 Cleaning the CIS glass and The CIS glass or the CIS roller Clean the CIS glass and the CIS roller.
the CIS roller is dirty.
properly connected.
• DP SHD PWB - DP PWB 'PWBs'
• DP PWB - Engine PWB

6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the DP firmware to the latest Firmware
version. Update
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-320
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3300: CCD AGC error

The brightness of the LED lamps is darker (1 LED lamp does not turn on) or brighter than anticipated when executing
the AGC process for the CCD lamp.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp is broken. Check if the LED lamp lights by executing Detaching
U061 [CCD]. If it does not light, replace the and
the Lamp
Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
2 Cleaning the backside of the The white reference sheet is Clean the white reference sheet at the Detaching
contact glass dirty. backside of the contact glass. and
reattaching
the Contact
Glass
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
unit')
• LED PWB - CCD PWB

version Update
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-321
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3310: CIS AGC error

For internal count
The DPCIS could not acquire the correct white reference value while AGC process was executed.

2 Cleaning the CIS glass and The CIS glass or the CIS roller Clean the CIS glass and the CIS roller.
the CIS roller is dirty.
version Update
properly connected.
6 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U091 Detaching
and U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C3500: Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC

The communication error was detected during the communication between the scanner ASIC and the engine CPU.

and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C3600: Scanner sequence error

The program internal processing error of the scanner sequence occurs.

1 Executing U021 The memory operation is Execute U021. Maintenanc
faulty. e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-322
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3800: AFE error

When writing, writing data and reading data does not match 3 times continuously. There is no response from AFE for
100ms.

and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C4001: Polygon motor synchronization error

The ready signal is not at the L level after passing 15s since the polygon motor drive was started.

2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon Detaching
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it and
does not rotate properly. reattaching
the LSU
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-323
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C4011: Polygon motor steady-state error

The ready signal is at the H level for 15s continuously after the polygon motor drive becomes stable.

2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon Detaching
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it and
does not rotate properly. reattaching
the LSU
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C4101: BD initialization error

The BD signal was not detected for 1s after driving the polygon motor.

2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU while paying Detaching
diode is faulty. attention to the static electricity. and
reattaching
the LSU
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-324
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C4201: BD steady-state error

The BD signal is not detected during the laser lighting.

2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU while paying Detaching
diode is faulty. attention to the static electricity. and
reattaching
the LSU
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C4600: LSU cleaning motor error

The LSU cleaning motor lock-up was detected, or the motor continued to be shifted in the same direction for 8s or more.

1 Executing the Laser Scanner The LSU cleaning drive gear Execute Laser Scanner Cleaning. Adjust/
Cleaning and the cleaning pad have the Maintenanc
load and so they are not e Menu
shifted smoothly. (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
2 Cleaning the LSU cleaning The LSU cleaning drive gear Clean the LSU cleaning drive gear and the
drive gear and the cleaning and the cleaning pad have the cleaning pad.
pad load and so they are not
shifted smoothly.
3 Replacing the LSU The LSU cleaning drive gear, Replace the LSU. Detaching
cleaning wire or the cleaning and
pad are deformed, or they are reattaching
faulty. the LSU
4 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Clean the following wire connector terminal Service
connected properly. Or, the and FFC terminal, then reconnect the Manual -
wire or FFC is faulty. connector and the FFC. If the wire or FFC is Section 8
faulty, replace them. 'PWBs'
• LSU cleaning motor - APC PWB (LSU)
• APC PWB (LSU) - Engine PWB
5 Checking the LSU cleaning The LSU cleaning motor is not Reattach the LSU cleaning motor and
motor properly attached, or it is reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
faulty. replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-325
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C4701: VIDEO ASIC device error 1

Communication with VIDEO ASIC has fails 10 times continuously. (After writing to VIDEO ASIC, read from same
address and the error occurred that the value does not match)

1 Resetting the main power The ASIC operation on the Turn the power switch and the main power
engine is faulty. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the main firmware and the engine Firmware
version. firmware to the latest version. Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C4702: VIDEO ASIC device error 2

Communication with VIDEO ASIC (2) has fails 10 times continuously. (After writing to VIDEO ASIC, read from same
address and the error occurred that the value does not match)

1 Resetting the main power The ASIC operation on the Turn the power switch and the main power
engine is faulty. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C4801: LSU type mismatch error

The LSU mismatches with the main unit.

1 Checking the LSU The different type LSU is Install the correct LSU. Detaching
installed. and
reattaching
the LSU
3 Replacing the LSU The APC PWB is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
7-326
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C5101: Main high voltage error K

1. The flowing current when Vpp is varied in three stages during Vpp adjustment is measured and the difference
between the zero current value and the current value in the second step is equal to or less than the reference value.2.
Even if Vpp [C] is applied, the detected Idc is too small. (Less than 5uA)

1 Reinstalling the main high Proper current does not flow Reinstall the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB as the MC roller contact point and
of the main high voltage PWB reattaching
is not properly contacted. the Main
High Voltage
PWB
2 Checking the drum unit and The drum or the drum screw is Check if the drum or the drum screw is Detaching
the developer unit not rotated properly due to the rotated manually, and replace the drum unit if and
excessive load. not rotated. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
3 Replacing drum motor K Drum motor K is faulty. Replace drum motor K.
4 Checking the main charger Proper current does not flow Clean the high voltage contact of the main Detaching
unit as the foreign objects, etc. charger unit, and apply conductive grease to and
adheres to the high voltage the roller shaft. reattaching
contact point of the main the Main
charger unit. Charger Unit
5 Replacing the main charger Proper current does not flow Replace the main charger unit and execute Detaching
unit as the high voltage contact U930. and
point of the main charger unit reattaching
is deformed or damaged. the Main
Charger Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-327
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C5102: Main high voltage error C

When measuring the inflow electric current changing Vpp to 3 steps during the Vpp adjustment, the gap between the 0
electric current value and the 2nd electric current value is the standard value or less.

High Voltage
PWB
the Drum
Unit
3 Checking drum motor CMY Drum motor CMY does not Replace drum motor CMY.
rotate properly due to the
excessive load.
Charger Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-328
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C5103: Main high voltage error M


High Voltage
PWB
the Drum
Unit
excessive load.
Charger Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-329
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C5104: Main high voltage error Y


High Voltage
PWB
the Drum
Unit
excessive load.
Charger Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-330
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C5131: Primary transfer high voltage error K

When adjusting the feedback, the detected electric current value exceeds the upper limit or is less than the lower limit, or
the adjustment result is 300V or less or is 2,900V or more.

1 Checking the developer K/ The developer K/transfer belt Execute U030 [DLP(K)] to check the Maintenanc
transfer belt motor motor is faulty. developer K/transfer belt motor operation. If e Mode List
the developer K/transfer belt motor does not
2 Reinstalling the primary The primary transfer unit is not Reinstall the primary transfer unit so that the Detaching
transfer unit properly installed. high voltage contacts of the primary transfer and
roller firmly connect. reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
3 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer belt does Replace the primary transfer unit when the Detaching
unit not properly rotate. primary transfer belt does not rotate and
manually. reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
4 Checking the high voltage Proper current does not flow Clean the high voltage contact of the primary
contact as the foreign objects, etc. transfer roller, and apply conductive grease
adheres to the high voltage to the roller shaft.
contact point of the primary
transfer roller.
5 Reinstalling the transfer high Proper current does not flow Reinstall the transfer high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB as high voltage contact of the and
transfer high voltage PWB is reattaching
faulty. the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
PWB
PWB
reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
9 Correcting the drum drive Although the drum drive spring Correct the drum drive spring of the main Detaching
spring normally presses the drum drive unit when the drum does not rotate due and
drive coupling in the main to the engagement failure with the drum reattaching
drive unit to the drum unit side, drive couplings. the Main
if it shifts in the direction where Drive Unit
it cannot press the coupling
and cannot return, the drum
drive coupling does not
engage the coupling in the
drum unit.
7-331
[CONFIDENTIAL]

10 Checking the drum unit and There is no grounding for the Apply conductive grease on the drum drive Detaching
the developer unit drum unit. shaft of the main drive unit. If the drum drive and
shaft does not contact with the earth plate reattaching
inside of the drum, replace the drum unit. the Main
Drive Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
11 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer failure occurs due Replace the primary transfer unit when the Detaching
unit to the malfunction of the primary transfer press-release gear comes and
primary transfer roller lift drive off. reattaching
section. the Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-332
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C5132: Primary transfer high voltage error C


the Primary
Transfer
Unit
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
transfer roller.
High Voltage
PWB
PWB
PWB
reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
drum unit.
7-333
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Drive Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
Transfer
Unit
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-334
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C5133: Primary transfer high voltage error M


the Primary
Transfer
Unit
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
transfer roller.
High Voltage
PWB
PWB
PWB
reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
drum unit.
7-335
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Drive Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
Transfer
Unit
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-336
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C5134: Primary transfer high voltage error Y


the Primary
Transfer
Unit
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
transfer roller.
High Voltage
PWB
PWB
PWB
reattaching
the Transfer
High Voltage
PWB
drum unit.
7-337
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Drive Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
Transfer
Unit
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-338
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6000: IH heating error 1

After warm-up is started, the center thermistor does not reach 100°C / 212°F even 60s passed. Or, during the warm-up,
specified temperature (Ready display temperature) is not detected even 420s passed after center thermistor reached
100°C / 212°F.

1 Executing U169 The IH setting mismatches the Set the destination same as the voltage of Maintenanc
power supply specification. the IH PWB at U169. e Mode List
2 Removing foreign material There are foreign objects If there are foreign objects between the fuser Detaching
between the fuser unit and the unit and the IH unit, or on the fuser belt, and
IH unit. Or, the foreign objects remove them. After that, reinstall the fuser reattaching
are adhered on the fuser belt. unit. the Fuser
Unit
3 Reinstalling the fuser unit The foreign objects adhere on Clean the drawer connection terminal of the Detaching
the drawer connection fuser unit. Check the pin of the drawer and
terminal of the fuser unit. Or, connector is not bent, and replace the fuser reattaching
the drawer connector is not unit if it is bent. If the pin is normal, reinstall the Fuser
inserted completely. the fuser unit so that the drawer connector is Unit
securely connected.
• Drawer connector of the fuser unit - Feed 'PWBs'
image PWB
• IH unit - IH PWB
• IH PWB - Engine PWB
6 Replacing the fuser unit The temperature cannot be Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
detected properly due to the and
broken thermostat or the reattaching
thermistor error. the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
• IH unit - IH PWB 'PWBs'

10 Replacing the IH PWB The IH PWB is faulty. Replace the IH PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
7-339
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6020: Center thermistor high temperature error

The center thermistor detects 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

securely connected.
image PWB
thermistor error, etc. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-340
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6030: Center thermistor broken

The center thermistor temperature is detected at less than 41°C / 104°F for 1s when the edge thermistor detects 100°C
/ 212°F or more during the warm-up.

1 Removing foreign material There is foreign material Remove foreign objects if they are on Detaching
between the fuser unit and the between the fuser unit and the IH unit, or on and
IH unit. Or, foreign material the heat roller. Then, reinstall the fuser unit. reattaching
adheres on the heat roller. the Fuser
Unit
securely connected.
image PWB
5 Replacing the fuser unit The temperature is not Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
properly detected due to the and
broken wire or the thermistor reattaching
error in the fuser unit. the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-341
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6050: Center thermistor low temperature error

The center thermistor detected less than 80°C / 176°F for 1s during printing.

1 Changing the wall outlet The power voltage descends Connect the power cord to a different wall
by 10% or more of the rated outlet if the power supply voltage descends
voltage when printing. by 10% or more of the rated voltage.
Unit
securely connected.
image PWB
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
• IH PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
12 Replacing the IH unit The IH unit is faulty. Replace the IH unit.
7-342
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6120: Press thermistor high temperature error

The press thermistor detected 210°C / 410°F or more for 1s.

securely connected.
image PWB
thermistor error, etc. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-343
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6130: Press thermistor broken

1. During warm-up, press thermistor detects less than 35°C / 95°F for 60s continuously.
2. After finishing warm-up, press thermistor detects less than 35°C / 95°F for 10s continuously.

Unit
securely connected.
image PWB
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-344
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6200: IH heating error 2

The detected temperature of the edge thermistor does not reach 80°C / 176°F within 60s after warm-up starts.
During the warm-up, the detected temperature of the edge thermistor does not reach the ready display temperature
within 420s after reaching 100°C / 212°F.

Unit
securely connected.
image PWB
5 Replacing the fuser unit Correct temperature can't be Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
detected due to the wire and
breakage or the thermistor reattaching
error in the fuser unit. Or, the the Fuser
fuser belt is faulty. Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
7-345
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6220: Edge thermistor high temperature error

The edge thermistor detected 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

securely connected.
image PWB
4 Replacing the fuser unit Correct temperature can't be Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
detected due to the wire and
breakage or the thermistor reattaching
error in the fuser unit. Or, the the Fuser
fuser belt is faulty. Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
8 Reattaching the edge fan The edge fan motor is not Reattach the edge fan motor. Fan Motors
motor properly attached. Attachable
Direction
7-346
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6230: Edge thermistor broken

The edge thermistor detects less than 41°C / 105.8°F for 1s continuously when the center thermistor detected 100°C /
212°F or more during the warm-up.

Unit
securely connected.
image PWB
heater broken or the reattaching
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-347
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6250: Edge thermistor low temperature error

The edge thermistor detected less than 80°C / 176°F for 1s during printing.

Unit
securely connected.
image PWB
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
7-348
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6320: Middle thermistor high temperature error

The middle thermistor detected 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

securely connected.
image PWB
wire short-circuit or the reattaching
thermistor error in the fuser the Fuser
unit. Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
8 Reattaching the edge fan The edge fan motor is not Reattach the edge fan motor. Fan Motors
motor properly attached. Attachable
Direction
7-349
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6330: Middle thermistor broken

The middle thermistor detects less than 41°C / 105.8°F for 1s continuously when the center thermistor or the edge
thermistor detects 100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.

securely connected.
image PWB
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-350
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6410: Uninstalled fuser unit

The unit identification code is mismatched. The unit for other models is installed.

1 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit for other models Install the fuser unit for the applicable Detaching
is installed. models. and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
securely connected.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware. Firmware
Update
image PWB
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7-351
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6600: Fuser belt rotation error

The belt rotation pulse is not input for 1.8s continuously.

securely connected.
2 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit parts such as Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
the fuser belt, the belt rotation and
detecting system, or the belt reattaching
rotation sensor are faulty the Fuser
Unit
3 Applying the grease The load increases due to the Execute U030 [Fuser] to check the fuser Maintenanc
lack of grease on the bushing motor operation. If the fuser motor does not e Mode List
or the gears for the fuser rotate smoothly, apply the grease (EM-50LP,
motor. Part no.: 7BG010009H) to the bushings or
the gears.
• Fuser motor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
9 Replacing the fuser drive gear The fuser drive gear is faulty. Replace the fuser drive gear.
7-352
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6610: Fuser pressure release sensor error

1. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn off even after 3s passed from instructing to reduce the fuser pressure
of the fuser pressure release motor or to move the JAM processing position.
2. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn on even after 6s passed from instructing to add the fuser pressure of
the fuser pressure release motor.
3. The lock signal of the fuser pressure release motor became Low for 200ms. (However, when shifting to JAM process,
stop the fuser pressure release motor only and not service call turns on in the area from the stop position 500ms before
to the stop position.)

securely connected.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Execute U030 [Fuser Release]. If the fuser Maintenanc
connected properly, or the pressure release motor does not operate e Mode List
wire is faulty. properly, reconnect the connectors of the Service
following wires. If there is not continuity, Manual -
replace the wire. Section 8
• Fuser pressure release motor - Feed 'PWBs'
drive PWB
• Drawer connector of the fuser unit - Feed
image PWB
• Feed image PWB - Feed drive PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty at the Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
fuser pressure release and
mechanism or the fuser reattaching
pressure release sensor . the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
8 Replacing the fuser pressure The fuser pressure release Replace the fuser pressure release motor.
release motor motor is faulty.
9 Replacing the gear in the fuser The gear of the fuser pressure Replace the gears in the fuser pressure
pressure releasing system at releasing mechanism at the releasing mechanism at the main unit.
the main unit main unit is faulty.
7-353
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6620: IH core motor rotation error

1. When detecting the home position, the IH position sensor does not turn on within 5s after the IH core motor is driven
under the condition of the IH position sensor off.
2. When detecting the home position, the IH position sensor does not turn off and on within 5s after the IH core motor is
driven under the condition of the IH position sensor on.
3. When relocating the home position for the small size paper, the IH position sensor does not turn off within the
predetermined pulse after the IH core motor is driven under the condition of the IH position sensor on.

1 Checking the IH unit The IH unit connector is not Check if the connector pins of the IH unit do
connected properly. not bend. If the pins bend, fix them.
Next, reinstall the IH unit so that the
connector firmly connects.
2 Checking the IH positioning The IH positioning sensor is Reattach the IH positioning sensor.
3 Cleaning the IH positioning The IH positioning sensor Clean the IH positioning sensor.
sensor cannot detect properly since it
is dirty.
• IH core motor (IH unit) - Feed drive unit 'PWBs'

5 Replacing the IH unit The IH positioning sensor or Replace the IH unit.
the IH core motor is faulty.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-354
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6740: IH PWB high temperature error (IGBT2)

The IGBT temperature acquired from the power microprocessor detected is 115°C / 239°F or more for 1s continuously.

1 Checking the IH PWB fan The connection of the IH PWB Execute U037 [IH PWB] and check the
motor fan motor, or the IH PWB fan operation of the fan motor of the IH PWB. If it
motor is faulty. is not operating, move to the step2 [connect
fan motor of the IH PWB]. If it is operating,
move to the step3 [replace fan motor of the
IH PWB].
2 Connecting the IH PWB fan The connector of the IH PWB Reinsert the connector of the IH PWB fan
motor fan motor wire is not inserted motor.
securely.
3 Replacing the IH PWB fan The IH PWB fan motor is Replace the IH PWB fan motor. Fan Motors
motor faulty. Attachable
Direction
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-355
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6760: Fuser IH input excessive electric current error

The input current obtained from the power microcomputer was 20A (100/120V) or 10A (200V) or more continued for
200ms.

1 Checking the fuser unit The fuser belt is faulty. Detach the fuser unit and check if the fuser Detaching
belt is not faulty. If there is any damage, and
replace the fuser unit. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-356
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6770: IH low power error

After fuser unit is started to heat, fuser rotation pulse signal can't be detected continuously for 1s. Or, no electric power
is supplied to IH fuser unit. (Electric power detection on the IH PWB detected a set electric power value of 30% or less
for a predetermined time.)

2 Checking the fuser unit drawer The fuser unit drawer If foreign objects adhere on the drawer pins Detaching
connectors connectors are not properly of each drawer connector, clean the drawer and
connected. pins. If the drawer pins are deformed, repair reattaching
or replace it. the Fuser
• In case the drawer pins in the fuser unit Unit
are faulty and they cannot be repaired by
cleaning and fixing: Replace the fuser
unit.
• In case the drawer pins in the main unit
cleaning and fixing: Replace the wire.
(Part no.: 302ND4637_).
If the drawer pins are not faulty, reinstall the

fuser unit into the main unit so that the
drawer connectors connect each other firmly.
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
7 Checking the cause The input power is improper. Change the input power.
depending on the input power
8 Replacing the IH unit The IH unit is faulty (The coil is Replace the IH unit.
broken).
9 Replacing the fuser unit The belt rotation sensor in the Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
fuser unit is faulty. The and
thermostat is broken. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7-357
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6900: Edge fan motor error

The lock-up was detected for 20s continuously when driving the fan motor.

1 Checking the edge fan motor The connector is not Execute U037 [Fuser Edge] to check the Maintenanc
connected properly. The wire edge fan motor operation. And, check if the e Mode List
is faulty. The fan does not paper size on the MP tray is detected Detaching
operate as paper size on the properly. and
MP tray is misdetected. If the edge fan motor does not operate reattaching
properly or the paper size on the MP tray is the Right
misdetected, reconnect the connector of the Cover Assy
conveying unit (edge fan motor) to the relay
connector at the main unit.
2 Correcting the connector pins The connector pin deforms at Correct the deformed connector pin for
for connecting the right cover the machine right side (inside connecting the right cover (conveying unit) at
(conveying unit) the right cover). the machine right side of the main unit
(inside the right cover).
• Edge fan motor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'

4 Replacing the edge fan motor The edge fan motor is faulty. Replace the edge fan motor. Fan Motors
Attachable
Direction
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-358
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6910: Engine firmware unexpected error

1. The engine stabilization control continued for 1 hour.
2. The feed motor does not drive even passing 3s or more when driving the drum motor or the developer K/transfer belt
motor.
3. Only the high voltage remote signal turned on under the condition that the drum is stopped.
4. The main charger bias turned off while the developer bias was on.

1 Resetting the main power The power startup delays. Turn the power switch and the main power
3 Checking the engine PWB The engine PWB is not Retighten the screws securing the engine Detaching
properly attached or PWB so that it can ground securely, and and
connected. reinsert the connectors all the way. reattaching
the Engine
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C6920: Exit/IH fan motor error


1 Checking the connection The connector is not Execute U037 [Exit Paper IH Coil]. If the Maintenanc
connected properly, or the following fan motor does not operate e Mode List
wire is faulty. properly, clean the terminal of the connectorService
and reconnect the connector. If there is no Manual -
continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• Exit/IH front fan motor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
• Exit/IH middle fan motor - Feed image
PWB
• Exit/IH rear fan motor - Feed image PWB
2 Checking the exit/IH fan The exit/IH fan motors do not Clean the following fan motors, and remove Fan Motors
motors properly operate. foreign objects if they adhere on the fan Attachable
motor. If not repaired after that, replace the Direction
fan motor.
• Exit/IH front fan motor
• Exit/IH middle fan motor
• Exit/IH rear fan motor
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-359
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7-360
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6950: IH PWB communication error

1. Communication between the IH PWB and the engine PWB is not established in the initial communication. (150ms
interval x 10 times retries are performed)2. After the initial communication is established, communication between the IH
PWB and the engine PWB is not established. (For 500ms)

1 Resetting the main power The power startup delays. Turn the power switch and the main power
connected properly. Or, the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. (Power supply there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
failure to the IH PWB or • Low voltage PWB - IH PWB 'PWBs'
communication error by the
grounding failure.) • IH PWB - Engine PWB
3 Checking the power supply The abnormal electric noise is Plug the power cord into another wall outlet.
voltage mixed in the power supply
voltage.
4 Checking the low voltage The fuse on the low voltage Check the continuity of the fuse (F002) on Detaching
PWB PWB is broken. the low voltage PWB. Then, replace the low and
voltage PWB if there is no continuity. reattaching
the Low
Voltage
PWB
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-361
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6980: Fuser unit EEPROM error

It is not possible to access the fuser unit EEPROM since it matches one of the following.

1 Checking the fuser unit drawer The fuser unit drawer If foreign objects adhere on the drawer pins Detaching
connectors connectors are not properly of each drawer connector, clean the drawer and
connected. pins. If the drawer pins are deformed, repair reattaching
or replace it. the Fuser
• In case the drawer pins in the fuser unit Unit
cleaning and fixing: Replace the fuser
unit.
• In case the drawer pins in the main unit
cleaning and fixing: Replace the wire.
(Part no.: 302ND4637_).
If the drawer pins are not faulty, reinstall the

fuser unit into the main unit so that the
drawer connectors connect each other firmly.
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
PWB
C6990: Fuser power source destination error

The information mismatches between the engine backup and the IH PWB.

1 Executing U169 The voltage setting at U169 Set the destination same as the voltage of Maintenanc
mismatches the voltage of the the IH PWB at U169. e Mode List
IH PWB.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-362
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7001: Container motor error

1. After the container motor is started, ready signal does not turn on even 2s passed.
2. After the container motor is stabilized, ready signal is kept off 2s continuously.

1 Replacing the toner container The toner container locks up Replace the toner container. Toner
and is not rotated. Container
Replacemen
t (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
2 Checking the toner container The toner container drive parts Execute U030 [Container Mix] to check the Maintenanc
drive parts are not operated properly, or container motor operation. If the container e Mode List
the excessive load is applied motor does not operate properly, clean the
to it. drive gears and the couplings in the
container drive unit and apply the grease
(EM-50LP, Part no.: 7BG010009H) to them.
• Container motor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
4 Checking the toner container The toner container motor is Reattach the container motor and reconnect Detaching
motor faulty. the connector. If not repaired, replace it. and
reattaching
the
Container
Motor
PWB
7-363
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7101: T/C sensor K error

The output value of T/C sensor is not settled within +100 (Toner is not detected) or -1000 (sensor connector is coming
off) against the initial toner setting value which is stored in the EEPROM of the developer unit. And this condition was
detected 3 times continuously.

1 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit K so that the Detaching
properly installed. connector firmly connects. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
Manual -
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Feed image 'PWBs'
PWB
3 Replacing the drive gear The drive gear for the Replace the developer unit K drive gear.
developer unit K is broken.
(The developer screw does
not rotate.)
4 Replacing the developer unit Developer unit K (T/C sensor Replace developer unit K. Detaching
K) is faulty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
6 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB. Detaching
relay PWB PWB is faulty. and
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-364
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7102: T/C sensor C error


1 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit C so that the Detaching
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Manual -
PWB
3 Replacing the drive gear The drive gear for the Replace the drive gear for developer unit C.
developer unit C is broken.
not rotate.)
4 Replacing the developer unit Developer unit C (T/C sensor Replace the developer unit C. Detaching
C) is faulty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-365
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7103: T/C sensor M error


1 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit M so that the Detaching
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Manual -
PWB
3 Replacing the drive gear The drive gear for the Replace the drive gear for developer unit M.
developer unit M is broken.
not rotate.)
4 Replacing the developer unit Developer unit M (T/C sensor Replace the developer unit M. Detaching
M) is faulty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-366
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7104: T/C sensor Y error


1 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit Y so that the Detaching
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Manual -
PWB
3 Replacing the drive gear The drive gear for the Replace the drive gear for developer unit Y.
developer unit Y is broken.
not rotate.)
4 Replacing the developer unit Developer unit Y (T/C sensor Replace the developer unit Y. Detaching
Y) is faulty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-367
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7200: Inner thermistor broken (developer)

Input sampling value of the T/C sensor K (machine inside thermistor) is over the standard value.

reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Manual -
PWB
K) is faulty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
7-368
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7210: Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)

Input sampling value of the T/C sensor K (machine inside thermistor) is below the standard value.

reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Manual -
PWB
K) is faulty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
C7221: LSU thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is at the reference value or more.

2 Replacing the LSU The LSU (LSU thermistor) is Replace the LSU. Detaching
faulty. and
reattaching
the LSU
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-369
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7-370
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7231: LSU thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is at the reference value or less.

2 Replacing the LSU The LSU (LSU thermistor) is Replace the LSU. Detaching
faulty. and
reattaching
the LSU
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C7241: Belt thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the belt thermistor is at the reference value or more.

transfer unit properly installed. connector firmly connects. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
• Transfer PWB - Transfer connect PWB 'PWBs'

PWB
unit faulty. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
5 Replacing the transfer The transfer connection PWB Replace the transfer connection PWB.
connection PWB is faulty.
PWB
7-371
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7251: Belt thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the belt thermistor is at the reference value or less.

transfer unit properly installed. connector firmly connects. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
• Transfer PWB - Transfer connect PWB 'PWBs'

PWB
unit faulty. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB
C7301: Toner motor K error

Toner supply motor drive stopped and waited for 0.1s when the pulse plate of the toner supply screw could not detect
the pulse for 2s during the toner supply motor operation. Even if these operations repeated 3 times continuously, the
pulse could not be detected.

1 Checking the toner supply The toner supply screw is not Check if the toner is not clogged inside the
drive unit rotated properly due to the toner supply drive unit by rotating the toner
excessive load. (The pulse supply screw manually. Then, clean the unit
plate is not rotated.) if necessary.
• Toner motor K - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
3 Replacing the toner supply Toner supply drive unit (toner Replace the toner supply drive unit. Detaching
drive unit motor K or toner remaining and
sensor K) is faulty. reattaching
the Toner
Supply Drive
Unit
PWB
7-372
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7302: Toner motor C error


• Toner motor C - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
3 Replacing the toner supply The toner supply drive unit Replace the toner supply drive unit. Detaching
drive unit (toner motor C or toner and
remaining amount sensor C) is reattaching
faulty. the Toner
Supply Drive
Unit
PWB
C7303: Toner motor M error


• Toner motor M - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
drive unit (toner motor M or toner level and
sensor M) is faulty. reattaching
the Toner
Supply Drive
Unit
PWB
7-373
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7304: Toner motor Y error


• Toner motor Y - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
drive unit (toner motor Y or toner level and
sensor Y) is faulty. reattaching
the Toner
Supply Drive
Unit
PWB
C7320: Toner container detection connector error

Disconnection of the toner container detection connector was detected when closing the toner container cover.

• Container drive unit (RFID PWB) - Feed 'PWBs'
image PWB
2 Checking the container drive The connector is not If the connector of the wire inside the
unit connected properly, or the container drive unit disconnects, reconnect
wire is faulty. it. If not repaired, replace the container drive
unit.
PWB
7-374
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7401: Developer unit K type mismatch error

The unit identification code mismatches. The unit for other model is installed.

1 Replacing developer unit K Developer unit K for other Install the developer unit K for the applicable
models is installed. models.
2 Reinstalling the developer unit Foreign objects adhere to the Clean the terminals of the connector of
K connector terminals of developer unit K.
developer unit K. Check if the connector pins are bent and
Or the connector is not replace developer unit K if they are bent.
inserted completely Reinstall developer unit K so that the
connector firmly connects if the pins are
normal.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminals of the wire connector
connected. and reinstall it.
Or the wire is faulty. If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum/developer relay PWB (YC1) - Feed
image PWB (YC-17)
• Feed image PWB(YC-28) - Engine
PWB(YC-42)
5 Replacing developer unit K Developer unit K is faulty. Replace developer unit K.
6 Replacing feed image PWB Feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
7 Replacing engine PWB Engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.
C7402: Developer unit C type mismatch error


1 Replacing developer unit C Developer unit C for other Install the developer unit C for the applicable
C connector terminals of developer unit C.
developer unit C. Check if the connector pins are bent and
Or the connector is not replace developer unit C if they are bent.
inserted completely Reinstall developer unit C so that the
normal.
image PWB (YC-17)
PWB(YC-42)
5 Replacing developer unit C Developer unit C is faulty. Replace developer unit C.
7-375
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7403: Developer unit M type mismatch error


1 Replacing developer unit M Developer unit M for other Install the developer unit M for the applicable
M connector terminals of developer unit M.
developer unit M. Check if the connector pins are bent and
Or the connector is not replace developer unit M if they are bent.
inserted completely Reinstall developer unit M so that the
normal.
image PWB (YC-17)
PWB(YC-42)
5 Replacing developer unit M Developer unit M is faulty. Replace developer unit M.
C7404: Developer unit Y type mismatch error


1 Replacing developer unit Y Developer unit Y for other Install the developer unit Y for the applicable
Y connector terminals of developer unit Y.
developer unit Y. Check if the connector pins are bent and
Or the connector is not replace developer unit Y if they are bent.
inserted completely Reinstall developer unit Y so that the
normal.
image PWB (YC-17)
PWB(YC-42)
5 Replacing developer unit Y Developer unit Y is faulty. Replace developer unit Y.
7 ????????? Engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.
7-376
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7420: Uninstalled primary transfer unit

1. Unit identification code does not match.
2. Unit for the other model is installed.

1 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer unit for Install the primary transfer unit for the Detaching
unit other models is installed. applicable models. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Reinstalling the primary The connector of the primary Reinstall the primary transfer unit so that the Detaching
transfer unit transfer unit is not firmly connector firmly connects. and
connected. reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
• Transfer connect PWB - Feed image 'PWBs'
PWB
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware. Firmware
Update
PWB
C7470: Toner absorption fan motor error


• Toner absorption fan motor - Feed image 'PWBs'
PWB
2 Checking the toner absorption The fan motor does not rotate Clean the toner absorption fan motor and Fan Motors
fan motor properly since it is dirty. check if the fan is rotated manually. Then, Attachable
reattach it. Direction
3 Replacing the toner The toner absorption fan Execute U037 [Toner] to check the Fan Motors
absorption fan motor motor is faulty. operation. If the toner absorption fan motor Attachable
does not properly operate, replace it. Direction
PWB
7-377
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7480: Power source fan motor error


• Power source fan motor - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
2 Checking the power source The fan motor does not rotate Clean the power source fan motor and check Fan Motors
fan motor properly since it is dirty. if the fan is rotated manually. Then, reattach Attachable
it. Direction
3 Replacing the power source The power source fan motor is Replace the power source fan motor if it Fan Motors
fan motor faulty. does not operate properly when executing Attachable
U037 [LVU]. Direction
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C7490: Exit fan motor error


• Exit fan motor (Fuser drive unit) - Feed 'PWBs'
drive PWB
2 Checking the exit fan motor The fan motor does not rotate Clean the exit fan motor and check if the fan Fan Motors
properly since it is dirty. is rotated manually. Then, reattach it. Attachable
Direction
3 Replacing the exit fan motor The exit fan motor is faulty. If the exit fan motor does not operate Fan Motors
properly when executing U037 [Exit Cooling], Attachable
replace it. Direction
6 Replace the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty Replace the engine PWB
7-378
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7601: Front ID sensor error

Dark potential error: Sensor output value (FrontDarkP, FrontDarkS) is less than 0.15V or bigger than 0.80V.
Bright potential error: FrontBrightS is less than FrontDarkS or FrontBrightP is less than FrontDarkP+0.5V.

1 Cleaning the front ID sensor The front ID sensor is dirty. Clean the front ID sensor surface.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If the ID sensor Maintenanc
shutter not operate properly. shutter does not operate properly, reattach e Mode List
the cleaning solenoid.
• Front ID sensor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• Cleaning solenoid - Feed drive PWB
4 Replacing the cleaning The cleaning solenoid is faulty. Replace the cleaning solenoid.
solenoid
5 Checking the front ID sensor The front ID sensor is not Reattach the front ID sensor.
properly attached.
6 Replacing the front D sensor The front ID sensor is faulty. Check if the value of U465 [T7 CTD] is Maintenanc
fluctuated before and after Calibration, and e Mode List
replace the front ID sensor if it was not
fluctuated (uncalibrated).
Transfer
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-379
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7602: Rear ID sensor error

Dark potential error: Sensor output value (RearDarkP, RearDarkS) is less than 0.15V or bigger than 0.80V.
Bright potential error: RearBrightS is less than RearDarkS or RearBrightP is less than RearDarkP+0.5V.

1 Cleaning the rear ID sensor The rear ID sensor is dirty. Clean the rear ID sensor surface.
• Rear ID sensor - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
• Cleaning solenoid - Feed drive PWB
4 Replacing the cleaning The cleaning solenoid is faulty. Replace the cleaning solenoid.
solenoid
5 Checking the rear ID sensor The rear ID sensor is not Reattach the rear ID sensor.
properly attached.
6 Replacing the rear ID sensor The rear ID sensor is faulty. Check if the value of U465 [T7 CTD] is Maintenanc
fluctuated before and after Calibration, and e Mode List
replace the rear ID sensor if it was not
fluctuated (uncalibrated).
Transfer
Unit
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-380
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7611: Bias calibration read value error (Black)

The ID sensors cannot properly read the patch density on the primary transfer belt when executing Calibration or the
color adjustment.

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn the power switch and the main power
2 (In case if the printout is light) The developing roller does not Switch the lock lever up and down and return Detaching
Checking the developer unit contact with the drum. the developer roller to the setting position. and
(35ppm or faster models) If the developer roller does not return due to reattaching
3 (In case if the printout is light) The developer roller does not If the developer roller does not contact the
Checking the connecting gear contact the drum since it does drum even if closing the front cover for the
of the front cover for the not properly interlock with the maintenance, reattach the gear connecting
maintenance (25/32PPM opening and closing operation to the front cover for the maintenance.
models) of the front cover for the
maintenance.
4 (In case if the printout is light) The laser does not output Clean the LSU. If not repaired, replace it. Detaching
Cleaning / replacing the LSU. properly from the LSU. Or, and
LSU dustproof glass is dirty. reattaching
the LSU
5 (In case if the printout is light) Condensation on the drum Execute the drum refresh. And next, set [On] Adjust/
Improving the condensation of surface at U339 [Drum heater] to turn on the drum Maintenanc
the drum surface (35ppm or heater. e Menu
faster models) (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
6 Cleaning the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the surface of the front and rear ID
sensors.
7 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute U464 [Calib]. Maintenanc
e Mode List
9 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer belt Clean the surface of the primary transfer Detaching
unit surface is dirty. belt, or replace the primary transfer unit. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
10 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is not properly Reattach the front and rear ID sensors and
attached, or the connector is reconnect the connectors.
not properly connected.
11 (When the image is too light) Proper current does not flow Reattach the main high voltage PWB and the
Checking the main high as the main high voltage PWB transfer high voltage PWB.
voltage PWB / transfer high or the contact point of the
voltage PWB transfer high voltage PWB is
faulty.
12 (When the image is too light) The parts for the drum unit, In case if the image is too light, clean the Maintenanc
Checking the drum unit / developer unit and LSU is dirty drum unit, developer unit and the LSU. Or, e parts
developer unit / LSU or worn out. replace them. replacement
procedures
13 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. Firmware
version. Update
7-381
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• Front ID sensor and Rear ID sensor - 'PWBs'
Feed drive PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-382
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7612: Bias calibration read value error (Cyan)

color adjustment.

maintenance.
the LSU
Guide -
Section 10)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
sensors.
e Mode List
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
faulty.
procedures
version. Update
7-383
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Feed drive PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-384
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7613: Bias calibration read value error (Magenta)

color adjustment.

maintenance (25/32ppm opening and closing operation to the front cover for the maintenance.
maintenance.
the LSU
Guide -
Section 10)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
sensors.
e Mode List
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
faulty.
procedures
version. Update
7-385
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Feed drive PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-386
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7614: Bias calibration read value error (Yellow)

color adjustment.

maintenance.
the LSU
Guide -
Section 10)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
sensors.
e Mode List
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
faulty.
procedures
version. Update
7-387
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Feed drive PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-388
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7620: Automatic color registration error

1. The patch print position on the primary transfer belt is not within the readable area by the ID sensor.
2. The primary transfer belt surface is dirty, or the patch print density is too light.

e Mode List
maintenance.
the LSU
Guide -
Section 10)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
sensors.
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
faulty.
11 (When the color registration LSU or drum unit is not If the color registration occurs, reinstall the Detaching
occurs) Checking the LSU / installed correct position. Or, LSU and the drum unit at the proper position. and
drum unit LSU is faulty. If not repaired, replace the LSU. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
7-389
[CONFIDENTIAL]

version. Update
Feed drive PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-390
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7800: Outer thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (outer thermistor) is at the reference value or more.

• Temperature/humidity sensor - Engine 'PWBs'
PWB
2 Replacing the temperature/ The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
humidity sensor sensor is faulty.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C7810: Outer thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (outer thermistor) is at the reference value or less.

• Temperature/humidity sensor - Engine 'PWBs'
PWB
2 Replacing the temperature/ The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
humidity sensor sensor is faulty.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-391
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7901: Drum unit K EEPROM error


1 Resetting the main power The data stored in the Turn the power switch and the main power
EEPROM in the drum unit is switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
faulty. power switch and the power switch on.
2 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not properly Reinstall drum unit K to connect the Detaching
installed. connector firmly. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
• Drum unit - Drum/developer relay PWB 'PWBs'
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Feed image

PWB
4 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in the drum unit Replace drum unit K. Detaching
is faulty. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
5 Checking the connection of EEPROM signal line of some If the signal wire has a ground fault, replace Service
the EEPROMS in each unit units are faulty grounded. it. Manual -
• Signal wires (SCL, SDA) from the Section 8
EEPROMs in the drum unit and the 'PWBs'
developer unit - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Signal wires (SCL, SDA) from the
EEPROMs in the primary transfer unit
and the fuser unit - Feed image PWB
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-392
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7-393
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7902: Drum unit C EEPROM error


2 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not properly Reinstall drum unit C so that the connector Detaching
installed. firmly connects. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
connected properly, or the Manual -
connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
PWB
4 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in the drum unit Replace drum unit C. Detaching
is faulty. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
7-394
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7903: Drum unit M EEPROM error


2 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not properly Reinstall drum unit M so that the connector Detaching
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
PWB
4 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in the drum unit Replace drum unit M. Detaching
is faulty. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
7-395
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7904: Drum unit Y EEPROM error


2 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not properly Reinstall drum unit Y so that the connector Detaching
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
PWB
4 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in the drum unit Replace drum unit Y. Detaching
is faulty. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
PWB
7-396
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7911: Developer unit K EEPROM error


EEPROM in the developer unit switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
is faulty. power switch and the power switch on.
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Manual -
PWB
4 Replacing the developer unit The EEPROM in the Replace developer unit K. Detaching
developer unit is faulty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
7 Checking the feed image PWB The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
7-397
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7912: Developer unit C EEPROM error


2 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit C so that the Detaching
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Manual -
PWB
4 Replacing the developer unit The EEPROM in the Replace the developer unit C. Detaching
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
7-398
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7913: Developer unit M EEPROM error


2 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit M so that the Detaching
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Manual -
PWB
4 Replacing the developer unit The EEPROM in the Replace the developer unit M. Detaching
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
7-399
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7914: Developer unit Y EEPROM error


2 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit Y so that the Detaching
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Manual -
PWB
4 Replacing the developer unit The EEPROM in the Replace the developer unit Y. Detaching
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
7-400
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7941: LSU EEPROM error

Remarks: In the color 35ppm or faster models, this error appears when the access to C/Y fails.
Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times. Writing data and reading data does not match 8 consecutive
times.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in the LSU Turn the power switch and the main power
is faulty. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
2 Checking the FFC FFC is not connected properly. Clean the FFC terminals of the following FFC Service
3 Replacing the LSU The APC PWB (LSU) is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
C7942: LSU EEPROM error 2

Object: Color 35ppm or faster models
Remarks: This error appears when the access to M/K fails.
Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times. Writing data and reading data does not match 8 consecutive
times.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in the LSU Turn the power switch and the main power
is faulty. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
2 Checking the FFC FFC is not connected properly. Clean the FFC terminals of the following FFC Service
3 Replacing the LSU The APC PWB (LSU) is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
7-401
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7970: Weight sensor error

The condition of the sensor output value was less than the specified value continued for 500ms.

1 Reinstalling the waste toner The waste toner box is not Reinstall the waste toner box into the main Replacing
box properly installed. unit slowly, and then check if it moves the Waste
vertically. Toner Box
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
2 Checking the wire The relay connector (engine Realign the wire so that the wire of the relay Connection
PWB and waste toner motor/ connector at the waste toner box unit of Relay
weight sensor) is not backside is not excessively strained. Then, Connector
connected properly or reconnect the relay connector. of Waste
disconnected as excessive Toner Box
tensioning of the wire located Unit
at the back side of the waste (Section 4
toner box unit during 'Detaching
maintenance work. and
reattaching
waste toner
box unit)
3 Checking the weight sensor The connector is not properly Reconnect the connector of the weight
and the actuator connected. Or, the actuator is sensor. And, reattach the weight sensor
not attached properly. actuator and the return spring.
4 Reattaching the weight The weight detection spring Detach the waste toner box unit and reattach
detection spring has come off. the weight detection spring.
5 Cleaning around the weight The weight sensor and Clean around the weight sensor with an air-
sensor surrounding parts are dirty. blower.
6 Executing U155 The calibration of the weight Execute the waste toner calibration at U155. Maintenanc
sensor is not executed e Mode List
properly.
7 Replacing the waste toner box The waste toner box is faulty. Replace the waste toner box. Replacing
the Waste
Toner Box
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
version Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-402
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7980: Waste toner overflow (Waste toner full sensor error)

The waste toner full sensor detected full (lock) of the waste toner box for 4 times continuously.

1 Checking the waste toner box The waste toner box is full. Detach and reattach the waste toner box and Replacing
close the waste toner box cover. If the waste the Waste
toner box is full, replace it. Toner Box
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
2 Checking the waste toner full The connector is not properly Reconnect the connector of the waste toner
sensor connected. full sensor.
3 Cleaning the waste toner box The waste toner is clogged at Clean inside the waste toner box joint Detaching
joint section the waste toner joint section. section of the main drive unit. and
reattaching
the Main
Drive Unit
4 Checking the connection The waste toner box joint Realign the wire so that the wire of the relay Connection
section and the waste toner connector at the waste toner box unit of Relay
box are not properly backside is not excessively strained. Then, Connector
connected. reconnect the relay connector. After that, of Waste
reinstall the waste toner box into the main Toner Box
unit. Unit
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
waste toner
box unit)
version Update
6 Checking the operation of the The weight sensor actuator When the voltage from the 2nd pin of Detaching
weight sensor actuator inside the waste toner box unit connector YC29 on the feed image PWB is and
does not operate properly. not '3.3V (full detection)', reattach the weight reattaching
sensor actuator inside the waste toner box the Waste
unit and check if it operates properly. If not Toner Box
operating properly, replace the waste toner Unit
box unit.
7 Replacing the waste toner The waste toner full sensor Replace the waste toner forwarding unit Detaching
forwarding unit inside the waste toner when the voltage from the 2nd pin of and
forwarding unit misdetects. connector YC29 on the feed image PWB is reattaching
'3.3V (full detection)'. the Main
Drive Unit
• Feed image PWB - Feed drive PWB 'PWBs'
PWB
C8000: Finisher incompatibility detection

100-sheet staple finisher was installed in the lowend model

1 Checking the finisher DF-7130 is installed in the Install DF-7110 or DF-7120
lowend model
7-403
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8010: PH motor error 1

Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher (When punch unit is installed)
1. The PH home position sensor does not turn on even 200ms passed when the PH motor drives.
2. The pulse plate does not count the specified pulse even 300ms passed after the punch operation was started.
3. After correction operation starts, the punch unit does not stop at 2-pulse position from the PH home position sensor
turning on within 500ms. (If the PH home position sensor turns on, the processing finishes normally.)

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch unit does not move manually,
assembled properly. repair the position where restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the PH cam drive The PH cam drive parts are Reattach the punch cam drive parts. If not
parts not attached properly, or faulty. repaired, replace them.
• PH motor - PH PWB 'PWBs'
• PH home position sensor - PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing the PH motor The PH motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Punch]. If the PH Maintenanc
motor does not operate properly, replace it. e Mode List
5 Checking the PH home The PH home position sensor Execute U241 [Punch] > [Punch HP]. If the Maintenanc
position sensor is not properly attached, or it is PH home position sensor does not operate e Mode List
faulty. properly, reattach it. If not repaired, replace
it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the PH firmware to the latest Firmware
7 Replacing the PH PWB The PH PWB is faulty. Replace the PH PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/D
Installation
Guide)
8 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Upgrade the firmware Detaching
by using the latest upgrade pack immediately and
after replacing the DF PWB. reattaching
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-404
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The positioning alignment of the home position is not completed within 3s when initializing or waiting the home position.

operation.
2 Checking the PH cam drive The PH cam drive parts are Reattach the PH cam drive parts. If not
• PH PWB - DF PWB
and
reattaching
the PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/D
Installation
Guide)
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-405
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The home position detection does not turn off within 50ms when initializing the home position.

operation.
2 Checking the PH cam drive The PH cam drive parts are Reattach the PH cam drive parts. If not
• PH PWB - DF PWB
and
reattaching
the PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/D
Installation
Guide)
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-406
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8040: Punch shift motor error 1

HP cannot be not detected even if driving the motor by the specified distance (30mm) when moving to HP

operation.
2 Checking the PH cam drive The PH cam drive parts are Reattach the punch cam drive components.
parts not attached properly or faulty. Replace it if not repaired.
• Punch shift motor - PH PWB
• Punch HP sensor - PH PWB
• PH PWB- DF PWB
4 Replacing the punch shift The punch shift motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Punch Move]
motor Replace the punch shift motor if it does not
operate properly
5 Checking the punch HP Punch HP sensor is not Execute U241 [Punch] > [Punch HP]
sensor properly attached or faulty. Reattach the punch HP sensor if it does not
operate properly.
Replace the punch HP sensor if not repaired.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the PH firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing PH PWB PH PWB is faulty. Replace PH PWB.
After replacing the PWB, upgrade the
firmware to the latest version.
7-407
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8050: Punch shift motor error 2

The paper edge cannot be detected if driving the motor by the specified distance (30mm) when detecting the paper
edge.

operation.
2 Checking the PH cam drive The PH cam drive parts are Reattach the punch cam drive components.
parts not attached properly or faulty. Replace it if not repaired
• Punch shift motor - PH PWB
• Paper edge sensor 1,2 - PH PWB
• PH PWB- DF PWB
4 Replacing the punch shift The punch shift motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Punch Move]
motor Replace the punch shift motor if it does not
operate properly.
5 Checking the paper edge Paper edge sensors 1, 2 are Execute U241 [Punch] > [Edge Face1/2]
sensors 1, 2 not properly attached or faulty. Reattach the paper edge sensors 1, 2 if they
do not operate properly.
Replace the paper edge sensors 1, 2 if not
repaired.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the PH firmware to the latest
version. version.
7-408
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8090: DF paddle motor error

Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher
1. The DF paddle sensor does not turn on even if 1s passed when the DF paddle motor drives.
2.The DF paddle sensor does not turn off even if it drives for 1s from on condition.

1 Checking the DF paddle drive The DF paddle drive Reattach the DF paddle drive components.
components components are not properly Replace it if not repaired
attached, or it is faulty.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminals of the wire connector Service
connected. and reinstall it. Manual -
Or the wire is faulty. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
'PWBs'
• DF paddle motor - DF PWB
• DF paddle sensor - DF PWB
3 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Beat] Maintenanc
motor Replace the DF paddle motor if it does not e Mode List
operate properly.
4 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is Execute U241[Finisher] > [Lead Paddle] Maintenanc
sensor faulty. Replace the DF paddle sensor if it does not e Mode List
operate properly.
5 Replacing DF PWB DF PWB is faulty. Replace DF PWB. Detaching
After replacing the PWB, upgrade the and
firmware to the latest version. reattaching
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
C8090: Punch unit communication error/Main program error (Punch unit)

1. Communication error occurred 10 times continuously after completing read-out of the firmware version from the
punch unit.
2. When turning on the power, there was an error in the main program.

• PH PWB- DF PWB
7-409
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8100: DF exit release motor error

1. The DF bundle exit sensor does not turn on even 1s passed when the DF exit release motor drives.
2. The DF bundle exit sensor does not turn off even if drives for 1s from on condition.

1 Checking the DF bundle exit The exit guide in the DF Repair the DF bundle exit unit.
unit bundle exit unit is deformed.
2 Checking the DF bundle exit The DF bundle exit unit drive Reattach the DF bundle exit unit drive parts.
unit drive parts parts are not properly If not repaired, replace them.
attached, or they are faulty.
• DF exit release motor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF bundle exit sensor - DF PWB

4 Replacing the DF exit release The DF exit release motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Eject Unlock(HP)]. Maintenanc
motor faulty. If the DF exit release motor does not operate e Mode List
properly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF bundle exit The DF bundle exit sensor is Reattach the DF bundle exit sensor, then Maintenanc
sensor not attached properly or faulty. check the sensor operation by executing e Mode List
U241. If the DF bundle exit sensor does not
operate properly, replace it.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-410
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8110: DF shift motor 1 error

DF shift sensor 1 does not turn on even if shifting 160mm when driving DF shift motor 1.

1 Checking the front shift guide The front shift guide is not If the front shift guide does not move
assembled properly. manually, repair the position where restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the front shift guide The front shift guide drive Reattach the front shift guide drive parts. If
drive parts parts are not properly not repaired, replace them.
• DF shift motor 1 - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF shift sensor 1 - DF PWB
4 Replacing DF shift motor 1 DF shift motor 1 is faulty. Replace DF shift motor 1 if it does not Maintenanc
operate properly when checking the e Mode List
operation at U240.
5 Checking DF shift sensor 1 DF shift sensor 1 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 1, then execute Maintenanc
properly attached, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Shift Front HP]. If DF shift e Mode List
faulty. sensor 1 does not operate properly, replace
it.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-411
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8120: DF shift motor 2 error

DF shift sensor 2 does not turn on even if shifting 160mm when driving DF shift motor 2.

1 Checking the rear shift guide The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide does not move
the operation.
2 Checking the rear shift guide The rear shift guide drive parts Reattach the rear shift guide drive parts. If
drive parts are not properly attached, or not repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
• DF shift motor 2 - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF shift sensor 2 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF shift motor 2 DF shift motor 2 is faulty. Replace DF shift motor 2 if it does not Maintenanc
operation at U240.
5 Checking DF shift sensor 2 DF shift sensor 2 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 2, then execute Maintenanc
properly attached, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Shift Tail HP]. If DF shift e Mode List
faulty. sensor 2 does not operate properly, replace
it.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-412
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8130: DF shift release motor error

1. The DF shift release sensor does not turn on even 1s passed when the DF shift release motor drives.
2. The DF shift release sensor does not turn on even if the DF shift release motor drives for 3s toward the direction of the
HP detection.
3. The DF shift release sensor does not turn off even if it drives for 3s toward the direction of the HP detection off.

1 Firmware upgrade If the finisher is not detected, Upgrade the firmware to the latest version Firmware
the firmware is faulty. while opening the DF front cover. Update
2 Checking the rear shift guide The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide does not move
the operation.
3 Checking the rear shift guide The rear shift guide drive parts Reattach the rear shift guide drive parts. If
drive parts are not properly attached, or not repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
• DF shift release motor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF shift release sensor - DF PWB
5 Checking the DF shift release The DF shift release motor is Replace the DF shift release motor if it does Maintenanc
motor faulty. not operate properly when checking the e Mode List
operation at U240.
6 Checking the DF shift release The DF shift release sensor is Reattach the DF shift release sensor, then Maintenanc
sensor not properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Shift Unlock HP]. e Mode List
faulty. If the DF shift release sensor does not
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-413
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8140: DF tray motor error 1

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher
The DF tray sensor or the DF tray upper side sensor does not turn on after passing 30s when ascending the DF main
tray or the DF tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray / The DF main tray / DF tray is If the DF main tray or the DF tray does not
DF tray not assembled properly. move up and down manually, repair the
position where restricts the operation.
2 Checking the DF main tray / The DF main tray / DF tray Reattach the DF main tray / DF tray drive
DF tray drive parts drive parts are not properly parts. If not repaired, replace them.
• DF tray motor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
4 Replacing the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If the DF tray Maintenanc
5 (When installing the 1000- The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
sheet finisher) Checking the connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
• DF tray sensor 1 - DF PWB 'PWBs'
6 (When installing the 4000- The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
sheet finisher) Checking the connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
• DF tray sensor 1 - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF tray sensor 2 - DF PWB

• DF tray upper surface sensor 1 - DF 'PWBs'
PWB
• DF tray upper surface sensor 2 - DF
PWB
8 (When installing the 1000- DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1, then execute Maintenanc
sheet finisher) Checking DF properly attached, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Tray U-Limit]. If DF tray e Mode List
tray sensor 1 faulty. sensor 1 does not operate properly, replace
it.
9 (When installing the 4000- DF tray sensors 1, 2 are not Reattach DF tray sensor 1 or 2, then execute Maintenanc
sheet finisher) Checking DF properly attached, or they are U241 [Finisher] > [Tray U-Limit] or [Tray e Mode List
tray sensor 1, 2 faulty. HP2]. If DF tray sensor 1 or 2 does not
10 Checking DF tray upper side DF tray upper surface sensors Reattach DF tray upper surface sensor 1 or Maintenanc
sensors 1, 2 1, 2 are not properly attached, 2, then execute U241 [Finisher] > [Tray Top]. e Mode List
or they are faulty. If DF tray upper surface sensor 1 or 2 does
not operate properly, replace it.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-414
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Turning on/off of DF paper holding sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing 4s when ascending the DF tray.

1 Checking the DF tray The DF tray is not assembled If the DF tray does not move up and down
properly. manually, repair the position where restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the DF tray drive The DF tray drive parts are not Reattach the DF tray drive parts. If not
parts properly attached, or they are repaired, replace them.
faulty.
• DF paper holding sensor 1 - DF PWB
• DF paper holding sensor 2 - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor if it does not Maintenanc
operation at U240.
5 Checking DF paper holding DF paper holding sensors 1, 2 Reattach DF paper holding sensor 1 or 2, Maintenanc
sensors 1, 2 are not properly attached, or then check the sensor operation by e Mode List
they are faulty. executing U241. If DF paper holding sensor
1 or 2 does not operate properly, replace it.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-415
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Remarks: If the error is detected during job, the tray full is displayed and this service call will not
come up.
Turning on and off of DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper side sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing 5s when
descending the DF tray.

the operation.
faulty.

PWB
PWB
operation at U240.
5 Checking DF tray sensor 1 DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1, then check the Maintenanc
properly attached. sensor operation by executing U241. If DF e Mode List
tray sensor 1 does not operate properly,
replace it.
6 Checking DF tray upper side DF tray upper side sensors 1, Reattach DF tray upper surface sensor 1 or Maintenanc
sensors 1, 2 2 are not properly attached. 2, then check the sensor operation by e Mode List
executing U241. If DF tray upper surface
sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly,
replace it.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-416
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Turning on and off of DF tray sensors 1, 2 or DF tray upper side sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing 5s
when descending the DF main tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray does not move up and
assembled properly. down manually, repair the position where
restricts the operation.
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive parts Reattach the DF main tray drive parts. If not
drive parts are not properly attached, or repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
PWB
PWB
4 Replacing the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If the DF tray Maintenanc
5 Checking DF tray sensors 1, 2 DF tray sensors 1, 2 are not Reattach DF tray sensor 1 or 2, then execute Maintenanc
properly attached, or they are U241 [Finisher] > [Tray U-Limit] or [Tray e Mode List
faulty. HP2]. If DF tray sensor 1 or 2 does not
6 Checking DF tray upper side DF tray upper surface sensors Reattach DF tray upper surface sensor 1 or Maintenanc
sensors 1, 2 1, 2 are not properly attached, 2, then execute U241 [Finisher] > [Tray Top]. e Mode List
or they are faulty. If DF tray upper surface sensor 1 or 2 does
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-417
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8160: DF tray motor error (3)

DF tray sensor 3 does not turn on after passing 30s when descending the DF tray.

the operation.
faulty.
• DF tray sensor 3 -DF PWB
4 Checking the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If the DF tray Maintenanc
5 Checking DF tray sensor 3 DF tray sensor 3 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 3, then check the Maintenanc
properly attached, or it is sensor operation by executing U241. If DF e Mode List
faulty. tray sensor 3 does not operate properly,
replace it.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-418
[CONFIDENTIAL]

DF tray sensors 4, 5 does not turn on after passing 60s when descending the DF main tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray does not move up and
assembled properly. down manually, repair the position where
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive parts Reattach the DF main tray drive parts. If not
they are faulty.
• DF tray sensor 4 -DF PWB
or,
• DF tray sensor 5 (when installing the
folding unit) -DF PWB
4 Checking the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If the DF tray Maintenanc
5 Checking DF tray sensors 4, 5 DF tray sensors 4, 5 are not Reattach DF tray sensor 4 or DF tray sensor Maintenanc
properly attached, or they are 5 (when installing the folding unit), then e Mode List
faulty. execute U241 [Finisher] > [Tray L-Limit] or [
Tray L-Limit(BL)]. If DF tray sensor 4 or 5
does not operate properly, replace it.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-419
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The DF tray sensor does not turn on after passing 4s when descending the DF tray.

the operation.
faulty.
• DF tray sensor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor if it does not Maintenanc
operation at U240.
5 Checking the DF tray sensor The DF tray sensor is not Reattach the DF tray sensor, then check the Maintenanc
properly attached, or it is sensor operation by executing U241. If the e Mode List
faulty. DF tray sensor does not operate properly,
replace it.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-420
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8170: DF side registration motor 1 error 1

The home position cannot be detected after passing 3s when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registration If the DF side registration front guide does
registration guide guide is not assembled not move manually, repair the position where
properly. restricts the operation.
2 Checking the front DF side The DF side registration front Reattach the DF side registration front guide
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are not drive parts. If not repaired, replace them.
properly attached, or they are
faulty.
• DF side registration motor 1 - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF side registration sensor 1 - DF PWB

4 Replacing DF side registration DF side registration motor 1 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A3)] or Maintenanc
motor 1 faulty. [Width Test(LD)]. If DF side registration e Mode List
motor 1 does not operate properly, replace it.
5 Checking DF side registration DF side registration sensor 1 Reattach DF side registration sensor 1, then Maintenanc
sensor 1 is not properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Front HP]. e Mode List
faulty. If DF side registration sensor 1 does not
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-421
[CONFIDENTIAL]

J6810/J6811/J6812 (Front DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registration If the DF side registration front guide does
2 Checking the front DF side The DF side registration front Reattach the front DF side registration guide
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are not drive parts.
faulty.
3 Replacing the front DF side The front DF side registration Replace the front DF side registration guide
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are faulty. drive parts.

5 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 1 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A3)] or Maintenanc
sensor 1 is not properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Front HP]. e Mode List
faulty. If DF side registration sensor 1 does not
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-422
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The home position cannot be detected after passing 3s when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registration If the DF side registration rear guide does
2 Checking the rear DF side The DF side registration rear Reattach the DF side registration rear guide
faulty.

4 Replacing DF side registration DF side registration motor 2 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A3)] or Maintenanc
sensor 2 is not properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP]. If e Mode List
faulty. DF side registration sensor 2 does not
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-423
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8200:DF side registration motor 2 error 2

J6910/J6911/J6912 (Rear DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registration If the DF side registration rear guide does
2 Checking the rear DF side The side registration rear Reattach the DF side registration rear guide
faulty.

4 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 2 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A3)] or Maintenanc
5 Checking DF side registration DF width adjustment sensor 2 Reattach DF side registration sensor 2, then Maintenanc
sensor 2 is not installed properly. Or, it execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP]. If e Mode List
is faulty. DF side registration sensor 2 does not
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-424
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8210: DF staple motor front/rear error

The home position could not be detected after passing 3s when replacing to the home position at the initial operation.

1 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple unit does not move front and
assembled properly. back manually, repair the position where
2 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit drive parts Reattach the DF staple unit drive parts. If not
they are faulty.
• DF staple motor - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF staple sensor - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF staple motor The DF staple motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Staple]. If the DF Maintenanc
staple motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF
Staple Unit
5 Checking the DF staple The DF staple motor is not Reattach the DF staple sensor. Then, Detaching
sensor properly attached, or it is replace the DF staple unit if the sensor is not and
faulty. fixed. reattaching
the DF
Staple Unit
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-425
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8230: DF staple motor error 1

DF staple JAM is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of JAM detection for the second time: after the motor is
started, home position can't be detected even 600ms passed.)

1 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple can't be done without paper
assembled properly. jam, repair the position where restricts the
operation.
• DF staple unit - DF PWB 'PWBs'
3 Replacing the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF
Staple Unit
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
C8250: DF main tray error 4

The lock-up detection signal is 0.7V or less for 10s continuously while driving the DF tray motor.

the operation.
faulty.
operation at U240.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-426
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8260: DF middle motor HP detection error

J790X (Middle paddle jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the DF paddle drive The DF paddle drive Reattach the DF paddle drive components.
components components are not properly Or replace.
attached, or it is faulty.
2 Checking connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminals of the wire connector Service
connected. and reinstall it. Manual -
Or the wire is faulty. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
'PWBs'
• DF paddle sensor - DF PWB
3 Replacing DF middle motor The DF middle motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Middle(H)] or Maintenanc
[Middle(L)] e Mode List
Replace the DF middle motor if it does not
operate properly.
4 Checking DF paddle sensor The DF paddle sensor is not Reattach the DF paddle sensor and execute Maintenanc
properly attached or faulty. U241 [Finisher] > [Lead Paddle]. e Mode List
Replace the DF paddle sensor if it does not
operate properly.
5 Replacing DF PWB DF PWB is faulty. Replace DF PWB. Detaching
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
C8300: Main program error / BF unit communication error

Object: 4000-sheet finisher with the folding unit
After confirming connection with the holding unit, the communication has cut off.

1 Checking the BF set sensor The BF set sensor is not Reattach the BF set sensor.
attached properly.
• BF PWB - DF PWB 'PWBs'
3 Replacing the BF set sensor The BF set sensor is faulty. Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Set]. If the BF set Maintenanc
sensor does not operate properly, replace it. e Mode List
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-427
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8310: BF side registration motor 2 error

BF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 1s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the upper BF side The upper BF side registration If the BF side registration upper guide does
registration guide guide is not assembled not move front and back manually, repair the
properly. position where restricts the operation.
2 Checking the upper BF side The BF side registration upper Reattach the BF side registration upper
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are not guide drive parts. If not repaired, replace
properly attached, or they are them.
faulty.
• BF side registration motor 2 - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF side registration sensor 2 - BF PWB

4 Replacing BF side registration BF side registration motor 2 is Replace BF side registration motor 2 if it Maintenanc
motor 2 faulty. does not operate properly when checking the e Mode List
operation at U240.
5 Checking BF side registration BF side registration sensor 2 Reattach BF side registration sensor 2, then Maintenanc
sensor 2 is not properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Booklet] > [Width Down HP]. e Mode List
faulty. If BF side registration sensor 2 does not
C8320: BF adjustment motor error

At the initialization, turning on of the BF adjustment sensor is not detected after 2.5s passes.

1 Checking the BF shift belt The BF shift belt is not If the BF shift belt is not operated manually,
assembled properly. repair the part that restricts the operation.
2 Checking the BF shift belt The BF shift belt drive parts Reattach the BF shift belt drive parts. If the
drive parts are not properly attached, or belt comes off, reattach it. If not repaired,
they are faulty. replace the BF shift belt drive parts.
• BF adjusting motor 1, 2 - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF adjusting sensor 1, 2 - BF PWB

4 Replacing BF adjustment BF adjustment motors 1, 2 are Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Bundle Down] or Maintenanc
motors 1, 2 faulty. [Bundle Up]. If DF adjusting motor 1 or 2 e Mode List
does not operate properly, replace it.
5 Checking BF adjustment BF adjustment sensors 1, 2 Reattach BF adjusting sensor 1 or 2, then Maintenanc
sensors 1, 2 are not properly attached, or execute U241 [Booklet] > [Bundle Down HP] e Mode List
they are faulty. or [Bundle Up HP]. If BF adjusting sensor 1
or 2 does not operate properly, replace it.
7-428
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8330: BF blade motor error

The BF blade sensor does not turn on after passing 3s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the BF blade The BF blade is not If the BF blade does not operation manually,
operation.
2 Checking the BF blade drive The BF blade drive parts are Reattach the BF blade drive parts. If not
parts not properly attached, or they repaired, replace them.
are faulty.
• BF blade motor - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF blade sensor - BF PWB
4 Replacing the BF blade motor The BF blade motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Blade]. If the BF Maintenanc
blade motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace it.
5 Checking the BF blade sensor The BF blade sensor is not Reattach the BF blade sensor, then execute Maintenanc
properly attached. U241 [Booklet] > [Blade HP]. If the BF blade e Mode List
sensor does not operate properly, replace it.
C8340: BF staple motor error 1

BF staple JAM is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of JAM detection for the second time: after the motor is
started, home position can't be detected even 600ms passed.)

1 Checking the BF staple unit The BF staple unit is not If the BF staple unit does not operation
the operation.
2 Checking the BF staple unit The BF staple unit drive parts Reattach the BF staple unit drive parts. If not
they are faulty.
• BF staple unit - DF PWB 'PWBs'
4 Replacing the BF staple unit The BF staple motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Staple]. If the BF Maintenanc
replace the BF staple unit.
7-429
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8350: BF side registration motor 1 error

BF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 1s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the lower BF side The lower BF side registration If the BF side registration lower guide does
registration guide guide is not assembled not operation manually, repair the position
properly. where restricts the operation.
2 Checking the lower BF side The BF side registration lower Reattach the BF side registration lower guide
faulty.
• BF side registration motor 1 - BF PWB 'PWBs'
• BF side registration sensor 1 - BF PWB

4 Replacing BF side registration BF side registration motor 1 is Replace BF side registration motor 1 if it Maintenanc
motor 1 faulty. does not operate properly when checking the e Mode List
operation at U240.
5 Checking BF side registration BF side registration sensor 1 Reattach BF side registration sensor 1, then Maintenanc
sensor 1 is not properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Booklet] > [Width Up HP]. If e Mode List
faulty. BF side registration sensor 1 does not
C8360: BF main motor error

The lock-up signal was detected for 1s continuously during the motor operation.

1 Checking the BF conveying The BF conveying roller is not If the BF conveying roller is not rotated
roller assembled properly. manually, repair the part that restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the BF conveying The BF conveying roller drive Reattach the BF conveying roller drive parts.
roller drive parts parts are not properly If not repaired, replace them.
• BF main motor - BF PWB 'PWBs'
4 Replacing the BF main motor The BF main motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Blade]. If the BF Maintenanc
blade motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace it.
7-430
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8370: BF staple motor error 2

BF staple JAM is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of JAM detection for the second time: during the motor is
operating, home position can't be detected even 600ms passed.)

1 Checking the BF staple unit The BF staple unit is not If the BF staple unit does not operation
the operation.
2 Checking the BF staple unit The BF staple unit drive parts Reattach the BF staple unit drive parts. If not
they are faulty.
• BF staple unit - DF PWB 'PWBs'
4 Replacing the BF staple motor The BF staple motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Staple]. If the BF Maintenanc
replace it.
5 Replacing the BF staple unit The BF staple unit is faulty. Replace the BF staple unit.
C8380: BF eject pressure release motor error

Operation is not complete when passing 3s after starting up the BF eject pressure release motor

1 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• The BF eject pressure release motor - DF
PWB
• The BF eject pressure release HP sensor
- DF PWB
2 Repacing the BF eject The BF eject pressure release Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Staple]. If the BF
pressure release motor motor is faulty staple motor does not operate properly,
replace it.
3 Replacing the BF eject The BF eject pressure release Replace the BF eject pressure release HP
pressure release HP sensor HP sensor is faulty sensor
7-431
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8390: BF paddle motor error

Operation is not complete when passing 250ms after starting up the BF paddle motor

• BF eject pressure release motor - BF
PWB
• BF eject pressure release HP sensor -
BF PWB
2 Replacing the BF paddle The BF paddle motor is faulty Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Paddle]. Replace
motor the BF paddle motor if it does not operate
properly.
3 Replacing the BF paddle HP The BF paddleHP sensor is Replace the BF paddle HP sensor
sensor faulty
C8400: BF conveying tray motor error

Lock signal is detected for 100ms when passing 1s after starting the BF conveying tray motor drive

• Tthe BF conveying tray motor - BF PWB
2 Replacing the BF conveying Tthe BF conveying tray motor Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Feed Tray].
tray motor is faulty Replace the BF conveying tray motor if it
does not operate properly.
7-432
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8410: PH slide motor error 1

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher with the punch unit
The PH slide sensor does not turn on after shifting 30mm when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch slide section does not move
assembled properly. front and back manually, repair the position
where restricts the operation.
2 Checking the PH drive parts The PH drive parts are not Reattach the PH drive parts. If not repaired,
attached properly, or faulty. replace them.
• PH slide motor - PH PWB 'PWBs'
• PH slide sensor - PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing the PH slide motor The PH slide motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Punch Move]. If the Maintenanc
PH slide motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace the DF staple unit.
5 Checking the PH slide sensor The PH slide sensor is not Reattach the PH slide sensor, then check the Maintenanc
properly attached, or it is sensor operation by executing U241. If the e Mode List
faulty. PH slide sensor does not operate properly,
replace it.
and
reattaching
the PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/D
Installation
Guide)
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-433
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8420: PH slide motor error 2

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher with the punch unit
The paper edge cannot be detected even if shifting 30mm when detecting the paper edge.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch slide section does not move
assembled properly. front and back manually, repair the position
where restricts the operation.
2 Checking the PH drive parts The PH drive parts are not Reattach the PH drive parts. If not repaired,
attached properly, or faulty. replace them.
• PH slide motor - PH PWB 'PWBs'
• PH paper edge sensor 1, 2 - PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing the PH slide motor The PH slide motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Punch Move]. If the Maintenanc
PH slide motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace the DF staple unit.
5 Checking the PH paper edge PH paper edge sensors 1, 2 Reattach PH paper edge sensor 1 or 2, then Maintenanc
sensors 1, 2 are not properly attached, or check the sensor operation by executing e Mode List
they are faulty. U241. If PH paper edge sensor 1 or 2 does
and
reattaching
the PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/D
Installation
Guide)
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-434
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8430: Main program error / Punch unit communication error

The communication could not succeed after confirming the connection with the punch unit.

• PH PWB - DF PWB 'PWBs'
and
reattaching
the PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/D
Installation
Guide)
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
C8500: Main program error / Mail Box communication error

Object: 4000-sheet finisher with the mail box
The communication failed after confirming the connection with the mail box.

1 Resetting the main power The PWB malfunctions. Turn the power switch and the main power
• MT PWB - DF PWB 'PWBs'

the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-435
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8510: MB conveying motor error 1

The MT home position sensor does not turn on after passing 10s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying roller is not If the MT conveying roller is not rotated
operation.
• MT conveying motor - MT PWB 'PWBs'

3 Replacing the MT conveying The MT conveying motor is Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If the MT Maintenanc
motor faulty. conveying motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace it.
4 Checking the MT home The MT home position is not Reattach the MT home position sensor, then Maintenanc
position sensor properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor HP]. If the e Mode List
faulty. MT home position sensor does not operate
C8520: MB conveying motor error 2

The MT home position sensor does not turn off after passing 2s during the standby operation.

1 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying roller is not If the MT conveying roller is not rotated
operation.
2 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying roller drive Reattach the MT conveying roller drive parts.
roller drive parts parts are not properly
3 Replacing the MT conveying The MT conveying roller drive Replace the MT conveying roller drive parts.
roller drive parts parts are faulty.
• MT conveying motor - MT PWB 'PWBs'

5 Replacing the MT conveying The MT conveying motor is Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If the MT Maintenanc
motor faulty. conveying motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace it.
6 Checking the MT home The MT home position is not Reattach the MT home position sensor, then Maintenanc
position sensor properly attached, or it is execute U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor HP]. If the e Mode List
faulty. MT home position sensor does not operate
7-436
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8600:DF adjusting release motor error

Change of DF adjusting release HP sensor was not detected when driving the DF adjusting release motor for 3s in the
direction of HP sensor change

1 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminals of the wire connector
connected properly, or the and reinstall it.
wire is faulty. If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF adjusting release motor - DF PWB
• DF adjusting release HP sensor - DF
PWB
2 Replacing the DF adjusting The DF adjusting release Execute U240 [Motor] > [Match Pressure]
release motor motor is faulty. Replace the DF adjusting release motor if it
3 Replacing the adjusting The DF adjusting release HP Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Match Coro HP]
release HP sensor sensor is faulty. Replace the DF adjusting release HP sensor
if it does not operate properly.
C8610: DF pull-in guide release motor error

Change of DF pull-in guide release HP sensor was not detected when driving the DF pull-in guide release motor for 3s
in the direction of HP sensor change

• DF pull-in guide release motor - DF PWB
PWB
2 Replacing the DF pull-in guide The DF pull-in guide release Execute U240 [Motor] > [Beat]
release motor motor is faulty. Replace the DF adjusting release motor if it
3 Replacing the DF pull-in guide The DF pull-in guide release Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Rear Beat HP]
release HP sensor HP sensor is faulty. Replace the DF adjusting release HP sensor
if it does not operate properly.
7-437
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8620:DF pull-in pulley pressure release motor error

Change of DF pull-in pulley pressure release HP sensor was not detected when driving the DF pull-in pulley pressure
release motor for 3s in the direction of HP sensor change

PWB
PWB
2 Replacing the DF pull-in pulley The DF pull-in pulley pressure Execute U240 [Motor] > [Pull Pressure]
pressure release motor release motor is faulty. Replace the DF pull-in pulley pressure
release motor if it does not operate properly.
3 Replacing the DF pull-in guide The DF pull-in pulley pressure Execute U241 [Finisher] > [Pull Coro HP]
release HP sensor release HP sensor is faulty. Replace the DF pull-in pulley pressure
release HP sensor if it does not properly
operate.
C8630: Eject pressure release motor error

Change of the eject pressure release HP switch was not detected when driving the eject pressure release motor for 3s
in the direction of HP sensor change.

• DF eject pressure release motor - DF
PWB
• DF eject pressure release HP sensor -
DF PWB
2 Replacing the DF eject The DF eject release motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Eject Unlock]
pressure release motor faulty. Replace the DF eject release motor if it does
not operate properly.
3 Checking the DF eject The DF eject pressure release Reattach the DF eject pressure release HP
pressure release sensor sensor is not attached sensor and execute U241 [Finisher] > [Eject
properly or faulty. Press HP].
Replace the DF eject pressure release HP
sensor if it does not operate properly.
4 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace DF PWB. Detaching
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-438
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8640: DF side registration motor 1 error

Change of DF side registration HP sensor 1 was not detected when driving the DF side registration motor 1 for 3s in the

PWB
2 Replacing DF side registration The connector is not properly Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test]
motor 1 connected. Replace DF side registration motor 1 if it
Or the wire is faulty. does not operate properly.
3 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 1 is Reattach DF side registration sensor 1 and
HP sensor faulty. execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Front HP].
DF side registration sensor 1 Replace DF side registration HP sensor 1 if it
is not properly attached or does not operate properly.
faulty.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
C8650: DF side registration motor 2 error

Change of DF side registration HP sensor 2 was not detected when driving the DF side registration motor 2 for 3s in the

PWB
2 Replacing DF side registration The DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test]
motor 2 2 is faulty. Replace DF side registration motor 2 if it
3 Checking the DF side DF side registration sensor 2 Reattach DF side registration sensor 2 and
registration HP sensor 1 is not properly attached or execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP].
faulty. Replace DF side registration motor 2 if it
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-439
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8700:DF bundle eject motor 1 error

Change of DF bundle eject HP sensor 1 was not detected when driving the DF bundle eject motor 1 for 3s in the

• DF bundle eject motor 1 - DF PWB
• DF bundle eject HP sensor 1 - DF PWB
2 Replacing DF bundle eject The bundle eject motor 1 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Bundle Up]
motor 1 faulty. Replace the DF bundle eject motor 1 if it
3 Checking the DF paper stack The DF bundle eject HP Reattach the DF bundle eject HP sensor 1
eject sensor sensor 1 is not attached and execute U241 [Finisher] > [Bundle Eject
properly or faulty. HP1].
DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF bundle eject HP sensor 1 if it
does not properly operate.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
C8710:DF bundle eject motor 2 error

Change of DF bundle eject HP sensor 2 was not detected when driving the DF bundle eject motor 2 for 3s in the

• DF bundle eject motor 2 - DF PWB
• DF bundle eject HP sensor 2 - DF PWB
2 Replacing DF bundle eject The bundle eject motor 2 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Bundle Up]
motor 2 faulty. Replace the DF bundle eject motor 2 if it
3 Checking the DF bundle eject The DF bundle eject HP Reattach the DF bundle eject HP sensor 2
HP sensor 2 sensor 2 is not attached and execute U241 [Finisher] > [Bundle Eject
properly or faulty. HP2]. Replace the DF bundle eject HP
sensor 2 if it does not properly operate.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-440
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8720:DF eject paddle motor error

Change of DF eject paddle HP sensor was not detected when driving the DF eject paddle motor for 3s in the direction of
HP sensor change

• DF eject paddle motor - DF PWB
• DF eject paddle HP sensor - DF PWB
2 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Tray Eject Paddle]
motor Replace the DF eject paddle motor if it does
not operate properly.
3 Checking the DF eject sensor The DF eject paddle sensor is Reattach the DF eject paddle HP sensor and
not properly attached or faulty. execute U241 [Finisher] > [Eject Paddle HP].
Replace the DF eject paddle HP sensor if it
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
C8730: DF eject paper trailing edge holding motor error

Change of DF eject paper trailing edge holding HP sensor was not detected when driving the DF eject paper trailing
edge holding motor for 3s in the direction of HP sensor change

• DF eject paper trailing edge holding
motor - DF PWB
• DF eject paper trailing edge holding HP
sensor - DF PWB
2 Replacing the DF eject paper The DF eject paper trailing Execute U240 [Motor] > [Press Paper]
trailing edge holding motor edge holding motor is faulty. Replace the DF eject paper trailing edge
holding motor if it does not operate properly.
3 Checking the DF eject paper DF eject paper holding sensor Reattach the DF exit paddle HP sensor and
trailing edge holding HP is not properly attached or execute U241 [Finisher] > [Press Paper HP].
sensor faulty. Replace the DF eject paper trailing edge
holding HP sensor if it does not operate
properly.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-441
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8740: DF eject support guide motor error

Change of DF eject support guide HP sensor was not detected when driving the DF support guide motor for 3s in the

• DF eject holding guide motor - DF PWB
• DF eject holding guide HP sensor - DF
PWB
2 Replacing the DF eject DF eject support guide motor Execute U240 [Motor] > [Eject Guide]
support guide motor is faulty. Replace the DF eject support guide motor if
it does not operate properly.
3 Replacing the DF eject DF bundle support guide Reattach the DF eject support guide HP
support guide HP sensor sensor is not attached sensor and execute U241 [Finisher] > [Eject
properly or faulty. Guide].
DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF eject paper trailing edge
holding HP sensor if it does not operate
properly.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-442
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8800: Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF)

1. When turning on the power, there was an error in the main program.
2. The communication error between the Engine and DF is detected 10 times continuously.
3. The ready signal is not notified from the DF within 6s after the communication starts.

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start up Turn the power switch and the main power
properly. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
• DF PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C8810:DF-SubCPU communication error

Communication with SubCPU fails 3 times continuously.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the DF firmware to the latest
version. version.
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-443
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8900: DF backup error

Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher, 100-sheet staple finisher
(For internal counting)

Write data and the read data mismatch 3 times continuously.

1 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminals of the wire connector Service
connected properly, or the and reinstall it. Manual -
'PWBs'
• DF PWB - Engine PWB
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
C8930: BF unit backup error

Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher, 100-sheet staple finisher
(For internal counting)

Write data and read data mismatch 3 times continuously.

1 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminals of the wire connector Service
connected properly, or the and reinstall it. Manual -
'PWBs'
• BF PWB - DF PWB
1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version
7-444
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9000: Main program error / DP communication error

Object: Document processor
The document processor cannot be communicated.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware version between Upgrade the firmware for the main unit and Firmware
the main unit and the the document processor to the latest version. Update
document processor
mismatches.
• DP PWB - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C9040: DP lift motor ascend error

Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Turning on of the DP lift upper limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift motor
ascend drive. That status was continued 5 times or more.

1 Checking the original lift plate The original lift plate is not If the original lift plate does not move up and
attached properly. Or, the down manually, repair the position where
fulcrum located at the back there is stuck. If damaged, replace it.
side of the machine for the
original lift plate is broken.
• DP lift upper limit sensor - DP PWB

3 Replacing the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is faulty. Execute U243 [Lift Motor]. If the DP lift motor Maintenanc
does not operate properly, replace it. e Mode List
4 Checking the DP lift upper limit The DP lift upper limit sensor Reattach the DP lift upper limit sensor and Maintenanc
sensor is not properly attached, or it is execute U244 [Lift U-Limit]. If the sensor e Mode List
faulty. does not operate properly, replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-445
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9050: DP lift motor descend error

Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Turning on of the DP lift lower limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift motor
descend drive. (The recovery is 3 times.)

1 Checking the original lift plate The DP original lift plate is not If the original lift plate does not move up and
properly attached. down manually, repair the position where
• DP lift lower limit sensor - DP PWB

3 Replacing the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is faulty. Execute U243 [Lift Motor]. If the DP lift motor Maintenanc
does not operate properly, replace it. e Mode List
4 Checking the DP lift lower limit The DP lift lower limit sensor is Reattach the DP lift lower limit sensor and Maintenanc
sensor not properly attached, or it is execute U244 [Lift L-Limit]. If the sensor e Mode List
faulty. does not operate properly, replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
C9060: DP EEPROM error

Object: Document processor
The writing data and the reading data into the EEPROM mismatch.

1 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM on the DP PWB. Detaching
installed. and
reattaching
the DF PWB
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the DP PWB, then Detaching
execute U411. and
reattaching
the DF PWB
Maintenanc
e Mode List
7-446
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9070: DP - SHD communication error

The communication error between the DP PWB and the DP SHD PWB is detected during the communication.

and
reattaching
the DF PWB
C9080: LED failure detection

For internal count
After 4 blocks of the LED lamps of the DPCIS are lit when turning on the power, the acquired peak value of some blocks
is the reference value or less.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp of the DPCIS Execute U203 to confirm that the LED lamp Maintenanc
does not light. of the DPCIS does not light. Go to the next e Mode List
step.
properly connected.
4 Executing U411 DP scanning is not properly Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartB)] and [DP Maintenanc
adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. e Mode List
5 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U091 Detaching
and U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
7-447
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9180: DP feed-shift motor error

Remarks: When detecting the DP feed-shift motor error (C9180) (up to 2 times), display J9002.
HP can't be detected even after the retrying process for the HP detection of the DP feed-shift guide for 3 times
continuously.
* HP detection of the DP feed-shift guide: When the DP feed-shift motor moves to HP, if HP can't be detected even
driving the DP feed-shift motor for 1 round, the retry is done.

1 Removing the original The original accordion jam in Remove the original which is stuck in the
the guide between the DP guide between the DP reversing tray and DP
reversing tray and the DP registration roller.
registration roller (The position
is not visible when the DP
upper cover is opened)
2 Cleaning the original Sticky foreign objects adhere Clean the original conveying guide.
conveying guide. to the original conveying guide
3 Resetting the main power The DP feed-shift motor is not Turn the power switch and the main power
controlled correctly. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
4 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor is not After removing the DP feed-shift motor and
motor rotated correctly. Or, there is repair it by rotating the drive section
an excess load. manually, reattach it.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the connector terminal of the wire and Service
connected properly, or the reconnect. If there is no continuity, replace Manual -
wire is faulty. the wire. Section 8
• DP feed-shift motor - DP PWB 'PWBs'
• DP feed-shift sensor - DP PWB

7 Replacing the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor is Replace the DP feed-shift motor.
motor faulty.
8 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift sensor is Reattach the DP feed-shift sensor. If not
sensor not attached properly or faulty. repaired, replace it.
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
C9500: Image processing PWB error (Scanner)

• Engine PWB - Main PWB 'PWBs'
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-448
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9510: Image processing circuit error (DP)

properly attached.
2 Checking the connection The SATA cable is not Reconnect the connector of the following Service
properly connected, or it is SATA cable. If there is no continuity, replace Manual -
faulty. the SATA cable. Section 8
• DP SHD PWB - DP relay PWB 'PWBs'
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
C9540: Backup data error

When multiple parts are replaced at the same time, the internal data is changed and it interferes with the machine
operation. Consequently, the main unit cannot recover.

1 Checking the PWB Multiple PWBs were replaced Recover to the original, if 2 or more of the
at the same time. following related parts were replaced at the
same time.
• Related parts: Memory, each PWB
2 Checking the unit Multiple units were replaced at Be sure not to perform the following works at
the same time. the same time when the memory or each
PWB is replaced.
• Replacing the drum unit or the developer
unit
• Relocating the drum units to other color's
position inside a main unit
7-449
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)System Error (Fxxxx)

(2-1)System Error code list
Error code Contents

F000 Communication error between the main unit and CPU
F010 Program read error (SSD)
F020 System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
F021 System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
F022 System memory error (RAM read/write error, or ASIC memory error)
F040 Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between the controller and the
print engine)
F041 Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
F050 Engine main program error
F051 Scanner engine program error
F052 Panel engine program error
F053 Main program signature verification error
F14E Error detection at FAX control section
F186 Abnormal detection in the Video control section
F278 Error detection of the secondary power supply
7-450
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Content of System Error (Fxxxx)

F000: Communication error between the main unit and CPU
The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main PWB and the operation panel main
PWB is unavailable.

1 Resetting the main power The communication between Turn off the power switch and the main
the main PWB and the power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
operation panel main PWB is main power switch and the power switch.
faulty.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the below wire, the terminal of SATA Service
connected properly. Or, the cable connector and reconnect them. If there Manual -
wire or the SATA cable is is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
faulty. • Main PWB - Operation panel main PWB "PWBs"
3 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM Maintenanc
faulty. data. e Mode List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
reattaching
the
Operation
Panel Main
PWB
7-451
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F010: Program read error (SSD)

The garbled 2bit data was detected during the program read from the flash memory.

1 (When the service call error The firmware is not stored in Insert the USB memory device containing all Firmware
appears after replacing the the SSD. released firmware into the main unit, and Update
SSD) Replacing the SSD turn the main power on.
along the correct procedures
2 Checking the SSD (if lit after An SSD out of specification is Install the SSD matching the memory
replacing the SSD) installed. capacity specification.
faulty.
4 Checking the SSD The SSD is not installed Check if there is an error on the terminal of Detaching
properly. the SSD and Clean. After that, reconnect and
SSD. reattaching
the SSD
5 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the below wire, the terminal of SATA Service
connected properly. Or, the cable connector and reconnect them. If there Manual -
wire or the SATA cable is is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
faulty. • Main PWB - Operation panel main PWB "PWBs"
7 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Execute U026 to back up the SSD data. After Maintenanc
that, replace SSD and turn on the power e Mode List
while USB memory that contains the Detaching
firmware for the appropriate model is and
inserted to the main unit. reattaching
the SSD
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-452
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.

faulty.
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for main PWB ASIC at start up.

1 Resetting the main power The main PWB does not Turn off the power switch and the main
properly start up. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
main power switch and the power switch.
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-453
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F022: System memory error (RAM read/write error, or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for DP relay PWB ASIC at start up.

1 Resetting the main power The main PWB does not Turn off the power switch and the main
properly start up. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
3 Checking the DP relay PWB DP relay PWB is not Reattach the DP relay PWB and tighten the DP-7110
connected or installed screw. If not repaired, replace the DP relay Installation
properly. PWB. Guide
F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between the
controller and the print engine)
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB.

the controller and the print power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
engine is faulty. main power switch and the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wireService
Manual -
Section 8
• Engine PWB (YC43) - Main PWB (YC63) "PWBs"
• Engine PWB - Low voltage PWB (YC63)
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
6 Replacing the low voltage Power is not supplied from the If there is no output of 5V and 24V from the Detaching
PWB low voltage PWB to the engine low voltage PWB, replace the low voltage and
PWB. PWB. reattaching
the Low
Voltage
PWB
7-454
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB (Scanner).

the controller and the scanner power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
is faulty. main power switch and the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and Service
connected properly. Or, the reconnect the FFC. If there is no continuity, Manual -
wire or FFC is faulty. replace the wire. If the FFC terminal section Section 8
is deformed or FFC is broken, replace the "PWBs"
FFC.
• Main PWB - Engine PWB
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
F050: Engine main program error

The engine program cannot start up.

2 Resetting the main power The print engine ROM Turn off the power switch and the main
checksum is faulty. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
3 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM.
attached.
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it. "PWBs"
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-455
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F051: Scanner engine program error

The scanner program cannot start up

2 Resetting the main power The scanner engine RAM Turn off the power switch and the main
checksum is faulty. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
3 Checking the SSD The SSD is not installed Reinstall SSD. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the SSD
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it. "PWBs"
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
F052: Panel engine program error

The panel program cannot start up.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the panel firmware to the latest Firmware
2 Resetting the main power The panel RAM checksum is Turn off the power switch and the main
faulty. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the connector on the operation panel Service
connected properly, or the main PWB and reconnect the connector. If Manual -
"PWBs"
reattaching
the
Operation
Panel Main
PWB
F053: Main program signature verification error

Signature verification of main program fails in booting up.

1 Replacing the main PWB and Machine can not read FW Replace the main PWB.and SSD Detaching
SSD. correctly. and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-456
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F14E: Error detection at FAX control section

If the communication between the main PWB and the FAX is interrupted, the signal is resent but it continues to wait until
necessary signal comes in and locks up.

1 Resetting the main power As the power reset was Turn off the power switch and the main
performed instantly, an error power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
occurred in the main power switch and the power switch.
communication between the
controller and the FAX.
2 Checking the connection The FAX PWB is not Clean the following connection terminals and Service
connected properly. reconnect the FAX PWB. Manual -
• Main PWB - FAX PWB Section 8
"PWBs"
FAX
Installation
Guide
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest Firmware
Installation
Guide
F186: Abnormal detection in the Video control section

There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB.

1 Resetting the main power As the power reset was Turn off the power switch and the main
performed instantly, an error power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
occurred in the main power switch and the power switch.
communication between the
controller and the engine.
2 Checking the connection FFC is not connected properly. Clean the following FFC terminal of the FFC Service
Or it is faulty. and reconnect. If the FFC terminal is Manual -
deformed or FFC is short circuited, replace Section 8
FFC. "PWBs"
• Engine PWB (YC35) - Main PWB (YC43)
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-457
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F278: Error detection of the secondary power supply

The operation became unstable as the primary power supply temporarily drops off and recovers.

1 Resetting the main power The power reset was Turn off the power switch and the main
performed instantly. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the connector on the low voltage PWB Service
connected properly, or the and reconnect the connector of the wire. If Manual -
"PWBs"
3 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB. Detaching
PWB and
reattaching
the Low
Voltage
PWB
7-458
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

The document is described for the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in the self-diagnosis
error code list.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.
IMPORTANT
• Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after
turning the power off and then on.
Num Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

ber
― It locks on a Welcome (1) Check the harness of the connection state of a connector * Execution of U024 will
screen.It locks on a between Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation vanish user data and the
starting logo (Taskalfa/ check. software installed.
Ecosys) screen.(Even if (2)Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required.
time passes for a definite
(FULL of U024) *
period of time in more
than * notes, a screen (3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
does not change) operation check is performed.
(4) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation
check.
(5) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(6) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service
headquarters.
*: Only HDD standard model
F000 CF000 will be displayed if (1) Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>HDD), * Execution of U024 will
* notes progress is and the connection state of a connector between vanish user data and the
carried out for a definite Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation check. software installed.
period of time with a (2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Reinstallation is required.
Welcome screen.The U024) *
communication fault
(3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
between Panel-Main
operation check is performed.
boards.Communication
fault between Panel Core- (4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
Main Core Notes 2 (5) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation
check.
(6) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service
headquarters.
* Note 2 : Only Dual Core CPU model
F12X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards, * Execution of U024 will
Scan control section and the connection state of a connector, and perform an vanish user data and the
operation check. software installed.
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required.
(FULL of U024) *
(4) Exchange a DP I/F, Engine and SHD board and perform
an operation check.
Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
7-459
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
F14X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between FAX<=>Main boards, and * Execution of U024 will
FAX control part the connection state of a connector, and perform an vanish user data and the
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required.
(FULL of U024) *
(4) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by
U671. *1
(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions
are required.)
(5) Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check.
*1
(6) Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check.
(8) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
*1: Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main
board
F15X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between authentication device Authentication device: IC
an authentication device <=>Main boards, and the connection situation of a card reader etc.
control section connector, and perform an operation check. * Execution of U024 will
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of vanish user data and the
U024) * software installed.
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an Reinstallation is required.
operation check.
(5) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F17X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of * Execution of U024 will
printer data control part U024) * vanish user data and the
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an software installed.
operation check. Reinstallation is required.
F18X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Engine<=>Main boards, and * Execution of U024 will
Video control section the connection state of a connector, and perform an vanish user data and the
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
U024) * Reinstallation is required.
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
(4) Exchange an Engine board and perform an operation
check.
7-460
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
F1DX Abnormality detecting of (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Poor arrangement of
the image memory U024) * F1D4:Random Access
Management Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an Memory(1) Confirmation of
operation check. U340(2) Initialization of a set
point (U021)
F21X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
an image-processing part U024) *
F22X
F23X operation check.
F24X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of F248 is the abnormalities of
the system Management U024) * a printer process.In recurring
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an by specific printer data,
operation check. please give me cooperation
at acquisition of capture data
and USBLOG.
F25X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of It may occur according to a
network management U024) * visitor's network
department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an environment.
operation check.
the system Management U024) *
F27X Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F29X
F2AX (5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F2BX Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
network control part U024) *
F2CX
F2DX operation check.
F2EX
F2FX * Only HDD standard model
F30X
F31X
F32X
7-461
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
F33X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards,
the Scan Management and the connection state of a connector, and perform an
Department operation check.
U024) *
operation check.
(4) Exchange a Engine/DP Driver board and perform an
operation check.
F34X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and
the Panel Management the connection state of a connector, and perform an
Department operation check.*1
U024) *
operation check.
(4) Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation
check. * Notes
*1: A Dual Core CPU model and HyPAS model
the printing controlling U024) *
Management Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
F37X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * FAX????Flash??
the FAX Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an SSD???
(3) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by
U671.(Since it disappears when received data remain,
cautions are required.) * notes
(4) Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check. *
Notes
* Only SSD standard model
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main
board
7-462
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
the authentication U024) *
authorized Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F3AX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
the Entity Management U024) *
F3BX Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F3CX operation check.
F3DX
F3EX (5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F3FX * Only HDD standard model
F40X
F41X
F42X
F43X
F44X
F45X
F46X Abnormality detecting of a (1) Exchange boards and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of
printer rendering part (2) the acquisition wish of USBLOG -- carry out(Depending a printer process.In recurring
on the (2) case, it is print capture data acquisition) by specific printer data,
please give me cooperation
at acquisition of capture data
and USBLOG.
F47X Abnormality detecting of (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
an image editing U024) *
F48X processing part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F4AX Abnormality detecting of a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
printer rendering part U024) *
F4CX
operation check.
7-463
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
F4DX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
the Entity Management U024) *
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
F50X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
the FAX Management U024) * immediately after occurrence
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
F60X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. In case of F60A:
the maintenance mode/ (FULL of U024) * 60A is occurred when device
Remote Service (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an registered
Management Department operation check. Remote Service detects off-
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. line status with external
system.
Please check device Network
Settings and Network
* Only HDD standard model environment which device is
used
(include Disconnection rule/
status in night time and on
weekends.)
F61X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
report creation part U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
F63X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
device control section U024) *
operation check.
7-464
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
F68X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of F684 is the overwrite error at
device control section U024) * the time of an HDD security
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an kit.
operation check.
the extension application U024) * immediately after occurrence
service part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
management part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
FC0X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
system application U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FC5X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Copy application U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FCAX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Print application U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
7-465
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
FCFX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Send application U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FD4X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Box application U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FD9X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
FAX application U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FDEX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
maintenance application U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FF7X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
report creation part U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FE5X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
printer (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
7-466
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
FE9X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
the Application System U024) * immediately after occurrence
Management Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
FF9X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Service Cooperation U024) * immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
7-467
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
7 - 4 FAX Related Errors
7-468
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1)FAX Related Errors

No. Contents
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card
(2) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error
(5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(7) C0920: FAX file system error
(8) C0950: FAX job stay error
(9) F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section
(10) The FAX cannot be sent
(11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished
(12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data:
7-469
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of FAX Related Errors

(1-1)The login fails with other than the ID card

1 Changing the setting [User/Job Account] is valid Set [Permit] at [User/Job Account] > [ID Card ID Card
while the card authentication Settings] > [Key Login] via the System Menu. Authenticati
kit is not installed. on Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 9)
(1-2)C0030: FAX PWB system error

The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

Update
Installation
Guide
(1-3)C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX PWB is Install the FAX PWB for the applicable FAX
installed. model. Installation
Guide
Update
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-470
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-4)C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error

The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Checking the SSD The SSD (FAX image storage) When installing the SSD used once, replace Detaching
already used in other unit is with the correct SSD. and
the SSD
2 Executing U671 The SSD (FAX image storage) When installing the SSD used once, execute Maintenanc
already used in other unit is U671 [FAX Data CLEAR]. e Mode List
reused without executing
U671.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The SSD (FAX image storage) Be sure to install the SSD to the connector Detaching
is not properly installed. on the main PWB. and
reattaching
the SSD
4 Replacing the SSD The SSD (FAX image storage) Replace with the new SSD. Detaching
is faulty. and
reattaching
the SSD
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
(1-5)C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Update
2 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not Turn off the power switch and the main FAX
connected properly. power switch. After 5s passes, reinstall the Installation
faulty. e Mode List
Installation
Guide
7-471
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-6)C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data is
transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn the power switch and the main power FAX
operate properly. switch off. After 5s passes, reattach the FAX Installation
PWB and turn the main power switch and the Guide
power switch on.
faulty. e Mode List
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest Firmware
version. Update
Installation
Guide
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD is Execute U024 [SSD Format]. Maintenanc
faulty. e Mode List
(1-7)C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the FAX. Maintenanc
incorrect e Mode List
3 Reconnecting the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not Reinstall FAX PWB to Main PWB. FAX
connected properly. Installation
Guide
Update
Installation
Guide
7-472
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-8)C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn the power switch and the main power
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the main firmware to the latest Firmware
version. Update
(1-9)F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the main firmware and the FAX Firmware
firmware to the latest version. Update
2 Checking the connection The FAX PWB is not Check the connection between the main FAX
connected properly. PWB and the FAX PWB, and reconnect it if Installation
necessary. Guide
Installation
Guide
(1-10)The FAX cannot be sent

1 Checking the connection of The modular cable Reconnect the modular cable.
the modular cable disconnects.
2 Changing the connection If the adapter and the Directly connect the main unit to the
switching device or the like is telephone line.
connected to the telephone
line, it is affected.
3 Changing the setting The line settings are incorrect. Correct the line settings. (Reduce the
transmission speed, etc.)
4 Checking the status at the The destination unit is busy. Wait a while and then redial the number if
destination unit. busy tones are heard.
5 Checking the status at the The modular cable is Request the destination unit to reconnect the FAX
destination unit. disconnected in the modular cable. Operation
destination unit if the Guide
destination unit does not
receive the calling.
6 Checking the setting at the The manual reception is set in Ask the destination unit to change the FAX
destination unit the destination unit if the reception settings. Operation
destination unit does not Guide
receive the calling.
7 Changing the sending content When transmitting the data to Input a pause at the last of the destination FAX
the other country, the FAX number. Operation
communication line is Guide
automatically cut.
7-473
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-11)The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished

(1-12)When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the
A4 size data:

1 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select [B4] or [A3/Ledger] according to the FAX
destination unit is A4 / Letter. receivable size at the Address book Operation
registration display > [i-FAX] > [Paper size]. Guide
2 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select the condition of the destination unit FAX
destination unit is A4 / Letter. when transmitting the data, choose [B4] or Operation
[A3/Ledger] according to the receivable Guide
sizes.
7-474
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Communication Errors
Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication U
followed by a 5-digit number. (The V.34 error is indicated with E of the error code and 5-digit number)
Regarding the 5-digit number, upper 3 digits indicate error and large classification of cause, lower 2 digits small
classification of cause. The lower 2 digits are 00 for the item not requiring the category.
Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code
General classification of error code
Error code indication
Error code
Error code Contents
U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.
U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted number. Or, sub address-
based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted ID
in the transmitting unit.
U00431/E00431 An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub address password was
not registered.
U00432/E00432 A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address password did not match.
U00433/E00433 A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the sub address
box.
U00440/E00440 Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450 The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.
U00460/E00460 The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered.
U00462/E00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not
registered.
U00601/E00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00613/E00613 Image writing section problem
U00656/E00656 The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.
U00690/E00690 System error
U00800/E00800 A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.
U00811/E00811 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900/E00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN
signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001/E01001 Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
7-475
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

U01016/E01016 T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM signal.
U01019/E01019 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CNC signal.
(between own machines)
U01020/E01020 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CTC signal. (ECM)
U01021/E01021 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending EOR•Q signal.
(ECM)
U01022/E01022 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending RR signal. (ECM)
U01028/E01028 T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).
U01052/E01052 DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080 PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.
U01092/E01092 Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and communication speed
at V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094/E01094 DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.
U01096/E01096 DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase D during transmission.
U01097/E01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR signal or no response.
U01100/E01100 Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01101/E01101 Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01102/E01102 DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.
U01110/E01110 No response is received after sending DIS signal.
U01111/E01111 No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113/E01113 No response after transmitting an FTT signal.
U01125/E01125 No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)
U01129/E01129 No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)
U01141/E01141 DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.
U01143/E01143 DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.
U01155/E01155 DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160 Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.
U01162/E01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191/E01191 Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193 No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.
U01194/E01194 DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.
U01195/E01195 No message is received at phase C during reception.
U01196/E01196 Error line control overflow and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.
U01400/E01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500/E01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600/E01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U01700/E01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720/E01720 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01721/E01721 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the
destination unit.
U01800/E01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810/E01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820/E01820 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01821/E01821 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the
destination unit.
U03000/E03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03200/E03200 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the data was not stored in the box specified by the
destination unit.
7-476
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

U03300/E03300 In polling reception from a unit of our own model, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permitted ID
or telephone number. Or, in interoffice sub address-based bulletin board reception, operation was interrupted
due to a mismatch in permitted ID or telephone number.
U03400/E03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit is either of our
make or by another manufacturer).
U03500/E03500 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the specified sub address password was not registered in
the destination unit.
U03600/E03600 An interoffice sub address bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified sub
address password.
U03700/E03700 Interoffice sub address bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no sub address bulletin
board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any sub address box in the destination unit.
U04000/E04000 In interoffice sub address transmission mode, the specified sub address password was not registered in the
destination unit.
U04100/E04100 The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.
U04300/E04300 The encryption transmission was carried out, but there is no encryption function at the other machine.
U04400/E04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500/E04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100/E05100 The transmission was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check transmission).
U05200/E05200 Restricted reception (Password check reception) was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did
not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the destination unit did not return its phone number.
U05300/E05300 The destination unit set the restricted reception (Password check reception). Consequently, the transmission
was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or
the own unit did not return its phone number.
U14000/E14000 Memory overflowed during the sub address confidential reception.
U14100/E14100 In interoffice sub address transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000/E19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100/E19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit while transmitting the data.
U19300/E19300 Transmission failed because an error appeared during JBIG encoding.
Content of Communication Errors

U00000/E00000
1 Resending The status is Busy. Check if the destination unit can receive the FAX
data and resend the data if there is no Operation
particular problem. Guide
U00100/E00100
1 Resending Transmission was interrupted Resend.
by a press of the stop/clear
key.
7-477
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00200/E00200

1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted by Suspend resending from the destination unit FAX
a press of the [Stop] key. or request the destination unit to resend the Operation
data. Guide
U00300/E00300
1 Request to the destination unit Recording paper on the Request the destination unit to set the FAX
destination unit has run out recording papers. Operation
during transmission. Guide
U00430/E00430
1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address bulletin Register a valid permitted number FAX
number board transmission were Operation
requested, but the Guide
communication was
interrupted because the
permitted ID did not match. (It
occurs in the transmitting unit.)
U00431/E00431
1 Request to the destination unit An sub address bulletin board Register the sub address password in the FAX
transmission was interrupted destination unit. Operation
because the specified sub Guide
address password was not
registered.
U00432/E00432
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin board Send by using correct the sub address FAX
password transmission was interrupted password. Operation
because the sub address Guide
password did not match.
U00433/E00433
1 Checking the sub address box A sub address bulletin board Set data in the sub address box. FAX
transmission request was Operation
received but data was not Guide
present in the sub address
box.
7-478
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00440/E00440

1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address password. FAX
password reception was interrupted Operation
because the specified sub Guide
address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450
1 Checking the permitted The reception was interrupted Register the permitted number to be FAX
number because the permitted ID and consistent at own machine side. Operation
FAX number did not match in Guide
the restricted transmission
(password check
transmission) in the
destination unit.
U00460/E00460
1 Checking the encryption key The encryption reception was Register an encrypted box number. FAX
interrupted because the Operation
specified encryption box Guide
number was not registered.
U00462/E00462
1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key. FAX
interrupted because the Operation
encryption key for the Guide
specified encryption box was
not registered.
U00601/E00601
1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and resend.
2 Checking the original The original length exceeds Check if the original length does not exceed
the maximum allowed. 1.6 meter and resend.
U00613/E00613
1 Checking the service call error Image writing section error Check the service call error record and Event Log
record perform the corrective actions. Report
Output
7-479
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00656/E00656

1 Resending Transmission was interrupted Resend.
because there was an error in
the modem.
2 Resetting the main power Transmission was interrupted Turn off the power switch and pull out the
because there was an error in power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
the modem. FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the FAX. Maintenanc
changed. e Mode List
Installation
Guide
U00690/E00690
1 Resetting the main power System error Turn off the power switch and pull out the
power plug. After passing 5s, reinsert the
power plug and turn on the power switch.
2 Measures for the system error System error in the main unit Perform the corrective actions for the system System
error in the main unit. Error List
U00800/E00800
1 Checking the transmit start A page transmission error In case pages are not properly sent and Maintenanc
speed occurred because of reception resending does not solve it, reduce transmit e Mode List
of a RTN or PIN signal. start speed and resend the data.
U00811/E00811
1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not properly sent and Maintenanc
remained after retry of resending does not solve it, reduce transmit e Mode List
transmission in the ECM start speed and resend the data.
mode.
U00900/E00900
1 Resending An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a page not
transmitted because of a page transmitted properly.
reception error.
7-480
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01000/E01000

1 Resending An FTT signal was received Resend.
for a set number of times after
TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal
was received in response to a
Q signal (excluding EOP) after
transmission at 2400 bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to reduce the Maintenanc
speed (Destination unit) transmit start speed. Then, resend the data. e Mode List
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the default value of the transmit start Maintenanc
machine) speed by executing U630 [TX Speed]. e Mode List
U01001/E01001
1 Resending Function as indicated by DIS Resend.
signal is not consistent with
the one of own machine.
U01016/E01016
1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since MBF Resend.
signal is received but DIS
signal is not after sending
EOM signal.
U01019/E01019
1 Resending Command send retrial times Resend.
exceeds since significant
signal is not received after
sending CNC signal. (between
own machines)
7-481
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01020/E01020

sending CTC signal. (ECM)
U01021/E01021
sending EOR•Q signal. (ECM)
U01022/E01022
sending RR signal. (ECM)
U01028/E01028
1 Resending T5 timeout is detected when Resend.
sending in ECM (ECM)
7-482
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01052/E01052

1 Resending DCN signal is received after Resend.
sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080
1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
U01092/E01092
1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol speed
and communication speed at
V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093
1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX Maintenanc
since the received signal is Mm Level]. (Initial setting: -43dBm) e Mode List
attenuated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650 Maintenanc
since the received signal is [Rag G3 RX Ear]. (Initial setting: 0dBm) e Mode List
response.
7-483
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01094/E01094

1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send retrial Resend.
time is exceeded at phase B
during transmission.
U01096/E01096
1 Resending DCN signal or invalid Resend.
command is received at phase
D during transmission.
U01097/E01097
1 Resending The preset number of Resend.
command retransfers was
exceeded after transmission of
an RR signal or no response.
U01100/E01100
1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request the destination unit to resend the
signal is not consistent with data.
the one of own machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing Maintenanc
machine) U630 [RX Speed]. e Mode List
U01101/E01101
1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request the destination unit to resend the
signal except communication data.
type is not consistent with the
one of own machine.
7-484
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01102/E01102

1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is received Request the destination unit to resend the
while own machine has no data.
transmission data.
U01110/E01110
1 Request for resending No response is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending DIS signal. data.
U01111/E01111
sending DTC (NSC) signal. data.
U01113/E01113
1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX Maintenanc
since the received signal is Mm Level]. (Initial setting: -43dBm) e Mode List
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650 Maintenanc
since the received signal is [Rag G3 RX Ear]. (Initial setting: 0dBm) e Mode List
response.
U01125/E01125
sending CNS signal. (between data.
own machine)
7-485
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01129/E01129

1 Request for resending No response after transmitting Request the destination unit to resend the
an SPA signal. (Short data.
protocol)
U01141/E01141
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending DTC signal. data.
U01143/E01143
1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received after Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650 Maintenanc
sending FTT signal. [Rag G3 RX Ear]. (Initial setting: 0dBm) e Mode List
U01155/E01155
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending SPA signal. data.
(simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission time Request the destination unit to resend the
per line is exceeded while data.
receiving message.
U01162/E01162
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission time Request the destination unit to resend the
per line is exceeded while data.
receiving message.
7-486
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01191/E01191

1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request the destination unit to resend the
with error during image data data.
receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193
1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal or Extend T2 time-out time in U641 [T2 TIME Maintenanc
invalid command is received OUT]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to e Mode List
at phase C/D during reception. 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures for echoes at Maintenanc
the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial e Mode List
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting speed to Maintenanc
timing "9600bps" or less. e Mode List
U01194/E01194
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request the destination unit to resend the
phase B during reception. data.
U01195/E01195
1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time in U641 [T2 TIME Maintenanc
phase C during reception. OUT]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to e Mode List
150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures for echoes at Maintenanc
the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial e Mode List
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting speed to Maintenanc
timing "9600bps" or less. e Mode List
U01196/E01196
1 Resending Error line control overflow and Resend.
decoding error occurred in
messages during reception.
7-487
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01400/E01400

1 Checking the telephone "#" exists in advance of "x" on Delete "#" from the registered numbers if "#" FAX
number the phone numbers of the exists in advance of "x" on the phone Operation
destination unit, so it is numbers of the destination unit. Guide
processed as the invalid dial
line.
U01500/E01500
1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is the Execute U630 [TX Speed] to reduce the Maintenanc
speed poor condition. transmit start speed. Then, resend the data. e Mode List
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the default value of the transmit start Maintenanc
speed condition is poor and an error speed by executing U630 [TX Speed]. e Mode List
frequently occurs.
U01600/E01600
1 Request to the destination unit The communication line is the Request the destination unit to resend the
poor condition. data after reducing the transmit start speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit to resend the Maintenanc
timing condition is poor and an error data after lowering the reception start speed. e Mode List
frequently occurs.
U01700/E01700
1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
U01720/E01720
1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4 (replacing
the modem parameter).
7-488
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01721/E01721

1 Resending The communication was Resend.
interrupted because there is
no communication speed
commonly used with the
destination unit.
U01800/E01800
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit to resend the
occurred in phase 2 (line data after reducing the transmit start speed.
probing).
U01810/E01810
occurred in phase 3 (primary data after reducing the transmit start speed.
channel equivalent device
training).
U01820/E01820
occurred in phase 3 (primary data after reducing the transmit start speed.
channel equivalent device
training).
U01821/E01821
1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit to resend the
interrupted because there is data after reducing the transmit start speed.
no communication speed
commonly used with the
destination unit.
7-489
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U03000/E03000

1 Request to the destination unit No document was present in Request the destination unit to set the FAX
the destination unit when originals. Operation
polling reception started. Guide
U03200/E03200
1 Request to the destination unit There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit to store the FAX
address box in the main unit original data in the sub address box. Operation
that are specified from the Guide
destination unit.
U03300/E03300
1 Request to the destination unit The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit to register the FAX
number registered in the own ID and the own FAX number as the Operation
destination unit are incorrect. permitted ID and the permitted FAX number. Guide
U03400/E03400
1 Checking the destination unit In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password input at the FAX
operation was interrupted destination machine is consistent with the Operation
because the password input in receiver's own FAX ID to receive again. Guide
the destination unit and the
own FAX number in the
receiver did not match.
U03500/E03500
1 Checking the destination unit In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password input at the FAX
operation was interrupted destination machine is consistent with the Operation
because the password input in receiver's own FAX ID to receive again. Guide
the destination unit and the
own FAX number in the
receiver did not match.
U03600/E03600
1 Resending Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after inputting the sub FAX
reception was interrupted address password registered in the Operation
because the specified sub destination unit. Guide
address password did not
match.
7-490
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U03700/E03700

1 Checking the destination unit Destination machine has no Check if the destination unit has a sub FAX
sub address bulletin board address bulletin board communication Operation
communication function or no function. If available, request the destination Guide
originals are stored in any unit to save the original data in the sub
original delivery box (sub address box.
address box).
U04000/E04000
1 Request to the destination unit The original was transmitted to Register the sub address password in the FAX
the sub address box, but the destination unit. Operation
specified box was not Guide
registered in the destination
unit that is our own model.
2 Checking the sub address of The original was transmitted to Match the sub address in the FAX forward FAX
the FAX transmission the sub address box in the condition Operation
condition destination unit that is our own Guide
model, but the sub address of
the transmission condition did
not match.
U04100/E04100
1 Resending The destination unit had no Transmit the data according to the reception FAX
sub address reception function in the destination unit. Operation
capability while the sub Guide
address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200
1 Request to the destination unit In encrypted transmission, the Request the destination unit to register the FAX
specified encryption box was encrypted box. Operation
not registered in the Guide
destination unit.
U04300/E04300
1 Resending The encryption transmission Transmit the data according to the reception FAX
was carried out, but there is no function in the destination unit. Operation
encryption function at the Guide
other machine.
7-491
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U04400/E04400

1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted transmission was Request resending after checking the FAX
interrupted because encryption key registered in the receiving Operation
encryption keys did not agree. and sending machines. Guide
U04500/E04500
1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted transmission was Request resending after checking the FAX
interrupted because encryption key registered in the receiving Operation
encryption keys did not agree. and sending machines. Guide
U05100/E05100
1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the authorization FAX
number interrupted because the number that has been registered. Operation
permitted ID and FAX number Guide
did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check
transmission).
U05200/E05200
1 Checking the settings The number does not match a Change the restricted reception settings. FAX
permitted FAX number / ID, or Operation
it matches a rejected FAX Guide
number.
2 Request to the destination unit The own telephone number is Request the destination unit to register the FAX
not informed from the own telephone number. Operation
destination unit. Guide
U05300/E05300
1 Request to the destination unit The number does not match a Ask the destination unit to change the FAX
permitted FAX number / ID, or restricted reception settings. Operation
it matches a rejected FAX Guide
number.
2 Request to the destination unit The main unit did not Request the destination unit to register the FAX
acknowledge its phone own telephone number. Operation
number in question . Guide
U14000/E14000
1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX box Print documents stored in memory and make
was interrupted due to room in memory. Or stop receiving in the
memory overflow in its unit. FAX box.
7-492
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U14100/E14100

1 Request to the destination unit Transmission was interrupted Request the destination unit to release FAX
due to the memory overflow in memory. Operation
the destination unit when Guide
transmitting into the sub
address box.
U19000/E19000
1 Checking the memory The reception was interrupted Release memory by printing originals stored
due to the memory overflow in in memory.
the main unit during memory
reception.
U19100/E19100
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
an error in the data during
transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and pull out the
interrupted because there is power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
an error in the data during FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
transmission. turn on the power switch.
U19300/E19300
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
an error in the data during
transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and pull out the
interrupted because there is power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
an error in the data during FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
transmission. turn on the power switch.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the FAX. Maintenanc
changed. e Mode List
Installation
Guide
7-493
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7 - 5 Send Related Errors

(1)Send Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security software settings
(2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear
(3) When scanning the original loaded on the contact glass to send, the scanned data is automatically sent.
Content of Send Related Errors

(1-1)The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the
security software settings

1 Changing the setting The incorrect port number has Change the SMB port number from '139' to
been set. '445'.
(1-2)Sending error 2203 does not disappear

1 Changing the setting The Windows Fire Wall is not Open [Control panel] > [System and
properly set. (Windows Vista / Security] > Windows firewall] and select
7 / 8) [Permit the program or function through
Windows firewall].Check [Share files and
printers] and the check box on the right as
well.
(1-3)When scanning the original loaded on the contact glass to send, the scanned data is
automatically sent.

1 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not set to Press [Send] key or [FAX] key, and select Continuous
[On]. [On] in [Advanced setup] > [Continuous Scan
scan]. (Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
2 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not set to Select [On] at [Functions] > [Continuous Continuous
[On]. scan] Scan
(Operation
Guide -
Section 6)
7-494
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Sending Errors (Error Codes)

(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
1104 Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.
1105 SMTP protocol is invalid.
1106 The sender address is not set.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2202 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found.
4803 Failed to establish the SSL session.
7-495
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scan to E-mail Error Codes

Scan to E-mail error code : 1101
SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.

1 Changing the setting SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at Command
incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the Center RX
command center. Operation
Guide
2 Changing the setting The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings Command
incorrect. via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
3 Changing the setting The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main System /
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to. Network
incorrect. (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)

Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

1 Changing the setting The user name or the Correct the SMTP / POP3 user name or Command
password is incorrect. password at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] Center RX
via the command center. Operation
Guide
2 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings Command
settings are incorrect. via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide

Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

1 Changing the setting Destination address domain is Correct the settings in the Network Settings Command
restricted and transmission is via the Command Center. Center RX
denied. Operation
Guide

SMTP protocol is invalid.

1 Checking the settings SMTP protocol is invalid. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings Command
via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
7-496
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The sender address is not set.

1 Changing the setting The sender address is not set. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings Command
Operation
Guide

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

Guide
2 Connecting the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
3 Changing the setting The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
Operation
Guide

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

Guide
2 Changing the setting The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
Operation
Guide
7-497
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7-498
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The server cannot establish communication.

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at Command
server name incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the Center RX
Guide
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
port No.
3 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings Command
Operation
Guide
4 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main System /
Guide -
Section 8)
5 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings Command
Operation
Guide

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
7-499
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The size of scanning exceeded its limit.

Operation
Guide

SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.

Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
Operation
Guide

No SMTP authentication is found.

1 Changing the setting The SMTP server settings are Set the correct SMTP Authentication Command
incorrect. Protocol at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via Center RX
the command center. Operation
Guide

Failed to establish the SSL session.

1 Changing the setting The self-signed certificate of Correct the certificates in the Security Command
the device is incorrect. Settings via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
2 Changing the setting The service certificate settings Correct the certificates in the Security Command
are incorrect. Settings via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
3 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings Command
Operation
Guide
7-500
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 FTP server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed.
2101 Connection to the FTP server has failed.
2102 Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication with the FTP server has failed.
2202 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2203 No response from the server during a specific period of time.
2231 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)
3101 FTP server responded with an error.
7-501
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scan to FTP Error Codes

Scan to FTP error code : 1101
FTP server does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the FTP host name The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name via the Command
incorrect. Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)

Login to the FTP server has failed.

1 Correcting the user name or The user name or the Correct the user name and the password.
the password password is incorrect.
2 Changing the setting FTP server is improper. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings Command
Operation
Guide

FTP protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting FTP protocol is not enabled. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings Command
Operation
Guide

Initializing TLS has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Security Settings Command
device are incorrect. via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
7-502
[CONFIDENTIAL]

TLS negotiation has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Security Settings Command
device are incorrect. via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
2 Changing the setting The FTP server settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings Command
Operation
Guide

Connection to the FTP server has failed.

Operation
Guide
2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
3 Correcting the FTP port no. The port number is incorrect. Correct the FTP port number.
Operation
Guide
Operation
Guide

Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Operation
Guide
Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
Operation
Guide
7-503
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7-504
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The server cannot establish communication.

Operation
Guide
Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
Operation
Guide

Communication with the FTP server has failed.

Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
3 Correcting the destination The destination folder name is Set the correct destination folder.
folder name incorrect.
Operation
Guide

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
7-505
[CONFIDENTIAL]

No response from the server during a specific period of time.

Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)

Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)

FTP server responded with an error.

Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
Operation
Guide
7-506
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 Destination host does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the host has failed.
1103 Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.
1105 SMB protocol is not enabled.
2101 Login to the host has failed.
2201 Writing scanned data has failed.
2203 No response from the host during a specific period of time.
7-507
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scan to SMB Error Codes

Scan to SMB error code : 1101
Destination host does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the destination host The destination host name is Correct the destination host name.
name incorrect.
Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the user name and The user name or the Correct the user name and the password.
the password password is incorrect.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the main firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version. Then, start up the Command Center Update
and check if [Use Temporary File Name] at Command
'SMB' is [On] at [Network Settings] > [Send Center RX
Protocols] (Default setting: [On]). If it is [Off], Operation
change it to [On]. Guide
Operation
Guide
4 Changing the setting The sharing settings of the Correct the sharing settings of the
destination host / folder are destination host / folder.
incorrect.

Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.

1 Checking the destination host The invalid character is Correct the destination host name, folder
name, destination folder name included. name or the file name if the invalid
and the file name characters are included.
2 Correcting the destination The destination folder name or Revise the destination folder and file name
folder name and the file name the file name is incorrect. according to the naming rules.
3 Changing the setting of the The destination host or the Revise the destination host and destination
destination host and folder. destination folder is not set folder properly.
properly.
7-508
[CONFIDENTIAL]

SMB protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting The settings of the SMP Correct the protocol in the Network Settings Command
protocol are incorrect. via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the destination host The destination host name is Correct the destination host name.
name incorrect.
connected to the main unit in
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
3 Correcting the SMB port no. The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMB port number. SMB
Transmissio
n Settings
Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)

Writing scanned data has failed.

1 Correcting the sending file The sending file name is Correct the scanning file name.
name incorrect.
Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
7-509
[CONFIDENTIAL]

No response from the host during a specific period of time.

Operation
Guide
Guide -
Section 8)
connected to the main unit in
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
7-510
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7 - 6 Print Errors
(1) The paper loading message appears
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the
monochrome mode is set
(3) Color tone differs with the printed photo The settings of Imaging / PDL are incorrect.
(4) Orientation is different
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray The main unit MP tray setting is wrong
(6) Garbled characters The printer driver was not properly installed.
(7) Data is output with monochrome Photos printed from a PC are monochrome instead of color. (Print
from Windows Photo Viewer)
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver
and the main unit are mismatched.
(9) The same data is repeatedly printed out A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or The main unit is not ready to print
[Printer unavailable] is indicated on the printer
properties
(11) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer The main unit locks up.
standby message is indicated
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main The main unit locks up.
unit startup error
Processing/Memory lamp is turned on
(13) Print stops after printing several pages and locks up The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the
Processing and Memory lamps on operation panel are main unit locks up.
lit
(14) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The network has some troubles or the network setting is incorrect.
(1)
(15) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly
(2) connected.
(16) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate
(3) properly.
(17) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.
(4)
(18) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor Offline' appears and the print function is unavailable.
(5)
(19) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor Only 1 PC can't print out of all PCs installed. There is no error
(6) indication and print job will be held if print instruction is requested.
(20) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The main unit IP address is changed.
(7)
(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting [Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job can't be
(1) performed due to the error. (Can't print)
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting [Preparing the printer] is displayed on the operation panel. The
(2) printing document is not output and the job is held.
(23) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting A PC does not recognize the main unit.
(3)
(24) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting PC operation does not stabilize.
(4)
(25) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in
(5) the network or from a certain PC. Then, print out the data from
another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.
(26) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting The incorrect printer driver was selected.
(6)
(27) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting Installed printer driver shows 'Deleting' and it remains when
(7) reinstalling it
7-511
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(28) The printed image is partly missing The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF)
is faulty.
(29) 'Paper Mismatch Error' appears The paper size is not detected properly.
7-512
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Print Errors

(1)The paper loading message appears
1 Checking the paper The size of the loaded Load the paper of the paper size defined Printer
paper did not match the at 'Paper size' in the [Basic] tab in the Driver
paper size set in the printer print settings at the PC to the cassette. Operation
properties. Guide
2 Checking the paper size The paper size on the Check if the paper size on the operation
operation panel and the panel and the one set for the paper
one set for the paper source do not match
source do not match.
3 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit
guides width guides do not fit with them with the paper size.
the paper size.
4 Checking the actuator and The actuator or the spring Reattach the actuator and the spring for
the spring for paper sensor does not the paper sensor. If not repaired, replace
operate properly. them.
5 Checking the situation The print data generated by Check if the print data not generated by
a certain application (Word) a certain application (Word) is output
is faulty. properly. And then, change the
application setting if necessary.
6 Changing the setting Paper orientation is not Check the page orientation with preview
properly set in the print before printing and reset the page
page setting on a certain orientation at the print setting on a
application (Word). certain application (Word).
7 Checking the settings The paper size and the Check if the paper size detected on the Printer
media type detected at the MP tray and the media type of the MP Driver
main unit did not match tray set via the System Menu (for the Operation
with the paper size and the main unit) matched to the paper size Guide
media type set in the and the media type at [Imaging] >
printer driver. [Basic] in the printer properties at the
PC.
8 Changing the setting The MP tray setting does Select 'MP tray' at [Source] in the [Basic] Printer
not match between the tab in the print settings at the PC. Driver
main unit and printer driver Operation
Guide
(2)The data is output with color from Excel even if the monochrome mode is set
1 Changing the setting Excel is not properly set up. Select 'Black & White' at [Color Mode] in the Printer
[Imaging] tab in the print settings at the PC. Driver
Next, overwrite the Excel data and close the Operation
window. And then, restart up. Guide
7-513
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Color tone differs with the printed photo

The settings of Imaging / PDL are incorrect.
1 Checking the situation A file created on a certain When the phenomenon occurs with a
application makes error. certain file only, check if there is an
abnormality in the image data.
2 (In case of low density Hue changes due to Execute System Menu > [Tone curve Adjust/
(halftone) printing) Color density fluctuation. adjustment]. Maintenan
adjustment ce Menu
Execute quick color adjustment at the
(Operation
printer driver property.
Guide -
Change the color table at U485. Section 10)
Maintenan
ce Mode
List
3 Changing the setting Print quality is not properly Select 'Quality priority' at [Color Printer
set up. conversion] in the [Imaging] tab in the Driver
print settings at the PC. Operation
Guide
4 Checking the situation The print settings of Check if the phenomenon occurs with
PageMaker or Illustrator, the file generated by a certain
etc. are incorrect. application such as PageMaker or
Illustrator, and refer to Help display.
5 Changing the setting The PDL settings or the Change [PDL Settings] from [PCL XL] to Printer
imaging settings of [Basic] [KPDL] in the print settings at the PC Driver
are incorrect. and change [Color reproduction] at the Operation
[Imaging] tab. Guide
6 Changing the setting PDL or Color conversion Change [PDL Settings] from [PCL XL] to Printer
processing is not properly [KPDL] in the print settings at the PC Driver
set. and select 'Quality priority' at [Color Operation
conversion] in the [Imaging] tab. (When Guide
the image data is CMYK, not RGB.)
7 Replacing paper Paper quality causes the Replace with paper that has a high
phenomenon. smoothness.
8 Executing Calibration Calibration is not executed Execute the calibration. Adjust/
properly. Maintenan
ce Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
9 Executing U485 The image processing Execute U485, and change the print Maintenan
mode is set improperly. color table to [TYPE_CA] or try another ce Mode
table. List
10 Changing the setting The settings in the Select 'Text and Photos' at [Color Printer
[Imaging] tab in the print reproduction] in the [Imaging] tab in the Driver
settings at the PC are print settings at the PC. Operation
incorrect. Guide
7-514
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Orientation is different
1 Checking the paper size Paper same as the output Confirm it on the operation panel that
size is not set in the paper the same paper size is set as the
source. output size selected by the printer driver
side. ([Status/Job cancel] key > [Paper/
Supply]). If not, set paper in any
cassette and specify it as the paper
source.
2 (When feeding from MP Paper is not properly set at Pull out the sub tray from the MP tray
tray) Resetting the MP the MP tray. and set the MP paper width guides to
paper width guides match the paper width then, confirm if
paper size shows correctly on the
operation panel. ([Status/Job cancel]
key > [Paper/Supply]). If paper size is
not displayed correctly, go to the next
step [Checking the actuator], and if
displayed correctly, go to the step 5
[Changing the setting].
3 Checking the actuator Paper size is not detected Reattach the actuators for the paper
properly . width sensor and the paper length
sensor in the paper source.
4 Checking the sensor Paper size is not detected Check the paper width sensor and the
properly . paper length sensor in the paper source,
and reattach them if they come off.
5 Changing the setting The printer driver is not set Set [Orientation] properly at the [Basic Printer
correctly. setting] of the printer driver. Driver
Operation
Guide
6 Reinstalling the printer The printer driver was not Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver. Printer
driver properly installed. Driver
Operation
Guide
7 Checking the print setting The print setting at the Set the print setting at the application
at the application software application software side software side properly.
side has the priority.
7-515
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Paper is fed from the MP tray

The main unit MP tray setting is wrong
1 Changing the setting The Auto Cassette Change is Change the Auto cassette change setting to Printer
[On]. [OFF] if paper is not available in the selected (Operation
cassette, paper will not be fed. ([System Guide -
Menu/Counter] > [Printer] > [Auto Cassette Section 8)
Change] > [OFF])
2 Changing the setting Media type' in the [Basic] tab Check the media type set on the main unit Printer
in the print settings at the PC cassette and MP tray and set the media type Driver
differs from the media type of for the main unit in the [Basic] tab in the print Operation
the cassette that is set in the settings at the PC. Guide
main unit.
3 Changing the setting The same media type is set Set different media types between the main Cassette /
between the main unit unit cassette and MP tray MP Tray
cassette and MP tray Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
(6)Garbled characters
The printer driver was not properly installed.

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in process in the
error. PC and the main unit. Then, turn the power
switch and the main power switch off. After
5s passes, turn the main power switch and
the power switch on.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from Excel and Word is
resident. normal, print the font list to check if a font for
special data is resident.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font (default setting) and
setting) is unselected. print the data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver. Printer
Driver
Operation
Guide
(7)Data is output with monochrome

Photos printed from a PC are monochrome instead of color. (Print from Windows Photo Viewer)

1 Changing the setting The [Color Mode] setting in Check the color mode in the [Imaging tab] in Printer
the [Imaging] tab in the print the print settings at the PC and change to Driver
settings at the PC is incorrect. 'Full color' if the color mode was set to Operation
'Black'. Guide
2 Changing the setting The option or printer Change the color mode to 'Full Color' at the
properties are not properly set page settings of the unique application or
up Excel.
3 Changing the printing method The application is Directly print JPEG data instead of pasting it
incompatible. on Excel.
7-516
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)Paper is not fed from the MP tray

The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver and the main unit are mismatched
1 Checking the settings The paper size and the media Check if the paper size detected on the MP Printer
type detected at the main unit tray and the media type of the MP tray set Driver
did not match with the paper via the System Menu (for the main unit) Operation
size and the media type set in matched to the paper size and the media Guide
the printer driver. type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in the printer
properties at the PC.
2 Changing the setting The MP tray setting does not Select 'MP tray' at [Source] in the [Basic] tab Printer
match between the main unit in the print settings at the PC. Driver
and printer driver Operation
Guide
(9)The same data is repeatedly printed out

A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.
1 Deleting the job The generated data is Delete the print job spooled in the PC
faulty. and print it out again.
(10)PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated on the
printer properties
The main unit is not ready to print
1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready to Check if the error appears on the operation
print panel or the error lamp blinks. Then if there
is, cancel it.
2 Checking the main unit The main unit is not ready to Resolve the problem at the main unit if any
print
(11)Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is indicated
The main unit locks up.
1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready to After confirming no error is indicated on the
print main unit's operation panel, cancel all PC
print jobs. Then, turn the power switch and
the main power switch off. After 5s passes,
turn the main power switch and the power
switch on.
7-517
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12)Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error Processing/
Memory lamp is turned on
The main unit locks up.

version. Update
2 Changing the setting The sleep level is not set to Turn the power switch and the main power Date/Timer/
Quick Recovery mode. switch off. After 5s passes, turn on the main Energy
power switch and the power switch. Then, Saver
set the sleep level to 'Quick Recovery'. (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
(13)Print stops after printing several pages and locks up

Processing and Memory lamps on operation panel are lit
The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the main unit locks up
1 Checking the situation The data processing in a Check if the issue occurs when printing the
certain PC is faulty. data from all PCs in the network or from a
certain PC. Then, print out the data from
another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.
2 Checking the situation The application is not properly Check if a problem occurring from a certain
set. application and file (big data like CAD data)
and change application setting and refer to
application's help.
4 Deleting the job Processing fails. Cancel the job in process and reprint in the Checking
main unit job status Job & Job
Operation
(Operation
Guide -
Section 7)
5 Memory allocation Memory allocation is If the processing memory at the main unit is Maintenanc
insufficient. not enough, set to allocate the memory at e Mode List
U340 [Adj Memory].
6 Resetting the main power The main unit locks up. If the operation panel or the buttons are not
active, turn the power switch and the main
7-518
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14)Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1)

The network has some troubles or the network setting is incorrect

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if the memory LED on the operation Checking
network. panel of the main unit is blinking after printing Job & Job
out from the PC. If not blinking, cancel the Operation
processing job and reprint out. (Operation
Guide -
Section 7)
2 Checking the network There is trouble in the When the printing error appears on the
network. operation panel or the PC screen, clear the
error caused by the toner or paper jam, etc.
3 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the main unit IP Address in the status System /
network. page, etc. and then check if Command Network
Center can be opened using that IP Address. (Operation
If not, reconfigure the network again. Guide -
Section 8)
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the internet connection and restore
network. the network connection if necessary
5 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the cable and reset the router or HUB.
network.
6 Restarting up The PC or the main unit locks Restart the PC or the main unit, and print out
up. again.

The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly connected
1 Checking the cable The cable between the main Check the cable connection between the
unit and the PC is not properly main unit and the PC.
connected.
2 Restarting up The main unit or the PC does Restart the main unit and then restart the
not properly start up. PC.
3 Checking the Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is faulty. Replace the Ethernet cable.
4 Changing the connection Another network is faulty. Directly connect the main unit to the PC with
the cross cable and then check if the same
data can be printed out.

The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate properly.

1 Restarting up The router or the HUB does Check if the link lamp of the router or hub is
not properly activate. lit and restart it.
2 Checking the Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is not In case the link lamp is off, once disconnect
properly connected. the Ethernet cable from the router and
reconnect it to check the link lamp is lit.
3 Checking the Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is faulty. Replace the Ethernet cable.
4 Restarting up The router, HUB, PC or the In case of no connection while the link lamp
main unit do not start up is lit, restart the router or hub and then restart
properly. up the PC and the main unit.
7-519
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.
1 Changing the setting The IP address is not properly Check if the main unit IP Address indicated Printer
set. in the status page is the same as the IP Driver
Address in the [Port] tab of [Printer Operation
Properties] at the PC. If not, correct the IP Guide
address at the PC
2 Changing the setting The printer host name is not Check the printer host name by printing out
properly set. the status report when there is a server
environment. Then, check the printer host
name at the [Port] tab in the printer
properties at a PC. If they differ, correct the
printer host name.

'Offline' appears and the print function is unavailable.
1 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the internet connection and restore
network. the network connection if necessary
2 Restarting up The PC malfunctions. When 'Offline' appears on the printer driver,
check if it is used in the pause or offline.
Then, restart up the PC.
3 Changing the setting The application is not properly Check if the other Excel / Word data can be
set. output and change the setting of the
application.
4 Changing the setting The IP address is not properly Check if the main unit IP Address indicated Printer
set. in the status page is the same as the IP Driver
address at the PC
5 Restarting up The IP address is not properly Check if communication via command center System /
set. or PING is available with IP address set up. Network
Set up IP address again and restart the main (Operation
unit if necessary. Guide -
Section 8)
6 Restarting up The port settings in the printer Remove the checks at the dual-directional
properties at the PC are support and the SNMP status in the [Port]
incorrect. tab of the printer properties in a PC. Then,
restart up the main unit and the PC.
7 Restarting up The main unit does not start After the printer is ready, check if the test
up properly. sheet can be output and restart the main
unit.
7-520
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition:
PC OS: Windows 7
Print file: Test page
Connecting method: Wireless LAN
Only 1 PC can't print out of all PCs installed. There is no error indication and print job will be held if print instruction is
requested.
1 Restarting up The main unit or the PC does Restart up the main unit or the PC.
not properly start up.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check the cable connection (Check if the
connected. network connection is available.)
3 Checking the IP address The IP address is not properly Check if the ID address is properly set, and System /
set. correct it if incorrect. Network
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if access via command center or Command
network. PING is available and then check the hub or Center RX
router. Operation
Guide
5 Changing the setting The printer port IP address, Correct the IP address and remove the Printer
the SNMP of the printer driver, checks at the SNMP status and the dual- Driver
or the bi-directional support is directional support in the [Port] tab of the Operation
not properly set. printer properties at a PC. Then, restart up Guide
the main unit and the PC.
6 Uninstalling the security The restriction of the security Check if the printer is available by
software or setting the software causes the uninstalling the security software. Or, set the
exception phenomenon. exception setting.

The main unit IP address is changed.
1 Restarting up There is trouble in the Check if a problem occurs with output from
network. all PCs on the network and restart up hub or
router.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check if there is problem with the cable
connected. connection on the network.
3 Restarting up The main unit does not start If the operation panel or the buttons are not
up properly. active, turn the power switch and the main
4 Changing the setting IP address was changed. Check if the main unit IP Address indicated Printer
in the status page is the same as the IP Driver
address at the PC
5 Changing the setting The static IP Address is not Set the static IP Address in the System Menu System /
set in the System Menu Network
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
7-521
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(21)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1)
Condition:
PC OS: Windows 7
[Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job can't be performed due to the error. (Can't print)
1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains in the printer Printer
remaining. driver and delete the remaining. Driver
Operation
Guide
Condition:
PC OS: Windows 7
[Preparing the printer] is displayed on the operation panel. The printing document is not output and the job is held.

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains in the printer Printer
remaining. driver and delete the remaining. Driver
Operation
Guide
A PC does not recognize the main unit.

1 Checking the settings The printer driver is not Check if the printer icon of PC is [Ready].
properly set. (Right click the printer icon and execute the
trouble shooting)
2 Installing the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver. Printer
Driver
Operation
Guide
3 Restarting up The PC does not start up Restart up the PC.
properly.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is not the Update the printer driver. Printer
latest version. Driver
Operation
Guide
7-522
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PC operation does not stabilize.

1 Restarting up The printer driver is not Restart PC. (In case if many application
properly set. software are running or the free space of the
PC memory /HDD is low)
Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC. Then, print out the
data from another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.

1 Checking the IP address The IP address is not properly Check if the IP Address indicated in the main
set. unit status report and system menu is same
as the IP address in the port setting of
[Printer Properties] at the PC. If not, correct
the IP address at the port setting
The incorrect printer driver was selected.

1 Installing the printer driver The incorrect printer driver is Select the correct printer driver. If it is not in
selected. the PC, install the printer driver for the
destination unit in the PC.
Installed printer driver shows 'Deleting' and it remains when reinstalling it

1 Deleting the job The print jobs remain in the Delete all print jobs spooling inside the Printer
spool inside the printer driver. printer driver. Driver
Operation
Guide
2 Uninstalling the printer driver There is the unused printer Delete the unused printer driver.
driver.
3 Restarting the print The system is pausing. Right click the pausing printer icon and
select [Print resuming]. Then, check the
ready port.
4 Checking the settings The host name or the IP When the main unit connects to a local
address is not properly set. network, check the host name and the IP
address on the status report of the main unit.
5 Adding the Standard TCP/IP There is no main unit IP Add the main unit IP address in Standard
port Address in the Standard TCP/ TCP/IP port and print Test Page
IP Port
7-523
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(28)The printed image is partly missing

The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF) is faulty.

1 Checking the situation The image data processing When the phenomenon occurs with a certain
with a certain application file only, check if there is an abnormality in
(Excel, PDF) is faulty. the image data.
2 Checking the situation The data processing with a Check if the image does not drop out on the
certain application (Excel, print preview, and refer to the Help in the
PDF) is faulty. application if necessary.
3 Changing the setting The PDL settings is incorrect. Select 'GDI compatible mode' at [PDL Printer
settings] in the print settings at the PC. Driver
Operation
Guide
(29)'Paper Mismatch Error' appears

The paper size is not detected properly.

1 Changing the setting The paper size for the MP tray Adjust the MP tray paper size
is not properly set.
2 Resetting the MP paper width The locations of the MP paper Reset the MP paper width guides to match
guides width guides do not match the the paper size.
paper size.
3 Checking the MP tray The MP tray is not pulled out. Pull out the MP tray to extend it if the A3 size
paper is not detected.
4 Changing the setting The paper size is not set Register the custom size in [MP Tray Setting] Cassette /
properly in the System Menu. in the System Menu > [Paper Size] > [Size MP Tray
Entry]. Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
5 Changing the setting Paper Mismatch Error is set to Set [Ignore] at [Common Settings] > [Error Error
[Ignore]. Handlings] > [Paper Mismatch Error] via the Handlings
System Menu. (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
7-524
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
7 - 7 Error Messages
No. Contents
(1) Check the document processor' appears
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after removing/inserting the cassette and
checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after removing/inserting the cassette and
checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
(7) The message 'Waste toner box is full.' is wrongly displayed
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed
(10) The operation panel remains displaying 'Network device is starting'.
(11) The waste toner box is installed, but 'Install the waste toner box' is displayed.
(12) The operation panel remains displaying 'Close the waste toner box cover'.
(13) Memory is full' is displayed at Scan to SMB.
(14) Check the toner container' is displayed while toner is available.
(15) The message "The toner container is not properly installed." appears frequently.
7-525
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Error Messages

(1)Check the document processor' appears
Closing of the document processor cannot be detected.

1 Executing U244 The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Open]. If the DP opening/ Maintenanc
sensor does not operate closing sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
properly. reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
• DP opening/closing sensor - DP PWB "PWBs"
• DP PWB - Engine PWB

3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Check the output of the DP opening/closing
closing sensor signal sensor signal output is faulty. sensor signal on the DP PWB.
and
reattaching
the DP PWB
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. Firmware
Update
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7 DP replacement The document processor is Replace the document processor. Detaching
faulty. and
reattaching
the DP
7-526
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)[The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after removing/
inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit

1 Reinserting the primary paper The primary paper feed unit is Pull the primary paper feed unit out, then Detaching
feed unit not inserted completely. reinsert it completely. and
reattaching
the Pickup
Roller and
Feed Roller
2 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not rise up. Reattach the lift plate. If it is deformed,
replace it.
• d drive PWB - Engine PWB "PWBs"
4 Replacing the lift motor The lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve even U906 Maintenanc
(Reset disable function) is executed, replace e Mode List
the lift motor 1 and 2. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lift
Motor
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-527
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)[The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after removing/
inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
1 Reinserting the PF primary The PF primary paper feed Pull out the PF primary feed unit and reinsert Detaching
paper feed unit unit is not inserted completely. it completely. and
reattaching
the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
2 Checking the lift plate The PF lift plate does not rise Reattach the PF lift plate. If it is deformed,
up. replace it.
• PF lift motor 1, 2 - PF PWB "PWBs"

4 Replacing the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve even U906 Maintenanc
(Reset disable function) is executed, replace e Mode List
the PF lift motor 1 and 2. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF lift
motor
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-528
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
1 Reattaching the front cover The front cover does not turn Reattach the front cover.
the front cover sensor on due
to the fitting failure.
• Front cover sensor - Feed image PWB "PWBs"

3 Replacing the front cover The front cover sensor is Replace the front cover sensor.
sensor faulty.
7-529
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front
cover
1 Opening/closing the right The right cover switch is not Open and close the right cover several
cover and replacing the right turned on since the right cover times. If the phenomenon reoccurs after that,
cover switch mounting plate / switch mounting plate is replace with the new right cover switch
right cover arm caught by the right cover arm. mounting plate (302ND0432_) and the new
right cover open/close arm (302ND2963_)
which have '1' or later of the last digit part
number.
2 Checking the right cover The covers are not fitted. When the right cover switch does not turn on
switch even if closing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover, but check the
covers if the right cover switch turns on by
pushing directly. If the cover is not aligned
with the other exterior covers, reattach it.
When the switch does not always turn on, go
to the next step.
• Right cover switch - Feed drive PWB "PWBs"

4 Replacing the right cover The right cover switch is faulty. Replace the right cover switch.
switch
(6)The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
• MP paper sensor - Relay connector "PWBs"
• Relay connector - Feed drive PWB
2 Replacing the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator for the MP paper
sensor.
3 Checking the MP paper The MP paper sensor is not Reattach the MP paper sensor, and replace
sensor properly attached or it is faulty. it if it is not fixed.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-530
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)The message 'Waste toner box is full.' is wrongly displayed

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
2 Checking the operation when (Separate the factor) If the waste toner box does not rotate when
opening/closing the waste opening and closing the waste toner box
toner box cover. cover, go to the next step (Step 3) since the
phenomenon is caused by the weight
detection actuator. If it rotates, go to Step 4
since the phenomenon is caused by the
waste toner box or the waste toner full
sensor.
3 Checking the weight detection The weight detection actuator Repair the weight detection actuator to return
actuator does not return to the original it to the proper position.
position when detaching and
reinstalling the waste toner
box.
4 Reinstalling the waste toner Toner adheres on the surface Pull out the waste toner box and reinstall it. Replacing
box and cleaning the waste of the waste toner full sensor Or, clean the surface of the waste toner full the Waste
toner full sensor (piezoelectric sensor). sensor. Toner Box
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
5 Cleaning the waste toner box The waste toner is clogged at Clean inside the waste toner box joint Detaching
joint section the waste toner joint section. section of the main drive unit. and
reattaching
the Main
Drive Unit
6 Replacing the waste toner full Waste toner full sensor Reconnect the connector of the waste toner
sensor (piezoelectric sensor) is full sensor. And next, measure the output
wrongly detected. voltage of the waste toner full sensor.
(Undetected: 0V, Full detection: 3.3V). If
there is output of 3.3V even the waste toner
is not full in the waste toner box, replace the
waste toner full sensor.
(8)When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
1 Replacing the wire The wire of the DP original When DP original sensor is always on due to
sensor is short-circuited. the short circuit of the wire, replace the wire.
2 Replacing the DP original The DP original sensor always Replace the DP original sensor.
sensor turns on.
and
reattaching
the DP PWB
(9)When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed
1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Reaffix the pad of the DP separation pulley
original is damaged and cover by holding the pad. If not repaired,
caught with the pad of the DP replace the DP separation pulley cover
retard pulley cover. (including the pad).
7-531
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10)The operation panel remains displaying 'Network device is starting'.

A bit error in the flash memory of the main PWB has occurred.

1 Resetting the main power The start-up of the main PWB Turn off the power switch and the main
is faulty. power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on the
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-532
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)The waste toner box is installed, but 'Install the waste toner box' is displayed.
1 Replacing the shutter section The urethane sponge in the Replace the shutter section of the waste
of the waste toner box shutter section is deformed by toner box with PARTS WTB SHUTTER
long term storage so that the ASSY SP (302ND9496_).
retention force of the waste
toner box has decreased.
2 Replacing the shutter section The urethane sponge in the Replace the shutter section of the waste 2ND-0073
of the waste toner box shutter section is deformed by toner box with PARTS WTB SHUTTER
long term storage so that the ASSY SP (302ND9496_).
retention force of the waste
toner box has decreased.
3 Replacing the waste toner box If the urethane sponge under Replace with the waste toner box for the field
the shutter section of the service (WT-8500).
waste toner box bundled in the
main unit is deformed and the
slide operation of the shutter
section becomes
unexpectedly smooth, the
force for keeping the waste
toner box is not enough.
Therefore, the waste toner box
shifts forward according to the
vibration of the main unit drive
and it is misdetected.
4 Checking the operation of the The weight detection actuator Detach the waste toner box unit and pull out
weight detection actuator is not attached properly, or the fixing pin at the machine rear side of the
switching operation of the unit to separate the unit to the metal plate
weight detection actuator is and the resin parts. Next, push the weight
not smooth since there are detection actuator on the metal plate by
burrs at the holes of the weight finger several times to switch. When
sensor case which inserts the performing the actuator switching operation
fulcrum shafts of the actuator. described previously, shift the weight
detection actuator horizontally. If the actuator
switching operation does not become
smooth after that, replace the waste toner
box unit and execute U155 [Calibration].
5 Reattaching the weight The weight detection spring Detach the waste toner box unit and pull out
detection spring has come off. the fixing pin at the machine rear side of the
unit to separate the unit to the metal plate
and the resin parts. Next, reattach the weight
detection spring attached to the machine
right side fulcrum shaft of the weight
detection actuator on the metal plate.
6 Checking the connection The connector is not Reconnect the connector to the waste toner
connected properly to the motor.
waste toner motor.
7 Replacing the waste toner box The parts inside the waste Replace the waste toner box unit and
unit toner box unit such as the execute U155 [Calibration].
waste toner motor, etc. is
faulty.
7-533
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12)The operation panel remains displaying 'Close the waste toner box cover'.
The waste toner box cover is closed but opening/closing is not detected.

1 Reinstalling the waste toner The waste toner box shifts Open the waste toner box cover and pull out
box and resetting the main forward and it is misdetected, the waste toner box, then reinstall it. After
power or the weight sensor does not surely closing the waste toner box cover,
detect properly for opening/ reset the main power. Confirm the
closing the waste toner box phenomenon does not reoccur after the main
cover or presence of the unit recovers. (If reoccurring, go to the next
waste toner box. step.)
2 Checking the weight detection The weight detection actuator Open the waste toner box cover and pull out
actuator does not operate properly. the waste toner box. Then, check if the lever
inside the waste toner box unit where the
waste toner box was installed operates
properly while pressing the actuator
detecting the opening and closing of the
waste toner box cover at the machine front
side. If the lever locks up, go to Step 3. If it
operates properly, go to 'Checking the
connection' at Step 4.
3 Reattaching the weight The weight detection actuator Detach the waste toner box unit and pull out
detection actuator / weight is not attached properly, or the the fixing pin at the machine rear side of the
detection spring weight detection spring comes unit to separate the unit to the metal plate
off. and the resin parts. Next, reattach the weight
detection actuator and the weight detection
spring attached at the metal plate side.
• Weight sensor - Engine PWB (YC27)
5 Replacing the weight sensor The weight sensor is faulty. When the voltage generated from the 11th
pin of connector YC27 on the engine PWB
does not change even if opening and closing
the waste toner box cover, replace the
weight sensor (302K99421_).
6 Replacing the waste toner box The waste toner box unit is Replace the waste toner box unit and
unit faulty. execute U155 [Calibration].
7-534
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13)Memory is full' is displayed at Scan to SMB.

1 Changing the original scanner The scanned data capacity is Reduce the scan resolution of the original or
settings large. select [Black&White] at [Color/Image
Quality]. Then, resend.
2 Checking the Status screen The number of the waiting Check the sending job status on the Status
jobs exceeds the limit. screen. If many waiting jobs exist, delete the
unnecessary sending jobs.
3 Checking the OCR text Large volume originals are If OCR text recognition function is
recognition function scanned while the OCR text unnecessary, set [OCR Text Recognition] to
recognition is On. Off at [System Menu/Counter] key >
[Common Settings] > [Function Defaults].
Then, scan the originals again. If it is
necessary, set [File Separation] to [On] and
scan the originals separately.
4 (25/32 ppm models) Installing The memory is not enough. Install the HDD.
the HDD
(14)Check the toner container' is displayed while toner is available.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
2 Reinstalling the toner Toner aggregates. Pull the toner container out and surely shake Toner
container it to agitate toner. Then, reinstall the toner Container
container. Replacemen
t (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Reconnect the connector to the toner level
connected properly to the sensor.
toner level sensor.
4 Executing U132 Toner aggregates. Execute U132. Maintenanc

e Mode List
5 Checking the connection The connector is not Reconnect the connector to the toner motor.
connected properly to the
toner motor.
6 Replacing the toner hopper The toner level sensor inside Replace the toner hopper unit.
unit the toner hopper unit
misdetects, or the toner motor
is faulty.
(15)The message "The toner container is not properly installed." appears frequently.
Target: Toner container Y/C/M in the color models
1 Affixing the sponges to the When the toner container When the message does not disappear even 2ND-0094
inside container cover fixing hooks of the container if reinstalling the toner containers repeatedly,
drive unit is broken or the affix 3 sponges (bundled in Part no.
toner container fixing hook at 302ND94A20) to the inside container cover
the machine rear side is fell Y/C/M.
down inward, toner container
Y/C/M cannot be retained in
the main unit specified
7-535
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
7 - 8 Abnormal Noise
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the
conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section Caused by the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects,
improperly attaching of the part
(5) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (squeal sounds) The conductive bushing at the machine rear side of the lower exit
roller slide with the roller shaft.
(6) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit and exit unit The drive joint gears between the fuser unit and the exit unit
(fluttering sounds) excessively engage and then teeth of the gears hit the bottom. At
that time, the exit actuator also vibrates.
(7) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (cracking sounds) The exit reverse motor is faulty.
(8) Abnormal sound from the exit section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the eject section
(9) Fan rotating sounds are noisy Fan motor is dirty or faulty.
(10) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, attachment
failure of the primary paper feed section
(11) Abnormal sound from the machine front side Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at
the MP feed section
(12) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser
exit section eject roller due to the smudges / foreign objects adhesion
(13) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit Rubbing sound between the fuser exit sub roller and the shaft
section caused by the dirt or adhesion of the foreign objects.
(14) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (fluttering There is a large load when sliding the fuser belt and the parts in
sounds) the belt
(15) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (cracking The cushion affixed in the cap of the fuser belt edge section is
sounds) peeled off.
(16) Abnormal sound from the fuser section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between
the parts in the fuser section
(17) Abnormal sounds from the IH unit (buzzing sounds) When turning the power on, the buzzing sounds are noticed from
the IH unit at the upper right side of the main unit.
(18) Abnormal sound from inside the machine The drive failure of the toner container, opening/closing failure of
the toner supply shutter, the shortage of the toner amount or
aggregation of the toner.
(19) The tooth skipping sound from the toner container The tooth skipping sound occurs when setting up or at the toner
drive section container replacement.
(20) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in
the developer section
(21) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste
toner clogging in the drum section
(22) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness, smudges / foreign
sounds) objects adhesion of the waste toner vent of the primary transfer
section
(23) The drive sounds are noisy during printing
(24) The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying
section (Squeak sound)
(25) Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth
jumping sounds)
(26) Abnormal sound from the waste toner forwarding unit
(27) Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (1) The hooks at the lower side of the main drive unit come off,
therefore the tooth between the gear in the main drive unit and the
gear in the feed drive unit do not properly engage.
7-536
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(28) Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (2) Each tooth of the gears of developer clutch and idle gear contacts
when rotating the idle gear in the main drive unit.
(29) Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (3) The drive transmission from the motors in the main drive unit is
faulty.
(30) Abnormal sounds from the image scanning section The scanner rails are dirty or foreign objects adhere. The scanner
wire fixing parts are not attached properly. The gear of the
scanner motor is damaged.
(31) Abnormal sounds from the bridge unit (cracking The BR conveying pulley is damaged, dirty or foreign objects
sounds when conveying the paper) adhere.
(32) The high frequency sounds are generated from the
low voltage PWB when entering into the sleep mode in
the main unit with the optional NIC.
7-537
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Abnormal Noise

(1)Abnormal noise (Basic support)

1 Applying the grease The grease on each gear or Check the rotation of the roller, the pulley or
bushing is not enough. the gear, if they do not rotate smoothly, apply
the grease on the gears or the bearings.
(EM-50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H)
2 Reattaching the gears or the The parts such as each gear Reattach the gear or the bearings.
bearings or bushing are not properly
attached.
(2)Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears
1 Checking the registration The sponge of the registration Clean the registration cleaner. Check the
cleaner cleaner is dirty, or the sponge condition of the cleaner sponge and replace
at the machine rear side peels it if necessary. When inserting the
up. registration cleaner into the main unit, insert
it from the upper slant direction.
2 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings and the gears of the
grease dirty or foreign objects are on conveying related rollers, and apply the
them. grease (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H).
3 Cleaning and applying the The inside of the pulley is Clean the drive shaft of the conveying
grease worn down. related pulley and apply the Hanarl.
(302LV94550)
4 Cleaning and applying the The gear tooth are dirty or Clean the drive gears of the conveying
grease foreign objects are on them. related rollers, and apply the grease (EM-
50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H).
5 Checking the pressure spring Pressure of the conveying Reattach the pressure springs of the
related roller and pulley are conveying related rollers or the pulleys, or
weak, and the bearing vibrates replace them.
as the roller and pulley rotate.
6 Replacing the feed drive unit The feed drive unit is faulty. Replace feed drive unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Feed
Drive Unit
7-538
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Abnormal sound from the developer section

Caused by the developer unit.
1 Executing U030 (color (Specify the developer unit Specify the faulty developer unit by Maintenanc
models) which is faulty.) executing U030. (Go to the next step.) e Mode List
2 Checking the developer unit The developer unit drive is Check if the developer is not leaking from the Detaching
faulty. developer unit, there is no damaged location, and
and whether the roller rotates manually. reattaching
Repair if necessary. the
Developer
Unit
3 Replacing the developer unit The developer unit is faulty. Replace the developer unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
(4)Abnormal sound from the document processor

The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part
1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings and the shafts, and apply
grease dirty or foreign objects are on the grease (EM-50LP, Part number:
them. 7BG010009H).
2 Checking the bushing The bushing is worn down. Replace the bearing of the DP conveying
roller.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the gears which transmit the drive to
grease foreign objects are on it. the DP conveying roller, and apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H).
4 Checking the motor The motor does not engage Reattach the DP conveying related motors.
with the drive gear.
(5)Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (squeal sounds)

The conductive bushing at the machine rear side of the lower exit roller slide with the roller shaft.
1 Cleaning and applying the The conductive bushing at the Apply Hanarl (302LV94550) to the Field
grease machine rear side of the lower conductive bearing (black) at the machine Measures
exit roller slide with the roller rear side of the exit lower roller. for the
shaft. abnormal
noise from
the exit unit
7-539
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit and exit unit (fluttering sounds)
The drive joint gears between the fuser unit and the exit unit excessively engage and then teeth of the gears hit the
bottom. At that time, the exit actuator also vibrates.

1 Checking the drive link gear The drive joint gears between Secure the exit unit with the screws after Detaching
the fuser unit and the exit unit shifting the drive side of the exit unit upward and
excessively engage. so that the drive joint gears of the fuser unit reattaching
and exit unit engage properly. If not the Exit Unit
repaired, replace with the fuser unit with the Detaching
corrective measures. and
• 25/32 ppm models: 302L793063 / reattaching
302L7C9063 (KDCN) / 302L79K063 the Fuser
(KDKR) Unit
• 35 ppm or faster models: 302ND93083 /
302ND9C083 (KDCN) / 302ND9K083
(KDKR)
(7)Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (cracking sounds)

The exit reverse motor is faulty.

1 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse motor is Execute U030 [Exit]. If the abnormal sound Maintenanc
motor faulty. occurs, replace the exit reverse motor. e Mode List
(8)Abnormal sound from the exit section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the exit section

1 Cleaning and applying the The bearings or gears are Clean the bearings of the upper exit roller Detaching
grease dirty or the foreign objects and the gears, and apply the grease. (EM- and
adhere. 50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H) reattachint
the Exit Unit
2 Cleaning and applying the The bearings are dirty or the Clean the shaft of the exit upper pulley and Detaching
grease foreign objects adhere. the exit lower pulley, and apply Hanarl and
(302LV94550). reattachint
the Exit Unit
3 Cleaning and applying the The bearings are dirty or the Clean the reverse guide and the shaft of the Detaching
grease foreign objects adhere. exit feedshift guide. If it is not possible to and
remove the dirt or the foreign objects, reattachint
replace them. the Exit Unit
4 Checking the exit rear motor The exit reverse motor is Execute U030 [Exit]. If the abnormal sound Maintenanc
(25/32ppm models) faulty. occurs, replace the exit reverse motor. e Mode List
7-540
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9)Fan rotating sounds are noisy

Fan motor is dirty or faulty.

1 Cleaning the fan motor The fan of the fan motor is Execute U037 and specify the fan motor Maintenanc
dirty. which has a high rotation sound, and clean e Mode List
the fan. Fan Motors
Attachable
Direction
2 Replacing the fan motor The fan motor is faulty. Reattach the fan motor and reconnect the Fan Motors
connector. If not repaired, replace it. Attachable
Direction
(10)Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, attachment failure of the primary paper feed section
1 Performing the field measures The cassette base cannot 1. Replace the retard roller. At that time, 2ND-
against the issue caused by press the retard release lever check the surfaces of the pickup roller and 0089_1
the cassette base bending. of the primary feed unit due to the feed roller, if worn down, replace them. 2ND-
the bending of the side of the 2. Attach the heater cover kit (302ND94A0_). 0089_2
cassette base. And then, if the
3. Measure the bending of the cassette base
contact between the retard
sides (refer to the reference documents for
roller and the feed roller is
the measurement method), if the bending is
insufficient, both rollers are
less than the specific value (7mm or more),
rubbed against each other
replace the cassette and attach the heater
when feeding.
cover set (302ND94A0_)
2 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear or Reattach the primary paper feed drive parts
clutch the clutch are not properly such as the gear or the clutch if they are not
attached. properly attached.
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear or the bushing is Clean the gears and the bearings of the
grease dirty or foreign objects are on primary feed drive section, and apply the
them. grease. (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H)
4 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bearings of the feed Detaching
grease dirty or foreign objects are on roller, and apply the grease. (EM-50LP, Part and
them. number: 7BG010009H) reattaching
the Pickup
Roller and
Feed Roller
5 Checking the paper feed roller The paper feed roller surface Clean the paper feed roller, or replace it if Detaching
is dirty or worn down. necessary. and
reattaching
the Pickup
Roller and
Feed Roller
7-541
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)Abnormal sound from the machine front side

Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at the MP feed section
1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear or When the gears or the clutch in the MP
clutch the clutch are not properly paper feed drive section are not properly
attached. attached, reattach them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bearings of the MP
grease dirty or foreign objects are on feed roller, and apply the grease. (EM-50LP,
them. Part number: 7BG010009H)
3 Checking the MP friction pad The surface of the MP friction Clean the MP friction pad and replace it if
pad is dirty or worn out. necessary.
4 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate.
attached properly.
(12)Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section
Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser eject roller due to the smudges / foreign objects
adhesion

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser eject roller, bushing Clean the fuser exit roller, the bearings, stop
grease or the stop ring are dirty, or ring, etc., and apply the heat resistant
foreign objects are on them. grease.
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
(13)Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section
Rubbing sound between the fuser exit sub roller and the shaft caused by the dirt or adhesion of the foreign objects.
1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit sub roller or the Clean the fuser exit sub roller, the shaft, etc., Detaching
grease bearings are dirty. Or, the and apply the heat resistant grease. and
foreign objects adhere. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
(14)Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (fluttering sounds)

There is a large load when sliding the fuser belt and the parts in the belt.

1 (If fluttering sounds caused by There is a large load when Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
the vibration of the exit unit sliding the fuser belt and the and
occur) Replacing the fuser unit parts in the belt reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7-542
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15)Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (cracking sounds)

The cushion affixed in the cap of the fuser belt edge section is peeled off.
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
(16)Abnormal sound from the fuser section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between the parts in the fuser section.

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings or the gears of the fuser
grease dirty or foreign objects are on roller, and apply the heat resistant grease.
them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft is dirty. The foreign Clean the fuser exit sub roller, the shaft, etc., Detaching
grease objects are adhered. Or, the and apply the heat resistant grease. and
grease is not enough on the reattaching
fixing shaft of the fuser exit the Fuser
sub roller drive gear. (Rubbing Unit
sound of the stop ring which
fixes the drive gear)
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser drive gear and apply the
grease objects are on it. grease. (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H)
4 Applying the grease The grease is not enough. Apply the grease on the pressure switching
cam and the frame. (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H)
5 (In case the phenomenon The gear of the fuser pressure Replace the fuser pressure release motor.
occurs when the fuser release motor is worn down.
pressure motor drives)
Replacing the fuser pressure
motor
6 (If occurring when fuser The fuser forwarding guide is Replace the fuser unit.
drives) Replacing the fuser bent and contacts the fuser
unit pressure roller. Or, if the fuser
connection gear and the exit
gear is too close depending on
the parts assembling variation,
the tooth of each gear is hitting
the bottom against each other
when driving.
7-543
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(17)Abnormal sounds from the IH unit (buzzing sounds)

When turning the power on, the buzzing sounds are noticed from the IH unit at the upper right side of the main unit.
1 Replacing the IH unit The cores of the IH unit are in Replace the IH unit.
contact with each other.
(18)Abnormal sound from inside the machine

The drive failure of the toner container, opening/closing failure of the toner supply shutter, the shortage of the toner
amount or aggregation of the toner.

1 Checking the toner container The torque increases due to Shake the toner container enough and Replacing
the toner condensation. reinstall it. Or, replace it. the Toner
Container
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
2 Cleaning the drive parts of the The drive gear shaft or the If the drive gear of the container motor does
container motor bearings of the container not rotate smoothly, clean the shaft or the
motor is dirty. Or, the foreign bearings.
objects are adhered.
3 Reattaching the drive parts of The stop ring of the container Reattach the stop ring fixing the container
the container motor motor drive gear has come off. motor drive gear to the shaft.
(19)The tooth skipping sound from the toner container drive section
The tooth skipping sound occurs when setting up or at the toner container replacement.

1 Replacing the container rail Toner container K backlashes Replace the container rail unit. For the 2ND-0092
unit inside the container rail, monochrome model, insert the positioning
therefore the pitch between pin (302ND1550_) into the hole of the
the gear in the container drive container drive unit.
unit and the gear of toner
container K become
periodically wider.

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in the developer section
1 Checking the developer unit The shaft or the bushing of the Check if the developer roller rotates. If not
developer roller is dirty or rotating smoothly, clean the shaft or the
foreign objects are on them. bushing of the developer roller.
2 Checking the developer unit The torque inside the Clean the developer unit. Then, replace it if Detaching
developer unit increased due the issue is not resolved. and
to the toner condensation, etc. reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
7-544
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum section

1 Executing Drum refresh Toner is not enough on the Execute the drum refresh to supply the toner Adjustment/
drum. to the cleaning unit. Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
3 Checking the drum screw The drum screw does not Check the drum screw rotation and if it does Detaching
properly rotate. not rotates smoothly, clean it. If it locks, and
replace the IH unit. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
4 Cleaning and applying the Foreign objects are on the Clean the tooth surface of the drum drive
grease tooth of the drum drive gear, or gear and apply the grease. (EM-50LP, Part
the grease is not enough. number: 7BG010009H)
5 Replacing the drum unit The torque inside the drum Replace the drum unit. Detaching
unit increased due to the and
waste toner clogging, etc. reattaching
the Drum
Unit
(22)Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds)

Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness, smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste toner vent of the primary
transfer section
1 Checking the shutter of the The shutter of the waste toner Check the opening and closing operation of
toner waste vent vent is not properly opened the shutter of the toner waste vent in the
and closed. transfer cleaning unit, and fix the parts if
necessary.
2 Checking the cleaning screw The cleaning screw does not Check if the cleaning screw in the transfer
properly rotate. cleaning unit rotates smoothly, and clean it if
not rotating smoothly.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear or the bushing Clean the drive gears and the bearings of the
grease is dirty, or foreign objects are primary transfer unit, and apply the grease
on them. (EM-50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H) or
Hanarl (302LV94550). (If they are conductive
bearings, apply Hanarl.)
4 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer unit. Detaching
unit faulty. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-545
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(23)The drive sounds are noisy during printing

1 Changing the setting The Quiet Mode is off. Change the setting to [ON] at System Menu Adjustment/
> [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Silent mode] Maintenanc
e (Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
(24)The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying section (Squeak sound)
1 Replacing the ground spring When the PF conveying roller Replace the ground spring. (SPRING
rotates, the sliding surface of GROUND BRIDGE A:303RC0617_, the last
the bearings that hooking the digit is 1 or newer)
PF conveying roller and the
ground spring is vibrating
fractionally.
(25)Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth jumping sounds)
1 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or the Clean the drive gears and the bearings of the
grease foreign object is adhered. primary transfer unit, and apply the grease
(EM-50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H) or
Hanarl (302LV94550). (If they are conductive
bearings, apply Hanarl.)
2 Replacing the main drive unit The gear section of the Replace the main drive unit. Detaching
developer K/transfer belt and
motor and the gear engaged reattaching
are scraped. Or, the drive of the Main
the parts in the main drive unit Drive Unit
are faulty.
(26)Abnormal sound from the waste toner forwarding unit

1 Replacing the waste toner The drive of the motor in the Replace the waste toner pipe unit (Part 2ND-0090
forwarding unit main drive unit is faulty. number with the last digit "2" or later).
(27)Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (1)

The hooks at the lower side of the main drive unit come off, therefore the tooth between the gear in the main drive unit
and the gear in the feed drive unit do not properly engage.

1 Reattaching the main drive The hook located at the lower Detach the main drive unit. Then, fix the Detaching
unit side of the main drive unit hooks and secure the main drive unit with 3 and
comes off and the teeth of the screws (7BB200308H). reattaching
main drive unit side gear and the Main
feed drive unit side gear does Drive Unit
not engage properly.
7-546
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Each tooth of the gears of developer clutch and idle gear contacts when rotating the idle gear in the main drive unit.

1 Replacing the main drive unit Each tooth of the gears of Replace with the main drive unit (Part
developer clutch and idle gear number with the last digit "1" or later).
contacts when rotating the idle
gear in the main drive unit.

The drive transmission from the motors in the main drive unit is faulty.

1 Reattaching the motor in the The drive of the motor in the Reattach the motor in the main drive unit. Detaching
main drive unit main drive unit is faulty. and
reattaching
the Main
Drive Unit
2 Checking the developer motor The developer motor drive If the abnormal sounds are noticed by Maintenanc
gear is damaged, or the gears executing U030 [DLP], reattach the e Mode List
do not properly engage. developer motor. Also, when the gear is
damaged, replace the developer motor.
(30)Abnormal sounds from the image scanning section

The scanner rails are dirty or foreign objects adhere. The scanner wire fixing parts are not attached properly. The gear of
the scanner motor is damaged.

1 Cleaning and applying the The scanner rails are dirty or Remove the foreign objects on the scanner
grease foreign objects adhere. rails and apply the grease (PG-671) to the
rails if necessary.
2 Checking the scanner wire The front wire holding plate or Reattach the front wire holding plate and rear Detaching
fixing parts rear wire holding plate is not wire holding plate which fix the scanner wires and
attached properly and it to mirror frame A (primary mirror unit). reattaching
contacts the scanner frame. the Scanner
Wires
3 Reattaching the scanner The scanner motor drive is not Reattach the scanner motor.
motor transmitted properly.
4 Replacing the scanner motor The gear of the scanner motor Replace the scanner motor.
is damaged by pinching
foreign objects, etc.
7-547
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(31)Abnormal sounds from the bridge unit (cracking sounds when conveying the paper)
Condition: When installing the bridge unit (AK-7110)
The BR conveying pulley is damaged, dirty or foreign objects adhere.

1 Checking the BR conveying The BR conveying pulley is Clean the BR conveying pulley. If damaged,
pulley damaged, dirty or foreign replace it.
objects adhere.
2 Cleaning and applying the The bushing is dirty or foreign Clean the bushing for the BR conveying
grease objects adhere. roller and apply the grease (GE-676, Part
no.: 7BG010006H).
3 Cleaning the BR conveying The BR conveying guide is Clean the BR conveying guide. If difficult to
guide dirty or foreign objects adhere. remove the smudge or foreign objects,
replace the guide.
4 Checking the BR conveying The BR conveying motor is Execute U030 [Bridge]. If the abnormal Maintenanc
motor faulty. sounds are noticed, replace the BR e Mode List
conveying motor.
(32)The high frequency sounds are generated from the low voltage PWB when entering into
the sleep mode in the main unit with the optional NIC.
Condition: The sleep level is set to [Quick Recovery] when installing the ID card reader, IB-50, IB-
51, IB-35 or Printing System 15.
1 (In case the sleep level The sleep level is not set to Set 'Sleep Level' to [Energy Saver] at Date/Timer/
change is acceptable) [Energy Saver]. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/ Energy
Changing the settings Energy Saver]. Then, change the setting of Saver
the objective optional NIC to [On] at [Sleep (Operation
Rules]. Guide -
Note: However, in case of the main unit with Section 8)
the ID card reader, it becomes impossible to
recover the main unit even if scanning the ID
card after this setting change. Please explain
a user who should press the [Energy] key on
the operation panel to recover the main unit.
2 (In case the sleep level The low voltage PWB does not Replace with the low voltage PWB with '1' Detaching
change is not acceptable) support this conditions. and after of the last digit part number. and
Replacing the low voltage • 25/32 ppm models for 110V/120V: reattaching
PWB 302L794131 the Scanner
Wires
• 35 ppm or faster models for 110V/120V:
302ND94611
• 25/32 ppm models for 220-240V:
302L794141
• 35 ppm or faster models for 220-24V:
302ND94621
In use of the above low voltage PWB, [Quick
Recovery] sleep level can be set when
installing the objective optional NIC.
7-548
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
7 - 9 Malfunction
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or
not displayed
(2) The MP tray paper size is misdetected
(3) The controller fan motor does not rotate (Final phenomenon: Malfunction such as the abnormal image
output due to heated CPU)
(4) The developer fan motor does not rotate (Final phenomenon: The printing operation of the main unit is
frequently interrupted to cool the machine inside according to the
inner temperature increase during the continuous printing.)
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the
power switch
(6) Toner falls over the paper conveying section (Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge)
(7) No display in the operation main panel (Image on the operation panel is faulty or becomes pure white)
(8) The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" Communicate between the main PWB and the operation panel
and does not change main PWB cantbedone.'
(9) No action by pressing the operation panel
(10) The login fails with other than the ID card
(11) The original size on the original glass is misdetected. A4 size original is displayed as A3 size when loading it on the
contact glass and closing the platen cover
(12) The container cover is not opened although the toner
container is not installed.
(13) The FAX icon is not displayed on the operation panel
even if installing the FAX PWB.
(14) The operation panel does not display the finisher even
if installing the finisher
(15) The Job separator LED continuously turns on even if The JS actuator (at the job separator) continues to turn the JS
removing the paper from the JS tray sensor (at the main unit) on while there is no paper.
(16) Even if the paper feeder is installed, it is not displayed
on the operation panel.
7-549
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Malfunction
(1)The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed
Object: Main unit, Paper feeder
1 Checking the actuator The actuator does not operate Check if the actuator for the paper length
properly. sensor operates when inserting the cassette.
If it does not properly operate, reattach the
actuator.
2 Checking the paper length The paper length sensor or the Reattach the paper length sensor or the fan
sensor and fan shaped arm fan shaped arm does not shaped arm.
operate correctly.
3 Checking the detected paper When inserting the cassette After inserting the cassette vigorously into Cassette /
size on the operation panel vigorously into the main unit the main unit with a large amount of paper MP Tray
with a large amount of paper loaded in the cassette, check the paper size Settings
loaded in the cassette, the of the target cassette which is detected on (Operation
paper width guide temporarily the operation panel. ([Status/Job Cancel] key Guide -
deflects, the angle of the > [Paper/Supplies]) If the paper size in the Section 8)
switching lever for the paper cassette is not detected, pull out the cassette
width sensor shifts, and the and insert the cassette with the normal
paper width sensor does not strength. If it does not reoccur, please
turn on correctly. explain to the user not to insert the cassette
vigorously. If there is concern about
reoccurrence by the same operation after
that, specify the paper size of the target
cassette instead of [Auto]. ([System Menu/
Counter] key > [Cassette/MP tray Settings] >
[Cassette 1 (to 5)])
4 Attaching the countermeasure If the cassette base is bent Attach PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY 2ND-0085
part to LEVER SIDE SWITCH due to the shock when SP (302L79423_) to LEVER SIDE SWITCH
A inserting the cassette strongly, A.
the amount of shifting LEVER
SIDE SWITCH at the cassette
base bottom is insufficient. As
a result, the paper width
sensor is not turned On.
• Paper length sensor - Feed drive PWB "PWBs"
• Paper width sensor - Feed drive PWB
6 Replacing the paper length The paper length sensor is Replace the paper length sensor.
sensor faulty.
7 Replacing the paper width The paper width sensor is Replace the paper width sensor.
sensor faulty.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-550
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)The MP tray paper size is misdetected

1 Checking the sub tray Sub tray is not in the proper Pull out the sub tray to the position
position. where you can see the triangle mark. Or,
store it completely inside the MP frame.
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the Manual -
wire is faulty. connectors. If there is no continuity, Section 8
replace the wire. "PWBs"
• Main unit - Paper conveying unit
• MP paper length sensor - Feed drive
PWB
• MP paper width sensor - Feed drive PWB
3 Checking the MP paper MP Paper width sensor Check the home position of the MP
width sensor does not operate correctly. paper width sensor, and reattach it if
necessary. Then, replace the sensor if it
is not fixed.
4 Checking the MP paper MP Paper length sensor Reattach the MP paper length sensor. If
length sensor does not operate correctly. not repaired, replace it.
5 Replacing the feed drive The feed drive PWB is Replace the feed drive PWB.
PWB faulty.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
(3)The controller fan motor does not rotate

(Final phenomenon: Malfunction such as the abnormal image output due to heated CPU)

1 Cleaning the controller fan The fan is dirty with dust. Clean the controller fan motor.
motor
• Controller fan motor - Main PWB "PWBs"
3 Replacing the controller fan The controller fan motor is Replace the controller fan motor. Fan Motors
Direction
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-551
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)The developer fan motor does not rotate

(Final phenomenon: The printing operation of the main unit is frequently interrupted to cool the machine inside according
to the inner temperature increase during the continuous printing.)

1 Checking the developer fan Foreign materials such as dust Clean the developer fan motor. Execute Maintenanc
motor operation adhere on the developer fan U037 [DLP1] to [DLP4] and specify the e Mode List
motor. developer fan motor that does not work. Fan Motors
Proceed to the next step after specifying. Attachable
Direction
• Developer fan motor - Drum/developer "PWBs"
relay PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Feed image
PWB
3 Replacing the developer fan The developer fan motor is Replace the developer fan motor. Fan Motors
Direction
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
"Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit")
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-552
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch

1 Measuring the input voltage The power cord has no Plug the power cord into another wall outlet.
continuity.
2 Checking the power cord The power plug of the power If the power plug is deformed or faulty,
cord is faulty. replace the power cord.
3 Checking the power cord The power cord is faulty. If there is no continuity of the power cord,
replace the power cord.
4 Checking the main power The main power switch is Check the continuity between the contacts of
switch faulty. the main power switch, and replace the main
power switch if there is no continuity.
5 Checking the low voltage The connector is not Clean the terminal of the connectors on the Service
PWB connected properly. The wire low voltage PWB, then reconnect the wire Manual -
or the PWB is faulty. connector. If the wire is faulty, repair or Section 8
replace it. If not repaired, replace the low "PWBs"
voltage PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Low
Voltage
PWB
6 Replacing the power switch The power switch is faulty. Check the power switch. Replace it if there is
no continuity.
7 Checking the engine PWB The connector or FFC terminal Check if the 10th pin of connector YC29 on Service
is not connected properly. Or, the engine PWB generates 24V. When it Manual -
the wire, FFC, PWB is faulty. does not generate 24V, clean a the terminals Section 8
of the connector on the engine PWB and "PWBs"
reinsert the wire connector and the FFC Detaching
terminal. If the wire or FFC is faulty, repair or and
replace it. If not repaired after that, replace reattaching
the engine PWB.w the Engine
PWB
8 Checking the main PWB The connector or FFC terminal Clean the terminal of the connectors on the Service
is not connected properly. Or, main PWB, then reconnect the wire Manual -
the wire, FFC, PWB is faulty. connector and reconnect the FFC terminal. If Section 8
the wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace "PWBs"
it. If not repaired, replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-553
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Toner falls over the paper conveying section

(Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge)

1 (For 35ppm or faster models) Scattering prevention sheet is Re-affix the scattering prevention sheet on Detaching
Reaffixing the toner scattering peeling off. the primary transfer unit. and
prevention seal on the primary reattaching
transfer unit the Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Checking the developer and The developer unit or the Clean the developer unit and the drum unit. Detaching
drum units drum unit is dirty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. Firmware
version. Update
4 Executing Developer refresh The amount of toner in the Execute the developer refresh twice. Adjustment/
developer unit is large. Or, the Maintenanc
toner is deteriorated. e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
5 Developer unit replacement The toner is deteriorated. Replace the developer unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
7-554
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)No display in the operation panel

(Image on the operation panel is faulty or becomes pure white)

1 Resetting the main power The main firmware does not Turn off the power switch and the main
start correctly. power switch. And turn on the main power
switch and the power switch after 5s passed.
After that, set the sleep level to [Quick
Recovery].
connected properly. Or, the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty so that the power there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
for display is not supplied. • Main PWB - Operation panel main PWB "PWBs"
• Main PWB - Low voltage PWB

and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
reattaching
the
Operation
Panel Main
PWB
5 Replacing the engine PWB The capacitor on the engine Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
PWB is damaged. and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
6 Replacing the low voltage Low voltage power PWB is Replace the low voltage PWB. Detaching
PWB faulty and the power is not and
supplied to the main PWB. reattaching
the Low
Voltage
PWB
7-555
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" and does not change
Communicate between the main PWB and the operation panel main PWB can’t be done.

1 Resetting the main power The communication Turn off the power switch and the main
between the main PWB power switch. After 5 seconds, turn on
and the operation panel the main power switch and the power
main PWB is faulty. switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the below wire, the terminal of Service
connected properly. Or, the SATA cable connector and reconnect Manual -
wire or the SATA cable is them. If there is no continuity, replace Section 8
faulty. the wire. "PWBs"
• Main PWB - Operation panel main PWB
3 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the backup Maintenan
faulty. RAM data. ce Mode
List
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
5 Replacing the operation The operation panel main Replace the panel main PWB. Detaching
panel main PWB PWB is faulty. and
reattaching
the
Operation
Panel Main
PWB
(9)No action by pressing the operation panel

1 Removing foreign objects Foreign objects enter into the Remove foreign objects around the touch
gap between the operation panel.
cover and the touch panel,
and the touch panel where is
pressed by foreign objects
responds. Therefore, where
touched by a user does not
respond.
7-556
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10)The login fails with other than the ID card

1 Changing the setting [User/Job Account] is valid Set [Permit] at [User/Job Account] > [ID Card
while the card authentication Settings] > [Key Login] via the System Menu.
kit is not installed. ID Card Authentication Settings (Operation
Guide - Section 9)
(11)The original size on the original glass is misdetected

A4 size original is displayed as A3 size when loading it on the contact glass and closing the platen cover.

• Original size timing sensor - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
• Original size sensor - Engine PWB
2 Checking the original size The original size timing sensor Check if the exposure lamp turns on by
timing sensor does not operate properly. pressing the actuator of the original size
timing sensor. If not turning on, replace the
sensor.
3 Checking the original size The original size sensor does Reattach the original size sensor. If not
sensor not operate properly. repaired, replace it.
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
(12)The container cover is not opened although the toner container is not installed
1 Checking the connection The connector is not Select U033 [Container Cover] and press the Maintenanc
connected properly, or the [Start] key to check the container solenoid e Mode List
wire is faulty. operation. When it does not operate, reinsert
the connector to the container solenoid. If the
wire is faulty, repair or replace it.
2 Replacing the container The container solenoid is Check if the container solenoid has
solenoid faulty. continuity, and if there is no continuity,
replace the container solenoid.
3 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Reconnect the wire connectors on the feed Service
PWB image PWB. If the wire is faulty, repair or Manual -
replace the wire. If not repaired after that, Section 8
replace the feed image PWB. 'PWBs'
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector is not Reconnect the wire connectors on the Service
connected properly. The wire engine PWB. If the wire is faulty, repair or Manual -
or the PWB is faulty. replace it. If not repaired after that, replace Section 8
the engine PWB. 'PWBs'
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-557
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13)The FAX icon is not displayed on the operation panel even if installing the FAX PWB

2 Checking the FAX firmware The FAX firmware is not latest. Check the FAX firmware version at U019. If Maintenanc
version not latest, upgrade the FAX firmware to the e Mode List
latest version. Firmware
Update
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not installed Reinstall the FAX PWB. If not repaired, FAX
properly, or faulty. replace the FAX PWB. Installation
Guide
4 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Reconnect the wire connectors on the main Service
PWB. If the wire is faulty, repair or replace Manual -
the wire. If not repaired after that, replace the Section 8
main PWB. 'PWBs'<br>
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
(14)The operation panel does not display the finisher even if installing the finisher
1 Resetting the main power The finisher does not operate Turn the power switch and the main power
properly. switch off. After 5s passes, turn the main
2 Checking the connection The connection between the Reinstall the finisher to the main unit. If the Service
finisher and the main unit is connector or wire is faulty, repair or replace Manual -
faulty. it. Section 9
'Wiring
diagram
(Options
connection)'
3 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Reconnect the wire connectors on the DF Service
PWB. If not repaired, replace the DF PWB Manual -
and then upgrade the DF firmware to the Section 9
latest version by using the USB device 'Wiring
memory which contains the latest diagram
enhancement firmware pack. (Options
connection)'
Firmware
Update
7-558
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15)The Job separator LED continuously turns on even if removing the paper from the JS tray
The JS actuator (at the job separator) continues to turn the JS sensor (at the main unit) on while there is no paper.

1 Reinstalling the job separator The job separator is not Reinstall the job separator.
installed properly.
2 Checking the JS actuator The shaft of the JS actuator Reattach the JS actuator. If the shaft is
comes off or is deformed. deformed, replace the JS actuator.
3 Reattaching COVER TOP The JS actuator at the job Shift COVER TOP REAR (302ND0411_)
REAR separator which the installing downward and secure it with the screw.
position is followed to COVER
TOP REAR cannot interrupt
the JS sensor light since
COVER RTOP REAR is
attached shifting upward.
4 Reattaching the JS sensor The JS actuator cannot Adjust the position of attaching the JS sensor
mounting plate interrupt the JS sensor light mounting plate (302ND0493_) in the vertical
since the JS sensor is direction so that the photo-interruption part of
attached shifting from the the JS actuator inserts into the center of the
proper position. detection part of the JS sensor.
5 Replacing the JS actuator The photo-interruption part of Replace the JS actuator (302ND04271) with
the JS actuator is caught by the shape changed so that it does not
the edge of the detection part contact the edge of the detection part of the
on the JS sensor and then it JS sensor.
cannot return while remaining
paper detection On.
• JS sensor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'

7 Checking the JS sensor The JS sensor does not Replace the JS sensor.
operate properly.
PWB
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-559
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(16)Even if the paper feeder is installed, it is not displayed on the operation panel
1 Resetting the main power The paper feeder does not Turn the power switch and the main power
2 Checking the connection The connection between the Reinstall the paper feeder to the main unit. If Service
paper feeder and the main unit the drawer connector pins or the wire is Manual -
is faulty due to the faulty, repair or replace them. Section 9
deformation of the drawer 'Wiring
connector pins, etc. diagram
(Options
connection)'
3 Checking the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Reconnect the connectors to the PF PWB. If Service
not resolved, replace the PF PWB and lock Manual -
the PF fixing pin and surely tighten the Section 9
screw. Then, turn the main power on. 'Wiring
diagram
(Options
connection)'
7-560
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
7 - 10 Others
(1)Adjusting the center position for the punch unit and the paper width guides
(1-1)Adjusting the center position for the punch unit
1 Adjust the center position of the punch unit (A) based on the MP tray.
1 Pull out the inner finisher from the main unit.
2 Remove the screw (B) and detach the punch unit cover (C).
3 Perform the test copy by feeding paper from the MP tray.
4 Loosen the screw (1).

When the punch holes shift toward the machine front side, relocate the punch unit (A) toward the machine rear side ( ).
When the punch holes shift toward the machine rear side, relocate the punch unit (A) toward the machine front side ( ).
5 Repeat Step2-3 till the punch holes are located within the reference value.
[Reference value (d)] (The reference value (e) cannot be adjusted.)
• For Metric: d=40.0mm±2mm, e=80mm±0.5mm
• For Inch: d=34.93mm±2mm (1.38in±0.08in), e=69.85mm±0.5mm (2.75in±0.02in)
6 Tighten the screw (1).
d
e
7 Reattach the punch unit cover (C) by the screw (B).
7-561
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 Reinstall the inner finisher into the main unit.
B(M3x8)
7-562
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjust the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray) based on the center position for the punch unit
after finishing the adjustment at Step 1).
[Adjusting the center position for the cassettes in the main unit / PF-7100]
1 Perform the test copy by feeding paper from each paper source.
2 Loosen the fixing screw (E) of the pinion gear (D) that secures the center position for the paper width guides
when the punch holes shift.
3 Relocate the paper width guide (F) of the machine rear side in the counter direction of the punch holes shifted.
• When the punch holes shift in the machine rear direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in the machine front
direction.
• When the punch holes shift in the machine front direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in the machine rear
direction.
4 Tighten the fixing screw (E).
5 Put paper on the cassette, and relocate the paper width guides at the machine front and rear sides along the
paper width.
D
F
6 Repeat Step 1-5 till the punch holes locate within the reference value.
7 [Reference value (d)] (The reference value (e) cannot be adjusted.)

• For Metric: d=40.0mm±2mm, e=80mm±0.5mm
• For Inch: d=34.93mm±2mm (1.38in±0.08in), e=69.85mm±0.5mm (2.75in±0.02in)
d
e
7-563
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Adjusting the center line at U034

Execute U034 [LSU Out Left] to adjust the center line of each paper source (except the MP tray).
(2)Alignment for affixing PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP (For PF-7110)

[Part]
Part No: 303RC94080 (3RC94080)
Part name: PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SET SP
Q'ty / 1 unit: 1
Remark
• For the PF feed frame in the left cassette: Film A with PORON® x 2 pcs
• For the PF feed frame in the right cassette: Film B with PORON® x 2 pcs
A B
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
40 mm
39 mm
Affixing location
Following PF feed frames for the left and right cassettes in PF-7110 (Large capacity feeder)
• Left cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER (303RC0603_)
• Right cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER B (303RC0613_)
Step for affixing
1 Locate the up-vertical and horizontal affixing location for the films with PORON® and clean there with alcohol.
2 Remove the sheet from the PORON (a) and affix the PORON(a) faster than other parts.
3 Affix other parts (film) than PORON (a) and press them surely.
4 After affixing, pull out and reinsert the cassette multiple times to confirm the film with PORON® does not
contact the neighboring parts.
B a
A B
7-564
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Vertical alignment for the PF feed frame

Affix the films on where the following 2 conditions are matched.
• Condition 1: Align the film (c) of film A and B with PORON to the slant surface (b) of the PF feed frame.
• Condition 2: Align the film (e) of film A and B with PORON to the vertical surface (d) of the PF feed frame.
PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP alignment (PF-7110)
b
e
d
a
Horizontal alignment for the PF feed frame
Align the films with PORON to the PF feed frame horizontally for the left cassette(A) and the right cassette(B).
0 mm
0.5 mm
A 0.5 mm
0 mm
0 mm
0.5 mm
B
0.5 mm
0 mm
7-565
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-7-1 Printing System Troubleshooting

(1) List of Error Code
Problem/ Condition of Causes Check procedures/ Corrective
Error code detection measures
1.Error 1020 is Error occurs during Bridge Board error. Replace Bridge Board.
displayed. Bridge Board memory
check.
2.Error 1030 is Timeout for Fiery Printing system is not powered. Check power cable connection or
displayed. Ready signal not replace.
1 received. DVI cable between Fiery Print Re-insert/replace DVI cable.
Controller and MFP is
disconnected.
3.Error 1031 is Receiving VIDEO from DVI cable between Fiery Print Re-insert/replace DVI cable.
displayed. Fiery fails. Controller and MFP is
(IP Exchange failure) disconnected.
Bridge board error. Replace Bridge Board.
4.Error 1040 is LINKLOCAL Network cable between Fiery Re-insert/replace network cable.
displayed. connection fails. Print Controller and MFP is
disconnected.
Network setting failure. Check network settings.
IPv6: ON
HTTP: ON
Enhanced WSD: ON
5.Error 2000 is Mismatch of Product Unsupported Fiery Print Install supported Fiery Print
displayed. ID from Fiery. Controller is installed. Controller. (Use with correct
combination)
6.Error 2010 is Comet FPGA version Unsupported Bridge Board is Replace Bridge Board.
displayed. mismatch. installed.
7.Error 3000 is Timeout of ERPD Bad data in IP Exchange. Turn on MFP power again.
displayed. Server boot-up of Replace Bridge Board.
External RIP Protocol.
Replace Main Board.
Replace Fiery Print Controller.
7-566
[CONFIDENTIAL]

8.“Fiery” is not shown Connection error of Defective DVI cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also check
on the MFP panel. the DVI cable contact. for continuity within the connector
2 (damaged or loose cable. If none, replace the cable.
connected).
Connection error of Local network cable failure or Reinsert the network cable. Also
the network cable loose connection.Failure or check for continuity within the
(damaged or loose wrong version. connector cable. If none, replace the
connected). cable.
Connection error of Network settings are incorrect Check network cable connection or
the network. with the MFP. replace.
[System Menu]
>[System]
>Enter LoginUserName and
LoginPassword and login.
>[NetWork]
>[TCP/IP Setting]
TCP/IP : ON
IPv4 DHCP : ON
AutoIP : ON
IPv6 : ON
>[Protocol Settings]
HTTP : ON
Enhanced WSD : ON
Connection error of Wiring failure or loose Reinsert the connector. Also check
the harness between connection. for continuity within the connector
the Main board and cable. If none, replace the cable.
the bridge
board(damaged or
loose connected).
Defective bridge Bridge board mounting error. Replace the bridge board and check
board. for correct operation.
Defective main board. Main board mounting error. Replace the main board and check
for correct operation.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in the Replace the Printing system board
system. Printing system. and check for correct operation.
7-567
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9.Fiery is not detectable Connection error of Defective DVI cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also check
with Command Work the DVI cable contact. for continuity within the connector
Station. (damaged or loose cable. If none, replace the cable.
connected).
Connection error of Local network cable failure or Reinsert the network cable. Also
the network cable loose connection.Failure or check for continuity within the
(damaged or loose wrong version. connector cable. If none, replace the
connected). cable.
Connection error of Network settings are incorrect See item 9 above.
the network. with the MFP.
Network settings are incorrect See item 9 above.
with the PC.
Connection error of Defective cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also check
the harness between contact. for continuity within the connector
the Main board and cable. If none, replace the cable.
the Bridge board
(damaged or loose
connected).
Defective bridge Bridge board mounting error. Replace the bridge board.
board.
Defective main board. Main board mounting error. Replace the main board.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in the Replace the Printing system.
system. Printing system.
10.Printing is not Defective bridge Bridge board mounting error. Replace the bridge board.
possible with Command board.
Work Station. Defective main board. Main board mounting error. Replace the main board.
3
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in the Replace the Printing system.
system. Printing system.
11.An abnormal printing Connection error of Defective cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also check
occurs when printing the harness between contact. for continuity within the connector
from Command Work the Main board and cable. If none, replace the cable.
Station. the Bridge board
(damaged or loose
connected).
Defective bridge Bridge board mounting error. Replace the bridge board and check
board. for correct operation.
The image data is not Engine board mounting error. Replace the engine board and check
entered. for correct operation.
Defective main board. Main board mounting error. Replace the main board and check
for correct operation.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in the Replace the Printing system and
system. Printing system. check for correct operation.
*:1: If the error display does not disappear after 3 minutes, it is a failure.
*:2: If one of Error 1 to 7 is displayed, execute the respective treatment. If Fiery is not displayed while none of Error 1 to 7
is not displayed, check if the Fiery displayed is enabled on Home of the MFP operation panel.
If the error is not indicated on the MFP operation panel, check the PC's network setting.
*:3: If one of Error 1 to 7 is displayed, execute the respective treatment. If the error is not indicated on the MFP operation
panel, check the PC's network setting.
7-568
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2ND-0073
Part No. 302ND94960

Part Name PARTS WTB SHUTTER ASSY SP
(Machine rear side of the waste toner box)

[Shutter ass'y (302ND94960)]
Remark
The Urethane sponge is affixed

on the back side of the shutter.
Procedure to replalce the shutter ass'y of the waste toner box㻌
No Procedure Detail
1 Detach the waste toner box from the machine.
Slide the shutter (a: Yellow label is affixed) at

the shutter section of the waste toner box in
the front direction of the machine.
2
* The arrow in the photo to the right shows the
moving direction of the part.
a a
b
While widening the hook (b) to both the left

3 and right, slide the shutter (c) in the front
direction of the machine.
Figure 1
While widening the hook (b) again at the d
position (Figure 1 to the right) where the
shutter (c) stops naturally and widen the hook
(e) of the shutter attachment plate (d), then
release the inside hook (f) of the shutter (c) c
one by one. (Photo to the right shows that the
4
condition of releasing the right inside hook (f)
first)
e
After that, detach the shutter ass'y (g: f
302ND94960) by sliding in the front direction
g
of the machine.
7-569
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No Procedure Detail
d
Shutter ass'y (g)
h
Insert the shutter leading edge section (h) of

the shutter ass'y (g) for the field service in the
lower side of the shutter attachment plate (d)
and matching the position of the waste toner
output opening (i) to install it by sliding in the
5 rear direction of the machine.
Note: i
After installation, make sure that the hooks (b)
on both sides are securely engaged. (Refer to
the Figure. 2 to the right)
Figure 2
(Machine left side) (Machine right side)
b b
Slide the shutter (a) in the rear direction of the

machine.
6
Reattach the waste toner box to the machine.

a a
7-570
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2ND-0076
Procedure to check the pressure release gear㻌

Be sure to check if the pressure release gear at the machine front side of the primary transfer unit comes off or
not by pulling the pressure release joint gear at the machine rear side.
• When the pressure release joint gear can be pulled out:
The pressure release gear comes off. Therefore, replce with the new primary transfer unit.
• When the pressure release joint gear cannot be pulled out:
The pressure release gear does not come off.
[Primary transfer unit]

[The way to check the pressure release gear]
(Machine Pressure release joint gear:
rear side) If it is possible to pull out to
the outside direction of the
unit (Arrow direction of the
(Machine photo to the left), the
front side) pressure release gear is
come off.
(Condition that the cover is removed)

Gear is coming off
Normal condition
If the pressure release gear comes
off, the pressure release structure
Pressure of the machine front side does not
release gear operate properly, it leads to the
abnormal image or service call
error.
Note:
If the print operation is done when the pressure releasee gear comes off, the abnormal image (missing image,
light image, etc. Refer to [Fig.1].) or service call error C2700 (the primary/secondary transfer pressure release
error) might occur. And once the event log is printed, the history of service call below might remain on the list.
- C7601, C7602: ID sensor error - C7620: Auto color registration error
- C7611 to C7614: Bias calibration read value error - C5130 to C5134: Primary transfer high-voltage error
[Fig.1: U089 MIP-PG image]

(The condition of the abnormal image defers depending on the products or the condition of the pressure release
structure)
7-571
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2ND-0085
Part No. 302L794230

Part Name PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY SP
Remark 1 pce per 1 cassette
Procedure to attach PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY SP㻌

㻌
No. Procedure Detail
Clean the red shaded section of

1
LEVER SIDE SWITCH A with alcohol.
LEVER SIDE SWITCH A
PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY SP
LEVER SIDE
Peel off the double sided tape mount SWITCH A Cleaning position
of PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY
SP (302L794230) and affix the
surface of LEVER SIDE SWITCH A
which was cleaned with alcohol.
2 (Refer to the drawing 1 for the affixing Cleaning position
position)
After affixing it, press whole part of [Drawing 1]
PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY SP
by finger and make sure it adheres to Align at the edge
LEVER SIDE SWITCH A.
0.5mm 0mm
Align at the edge
0.5mm
LEVER SIDE SWITCH A
7-572
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2ND-0089_1
Procedure to attach the heater cover㻌

(Estimate work time: 10 min.)
No Procedure Detail
[Main unit cassette 2] [Main unit cassette 2]
Turn the power switch off and unplug
the power plug.
Pull the upper cassette (a) out from
the main unit (c) and take it out in the
Pull the lower cassette (b) out from the
main unit (c) and take it out in the
1 direction of the arrow.
[Paper feeder (PF-7100)] [PF-7100]
Turn the power switch off and unplug
the power plug.
Pull the upper cassette (a) out from
the main unit (c) and take it out in the
Pull the lower cassette (b) out from the
main unit (c) and take it out in the
Turn over the cassette and place 2

piled-up washers* bundled in the Z
heater cover set (302ND94A00) on
the part as shown in the figure to the
2 right. [Arrow view Z]
*The cassette side warpage is

corrected by adding the washers.
2 washers
Place the heater cover and secure it

with 5 screws bundled in the heater
cover set (302ND94A00) in the order “3” “2”
below.
“5” “4”
1㸬 Fix “1” temporarily.
2㸬 Fasten “2” and “3”.
3 3㸬 Fasten “1”.
“1“
4㸬 Fasten “4” and “5”.
Heater cover
* When placing the heater cover, it is
off the cassette base by the
thickness of the washers (0.8mmx2).
Fasten the screws while holding the
heater cover by hand.
4 Reattach the parts once detached.
7-573
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2ND-0089_2
Procedure to measure the cassette warpage 㻌

㻌
No Procedure Detail
Push the lever as in the figure to the

1 right toward the machine lower side
(arrow in the figure) pull up the lift
plate toward the machine upper side.
[Cassette base viewed from

the machine right side] [Vertical rib]
[Figure 1]
Measure the length between the edge

of the lift plate and the vertical rib at Z
2 the side of the cassette. (Refer to
Figure 1 for measuring point and
criteria)
7mm or more: OK
[Arrow view Z] Less than 7mm: NG
7-574
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2ND-0090
Replacement procedure
Estimate work time: 30 minutes
No Procedure Detail
[Remove the main drive unit]

(Procedure 1 to (-->) 11)
1 Remove the screw (a) (M3x10) and slide
the rear upper cover (b) in the arrow
direction.
Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x10).

Push down the rear lower cover (b) and
2 release the upper rib, and lift up while it
opens to release the lower hook (c). After
that, remove it in the arrow direction.
3 Disconnect 3 connectors (b) from the feed

drive PWB (a).
Release 4 wire saddles (a).

4 Remove the binding band with the snap
and remove the wire (c).
7-575
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No Procedure Detail
[Low-end model]
(-->) Disconnect connectors (Connectors b in the

5 red frame section) from the feed image
PWB (a).
[High-end model]
Disconnect the connector (a). b

(-->)
6 Detach the wire saddle (b) and disconnect
the connector (c). c
Hang the connectors disconnected at the

procedure 5 and disconnected at the
procedure 6 (c) on the hook (d)
[Note] d
(-->) If trying to detach the main drive unit
7 without hanging the connector in the hook [Main drive unit]
(d), the connector wire interferes with the
waste toner joint and the sensor cleaning
spring in the waste toner joint gets
deformed, then it might be the possibility
to make wrong detection of the waste
toner full or the waste toner clog.
Waste toner joint
7-576
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No Procedure Detail
[Low-end model]
(-->) Disconnect the connectors (Connectors b

8 in the red frame section) from the feed
image PWB (a)
[High-end model]
[Low-end model]
(-->) Remove six (6) screws (a) (M3 x 8) from [High-end model]
9 the main drive unit(b)
7-577
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No Procedure Detail
Lift up the hook (b) of the waste toner
joint (a) and release the stopper (c), and
pull it out towards the front side.
[Waste toner joint (a)]
[Note when detaching the main drive
unit]
- If trying to detach the main drive unit Spring
without pulling out the waste toner joint
(a), the sensor cleaning spring in the (Rear side of
(-->) joint gets deformed andthen there the machine)
10 might be the possibility to make wrong
detection of the waste toner full or the
waste toner clog. Therefore, pull the
waste toner joint (a) out towardsthe
front side before detaching the main
drive unit.
- When pulling the waste toner joint (a)
out towards the front side, be careful
that the cleaning spring in the joint does
not get deformed.
[Low-end model]
(-->)
11 Detach the main drive unit(b).
[High-end model]
[Detaching/attaching the waste toner

(-->) forwarding unit] (Procedure (-->) 12 to
12 13)
Place the main drive unit on the work table
in the direction of the right figure. Work table
W
7-578
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2ND-0092
Container rail unit for service
Color Low-end model Color High-end model Monochrome model

Part No. 302L79424_ 302ND94A1_ 302NK9414_
PARTS CONTAINER RAIL L PARTS CONTAINER RAIL PARTS CONTAINER RAIL
Part Name
ASSY SP ASSY SP MONO ASSY SP
Container rail unit for the field service is supplied without the following parts A to E. Also, the units for the
color high-end/monochrome model (No.3, 4) bundle the black film with sponge (Part E).
- Part A: Access saddle x 7 pcs
- Part B: Access saddle x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part C: Container left fan motor x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part D: Fixing screw x 1 pce for the container left fan motor (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part E: Black film with sponge x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
For the part A to D, they have to be removed from the container rail unit originally installed in the main
unit, and reattached to the container rail unit for service.
(Part E is bundled in the container rail unit for service since it cannot be reused.)
[Container rail unit for service]

(Drawing below is for the color high-end model. At each unit perr the model types, the
materials affixed in the outside and inside of the unit are different.)
(Unit installed in the main unit)
Remark
* After removing it from the main unit, remove Parts A to D

and attach to the container rail unit for service
Part B
Part A
Part E
(Brand new is bundled.)
Part D Part C
Positioning pin for the monochrome model only
Monochrome model
Part No. 302ND15500
Part Name PIN CONTAINER JOINT
Use at Step 21.
When the gear tooth jumping sound from the container drive unit occurs, be sure to
Remark
insert this pin into the container drive unit at the same timing of replacing with the
container rail unit for service.
7-579
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Procedure to replace with the container rail unit for service㻌

* The following procedure is in the condition where the job separator, inner finisher, relay conveying unit are removed.
If each enhancement device is installed around the inner tray, remove it before performing the following procedure.
(Total work time: Within about 35 minutes)

1 Open the front cover (a) and remove the toner

container
2 Open the front cover for the maintenance (b)
Remove 3 screws (M3x8P tite) and

3 disconnect the connector.
Remove the toner container cover assy (c)
c
b
7-580
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Remove 2 screws (M3x8) and release 2

positions of hook (c), and remove the left rear
cover (b) to the arrow direction
Remove the screw (M3x8) (e) of the left lower
4 cover (d).
* For detaching/attaching the left upper cover

with the following procedure, remove the
screw (e). It is not necessary to remove the
e
left lower cover (d)
d
Remove 2 screws (M4x8) (a).

Insert the flathead screwdriver (c) in the
opening section (b) at the front side of the left
upper cover and widen in the arrow direction,
and release 4 positions of hook (d) and then
5 remove the left upper cover (e).
[Note when attaching]

When attaching the left upper cover (e), hook
4 positions (f) of lower side first and hook (d)
upper side to attach.
[* Main unit without the job separator tray,

inner finisher, relay conveying unit only]
6-1. Lift up the operation panel section

6-2. Lift up the lever (b) of the sub tray (a) to
release the lock and lift up the rear side
of the main unit (c) and slide it to the front
side
6
6-3. Lift up the machine front side of the sub
tray (a) and remove the pin (d) and
detach the sub tray (a)
6-4. Remove the screw (M3x8) (e)
6-5. Remove the connector cover (f)
* The above enhancement unit has to be

removed before this procedure
7-581
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Remove 3 screws (M3x8) (a) and detach the

rear middle cover (b)
Release two hooks (b) of the machine left

side of the inner tray (a) and detach the inner a
tray (a) to the arrow direction
8
* It is possible to detach the inner tray (a) with
the sub tray (c) attached.
Unhook the hook (a) of the binding band at

9 the machine inner right rear side of the
container rail unit form the round hole (b)
a
7-582
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Disconnect the connector of the gray 2-pin

wire (a) and release the wire from the 12
10
positions (c) of the wiring rib of the upper part
of the container rail unit
a c
Disconnect the connector (a) from the

attachment hole for the connector at the right d
front side of the container rail unit
Release the bundled wire (b) at the right side c b
of the container rail unit from 5 binding bands
(c). a
11 Disconnect the connector (d) from the
connector YC2 of the fuser high voltage PWB
Originally, it is not necessary to release the
connector (d) but, there might be the
possibility to come off when releasing the
bundled wire (b). Therefore, for the caution,
just add it as the procedure.
b
Release the bundled wire (a) at the right
12 side of the container rail unit from the
binding band (b) x 5 a
13-1. Remove screw (M3x8) (a) at the right

front side of the container rail unit.
13
a
(Continue to the next page.)
7-583
[CONFIDENTIAL]

13-2. Remove the screw (M3x8) (b) at the left
rear side of the container rail unit.
[Caution when fixing the screw]

The screw (a, b) should be fixed by the
following procedure.
13 1) Temporarily fix the screw (a) at the right
front side.
2) Shift the container rail unit in the left
direction of the machine and tighten screw
(b) at the left rear side.
3) Tighten the screw (a) at the right front side
completely. b
Shift the container rail unit (a) in the arrow

direction and release 4 positions of hook at
the bottom part of the machine front side of
the container rail unit
14
* 4 positions of hook at the front side of the
container rail unit are hooked at the cutout
of the metal plate. (Refer to the procedure
24 for the details)
Lift up the front side of the container rail unit b

slightly and disconnect the connector (a) from
the transfer connection PWB, and pull out the
connector wire in the upper direction from the
15
hole (b) at the right front side
After that, detach the container rail unit from

the main unit
7-584
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Remove 7 access saddles (a) from the

16
machine right side of the container rail unit
[Color high-end model/monochrome

model only]
Peel off the black film with sponge (a) at the b
machine left rear side of the container rail unit
Release the wire (c) of the container left fan
17
motor from the access saddle (b), and e
remove the screw (d) and detach the
container left fan motor (e). Remove the
access saddle (b) c
* Throw the black film with sponge (a) away d
a

model only]
Attach the container left fan motor (a) in the
container rail unit for the field service (b) and b
fix it with the screw (c)
18
Attach the access saddle (d)
a
d e
Align the wire of the container left fan motor c
(e) as shown in the right drawing and fix it to
the access saddle (d)
7-585
[CONFIDENTIAL]

model only]
For affixing the black film with sponge (Brand
new item: a) which is bundled in the container
rail unit for the field service, clean the affixing
position with alcohol (Red line/shaded area in
the right drawing) and affix it based on the
alignment shown on the right drawing a
After affixing it, wipe the bending position of
19 the film bending section (b) with dry cloth and c
bend the film bending section and affix it.
After affixing it, press it firmly. 0mm
1mm
Note:
Make sure to check the fixing screw (d) of the
container left fan motor is positioned at the Dry cloth
round hole (c) for the screw of the black film b
with sponge
(Prohibit to overlap the film on the screw (d)) d
Align to the rib edge surface *

* The edge section of the black film with sponge
has to be within the rib
Attach 7 access saddles which were removed

in the procedure 16 at the machine right side
20
of the container rail unit for the field service.
(Refer to the procedure 16)
7-586
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a D cut
b
Groove
[Monochrome model only]

Insert the D cut shape of the positioning pin [Back side of the boss
(a:No.1) matching to the D cut shape in the c hole (c) (Rear side of the
boss hole (c ) located at left of the white color machine) a
gear (b) (located at the rear side of the
machine inside)
21 D cut
Groove
Until the projection in the boss hole fits into Projection
the groove of the positioning pin (Click feeling
available), insert the positioning pin into the (Container drive unit for the monochrome model
boss hole
after inserting the positioning pin (a)
Place the container rail unit (a) on the

22
installation surface inside of the machine
Pull the connector wire (b) out from the hole

(a) of the right front side of the container rail
23
unit downwards and connect it to the
connector (c) on the transfer connection PWB
c b
7-587
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Container rail unit for service
Color Low-end model Color High-end model Monochrome model

Part No. 302L79424_ 302ND94A1_ 302NK9414_
PARTS CONTAINER RAIL L PARTS CONTAINER RAIL PARTS CONTAINER RAIL
Part Name
ASSY SP ASSY SP MONO ASSY SP
Container rail unit for the field service is supplied without the following parts A to E. Also, the units for the
color high-end/monochrome model (No.3, 4) bundle the black film with sponge (Part E).
- Part A: Access saddle x 7 pcs
- Part B: Access saddle x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part C: Container left fan motor x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part D: Fixing screw x 1 pce for the container left fan motor (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part E: Black film with sponge x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
For the part A to D, they have to be removed from the container rail unit originally installed in the main
unit, and reattached to the container rail unit for service.
(Part E is bundled in the container rail unit for service since it cannot be reused.)
[Container rail unit for service]

(Drawing below is for the color high-end model. At each unit perr the model types, the
materials affixed in the outside and inside of the unit are different.)
(Unit installed in the main unit)
Remark
* After removing it from the main unit, remove Parts A to D

and attach to the container rail unit for service
Part B
Part A
Part E
(Brand new is bundled.)
Part D Part C
Positioning pin for the monochrome model only
Monochrome model
Part No. 302ND15500
Part Name PIN CONTAINER JOINT
Use at Step 21.
When the gear tooth jumping sound from the container drive unit occurs, be sure to
Remark
insert this pin into the container drive unit at the same timing of replacing with the
container rail unit for service.
7-588
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2ND-0094
Part No. 302ND94A20

Part Name PARTS SPACER CONTAINER COVER CL SET SP
1 piece of this kit (302ND94A20) bundles 3 sponges.
Remark
Procedures to affix the sponges
(Work time: About 5 minutes)

Open the front cover and the container
1
covers.
[Sponges]
Straight
line
side
Clean with alcohol the circle shapes of
the inside of container cover Y/C/M.
Remove the release paper from the
double-faced tape of the sponges, and
then affix the sponges so that the
straight line side faces the upside of
the container covers.
2 Note:
Be sure not to affix the sponge to the
inside of container cover K.
Toner container K is longer than other
toner containers, therefore, if closing
container cover K with the sponge, the (After affixing)
parts at the toner container K machine Container cover Y/C/M
rear side might be deformed or
damaged.
Close the container cover and the front

3
cover.
7-589
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8 PWBs
8 - 1 Description for PWB
(1)Main PWB
(1-1)PWB photograph
(1-2)Connector position
YC58 1 1 7 1 13 1 6
YC6
B15 1 B1 20 YC11 YC63 YC9
1 YC60 60
1 6 15
A1 YC12 A15 5 YC8 1
YC59
YC43
1
1
YC5
1
10
YC10
40
YC2 1
YC51 1
52
1
YC33
10
YC32 YC42
YC23 3
1 10
3 1 1
8-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Connector lists
Destination
• YC2: HDD
• YC5: Wired LAN
• YC6: Operation panel main PWB(LCD)
• YC8: KUIO relay PWB
• YC9: KUIO relay PWB
• YC10: DP relay PWB
• YC11: Scanner
• YC12: Power switch, Operation panel main PWB, Human detect sensor
• YC20: USB Device I/F
• YC23: Controller fan motor
• YC31: SD memory card
• YC32: HDD
• YC33: FIERY relay PWB
• YC42: Power supply PWB
• YC43: Engine PWB
• YC51: SSD (mSATA I/F)
• YC58: WiFi PWB(IB-35)
• YC59: USB Host I/F, USB Hub PWB
• YC60: USB Hub PWB
• YC64: USB Host I/F
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC2 1 GND - - Ground
2 SATATXDP_C2H O Differential HDD data transmission signal (P)
3 SATATXDN_C2H O Differential HDD data transmission signal (N)
4 GND - - Ground
5 SATARXDN_H2C I Differential HDD data receive signal (N)
6 SATARXDP_H2C I Differential HDD data receive signal (P)
7 GND - - Ground
YC5 1 TD1+ I/O Differential Ethernet transmission and receive signal
(P)
2 TD1- I/O Differential Ethernet transmission and receive signal
(N)
3 TD2+ I/O Differential Ethernet transmission and receive signal
(P)
(N)
5 CT - - Pulse trans center tap
6 CT - - Pulse trans center tap
(P)
8-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC5) 8 TD3- I/O Differential Ethernet transmission and receive signal
(N)
(P)
(N)
L1 YWLED_K O DC0V/OPEN Yellow LED Cathode
L2 YWLED_A O DC3.3V Yellow LED Anode
L3 GRLED_K O DC0V/OPEN Green LED Cathode
L4 GRLED_A O DC3.3V Green LED Anode
LP-1 Lock Pin(1) - - Lock terminal
2 LCD_OFF O High LCD relay PWB LDO control signal
3 LOCKN I Low Sync detection
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O Differential Transmission data signal (N)
6 TX0P O Differential Transmission data signal (P)
7 GND - - Ground
LP-1 Lock Pin(1) - - Ground
YC8 1 VBUS1 O DC0V/5V VBUS EN signal
2 USB_DN1 I/O Differential USB data signal (N)
3 USB_DP1 I/O Differential USB data signal (P)
4 GND - - Ground
5 AUDIO1 I Analog FAX audio signal
6 WAKEUP1 I DC0V/3.3V Recovery request signal
7 RESET1 O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 VBUS0 O DC0V/5V VBUS EN signal
10 USB_DN0 I/O Differential USB data signal (N)
11 USB_DP0 I/O Differential USB data signal (P)
12 GND - - Ground
13 AUDIO0 I Analog FAX audio signal
14 WAKEUP0 I DC0V/3.3V Recovery request signal
15 RESET0 O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
2 5V_CUT0 O DC5V DC5V power output (in Sleep mode: OFF)
3 GND - - Ground
4 5V O DC5V DC5V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 5V_CUT0 O DC5V DC5V power output (Sleep: OFF)
2 DP_CONNECTN I DC0V/1.8V DP relay PWB connection detect signal
(L: detect)
8-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC10) 3 GND - - Ground
4 PCIEP_DP2M I Differential PCIe receive data signal (P)
5 5.0V3 O DC5V DC5V power output
6 PCIEN_DP2M I Differential
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
12 PCIEP_M2DP O Differential PCIe transmission data signal (P)
14 PCIEN_M2DP O Differential PCIe transmission data signal (N)
16 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
20 PCIEP_REFCLK_DP2M I Differential PCIe reference clock input(P)
21 GND - - Ground
22 PCIEN_REFCLK_DP2M I Differential PCIe reference clock input(N)
23 GND - - Ground
24 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
28 PCIERC_SWRST_N_M2D O DC0V/3.3V PCIe reset signal
P
29 GND - - Ground
30 DP_RST_N O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal to DP relay PWB
31 GND - - Ground
32 GND - - Ground
33 GND - - Ground
34 GND - - Ground
35 GND - - Ground
36 GND - - Ground
37 GND - - Ground
38 GND - - Ground
39 GND - - Ground
40 GND - - Ground
2 SCN_E2C_IR I DC0V/3.3V (G6) scanner request
8-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC11) 3 SCN_E2C_SDIR I DC0V/3.3V (G6) communication direction control
signal
4 SCN_E2C_SBSY I DC0V/3.3V (G6) scanner busy signal
5 SCN_C2E_SDAT O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) (G6) scanner transmission data signal
6 SCN_E2C_SDAT I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) (G6) scanner receive data signal
7 SCN_C2E_SCK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) (G6) communication clock
YC12 A1 I2C_SCL_NFC O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
A2 +3.3V2_CPU O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A3 FPRST O DC0V/3.3V Operation panel reset signal
A4 P2C_SDAT I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SSI receive data signal
A5 C2P_SDAT O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SSI transmission data signal
A6 P2C_SDIR I DC0V/3.3V SSI communication direction control
signal
A7 P2C_SBSY I DC0V/3.3V SSI busy signal
A8 C2P_SCK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SSI communication clock
A9 DISPLAY_POWERON O DC0V/3.3V LCD back light lighting-off signal
A10 INT_ANYKEY I DC0V/3.3V Main recovery signal
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 +5.0V6 O DC?V DC5V power output
A16 NC - - NC
B1 +3.3V1_HD O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B2 POWERSW I DC0V/3.3V Power button ON/OFF signal
B3 GND - - Ground
B4 JS_LED O DC0V/5V JOB separator LED lighting signal
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 GND - - Ground
B8 BEEP_PWERON O DC0V/3.3V Alert sound recovery signal
B9 INT_HUMAN_DETECT I DC0V/3.3V Human detect sensor detection interrupt
signal
B10 LED_ATTENTION O DC0V/3.3V ATTENTION LED control signal
B11 LED_PROCESSING O DC0V/3.3V PROCESSING LED control signal
B12 AUDIO O Analog Audio signal
B13 PNL_WKUP_REQ O DC0V/3.3V Panel recovery signal
B14 INT_ENERGYSAVERRKE I DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
Y
B15 NIRQ_NFC I DC0V/1.8V NFC interrupt signal
B16 I2C_SDA_NFC I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C address/data signal
YC20 1 VBUS I DC0V/5V VBUS signal
2 D- I/O Differential USB 2.0 data signal (N)
3 D+ I/O Differential USB 2.0 data signal (P)
4 GND - - Ground
5 STDB_SSTX- O Differential USB 3.0 transmission data signal (N)
6 STDB_SSTX+ O Differential USB 3.0 transmission data signal (P)
8-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]

8 STDB_SSRX- I Differential USB 3.0 receive data signal (N)
9 STDB_SSRX+ I Differential USB 3.0 receive data signal (P)
YC23 1 REMOTE_FAN[1] O DC0V/5V Speed control
2 REMOTE_FAN[0] - - Ground
YC31 1 CD/DAT3 I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SD Card data signal
2 CMD I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SD Card command signal
3 Vss - - Ground
4 Vdd O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SD Card communication clock
6 Vss - - Ground
7 DAT0 I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SD Card data signal
10 CD I SD Card detection signal
11 COMMON - -
12 WP I DC0V/3.3V Write protect signal
13 Lock Pin(1) - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
2 SDOCLK O - Transmission clock
3 SDO O - Transmission signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 SDICLK I - Receive clock
6 SDI I - Receive signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 5V O DC5V DC5V power
10 5V O DC5V DC5V power
YC42 1 5V I DC5V DC5V power input
2 GND - - Ground
3 5V I DC5V DC5V power input
4 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
8-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 V1_DATA0_N O Differential Video data signal (N)
6 V1_DATA0_P O Differential Video data signal (P)
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 V1_CLK_N O Differential Video clock(N)
15 V1_CLK_P O Differential Video clock(P)
16 GND - - Ground
19 GND - - Ground
22 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 V0_CLK_N O Differential Video data signal (N)
27 V0_CLK_P O Differential Video data signal (P)
28 GND - - Ground
29 VSYNC_D_N I Differential Vertical sync signal D line(N)
30 VSYNC_D_P I Differential Vertical sync signal D line(P)
31 VSYNC_C_N I Differential Vertical sync signal C line(N)
32 VSYNC_C_P I Differential Vertical sync signal C line(P)
33 VSYNC_B_N I Differential Vertical sync signal B line(N)
34 VSYNC_B_P I Differential Vertical sync signal B line(P)
35 VSYNC_A_N I Differential Vertical sync signal A line(N)
36 VSYNC_A_P I Differential Vertical sync signal A line(P)
37 HSYNC_D_N I Differential Horizontal sync signal D line(N)
38 HSYNC_D_P I Differential Horizontal sync signal D line(P)
39 HSYNC_C_N I Differential Horizontal sync signal C line(N)
40 HSYNC_C_P I Differential Horizontal sync signal C line(P)
41 HSYNC_B_N I Differential Horizontal sync signal B line(N)
42 HSYNC_B_P I Differential Horizontal sync signal B line(P)
43 HSYNC_A_N I Differential Horizontal sync signal A line(N)
44 HSYNC_A_P I Differential Horizontal sync signal A line(P)
45 GND - - Ground
8-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC43) 46 SRIF_SDR1N I Differential Scanner data signal (N)
47 SRIF_SDR1P I Differential Scanner data signal (P)
48 GND - - Ground
49 SRIF_SDR2N I Differential Scanner data signal (N)
51 GND - - Ground
54 GND - - Ground
55 SRIF_SCLKRN I Differential Scanner clock(N)
56 SRIF_SCLKRP I Differential Scanner clock(P)
57 GND - - Ground
60 GND - - Ground
YC51 1 NC - - NC
2 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
3 NC - - NC
4 GND - - Ground
5 NC - - NC
6 NC - - NC
7 NC - - NC
8 NC - - NC
9 GND - - Ground
10 NC - - NC
11 NC - - NC
12 NC - - NC
13 NC - - NC
14 NC - - NC
15 GND - - Ground
16 NC - - NC
17 NC - - NC
18 GND - - Ground
19 NC - - NC
20 NC - - NC
21 GND - - Ground
22 NC - - NC
23 TxP O Differential SSD data receive signal (P)
25 TxN O Differential SSD data receive signal (N)
26 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
28 NC - - NC
29 GND - - Ground
30 NC - - NC
31 RxN I Differential SSD data transmission signal (P)
8-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC51) 32 NC - - NC
33 RxP I Differential SSD data transmission signal (N)
34 GND - - Ground
35 GND - - Ground
36 NC - - NC
37 GND - - Ground
38 NC - - NC
40 GND - - Ground
42 NC - - NC
43 NC - - NC
44 NC - - NC
45 NC - - NC
46 NC - - NC
47 NC - - NC
48 NC - - NC
49 NC - - NC
50 GND - - Ground
51 GND - - Ground
YC58 1 SD_D3 I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SDIF data signal
2 SD_D2 I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SDIF data signal
3 SD_CMD I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SDIF command signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 SD_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) SDIF communication clock
6 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 VIO O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
11 VBAT O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
12 GND - - Ground
13 PAVDD O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 HOSTWAKE I DC0V/3.3V SDIF interrupt signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 RESET O DC0V/3.3V SDIF reset signal
18 DETECT I DC0V/3.3V SDIF connection detection signal
19 USB_+ - - Not used(Ground)
20 USB_ - - - Not used(Ground)
YC59 1 VBUS O DC5V DC5V power output
2 D- I/O Differential USB data signal (N)
3 D+ I/O Differential USB data signal (P)
4 NC - - NC
5 GND - - Ground
8-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC59) LP-1 Lock Pin(1) - - Lock terminal
YC60 1 5.0V7 O DC5V DC5V power output for USB-HUB
2 5.0V7 O DC5V DC5V power output for USB-HUB
3 5.0V7 O DC5V DC5V power output for USB-HUB
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC63 1 JS_LED_REM I DC0V/3.3V Job separator LED control signal
2 ENG_WKUP_REQ O DC0V/3.3V Engine recovery request signal
3 HLD_ENG O DC0V/3.3V Engine hold signal
4 E2C_SDAT I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) (G6) engine receive data signal
5 C2E_SDAT O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) (G6) engine transmission data signal
6 C2E_SCLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) (G6) communication clock
7 E2C_SBSY I DC0V/3.3V (G6) engine busy signal
8 E2C_IR I DC0V/3.3V (G6) engine request
9 E2C_SDIR I DC0V/3.3V (G6) communication direction control
signal
10 ENG_POWOFF_N O DC0V/3.3V Engine power off signal
11 HLD_SCAN O DC0V/3.3V Scanner hold signal
12 DP_WAKEUP_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Recovery request signal
13 GND - - Ground
YC64 1 VBUS O DC5V DC5V power output
2 D- I/O Differential USB data signal (N)
3 D+ I/O Differential USB data signal (P)
4 GND - - Ground
8-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Engine PWB

(2-1)PWB photograph
High Model
Low Model
8-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
High Model
B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1
YC38
A11 A12
A16 4 5
1 YC43 A1 A1 B1
14 1 YS1
1 YC6
YC35 A1
B12
YC42 A20
B1
60
18
YC40
B20 A1
20 20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1
1 1
6 1
A15 A1 YC22
1 50 1 40 1 41 1 17 B1 B15 1 12
Low Model
B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1 YC38
4 5 A11 A12
1 YC43 A1 A16 A1 B1
14 1
YS1
1 YC6
YC35 B12 A1
YC42 A20
B1
60
18
YC40
B20 A1
20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1 20 1
1 6 1
YC22
YC9 YC4 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 50 1 41 1 17 1 11 1 12
8-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC4: FIERY relay PWB
• YC6: Feed Drive PWB
• YC9: APC PWB
• YC10: APC PWB*1
• YC16: DP, Home position sensor, Original size sensor, Original size timing sensor, Scanner motor
• YC21: Coin vendor
• YC22: Key card 1, Key counter
• YC23: Key card or MK2
• YC27: APC PWB, Waste toner motor, Weight detection sensor, Power supply PWB
• YC29: IH PWB
• YC33: Main high voltage PWB
• YC34: Transfer high voltage PWB, Main high voltage PWB*1
• YC35: Main PWB
• YC36: CCD PWB
• YC38: Temperature/humidity sensor, Power supply fan motor, PF PWB
• YC40: Feed image PWB
• YC43: Main PWB
*1: High-end Model

YC4 1 SAT_1_HSYNC_A_N O LVDS Image data signal
2 SAT_1_HSYNC_A_P O LVDS Image data signal
3 SAT_1_HSYNC_B_N O LVDS Image data signal
4 SAT_1_HSYNC_B_P O LVDS Image data signal
5 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_N O LVDS Image data signal
6 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_P O LVDS Image data signal
7 SAT_1_HSYNC_D_N O LVDS Image data signal
8 SAT_1_HSYNC_D_P O LVDS Image data signal
9 SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N O LVDS Image data signal
10 SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P O LVDS Image data signal
11 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N O LVDS Image data signal
12 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P O LVDS Image data signal
13 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N O LVDS Image data signal
14 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P O LVDS Image data signal
15 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N O LVDS Image data signal
16 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P O LVDS Image data signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 SAR_1_VCLK1_P I LVDS Image data signal
19 SAR_1_VCLK1_N I LVDS Image data signal
8-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]

21 SAR_1_CH13_P I LVDS Image data signal
22 SAR_1_CH13_N I LVDS Image data signal
23 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
29 GND - - Ground
32 GND - - Ground
35 GND - - Ground
38 GND - - Ground
41 GND - - Ground
YC6 A1 3.3V3_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A2 3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 GND - - Ground
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 REG_R_LED O Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
A10 ID_SENS_R_S I Analog Rear ID sensor detection signal
A11 ID_SENS_R_P I Analog Rear ID sensor detection signal
A12 REG_F_LED O Analog Front ID sensor control signal
B1 ID_SENS_F_S I Analog Front ID sensor detection signal
B2 ID_SENS_F_P I Analog Front ID sensor detection signal
B3 REG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
B4 ATLAS_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication clock signal
B5 ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
B6 ATLAS_EN O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication enable signal
B7 ATLAS_CS I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
B8 ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
B9 MPF_ORG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V MP paper sensor: On/Off
B10 CAS1_2_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close detection signal
B11 REG_CL_REM O DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
B12 GND - - Ground
8-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC9 1 DATAP2_K O LVDS Image data K
2 DATAN2_K O LVDS Image data K
3 GND - - Ground
4 DATAP1_K O LVDS Image data K
6 GND - - Ground
7 LSU_TH O Analog LSU thermistor voltage
8 GND - - Ground
9 POL_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) PM clock signal
10 POL_RDY I DC0V/3.3V PM ready signal
11 POL_REM O DC0V/5V PM remote signal
12 BD I DC0V/5V BD signal
13 P4_BK O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
14 P2_KC O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
15 P0_KC O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
16 CSI_K O DC0V/3.3V EEPROM tip select signal
17 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground
23 GND - - Ground
24 SD_CLK O DC0V/3.3V Shading clock signal
25 P4_M O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
26 CSI_M O DC0V/3.3V EEPROM tip select signal
27 NC - - Not used
28 INT_ST_KM I DC0V/5V Laser driver initialization monitor signal
29 SET_KM O DC0V/3.3V Laser driver set signal
30 NC - - Not used
31 GND - - Ground
32 DIO_KM I DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication data input
signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 DOI_KM O DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication data output
signal
35 GND - - Ground
36 SKOI_KM O DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication clock signal
37 GND - - Ground
38 CSI_M O DC0V/3.3V EEPROM tip select signal
39 GND - - Ground
40 DATAP2_M O LVDS Image data M
41 DATAN2_M O LVDS Image data M
42 GND - - Ground
8-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]

48 GND - - Ground
2 DATAP4_C O LVDS Image data C
3 DATAN4_C O LVDS Image data C
4 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 INT_ST_YC I DC0V/5V Laser driver initialization monitor signal
15 SET_YC O DC0V/3.3V Laser driver set signal
16 CSI_C O DC0V/3.3V EEPROM tip select signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 DIO_YC I DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication data input
signal
19 GND - - Ground
20 DOI_YC O DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication data output
signal
21 GND - - Ground
22 SKOI_YC O DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication clock signal
23 GND - - Ground
24 CSO_YC O DC0V/3.3V EEPROM tip select signal
25 GND - - Ground
26 DATAP4_Y O LVDS Image data Y
27 DATAN4_Y O LVDS Image data Y
28 GND - - Ground
31 GND - - Ground
34 GND - - Ground
37 GND - - Ground
38 CSI_Y O DC0V/3.3V EEPROM tip select signal
8-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC10) 39 P4_YC O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
40 BD I DC0V/5V BD signal
YC16 A1 GND - - Ground
A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Scanner motor control signal
A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Scanner motor control signal
A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Scanner motor control signal
A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Scanner motor control signal
A6 PLT_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Original size timing sensor: On/Off
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A9 5V2 O DC5V DC5V power output
A10 ORG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Original size sensor: On/Off
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 HP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Home position sensor: On/Off
A13 GND - - Ground
A15 GND - - Ground
A16 GND - - Ground
B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP) O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication clock signal
B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP) O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data output signal
B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V DP scanning start signal
B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V DP cover open/close detection signal
B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication ready signal
B6 DP_FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V DP conveying sensor: On/Off
B7 DP_ORG_SET I DC0V/3.3V DP original sensor: On/Off
B8 3.3V3_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 +24V2 O DC24V DC24V power output
B15 DP_SEL(ENG to DP) O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data input signal
YC21 1 +24V4 O DC24V DC24V power output
2 SGND - - Ground
3 SGND - - Ground
4 MCV_ENBL I DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor enable signal
5 FGND - - Ground
6 MCV_FED_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor control signal
7 MCV_EJ_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor control signal
8 MCV_COPY_SIG O DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor control signal
9 MCV_UART_TXD O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
10 SGND - - Ground
11 MCV_UART_RXD I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
12 SGND - - Ground
8-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 DC1_SET I DC0V/3.3V Key counter set signal
3 DC1_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Key counter count signal
4 +24V4 O DC24V DC24V power output
YC23 A1 +5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
A2 +5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
A9 MK2_ENBL I DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
A10 +24V4 O DC24V DC24V power output
B1 MK2_RKEY7 O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 MK2_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Count signal
YC27 1 +5V4IL_LSU O DC5V DC5V power output
2 +5V4IL_LSU O DC5V DC5V power output
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 CLN_MOT_A O DC0V/24V Cleaning motor drive control
6 CLN_MOT_B O DC0V/24V Cleaning motor drive control
8 PGND - - Ground
9 WTNR_MOT_A O DC0V/24V Waste toner motor drive control
10 WTNR_MOT_B O DC0V/24V Waste toner motor drive control
11 WTNR_WEIGHT I DC0V/3.3V Waste toner sensor: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
14 AC DETECTOR I DC0V/3.3V AC shutdown detection signal
15 GND - - Ground
16 CAS_HEATER O DC5V Cassette heater control signal
17 SLEEP O DC0V/5V 24V output enabling signal
2 3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) IH Clock signal (High)
4 IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) IH clock signal (Low)
5 IH_ERROR I DC0V/3.3V IH error signal
8-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC29) 6 IH_TXD O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 IH_RXD I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 IH_RELAY O DC0V/3.3V IH relay signal
YC33 1 HV_REM O DC0V/3.3V High voltage remote signal
(High-end 2 M_M_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC charger control voltage M
model) 3 M_C_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC charger control voltage C
4 M_Y_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC charger control voltage Y
5 B_M_SLV_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC sleeve bias control voltage M
6 B_M_SLV_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC sleeve bias control voltage M
7 B_C_SLV_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC sleeve bias control voltage C
8 B_C_SLV_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC sleeve bias control voltage C
9 B_C_MAG_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC magnet roller bias control voltage C
10 B_Y_SLV_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC sleeve bias control voltage Y
11 B_Y_SLV_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC sleeve bias control voltage Y
12 B_Y_MAG_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC magnet roller bias control voltage Y
13 B_M_MAG_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC magnet roller bias control voltage M
14 M_C_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage C
15 M_Y_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage Y
16 M_M_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage M
17 B_C_MAG_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage C
18 B_M_MAG_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage M
19 B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage Y
20 SGND - - Ground
YC33 1 SGND - - Ground
(Low-end 2 SGND - - Ground
model) 3 HV_REM O DC0V/3.3V High voltage remote signal
4 B_K_MAG_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
5 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
6 M_C_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage C
7 B_M_MAG_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage M
8 M_K_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage K
9 M_M_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage M
10 B_C_MAG_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage C
11 B_C_MAG_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC magnet roller bias control voltage C
12 M_Y_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage Y
13 M_M_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Charger current detection M
14 M_K_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Discharge detection voltage K
15 M_C_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Charger current detection C
16 M_Y_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Charger current detection Y
17 B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage Y
18 B_MAG_AC_CLK O DC0V/10V AC Magnet roller bias clock signal
YC34 A1 B_BK_SLV_AC_CLK O DC0V/10V Sleeve AC clock control signal
(High-end A2 B_BK_MAG_AC_CLK O DC0V/10V Magnet roller AC clock control signal
model) A3 NC - - Not used
8-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC34 A4 NC - - Not used
(High-end A5 CL_CNT O Analog Cleaning control voltage
model) A6 T1_Y_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage Y
A7 T1_C_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage C
A8 T1_M_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage M
A9 T1_I_SENS I Analog Primary transfer current detection
A10 T2_OFF__REM O Analog Secondary transfer remote off signal
A11 T1_K_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage K
A12 SP_CNT O Analog Separation bias control voltage
A13 T2_CNT O Analog Secondary transfer control voltage
A14 T_REM O DC0V/10V Transfer remote signal
A15 SGND - - Ground
B1 M_Y_I_SENS I Analog Charger current detection Y
B2 M_C_I_SENS I Analog Charger current detection C
B3 M_M_I_SENS I Analog Charger current detection M
B4 DISCHARGE I Analog Discharge detection voltage
B5 B_SLV_AC_CLK O DC0V/10V(pulse) AC sleeve bias clock signal
B6 B_MAG_AC_CLK O DC0V/10V(pulse) AC Magnet roller bias clock signal
B7 B_K_MAG_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
B8 B_K_SLV_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC sleeve bias control voltage K
B9 M_AC_CLK O DC0V/10V(pulse) AC charger clock signal
B10 M_K_AC_CNT O DC0V/10V AC charger control voltage K
B11 M_K_I_SENS I Analog Discharge detection voltage K
B12 M_K_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage K
B13 B_K_SLV_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC sleeve bias control voltage K
B14 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
B15 SGND - - Ground
YC34 1 CL_CNT O Analog Cleaning control voltage
(Low-end 2 T1_Y_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage Y
model) 3 T1_C_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage C
4 T1_M_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage M
5 T1_I_SENS I Analog Primary transfer current detection
6 T2_OFF_REM O DC0V/16V Secondary transfer remote off signal
7 T1_K_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage K
8 SP_CNT O Analog Separation bias control voltage
9 T2_CNT O Analog Secondary transfer control voltage
10 T_REM O DC0V/14V Transfer remote signal
11 SGND - - Ground
2 OS_SAD4P O LVDS Serializer output data
3 OS_SAD4N O LVDS Serializer output data
4 GND - - Ground
5 OS_SACKP O LVDS Serializer transfer data
6 OS_SACKN O LVDS Serializer transfer data
7 GND - - Ground
8-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC35) 9 OS_SAD3N O LVDS Serializer output data
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P O LVDS Image data signal
18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N O LVDS Image data signal
19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P O LVDS Image data signal
20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N O LVDS Image data signal
21 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P O LVDS Image data signal
22 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N O LVDS Image data signal
23 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P O LVDS Image data signal
24 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N O LVDS Image data signal
25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P O LVDS Image data signal
26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N O LVDS Image data signal
27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P O LVDS Image data signal
28 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N O LVDS Image data signal
29 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P O LVDS Image data signal
30 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N O LVDS Image data signal
31 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P O LVDS Image data signal
32 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N O LVDS Image data signal
33 GND - - Ground
36 GND - - Ground
39 GND - - Ground
42 GND - - Ground
45 GND - - Ground
48 GND - - Ground
51 GND - - Ground
54 GND - - Ground
8-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC35 55 SAR_2_CH21_P I LVDS Image data signal
57 GND - - Ground
58 GND - - Ground
59 AC_DETECT - - Ground
60 GND - - Ground
5 NC - - Not used
6 LED_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) LED driver PWM signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 DSI_CIS_5P I LVDS Serial input data
9 DSI_CIS_5N I LVDS Serial input data
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
17 DSI_CIS_CKP I LVDS Transfer clock
18 DSI_CIS_CKN I LVDS Transfer clock
19 GND - - Ground
22 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 AFE_RD I DC0V/3.3V AFE serial communication read signal
27 GND - - Ground
28 AFE_WD O DC0V/3.3V AFE serial communication write signal
29 GND - - Ground
30 AFE_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) AFE serial communication clock signal
31 GND - - Ground
32 AFE_CS O DC0V/3.3V AFE serial communication select signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 AFE_MCLK_P O LVDS AFE clock signal
35 AFE_MCLK_N O LVDS AFE clock signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 NC - - Not used
8-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC38 A1 PF_CAS_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal
A2 PF_PAUSE O DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
A3 PF_SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
A4 PF_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
A5 PF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
A6 PF_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
A7 PF_SEL2 O DC0V/3.3V PF CPU signal
A8 PF_SEL1 O DC0V/3.3V Side paper feeder CPU signal
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 +3.3V3_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A11 PF_VER_SENS I DC0V/3.3V PF vertical conveying sensor: On/Off
B1 +3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 SUB_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Communication data signal
B4 SUB_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Communication clock signal
B5 LVU_PWB_FAN_ALM I DC0V/3.3V Power supply fan alarm signal
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 LVU_PWB_FAN_REM O DC0V/24V Power supply fan motor: On/Off
B8 HUMID_CLK O DC0V/3.3V Temperature/humidity sensor clock signal
B9 HUMID_OUT I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor detection
voltage (humidity)
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 TEMP I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor detection
voltage (temperature)
YC39 1 5V0 I DC5V DC5V power input
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 +24V4 I DC24V DC24V power input
YC40 A1 +5V0 O DC5V DC5V power output
A3 GND - - Ground
A4 GND - - Ground
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V BR job separator sensor: On/Off
A11 FRONT_CO_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Front cover sensor: On/Off
A12 JS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V JS sensor: On/Off
A13 ANALOG_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Analog select signal
A14 KSS_EN O DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
A15 KSS_CS O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
A16 KSS_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
8-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC40) A17 KSS_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) KSS communication data signal
A18 KSS_SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) KSS communication data signal
A20 3.3V_TH_CUT I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
B1 DRUM HEAT O DC0V/3.3V Drum heater control signal
B2 DF_CLK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
B3 DF_SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
B4 DF_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
B5 DF_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
B6 DF_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
B7 DF_SYNC O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) DF synchronizing signal
B8 DF_DET I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
B9 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (edge)
B10 FSR_TH_CENT I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(center)
B11 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (fuser
press roller)
B12 FSR_TH_MID I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(middle)
B13 FSR_ALARM I DC0V/3.3V Fuser alarm signal
B14 TPC_BK I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage K
B15 DRUM_BK_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal K
B16 DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal K
B17 DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal K
B18 GND - - Ground
B19 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 O DC24V DC24V power output
B20 FSR_OFFSET_CNT O Analog Fuser high voltage control voltage
YC42 1 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RE O DC0V/5V Transfer belt motor remote signal
M
2 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CL O DC0V/5V(pulse) Transfer belt motor clock signal
K
3 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Transfer belt motor rotation switching
signal
4 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RD I DC0V/3.3V Transfer belt motor synchronizing signal
Y
5 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BR O DC0V/5V Transfer belt motor brake signal
AKE
6 ANALOG_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Analog select signal
7 UNIT_E2P_SCL O DC0V/3.3V Unit EEPROM communication clock
8 UNIT_E2P_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V Unit EEPROM communication data signal
9 TPC_M I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage M
10 TPC_C I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage C
11 TPC_Y I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage Y
12 DLP_COL_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal CMY
13 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal CMY
14 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching signal
CMY
15 DLP_COL_MOT_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal
CMY
8-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC42) 16 DRUM_COL_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal CMY
17 DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal CMY
18 DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal CMY
YC43 1 24V2 DC24V DC24V power input
2 GND - - Ground
3 DP_WAKEUP_REQ O DC0V/3.3V DP sleep recovery signal
4 HLD_SCN_N(E_M) I DC0V/3.3V Scanner stop signal
5 ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M) I DC0V/3.3V Engine power off signal
6 E2C_SDIR(E_M) O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) G6 communication direction signal
7 E2C_IR(E_M) O DC0V/3.3V G6 communication interrupt signal
8 E2C_SBSY(E_M) O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) G6 communication busy signal
9 C2E_SCLK(M_E) I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) G6 communication clock signal
10 C2E_SDAT(M_E) I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) G6 communication data input signal
11 E2C_SDAT(E_M) O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) G6 communication data output signal
12 HLD_ENG_N(M_E) I DC0V/3.3V Engine stop signal
13 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_ I DC0V/3.3V Engine sleep recovery signal
E)
14 JS_LED_REM O DC0V/3.3V JOB separator LED lighting signal
8-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Feed image PWB

(3-1)PWB photograph
B1 B18 1
YC33 1 18
14 YC36
B20 YC22 B1 6
A18 YC19 A1
8 1
A1 A20 YC12
YC17 4
1 B1 A18 YC25
YC24 A1 B20 1
26
1
YC32
YC6
YC28 1
B18 A1
1
2
18
YC23 20
1 A20
YC2 1 1 YC1 B1
7 YC30
1 YC3 4 YC29 YC35
14 1 8 1 10
8-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC2: Right cover switch
• YC3: Feed Drive PWB
• YC6: Engine PWB
• YC12: RFID PWB
• YC17: Switchback motor, Exit full sensor lower/upper, Exit solenoid lower/upper, Exit sensor, Drum/Developer relay
PWB
• YC19: Toner motor CKMY, Toner level sensor CKMY, Toner motor rotation detection sensor CKMY
• YC22: Fuser PWB, Thermostat, Thermistor 1/2, Belt rotation sensor front/rear
• YC23: Belt release motor, Developer clutch, Belt release sensor
• YC24: Developer motor C/M/Y, Developer K/Transfer belt motor, Drum motor CMY, Drum motor K
• YC25: DF PWB
• YC29: Feed drive PWB, Toner suction fan motor, Vibration motor CKMY
• YC30: BR PWB, DF PWB
• YC32: Transfer connection PWB, Container solenoid CKMY, IH position sensor, IH core motor, JS sensor, Front
cover switch, Fuser high voltage PWB
• YC33: IH PWB fan motor, Exit/IH fan motor front, Exit/IH fan motor middle, Exit/IH fan motor rear
• YC35: Transfer high voltage PWB, Main high voltage PWB
• YC36: Container motor
High-end Model
YC1 1 +24V4 I DC24V DC24V power input
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 +24V3_IL O DC24V DC24V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 O DC24V DC24V power output
YC6 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC6) A3 KSS_IMAGE_SDO I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) KSS communication data signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) KSS communication data signal
(IMAGE to ENG)
A5 KSS_IMAGE_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN I DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A8 DRM_EEP_SELO I DC0V/3.3V Interrupt signal
A10 FRONT_CO_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Front cover switch: On/Off
A12 GND - - Ground
A13 GND - - Ground
A17 GND - - Ground
A18 GND - - Ground
B1 FSR_OFFSET_CNT I DC0V/3.3V Control signal
B3 GND - - Ground
B7 TPC_BK I LVDS T/C sensor detection voltage K
(middle)
press roller)
(center)
B20 DRUM HEAT I DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
YC12 1 5V2 O DC5V DC5V power output
8-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC12) 2 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
3 EEP_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) RFID communication clock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V RFID communication data signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 CONT_RETURN I Analog Connection detection signal
8 CONT_RECOG I Analog Connection detection signal
YC17 A1 EXMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit switchback motor control signal
A2 EXMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit switchback motor control signal
A3 EXMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit switchback motor control signal
A5 +3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
A6 GND - - Ground
A7 EXMAIN_FULL I DC0V/3.3V Lower exit full sensor: On/Off
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 EXINNER_FULL I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit full sensor: On/Off
A11 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
A12 EXSOL1 O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
A13 EXSOL1_KEEP O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
A15 EXSOL2 O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
A16 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
A18 GND - - Ground
A19 EX_FEED_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
A20 N.C. - - Not used
B1 VIB_MOT_REM O DC0V/3.3V VIBM remote signal
B2 DLP_FAN_HARF - - Not used
B3 DLP_FAN_REM O DC0V/3.3V Developer fan motor (full speed): On/Off
B4 5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
B5 DRM_HEAT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
B6 ERASER_COL O DC0V/5V Eraser CMY remote signal
B7 ERASER_BK O DC0V/5V Eraser K remote signal
B8 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 TPC_Y I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage Y
B11 TPC_C I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage C
B12 TPC_M I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage M
B13 TPC_BK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage K
B14 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor voltage
B15 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM data I/O signal
B16 EEP_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM clock signal
B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1 O DC0V/3.3V Drum EEPROM select signal
B19 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC17) B20 GND - - Ground
YC19 A1 TNMOT_BK_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Toner motor control signal K
A2 TNMOT_BK_OUT2 O DC0V/24V Toner motor control signal K
A3 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
A4 GND - - Ground
A5 THOP_PLS_BK I DC0V/3.3V Toner motor rotation sensor K: On/Off
A7 THOP_FULL_BK I Analog Toner level sensor K detection signal
A8 THOP_LED_BK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
K
A10 TNMOT_M_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Toner motor control signal M
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 THOP_PLS_M I DC0V/3.3V Toner motor rotation sensor M: On/Off
A16 THOP_FULL_M I Analog Toner level sensor M detection signal
A17 THOP_LED_M O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
M
B1 TNMOT_C_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Toner motor control signal C
B3 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 THOP_PLS_C I DC0V/3.3V Toner motor rotation sensor C: On/Off
B7 THOP_FULL_C I Analog Toner level sensor C detection signal
B8 THOP_LED_C O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
C
B10 TNMOT_Y_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Toner motor control signal Y
B13 GND - - Ground
B14 THOP_PLS_Y I DC0V/3.3V Toner motor rotation sensor Y: On/Off
B16 THOP_FULL_Y I Analog Toner level sensor Y detection signal
B17 THOP_LED_Y O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
Y
2 FUSER_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Fuser EEPROM data I/O signal
3 FUSER_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Fuser EEPROM clock signal
4 +3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (fuser
press roller)
8-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC22) 6 FSR_PRESS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser release sensor: On/Off
7 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (edge)
8 FSR_JAM_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser sensor: On/Off
9 FSR_ROLL_F_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser belt rotation sensor F: On/Off
10 +3.3V2_TH_CUT I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
12 GND - - Ground
13 FSR_TH_MIDDLE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (middle)
14 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
15 GND - - Ground
16 FSR_ROLL_R_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser belt rotation sensor R: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
18 FSR_TH_CENTRAL I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (center)
YC23 1 BLT_PRESS_OUT1 O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Belt release motor control signal
2 BLT_PRESS_OUT2 O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Belt release motor control signal
3 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
4 DLP_BK_CLT_REM O DC0V/24V Developer clutch: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
7 BLT_4RELEASE_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Belt release sensor: On/Off
YC24 1 DRM_BK_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Drum motor rotation switching signal K
2 DRM_BK_MOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal K
3 DRM_BK_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal K
4 DRM_BK_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal K
5 GND - - Ground
6 +24V2IL2 O DC24V DC24V power output
7 DRM_COL_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Drum motor rotation switching signal COL
8 DRM_COL_MOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal COL
9 DRM_COL_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal COL
10 DRM_COL_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal COL
11 GND - - Ground
13 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_BRK O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor brake signal K
14 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_DIR I DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal K
15 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_FG O DC0V/5V Developer motor control signal K
16 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
17 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal K
18 GND - - Ground
20 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR I DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal
COL
21 DLP_COL_MOT_LD O DC0V/5V Developer motor control signal COL
22 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal COL
23 DLP_COL_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal COL
24 GND - - Ground
8-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC24) 26 N.C. - - Not used
YC25 1 +24V2_FUSE2 O DC24V DC24V power output
2 +24V2_FUSE2 O DC24V DC24V power output
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
YC28 1 DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal CMY
2 DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK I DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal CMY
3 DRUM_COL_MOT_REM I DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal CMY
4 DLP_COL_MOT_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal
CMY
5 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR I DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching signal
CMY
6 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK I DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal CMY
7 DLP_COL_MOT_REM I DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal CMY
8 TPC_Y O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage Y
9 TPC_C O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage C
10 TPC_M O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage M
11 I2C_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM data I/O signal
12 I2C_SCL I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM clock signal
13 DRM_EEP_SEL1 I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
14 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BR I DC0V/5V Developer motor brake signal K
AKE
15 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RD O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal K
Y
16 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR I DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching signal
K
17 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CL I DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
K
18 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RE I DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal K
M
YC29 1 GND - - Not used
2 EX_SENS - - Not used
3 5V2 - - Not used
4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM I DC0V/5V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA O DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
6 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
7 D_VIB_MOT O DC0V/3.3V Vibration motor: On/Off
8 EXSOL1_REM I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
9 EXSOL1_KEEP I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
10 EXSOL2_REM O DC0V/3.3V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
11 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/3.3V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
12 TN_FAN_LOCK I DC0V/3.3V Toner suction fan motor lock signal
13 GND - - Ground
14 TN_FAN_REM O DC0V/24V Toner suction fan motor: On/Off
YC30 1 DF_RDY(DF to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
2 DF_SEL(ENG to DF) O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
3 DF_SDO(ENG to DF) O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
8-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC30) 4 DF_SDI(DF to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
5 BRGMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Bridge motor rotation direction switching
signal
6 DF_DET(DF to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
7 DF_CLK(ENG to DF) O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
10 BRG_MOT2_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Bridge motor 2 clock signal
11 BRG_MOT2_PD O DC0V/3.3V Bridge motor 2 current control signal
12 BRG_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Bridge open detection signal
13 BRG_FEED_SENS2 I DC0V/3.3V Bridge conveying detection signal 2
15 BRG_SET I DC0V/3.3V Bridge presence detection signal
17 BRG_MOT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Bridge motor remote signal
19 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V Paper presence detection signal
YC32 A1 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
A3 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Belt cleaning motor control signal
A4 +3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA I DC3.3V Belt cleaning motor rotation control signal
A6 BELT_TH I Analog Belt thermistor voltage
A7 BLT_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Belt cleaning motor clock signal
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 BLT_SDA I/O DC3.3V EEPROM data I/O signal
A12 COTN_SOL_BK O DC0V/24V Container solenoid K: On/Off
A14 COTN_SOL_M O DC0V/24V Container solenoid M: On/Off
A16 COTN_SOL_C O DC0V/24V Container solenoid C: On/Off
A18 COTN_SOL_Y O DC0V/24V Container solenoid Y: On/Off
B1 GND - - Ground
B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT O Analog Offset control signal
B4 PWM - - Not used
B5 CW/CCW - - Not used
B7 GND - - Ground
B8 IH_CORE_HP I DC0V/3.3V IH position sensor: On/Off
B9 IHMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B10 IHMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
8-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC32) B11 IHMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B12 IHMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 JS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V JS sensor: On/Off
B16 GND - - Ground
B17 FRONT_CO_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Front cover switch: On/Off
B18 N.C. - - Not used
YC33 1 CONT_FAN O DC0V/24V Container cooling fan motor: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 N.C. - - Not used
4 IH_PWB_FAN_REM O DC0V/24V IH PWB fan motor: On/Off
6 IHCOIL_FAN1 O DC24V DC24V power output
7 GND - - Ground
8 IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
13 GND - - Ground
14 IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
YC35 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FET1 O DC24V DC24V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
YC36 1 CONT_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Container motor rotation switching signal
2 CONT_MOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Container motor synchronizing signal
3 CONT_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Container motor clock signal
4 CONT_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Container motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
Low-end model
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 +24V3_IL O DC24V DC24V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
YC6 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A3 KSS_IMAGE_SDO
A3 KSS_IMAGE_SDO I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) KSS communication data signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) KSS communication data signal
(IMAGE to ENG)
A5 KSS_IMAGE_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN I DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A8 DRM_EEP_SELO I DC0V/3.3V Interrupt signal
A10 FRONT_CO_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Front cover switch: On/Off
A12 GND - - Ground
A13 GND - - Ground
A17 GND - - Ground
A18 GND - - Ground
B1 FSR_OFFSET_CNT I DC0V/3.3V Control signal
B3 GND - - Ground
B7 TPC_BK I LVDS T/C sensor detection voltage K
(middle)
press roller)
8-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(center)
YC6 B20 DRUM HEAT I DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
3 EEP_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) RFID communication clock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V RFID communication data signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 CONT_RETURN I Analog Connection detection signal
8 CONT_RECOG I Analog Connection detection signal
YC17 A1 EXMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit switchback motor control signal
A3 EXMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit switchback motor control signal
A6 GND - - Ground
A7 EXMAIN_FULL I DC0V/3.3V Lower exit full sensor: On/Off
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 EXINNER_FULL I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit full sensor: On/Off
A12 EXSOL1 O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
A13 EXSOL1_KEEP O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
A15 EXSOL2 O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
A16 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
A18 GND - - Ground
A19 EX_FEED_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
B1 VIB_MOT_REM - - Not used
B2 DLP_FAN_HARF - - Not used
B3 DLP_FAN_REM - - Not used
B4 5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
B5 DRM_HEAT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
B6 ERASER_COL O DC0V/5V Eraser CMY remote signal
B7 ERASER_BK O DC0V/5V Eraser K remote signal
B8 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
8-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]

B10 TPC_Y I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage Y
B11 TPC_C I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage C
B12 TPC_M I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage M
B13 TPC_BK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage K
B14 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor voltage
B15 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM data I/O signal
B16 EEP_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM clock signal
B20 GND - - Ground
YC19 A1 TNMOT_BK_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Toner motor control signal K
A2 TNMOT_BK_OUT2 O DC0V/24V Toner motor control signal K
A4 GND - - Ground
A5 THOP_PLS_BK I DC0V/3.3V Toner motor rotation sensor K: On/Off
A7 THOP_FULL_BK I Analog Toner level sensor K detection signal
A8 THOP_LED_BK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
K
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 THOP_PLS_M I DC0V/3.3V Toner motor rotation sensor M: On/Off
A16 THOP_FULL_M I Analog Toner level sensor M detection signal
A17 THOP_LED_M O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
M
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 THOP_PLS_C I DC0V/3.3V Toner motor rotation sensor C: On/Off
B7 THOP_FULL_C I Analog Toner level sensor C detection signal
B8 THOP_LED_C O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
C
B13 GND - - Ground
B14 THOP_PLS_Y I DC0V/3.3V Toner motor rotation sensor Y: On/Off
8-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC19) B16 THOP_FULL_Y I Analog Toner level sensor Y detection signal
B17 THOP_LED_Y O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
Y
2 FUSER_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Fuser EEPROM data I/O signal
3 FUSER_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Fuser EEPROM clock signal
5 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (fuser
press roller)
6 FSR_PRESS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser release sensor: On/Off
7 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (edge)
8 FSR_JAM_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser sensor: On/Off
9 FSR_ROLL_F_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser belt rotation sensor F: On/Off
10 +3.3V2_TH_CUT I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
12 GND - - Ground
13 FSR_TH_MIDDLE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (middle)
15 GND - - Ground
16 FSR_ROLL_R_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser belt rotation sensor R: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
18 FSR_TH_CENTRAL I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (center)
YC23 1 BLT_PRESS_OUT1 O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Belt release motor control signal
2 BLT_PRESS_OUT2 O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Belt release motor control signal
4 DLP_BK_CLT_REM O DC0V/24V Developer clutch: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
7 BLT_4RELEASE_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Belt release sensor: On/Off
YC24 1 DRM_BK_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Drum motor rotation switching signal K
2 DRM_BK_MOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal K
3 DRM_BK_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal K
4 DRM_BK_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal K
5 GND - - Ground
7 DRM_COL_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Drum motor rotation switching signal COL
8 DRM_COL_MOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal COL
9 DRM_COL_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal COL
10 DRM_COL_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal COL
11 GND - - Ground
13 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_BRK O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor brake signal K
14 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_DIR I DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal K
15 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_FG O DC0V/5V Developer motor control signal K
16 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
17 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal K
18 GND - - Ground
8-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC24) 19 +24V2IL2 O DC24V DC24V power output
20 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR I DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal
COL
21 DLP_COL_MOT_LD O DC0V/5V Developer motor control signal COL
22 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal COL
23 DLP_COL_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal COL
24 GND - - Ground
26 N.C. - - Not used
YC25 1 +24V2_FUSE2 O DC24V DC24V power output
2 +24V2_FUSE2 O DC24V DC24V power output
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
YC28 1 DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal CMY
2 DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK I DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal CMY
3 DRUM_COL_MOT_REM I DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal CMY
4 DLP_COL_MOT_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal
CMY
5 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR I DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching signal
CMY
6 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK I DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal CMY
7 DLP_COL_MOT_REM I DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal CMY
8 TPC_Y O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage Y
9 TPC_C O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage C
10 TPC_M O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage M
11 I2C_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM data I/O signal
12 I2C_SCL I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM clock signal
13 DRM_EEP_SEL1 I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
14 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BR I DC0V/5V Developer motor brake signal K
AKE
15 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RD O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal K
Y
16 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR I DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching signal
K
17 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CL I DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
K
18 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RE I DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal K
M
YC29 1 GND - - Not used
2 EX_SENS - - Not used
3 5V2 - - Not used
4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM I DC0V/5V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA O DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
7 D_VIB_MOT - - Not used
8 EXSOL1_REM I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
9 EXSOL1_KEEP I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
10 EXSOL2_REM O DC0V/3.3V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
8-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC29) 11 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/3.3V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
12 TN_FAN_LOCK - - Not used
13 GND - - Not used
14 TN_FAN_REM - - Not used
YC30 1 DF_RDY(DF to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
2 DF_SEL(ENG to DF) O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
3 DF_SDO(ENG to DF) O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 DF_SDI(DF to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
5 BRGMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Bridge motor rotation direction switching
signal
6 DF_DET(DF to ENG) I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
7 DF_CLK(ENG to DF) O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
12 BRG_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Bridge open detection signal
15 BRG_SET I DC0V/3.3V Bridge presence detection signal
17 BRG_MOT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Bridge motor remote signal
19 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V Paper presence detection signal
YC32 A1 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
A3 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Belt cleaning motor control signal
A4 +3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA I DC3.3V Belt cleaning motor rotation control signal
A6 BELT_TH I Analog Belt thermistor voltage
A7 BLT_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Belt cleaning motor clock signal
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 BLT_SDA I/O DC3.3V EEPROM data I/O signal
A12 COTN_SOL_BK O DC0V/24V Container solenoid K: On/Off
A14 COTN_SOL_M O DC0V/24V Container solenoid M: On/Off
A16 COTN_SOL_C O DC0V/24V Container solenoid C: On/Off
A18 COTN_SOL_Y O DC0V/24V Container solenoid Y: On/Off
B1 GND - - Ground
B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT O Analog Offset control signal
B4 PWM - - Not used
8-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC32) B5 CW/CCW - - Not used
B6 3.3V2_LED - - Not used
B7 GND - - Not used
B8 IH_CORE_HP - - Not used
B9 EXMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
B10 EXMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
B11 EXMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
B12 EXMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 JS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V JS sensor: On/Off
B16 GND - - Ground
B17 FRONT_CO_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Front cover switch: On/Off
B18 N.C. - - Not used
YC33 1 CONT_FAN - - Not used
2 GND - - Not used
3 N.C. - - Not used
4 IH_PWB_FAN_REM O DC0V/24V IH PWB fan motor: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
13 GND - - Ground
14 IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
YC35 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FET1 O DC24V DC24V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
YC36 1 CONT_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Container motor rotation switching signal
2 CONT_MOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Container motor synchronizing signal
3 CONT_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Container motor clock signal
4 CONT_MOT_REM O DC0V/5V Container motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
8-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Feed Drive PWB

(4-1)PWB photograph
1 YC10 1
YC9 11
14
A1 4
B17
YC11
1 6 YC1
1
YC6
11
B1 YC2
A17
1
1
YC8 B1 A12
12 YC3
A1 B14
B12 A1
YC7
YC4
A16 A1
1
A14 B1 YC5
B1 B16
8-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: Engine PWB
• YC4: Paper feed clutch 1/2, Vertical conveying clutch
• YC5: Paper length sensor 1/2, Paper width sensor 1/2, Upper paper level sensor 1/2, Lower paper level sensor 1/2,
Lift motor 1/2, Cassette sensor 1/2
• YC6: Registration sensor, Middle clutch, Conveying sensor, Lift upper limit sensor 1/2, Paper sensor 1/2, Right
container fan motor, Left container fan motor
• YC7: Fuser edge fan motor, Belt roll-up sensor, DU sensor 1/2, Right cover switch, DU clutch 1/2, MP clutch, MP
paper width sensor, MP tray sensor, MP paper length sensor
• YC8: MP lift motor, MP paper sensor, MP position sensor
• YC9: Front ID sensor, Rear ID sensor, Cleaning solenoid, Registration clutch
• YC10: Fuser motor, Fuser release motor, Exit fan motor
• YC11: Paper feed motor

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 I DC24V DC24V power input
YC2 1 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
2 EXSOL2_REM O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
3 EXSOL1_KEEP O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (keep)
4 EXSOL1_REM O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
7 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA I DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
8 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
9 N.C. - - Not used
YC3 A1 REG_F_LED I Analog Front ID sensor control signal
A2 ID_SENS_R_P O Analog Rear ID sensor detection signal
A3 ID_SENS_R_S O Analog Rear ID sensor detection signal
A4 REG_R_LED I Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 GND - - Ground
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 3.3V2_FUSE I DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]

B2 REG_CL_REM I DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
B3 CAS1_2_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor: On/Off
B4 MPF_ORG_SENS O DC0V/3.3V MP paper sensor: On/Off
B5 ATLAS_SDO(DRI to ENG) O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
B6 ATLAS_CS(ENG to DRI) I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
B7 ATLAS_EN(ENG to DRI) I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication enable signal
B8 ATLAS_SDI(ENG to DRI) I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
B9 ATLAS_CLK(ENG to DRI) I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication clock signal
B10 REG_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
B11 ID_SENS_F_P O Analog Front ID sensor detection signal
B12 ID_SENS_F_S O Analog Front ID sensor detection signal
YC4 1 CAS1_FEEDCL O DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch 1: On/Off
3 VFEED_CL O DC0V/24V Vertical conveying clutch: On/Off
5 CAS2_FEEDCL O DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch 2: On/Off
7 2WAY_CL - - Not used
8 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
YC5 A1 CAS1_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 1: On/Off
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 CAS1_LSIZE3 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A4 GND - - Ground
A7 CAS1_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width sensor 1: On/Off
A8 GND - - Ground
A10 GND - - Ground
A11 CAS1_QUANT1 I DC0V/3.3V Upper paper level sensor 1: On/Off
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 CAS1_QUANT2 I DC0V/3.3V Lower paper level sensor 1: On/Off
A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 1 control signal
A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 1 control signal
B1 LIFTMOT2_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 2 control signal
B2 LIFTMOT2_OUT2 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 2 control signal
B3 CAS2_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width sensor 2: On/Off
B4 GND - - Ground
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 CAS2_QUANT1 I DC0V/3.3V Upper paper level sensor 2: On/Off
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 CAS2_QUANT2 I DC0V/3.3V Lower paper level sensor 2: On/Off
8-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC5) B11 CAS2_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 2: On/Off
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 2: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground
YC6 A1 GND - - Ground
A2 REGIST_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
A4 MIDCL O DC0V/24V Middle clutch: On/Off
A7 TDRS1_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Retard sensor 1: On/Off
A8 GND - - Ground
A10 TDRS2_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Retard sensor 2: On/Off
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 3.3V2 - - Not used
A13 NC - - Not used
A14 GND - - Not used
A15 3.3V2 - - Not used
A16 NC - - Not used
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 FEED_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 LIFT1_LIMIT I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor 1: On/Off
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 CAS1_EMPTY I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor 1: On/Off
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 LIFT2_LIMIT I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor 2: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 CAS2_EMPTY I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor 2: On/Off
B16 EXFAN O DC0V/24V Right container fan motor/Left container
fan motor: On/Off
B17 GND - - Ground
YC7 A1 DU_CL1 O DC0V/24V DU clutch 1: On/Off
A3 DUCL2 O DC0V/24V DU clutch 2: On/Off
A5 MPFCL_REM O DC0V/24V MP clutch: On/Off
8-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC7) A6 +24V2_FUSE O DC24V DC24V power output
A8 MPF_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V MP paper width sensor: On/Off
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 MPF_TRAY I DC0V/3.3V MP tray sensor: On/Off
A11 GND - - Ground
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 MPF_LSIZE I DC0V/3.3V MP paper length sensor: On/Off
B1 EDGE_FAN_LOCK I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 EDGE_FAN O DC0V/24V Fuser edge fan motor: On/Off
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 TRANSBELT_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Belt roll-up sensor: On/Off
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 DU_SENS2 I DC0V/3.3V DU sensor 2: On/Off
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 DU_SENS1 I DC0V/3.3V DU sensor 1: On/Off
B13 RCOVER_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Right cover switch: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 MPFLIFT_OUT1 O DC0V/24V MP lift motor control signal
2 MPFLIFT_OUT2 O DC0V/24V MP lift motor control signal
3 MPFLIFT_HP I DC3.3V MP position sensor: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
8 GND - - Ground
9 MPF_SET I DC0V/3.3V MP paper sensor: On/Off
11 MPF_FEED I DC0V/3.3V MP conveying sensor: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 REG_F_LED O Analog Front ID sensor control signal
3 GND - - Ground
4 ID_SENS_F_S I Analog Front ID sensor control signal
5 ID_SENS_F_P I Analog Front ID sensor control signal
7 REG_R_LED O Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 ID_SENS_R_S I Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
10 ID_SENS_R_P I Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
8-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC9) 12 ID_SOL O DC0V/24V Cleaning solenoid: On/Off
13 REG_CL O DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
YC10 1 FSRMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Fuser motor rotation switching signal
2 FSRMOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Fuser motor synchronizing signal
3 FSRMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Fuser motor clock signal
4 FSRMOT_REM O DC0V/5V Fuser fan motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2_FUS O DC24V DC24V power output
E
7 FSR_RLSMOT_OUT2 O DC0V/24V Fuser pressure release motor control
signal
8 FSR_RLSMOT_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Fuser pressure release motor control
signal
9 EXFAN_LOCK I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 EXFAN O DC24V DC24V power output
YC11 1 CASFEED_DIR O DC0V/5V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
2 CASFEED_LD I DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor synchronizing signal
3 CASFEED_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Paper feed motor clock signal
4 CASFEED_REM O DC0V/5V Paper feed motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
8-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5) Drum/Developer relay PWB

(5-1)PWB photograph
High Model
Low Model
High Model
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
8 20
YC14
1
Low Model
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
20
8-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC2: Developer PWB K
• YC3: Developer PWB M
• YC4: Developer PWB C
• YC5: Developer PWB Y
• YC6: Drum heater
• YC10: Drum PWB K
• YC11: Drum PWB M
• YC12: Drum PWB C
• YC13: Drum PWB Y
• YC14: Developer fan motor CKMY
*1: High-end Model

2 +3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
3 DRM_EEP_SEL0 I DC0V/3.3V EEPROM select signal
4 DRM_EEP_SEL1 I DC0V/3.3V EEPROM select signal
5 EEP_SCL I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM clock signal
6 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM data I/O signal
7 DLP_TH O Analog Developer thermistor voltage
8 TPC_BK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage K
9 TPC_M O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage M
10 TPC_C O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage C
11 TPC_Y O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage Y
12 GND - - Ground
14 ERASER_BK I DC0V/24V Eraser K remote signal
15 ERASER_COL I DC0V/24V Eraser CMY remote signal
16 DRM_HEAT_REM I DC0V/3.3V Drum heater remote signal
17 5V0_FUSE I DC5V DC5V power input
18 DLP_FAN_REM I DC0V/3.3V Developer fan motor remote signal
19 DLP_FAN_HARF I DC0V/3.3V Developer fan motor control signal (half
speed)
20 VIB_MOT_REM I DC0V/3.3V Vibration motor remote signal
YC2 1 N.C. - - Not used
2 VIB_MOT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Vibration motor remote signal
3 TPC_BK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage K
4 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor voltage
8-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC2) 5 3.3V2_DLPBK O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
7 EEP_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM clock signal
8 GND - - Ground
3 TPC_M I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage M
4 N.C. - - Not used
5 3.3V2_COL O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8 GND - - Ground
3 TPC_C I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage C
4 N.C. - - Not used
8 GND - - Ground
3 TPC_Y I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage Y
4 N.C. - - Not used
8 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
2 DRUM_HEAT_REM O DC0V/5V Drum heater: On/Off
YC10 1 ERASER2 O DC0V/24V Eraser K: On/Off
2 ERASER3 O DC0V/24V Eraser K: On/Off
3 24V2/5V0 O DC24V DC24V power output
4 ERASER1 O DC0V/24V Eraser K: On/Off
6 EEEP_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) EEPROM data signal
8 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 ERASER2 O DC0V/24V Eraser M: On/Off
2 ERASER3 O DC0V/24V Eraser M: On/Off
8-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC11) 3 24V2/5V0 O DC24V DC24V power output
4 ERASER1 O DC0V/24V Eraser M: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 ERASER2 O DC0V/24V Eraser C: On/Off
2 ERASER3 O DC0V/24V Eraser C: On/Off
4 ERASER1 O DC0V/24V Eraser C: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
YC13 1 ERASER2 O DC0V/24V Eraser Y: On/Off
2 ERASER3 O DC0V/24V Eraser Y: On/Off
4 ERASER1 O DC0V/24V Eraser Y: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
YC14 1 REM O DC0V/24V Developer fan motor K: On/Off
(High-end 2 +24V2 O DC24V DC24V power output
model only) 3 REM O DC0V/24V Developer fan motor M: On/Off
5 REM O DC0V/24V Developer fan motor C: On/Off
7 REM O DC0V/24V Developer fan motor Y: On/Off
8-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Main high voltage PWB

(6-1)PWB photograph

6
4
YC3 YC2 1
1 1
17
YC1 YC2 YC1
20
1 17 1
8-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
High-end Model
• YC1: Engine PWB
• YC2: Engine PWB

2 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
3 B_K_SLV_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC sleeve bias control voltage K
4 M_K_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC charger control voltage K
5 M_K_I_SENS O Analog Discharge detection voltage K
6 M_K_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC charger control voltage K
7 M_AC_CLK I DC0V/15V(pulse) AC charger clock signal
8 B_K_SLV_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC sleeve bias control voltage K
9 B_K_MAG_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
10 B_COL_MAG_AC_CLK I DC0V/16V(pulse) AC Magnet roller bias clock signal
(YCM)
11 B_COL_SLV_AC_CLK I DC0V/16V(pulse) AC sleeve bias clock signal
(YCM)
12 DISCHARGE O Analog Discharge detection voltage
13 M_M_I_SENS O Analog Charger current detection M
14 M_C_I_SENS O Analog Charger current detection C
15 M_Y_I_SENS O Analog Charger current detection Y
16 B_BK_MAG_AC_CLK I DC0V/16V(pulse) Magnet roller AC clock signal K
17 B_BK_SLV_AC_CLK I DC0V/16V(pulse) Sleeve AC clock signal K
2 B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage Y
3 B_M_MAG_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage M
4 B_C_MAG_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage C
5 M_M_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) Charger control voltage M
6 M_Y_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC charger control voltage Y
7 M_C_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC charger control voltage C
8 B_M_MAG_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC magnet roller bias control voltage M
9 B_Y_MAG_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC magnet roller bias control voltage Y
10 B_Y_SLV_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC sleeve bias control voltage Y
11 B_Y_SLV_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC sleeve bias control voltage Y
12 B_C_MAG_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC magnet roller bias control voltage C
13 B_C_SLV_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC sleeve bias control voltage C
14 B_C_SLV_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC sleeve bias control voltage C
15 B_M_SLV_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC sleeve bias control voltage M
16 B_M_SLV_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC sleeve bias control voltage M
17 M_Y_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC charger control voltage Y
18 M_C_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC charger control voltage C
19 M_M_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC charger control voltage M
8-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC2) 20 HV_REM I DC0V/17V High voltage remote signal
YC3 1 PGND - - Ground
2 PGND - - Ground
3 PGND - - Ground
4 +24V2IL I DC24V DC24V power input
Low-end model
• YC1: Engine PWB

YC1 1 B_MAG_AC_CLK I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC Magnet roller bias clock signal
2 B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage Y
3 M_Y_I_SENS O Analog Charger current detection Y
4 M_C_I_SENS O Analog Charger current detection C
5 M_K_I_SENS O Analog Discharge detection voltage K
6 M_M_I_SENS O Analog Charger current detection M
7 M_Y_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC charger control voltage Y
8 B_CLR_MAG_AC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) AC magnet roller bias control voltage
YCM
9 B_C_MAG_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage
YCM
10 M_M_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) Charger control voltage M
11 M_K_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC charger control voltage K
12 B_M_MAG_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage M
13 M_C_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC charger control voltage C
14 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
15 B_K_MAG_AC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
16 HV_REM I DC0V/17V High voltage remote signal
17 SGND - - Ground
YC2 1 PGND - - Ground
2 PGND - - Ground
B1 MAG(BK) O Analog Magnet roller bias output voltage K
B2 MAG(C) O Analog Magnet roller bias output voltage C
B3 MAG(M) O Analog Magnet roller bias output voltage M
B4 MAG(Y) O Analog Magnet roller bias output voltage Y
8-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7) Transfer high voltage PWB

(7-1)PWB photograph
1 13
YC1
8-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC1: Engine PWB, Feed Image PWB

2 T_REM I DC0V/14V Transfer remote signal
3 T2_CNT I Analog Secondary transfer control voltage
4 SP_CNT I Analog Separation control voltage
5 T1_K_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage K
6 T2_OFF_REM O Analog Charger current detection
7 T1_I_SENS O Analog Primary transfer current detection
8 T1_M_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage M
9 T1_C_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage C
10 T1_Y_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage Y
11 CL_CNT I Analog Cleaning control voltage
12 +24V2IL O DC24V DC24V power output
13 PGND - - Ground
8-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)Power supply PWB

(8-1)PWB photograph
High-end Model
100-120V 220-240V
Low-end model
100-120V 220-240V
8-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8
YC2 12
3 1 1 1 2
1 2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 1
YC5
YC3
1 3
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
TB3
1 6
YC4
Destination
• TB1: Inlet
• TB2: Inlet
• TB3: Inlet
• YC1: Power switch
• YC2: IH PWB
• YC4: Cassette heater
• YC5: PF PWB
• YC7: Engine PWB
• YC8: Main PWB
• YC9: Engine PWB

TB1 1 LIVE I AC100V AC power input
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
TB2 1 NEUTRAL I AC100V AC power input
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
TB3 1 DH_LIVE I AC100V AC power input
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
YC1 1 LIVE_IN I AC100V AC power input
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
8-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC1) 2 LIVE_OUT O AC100V AC power output
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
3 NEUTRAL_IN I AC100V AC power input
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
4 NEUTRAL_OUT 0 AC100V AC power output
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
YC2 1 LIVE O AC100V AC power output
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
2 NEUTRAL O AC100V AC power output
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
YC4 1 CH_LIVE O AC100V AC power output
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
2 CH_LIVE O AC100V AC power output
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
3 NC - - Not used
4 NC - - Not used
5 CH_NEUTRAL O AC100V AC power output
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
6 CH_NEUTRAL O AC100V AC power output
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
2 5V0 O DC5V DC5V power output
8-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 GND - - Ground
7 GND - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 SLEEP I DC0V/3.3V Sleep signal
2 DRM_HEAT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Drum heater: On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
4 AC DETECTOR - - Not used
8-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9) Operation panel main PWB

(9-1)PWB photograph
High Model
Low Model
High Model YC8

YC7 2 1
YC12 1 5
B15 B1
13
1 7 YC9
A1 A15
YC6
10 1 5 1
1 40 1 12
YC5 YC4
YC11 YC13
Low Model YC8

YC7 2 1
YC12 1 5
B15 B1
13
1 7 YC9
A1 A15
YC6
4
YC10
1
1
10 1 5 1
1 40
YC5 YC4
YC11
8-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC4: NFC PWB
• YC5: Operation panel sub PWB
• YC6: Numeric key (option)
• YC7: Speaker
• YC8: Human detect sensor
• YC9: Main PWB
• YC11: LCD
• YC12: Main PWB
• YC13: Touch Screen
High-end Model
YC4 1 VCC O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 NFC_SWCLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
4 NFC_SWDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C data signal
5 NIRQ I DC0V/1.8V Interrupt signal
YC5 1 NC - - Not used
2 JOBSEPA_LED O DC0V/5.0V Job separator LED control signal
3 PROCESSING_LED O DC0V/5.0V Processing LED control signal
5 ATTENTION_LED O DC0V/5.0V Attention LED control signal
6 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY I DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
7 ENERGYSAVER_LED O DC0V/5.0V Energy Saver LED control signal
8 SCAN3 O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Scan signal 3
9 KEY2 I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 2
10 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 KEY3 I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 3
10 START_LED O DC0V/5.0V Start LED control signal
11 10KEY_DETECT I DC0V/3.3V OPTION 10 KEY connection detection
12 GND - - Ground
13 NC - - Not used
YC7 1 SPEAKER_P O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)
2 SPEAKER_N O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)
8-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC8 1 3.3V1_HD O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 HD_SWCLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
3 HD_SWDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C data signal
4 HUMAN_DETECT_INT I DC0V/3.3V Human detect signal interrupt
5 GND - - Ground
YC9 A1 +5V6 I DC5V DC5V power input
A2 +5V6 I DC5V DC5V power input
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 ANYKEY O DC0V/3.3V ANYKEY recovery signal
A7 DISPLAY_POWERON I DC0V/3.3V LCD back light lighting signal
A8 C2P_SCK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Panel clock signal
A9 P2C_SBSY O DC0V/3.3V Panel busy signal
A10 P2C_SDIR O DC0V/3.3V Panel communication direction signal
A11 C2P _SDAT O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
A12 P2C _SDAT I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
A13 FPRST I DC0V/3.3V Operation panel reset signal
A14 3.3V2_MAIN - DC3.3V 3.3V2_MAIN
A15 I2C_SCL_NFC I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
B1 I2C_SDA_NFC I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) 12C data signal
B2 NIRQ O DC0V/3.3V NFC interrupt signal
B3 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY O DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
_N
B4 PNL_WKUP_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Panel recovery signal
B5 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal
B6 LED_PROCESSING I DC0V/3.3V Processing LED lighting signal
B7 LED_ATTENTION I DC0V/3.3V Attention LED lighting signal
B8 INT_HUMAN_DETECT O DC0V/3.3V Human detect sensor interrupt signal
B9 BEEP_POWERON I DC0V/3.3V Alert sound recovery signal
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 JOB_LED ? DC0V/3.3V Job separator LED control signal
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 3.3V1_HD - - 3.3V1_HD
YC11 1 LED+ O DC0V/5V LED control signal
2 LED+ O DC0V/5V LED control signal
3 VGH - DC23V LCD High power output
4 NC - - Not used
5 NC - - Not used
6 VGL - DC -8V LCD Low power output
7 U/D O DC0V/3.3V Upper/Lower writing start point setting
signal
8 L/R O DC0V/3.3V Left/Right writing start point setting signal
9 LED- O DC0V/5V LED control signal
8-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC11) 10 LED- O DC0V/5V LED control signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 AVDD - DC10.64V LCD Analog power output
13 SEL O DC0V/3.3V Mode select signal
14 NC - - Not used
15 NC - - Not used
16 GND - - Ground
17 NC - - Not used
18 NC - - Not used
19 GND - - Ground
20 RxIN3+ O LVDS Display data signal
21 RxIN3- O LVDS Display data signal
22 GND - - Ground
23 RxINCK+ O LVDS Display data signal
24 RxINCK- O LVDS Display data signal
25 GND - - Ground
28 GND - - Ground
31 GND - - Ground
34 GND - - Ground
35 STBYB O DC0V/3.3V Standby signal
36 RESET O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
37 NC - - Not used
38 VDD - DC3.3V LCD Driver power output
40 VCOM O DC4.25V LCD Common power output

2 LCD_OFF I DC0V/3.3V LCD supply sequence control signal
3 LOCKN I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RNP I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Image data signal
6 RXP I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Image data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC13 1 SWDCLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal for debug

2 SWDIO I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Data signal for debug
3 GND - - Ground
4 NC - - Not used
5 VDD - DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
6 VDD - DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC13) 7 SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
8 SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C data signal
9 INT I DC0V/3.3V Touch screen interrupt signal
10 RST O DC0V/3.3V Touch screen reset signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
Low-end model
YC4 1 VCC O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 NFC_SWCLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
4 NFC_SWDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C data signal
5 NIRQ I DC0V/1.8V Interrupt signal
YC5 1 NC - - Not used
2 JOBSEPA_LED O DC0V/5.0V Job separator LED control signal
3 PROCESSING_LED O DC0V/5.0V Processing LED control signal
5 ATTENTION_LED O DC0V/5.0V Attention LED control signal
6 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY I DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
7 ENERGYSAVER_LED O DC0V/5.0V Energy Saver LED control signal
10 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 KEY3 I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 3
10 START_LED O DC0V/5.0V Start LED control signal
11 10KEY_DETECT I DC0V/3.3V OPTION 10 KEY connection detection
12 GND - - Ground
13 NC - - Not used
YC7 1 SPEAKER_P O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)
2 SPEAKER_N O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)
YC8 1 3.3V1_HD O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 HD_SWCLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
3 HD_SWDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C data signal
4 HUMAN_DETECT_INT I DC0V/3.3V Human detect signal interrupt
5 GND - - Ground
YC9 A1 +5V6 I DC5V DC5V power input
8-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC9) A2 +5V6 I DC5V DC5V power input
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 ANYKEY O DC0V/3.3V ANYKEY recovery signal
A7 DISPLAY_POWERON I DC0V/3.3V LCD back light lighting signal
A8 C2P_SCK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Panel clock signal
A9 P2C_SBSY O DC0V/3.3V Panel busy signal
A10 P2C_SDIR O DC0V/3.3V Panel communication direction signal
A11 C2P _SDAT O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
A12 P2C _SDAT I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
A13 FPRST I DC0V/3.3V Operation panel reset signal
A14 3.3V2_MAIN - DC3.3V 3.3V2_MAIN
A15 I2C_SCL_NFC I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
B1 I2C_SDA_NFC I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) 12C data signal
B2 NIRQ O DC0V/3.3V NFC interrupt signal
B3 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY O DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
_N
B4 PNL_WKUP_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Panel recovery signal
B5 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal
B6 LED_PROCESSING I DC0V/3.3V Processing LED lighting signal
B7 LED_ATTENTION I DC0V/3.3V Attention LED lighting signal
B8 INT_HUMAN_DETECT O DC0V/3.3V Human detect sensor interrupt signal
B9 BEEP_POWERON I DC0V/3.3V Alert sound recovery signal
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 JOB_LED ? DC0V/3.3V Job separator LED control signal
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 3.3V1_HD - - 3.3V1_HD
YC11 1 LED+ O DC0V/5V LED control signal
2 LED+ O DC0V/5V LED control signal
3 VGH - DC18V LCD High power output
4 NC - - Not used
5 NC - - Not used
6 VGL - DC -6V LCD Low power output
7 U/D O DC0V/3.3V Upper/Lower writing start point setting
signal
8 L/R O DC0V/3.3V Left/Right writing start point setting signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 AVDD - DC9.6V LCD Analog power output
13 SEL O DC0V/3.3V Mode select signal
14 NC - - Not used
15 NC - - Not used
8-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]

17 NC - - Not used
18 NC - - Not used
19 GND - - Ground
22 GND - - Ground
23 RxINCK+ O LVDS Display data signal
24 RxINCK- O LVDS Display data signal
25 GND - - Ground
28 GND - - Ground
31 GND - - Ground
34 GND - - Ground
35 STBYB O DC0V/3.3V Standby signal
36 RESET O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
37 NC - - Not used
40 VCOM O DC4V LCD Common power output
2 LCD_OFF I DC0V/3.3V LCD supply sequence control signal
3 LOCKN I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RNP I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Image data signal
6 RXP I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Image data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC13 1 YP-Bottom I Analog Touch screen YP position signal
2 XN-Left I Analog Touch screen XN position signal
3 YN-Top I Analog Touch screen YN position signal
4 XP-Right I Analog Touch screen XP position signal
8-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10)IH PWB
(10-1)PWB photograph
100-120V
220-240V
3
YC5
1 YC3
YC2
1 2
7
YC1 YC6
1
8-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC2: IH unit
• YC3: IH unit
• YC4: Engine PWB
• YC5: Engine PWB

YC1 1 LIVE I AC100V AC power input
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
2 NEUTRAL I AC100V AC power input
AC120V
AC 220 to 240 V
YC2 1 VS O AC65V to 160V Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
YC3 1 COIL_COM O AC65V to 160V Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
YC4 1 IH_RXD O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
2 IH_TXD I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
3 IH_ERROR O DC0V/3.3V IH error signal
4 IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) IH clock signal (LOW)
5 IH_IGBT_CLK_HIGH I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) IH Clock signal (High)
6 3.3V2_FUSE I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
7 GND - - Ground
2 IH_RELAY I DC0V/3.3V IH relay signal
3 GND - - Ground
8-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)Fuser high voltage PWB

FSR1
1 3
YC1
8-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• FSR1: Fuser discharge needle

YC1 1 FSR_OFFSET_CNT I Analog Fuser high voltage control voltage
2 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1 I DC24V DC24V power input
3 GND - - Ground
FSR1 SP_CNT O Analog Fuser high voltage output
8-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8 - 2 Description for PWB (OPTION)

(1)PF PWB (PF-7100)
(1-1)PWB photograph
1 2 1 3
YC11 YC10
1
1
YC9
YC4
12
1
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
17 1
YC3 YC5
16
8-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: PF paper sensor 1, PF upper paper level sensor 1,PF lower paper level sensor 1, PF paper length sensor 1, PF
cassette sensor 1
• YC4: PF lift upper limit sensor 1/2, PF conveying sensor 1/2, PF right cover switch, PF paper width switch 1/2
• YC5: PF paper sensor 2, PF upper paper level sensor 2,PF lower paper level sensor 2, PF paper length sensor 2, PF
cassette sensor 2
• YC6: PF lift motor 1/2
• YC8: PF paper feed motor
• YC9: PF conveying clutch 1/2, PF paper feed clutch 1/2
• YC10: PF PWB (PF-7120)
• YC13: PF PWB (PF-7120)
• YC14: PF retard sensor 1/2

YC3 1 3.3V4_LED O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 CAS1_EMPTY I DC0V/3.3V PF paper sensor 1: On/Off
4 3.3V4_LED O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 CAS1_QUANT1 I DC0V/3.3V PF upper paper level sensor 1: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 CAS1_QUANT2 I DC0V/3.3V PF lower paper level sensor 1: On/Off
10 GND - - Not used
11 CAS1_SIZE1_SENS I DC0V/3.3V PF paper length sensor 1: On/Off
12 GND - - Not used
14 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
17 CAS1_SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V PF cassette sensor 1: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 ULIM_SW_1 I DC0V/3.3V PF lift upper limit sensor 1: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 VER_SENS_1 I DC0V/3.3V PF conveying sensor 1: On/Off
7 COVER_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V PF right cover switch: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
8-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC4) 12 3.3V5_LED O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
13 GND - - Ground
14 VER_SENS_2 I DC0V/3.3V PF conveying sensor 2: On/Off
16 CAS1_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V PF paper width sensor 1: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
19 CAS2_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V PF paper width sensor 2: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground
2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
12 GND - - Not used
14 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
17 CAS2_SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V PF cassette sensor 2: On/Off
18 NC - - Not used
YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) PF lift motor 1 control signal
2 L_MOT1_DR O DC0V/24V(pulse) PF lift motor 1 control signal
3 L_MOT2_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) PF lift motor 2 control signal
YC8 1 +24V O DC24V DC24V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 START/STOP O DC0V/24V PF paper feed motor remote signal
4 CLOCK O DC0V/24V(pulse) PF paper feed motor clock signal
5 LD I DC0V/24V PF paper feed motor ready signal
6 CW/CCW O DC0V/24V PF paper feed motor rotation switching
signal
YC9 1 VER_CL1 O DC0V/24V PF conveying clutch 1: On/Off
3 FEED_CL1 O DC0V/24V PF paper feed clutch 1: On/Off
5 VER_CL2 O DC0V/24V PF conveying clutch 2: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2 O DC0V/24V PF paper feed clutch 2: On/Off
8-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC9) 9 HDR_CL2 - - Not used
10 24V1 - - Not used
2 GND - - Ground
2 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 VER_SENS O DC0V/3.3V PF conveying sensor: On/Off
2 3.3V3 I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
3 GND - - Ground
4 PF_CAS1_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Cassette 1 select signal
6 EN_CLK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
7 EN_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
8 EN_SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
9 EN_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
10 EN_PAU I DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
11 PF_CAS_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal
YC13 1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal

2 AN_PF_PAUSE O DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
3 AN_PF_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 AN_PF_SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
5 AN_PF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 AN_PF_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
7 PF_CAS2_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Cassette 2 select signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 AN_VER_SENS I DC0V/3.3V PF conveying sensor: On/Off
2 RETARD_SENS_1 I DC0V/3.3V
3 GND - - Ground
5 RETARD_SENS_2 I DC0V/3.3V PF retard sensor 2: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
8-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)PF PWB (PF-7110)

(2-1)PWB photograph
1 2 1 3
YC11 YC10
1
1
YC9
YC4
12
1
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
15 1
YC3 YC5
16
8-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: PF paper sensor 1, PF upper paper level sensor 1,PF lower paper level sensor 1, PF cassette sensor 1
• YC4: PF lift upper limit sensor 1/2, PF conveying sensor, PF right cover switch, PF horizontal conveying sensor
• YC5: PF paper sensor 2, PF upper paper level sensor 2,PF lower paper level sensor 2, PF cassette sensor 2
• YC6: PF lift motor 1/2
• YC8: PF paper feed motor
• YC9: PF vertical conveying clutch, PF right paper feed clutch 1, PF left paper feed clutch 2, PF horizontal conveying
clutch 1/2
• YC10: PF PWB (PF-7120)
• YC13: PF PWB (PF-7120)
• YC14: PF retard sensor 1/2

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
11 CAS1_SIZE1_SENS I DC0V/3.3V PF cassette sensor 1: On/Off
12 GND - - Not used
13 CAS1_SIZE2_SENS - - Not used
14 GND - - Not used
2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 VER_SENS_1 I DC0V/3.3V PF vertical conveying sensor: On/Off
7 COVER_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V PF right cover switch: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
8-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC4) 14 VER_SENS_2 I DC0V/3.3V PF horizontal conveying sensor: On/Off
15 3.3V4 - - Not used
16 P0R_SW - - Not used
17 GND - - Not used
18 3.3V5 - - Not used
19 P0L_SW - - Not used
20 GND - - Not used
2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
12 GND - - Ground
13 CAS2_SIZE2_SENS I DC0V/3.3V PF cassette sensor 2: On/Off
14 GND - - Not used
16 GND - - Not used
YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) PF lift motor 1 control signal
3 L_MOT2_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) PF lift motor 2 control signal
2 GND - - Ground
3 START/STOP O DC0V/24V PF paper feed motor remote signal
4 CLOCK O DC0V/24V(pulse) PF paper feed motor clock signal
5 LD I DC0V/24V PF paper feed motor ready signal
6 CW/CCW O DC0V/24V PF paper feed motor rotation switching
signal
YC9 1 VER_CL1 O DC0V/24V PF vertical conveying clutch: On/Off
3 FEED_CL1 O DC0V/24V PF right paper feed clutch 1: On/Off
5 VER_CL2 O DC0V/24V PF horizontal conveying clutch 1: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2 O DC0V/24V PF left paper feed clutch 2: On/Off
9 HDR_CL2 O DC0V/24V PF horizontal conveying clutch 2: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
8-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC10) 3 24V2 O DC24V DC24V power output
2 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 VER_SENS O DC0V/3.3V PF vertical conveying sensor: On/Off
2 3.3V3 I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
3 GND - - Ground
6 EN_CLK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
7 EN_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
8 EN_SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
9 EN_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
10 EN_PAU I DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
11 PF_CAS_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal
YC13 1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal
2 AN_PF_PAUSE O DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
3 AN_PF_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 AN_PF_SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
5 AN_PF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 AN_PF_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
7 PF_CAS2_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Cassette 2 select signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 AN_VER_SENS I DC0V/3.3V PF vertical conveying sensor: On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
8-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)PF PWB (PF-7120)

(3-1)PWB photograph
1 YC12 3 1 YC11 4
1 1
YC14
2
1
YC17
4
YC5
1 YC15 1
2
YC2 19
4
1
1
YC8 YC4
2
1
YC10 12
2
1 1
YC7
YC13
4
12
1 1
YC16 YC1
6 5
8 1 13 1
YC18 YC3 YC6

1 12
8-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC5: PF cassette sensor, PF paper feed solenoid, PF paper sensor, PF lift upper limit sensor, PF paper feed sensor
• YC6: PF upper paper level sensor,PF lower paper level sensor, PF lift lower limit sensor, PF connection sensor
• YC8: Lift motor
• YC11: PF PWB (PF-7100 or PF-7110)
• YC13: PF PWB (PF-7100 or PF-7110)
• YC15: PF paper feed clutch
• YC18: PF conveying motor

2 CVROP_SW I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor: On/Off
3 VER_CL - - Not used
4 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
5 VCVSW_3.3V1 - - Not used
6 GND - - Not used
7 VCVSW - - Not used
9 FDR_SOLA O DC0V/24V PF paper feed solenoid (actuate): On/Off
10 FDR_SOLK O DC0V/24V PF paper feed solenoid (keep): On/Off
11 EPRSW_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
12 GND - - Ground
13 EPRSW I DC0V/3.3V PF paper sensor: On/Off
14 RULMSW_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
15 3.3V4 - - Ground
16 RULMSW I DC0V/3.3V PF lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
18 P0RSW I DC0V/3.3V PF paper feed sensor: On/Off
19 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 LDPSW1_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 LDPSW1 I DC0V/3.3V PF upper paper level sensor: On/Off
4 LDPSW2_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 LDPSW2 I DC0V/3.3V PF lower paper level sensor: On/Off
7 SZSW2_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 SZSW2 I DC0V/3.3V PF lift lower limit sensor: On/Off
10 DEK_OPN1_3.3V2 - - Not used
11 GND - - Ground
12 DEK_OPN1 I DC0V/3.3V PF connection sensor: On/Off
13 NC - - Not used
YC8 1 OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) PF lift motor control signal
2 OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) PF lift motor control signal
1 GND - - Ground
8-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 24V2 I DC24V DC24V power input
YC13 1 SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
2 SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
3 CLK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
4 SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 PAUSE I DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
7 DEK_OPN1 O DC0V/3.3V Deck open/close signal output
8 DEK_OPN2 - - Not used
9 +3.3V4 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
10 GND - - Ground
11 SD_FINAL_SENS
12 PF_FINAL_SENS - - Not used
YC15 1 FDR_CL O DC0V/24V PF paper feed clutch: On/Off
YC18 1 FMOT_CH_A I DC0V/24V(pulse) PF paper feed motor control signal
2 FMOT_CH_B I DC0V/24V(pulse) PF paper feed motor control signal
4 FMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V PF paper feed motor rotation switching
signal
5 FMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) PF paper feed motor drive signal
6 FMOT_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor stop signal
5 GND - - Ground
8-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)DP PWB (DP-7100)

(4-1)PWB photograph
4
1 YC5 3
1 YC10
16
YC11
12
YC3
1
4
YC4 YS1
1
YC17
6 1 16
3 YC8 1 YC7 1 YC6 8 YC16 1 3 1 YC9
12
8-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: Engine PWB
• YC4: Paper feed sensor
• YC5: Top cover sensor
• YC6: Original length sensor, Original width sensor
• YC7: Registration sensor, CCD sensor, Open/close sensor, Lift lower limit sensor
• YC8: Original sensor
• YC9: Paper feed motor,Conveying motor
• YC10: Feedshift motor
• YC11: Lift motor, Switchback motor
• YC16: LED PWB, Feedshift sensor, Lift upper limit sensor
• YC17: Exit sensor

YC3 1 ENG_TMG O DC0V/3.3V Timing signal
2 ENG_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication ready signal
3 ENG_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
4 ENG_CLK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication clock signal
5 ENG_SI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
6 ENG_SO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 DP_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
8 EN_FD_SW O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed sensor: On/Off
9 EN_SET_SW O DC0V/3.3V Original sensor: On/Off
10 +3.3V3 I DC0V/3.3V DC3.3V power input
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 +24V I DC24V DC24V power input
2 FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V Paper feed sensor: On/Off
4 NC - - -
2 GND - - Ground
3 +R24V I DC0V/24V Interlock rear 24V
YC6 1 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 LNG_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original length sensor: On/Off
5 HSIZE I Analog Original width sensor
6 GND - - Ground
8-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 GND - - Ground
3 RGST_SW I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 CCD_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CCD sensor: On/Off
6 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
7 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 DP_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V DP open/close sensor: On/Off
10 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output to sensor
11 GND - - Ground
12 LF_DNSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off
2 SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original sensor: On/Off
YC9 1 FMOT_CH_A I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
2 FMOT_CH_B I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
4 FMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
5 FMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Paper feed motor drive signal
6 FMOT_BREAK O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor stop signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 R24V O DC24V DC24V power output
9 CMOT_CH_A I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
10 CMOT_CH_B I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
12 CMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor rotation switching signal
13 CMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Conveying motor drive signal
14 CMOT_BREAK O DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor stop signal
15 GND - - Ground
YC10 1 SFT_A1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
2 SFT_B1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
3 SFT_A3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
4 SFT_B3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
YC11 1 LIFT_A1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
2 LIFT _B1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
3 LIFT _A3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
4 LIFT _B3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
5 RMOT_CH_A I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Switchback motor control signal
6 RMOT_CH_B I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Switchback motor control signal
8 RMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Switchback motor rotation switching
signal
9 RMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Switchback motor drive signal
10 RMOT_BREAK O DC0V/3.3V Switchback motor stop signal
8-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC16 1 LED_REM I DC0V/3.3V LED remote signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 SFT_HP_SW I DC0V/3.3V Feedshift sensor: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 LF_UPSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 EXIT_SW I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
8-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)DP PWB (DP-7110)

(5-1)PWB photograph
3
1 YC6
YC5
12
16
YS1 8
YC1 YC14
1
1
14 1 2 1 2
A1
8 A13 YC2 YC7
YC10
1
YC11 YC4
14 B1 1
1
B13
YC8
8-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC1: Engine PWB
• YC2: Original length sensor, Original sensor, Lift lower limit sensor, Original width sensor
• YC4: Lift upper limit sensor, Paper feed sensor, Exit sensor, LED PWB, CCD sensor, Open/close sensor
• YC5: Paper feed motor, Registration motor, Lift motor
• YC7: Drive fan motor
• YC8: CIS fan motor
• YC10: SHD PWB
• YC14: Conveying motor

11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 +24V I DC24V DC24V power output
YC2 1 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
4 LNG_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Sensor LED clock signal
5 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
11 WIDE3 I DC0V/3.3V Original width sensor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
YC4 A01 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A02 GND - - Ground
8-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC4) A03 LF_UPSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
A04 GND - - Ground
A05 FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V Paper feed sensor: On/Off
A06 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A08 RGST_SW(V) - - Not used
A09 +3.3V - - Not used
A10 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 EXIT_SW(M) I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
A13 NC - - Not used
B01 NC - - Not used
B02 +24V O DC24V DC24V power output
B03 LED_REM I DC0V/3.3V LED remote signal
B04 GND - - Not used
B05 GND - - Ground
B06 CCD_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CCD sensor: On/Off
B07 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B08 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B09 GND - - Ground
B10 DP_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
B11 ANODE - - Not used
B13 SKEW_SW - - Not used
YC5 1 FEED_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
2 FEED_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
4 FEED_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
5 RGST_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal
6 RGST_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal
9 LIFT_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
10 LIFT_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
2 GND - - Ground
3 +R24V I DC0V/24V DC24V power input
YC7 1 R24V O DC24V DC24V power output
2 FAN_REM1 I DC0/DC24V Drive fan motor remote signal
2 FAN_REM2 I DC0/DC24V CIS fan motor remote signal
YC10 1 CIS_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CIS sensor: On/Off
2 SHD_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication clock signal
3 SHD_SO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
8-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC10) 4 SHD_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
5 SHD_PAGEST O DC0V/3.3V Sub-scanning valid range timing input
(VSYNC)
6 RESETN O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
7 SHD_OVMON I DC0V/3.3V Monitoring signal for the sub-scanning
valid range signal
8 SHD_SI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
9 SHD_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication synchronizing
signal
10 NC - - -
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
YC14 1 CNVY4_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
2 CNVY3_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
3 CNVY2_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
5 REVE4_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
6 REVE2_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
8-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)DPIF PWB (for DP-7110/DP-7130)

(6-1)PWB photograph
7
YC25
1
YC1
1 40
8-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC1: DF PWB
• YC25: SHD PWB

5 5.0V3 I DC5V DC5V power input
6 PCIEN_DP2M O DC-0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
12 PCIEP_M2DP I DC-0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
14 PCIEN_M2DP I DC-0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
16 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
20 PCIEP_REFCLK_DP2M O DC0V/0.7V PCIex reference clock
21 GND - - Ground
22 PCIEN_REFCLK_DP2M O DC0V/0.7V PCIex reference clock
23 GND - - Ground
24 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
28 PCIERC_SWRST_N_M2D I DC0V/3.3V PCIex reset input
P
29 GND - - Ground
30 DP_RST_N I DC0V/3.3V System reset input
31 GND - - Ground
32 GND - - Ground
33 GND - - Ground
34 GND - - Ground
35 GND - - Ground
36 GND - - Ground
37 GND - - Ground
38 GND - - Ground
39 GND - - Ground
40 GND - - Ground
2 NC - - Not connected
8-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC25) 3 LOCKN O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RX0N I DC1.0V/1.5V Image data
6 RX0P I DC1.0V/1.5V Image data
7 GND - - Ground
8-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)DP PWB (DP-7120)

(7-1)PWB photograph
1 3 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 15
YC3 YC2 YC4 YC6 YC5
YS11
YC1
16
1 3 1 4 1 8
YC7 YC8 YC9
8-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC1: Engine PWB
• YC2: Original length sensor
• YC3: Original sensor
• YC4: Original width sensor
• YC5: Paper feed sensor, Registration sensor, Open/close sensor, Feedshift sensor, CCD sensor
• YC6: LED PWB
• YC8: Paper feed clutch, Registration clutch
• YC9: Paper feed motor, Feedshift motor

YC1 1 ENG_TMG O DC0V/3.3V Paper timing notification signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
2 GND - - Ground
3 LS_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original length sensor: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
YC4 1 WID3 I DC0V/3.3V Original width sensor: On/Off
2 WID2 I DC0V/3.3V Original width sensor: On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
4 WID1 I DC0V/3.3V Original width sensor: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 FEED_SW I DC0V/3.3V Paper feed sensor: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 REGIST_SW I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
8-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC5) 7 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 DP_OPENSW I DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
12 HP_SW I DC0V/3.3V Home position signal
14 GND - - Ground
15 TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CCD sensor: On/Off
2 LED_REM I DC0V/3.3V LEDPWB:On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 +R24V I DC0V/24V Interlock rear 24V
YC8 1 FD_CL I DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch: On/Off
2 +R24V O DC24V DC24V power output
3 REG_CL I DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
4 +R24V O DC24V DC24V power output
YC9 1 CNVY –AN O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
2 CNVY +A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
3 CNVY +B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
4 CNVY –BN O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
5 JUNC –AN O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
6 JUNC +A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
7 JUNC +B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
8 JUNC –BN O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
8-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)DP PWB (DP-7130)

(8-1)PWB photograph
3
1 YC6
YC5
12
16
YS1 8
YC1 YC14
1
1
14 1 2 1 2
A1
8 A13 YC2 YC7
YC10
1
YC11 YC4
14 B1 1
1
B13
YC8
8-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC1: Engine PWB
• YC2: Original length sensor, Original sensor, Lift lower limit sensor, Original width sensor
• YC4: Lift upper limit sensor, Paper feed sensor, Exit sensor, LED PWB, CCD sensor, Open/close sensor
• YC5: Paper feed motor, Registration motor, Lift motor
• YC7: Drive fan motor
• YC8: CIS fan motor
• YC10: SHD PWB
• YC11: SHD PWB
• YC14: Conveying motor

11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
2 GND - - Ground
4 LNG_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Sensor LED clock signal
5 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
8-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC4 A01 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A02 GND - - Ground
A03 LF_UPSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
A04 GND - - Ground
A05 FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V Paper feed sensor: On/Off
A06 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A08 RGST_SW(V) - - Not used
A09 +3.3V - - Not used
A10 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 EXIT_SW(M) I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
A13 NC - - Not used
B01 NC - - Not used
B02 +24V O DC24V DC24V power output
B03 LED_REM I DC0V/3.3V LED remote signal
B05 GND - - Ground
B06 CCD_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CCD sensor: On/Off
B07 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B08 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B09 GND - - Ground
B10 DP_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
B11 ANODE - - Not used
B13 SKEW_SW - - Not used
YC5 1 FEED_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
4 FEED_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
2 GND - - Ground
3 +R24V I DC0V/24V DC24V power input
2 FAN_REM1 I DC0/DC24V Drive fan motor remote signal
2 FAN_REM2 I DC0/DC24V CIS fan motor remote signal
YC10 1 CIS_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CIS sensor: On/Off
8-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC10) 2 SHD_CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication clock signal
3 SHD_SO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 SHD_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
5 SHD_PAGEST O DC0V/3.3V Sub-scanning valid range timing input
(VSYNC)
6 RESETN O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
7 SHD_OVMON I DC0V/3.3V Monitoring signal for the sub-scanning
valid range signal
8 SHD_SI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal
9 SHD_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication synchronizing
signal
10 NC - - -
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 SCLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Communication clock signal
2 SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Communication data signal
3 1Piece_SIG I DC0V/3.3V Paper detection signal
4 2Piece_SIG I DC0V/3.3V Paper detection signal
5 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
YC14 1 CNVY4_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
3 CNVY2_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
8-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9)DF PWB (DF-7100)

(9-1)PWB photograph
1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
20 1 3 1 12 1
YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
6
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
8 YC11 2
1 13 1
YC10
1 YC6
12
4 A1 A15
2
YC14 YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 U3 B15 B1
1
3 1 4 1
8-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC4: Front cover sensor
• YC6: PH PWB
• YC7: PH PWB
• YC8: Exit motor, Slide motor, Exit release motor, Middle motor, Paper entry motor
• YC9: Paddle motor, Side registration motor 1/2
• YC10: Stapler
• YC11: Tray motor
• YC13: Paper pressing solenoid
• YC14: Paper LED
• YC16: Exit paper full sensor
• YC17: Paddle sensor, Paper entry sensor
• YC19: Side registration sensor 1/2, Tray sensor 1, Bundle exit sensor, Paper pressing sensor 1/2, Adjustment
sensor, Slide sensor
• YC20: DF connection sensor

2 GND - - Ground
2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Front cover sensor: On/Off
3 TOP COV SOURCE - - Not used
4 TOP COVSIG - - Not used
YC5 1 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
2 ENG SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
3 ENG DI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
4 ENG DO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal output
5 ENG PAU - - Not used
6 DET - - Ground
7 ENG CLK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial clock signal
8 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 5V - - Not used
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM - - Not used
7 PHMOT REM O DC0V/3.3V PH motor remote signal
8 PU RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
8-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC6) 9 PU SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
10 PU CLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial clock signal
11 PU DI O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
12 PU DO I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal output
YC8 1 EJECT MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
2 EJECT MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
3 EJECT MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
5 STP MOV MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
7 STP MOV MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
9 EJE RELS MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit release motor control signal
11 EJE RELS MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit release motor control signal
13 MIDDLE MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal
15 MIDDLE MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal
17 ENTRY MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
19 ENTRY MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
YC9 1 PADDLE MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paddle motor control signal
2 PADDLE MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paddle motor control signal
3 PADDLE MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paddle motor control signal
5 SIDE REG R MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
7 SIDE REG R MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
9 SIDE REG F MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
11 SIDE REG F MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
YC10 1 STP MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler motor control signal
2 STP MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler motor control signal
8-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]

10 LS I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit LS signal
11 READY I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit READY signal
13 HP I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit HP signal
YC11 1 TRY MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal
2 TRY MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal
2 PAP PRE SOL ACT O DC0V/24V DFPPSOL: On/Off (actuate)
3 PAP PRE SOL KEEP O DC0V/24V DFPPSOL: On/Off (keep)
YC14 1 5V O DC5V DC5V power output
2 LED O DC0V/5V Paper LED: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 PAP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Exit paper sensor: On/Off
YC17 1 PADDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 PADDLE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Paddle sensor: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 ENTRY SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
YC19 A1 SID REG R SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output to Side registration
sensor 2
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 SID REG R SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V DFSRS2: On/Off
A4 SID REG F SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output to Side registration
sensor 1
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 SID REG F SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V DFSRS1: On/Off
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 PH ENTRY SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V PH paper entry sensor: On/Off
A9 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A10 MTRY FULL SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 MTRY FULL SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor: On/Off
A13 PADDLE SENS A - - Not used
A15 PADDLE SENS SIG - - Not used
B1 BUNDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B2 GND - Ground
B3 BUNDLE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Bundle exit sensor: On/Off
B4 PAP PRE UP SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 PAP PRE UP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Paper pressing sensor 1: On/Off
B7 PAP PRE LOW SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
8-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]

B9 PAP PRE LOW SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Paper pressing sensor 2: On/Off
B10 ADJUST SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 ADJUST SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor: On/Off
B13 STP MOV SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 STP MOV SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
YC20 1 SET SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 SET SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Device sensor: On/Off
8-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10)PH PWB (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130)

6 1 11 3 1 1 4
1
YC6 YC8 YC7 YC9
13
3
YC1
YC5
1
1 1
YC2
3
Destination
• YC1: DF PWB
• YC2: DF PWB
• YC5: PH motor
• YC6: PH solenoid, PH tank solenoid
• YC7: PH paper entry sensor
• YC8: PH tank full sensor, PH tank set switch, PH pulse sensor, PH home position sensor
• YC9: PH tank full sensor

YC1 1 PH_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
2 PH_SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal output
3 PH_CLK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
4 PH_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 PH_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 PHMOT_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Motor: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 3.3V I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
12 PH_EN_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
YC5 1 CCW O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal (clockwise)
2 NC - - Not used
3 CW O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal (counterclockwise)
YC6 1* 24V2 O DC24V DC24V power output
2* PHSOL_PUL O DC0V/24V Punch-hole switching solenoid (actuate)
3* PHSOL_RET O DC0V/24V Punch-hole switching solenoid (return)
5 TNKSOL_PUL O DC0V/24V Tank solenoid (actuate)
8-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC6) 6 TNKSOL_HLD O DC0V/24V Tank solenoid (keep)
2 PH EN SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
2 TNK FULL PLS O DC0V/3.3V Tank full sensor (photo transmitter): On/
Off
3 SENS 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
4 GND - - Ground
5 PHTNK_SET I DC0V/3.3V PH dust tank sensor: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 PHMOT PLS I DC0V/3.3V Pulse sensor: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 PHMOT HP I DC0V/3.3V Home position sensor: On/Off
2 TNK FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tank full sensor (photo receptor): On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
4 TNK FULL PLS I DC0V/3.3V Tank full sensor (photo receptor): On/Off
*Not applied to 100V model
8-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)BR PWB (AK-7110)

1
1
YC4
YC2
8
11
11 1 YC1
YC3 4 1
8-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC2: BR job separator sensor, BR conveying sensor 1, BR conveying sensor 2, BR cover sensor
• YC4: BR conveying motor 1, BR conveying motor 2

YC1 1 GND - Ground
2 +24V2 - DC24V DC24V power input
3 +3.3V2 - DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
4 +3.3V3 - DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
YC2 1 +3.3V3 - DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
2 GND - Ground
3 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V Job separator tray sensor detection signal
4 3.3V2 - DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
5 GND - Ground
6 BRG_JAM1 I DC0V/3.3V BR conveying sensor 1 detection signal
7 3.3V2 - DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
8 GND - Ground
9 BRG_JAM2 I DC0V/3.3V BR conveying sensor 2 detection signal
10 GND - Ground
11 BRG_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V BR cover OPEN detection signal
YC3 1 BRG_MOT_DIR I DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor direction switching
signal
2 BRG_MOT2_CLK I DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor 2 clock signal
3 BRG_MOT2_PD I DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor current control signal
4 BRG_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V BR cover OPEN detection signal
5 BRG_FEED_SENS2 O DC0V/3.3V BR conveying sensor 2 detection signal
6 BRG_FEED_SENS1 O DC0V/3.3V BR conveying sensor 1 detection signal
7 BRG_SET O DC0V/3.3V AK set detection signal
8 BRG_MOT1_CLK I DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor 1 clock signal
9 BRG_MOT1_REM I DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor remote signal
10 BRG_MOT1_PD I DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor 1 current control signal
11 JS_SENS_AK O DC0V/3.3V Job separator tray sensor detection signal
YC4 1 BRG_MOT1_1A O DC0V/24V BR conveying motor 1 output signal A
layer
2 BRG_MOT1_1B O DC0V/24V BR conveying motor 1 output signal A
layer
3 BRG_MOT1_2B O DC0V/24V BR conveying motor 1 output signal B
layer
4 BRG_MOT1_2A O DC0V/24V BR conveying motor 1 output signal B
layer
5 BRG_MOT2_1B O DC0V/24V BR conveying motor 2 output signal B
layer
6 BRG_MOT2_1A O DC0V/24V BR conveying motor 2 output signal B
layer
8-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC4) 7 BRG_MOT2_2B O DC0V/24V BR conveying motor 2 output signal A
layer
8 BRG_MOT2_2A O DC0V/24V BR conveying motor 2 output signal A
layer
8-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12)DF PWB (DF-7110)

1 6 14 1 12 1
30
16
YC19 YC14 YC15 YC22
15
1
YC13
4 1
11 1
1 18
YC6
YC16
6
YC23
1
1
YC17
13
YC18
13
YC12
6 1 10 1
20
YC20 YC4
4
12 1
5 1
YC3 YC7
YC9
1
8 1
19 1
YC21 4 YC5 1 2 YC8 1 YC10
8-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: Exit cover switch, Front cover switch
• YC6: MT PWB
• YC7: PH PWB
• YC8: PH PWB
• YC9: BF PWB
• YC10: BF PWB
• YC12: Slide motor, Exit motor, Middle motor, Paper entry motor, Exit release motor
• YC13: Tray paper full sensor 2
• YC14: Shift release motor, Shift motor 1/2, Exit clutch
• YC16: Exit fan
• YC17: Stapler
• YC18: Relief drum motor, Feedshift solenoid 1/2/3
• YC20: Drum sensor, Middle sensor
• YC21: Sub exit sensor, Sub tray full sensor, Paper entry sensor, DF operation PWB, Tray paper full sensor 1
• YC22: Slide sensor, Side registration sensor 1/2, Exit paper sensor, Bundle exit sensor, Tray sensor 1/2, Paddle
sensor, Adjustment sensor, Shift set sensor
• YC23: Shift sensor 1/2, Tray sensor 3/4/5, Shift release sensor

2 EJECT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Exit cover sensor: On/Off
3 FRONT COV SOURCE O DC24V DC24V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
2 GND - - Ground
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
8-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC6) 4 5V O DC5V DC5V power output
7 MT DO O DC0V/5V(pulse) Serial communication data signal output
8 MT DIN I DC0V/5V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
9 MT CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Serial clock signal
10 MT SEL O DC0V/5V Select signal
11 MT RDY I DC0V/5V Ready signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM I DC0V/3.3V PH paper edge sensor: On/Off
7 PHMOT REM O DC0V/3.3V PH motor: On/Off
9 PU SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
10 PU CLK O DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
11 PU DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
12 PU DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
YC9 1 BF DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
2 BF DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
3 BF CLK O DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
4 BF SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 BF RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 ST MOV MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
2 ST MOV MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
3 ST MOV MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
4 ST MOV MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
8-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC12) 12 MIDDLE MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal
YC13 1 MTRY U SENS K I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1_LED: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 MTRY U SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
YC14 1 SFT RELS MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
2 SFT RELS MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
3 SFT RELS MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
4 SFT RELS MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
5 SFT R MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
6 SFT R MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
7 SFT R MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
8 SFT R MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
9 SFT F MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
10 SFT F MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
11 SFT F MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
12 SFT F MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
13 EJECT CL O DC0V/24V Exit clutch: On/Off
YC16 1 EJECT FAN MOT_SIDE O DC0V/24V Exit fan 1: On/Off
3 EJECT FAN MOT_SIDE O DC0V/24V Exit fan 2: On/Off
5 EJECT FAN MOT_CENT O DC0V/24V Exit fan 3: On/Off
YC17 1 STP_MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal
8-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC17) 2 STP_MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal
3 STP_MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal
9 GND - - Ground
11 READY I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit READY signal
YC18 1 DRM MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
2 DRM MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
3 DRM MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
4 DRM MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
6 MID_DRM SOL ACT O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 1 (actuate): On/Off
7 MID_DRM SOL KEEP O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 1 (keep): On/Off
9 DRM_BF SOL ACT O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 2 (actuate): On/Off
10 DRM_BF SOL KEEP O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 2 (keep): On/Off
12 SUB_MID SOL ACT O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 3 (actuate): On/Off
13 SUB_MID SOL KEEP O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 3 (keep): On/Off
YC19 1 BRAKE O DC0V/5V Tray motor control signal
2 DIR O DC0V/5V Tray motor control signal
3 CLK O DC0V/5V Clock signal
4 ENABLE O DC0V/5V Tray motor control signal
5 GND - - Ground
YC20 1 DRM SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 DRM SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Drum sensor: On/Off
4 MID EJE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 MID EJE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Middle sensor: On/Off
YC21 1 STRY EJE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 STRY EJE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Sub exit sensor: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 STRY FULL SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Sub tray full sensor: On/Off
7 STRY FULL SENS PLS O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Pulse signal
8 GND - - Ground
8-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC21) 10 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
11 LED1 O DC0V/5V LED output
15 KEY1 I DC0V/3.3V Key input
16 KEY2 I DC0V/3.3V Key input
17 GND - - Ground
19 MTRY U SENS K O DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1: On/Off
YC22 1 STAPLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 STAPLE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
4 SID REG R SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 SID REG R SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
7 SID REG F SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 SID REG F SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 PAP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Exit paper sensor: On/Off
13 BUNDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 BUNDLE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Bundle exit sensor: On/Off
16 MTRY HP1 SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
17 GND - - Ground
18 MTRY HP1 SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V tray sensor 1 On/Off
19 MTRY HP2 SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
20 GND - - Ground
21 MTRY HP2 SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V tray sensor 2: On/Off
22 PADDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
23 GND - - Ground
24 PADDLE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Paddle sensor: On/Off
25 ADJUST SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
26 GND - - Ground
27 ADJUST SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor: On/Off
28 SFT SET SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
29 GND - - Ground
30 SFT SET SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Shift set sensor: On/Off
YC23 1 SFT F HP SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 SFT F HP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Shift sensor 1: On/Off On/Off
4 SFT R HP SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 SFT R HP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Shift sensor 2: On/Off On/Off
8-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC23) 7 MTRY HALF SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 MTRY HALF SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V tray sensor 3 On/Off
10 MTRY BF SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
11 GND - - Ground
12 MTRY BF SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V tray sensor 5 On/Off
13 MTRY FULL SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 MTRY FULL SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V tray sensor 4 On/Off
16 SFT RELS SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
17 GND - - Ground
18 SFT RELS SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Shift release sensor: On/Off
8-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13)MT PWB (MT-730(B))

YC1
1
13 1
YC2
20
11
YC3
YC4
1
YC5
1 4
8-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC1: MT tray sensor 1/2/3, MT tray exit sensor 2
• YC2: MT tray sensor 4/5/6/7, MT tray exit sensor 1, MT home position sensor
• YC3: DF main PWB
• YC4: MT cover sensor
• YC5: MT conveying motor

2 OFS1 I DC0V/5V MT tray sensor 1: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
10 LED O DC0V/5V LED signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 TEJS I DC0V/5V(pulse) MB tray exit sensor 2: On/Off (photo
receptor)
4 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
14 LED O DC0V/5V(pulse) MT tray exit sensor 1: Off/On (light
emission)
15 GND - - Ground
16 HP SIG I DC0V/5V MT home position sensor: On/Off
18 GND - - Ground
19 NC - - Not used
2 GND - - Ground
8-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 SDI I DC0V/5V(pulse) MT serial communication data signal
8 SDO O DC0V/5V(pulse) MT serial communication data signal
9 SCLK I DC0V/5V(pulse) MT clock signal
10 SEL I DC0V/5V MT select signal
11 READY O DC0V/5V MT ready signal
YC4 1 R24V I DC24V DC24V power input
YC5 1 MOTOR_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) MT conveying motor control signal
2 MOTORA O DC0V/24V(pulse) MT conveying motor control signal
3 MOTORB O DC0V/24V(pulse) MT conveying motor control signal
4 MOTOR_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) MT conveying motor control signal
8-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14)BF PWB (BF-730)

1
1 YC6 4 YC10 3 YC17 1
20 10
1 YC13
1
2 YC15
YC4
1
6
YC16
7
4
YC3
1
7
4
YC7
YC5
1
1
1 15
YC20
30 16
8-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: Main PWB
• YC4: Left cover sensor
• YC5: Main PWB
• YC6: BF set sensor, BF tray open/close sensor
• YC7: Main PWB
• YC10: Adjustment motor 1/2, Side registration motor 1/2, Paper entry motor
• YC13: Staple motor
• YC15: Blade motor
• YC16: Main motor
• YC17: Feedshift solenoid
• YC20: Adjustment sensor 1/2, Side registration sensor 1/2, Tray full sensor, Exit sensor, Conveying sensor, Paper
sensor, Blade sensor, Paper entry sensor

2 GND - - Ground
2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Left cover sensor: On/Off
YC5 1 3.3V I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V BF set sensor: On/Off
4 EJECT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Tray open/close sensor: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 ENG_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
4 ENG_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 ENG_CLK I DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
6 ENG_DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
7 ENG_DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
YC10 1 EXTMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
2 EXTMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
3 EXTMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
5 MDLMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
7 MDLMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
8-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC10) 8 MDLMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
9 CINMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
11 CINMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
13 EXCMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
15 EXCMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
17 STMMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
19 STMMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
2 STLS2 I DC0V/5V Staple unit LS2 signal
3 GND - - Ground
5 STHP I DC0V/5V Staple unit HP signal
6 STMOT_OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler motor control signal
8 FGND - - Ground
YC15 1 FLDMOT_BRK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
2 FLDMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
5 GND - - Ground
YC16 1 FLDMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
2 FLDMOT_ALM O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 GND - - Ground
2 3FSOL_ATT O DC24V Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
3 3FSOL_HLD O DC24V Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (return)
2 GND - - Ground
3 BDLFT_HP I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor 1: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 WDL_HP I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
8-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9 FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tray full sensor: On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
12 OUT I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
14 GND - - Ground
15 TRANSPORT I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
18 PAPER I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground
21 WDU_HP I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
23 GND - - Ground
24 BLD_HP I DC0V/3.3V Blade sensor: On/Off
25 GND - - Ground
26 BULOW_HP I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor 2: On/Off
28 GND - - Ground
29 CARRY_IN I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
8-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15)PH PWB (PH-7)

YC5 YC3
YC4
11 1 4 1
1 3
1
3
YC2
YC6 2
1
2
YC7 1
6 1
YC8 YC10
1 4
1 YC1
2
YC9
1 12
5 YC11 1
8-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC1: DF PWB
• YC2: DF PWB
• YC3: Slide motor
• YC4: Motor
• YC5: Solenoid, paper edge sensor 1, Tank full sensor
• YC6: Slide sensor
• YC7: Paper edge sensor 2
• YC8: Pulse sensor, Home position sensor
• YC9: Dust tank sensor

YC1 1 PH_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
3 PH_CLK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Clock signal
4 PH_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 PH_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 PHMOT_REQ I DC0V/3.3V PH motor: On/Off
7 PHPES_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Paper edge detection: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
12 5.0V I DC5V DC5V power input
YC3 1 PHADJ_MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
2 PHADJ_MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
3 PHADJ_MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
4 PHADJ_MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
YC4 1 PHMOT_N O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal
2 NC - - Not used
3 PHMOT_P O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal
2 PHSOL_PUL O DC0V/24V Solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
3 PHSOL_RET O DC0V/24V Solenoid: On/Off (return)
4 PHLED_A O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 A: On/Off
5 PHLED_B O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 B: On/Off
6 PHLED_C O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 C: On/Off
7 PHLED_D O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 D: On/Off
8 PHLED_3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
9 5.0V O DC5V DC5V power output
10 PHTNK_FUL I DC0V/5V Tank full sensor: On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
8-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC6 1 SENS3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 PHADJ_HP I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
YC7 1 PHPES_DET I DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 2: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 SENS3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 PHMOT_PLS I DC0V/3.3V Pulse sensor: On/Off
4 SENS3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHMOT_HP I DC0V/3.3V Home position sensor: On/Off
YC9 1 PHTNK_SET I DC0V/3.3V Tank set sensor: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
8-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(16)DF PWB (DF-7120)

1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
20 1 3 1 13 1
YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
9
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
8 YC11 2
1 13 1
YC10
1 YC6
YC14 12
A1
2 4 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 U3 B15 B1
1
3 1 6 1
8-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC4: Front cover sensor, Top cover sensor
• YC6: PH PWB
• YC7: PH PWB
• YV8: Exit motor, Slide motor, Exit release motor, Paper entry motor, Middle motor
• YC10: Stapler
• YC16: Tray paper full sensor 1/2
• YC17: Paper entry sensor
• YC18: Middle sensor
• YC19: Side registration sensor 1/2, Exit paper sensor, Bundle exit sensor, Paddle sensor, Tray sensor 1/2/3,
Adjustment sensor, Slide sensor

2 GND - - Ground
3 TOP COV SOURCE O DC24V DC24V power output
4 TOP COV SIG I DC0V/24V Top cover sensor: On/Off
YC5 1 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
5 ENG PAU - - Not used
6 DET - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM O DC0V/3.3V PH paper edge sensor: On/Off
7 PHMOT REM O DC0V/3.3V PH motor: On/Off
9 PU SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
10 PU CLK O DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
8-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC6) 11 PU DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
12 PU DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
YC8 1 EJECT MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
YC10 1 STPMOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal
2 STPMOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal
9 GND - - Ground
8-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC10) 11 READY I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit READY signal
YC11 1 TRY MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal
2 TRY MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal
YC16 1 MTRY U SENS K I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 MTRY U SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
6 MTRY U SENS K O DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor: On/Off
YC17 1 MID EJE SENS A - - Not used
2 GND - - Not used
3 MID EJE SENS SIG - - Not used
4 GND - - Ground
YC18 1 MID EJE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 MID EJE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Middle sensor: On/Off
YC19 A1 SID REG R SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 SID REG R SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
A4 SID REG F SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 SID REG F SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 PAP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Exit paper sensor: On/Off
A10 BUNDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 BUNDLE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Bundle exit sensor: On/Off
A13 PADDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
A14 GND - - Ground
A15 PADDLE SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Paddle sensor: On/Off
B1 MTRY HP SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 MTRY HP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 1: On/Off
B4 MTRY HALF SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 MTRY HALF SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 2: On/Off
B7 MTRY FULL SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 MTRY FULL SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 3: On/Off
B10 ADJUST SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B11 GND - - Ground
8-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC19) B12 ADJUST SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor: On/Off
B13 STP MOV SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 STP MOV SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
8-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(17)DF PWB (DF-7130)

9 1 8 1 1 6 20 1
1 2 YC19 9 YC29 1 YC18 YC17 YC20 30 1
YC10 YC27
5
13 YC40
1
YC9 1
YC28
1 1
B1 A16
YC42 7
YC15
12
16
B16 A1 10
5 YC23
YC14
YC41
1
1
1
6 16
YC7
YC30
1
19
YC6 1
1
19 8 4
YC8 YC25
YC31 1
1
12 9
YC32 19 YC33 1 YC24

1
1 1
YC12 11 1 36 16 30
8 19 YC38
YC11 5 1 YC36 YC37 1
1 18 1 15 9 YC21 1
8-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC6: Power supply input (BR PWB)
• YC7: Front cover switch
• YC8: Main unit communication interface
• YC9: PH PWB communication
• YC10: PH PWB power
• YC11: BF PWB power
• YC12: BF PWB communication
• YC14: Middle motor, Exit upper motor
• YC15: Paper entry motor, Relief motor, Sub tray exit motor, Sub tray exit middle motor
• YC17: Slide motor
• YC18: Bundle exit motor 1, Bundle exit motor 2
• YC19: Adjusting pulley motor, Paper trail press guide motor
• YC20: Exit support guide motor, Exit paper holding motor, Exit paddle motor, Exit motor
• YC21: Side registration motor 1, Side registration motor 2
• YC23: Shift motor 1, Side registration motor 2, Shift release motor
• YC24: Exit release motor, Draw-in pressure release motor
• YC25: Adjusting release motor
• YC27: Staple (Staple relay PWB)
• YC29: Feedshift solenoid 1/2/3
• YC30: Front bundle exit fan, Rear bundle exit fan, Rear middle exit fan, Front middle exit fan, Rear upper exit fan,
Front upper exit fan, Upper middle exit fan 1, Upper middle exit fan 2
• YC31: Paper entry sensor, Paper entry timing sensor, Drum sensor, Drum timing sensor, Sub tray exit sensor, Sub
tray full sensor (photo transmitter)
• YC32: DF operation PWB, Tray paper full sensor 1 (photo transmitter), Middle sensor
• YC33: Tray sensor 1/2/3/4/5, Tray paper full sensor 2
• YC36: Slide sensor, Staple tank switch, Staple full sensor 1/2
• YC37: Draw-in release HP sensor, Bundle exit sensor, Paper trail press guide HP sensor, Adjusting release HP
sensor, Front shift HP sensor, Rear shift HP sensor, Shift set sensor, Shift release sensor, Lower exit paper sensor
• YC38: Side registration HP sensor 1, Side registration HP sensor 2, Bundle exit HP sensor 1/2, Upper exit paper
sensor, Exit paper holding sensor, Exit support guide HP sensor, Exit paddle HP sensor
• YC40: BR PWB
• YC42: Exit guide switch, Switch solenoid

YC6 1 24V I DC24V DC24V input
2 24V I DC24V DC24V input
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
8-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 GND - - Ground
3 FR_COVER I DC0V/24V Front cover switch: On/Off
4 - - - Not used
5 - - - Not used
6 - - - Not used
2 DET O - Ground
3 MFP_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
4 MFP_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 MFP_CLK I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication clock signal
6 MFP_DI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
7 MFP_DO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal output
YC9 1 5V O DC5V DC5V output
2 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V output
3 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V output
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PH_EDGE O DC0V/3.3V PH_EDGE signal
7 PH_MOT O DC0V/3.3V PH_MOT signal
8 PH_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
9 PH_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
10 PH_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication clock signal
11 PH_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
2 24V O DC24V DC24V output
YC11 1 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V output
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 BF_SDI I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
2 BF_SDO O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication data signal output
3 BF_SCL O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Serial communication clock signal
4 BF_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 BF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
YC14 1 MDLMOT_CH_A I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Middle motor encoder A signal
2 MDLMOT_CH_B I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Middle motor encoder B signal
4 MDLMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Middle motor rotation switching signal
5 MDLMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Middle motor drive control signal
(YC14) 6 MDLMOT_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V Middle motor brake signal
8-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 GND - - Ground
9 EXTUMOT_CH_A I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Upper exit motor encoder A signal
10 EXTUMOT_CH_B I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Upper exit motor encoder B signal
12 EXTUMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Upper exit motor rotation switching signal
13 EXTUMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Upper exit motor drive control signal
14 EXTUMOT_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V Upper exit motor brake signal
15 GND - - Ground
YC15 A1 CINMOT_CH_A I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Paper entry motor encoder A signal
A2 CINMOT_CH_B I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Paper entry motor encoder B signal
A4 CINMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Paper entry motor rotation switching
signal
A5 CINMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Paper entry motor drive control signal
A6 CINMOT_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V Paper entry motor brake signal
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 24V O DC24V DC24V power output
A9 DRMMOT_CH_A I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Relief drum motor encoder A signal
A10 DRMMOT_CH_B I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Relief drum motor encoder B signal
A12 DRMMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Relief drum motor rotation switching
signal
A13 DRMMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V Relief drum motor drive control signal
A14 DRMMOT_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V Relief drum motor brake signal
A15 GND - - Ground
A16 24V O DC24V DC24V power output
B1 BEXTMOT_CH_A I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Sub tray exit motor encoder A signal
B2 BEXTMOT_CH_B I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Sub tray exit motor encoder B signal
B3 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B4 BEXTMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Sub tray exit motor rotation switching
signal
B5 BEXTMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V Sub tray exit motor drive control signal
B6 BEXTMOT_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V Sub tray exit motor brake signal
B7 GND - - Ground
B8 24V O DC24V DC24V power output
B9 - - - Not used
B10 - - - Not used
B11 - - - Not used
B12 - - - Not used
B13 - - - Not used
B14 - - - Not used
B15 - - - Not used
B16 - - - Not used
YC17 1 STMMOT_A/ O 0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor drive control
(YC17) 2 - - - Not used
8-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 STMMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor drive control
4 STMMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor drive control
5 - - - Not used
YC18 6 STMMOT_B/ O 0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor drive control
1 TABAMOT1_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Bundle exit motor 1 drive control
2 TABAMOT1_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Bundle exit motor 1 drive control
3 TABAMOT1_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Bundle exit motor 1 drive control
4 TABAMOT1_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Bundle exit motor 1 drive control
5 TABAMOT2_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Bundle exit motor 2 drive control
6 TABAMOT2_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Bundle exit motor 2 drive control
7 TABAMOT2_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Bundle exit motor 2 drive control
8 TABAMOT2_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Bundle exit motor 2 drive control
YC19 1 MCHMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjusting pulley motor drive control
2 MCHMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjusting pulley motor drive control
3 MCHMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjusting pulley motor drive control
4 MCHMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjusting pulley motor drive control
5 PINGMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper trail press guide motor drive control
6 PINGMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper trail press guide motor drive control
7 PINGMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper trail press guide motor drive control
8 PINGMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper trail press guide motor drive control
9 - - - Not used
YC20 1 ESPTMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit support guide motor drive control
2 ESPTMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit support guide motor drive control
3 ESPTMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit support guide motor drive control
4 ESPTMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit support guide motor drive control
5 EHLDMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit paper holding motor drive control
6 EHLDMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit paper holding motor drive control
7 EHLDMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit paper holding motor drive control
8 EHLDMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit paper holding motor drive control
9 EPDLMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit paddle motor drive control
10 EPDLMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit paddle motor drive control
11 EPDLMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit paddle motor drive control
12 EPDLMOTA O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit paddle motor drive control
13 EXTMOT_CH_A I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Exit motor encoder A signal
14 EXTMOT_CH_B I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Exit motor encoder B signal
16 EXTMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Exit motor rotation switching signal
17 EXTMOT_PWM O DC0V/3.3V Exit motor drive control signal
18 EXTMOT_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V Exit motor brake signal
19 GND - - Ground
YC21 1 WDRMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 drive control
2 WDRMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 drive control
3 WDRMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 drive control
4 WDRMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 drive control
(YC21) 5 WDFMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 drive control
8-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 WDFMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 drive control
7 WDFMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 drive control
8 WDFMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 drive control
YC23 1 SFRMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 drive control
2 SFRMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 drive control
3 SFRMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 drive control
4 SFRMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 drive control
5 SFFMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 drive control
6 SFFMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 drive control
7 SFFMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 drive control
8 SFFMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 drive control
9 SFCMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor drive control
10 SFCMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor drive control
11 SFCMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor drive control
12 SFCMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor drive control
YC24 1 EXCMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit release motor drive control
2 EXCMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit release motor drive control
3 EXCMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit release motor drive control
4 EXCMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit release motor drive control
5 PINCMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Draw-in pressure release motor drive
control
6 PINCMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Draw-in pressure release motor drive
control
7 PINCMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Draw-in pressure release motor drive
control
8 PINCMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Draw-in pressure release motor drive
control
9 - - - Not used
YC25 1 MCHCMOT_B/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjusting release motor drive control
2 MCHCMOT_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjusting release motor drive control
3 MCHCMOT_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjusting release motor drive control
4 MCHCMOT_A/ O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjusting release motor drive control
YC27 1 STMOT+ O DC0V/24V Staple motor drive control
2 STMOT+ O DC0V/24V Staple motor drive control
7 STMOT+ O DC0V/24V .Staple motor drive control
11 - - - Not used
12 STMOT- O DC0V/24V Staple motor drive control
13 STMOT- O DC0V/24V .Staple motor drive control
(YC27) 15 STMOT- O DC0V/24V .Staple motor drive control
8-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]

24 STLS I DC0V/3.3V Staple sensor: On/Off
25 STHP I DC0V/3.3V Staple HP sensor: On/Off
26 GND - - Ground
27 - - - Not used
28 STSP I DC0V/3.3V Staple ready: On/Off
29 GND - - Ground
30 - - - Not used
YC28 1 TRAYMOT_BRK O DC0V/5V Tray motor brake signal
2 TRAYMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Tray motor rotation switching signal
3 TRAYMOT_LD I DC0V/5V Tray motor rotation synchronizing signal
4 TRAYMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Tray motor clock signal
5 TRAYMOT_EN O DC0V/5V Tray motor remote signal
6 GND - - Ground
2 M/DSOL_ATT O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 2 drive control
3 M/DSOL_HLD O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 2 drive control
5 D/BSOL_ATT O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 1 drive control
6 D/BSOL_HLD O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 1 drive control
8 S/MSOL_ATT O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 3 drive control
9 S/MSOL_HLD O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 3 drive control
2 TABA_FAN_CENTER1 O DC0V/24V Front bundle exit fan drive signal
4 TABA_FAN_CENTER2 O DC0V/24V Rear bundle exit fan drive signal
5 TABA_FAN_SIDE1 Rear middle exit fan drive signal
7 TABA_FAN_SIDE2 Front middle exit fan drive signal
9 EXTUPR_FAN_SIDE1 Rear upper exit fan drive signal
11 EXTUPR_FAN_SIDE2 Front upper exit fan drive signal
13 EXTUPR_FAN_CENTER1 Upper middle exit fan 1 drive signal
(YC30) 15 EXTUPR_FAN_CENTER2 Upper middle exit fan 2 drive signal
8-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 CIN_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 CINTMG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry timing sensor: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 DRMTMG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Drum timing sensor: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 DRM_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Drum (Relief path) sensor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
14 BEXT_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Sub tray exit sensor: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
18 BFULL_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Sub tray full sensor: On/Off
19 BFULL_PLS I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Sub tray full sensor photo transmitter
control
YC32 1 MST_LED1 O DC0V/5V DF operation PWB LED1 drive
2 MST_LED2 O DC0V/5V DF operation PWB LED2 drive
5 MST_KEY1 O DC0V/3.3V DF operation PWB KEY1: On/Off
6 MST_KEY2 O DC0V/3.3V DF operation PWB KEY2: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
9 ASURF_SENS_K O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Tray paper full sensor 1: photo transmitter
control
10 GND - - Ground
11 MDL_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Middle sensor: On/Off
YC33 1 AHP2_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 AHP2_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 1: On/Off
4 AHP1_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 AHP1_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 2: On/Off
7 AHALF_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 AHALF_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 3: On/Off
10 BFFULL_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
11 GND - - Ground
(YC33) 12 BFFULL_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 5: On/Off
8-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]

13 AFULL_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 AFULL_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 4: On/Off
16 ASURF_SENS_K I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Tray paper full sensor 2: photo transmitter
control
17 GND - - Ground
18 ASURF_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
YC36 1 STPMHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 STPMHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Staple drive HP sensor: On/Off
4 STPTANK_LEDA O DC3.3V TNKLED_Rear control signal
5 STPTANK_LEDB O DC3.3V TNKLED_Middle control signal
6 STPTANK_LEDC O DC3.3V TNKLED_Center control signal
7 STPTANK_AN I DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 STPTANK_SW I DC0V/3.3V Staple tank switch: On/Off
10 STPTANK_FULL I DC0V/3.3V Staple full sensor: On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
YC37 1 PINCHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 PINCHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Draw-in release HP sensor: On/Off
4 EXCHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 EXCHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Exit release HP sensor: On/Off
7 PINGHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 PINGHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V DF trail press guide HP sensor: On/Off
10 RESERVE_4_LED - - Not used
11 GND - - Not used
12 RESERVE_4 - - Not used
13 RESERVE_5_LED - - Not used
14 GND - - Not used
15 RESERVE_5 - - Not used
16 MCHCHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
17 GND - - Ground
18 MCHCHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Adjusting release HP sensor: On/Off
19 SFFHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
20 GND - - Ground
21 SFFHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Front shift HP sensor: On/Off
22 SFRHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
23 GND - - Ground
24 SFRHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Rear shift HP sensor: On/Off
25 SFSET_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
26 GND - - Ground
(YC37) 27 SFSET_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift set sensor: On/Off
8-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]

28 SFCHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
29 GND - - Ground
30 SFCHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift release sensor: On/Off
YC38 1 WDFHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 WDFHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration HP sensor 1: On/Off
4 WDRHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 WDRHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration HP sensor 2: On/Off
7 TABA1_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 TABA1_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Bundle exit HP sensor 1: On/Off
10 TABA2_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
11 GND - - Ground
12 TABA2_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Bundle exit HP sensor 2: On/Off
14 EXIT_SENS_K O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Upper exit paper sensor photo transmitter
control
15 EXIT_SENS_K I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Upper exit paper sensor photo transmitter
control
16 GND - - Ground
17 EXIT_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit paper sensor: On/Off
19 - - - Not used
20 - - - Not used
21 - - - Not used
22 - - - Not used
23 - - - Not used
24 - - - Not used
25 - - - Not used
26 - - - Not used
27 - - - Not used
28 EHLD1_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
29 GND - - Ground
30 EHLD1_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Exit paper holding sensor: On/Off
28 ESPTHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
29 GND - - Ground
30 ESPTHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Exit support guide HP sensor: On/Off
28 EPDLHP_SENS_LED O DC5V DC5V power output
29 GND - - Ground
30 EPDLHP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Exit paddle HP sensor: On/Off
YC40 1 STACKER_TXD O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Stucker UART
communication(transmission)
2 STACKER_RXD I DC0V/3.3V(pulse) Stucker UART communication(receive)
3 GND - - Ground
4 5VIF I DC5V DC5V power input
YC42 1 EXTIL_SW_24V O DC24V DC24V power output
8-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 GND - - Ground
3 EXTIL_SW I DC0V/24V Exit guider switch: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
6 ILSOL_ATT O DC0V/24V Exit switching solenoid drive control
7 ILSOL_HLD O DC0V/24V Exit switching solenoid drive control
8 - - - Not used
9 - - - Not used
10 - - - Not used
8-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(18)BF PWB (BF-9100)

1
YC6 4 YC10 3 YC17 1 1 YC23 4
20 1 1
1 YC13 10
YC15
1
7
YC19
YC16
1
7
4
1
YC3 YC11
1 1
4
1
7 YC26
4
YC7 3
YC5
1 YC22
1 6
1
YC25 6
3 1 1 YC18 YC20
16
30
8-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: DF PWB power
• YC5: DF PWB power
• YC6: Set switch, Tray open/close switch
• YC7: DF PWB communication
• YC10: Adjusting motor 1/2, Side registration motor 1/2, Paper entry motor
• YC11: Paddle motor
• YC13: Staple unit
• YC15: Blade motor
• YC16: Main motor
• YC17: Feedshift solenoid
• YC18: Conveying tray sensor
• YC19: Paper sensor, Paddle sensor
• YC20: Adjusting sensor 1/2, Exit sensor, Vertical conveying sensor, Side registration sensor 1/2, Blade sensor, Paper
entry sensor
• YC22: Conveying tray motor
• YC23: Front paper entry fan, Rear paper entry fan
• YC25: Exit pressure release sensor
• YC26: Exit pressure release motor

2 GND - - Ground
YC5 1 3.3V I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V BF set switch: On/Off
4 EJECT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Tray open/close switch: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 ENG_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
4 ENG_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 ENG_CLK I DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
6 ENG_DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
7 ENG_DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
YC10 1 EXTMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
2 EXTMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
8-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC10) 3 EXTMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
3 GND - - Ground
5 STHP I DC0V/5V Staple unit HP signal
8 FGND - - Ground
YC15 1 FLDMOT_BRK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
2 FLDMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
5 GND - - Ground
YC16 1 FLDMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
2 FLDMOT_ALM O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 GND - - Ground
2 3FSOL_ATT O DC24V Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
3 3FSOL_HLD O DC24V Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (return)
2 GND - - Ground
8-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(YC20) 3 BDLFT_HP I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor 1: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 WDL_HP I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tray full sensor: On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
12 OUT I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
14 GND - - Ground
15 TRANSPORT I DC0V/3.3V Vertical conveying sensor: On/Off
16 - - - Not used
17 - - - Not used
18 - - - Not used
20 GND - - Ground
21 WDU_HP I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
23 GND - - Ground
24 BLD_HP I DC0V/3.3V Blade sensor: On/Off
25 GND - - Ground
26 BULOW_HP I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor 2: On/Off
28 GND - - Ground
29 CARRY_IN I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
YC22 1 FDTRAY_DIR O DC0V/5V Conveying tray motor brake signal
2 FDTRAY_LD I DC0V/3.3V Conveying tray motor rotation
synchronizing signal
3 FDTRAY_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Conveying tray motor clock signal
4 FDTRAY_EN O DC0V/5V Conveying tray motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
YC23 1 BF_FAN2 O DC0V/24V Booklet FAN drive signal
3 BF_FAN1 O DC0V/24V Booklet FAN drive signal
YC25 1 EXT_RLS_SENS_A O DC1.2V LED power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 EXT_RLS_SENS DC0V/3.3V Exit pressure release sensor: On/Off
YC26 1 OUT2 O DC0V/24V Exit pressure release motor control signal
2 N.C. - - Ground
3 OUT1 O DC0V/24V Exit pressure release motor control signal
8-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge
9 Appendixes
9 - 1 Repetitive defects gauge
First occurrence of defect
27.9 mm/ 1.1"ࠉMagnet roller (Low-end model)
37.8 mm/ 1.49"ࠉChager roller

39.3 mm/ 1.55"ࠉSleeve roller (High-end model)
64.7 mm/ 2.55"ࠉSecondly transfer roller
94.0 mm/ 3.7" Press roller (Low-end model)

94.5 mm/ 3.72" Drum
96 mm/ 3.8" Heat roller (Fuser belt)
110.0 mm/ 4.33"Press roller (High-end model)
845.0 mm/ 33.27"ࠉPrimaly transfer belt
The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.
9-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands
9 - 2 Firmware environment commands

The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. These parameters may be changed permanently
with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands. This section provides information on how to use the FRPO
command and its parameters using examples.
Using FRPO commands for reprogramming the firmware

The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as the optional values on the service status page.
NOTE
Before changing any FRPO parameters, print out a service status page, so you will know the
parametervalues before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values,
send the FRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command.
(!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:

!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Changing emulation mode to PC-PR201/65A
9-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;

FRPO parameters
Items FRPO Setting value Factory

setting
Top margin A1 Integer value in inch 0
A2 decimal value in 1/100 inch increments 0
Left margin A3 Integer value in inch 0
Page length A5 Integer value in inch 17
Page width A7 Integer value in inch 17
PRESCRIBE compatible mode B0 0 to 255 0
2 (100V)
Default pattern resolution B8 0: 300 dpi 0
1: 600 dpi
Copy number when turn on C0 1 to 999 1
Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0
1: Landscape
Default font* C2 Middle two digits of power-up font 0
C3 Last two digits of power-up font 0
C5 First two digits of power-up font 0
PCL font switching C8 0:HP compatible mode 0
32:Compatibility mode
Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5 5
Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
1 (100V)
Reduction (100V model only) J0 0: 100% 0
5: 70 %
6: 81 %
7: 86 %
8: 94 %
9: 98 %
Auto linefeed mode (100V model only) J7 0: Auto linefeed 0
(Japanese emulation only) 1: No auto linefeed
Horizontal offset (100V model only)* K0 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
K1 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
Vertical offset (100V model only)* K2 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
K3 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
Kanji font number setting K4 0: Same as V7 0
(100V model only) 1: Mincho 40 dots
2: Gothic 40 dots
5: Mincho 48 dots
6: Gothic 48 dots
New/old JIS code switching K6 0: JIS X 0208: 1990 0
(100V model only) 1: JIS X 0208: 1978
8: JIS X 0213: 2004
KIR mode N0 0:OFF 2
2:ON
9-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Duplex printing mode selection N4 0: OFF 0
1: Long-edge mode (long-edge bind)
2: Short-edge mode (Short-edge bind)
Sleep timer time-out time N5 1 to 240 minutes 10
Eco Print mode N6 0:OFF 0
2:ON
Resolution N8 0: 300dpi 1
1: 600dpi
3: 1200dpi
Default emulation mode P1 6 : PCL6 (except PCL XL) 6
9 : KPDL 9 (120V)
Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 0x0d 1
1: CR
2: CR+LF
Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 0x0d 1
1: LF
2: CR+LF
KPDL auto switching P4 0: None 0
1: Auto switching 1 (120V model)
KPDL auto switching alternate P5 Same as P1 (except 9) 6
emulation
AES option P7 If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor alternate 10

Page eject command and action when emulation after the AES is started, it is processed in the 11 (120V)
automatic emulation switching (AES) alternate emulation .
is triggered 0: All page eject commands
1: None
2: All page eject commands and Prescribe EXIT command
3: Prescribe EXIT command only
4: ^L command only
6: Prescribe EXIT command and ^L command
If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor alternate
emulation after the AES is started, it is processed in KPDL.
10: Data other than KPDL print data is printed in the
alternate emulation.
Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82(R)
Stacker setting at start-up R0 1: Inner tray 1
3: When the 1000-sheet finisher is installed
7: When the 4000-sheet finisher is installed
9-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Paper size(start-up) R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.)
1: Envelope Monarch
2: Envelope #10
3: Envelope DL
4: Envelope C5
5: Executive
6: Letter
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
10: ISO A3
11: JIS B4
12: Ledger
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
16: Envelope #9
17: Envelope #6-3/4
18: ISO B5
19: Custom
20: B4 to A4 (100V model only)
21: A3 to A4 (100V model only)
22: A4 to A4[98%] (100V model only)
23: STK to A4 (100V model only)
24: STK to B4 (100V model only)
30: C4
31: Hagaki
32: Oufuku Hagaki
33: Oficio II
38: 12x18
39: 8K
40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei type 2
53: Youkei type 4
Default paper source R4 0: MP paper feed section 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
5: Cassette 5
Sort pin full detection S3 0: Stop at paper full detection 0
1: Output tray change at paper full detection
A4/Letter override S4 0: OFF 1
1: ON 0 (100V)
9-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Host buffer size rate S5 0: 10KB 1
(H8 value and integration) 1: 100KB
2: 1MB
Wide A4 T6 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Line spacing U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6
U1 Lines per inch (fraction value) 0
Character spacing U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10
U3 Characters per inch (fraction value) 0
Country code of the resident fonts U6 0: US 41
1: France 0 (100V)
2: Germany
3: U.K.
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multi-lingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
Supported symbol sets U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53
1: IBM 0 (100V)
6: PCL
Default font pitch* U8 Default font pitch/integer 10
U9 Default font pitch/decimal 0
ANK outline font size at start-up* V0 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power-up 0
Upper 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 09
V1 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power-up 12
Lower 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 99
V2 Decimal value of ANK outline font size at power-up 0
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
ANK outline font name at start-up* V3 ANK outline font name at power-up Courier
Initial Kanji outline font size (100 V V4 Upper 2-digit integer value of Kanji outline font size at start- 0
model only)* up
Valid value range: 00 to 09
V5 2-digit integer value of the Kanji outline font size at start-up 10
Valid value range: 00 to 99
V6 2-digit decimal value of the Kanji outline font size at start-up 0
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
Initial Kanji outline font name (100V V7 Kanji outline font name at start-up MTHSMINCHO
model only)* -W3
9-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Default weight(courier and letter V9 0: Courier = darkness 5
Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular
Color mode W1 0: BW 1
1: Color (CMYK color)
Gloss mode W6 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Paper type for the MP tray X0 1: Plain 1
2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Labels
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
8: Rough (except 100V model)
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Hagaki
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
18: Index Tab
21 to 28: Custom 1 to Custom 8
Paper type (Paper cassettes 1 and 2) X1 1: Plain 1
X2 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8
9-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Paper type X3 1: Plain 1
(Option paper cassette 3 to 5) X4 3: Preprinted
X5 5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8
Cassette selection mode (PCL) X9 0: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence 0
compatible with HP-LJ5Si
2: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence
compatible with HP-LJ8000
Auto error clear at an error Y0 0:OFF 0
1:ON
Auto error clear timeout time Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
Paper error detection at duplex Y3 0: Not detected 127
printing 127: Detected
Paper size and type error detection at
fixed paper source
Forced duplex printing setting Y4 0:OFF 0

(Media type is Preprinted, Prepunched 1:ON
and Letterhead only)
PDF direct printing Y5 0: Zoom depending on paper size 0
1: Loads paper which is the same size as the image
2: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image
sizeEnlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper
size
3: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image size
8: Printed in full magnification
9: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image size
10: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image
sizeEnlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper
size
13 to 99: Same action as default value(0)
Job box error control Y6 0: No error control 3
1: Output the error list
2: Displays the error
3: Displays the error and prints the error report
*: Ignored depending on emulation
9-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Chart of image adjustment procedures
9 - 3 Chart of image adjustment procedures

Adjustin Item Image Maintenance mode Page Setting procedure Remarks
g order
Item Mode Method Setting

No.
1 Adjusting the center line of the MP tray U034 LSU Out Left P.6-53 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
(Adjustment of writing) A cursor or the numeric keys, moves rightward.
2 Select the adjustment content.
change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select [Duplex].
[LSU Out Left]-[MPT]
Changes the LSU writing start timing. 2 Press the Start key to set the
3 Press the System Menu key.
setting value.
4 Press the Start key.
3 Press the [Stop] key.
(Test pattern output)
6 Execute the adjustment.
2 Adjusting the center line of the U034 LSU Out Left P.6-53 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
cassettes A cursor or the numeric keys, moves rightward.
(Adjustment of writing) 2 Select the adjustment content.
[LSU Out Left]-
[Cassette1] to [Cassette5] 2 Press the Start key to set the
Changes the LSU writing start timing.
setting value.
3 Adjusting the leading edge registration U034 LSU Out Top P.6-53 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
of the MP tray A cursor or the numeric keys, moves downward.
[LSU Out Top]-[MPT(L)]
2 Press the Start key to set the
Changes the secondary paper feed 3 Press the System Menu key.
setting value.
timing.
4 Adjusting the leading edge registration U034 LSU Out Top P.6-53 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
of the cassette A cursor or the numeric keys, moves downward.
[LSU Out Top]-[Cassette(L)]
Changes the secondary paper feed 3 Press the System Menu key.
setting value.
timing.
9-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]

g order

No.
5 Adjusting the leading edge margin U402 Lead P.6-253 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image get
(Adjustment of writing) $ cursor or the numeric keys, longer.
change the setting value.
[Lead]
Changes the LSU illumination start 2 Press the Start key to set the
timing. 3 Press the System Menu key.
setting value.
6 Adjusting the trailing edge margin U402 Trail P.6-253 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the margin get
(Adjustment of writing) $ cursor or the numeric keys, larger.
[Trail]
Changes the LSU illumination end 2 Press the Start key to set the
timing. 3 Press the System Menu key.
setting value.
7 Adjusting the left and right margins U402 A Margin P.6-253 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image get
(Adjustment of writing) A
C Margin cursor or the numeric keys, longer.
Select [A Margin] or [C Margin].
Changes the LSU illumination start/ A C 2 Press the Start key to set the
end timing. 3 Press the System Menu key.
setting value.
8 Adjusting magnification of the scanner U065 Main Scan P.6-78 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
in the main scanning direction cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image get
(scanning adjustment) 2 Select the adjustment content.
change the setting value. larger.
[Main Scan]
Processes data. 3 Press the System Menu key.
setting value.
4 Place an original and press the Start key.
(Test copy output)
(original: Test copy)
9-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]

g order

No.
9 Adjusting magnification of the scanner U065 Sub Scan P.6-78 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
in the sub scanning direction (scanning cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image get
adjustment) 2 Select the adjustment content.
U070 Sub Scan(F) P.6-83 change the setting value. larger.
U065: [Sub Scan]
Sub Scan(B) U070: [Sub Scan(F)], [Sub Scan(B)] or 2 Press the Start key to set the
Changes the original scanning speed. U070: When using document processor
Sub Scan(CIS) [Sub Scan(CIS)] setting value.
*When the setting value is increased, the image get
3 Press the System Menu key. 3 Press the [Stop] key.
longer.
4 Place an original and press the Start key.
(Test copy output)
10 Adjusting the center line U067 Front P.6-81 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U067: When using on the contact glass
(scanning adjustment) cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
U072 Front P.6-87 change the setting value. moves leftward.
U067: [Front]
Scan data is processed. Back U072: [Front], [Back] or [CIS] 2 Press the Start key to set the
CIS setting value. U072: When using document processor
*Back adjustment selects [Back] at the time of duplex
4 Place an original and press the Start key. mode.
(Test copy output) *When the setting value is increased, the image
moves rightward.
11 Adjusting the leading edge registration U066 Front P.6-80 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U066: When using on the contact glass
(scanning adjustment) cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
change the setting value. moves forward.
Changes the original scan start timing. 3 Place an original and press the Start key.
U071 Front Head P.6-84 2 Press the Start key to set the
(Test copy output) U071: When using document processor
Back Head setting value.
4 Press the System Menu key. *Back adjustment selects [Back Head] at the time of
duplex mode.
*When the setting value is increased, the image
U066: [Front]
moves forward.
U071: [Front Head] or [Back Head]
Image quality
Items Specifications
100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
Copy: ±1.5%
Using DP: ±2.0%
Magnification Copy: ±2.0%

Using DP: ±2.5%
Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm

Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less

Copy: 2.0mm or less
Using DP: 2.5mm or less
9-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Specifications
Skewed paper feed (left-right difference) Print: 1.0mm /100mm or less
Copy: 1.0mm /100mm or less (table)
1.5mm /100mm or less (DP)
Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
Copy: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
Using DP: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005), the following adjustments are automatically made:
• Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065)
• Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
• Chromatic aberration in the main scanning direction
• Chromatic aberration in the sub scanning direction
• MTF correction
• Input gamma in color mode
• Color correction matrix
• Input gamma in monochrome mode
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), the following adjustments are automatically made:
In case of running this test chart, clean the feed rollers with alcohol in advance and ensure the DP width guides are correctly positioned against the original.
Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
• Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
• Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
• Adjusting the DP trailing edge registration (U071)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner: DP Auto Adj) is run using the printed out test chart, the following adjustments are automatically made:
• Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
• Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
• Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
9-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Adjusting the DP trailing edge registration (U071)
Adjusting Item Image Setting procedure Remarks

order
12 Skew image adjustment (diagonal to 1 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8).
the main scan direction) A
[Original]
B
(scanning adjustment) 2 Remove rib (c) at front side and remove
upper right cover (b) in the direction of the b
arrow.
Adjust the height of the scanner unit. P rin tin g d ire ctio n
3 Remove the screw (e) that fixes the ISU
C D adjustment plate (d).
a
4 Shift the ISU adjustment plate (d) in the
[Output image W [Output image X
(A/C side is downward.)] (B/D side is downward.)] adjustment direction. a
A B A B
5 Estimate amount of movement:
Sliding the ISU adjustment plate (d) c
changes the horizontal lines 0.26 mm on
the A/C side and 0.25 mm on the B/D
side.
C D C D
d
6 In case that horizontal line goes down to
A/C side (Copy image A)
->Shift ISU adjustment plate (d) in the
direction (X).
7 In case that horizontal line goes down to e
B/D side (Copy image B) X
Y
->Raise the ISU adjustment plate (d) by
shifting it in the direction of the arrow Y.
8 Tighten the screw (e) after the adjustment
is completed.
9 Attach upper right cover (b) to the main
9-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Wiring diagram
9 - 4 Wiring diagram
(1)Engine PWB / Feed Drive PWB
(1-1)Low-end model
Feed image PWB (1/6)

YC3 YC6 YC40 YC6
3.3V3_FUSE A12 A12 A1 A1 3.3V3_FUSE +5V0 A1 A1 A20 A20 +5V0_FUSE
3.3V2_FUSE A11 A11 A2 A2 3.3V2_FUSE +5V2 A2 A2 A19 A19 +5V2
3.3V2_FUSE A10 A10 A3 A3 3.3V2_FUSE GND A3 A3 A18 A18 GND
GND A8 A8 A5 A5 GND +3.3V2_FUSE A5 A5 A16 A16 +3.3V2_FUSE
GND A5 A5 A8 A8 GND GND A8 A8 A13 A13 GND
REG_R_LED A4 A4 A9 A9 REG_R_LED GND A9 A9 A12 A12 GND
ID_SENS_R_S A3 A3 A10 A10 ID_SENS_R_S JS_SENS_AK A10 A10 A11 A11 JS_SENS_AK
ID_SENS_R_P A2 A2 A11 A11 ID_SENS_R_P FRONT_CO_OPEN A11 A11 A10 A10 FRONT_CO_OPEN
REG_F_LED A1 A1 A12 A12 REG_F_LED JS_SENS A12 A12 A9 A9 JS_SENS
KSS_INT A13 A13 A8 A8 DRM_EEP_SEL0
Relay Relay KSS_EN A14 A14 A7 A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_S B12 B12 B1 B1 ID_SENS_F_S KSS_CS A15 A15 A6 A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_P B11 B11 B2 B2 ID_SENS_F_P KSS_CLK A16 A16 A5 A5 KSS_IMAGE_CLK(ENG to IMAGE)
REG_SENS B10 B10 B3 B3 REG_SENS KSS_SDI A17 A17 A4 A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI(IMAGE to ENG)
ATLAS_CLK(ENG to DRI) B9 B9 B4 B4 ATLAS_CLK KSS_SDO A18 A18 A3 A3 KSS_IMAGE_SDO(ENG to IMAGE)
ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) B8 B8 B5 B5 ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) +3.3V3 A19 A19 A2 A2 3.3V3
ATLAS_EN(ENG to DRI) B7 B7 B6 B6 ATLAS_EN 3.3V_TH_CUT A20 A20 A1 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT
ATLAS_CS(ENG to DRI) B6 B6 B7 B7 ATLAS_CS
ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) B5
Relay Relay
B5 B8 B8 ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG)
MPF_ORG_SENS B4 B4 B9 B9 MPF_ORG_SENS DRUM HEAT B1 B1 B20 B20 DRUM HEAT
CAS1_2_OPEN B3 B3 B10 B10 CAS1_2_OPEN DF_CLK B2 B2 B19 B19 DF_CLK
REG_CL_REM B2 B2 B11 B11 REG_CL_REM DF_SDO B3 B3 B18 B18 DF_SDO
GND B1 B1 B12 B12 GND DF_SDI B4 B4 B17 B17 DF_SDI
DF_SEL B5 B5 B16 B16 DF_SEL
DF_RDY B6 B6 B15 B15 DF_RDY
DF_SYNC B7 B7 B14 B14 DF_SYNC
DF_DET B8 B8 B13 B13 DF_DET
FSR_TH_EDGE B9 B9 B12 B12 FSR_TH_EDGE
FSR_TH_CENT B10 B10 B11 B11 FSR_TH_CENT
FSR_TH_PRESS B11 B11 B10 B10 FSR_TH_PRESS
FSR_TH_MID B12 B12 B9 B9 FSR_TH_MID
FSR_ALARM B13 B13 B8 B8 FSR_ALARM
TPC_BK B14 B14 B7 B7 TPC_BK
DRUM_BK_MOT_REM B15 B15 B6 B6 DRUM_BK_MOT_REM
DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK B16 B16 B5 B5 DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK
DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY B17 B17 B4 B4 DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY
GND B18 B18 B3 B3 GND
+24V3_IL_F2_FET2 B19 B19 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2
FSR_OFFSET_CNT B20 B20 B1 B1 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
Engine PWB (1/7) YC42 YC28

DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM 1 1 18 18 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK
Feed drive PWB (1/3) DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
2
3
2
3
17
16
17
16 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY 4 4 15 15 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE 5 5 14 14 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE
VIB_MOT_REM 6 6 13 13 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DLP_FAN_REM 7 7 12 12 I2C_SCL
DLP_FAN_REM_HALF 8 8 11 11 I2C_SDA
TPC_M 9 9 10 10 TPC_M
TPC_C 10 10 9 9 TPC_C
TPC_Y 11 11 8 8 TPC_Y
DLP_COL_MOT_REM 12 12 7 7 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
DLP_COL_MOT_CLK 13 13 6 6 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
DLP_COL_MOT_DIR 14 14 5 5 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR
DLP_COL_MOT_RDY 15 15 4 4 DLP_COL_MOT_RDY
DRUM_COL_MOT_REM 16 16 3 3 DRUM_COL_MOT_REM
DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK 17 17 2 2 DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK
DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY 18 18 1 1 DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 2 2 EX_SENS
NC 9 9 3 3 5V
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 6 6 3.3V2
NC 5 5 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
13 13 GND
14 14 TN_FAN_REM
9-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)High-end Model
YC3 YC6 YC40 YC6

3.3V3_FUSE A12 A12 A1 A1 3.3V3_FUSE +5V0 A1 A1 A20 A20 +5V0_FUSE
3.3V2_FUSE A11 A11 A2 A2 3.3V2_FUSE +5V2 A2 A2 A19 A19 +5V2
GND A5 A5 A8 A8 GND GND A8 A8 A13 A13 GND
REG_R_LED A4 A4 A9 A9 REG_R_LED GND A9 A9 A12 A12 GND
ID_SENS_R_S A3 A3 A10 A10 ID_SENS_R_S JS_SENS_AK A10 A10 A11 A11 JS_SENS_AK
ID_SENS_R_P A2 A2 A11 A11 ID_SENS_R_P FRONT_CO_OPEN A11 A11 A10 A10 FRONT_CO_OPEN
REG_F_LED A1 A1 A12 A12 REG_F_LED JS_SENS A12 A12 A9 A9 JS_SENS
Relay KSS_INT A13 A13 A8 A8 DRM_EEP_SEL0
Relay KSS_EN A14 A14 A7 A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_S B12 B12 B1 B1 ID_SENS_F_S KSS_CS A15 A15 A6 A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_P B11 B11 B2 B2 ID_SENS_F_P KSS_CLK A16 A16 A5 A5 KSS_IMAGE_CLK(ENG to IMAGE)
REG_SENS B10 B10 B3 B3 REG_SENS KSS_SDI A17 A17 A4 A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI(IMAGE to ENG)
ATLAS_CLK(ENG to DRI) B9 B9 B4 B4 ATLAS_CLK KSS_SDO A18 A18 A3 A3 KSS_IMAGE_SDO(ENG to IMAGE)
ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) B8 B8 B5 B5 ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) 3.3V3_FUSE A19 A19 A2 A2 3.3V3_FUSE
ATLAS_EN(ENG to DRI) B7 B7 B6 B6 ATLAS_EN 3.3V_TH_CUT A20 A20 A1 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT
ATLAS_CS(ENG to DRI) B6 B6 B7 B7 ATLAS_CS Relay
ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) B5 B5 B8 B8 ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) Relay
MPF_ORG_SENS B4 B4 B9 B9 MPF_ORG_SENS DRUM HEAT B1 B1 B20 B20 DRUM HEAT
CAS1_2_OPEN B3 B3 B10 B10 CAS1_2_OPEN DF_CLK B2 B2 B19 B19 DF_CLK
REG_CL_REM B2 B2 B11 B11 REG_CL_REM DF_SDO B3 B3 B18 B18 DF_SDO
GND B1 B1 B12 B12 GND DF_SDI B4 B4 B17 B17 DF_SDI
DF_SEL B5 B5 B16 B16 DF_SEL
DF_RDY B6 B6 B15 B15 DF_RDY
DF_SYNC B7 B7 B14 B14 DF_SYNC
DF_DET B8 B8 B13 B13 DF_DET
FSR_TH_EDGE B9 B9 B12 B12 FSR_TH_EDGE
FSR_TH_CENT B10 B10 B11 B11 FSR_TH_CENT
FSR_TH_PRESS B11 B11 B10 B10 FSR_TH_PRESS
FSR_TH_MID B12 B12 B9 B9 FSR_TH_MID
FSR_ALARM B13 B13 B8 B8 FSR_ALARM
TPC_BK B14 B14 B7 B7 TPC_BK
DRUM_BK_MOT_REM B15 B15 B6 B6 DRUM_BK_MOT_REM
DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK B16 B16 B5 B5 DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK
DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY B17 B17 B4 B4 DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY
GND B18 B18 B3 B3 GND
+24V3IL_F2_FET2 B19 B19 B2 B2 +24V3IL_IL_F2_FET2
FSR_OFFSET_CNT B20 B20 B1 B1 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
Engine PWB (1/7) YC42 YC28

DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM 1 1 18 18 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM
Feed drive PWB (1/3) DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
2
3
2
3
17
16
17
16
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY 4 4 15 15 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE 5 5 14 14 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE
VIB_MOT_REM 6 6 13 13 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DLP_FAN_REM 7 7 12 12 I2C_SCL
DLP_FAN_REM_HALF 8 8 11 11 I2C_SDA
TPC_M 9 9 10 10 TPC_M
TPC_C 10 10 9 9 TPC_C
TPC_Y 11 11 8 8 TPC_Y
DLP_COL_MOT_REM 12 12 7 7 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
DLP_COL_MOT_CLK 13 13 6 6 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
DLP_COL_MOT_DIR 14 14 5 5 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR
DLP_COL_MOT_RDY 15 15 4 4 DLP_COL_MOT_RDY
DRUM_COL_MOT_REM 16 16 3 3 DRUM_COL_MOT_REM
DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK 17 17 2 2 DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK
DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY 18 18 1 1 DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 2 2 EX_SENS
NC 9 9 3 3 +5V2
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 1 2 1 2 6 6 3.3V2
2 Relay 1 2 Relay 1
NC 5 5 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
ALM 1 3 12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
Toner absorption fan motor GND 2
3
Relay 2 13
14
13
14
GND
TN_FAN_REM
24V 1
2 2
Vibration motor K 1 1
2 2
Vibration motor M 1 1 Feed image PWB (1/6)
2 2
Vibration motor C 1 1
2 2
Vibration motor Y 1 1
Main drive
9-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection

(2-1)Low-end model
Engine PWB (2/7)
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K YC16
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K DP PWB 16 1 B16 B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
GND 3 3 3 3 GND YC16 15 2 B15 B15 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K +24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
DATAN1_K 5 5 5 5 DATAN1_K +24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND +24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY Relay
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
BD 12 12 12 12 BD DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK 5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P2 14 14 14 14 P2 DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
P0 15 15 15 15 P0 DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DATAP2_M 18 18 18 18 DATAP2_M DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
DATAN2_M 19 19 19 19 DATAN2_M DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
GND 20 20 20 20 GND DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
DATAP1_M 21 21 21 21 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 22 22 22 22 DATAN1_M DP
GND 23 23 23 23 GND
SD_CLK 24 24 24 24 SD_CLK
P4_Col 25 25 25 25 P4_Col
CSI_C 26 26 26 26 CSI_C
CSY_Y 27 27 27 27 CSY_Y YC4 YC1
A16 A16 GND
INT_ST 28 28 28 28 INT_ST +5V4IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V4IL_LSU A15 A15 GND
SET
CSI_M
29
30
29
30
29
30
29
30
SET
CSI_M
BD
NC
3
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
BD
NC
PD PWB 3.3V 3 3 A14 Relay A14 3.3V2
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
DIO 32 32 32 32 DIO
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI 34 34 34 34 DOI
GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
GND 35 35 35 35 GND
SKOI 36 36 36 36 SKOI YC5 Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V4
CSO 38 38 38 38 CSO PGND 2 2 4 4 GND
3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V3_FUSE
GND 39 39 39 39 GND
DATAP2_C 40 40 40 40 DATAP2_C
POL_REM
POL_RDY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
2
START/STOP
LOCKED
Polygon motor Original size timing sensor GND 2 2 A7 A7 GND
Vout 1 1 A6 A6 PLT_OPEN
DATAN2_C 41 41 41 41 DATAN2_C POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
GND 42 42 42 42 GND
DATAP1_C 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_C
B/ 4 4 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
DATAN1_C 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_C YC7
A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
GND 45 45 45 45 GND TH 1 1 2 2 TH
DATAP2_Y 46 46 46 46 DATAP2_Y NC 2 2 LSU thermistor Scanner motor A/ 3 3
DATAN2_Y 47 47 47 47 DATAN2_Y GND 3 3 1 1 GND B 2 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
2
GND 48 48 48 48 GND A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
A 1 1
DATAP1_Y 49 49 49 49 DATAP1_Y A1 A1 GND
DATAN1_Y 50 50 50 50 DATAN1_Y
YC6
CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1
NC 2 2 2 2 LSU cleaning motor
CLN_MOT_B 3 3 1 3
YC1 YC36
+12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
+12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
+12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
+12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
NC 36 36 5 5 NC
LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
GND 34 34 7 7 GND
DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
GND 31 31 10 10 GND
GND 28 28 13 13 GND
GND 25 25 16 16 GND
APC PWB DSI_CIS_CKP
DSI_CIS_CKN
24
23
24
23
17
18
17
18
DSI_CIS_CKP
DSI_CIS_CKN
GND 22 22 19 19 GND
GND 19 19 22 22 GND
LED PWB GND
AFE_RD
16
15
16
15
25
26
25
26
GND
AFE_RD
GND 14 14 27 27 GND
AFE_WD 13 13 28 28 AFE_WD
YC3 GND 12 12 29 29 GND
YC27
AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK
+5V4IL_LSU 1 1 8 8 +5V4IL_LSU YC1 YC3
GND 10 10 31 31 GND
+5V4IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 +5V4IL_LSU 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣃䢳䢳䢳䢳䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣃
GND
GND
3
4
3
4
6
5
6
5
GND
GND
Laser scanner unit(2 beam) 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣅䢴䢴䢴䢴䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣅
AFE_CS
GND
9
8
9
8
32
33
32
33
AFE_CS
GND
AFE_MCLK_P 7 7 34 34 AFE_MCLK_P
CLN_MOT_A 5 5 4 4 CLN_MOT_A LED Front AFE_MCLK_N 6 6 35 35 AFE_MCLK_N
CLN_MOT_B 6 6 3 3 CLN_MOT_B GND 5 5 36 36 GND
+24V4 7 7 2 2 +24V4 NC 4 4 37 37 NC
PGND 8 8 1 1 PGND +5V2 3 3 38 38 +5V2
+5V2 2 2 39 39 +5V2
YC1 YC2 +5V2 1 1 40 40 +5V2
䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣃䢳䢳䢳䢳䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣃
䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣅䢴䢴䢴䢴䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣅
WTNR_MOT_A 9 9 5 1 3 1 LED Rear YC1 YC2

2 2 Waste toner motor +12V
+12V
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
+12V
+12V
WTNR_MOT_B 10 10 4 2 1 3
NC 3 3 3 3 NC
LED_PWM 4 4 4 4 LED_PWM
Relay
4 4 TH LED_ENA 5 5 5 5 LED_ENABLE
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3 3 3 OUT GND 6 6 6 6 GND
GND 12 12 2 4 2 2 GND Weight sensor GND 7 7 7 7 GND
+5V2 13 13 1 5 1 1 5V
CCD PWB
YC9
AC DETECTOR 14 14 4 AC DETECTOR
GND 15 15 3 3 GND
CAS_HEATER 16 16 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM Low power voltage PWB (1/2)
SLEEP 17 17 1 1 SLEEP Image scanner unit
9-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)High-end Model
Engine PWB (2/7)
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K DP PWB 16 1 B16
YC16
B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
GND 3 3 3 3 GND YC6
15 2 B15 B15 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
+24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
DATAN1_K 5 5 5 5 DATAN1_K
+24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
+24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH
GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
GND 8 8 8 8 GND
GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK
GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8
Relay 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM
DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
BD 12 12 12 12 BD
DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK
5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P2 14 14 14 14 P2
DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
P0 15 15 15 15 P0
DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K
DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND
DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
DATAN4_K 19 19 19 19 DATAN4_K
DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
GND 20 20 20 20 GND
DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
DATAN3_K
GND
22
23
22
23
22
23
22
23
DATAN3_K
GND
DP
SD_CLK 24 24 24 24 SD_CLK
P4_M 25 25 25 25 P4_M
CSI_M 26 26 26 26 CSI_M
NC 27 27 27 27 NC YC4 YC1
INT_ST_KM 28 28 28 28 INT_ST_KM +5V4IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V4IL_LSU A16 A16 GND
SET_KM 29 29 29 29 SET_KM BD 3 3 2 2 BD PD PWB A15
Relay
A15 GND
NC 30 30 30 30 NC NC 2 2 3 3 NC 3.3V 3 3 A14 A14 3.3V2
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
DIO_KM 32 32 32 32 DIO_KM
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI_KM 34 34 34 34 DOI_KM
GND 35 35 35 35 GND GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
SKOI_KM 36 36 36 36 SKOI_KM YC5 Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V4
CS0_KM 38 38 38 38 CS0_KM
GND 39 39 39 39 GND
PGND
POL_REM
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
3
PGND
START/STOP
Polygon motor 3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V3_FUSE
DATAP2_M
DATAN2_M
40
41
40
41
40
41
40
41
DATAP2_M
DATAN2_M
POL_RDY 4 4 2 2 LOCKED Original size timing sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A7
A6
A7
A6
GND
PLT_OPEN
POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
GND 42 42 42 42 GND
DATAP1_M 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_M B/ 1 6 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
GND 45 45 45 45 GND 5 A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
B 3 4 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
DATAP4_M
DATAN4_M
46
47
46
47
46
47
46
47
DATAP4_M
DATAN4_M TH
YC7
1 1 2 2 TH
Scanner motor A 4 3 A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
2 A1 A1 GND
GND
DATAP3_M
48
49
48
49
48
49
48
49
GND
DATAP3_M
NC 2 2 LSU thermistor A/ 6 1
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DATAN3_M 50 50 50 50 DATAN3_M
YC6
YC10 YC2 CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1
GND
DATAP4_C
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
GND
DATAP4_C
NC
CLN_MOT_B
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
3
LSU cleaning motor
DATAN4_C 3 3 3 3 DATAN4_C
GND 4 4 4 4 GND YC1 YC36
DATAP3_C 5 5 5 5 DATAP3_C +12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
DATAN3_C 6 6 6 6 DATAN3_C +12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
GND 7 7 7 7 GND +12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
DATAP2_C 8 8 8 8 DATAP2_C +12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
DATAN2_C 9 9 9 9 DATAN2_C NC 36 36 5 5 NC
GND 10 10 10 10 GND LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
DATAP1_C 11 11 11 11 DATAP1_C GND 34 34 7 7 GND
DATAN1_C 12 12 12 12 DATAN1_C DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
GND 13 13 13 13 GND DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
INT_ST_YC 14 14 14 14 INT_ST_YC GND 31 31 10 10 GND
SET_YC 15 15 15 15 SET_YC DSI_CIS_4P 30 30 11 11 DSI_CIS_4P
CSI_C 16 16 16 16 CSI_C DSI_CIS_4N 29 29 12 12 DSI_CIS_4N
GND 17 17 17 17 GND GND 28 28 13 13 GND
DIO_YC 18 18 18 18 DIO_YC DSI_CIS_3P 27 27 14 14 DSI_CIS_3P
DOI_YC 20 20 20 20 DOI_YC GND 25 25 16 16 GND
GND 21 21 21 21 GND DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP
SKOI_YC 22 22 22 22 SKOI_YC DSI_CIS_CKN 23 23 18 18 DSI_CIS_CKN
GND 23 23 23 23 GND GND 22 22 19 19 GND
CSO_YC 24 24 24 24 CSO_YC DSI_CIS_2P 21 21 20 20 DSI_CIS_2P
DATAP4_Y 26 26 26 26 DATAP4_Y GND 19 19 22 22 GND
DATAN4_Y 27 27 27 27 DATAN4_Y DSI_CIS_1P 18 18 23 23 DSI_CIS_1P
DATAP3_Y 29 29 29 29 DATAP3_Y GND 16 16 25 25 GND
DATAN3_Y 30 30 30 30 DATAN3_Y AFE_RD 15 15 26 26 AFE_RD
GND 31 31 31 31 GND
DATAP2_Y 32 32 32 32 DATAP2_Y LED PWB GND
AFE_WD
14
13
14
13
27
28
27
28
GND
AFE_WD
DATAN2_Y 33 33 33 33 DATAN2_Y GND 12 12 29 29 GND
GND 34 34 34 34 GND AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK
DATAP1_Y 35 35 35 35 DATAP1_Y YC1 YC3
GND 10 10 31 31 GND
DATAN1_Y 36 36 36 36 DATAN1_Y 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣃䢳䢳䢳䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣃 AFE_CS 9 9 32 32 AFE_CS
GND 37 37 37 37 GND 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣅䢴䢴䢴䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣅 GND 8 8 33 33 GND
CSI_Y
P4_YC
38
39
38
39
38
39
38
39
CSI_Y
P4_YC
APC PWB LED Front
AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
7
6
7
6
34
35
34
35
AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
BD 40 40 40 40 BD GND 5 5 36 36 GND
NC 4 4 37 37 NC
+5V2 3 3 38 38 +5V2
YC27 YC3
+5V2 2 2 39 39 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 1 1 8 8 +5V4IL_LSU YC1 YC2 +5V2 1 1 40 40 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 +5V4IL_LSU 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣃䢳䢳䢳䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣃
GND 3 3 6 6 GND 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣅䢴䢴䢴䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣅
GND 4 4 5 5 GND YC1 YC2
CLN_MOT_A 5 5 4 4 CLN_MOT_A LED Rear +12V 1 1 1 1 +12V
CLN_MOT_B
+24V4
6
7
6
7
3
2
3
2
CLN_MOT_B
+24V4 Laser scanner unit (4 beam) +12V
NC
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
+12V
NC
PGND 8 8 1 1 PGND LED_PWM 4 4 4 4 LED_PWM
LED_ENA 5 5 5 5 LED_ENABLE
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
GND 7 7 7 7 GND
WTNR_MOT_A 9 9 5 1 3 1
2 2 Waste toner motor
WTNR_MOT_B 10 10 4 2 1 3
CCD PWB
Relay
4 4 TH
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3 3 3 OUT
Weight sensor
GND
+5V2
12
13
12
13
2
1
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
5V Image scanner unit
YC9
AC DETECTOR 14 14 4 AC DETECTOR
GND 15 15 3 3 GND
CAS_HEATER 16 16 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM Low power voltage PWB (1/2)
SLEEP 17 17 1 1 SLEEP
9-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Feed image PWB (Front side)

(3-1)Low-end model
TH 2 2 1
YC2
1 BELT_TH
Transfer PWB Transfer connect PWB
Belt thermistor GND 1 1 2 2 GND YC1 YC2 YC3 YC32
+24V2_F1 10 1 +24V2_F1 +24V2_F1 10 10 A1 A1 +24V2_F1
NC 9 2 NC NC 9 9 A2 A2 NC
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 3 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 A3 A3 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
3.3V2 7 4 +3.3V2 3.3V2 7 7 A4 A4 +3.3V2
YC3 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 6 A5 A5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
Vm(24V) 1 1 1 1 +24V2_F1 BELT_TH 5 Relay 6 BELT_TH BELT_TH 5 5 A6 A6 BELT_TH
P_GND 2 2 2 2 GND BLT_SCL 4 7 BLT_SCL BLT_SCL 4 4 A7 A7 BLT_SCL
BRAKE 3 3 3 3 TBLT_CLMOT_BRAKE GND 3 8 GND GND 3 3 A8 A8 GND
Belt cleaning motor PWM
CW/CCW
4
5
4
5
4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
9
10
GND
BLT_SDA
GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
2
1
A9
A10
A9 GND
A10 BLT_SDA
3.3V2 6 6 5 5 3.3V2
CHB 7 7
CHA 8 8 6 6 CHA
7 7 GND
- 1 2 1 8 A11 A11 +24V2_F1

Container solenoid K + 2 Relay 1 2 7 A12 A12 COTN_SOL_BK
- 1 2 3 6 A13 A13 +24V2_F1

Container solenoid M + 2 Relay 1 4 5 A14 A14 COTN_SOL_M
Relay
- 1 2 5 4 A15 A15 +24V2_F1
Container solenoid C + 2
Relay 1 6 3 A16 A16 COTN_SOL_C
- 1 2 7 2 A17 A17 +24V2_F1

Container solenoid Y + 2 Relay 1 8 1 A18 A18 COTN_SOL_Y
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F1_FET1 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F2_EFT1
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
Fuser high voltage PWB (1/2) B5 B5 CW/CCW
B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
B7 B7 GND
B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
Exit unit
A/ 1 4 1 12 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
A 2 3 2 11 B10 B10 IHMOT_2A
Rear exit motor B/ 3 2 3 10 B11 IHMOT_1A
B 4 1 4 9 B11 B12 IHMOT_1B
B12
3.3V 3 3 B13 B13 3.3V2_LED

JS sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
B14
B15
B14 GND
B15 JS_SENS
2 2 B16 B16 GND

Front cover switch 1 1 B17 B17 FRONT_CO_OPEN
B18 B18 N.C.
YC17
A/ 1 4 5 8 A1 A1 EXMOT_1B
A 2 3 6 7 A2 A2 EXMOT_1A
Exit reversing motor B/ 3 2 7 6 A3 A3 EXMOT_2B
B 4 1 8 5 A4 A4 EXMOT_2A
Feed image PWB (2/6)
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Lower exit full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
3
2
A6
A7
A6
A7
GND
EXMAIN_FULL
12 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Upper exit full sensor GND 2 2 2 11 A9 A9 GND
Vout 1 1 3 10 A10 A10 EXINNER_FULL
COM 1 3 4 9 A11 A11 +24V2

YC33
Lower exit solenoid ACT
KEEP
2
3
Relay 2
1
5
6
8
7
A12
A13
A12
A13
EXSOL1
EXSOL1_KEEP TBELT_FAN 1 1
GND 2 2
COM 1 3 7 6 A14 A14 +24V2 TBELT_FAN_LOCK 3 3
Upper exit solenoid ACT 2 Relay 2 8 5 A15 A15 EXSOL2
KEEP 3 1 9 4 A16 A16 EXSOL2_KEEP
3.3V 3 3 10 3 A17 A17 +3.3V2_LED 3 1 ALM

Exit reversing sensor GND 2 2 11 2 A18 A18 GND IH_PWB_FAN_REM
+24V2_F1
4
5
4
5
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
24V
IH PWB fan motor
Vout 1 1 12 1 A19 A19 EX_FEED_SENS
A20 A20 N.C.
IHCOIL_FAN1 6 6 3 1 24V
Relay GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F
7
8
7
8
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Exit/IH front fan motor
Drum/Developer relay PWB (1/2) YC1 B1 B1 VIB_MOT_REM
DLP_FAN_HARF 19 19 B2 B2 DLP_FAN_HARF
IHCOIL_FAN1 9 9
DLP_FAN_REM 18 18 B3 B3 DLP_FAN_REM
GND 10 10
5V0_FUSE 17 17 B4 B4 5V0_FUSE
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C 11 11
DRM_HEAT_REM 16 16 B5 B5 DRM_HEAT_REM
ERASER_COL 15 15 B6 B6 ERASER_COL
ERASER_BK 14 14 B7 B7 ERASER_BK
+24V2_F1 13 13 B8 B8 +24V2_F1
IHCOIL_FAN1 12 12 3 1 24V
GND 12 12 B9 B9 GND
TPC_Y 11 11 B10 B10 TPC_Y
GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R
13

2553ci Service Manual Rev-4

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2553ci Service Manual Rev-4

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

&6 2553ci/3253ci

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT.

Notation of products in the manual

TASKalfa 4053ci 40/ 40 sheets/min x x x x

TASKalfa 3553ci 30/ 30 sheets/min - x - -

TASKalfa 3253ci Low-end 32/ 32 sheets/min x x x x

1-6Page Correction: Resolution

1-10Page Correction: (5-7), (5-8)

1-27Page Correction: large capacity feeder> side feeder

2-55Page Correction: (1-16) Booklet unit (BF-9100) add parts

4-158Page Add: Notes when attaching

4-293Page Correction: step 6 to 11 of procedures

6-20Page Add: (11) Toner Log

6-22Page Correction: Detail of service status page (3)

6-27Page Add: (47) Life counter

6-213Page Add: U246 Purpose

6-215Page Correction: Data variation

7-119Page to Correction: (3) Jam Codes

8-147Page Add: YC22 to YC26

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

4-82Page Add: 1. Check and adjust the LSU unit.

4-275Page Add: Notes when attaching

6-20Page Correction: Detail

6-21Page Correction: (h) Replacement for maintenance Item

6-43Page Correction: Full (BOX Priority), Full (HyPAS Priority) Contents

3 2019/8/20 7-464Page Addition: F60X

7-301Page Correction: Model name in Measures

3-67Page Correction: Part number

3-86Page Correction: Part number

6-205Page Correction: Support model

6-205Page Correction: Support model

6-167Page Correction: On to Off

3-20Page Correction: Contents (5, 9, 16, 17, 18, 19)

3-143Page Correction: Illustration no.

4-297Page Correction: No. of screws, name of PWB

3-81Page Correction: Part name and content (7, 21)

3-81Page Correction: Part name (33)

3-83Page Correction: Part name (33)

8-27Page Correction: Content

6-205Page Correction: Content (Eject Guide(REM), (RET)

4-223Page Addition: Note when replacing PWB (Each PWB (DP/DF/BF/PF)

3-76Page Correction: Part number and discription

7-450Page Addition: F053

7-378Page Correction: C7490

4 2019/9/20 6-10Page Addition: Unit History Report

6-184Page Addition: U203 Method: Result

3-24Page Correction: Part number indication (47: Exit reversing sensor)

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock. Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

2. Precautions for Maintenance

• Always use parts having the correct specifications.

• Remove toner completely from electronic components.

1 Specification .................................................................................................. 1-1

(28) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit".............................................................................................................. 1-28

2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 2-1

(1-15)100 sheet staple finisher (DF-7130) ............................................................................................. 2-53

3 Machine Design ............................................................................................. 3-1

(4) Sensors and Switches ............................................................................................................................ 3-24

(16-5)Motors .......................................................................................................................................... 3-84

(7) Document processor (DP-7130) ........................................................................................................... 3-154

4 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 4-1

(7-1)Detaching and attaching filters. ...................................................................................................... 4-37

(6-1)Attach MP paper width sensor ..................................................................................................... 4-218